Automation Software

Sysmac Studio
Version 1

Operation Manual

SYSMAC-SE2£££

W504-E1-39
NOTE
1. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON.

2. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein.
Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the infor-
mation contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.

3. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON as-
sumes no responsibility for errors or omissions.
Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.

Trademarks
• Sysmac and SYSMAC are trademarks or registered trademarks of OMRON Corporation in Japan
and other countries for OMRON factory automation products.
• Microsoft, Windows, Excel, and Visual Basic are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Mi-
crosoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
• EtherCAT® is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation
GmbH, Germany.
• ODVA, CIP, CompoNet, DeviceNet, and EtherNet/IP are trademarks of ODVA.

• The SD and SDHC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.

• NVIDIA, the NVIDIA logo, GeForce, and the GeForce logo are the trademarks or registered trade-
marks of NVIDIA Corporation in the USA and other countries.
• ATI™ and Radeon™ are the trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
• Celeron, Intel and Intel Core are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and / or other countries.
• Git and the Git logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Software Freedom Conserv-
ancy, Inc., corporate home of the Git Project, in the United States and/or other countries.

Other company names and product names in this document are the trademarks or registered trade-
marks of their respective companies.

Copyrights
Microsoft product screen shots used with permission from Microsoft.
 Introduction

Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Sysmac Studio Automation Software.
The Sysmac Studio allows you to use a computer to program and set up Sysmac devices.
This manual describes the operating procedures of the Sysmac Studio mainly for NJ/NX/NY-series
Controllers.
Use this manual together with the user's manuals for the other devices that you use.

Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical
systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of installing and maintaining FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
For programming, this manual is intended for personnel who understand the programming language
specifications in international standard IEC 61131-3 or Japanese standard JIS B 3503.

Notice
This manual contains information that is necessary to use the Sysmac Studio. Please read and under-
stand this manual before using the Sysmac Studio. Keep this manual in a safe place where it will be
available for reference during operation.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 1

Manual Structure

Manual Structure

Page Structure
The following page structure is used in this manual.

4 Installation and Wiring Level 1 heading

Level 2 heading
Level 2 heading 4-3 Mounting Units Level 3 heading
Gives the current
Level 3 heading 4-3-1 Connecting Controller Components headings.
The Units that make up an NJ-series Controller can be connected simply by pressing the Units together
and locking the sliders by moving them toward the back of the Units. The End Cover is connected in the
same way to the Unit on the far right side of the Controller.

A step in a procedure 1 Join the Units so that the connectors fit exactly.

Hook Hook holes

Indicates a procedure. Connector

4-3 Mo u n t i n g U n i t s
4 Page tab
2 Gives the number

4-3-1 Connecting Controller Components

The yellow sliders at the top and bottom of each Unit lock the Units together. Move the sliders
toward the back of the Units as shown below until they click into place. of the main section.
Move the sliders toward the back
until they lock into place.

Lock

Release

Slider

Precautions for Correct Use

Special information The sliders on the tops and bottoms of the Power Supply Unit, CPU Unit, I/O Units, Special I/O
Units, and CPU Bus Units must be completely locked (until they click into place) after connecting
Icons indicate the adjacent Unit connectors.
precautions, additional
information, or reference
information.

Manual name NJ-series CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual (W500) 4-9

This illustration is provided only as a sample. It may not literally appear in this manual.

Special Information
Special information in this manual is classified as follows:

Precautions for Safe Use

Precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure safe usage of the product.

Precautions for Correct Use

Precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure proper operation and performance.

2 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Manual Structure

Additional Information
Additional information to read as required.
This information is provided to increase understanding or make operation easier.

Version Information
Information on differences in specifications and functionality for Controllers and Units with different unit
versions and for different versions of Support Software is given.

Precaution on Terminology
• For descriptions of the CPU Unit and Controller terms that are used in this manual, refer to informa-
tion on terminology in the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or the
NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558).
• In this manual, download refers to transferring data from the Sysmac Studio to the physical Control-
ler and upload refers to transferring data from the physical Controller to the Sysmac Studio.
For the Sysmac Studio, synchronization is used to both upload and download data. Here,
synchronize means to automatically compare the data for the Sysmac Studio on the computer with
the data in the physical Controller and transfer the data in the direction that is specified by the user.
• In this manual, the functions of a specific model of the NX-series CPU Units/Controllers may be de-
scribed with its model specified, such as “NX701 CPU Unit/Controller” or “NX1P2 CPU Unit/Control-
ler”.
• In this manual, the Controller functions that are integrated in the NY-series Industrial PC may be re-
ferred to as an NY-series Controller.
• The Sysmac Studio supports the NJ/NX/NY-series Controllers. Unless another Controller series is
specified, the operating procedures and screen captures used in the manual are examples for the
NJ-series Controllers.

Terminology
For descriptions of the Controller terms that are used in this manual, refer to information on terminolo-
gy in the manuals that are listed in Related Manuals on page 29.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3

Manual Structure

4 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Sections in this Manual

Sections in this Manual

1 10

2 11
Support Software Provided
1 Introduction 10 with the Sysmac Studio
3 A
Installation and
2 Uninstallation 11 Troubleshooting
4 I

3 System Design A Appendices

5

4 Programming I Index 6

7
5 Controller Configurations and Setup

8
6 Online Connections to a Controller

9
7 Debugging

8 Other Functions

9 Reusing Programming

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5

CONTENTS

CONTENTS
Introduction .............................................................................................................. 1
Intended Audience...........................................................................................................................................1
Notice...............................................................................................................................................................1

Manual Structure...................................................................................................... 2
Page Structure.................................................................................................................................................2
Special Information ..........................................................................................................................................2
Precaution on Terminology ..............................................................................................................................3
Terminology .....................................................................................................................................................3

Sections in this Manual ........................................................................................... 5

Terms and Conditions Agreement........................................................................ 15

Safety Precautions................................................................................................. 17
Definition of Precautionary Information..........................................................................................................17
Symbols .........................................................................................................................................................17

Precautions for Safe Use ...................................................................................... 20

Precautions for Correct Use ................................................................................. 23

Regulations and Standards .................................................................................. 24

Software Licenses and Copyrights ................................................................................................................24
IEC 61131-3 Compliance Statement..............................................................................................................24

Versions .................................................................................................................. 25
Checking Versions .........................................................................................................................................25
Unit Versions and Sysmac Studio Versions...................................................................................................28

Related Manuals..................................................................................................... 29

Revision History..................................................................................................... 38

Section 1 Introduction
1-1 The Sysmac Studio................................................................................................................1-2
1-2 Features ..................................................................................................................................1-3
1-3 Specifications.........................................................................................................................1-4
1-3-1 Product Model Numbers .............................................................................................................1-4
1-3-2 Support Software That You Can Install from the Sysmac Studio DVD and Enclosed Data ........1-5
1-3-3 Supported Languages .................................................................................................................1-5
1-3-4 Applicable Models .......................................................................................................................1-6
1-3-5 Types of Licenses .......................................................................................................................1-7
1-3-6 Applicable Computers .................................................................................................................1-8
1-4 Components .........................................................................................................................1-10

Section 2 Installation and Uninstallation

2-1 Installing the Sysmac Studio ................................................................................................2-2
2-1-1 Confirmations before Installation.................................................................................................2-2

6 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 CONTENTS

2-1-2 Requirements for Installation ......................................................................................................2-2

2-1-3 Installing the Sysmac Studio .......................................................................................................2-3
2-2 Uninstalling the Sysmac Studio .........................................................................................2-12
2-2-1 Uninstalling the Sysmac Studio.................................................................................................2-12
2-3 Auto-updating the Sysmac Studio .....................................................................................2-16
2-3-1 Confirmations before Implementing Auto-updating ...................................................................2-16
2-3-2 Implementing an Auto-update ...................................................................................................2-16

Section 3 System Design

3-1 Basic Flow of System Design 1 ............................................................................................3-3
3-2 Basic Flow of System Design 2 ............................................................................................3-6
3-3 Creating a Project ..................................................................................................................3-9
3-3-1 Starting and Exiting the Sysmac Studio ......................................................................................3-9
3-3-2 Creating a Project File............................................................................................................... 3-11
3-3-3 Closing a Project File and Returning to the Start Page.............................................................3-16
3-3-4 Saving the Project File ..............................................................................................................3-16
3-3-5 Saving a Project File Under a Different Name ..........................................................................3-17
3-3-6 Opening a Project File...............................................................................................................3-18
3-3-7 Exporting a Project File .............................................................................................................3-20
3-3-8 Importing a Project File .............................................................................................................3-21
3-3-9 Password Protection for Project Files .......................................................................................3-23
3-3-10 Project Update History Management ........................................................................................3-26
3-3-11 Creating a Project from an Online Connection..........................................................................3-28
3-3-12 Displaying and Registering Licenses ........................................................................................3-29
3-3-13 Project Version Control .............................................................................................................3-30
3-4 Parts of the Window ............................................................................................................3-31
3-4-1 Application Window ...................................................................................................................3-31
3-4-2 Multiview Explorer (1)................................................................................................................3-32
3-4-3 Edit Pane (3) .............................................................................................................................3-35
3-4-4 Toolbox (4) ................................................................................................................................3-40
3-4-5 Changing the Display Location of Window Parts ......................................................................3-43
3-4-6 Saving and Restoring the Window Layout ................................................................................3-47
3-5 Menu Command Structure ..................................................................................................3-51
3-6 Basic Editing Operations ....................................................................................................3-57
3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations...........................................................................3-60
3-7-1 Setting Parameters ...................................................................................................................3-60
3-7-2 Programming.............................................................................................................................3-66
3-7-3 Library Functions.......................................................................................................................3-69
3-7-4 Project Management .................................................................................................................3-70
3-7-5 Debugging .................................................................................................................................3-71
3-7-6 Simulation .................................................................................................................................3-73
3-7-7 Monitoring Information ..............................................................................................................3-74
3-7-8 Communications .......................................................................................................................3-74
3-7-9 Maintenance..............................................................................................................................3-75
3-7-10 Security Measures ....................................................................................................................3-76
3-7-11 Customizing Function................................................................................................................3-77
3-7-12 Window Operation.....................................................................................................................3-77
3-7-13 Online Help ...............................................................................................................................3-77
3-7-14 OPC UA Functions ....................................................................................................................3-78
3-7-15 Function Specifications of DB Connection Function .................................................................3-79
3-7-16 CNC Functions ..........................................................................................................................3-79
3-7-17 EtherNet/IP Connection Settings ..............................................................................................3-80
3-7-18 EtherNet/IP Slave Terminal Settings .........................................................................................3-80
3-7-19 PROFINET Slave Terminal Settings .........................................................................................3-81
3-7-20 Function Specifications of Safety Control Units ........................................................................3-82
3-7-21 Function Specifications of NA-series Programmable Terminals ...............................................3-87
3-7-22 Vision Sensor Functions............................................................................................................3-93
3-7-23 Displacement Sensor Functions ...............................................................................................3-98

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7

CONTENTS

3-7-24 Team Development Option........................................................................................................3-99

3-7-25 3D Simulation Function ...........................................................................................................3-100
3-7-26 Robot Function ........................................................................................................................3-101
3-7-27 Application Manager Function.................................................................................................3-103

Section 4 Programming
4-1 Variable Registration .............................................................................................................4-3
4-1-1 Creating Global Variables............................................................................................................4-4
4-1-2 Creating Device Variables ......................................................................................................... 4-11
4-1-3 Creating Local Variables ...........................................................................................................4-22
4-1-4 Creating Axis Variables .............................................................................................................4-27
4-1-5 Creating Axes Group Variables .................................................................................................4-30
4-1-6 Creating Cam Data Variables....................................................................................................4-32
4-1-7 Creating Function Block Instance Variables..............................................................................4-35
4-1-8 System-defined Variables..........................................................................................................4-36
4-1-9 Entering Variable Attributes.......................................................................................................4-36
4-1-10 Variable Manager ......................................................................................................................4-48
4-2 Registering POUs ................................................................................................................4-57
4-2-1 Displaying POUs .......................................................................................................................4-57
4-2-2 Registering Programs ...............................................................................................................4-57
4-2-3 Registering Function Blocks......................................................................................................4-60
4-2-4 Registering Functions ...............................................................................................................4-62
4-2-5 Copying, Pasting, and Deleting Multiple POUs .........................................................................4-64
4-3 Creating Data Types ............................................................................................................4-69
4-4 Namespaces .........................................................................................................................4-79
4-4-1 Data for Which You Can Use Namespaces ..............................................................................4-79
4-4-2 Setting Namespaces .................................................................................................................4-79
4-4-3 Using Namespaces ...................................................................................................................4-82
4-5 Programming........................................................................................................................4-85
4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams ................................................................................................4-85
4-5-2 Programming Structured Text .................................................................................................4-140
4-5-3 Comparison before Pasting Dependents ................................................................................4-152
4-6 Searching and Replacing ..................................................................................................4-155
4-6-1 Scope of Searching and Replacing .........................................................................................4-155
4-6-2 Search and Replace Pane ......................................................................................................4-155
4-6-3 Items to Set .............................................................................................................................4-156
4-6-4 Searching ................................................................................................................................4-159
4-6-5 Replacing ................................................................................................................................4-160
4-6-6 Searching All ...........................................................................................................................4-161
4-6-7 Replacing All ...........................................................................................................................4-161
4-6-8 Replacing All N.O. and N.C. Inputs .........................................................................................4-161
4-7 Program Checks ................................................................................................................4-162
4-7-1 Check All Programs ................................................................................................................4-162
4-7-2 Check Selected Programs ......................................................................................................4-162
4-8 Building and Rebuilding....................................................................................................4-165
4-9 Offline Comparison............................................................................................................4-167
4-9-1 Procedure for Offline Comparison...........................................................................................4-167
4-9-2 Merging Detailed Comparison Results....................................................................................4-172

Section 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-1 Overview of Controller Configurations and Setup .............................................................5-3
5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup......................................................................................5-4
5-2-1 Procedure to Open the EtherCAT Tab Page ...............................................................................5-4
5-2-2 Registering Slaves Offline to Configure EtherCAT......................................................................5-4

8 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 CONTENTS

5-2-3 Registering Slaves Online to Configure EtherCAT......................................................................5-6

5-2-4 Setting Master Parameters .........................................................................................................5-8
5-2-5 Setting Slave Parameters ...........................................................................................................5-9
5-2-6 Exporting Slave Settings ...........................................................................................................5-15
5-2-7 Installing and Uninstalling ESI Files ..........................................................................................5-17
5-2-8 Transferring the Network Configuration Information .................................................................5-18
5-2-9 Exporting EtherCAT Network Configuration Information ...........................................................5-19
5-2-10 Printing an EtherCAT Configuration ..........................................................................................5-23
5-2-11 Starting Vision Sensor or Displacement Sensor Setup .............................................................5-23
5-3 EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration and Setup .........................................................5-25
5-3-1 Creating the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration ...............................................................5-26
5-3-2 Transferring the Slave Terminal Configuration Information .......................................................5-34
5-3-3 Exporting the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration Information...........................................5-35
5-4 Setting EtherCAT Drives .....................................................................................................5-37
5-4-1 Applicable EtherCAT Drives ......................................................................................................5-37
5-4-2 Overview of the Structure of the EtherCAT Drive Tab Page......................................................5-37
5-4-3 Setting EtherCAT Drives ...........................................................................................................5-38
5-4-4 Monitoring EtherCAT Drives......................................................................................................5-43
5-5 CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration and Setup................................................................5-44
5-5-1 CPU/Expansion Racks for the NX102 CPU Unit or NX1P2 CPU Unit ......................................5-44
5-5-2 CPU Rack and Expansion Racks for NJ-series CPU Units ......................................................5-53
5-6 Controller Setup...................................................................................................................5-63
5-6-1 Operation Settings ....................................................................................................................5-63
5-6-2 Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings ..............................................................................................5-69
5-6-3 Built-in I/O Settings ...................................................................................................................5-75
5-6-4 Option Board Settings ...............................................................................................................5-76
5-6-5 Memory Settings .......................................................................................................................5-77
5-7 Motion Control Setup ..........................................................................................................5-78
5-7-1 Setting Axes ..............................................................................................................................5-78
5-7-2 Setting Axes Groups .................................................................................................................5-86
5-8 Cam Data Settings ...............................................................................................................5-89
5-8-1 Registering Cam Data Settings .................................................................................................5-89
5-8-2 Editing Cam Data Settings ........................................................................................................5-89
5-8-3 Procedure to Transfer Cam Data Settings ................................................................................5-95
5-8-4 Importing Cam Data Settings ....................................................................................................5-95
5-8-5 Exporting Cam Data Settings ....................................................................................................5-96
5-8-6 Exporting Cam Tables ...............................................................................................................5-97
5-8-7 Transferring Cam Tables from the Controller to Files................................................................5-98
5-8-8 Transferring Cam Tables from Files to the Controller................................................................5-99
5-8-9 Superimposing Cam Tables ....................................................................................................5-100
5-8-10 Registering Cam Definitions....................................................................................................5-101
5-8-11 Transferring Cam Definitions...................................................................................................5-105
5-8-12 Updating Cam Definition Settings ...........................................................................................5-107
5-9 Task Settings......................................................................................................................5-109
5-9-1 Registering Tasks ....................................................................................................................5-109
5-9-2 Procedure to Set Tasks ...........................................................................................................5-109
5-9-3 Task I/O Settings ..................................................................................................................... 5-110
5-9-4 Program Assignments ............................................................................................................. 5-111
5-9-5 Settings for Exclusive Control of Variables in Tasks................................................................ 5-112

Section 6 Online Connections to a Controller

6-1 Overview .................................................................................................................................6-2
6-2 Going Online with a Controller .............................................................................................6-3
6-2-1 Overview .....................................................................................................................................6-3
6-2-2 Setting the Connection Method ...................................................................................................6-4
6-2-3 Going Online ...............................................................................................................................6-5
6-2-4 Going Online after Checking the Connection Method .................................................................6-6
6-2-5 Going Offline ...............................................................................................................................6-6

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 9

CONTENTS

6-2-6 Confirming Serial IDs ..................................................................................................................6-6

6-2-7 Checking for Forced Refreshing .................................................................................................6-7
6-2-8 Going Online without a Project....................................................................................................6-8

Section 7 Debugging
7-1 Debugging Operations on the Simulator and Controller ...................................................7-2
7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging .................................................7-4
7-2-1 Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................7-4
7-2-2 Differential Monitor ....................................................................................................................7-21
7-2-3 Changing Present Values and Set/Reset Using Forced Refreshing .........................................7-24
7-2-4 Cross References .....................................................................................................................7-36
7-2-5 Online Editing ............................................................................................................................7-40
7-2-6 Changing the Operating Mode ..................................................................................................7-45
7-2-7 Monitoring Controller Status......................................................................................................7-45
7-2-8 Task Execution Status Monitor ..................................................................................................7-49
7-2-9 Task Execution Time Monitor ....................................................................................................7-49
7-2-10 Axis Status Monitor (MC Monitor Table)....................................................................................7-50
7-2-11 Data Tracing..............................................................................................................................7-52
7-3 Offline Debugging................................................................................................................7-80
7-3-1 Debugging with Program Simulation .........................................................................................7-80
7-3-2 Offline Debugging of Sequence and Motion Control Programs ..............................................7-100
7-3-3 Offline Debugging for Sequence Control and Vision Sensor ..................................................7-103
7-3-4 Offline Debugging for Sequence Control and Displacement Sensor ......................................7-107
7-3-5 Offline Debugging with Sequence Control and NA-series PT Simulator (Simultaneous
Simulation of Controller with NA-series PT) ............................................................................7-109
7-3-6 Integrated NS-series PT Simulation for Offline Debugging of Sequence Control and
NS-series PTs ......................................................................................................................... 7-112
7-3-7 3D Simulation .......................................................................................................................... 7-114
7-4 Preparations for Online Debugging ................................................................................. 7-115
7-4-1 Assigning Variables and Real I/O............................................................................................ 7-115
7-4-2 Assigning Axis Variables and I/O Devices............................................................................... 7-117
7-5 Performing Online Debugging.......................................................................................... 7-119
7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the Controller ...............................................................7-120
7-5-2 Testing Axis Operation (MC Test Run) ....................................................................................7-142
7-5-3 Checking I/O Wiring ................................................................................................................7-146
7-5-4 Checking I/O Assignments ......................................................................................................7-147
7-5-5 Resetting the Controller ..........................................................................................................7-148
7-5-6 Restarting Units.......................................................................................................................7-149

Section 8 Other Functions

8-1 SD Memory Card Operations ................................................................................................8-3
8-1-1 SD Memory Card Window Procedures .......................................................................................8-3
8-2 Clock Information Settings ...................................................................................................8-7
8-3 Security Settings....................................................................................................................8-8
8-3-1 Operation Authority Verification...................................................................................................8-8
8-3-2 Authentication of User Program Execution IDs .........................................................................8-15
8-3-3 Write Protection of the CPU Unit...............................................................................................8-17
8-3-4 Data Protection .........................................................................................................................8-19
8-4 User Memory Usage Monitor ..............................................................................................8-23
8-5 Printing .................................................................................................................................8-25
8-5-1 Items You Can Print ..................................................................................................................8-25
8-5-2 Print Setup ................................................................................................................................8-25
8-5-3 Printing ......................................................................................................................................8-28
8-5-4 Print Preview .............................................................................................................................8-29

10 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 CONTENTS

8-6 Clearing Memory..................................................................................................................8-31

8-6-1 Clearing All Memory of the CPU Unit ........................................................................................8-31
8-6-2 Clearing All Memory of NX Units...............................................................................................8-33
8-6-3 Clear All Memory Operation for the Units in a Slave Terminal ..................................................8-33
8-7 Releasing Access Rights ....................................................................................................8-35
8-8 Displaying Unit Production Information ............................................................................8-36
8-8-1 Displaying CPU Unit Production Information ............................................................................8-36
8-8-2 Displaying EtherCAT Slave Production Information ..................................................................8-38
8-8-3 Displaying Production Information for Configuration Units in EtherCAT Slave Terminals .........8-38
8-9 Backup Functions................................................................................................................8-40
8-9-1 Controller Backup Functions .....................................................................................................8-41
8-9-2 SD Memory Card Backup Functions .........................................................................................8-45
8-9-3 Backing Up Variables and Memory ...........................................................................................8-46
8-9-4 Importing/Exporting Backup Files .............................................................................................8-54
8-10 Transferring All Controller Data .........................................................................................8-58
8-10-1 Transferring Data from the Computer to a Controller................................................................8-58
8-10-2 Transferring Data from the Controller to the Computer.............................................................8-58
8-11 NX Unit Maintenance ...........................................................................................................8-60
8-12 EtherCAT Maintenance........................................................................................................8-61
8-12-1 Disconnecting a Slave from and Reconnecting a Slave to the Network ...................................8-61
8-12-2 Packet Monitoring .....................................................................................................................8-63
8-12-3 Diagnostic and Statistical Information .......................................................................................8-64
8-12-4 Maintenance Operations for EtherCAT Slave Terminals ...........................................................8-69
8-13 Grouping for POUs and Global Variables..........................................................................8-71
8-13-1 Displaying the Programming Group Tab Page ..........................................................................8-71
8-13-2 Grouping POUs .........................................................................................................................8-72
8-13-3 Grouping Global Variables ........................................................................................................8-75
8-14 Project Shortcut View..........................................................................................................8-79
8-14-1 Displaying the Project Shortcut View ........................................................................................8-79
8-14-2 Adding User Folders .................................................................................................................8-80
8-14-3 Renaming User Folders ............................................................................................................8-81
8-14-4 Copying and Pasting User Folders ...........................................................................................8-81
8-14-5 Cutting User Folders .................................................................................................................8-82
8-14-6 Deleting User Folders ...............................................................................................................8-82
8-14-7 Editing Comments on User Folders ..........................................................................................8-83
8-14-8 Adding Shortcuts .......................................................................................................................8-83
8-14-9 Editing Items from Shortcuts .....................................................................................................8-85
8-14-10 Copying and Pasting Shortcuts .................................................................................................8-86
8-14-11 Cutting Shortcuts.......................................................................................................................8-87
8-14-12 Deleting Shortcuts .....................................................................................................................8-87
8-14-13 Editing Comments on Shortcuts................................................................................................8-88
8-14-14 Jumping from a Shortcut to the Multiview Explorer ...................................................................8-88
8-15 Troubleshooting...................................................................................................................8-90
8-15-1 Troubleshooting Dialog Box....................................................................................................8-90
8-15-2 Controller Errors ........................................................................................................................8-91
8-15-3 Controller Event Log .................................................................................................................8-95
8-15-4 User-defined Errors ...................................................................................................................8-99
8-15-5 User-defined Event Log ..........................................................................................................8-100
8-15-6 Event Setting Table .................................................................................................................8-101
8-15-7 Displaying and Editing the Event Setting Table.......................................................................8-103
8-15-8 Event Log Viewer ....................................................................................................................8-106
8-16 Changing Variable Comments and Data Type Comments .............................................8-109
8-16-1 Exporting Comments...............................................................................................................8-109
8-16-2 Editing the Comment File ........................................................................................................8-109
8-16-3 Importing Comment Files ........................................................................................................ 8-110
8-16-4 Switching the Displayed Comments........................................................................................ 8-111
8-17 Exporting Global Variables ............................................................................................... 8-112
8-17-1 Exporting Global Variables for the Network Configurator........................................................ 8-112
8-17-2 Exporting Global Variables for the CX-Designer ..................................................................... 8-112

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 11

CONTENTS

8-18 Importing ST Programs ..................................................................................................... 8-113

8-19 Importing IEC 61131-10 XML Files.................................................................................... 8-115
8-19-1 Importing Data......................................................................................................................... 8-115
8-19-2 Compare before Importing ...................................................................................................... 8-116
8-20 Importing Motor Sizing Tool Results ............................................................................... 8-119
8-21 Updating the Configurations and Setup Transfer Data ..................................................8-121
8-22 EtherNet/IP Connection Settings......................................................................................8-122
8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings .......................................................................................8-123

Section 9 Reusing Programming

9-1 Overview .................................................................................................................................9-2
9-2 Example of Reusing Device and Program Assets ..............................................................9-4
9-2-1 Changing I/O Assignments .........................................................................................................9-4
9-2-2 Deleting Device Options..............................................................................................................9-5
9-2-3 Adding Device Options................................................................................................................9-6
9-3 Creating and Using Libraries................................................................................................9-8
9-3-1 Creating a Library........................................................................................................................9-8
9-3-2 Using a Library .......................................................................................................................... 9-11
9-4 Program Sharing in Derived Devices.................................................................................9-16
9-4-1 Overview of Sharing Programs in Derived Devices ..................................................................9-16
9-4-2 Procedure to Share a Program .................................................................................................9-17
9-4-3 Editing Shared Data ..................................................................................................................9-20
9-4-4 Changing a Sharing Relationship..............................................................................................9-22

Section 10 Support Software Provided with the Sysmac Studio

10-1 Support Software Provided with the Sysmac Studio .......................................................10-2
10-2 Starting and Exiting the Support Software........................................................................10-4
10-2-1 Starting the Support Software Provided with Sysmac Studio ...................................................10-4
10-2-2 Exiting the Support Software Provided with Sysmac Studio .....................................................10-4

Section 11 Troubleshooting
11-1 Error Messages for Ladder Program Checks.................................................................... 11-2
11-2 Error Messages for Structured Text Checks ..................................................................... 11-7
11-3 Error Messages for Variable Check.................................................................................. 11-10
11-4 Error Messages for Sysmac Studio Operation ............................................................... 11-11

Appendices
A-1 Driver Installation for Direct USB Cable Connection ........................................................ A-3
A-1-1 Installing the USB Driver ............................................................................................................ A-3
A-1-2 Installing a Specified USB Driver ............................................................................................... A-3
A-1-3 Confirmation Procedure after Installation ................................................................................... A-5
A-2 Specifying One of Multiple Ethernet Interface Cards ........................................................ A-7
A-3 Differences between the Simulator and the Physical Controller ..................................... A-9
A-3-1 Operation of Functions ............................................................................................................... A-9
A-3-2 Task Execution ......................................................................................................................... A-12
A-3-3 Task Execution Times .............................................................................................................. A-15

12 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 CONTENTS

A-3-4 Floating-point Data Expressions .............................................................................................. A-16

A-4 Online Help .......................................................................................................................... A-17
A-4-1 Sysmac Studio Help Contents ................................................................................................. A-17
A-4-2 Instruction Reference ............................................................................................................... A-17
A-4-3 Keyboard Mapping Reference ................................................................................................. A-18
A-4-4 System Defined Variable Reference ........................................................................................ A-18
A-5 Shortcut Keys...................................................................................................................... A-19
A-5-1 Basic Operations ...................................................................................................................... A-19
A-5-2 Editing Programs...................................................................................................................... A-20
A-5-3 Searching and Replacing ......................................................................................................... A-21
A-5-4 Online ....................................................................................................................................... A-21
A-5-5 Simulation ................................................................................................................................ A-22
A-5-6 SD Memory Card ..................................................................................................................... A-22
A-5-7 Changing Shortcut Keys .......................................................................................................... A-23
A-6 Simulation Instructions ...................................................................................................... A-32
A-6-1 Simulate Positive Limit Input Signal Instruction ....................................................................... A-32
A-6-2 Simulate Negative Limit Input Signal Instruction ...................................................................... A-33
A-6-3 Simulate Home Proximity Signal Instruction ............................................................................ A-36
A-6-4 Simulate Immediate Stop Input Signal Instruction ................................................................... A-37
A-6-5 Simulate External Latch Input Signal Instruction...................................................................... A-38
A-6-6 Simulate Drive Alarm Instruction .............................................................................................. A-40
A-6-7 Simulate Drive Warning Instruction .......................................................................................... A-41
A-6-8 Encoder Velocity Input Instruction ............................................................................................ A-42
A-6-9 Write Actual Position Instruction............................................................................................... A-44
A-6-10 Write Actual Velocity Instruction ............................................................................................... A-46
A-6-11 Write Actual Torque Instruction ................................................................................................ A-48
A-6-12 Detailed Information on Error Codes........................................................................................ A-50
A-7 Directly Connecting to an EtherCAT Slave Terminal ....................................................... A-53
A-7-1 Procedure for Directly Connecting to an EtherCAT Slave Terminal ......................................... A-53
A-7-2 Transferring Settings for an EtherCAT Slave Terminal............................................................. A-54
A-7-3 Comparing the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration Information ....................................... A-55
A-7-4 USB Connection Prohibition Setting for EtherCAT Slave Terminals ........................................ A-55
A-7-5 I/O Wiring Checks for EtherCAT Slave Terminals .................................................................... A-56
A-7-6 Differences in Operation from an Online Connection to an NJ/NX/NY-series Controller ......... A-57
A-8 MDP Settings for EtherCAT Network Slaves .................................................................... A-58
A-8-1 Installing ESI Files for MDP Slaves.......................................................................................... A-58
A-8-2 Adding MDP Slaves ................................................................................................................. A-58
A-8-3 Editing Module Configurations ................................................................................................. A-58
A-8-4 Building Module Configurations Online .................................................................................... A-59
A-8-5 Setting MDP Slaves and Transferring/Comparing Module Configurations .............................. A-59
A-8-6 Displaying Production Information ........................................................................................... A-59
A-9 Changing the Sysmac Studio Display Language ............................................................ A-61
A-9-1 Changing the Display Language .............................................................................................. A-61
A-10 Changing models among NJ-, NX-, and NY-series Controllers ...................................... A-62
A-10-1 Changing between NJ-series and NX701 Controllers.............................................................. A-62
A-10-2 Changing between NJ-series and NY-series Controllers ......................................................... A-64
A-10-3 Changing between NY-series and NX701 Controllers ............................................................. A-66
A-10-4 Changing between NX1P2 and NJ-series Controllers ............................................................. A-67
A-10-5 Changing between NX1P2 and NX701 Controllers ................................................................. A-69
A-10-6 Changing between NX1P2 and NY-series Controllers ............................................................. A-71
A-10-7 Changing between NX102 and NJ-series Controllers.............................................................. A-72
A-10-8 Changing between NX102 and NX701 Controllers .................................................................. A-74
A-10-9 Changing between NX102 and NY-series Controllers ............................................................. A-75
A-10-10 Changing between NX102 and NX1P2 Controllers ................................................................. A-77
A-11 Report Tools ........................................................................................................................ A-79
A-11-1 Sysmac Controller Log Upload Tool ......................................................................................... A-79
A-11-2 Sysmac Studio Error Report Generating Tool .......................................................................... A-80
A-11-3 Sysmac Coupler Log Upload Tool ............................................................................................ A-82
A-12 Downloading Manuals ........................................................................................................ A-84
A-12-1 Displaying the Manual Download Site...................................................................................... A-84

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 13

CONTENTS

Index

14 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Terms and Conditions Agreement

Terms and Conditions Agreement

WARRANTY
• The warranty period for the Software is one year from the date of purchase, unless otherwise specif-
ically agreed.
• If the User discovers defect of the Software (substantial non-conformity with the manual), and return
it to OMRON within the above warranty period, OMRON will replace the Software without charge by
offering media or download from OMRON’s website. And if the User discovers defect of media
which is attributable to OMRON and return it to OMRON within the above warranty period, OMRON
will replace defective media without charge. If OMRON is unable to replace defective media or cor-
rect the Software, the liability of OMRON and the User’s remedy shall be limited to the refund of the
license fee paid to OMRON for the Software.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
• THE ABOVE WARRANTY SHALL CONSTITUTE THE USER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REM-
EDIES AGAINST OMRON AND THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IM-
PLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT, OMRON WILL BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROF-
ITS OR OTHER INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE.
• OMRON SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR DEFECT OF THE SOFTWARE BASED ON MODIFICA-
TION OR ALTERNATION TO THE SOFTWARE BY THE USER OR ANY THIRD PARTY. OMRON
SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE AND/OR LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS, DAMAGE, OR EXPENSES DI-
RECTLY OR INDIRECTLY RESULTING FROM THE INFECTION OF OMRON PRODUCTS, ANY
SOFTWARE INSTALLED THEREON OR ANY COMPUTER EQUIPMENT, COMPUTER PRO-
GRAMS, NETWORKS, DATABASES OR OTHER PROPRIETARY MATERIAL CONNECTED
THERETO BY DISTRIBUTED DENIAL OF SERVICE ATTACK, COMPUTER VIRUSES, OTHER
TECHNOLOGICALLY HARMFUL MATERIAL AND/OR UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS.
• OMRON SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR SOFTWARE DEVELOPED BY THE USER OR ANY
THIRD PARTY BASED ON THE SOFTWARE OR ANY CONSEQUENCE THEREOF.

APPLICABLE CONDITIONS
USER SHALL NOT USE THE SOFTWARE FOR THE PURPOSE THAT IS NOT PROVIDED IN THE
ATTACHED USER MANUAL.

CHANGE IN SPECIFICATION
The software specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and
other reasons.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 15

Terms and Conditions Agreement

ERRORS AND OMISSIONS

The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.

16 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions
Definition of Precautionary Information
The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of
the Sysmac Studio and an NJ/NX/NY-series Machine Automation Controller.
The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety. Always read and heed the
information provided in all safety precautions.
The following notation is used.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Additionally, there may be severe property
damage.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if

Caution not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury, or property damage.

Precautions for Safe Use

Indicates precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure safe usage of the product.

Precautions for Correct Use

Indicates precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure proper operation and performance.

Symbols
The circle and slash symbol indicates operations that you must not do.
The specific operation is shown in the circle and explained in text.
This example indicates prohibiting disassembly.
The triangle symbol indicates precautions (including warnings).
The specific operation is shown in the triangle and explained in text.
This example indicates a precaution for electric shock.
The triangle symbol indicates precautions (including warnings).
The specific operation is shown in the triangle and explained in text.
This example indicates a general precaution.
The filled circle symbol indicates operations that you must do.
The specific operation is shown in the circle and explained in text.
This example shows a general precaution for something that you must do.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 17

Safety Precautions

WARNING
Check the user program for proper execution before you use it for actual operation.

Check the parameters for proper execution before you use them for actual operation.

Always confirm safety at the destination node before you transfer a user program,
configuration data, setup data, device variables, or values in memory used for CJ-ser-
ies Units from the Sysmac Studio.
The devices or machines may perform unexpected operation regardless of the operat-
ing mode of the CPU Unit.
Execute online editing only after you confirm that no adverse effects will be caused to
the operation of the master and slave axes if the synchronized control processing time
is extended.

Before you perform online editing for a function or a function block, check the locations
where the function or function block is used in the Cross Reference Tab Page and con-
firm the range that will be affected.

Sufficiently confirm safety before you change the values of I/O ports or variables on the
I/O Map when the Sysmac Studio is online with the CPU Unit. Incorrect operation may
cause the devices that are connected to Output Units to operate regardless of the op-
erating mode of the Controller.
If you set inappropriate parameters when you change the levels of NX Unit events, un-
expected machine operation may result. Confirm that the machine will not be adversely
affected before you transfer the data.

If you use EtherCAT slaves, check the specifications of those slaves in manuals or oth-
er documentation and confirm that the system will not be adversely affected before you
transfer parameters.

When you search and replace a string in a project that includes more than one device,
make sure that the string to replace is in the data of the intended device before you
replace it. If you replace data of an unintended device, the controlled system may
cause an unexpected operation.

18 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Safety Precautions

Caution
Although the Simulator simulates the operation of the Controller, there are difference
from the Controller in operation and timing.
After you debug the user program on the Simulator, always check operation on the
physical Controller before you use the user program to operate the controlled system.
Accidents may occur if the controlled system performs unexpected operation.
The Simulator instructions are not processed on the physical Controller and all outputs
from the instructions will be FALSE. After you debug the user program on the Simula-
tor, always check operation on the physical Controller before you use the user program
to operate the controlled system.
Accidents may occur if the controlled system performs unexpected operation.
Simultaneous simulation for offline debugging of sequences and the HMI can be per-
formed to simulate the linked operation of the Controller and HMI. However, there are
differences in the operation and timing between this simulation and the actual combi-
nation of the HMI and Controller. After you debug operation with the simulation, always
check operation on the physical Controller and HMI before you use them in the actual
system.
Accidents may occur if the controlled system performs unexpected operation.
Sufficiently confirm safety before you change the values of variables online. Incorrect
operation may cause the devices that are connected to Output Units to operate regard-
less of the operating mode of the Controller.

Always confirm safety before you reset the Controller or any components.

Always confirm the safety at the destination node before you transfer a user program
to a node or perform an operation that changes device variables.
Not doing so may result in injury.

Sufficiently confirm safety before you change the values of variables on a Watch Tab
Page when the Sysmac Studio is online with the CPU Unit. Incorrect operation may
cause the devices that are connected to Output Units to operate regardless of the op-
erating mode of the Controller.
Sufficiently confirm safety at the connected slave or Unit before you change the value
of an I/O port or device variable.
Not doing so may result in injury.

Always confirm safety at the destination node before you transfer parameters or data
from the Sysmac Studio to another node.
Not doing so may result in injury.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 19

Precautions for Safe Use

Precautions for Safe Use

Operation
• Confirm that the controlled system will not be adversely affected before you perform any of the fol-
lowing operations.
a) Changing the operating mode of the CPU Unit (including changing the Startup Mode).
b) Changing the user program or settings.
c) Changing set values or present values.
d) Performing forced refreshing.
• Before you restart operation, make sure that the required data, including device variables, the user
program, and parameters, is transferred to a CPU Unit, Special I/O Unit, CPU Bus Unit, or externally
connected device that was replaced.
• Before you restart the EtherNet/IP Unit, make sure that doing so will not adversely affect the control-
led system.
• When you restore only part of the data that was backed up, confirm that no problems will occur if
you do not restore all of the backup data. Otherwise, malfunction of the device may occur.
• If you transfer only selected programs from the programs that did not match for the synchronization
function, there is no way to check on the Sysmac Studio the integrity with the programs that you do
not transfer. After you transfer the programs, confirm safety before you change the CPU Unit to
RUN mode.

EtherCAT Communications
• If verifying revisions is not selected in the Revision Check Method parameter in the master settings
in EtherCAT configuration, parameters are also transferred to slaves with different revisions. If an
incompatible revision of a slave is connected, incorrect parameters may be set and operation may
not be correct. If you disable the revision check, make sure that only compatible slaves are connect-
ed before transferring the parameters.
• Unexpected operation may result if you transfer inappropriate network configuration settings. Even if
appropriate network configuration settings are set, confirm that the controlled system will not be ad-
versely affected before you transfer the data.
• After you transfer the user program, the CPU Unit is restarted and communications with the Ether-
CAT slaves are cut off. During that period, the slave outputs behave according to the slave specifi-
cations. The time that communications are cut off depends on the EtherCAT network configuration.
Before you transfer the user program, confirm that the system will not be adversely affected.
• NX bus communications are not always established immediately after the power supply is turned
ON. Use the system-defined variables and the EtherCAT Coupler Unit device variables in the user
program to confirm that communications are established before attempting control operations.

Slave Terminals
• If any inappropriate parameters are set when you transfer the following settings, unexpected ma-
chine operation may result. Confirm that the machine will not be adversely affected before you

20 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Precautions for Safe Use

transfer the data. Also, confirm that the Unit configuration, I/O allocations, and Unit operation set-
tings are correctly set in the Slave Terminal before you start actual operation.
a) Communications Coupler Unit and NX Unit settings
b) Node address and Unit number settings for the Communications Coupler Unit and NX Units
c) I/O allocation settings for the Communications Coupler Unit and NX Units
• If inappropriate Unit configuration information is transferred to the Slave Terminal, unexpected ma-
chine operation may result. Even if appropriate Unit configuration information is set, confirm that the
controlled system will not be adversely affected before you transfer the data.
• If you execute communications instructions for NX Units with inappropriate path information, unex-
pected machine operation may result. Confirm that the path information is correct before you start
actual operation.
• After you import Communications Coupler Unit and NX Unit settings, confirm that the Unit configura-
tion, I/O allocations, and Unit operation settings are correctly set in the Slave Terminal before you
start actual operation.
• If inappropriate backup data is set when you restore backup data to a Unit, unexpected machine op-
eration may result. Confirm that the system will not be adversely affected before you transfer the
data.
• Do not disconnect the cable when you change the values of I/O ports or variables from the I/O Map
with a direct connection to the EtherCAT Coupler Unit. To connect directly to a different Coupler
Unit, go offline, connect the cable to the other Unit, and go online again.

MC Test Run
• Confirm the axis number carefully before you perform an MC Test Run.
• An MC Test Run operation involves motor operation. Refer to the operation manual before you exe-
cute an MC Test Run.
Be particularly careful of the following points.
a) Confirm safety around all moving parts.
b) When you click the Run Button, the motor begins actual operation at the specified velocity. Only
begin motor operation if you are absolutely sure there is no danger if you start the motor.
c) Always have an external emergency stop device available.
d) Sometimes you may be unable to stop the motor from your computer. Install an external emer-
gency stop device so that you can stop the motor immediately if needed.
e) Only operate the motor when you can clearly confirm the motor operation so that you can react
quickly in the case of any danger that may arise due to operation of the motor.
f) A communications error will occur if you attempt to begin operations without EtherCAT communi-
cations. Always establish EtherCAT communications first.
• Precautions during MC Test Run Operation
a) During test run execution, only the Sysmac Studio has any control of the operation. Any com-
mands from motion control instructions are ignored.
b) If communications are interrupted between the Sysmac Studio and Controller during test run op-
erations, you will not be able to stop the motor from the computer. Provide an external hardware
means that you can use to stop the motor without fail.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 21

Precautions for Safe Use

Motion Control
• The absolute encoder home offsets are stored in the Controller and backed up by a Battery as abso-
lute encoder information. If any of the following conditions is met, clear the absolute encoder home
offsets from the list of data items to restore, and then restore the data. Then, define home again. If
you do not define home, unintended operation of the controlled system may occur.
a) The Servomotor or Servo Drive was changed since the data was backed up.
b) The absolute encoder was set up after the data was backed up.
c) The absolute data for the absolute encoder was lost.
• If you change the detailed settings of the Axis Basic Settings Tab Page, make sure that the device
or machine performs the expected operation before you start actual operation. If the relationship be-
tween the functions of the Motion Control Function Module and the EtherCAT slave process data
that is assigned to the axes is not correct, the device or machine may perform unexpected opera-
tion.

Unit Replacement
• The performance may be different if the hardware revisions are different. Before you transfer the
user program, data, and parameter settings to the CPU Units with the different hardware revisions,
check them for proper execution and then use them for actual operation.

Model Change
• If the configuration of the EtherCAT network includes an EtherCAT slave that cannot be used by the
Controllers after model change, the configuration and settings of the EtherCAT network will be all
cleared. In that case, create and set an EtherCAT network configuration again.

22 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Precautions for Correct Use

Precautions for Correct Use

• Observe the following precautions when you start the Sysmac Studio or any of the Support Software
that is provided with it.
a) Exit all applications that are not necessary to use the Sysmac Studio. For virus checker or other
software that could affect the startup and operations of the Sysmac Studio, take measures such
as to remove the Sysmac Studio from the scope of virus checking.
b) If any hard disks or printers that are connected to the computer are shared with other computers
on a network, isolate them so that they are no longer shared.
c) With some notebook computers, the default settings assign the USB port to a modem or infrared
communications.
Refer to the user documentation for your computer and set the USB port as a normal serial port.
d) With some notebook computers, the default settings do not supply power to the USB port or
Ethernet port to save energy. There are energy-saving settings in Windows, and also sometimes
in utilities or the BIOS of the computer. Refer to the user documentation for your computer and
disable all energy-saving features.
• No checks are made to verify the logical consistency between data items in the Special Unit Setup.
Therefore, always check the logical consistency between all settings before transferring the Special
Unit Setup to the NJ-series Controller and starting operation, especially when you perform tasks
such as enabling or disabling a setting from another setting. Depending on the settings, logical in-
consistencies could result in unintended operation.
For example, assume that setting item 1 specifies either standard settings or custom settings and
that the custom settings start from setting item 2. Here, even if you set the custom settings from item
2 onward, the setting of setting item 1 will not be automatically changed to specify using the custom
settings. In this case, if you do not also change the setting of setting item 1 to specify using the
custom settings, the settings from items 2 onward will be ignored.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 23

Regulations and Standards

Regulations and Standards

Software Licenses and Copyrights
• This product incorporates certain third party software. The license and copyright information associ-
ated with this software is available at http://www.fa.omron.co.jp/nj_info_e/.
• This software uses knowledge media technology that was developed by the Meme Media Laborato-
ry (VBL) of Hokkaido University.

IEC 61131-3 Compliance Statement

This product conforms to the IEC 61131-3 standards.
Refer to the IEC 61131-3 compliance statement (http://www.fa.omron.co.jp/nj_info_e/) for information
on items that are in compliance with these standards.

24 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Versions

Versions
Hardware revisions and unit versions are used to manage the hardware and software in NJ/NX-series
Units, NY-series Industrial PCs, and EtherCAT slaves. The hardware revision or unit version is updat-
ed each time there is a change in hardware or software specifications. Even when two Units or Ether-
CAT slaves have the same model number, they will have functional or performance differences if they
have different hardware revisions or unit versions.
This section describes NJ/NX-series CPU Units, NY-series Industrial PCs, and EtherCAT slaves as ex-
amples.

Checking Versions
You can check versions on the ID information indications or with the Sysmac Studio.

Checking Unit Versions on ID Information Indications

The unit version is given on the ID information indication on the side of the product.
The ID information on an NX-series NX701-££££ CPU Unit is shown below.

ID information indication
Lot number Serial number Unit version

LOT No. DDMYY£ xxxx Ver.1.££

PORT1 : ££££££££££££ HW Rev. £
PORT2 : ££££££££££££

MAC address Hardware revision

Note The hardware revision is not displayed for the Unit that the hardware revision is in blank.

The ID information on an NX-series NX1P2-£££££££ CPU Unit is shown below.

MAC address

PORT1 : ££££££££££££
PORT2 : ££££££££££££
Hardware
Unit version Ver.1.££ HW Rev. £ revision
LOT No. DDMYY£ xxxx
ID information indication

Lot number Serial number

Note The hardware revision is not displayed for the Unit that the hardware revision is in blank.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 25

Versions

The ID information on an NJ-series NJ501-££££ CPU Unit is shown below.

ID information indication
Unit model Unit version Hardware revision

NJ501 - ££££ Ver.1.££ HW Rev. £

PORT1 MAC ADDRESS: ££££££££££££
PORT2 MAC ADDRESS: ££££££££££££
Lot No. DDMYY£ xxxx

Lot number Serial number MAC address

Note The hardware revision is not displayed for the Unit that the hardware revision is in blank.

The unit version of the NY-series Industrial PC is given on the ID information indication on the back of
the product.
The ID information on an NY-series NY5£2-££££ Controller is shown below.
ID information indication

Unit version

Ver.1.££

Checking Unit Versions with the Sysmac Studio

You can use the Production Information Dialog Box while the Sysmac Studio is online to check the
unit version of a Unit.
You can check the unit version of the following Units and Controllers.
• NJ/NX-series CPU Units or NY-series Controllers
• CJ-series Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units
• EtherCAT slaves
The unit versions of CJ-series Basic I/O Units cannot be checked from the Sysmac Studio.
Refer to the 8-8 Displaying Unit Production Information on page 8-36 for details on the Unit production
information displays.

 NX-series CPU Units and NY-series Controllers

1 Right-click CPU Rack under Configurations and Setup − CPU/Expansion Racks in the Mul-
tiview Explorer and select Display Production Information.
The Production Information Dialog Box is displayed.
The unit version is displayed after Ver. to the right of the Unit model number or Controller mod-
el number.

26 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Versions

 NJ-series CPU Units and CJ-series Units

1 Double-click CPU/Expansion Racks under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Ex-
plorer. Or, right-click CPU/Expansion Racks under Configurations and Setup and select
Edit from the menu.
The Unit Editor is displayed.

2 Right-click any open space in the Unit Editor and select Production Information.
The Production Information Dialog Box is displayed.
The unit version is displayed after Ver. to the right of the Unit model number.

 EtherCAT Slaves

1 Double-click EtherCAT under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-
click EtherCAT under Configurations and Setup and select Edit from the menu.
The EtherCAT Tab Page is displayed.

2 Right-click the master on the EtherCAT Tab Page and select Display Production Information.
The Production Information Dialog Box is displayed.
The unit version is displayed after Rev. to the right of the Unit model number.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 27

Versions

Additional Information

• Refer to the manual for the specific Unit for the unit versions of the CPU Units to which the
database connection service and other functions were added, as well as for the unit versions
of the Communications Coupler Units, NX Units, and Safety Control Units.
• This manual sometimes refers to the unit version of the CPU Unit as the unit version of the
Controller.

Unit Versions and Sysmac Studio Versions

The functions that are supported by a Unit depend on its unit version. The version of Sysmac Studio
that supports the functions that were added for an upgrade is required to use those functions.
Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) and NY-series Industrial
Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558) for the relationship between
the unit versions of the NJ/NX-series CPU Units and the NY-series Industrial PCs and the Sysmac
Studio versions, and for the functions that are supported by each unit version.
Refer to the relevant manuals for the Communications Coupler Unit and NX Units for differences in the
functional support provided by each unit version.

28 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Related Manuals

Related Manuals
The following manuals are related. Use these manuals for reference.

Manual name Cat. No. Model numbers Application Description

Sysmac Studio Version 1 W504 SYSMAC Learning about the Describes the operating proce-
Operation Manual -SE2£££ operating proce- dures of the Sysmac Studio.
dures and functions
of the Sysmac Stu-
dio.
Sysmac Studio I589 SYSMAC-SE2££ Learning about the Describes the Servo Drive related
Drive Functions Operation £ Servo Drive related operating procedures and func-
Manual SYSMAC-DE££ functions of the tions among those of the Sysmac
£L Sysmac Studio. Studio.
Sysmac Studio W589 SYSMAC-SE2££ Learning about the Provides an introduction to the
Project Version Control £ Sysmac Studio Sysmac Studio project version
Function Operation Man- SYSMAC-TA4££ project version con- control function along with its in-
ual £ trol function and its stallation method, basic opera-
operating proce- tions, execution method for the
dures. main functions, and other informa-
tion.
Sysmac Studio W618 SYSMAC-SE2££ Learning about an Describes an outline, execution
3D Simulation Function £ outline of the 3D procedures, and operating proce-
Operation Manual SYSMAC-SA4££ simulation function dures for the 3D simulation func-
£-64 of the Sysmac Stu- tion of the Sysmac Studio.
dio and how to use
the function.
Sysmac Studio W595 SYSMAC-SE2££ Learning about the Describes the operating proce-
Robot Integrated System £ operating proce- dures of the Sysmac Studio for
Building Function with Ro- SYSMAC- dures and functions Robot Integrated CPU Unit.
bot Integrated CPU Unit SE200D-64 of the Sysmac Stu-
Operation Manual dio to configure Ro-
bot Integrated Sys-
tem using Robot In-
tegrated CPU Unit.
Sysmac Studio W621 SYSMAC-SE2££ Learning about the Describes the operating proce-
Robot Integrated System £ operating proce- dures of the Sysmac Studio for
Building Function with IPC SYSMAC- dures and functions IPC Application Controller.
Application Controller Op- SE200D-64 of the Sysmac Stu-
eration Manual dio to configure Ro-
bot Integrated Sys-
tem using IPC Ap-
plication Controller.
CX-Integrator W464 --- Learning how to Describes operating procedures
CS/CJ/CP/NSJ/NJ-series configure networks for the CX-Integrator.
Network Configuration Tool (data links, routing
Operation Manual tables, Communi-
cations Unit set-
tings, etc.).
CX-Designer V099 --- Learning to create Describes operating procedures
User’s Manual screen data for NS- for the CX-Designer.
series Programma-
ble Terminals.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 29

Related Manuals

Manual name Cat. No. Model numbers Application Description

CX-Protocol W344 --- Creating data Describes operating procedures
Operation Manual transfer protocols for the CX-Protocol.
for general-purpose
devices connected
to CJ-series Serial
Communications
Units.
NX-series CPU Unit W535 NX701-££££ Learning the basic An introduction to the entire
Hardware User's Manual specifications of NX701 system is provided along
the NX701 CPU with the following information on
Units, including in- the CPU Unit.
troductory informa- • Features and system configura-
tion, designing, in- tion
stallation, and • Introduction
maintenance. • Part names and functions
Mainly hardware in- • General specifications
formation is provid- • Installation and wiring
ed. • Maintenance and inspection
NX-series W593 NX102-££££ Learning the basic An introduction to the entire
NX102 CPU Unit specifications of NX102 system is provided along
Hardware the NX102 CPU with the following information on
User’s Manual Units, including in- the CPU Unit.
troductory informa- • Features and system configura-
tion, designing, in- tion
stallation, and • Introduction
maintenance. • Part names and functions
Mainly hardware in- • General specifications
formation is provid- • Installation and wiring
ed. • Maintenance and inspection
NX-series W578 NX1P2-££££ Learning the basic An introduction to the entire
NX1P2 CPU Unit specifications of NX1P2 system is provided along
Hardware the NX1P2 CPU with the following information on
User’s Manual Units, including in- the CPU Unit.
troductory informa- • Features and system configura-
tion, designing, in- tion
stallation, and • Introduction
maintenance. • Part names and functions
Mainly hardware in- • General specifications
formation is provid- • Installation and wiring
ed. • Maintenance and inspection
NJ-series CPU Unit W500 NJ501-££££ Learning the basic An introduction to the entire NJ-
Hardware User's Manual NJ301-££££ specifications of series system is provided along
NJ101-££££ the NJ-series CPU with the following information on
Units, including in- the CPU Unit.
troductory informa- • Features and system configura-
tion, designing, in- tion
stallation, and • Introduction
maintenance. • Part names and functions
Mainly hardware in- • General specifications
formation is provid- • Installation and wiring
ed. • Maintenance and inspection

30 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Related Manuals

Manual name Cat. No. Model numbers Application Description

NJ/NX-series CPU Unit W501 NX701-££££ Learning how to The following information is pro-
Software User’s Manual NX102-££££ program and set up vided on a Controller built with an
NX1P2-££££ an NJ/NX-series NJ/NX-series CPU Unit.
NJ501-££££ CPU Unit. • CPU Unit operation
NJ301-££££ Mainly software in- • CPU Unit features
NJ101-££££ formation is provid- • Initial settings
ed. • Programming based on IEC
61131-3 language specifica-
tions
NX-series NX1P2 CPU W579 NX1P2-££££ Learning about the Of the functions for an NX1P2
Unit details of functions CPU Unit, the following informa-
Built-in I/O and Option only for an NX-ser- tion is provided.
Board ies NX1P2 CPU • Built-in I/O
User’s Manual Unit and an intro- • Serial Communications Option
duction of functions Boards
for an NJ/NX-series • Analog I/O Option Boards
CPU Unit. An introduction of following func-
tions for an NJ/NX-series CPU
Unit is also provided.
• Motion control functions
• EtherNet/IP communications
functions
• EtherCAT communications
functions
NJ/NX-series Instructions W502 NX701-££££ Learning detailed The instructions in the instruction
Reference Manual NX102-££££ specifications on set (IEC 61131-3 specifications)
NX1P2-££££ the basic instruc- are described.
NJ501-££££ tions of an NJ/NX-
NJ301-££££ series CPU Unit.
NJ101-££££
NJ/NX-series CPU Unit W507 NX701-££££ Learning about mo- The settings and operation of the
Motion Control User’s NX102-££££ tion control settings CPU Unit and programming con-
Manual NX1P2-££££ and programming cepts for motion control are de-
NJ501-££££ concepts. scribed.
NJ301-££££
NJ101-££££
NJ/NX-series W508 NX701-££££ Learning about the The motion control instructions
Motion Control Instructions NX102-££££ specifications of are described.
Reference Manual NX1P2-££££ the motion control
NJ501-££££ instructions.
NJ301-££££
NJ101-££££
NJ/NX-series W505 NX701-££££ Using the built-in Information on the built-in Ether-
CPU Unit NX102-££££ EtherCAT port on CAT port is provided.
Built-in EtherCAT® Port NX1P2-££££ an NJ/NX-series This manual provides an introduc-
User’s Manual NJ501-££££ CPU Unit. tion and provides information on
NJ301-££££ the configuration, features, and
NJ101-££££ setup.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 31

Related Manuals

Manual name Cat. No. Model numbers Application Description

NJ/NX-series W506 NX701-££££ Using the built-in Information on the built-in Ether-
CPU Unit NX102-££££ EtherNet/IP port on Net/IP port is provided.
Built-in EtherNet/IP™ Port NX1P2-££££ an NJ/NX-series Information is provided on the ba-
User’s Manual NJ501-££££ CPU Unit. sic setup, tag data links, and other
NJ301-££££ features.
NJ101-££££
NJ/NX-series W588 NX701-££££ Using the OPC UA. Describes the OPC UA.
CPU Unit NX102-££££
OPC UA NJ501-1£00
User’s Manual
NX-series W596 NX701-££20 Using the FINS Describes the FINS function of an
CPU Unit NX102-££££ function of an NX- NX-series CPU Unit.
FINS Function series CPU Unit.
User’s Manual
NJ/NX-series W527 NX701-££20 Using the database Describes the database connec-
Database Connection CPU NX102-££20 connection service tion service.
Units NJ501-££20 with NJ/NX-series
User’s Manual NJ101-££20 Controllers.
NJ-series W528 NJ501-1340 Using the GEM Provides information on the GEM
SECS/GEM CPU Units Services with NJ- Services.
User’s Manual series Controllers.
NJ-series W539 NJ501-4£££ Controlling robots Describes the functionality to con-
NJ Robotics CPU Unit NJ501-R£££ with NJ-series CPU trol robots.
User’s Manual Units.
NJ/NY-series O030 NJ501-5300 Performing numeri- Describes the functionality to per-
NC Integrated Controller NY532-5400 cal control with form the numerical control.
User’s Manual NJ/NY-series Con-
trollers.
NJ-series O037 NJ501-R£££ Using the NJ-series Describes the settings and opera-
Robot Integrated CPU Unit Robot Integrated tion of the CPU Unit and program-
User’s Manual CPU Unit. ming concepts for OMRON robot
control.
NJ/NX-series W503 NX701-££££ Learning about the Concepts on managing errors that
Troubleshooting Manual NX102-££££ errors that may be may be detected in an NJ/NX-ser-
NX1P2-££££ detected in an ies Controller and information on
NJ501-££££ NJ/NX-series Con- individual errors are described.
NJ301-££££ troller.
NJ101-££££
NY-series W557 NY532-££££ Learning the basic An introduction to the entire NY-
IPC Machine Controller specifications of series system is provided along
Industrial Panel PC the NY-series In- with the following information on
Hardware User’s Manual dustrial Panel PCs, the Industrial Panel PC.
including introduc- • Features and system configura-
tory information, tion
designing, installa- • Introduction
tion, and mainte- • Part names and functions
nance. • General specifications
Mainly hardware in- • Installation and wiring
formation is provid- • Maintenance and inspection
ed.

32 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Related Manuals

Manual name Cat. No. Model numbers Application Description

NY-series W556 NY512-££££ Learning the basic An introduction to the entire NY-
IPC Machine Controller specifications of series system is provided along
Industrial Box PC the NY-series In- with the following information on
Hardware User’s Manual dustrial Box PCs, the Industrial Box PC.
including introduc- • Features and system configura-
tory information, tion
designing, installa- • Introduction
tion, and mainte- • Part names and functions
nance. • General specifications
Mainly hardware in- • Installation and wiring
formation is provid- • Maintenance and inspection
ed.
NY-series W568 NY532-££££ Learning about ini- The following information is pro-
IPC Machine Controller NY512-££££ tial setting of the vided on an introduction to the en-
Industrial Panel PC / In- NY-series Industrial tire NY-series system.
dustrial PCs and prepara- • Two OS systems
Box PC tions to use Con- • Initial settings
Setup User’s Manual trollers. • Industrial PC Support Utility
• NYCompolet
• Industrial PC API
• Backup and recovery
NY-series W558 NY532-££££ Learning how to The following information is pro-
IPC Machine Controller NY512-££££ program and set up vided on the NY-series Controller
Industrial Panel PC / In- the Controller func- functions.
dustrial tions of an NY-ser- • Controller operation
Box PC ies Industrial PC. • Controller features
Software User’s Manual • Controller settings
• Programming based on IEC
61131-3 language specifica-
tions
NY-series W560 NY532-££££ Learning detailed The instructions in the instruction
Instructions Reference NY512-££££ specifications on set (IEC 61131-3 specifications)
Manual the basic instruc- are described.
tions of an NY-ser-
ies Industrial PC.
NY-series W559 NY532-££££ Learning about mo- The settings and operation of the
IPC Machine Controller NY512-££££ tion control settings Controller and programming con-
Industrial Panel PC / In- and programming cepts for motion control are de-
dustrial concepts of an NY- scribed.
Box PC series Industrial
Motion Control User’s PC.
Manual
NY-series W561 NY532-££££ Learning about the The motion control instructions
Motion Control Instructions NY512-££££ specifications of are described.
Reference Manual the motion control
instructions of an
NY-series Industrial
PC.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 33

Related Manuals

Manual name Cat. No. Model numbers Application Description

NY-series W562 NY532-££££ Using the built-in Information on the built-in Ether-
IPC Machine Controller NY512-££££ EtherCAT port in an CAT port is provided.
Industrial Panel PC NY-series Industrial This manual provides an introduc-
/ Industrial PC. tion and provides information on
Box PC the configuration, features, and
Built-in EtherCAT® Port setup.
User’s Manual
NY-series W563 NY532-££££ Using the built-in Information on the built-in Ether-
IPC Machine Controller NY512-££££ EtherNet/IP port in Net/IP port is provided.
Industrial Panel PC an NY-series Indus- Information is provided on the ba-
/ Industrial trial PC. sic setup, tag data links, and other
Box PC features.
Built-in EtherNet/IP™ Port
User’s Manual
NY-series W564 NY532-££££ Learning about the Concepts on managing errors that
Troubleshooting Manual NY512-££££ errors that may be may be detected in an NY-series
detected in an NY- Controller and information on indi-
series Industrial vidual errors are described.
PC.
NX-series W519 NX-ECC£££ Learning how to The following items are described:
EtherCAT® Coupler Unit use an NX-series the overall system and configura-
User’s Manual EtherCAT Coupler tion methods of an EtherCAT
Unit and EtherCAT Slave Terminal (which consists of
Slave Terminals. an NX-series EtherCAT Coupler
Unit and NX Units), and informa-
tion on hardware, setup, and func-
tions to set up, control, and moni-
tor NX Units through EtherCAT.
NX-series W536 NX-EIC£££ Learning how to The following items are described:
EtherNet/IP™ use an NX-series the overall system and configura-
Coupler Unit EtherNet/IP Cou- tion methods of an EtherNet/IP
User’s Manual pler Unit and Ether- Slave Terminal (which consists of
Net/IP Slave Termi- an NX-series EtherNet/IP Coupler
nals. Unit and NX Units), and informa-
tion on hardware, setup, and func-
tions to set up, control, and moni-
tor NX Units.
NX-series W623 NX-PNC202 Learning how to The following items are described:
PROFINET Coupler Unit use an NX-series the overall system and configura-
User's Manual PROFINET Cou- tion methods of an PROFINET
pler Unit and PRO- Slave Terminal (which consists of
FINET Slave Termi- an NX-series PROFINET Coupler
nals. Unit and NX Units), and informa-
tion on hardware, setup, and func-
tions to set up, control, and moni-
tor NX Units.
NX-series W525 NX-££££££ Referencing lists of Lists of the power consumptions,
Data Reference Manual the data that is re- weights, and other NX Unit data
quired to configure that is required to configure sys-
systems with NX- tems with NX-series Units are pro-
series Units. vided.

34 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Related Manuals

Manual name Cat. No. Model numbers Application Description

NX-series W521 NX-ID££££ Learning how to Describe the hardware, setup
NX Units NX-IA££££ use NX Units. methods, and functions of the NX
User’s Manual NX-OC££££ Units.
NX-OD££££ Manuals are available for the fol-
NX-MD££££ lowing Units.
W522 NX-AD££££ Digital I/O Units, Analog I/O Units,
NX-DA££££ System Units, Position Interface
W592 NX-HAD£££ Units, Communications Interface
Units, Load Cell Input Units, and
W566 NX-TS££££
IO-Link Master Units.
NX-HB££££
W523 NX-PD1£££
NX-PF0£££
NX-PC0£££
NX-TBX££
W524 NX-EC0£££
NX-ECS£££
NX-PG0£££
W540 NX-CIF£££
W565 NX-RS££££
W567 NX-ILM£££
Z401 NX-V680C£
H228 NX-TC££££
NX-series Z930 NX-SL££££ Learning how to Describes the hardware, setup
Safety Control Unit NX-SI££££ use NX-series methods, and functions of the NX-
User's Manual NX-SO££££ Safety Control series Safety Control Units.
Units.
NX-series Z395 NX-SL5£££ Learning how to Describes the hardware, setup
Safety Control Unit / Com- NX-SI££££ use the NX-series methods, and functions of the NX-
munication Control Unit NX-SO££££ Safety Control series Safety Control Units and
User’s Manual NX-CSG£££ Units and Commu- Communication Control Units.
nication Control
Units.
NX-series Z396 NX-CSG£££ Learning about the Describes the software setup
Communication Control built-in functions of methods and communicantions
Unit an NX-series Com- functions of an NX-series Commu-
Built-in Function munication Control nication Control Unit.
User’s Manual Unit.
Vision Sensor FQ-M-series Z314 FQ-MS12£ Learning how to Describes the hardware, setup
Specialized Vision Sensor use the Specialized methods and functions of the Spe-
for Positioning Vision Sensors for cialized Vision Sensors for Posi-
User’s Manual Positioning. tioning.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 35

Related Manuals

Manual name Cat. No. Model numbers Application Description

Vision System FH/FHV Z343 FH-1£££ Learning about the Describes the Sysmac Studio set-
Series FH-1£££-££ setting procedures ting procedures for FH-series and
Operation Manual for Sys- FH-2£££ for FH-series and FHV-series Vision Sensors.
mac Studio FH-2£££-££ FHV-series Vision
FH-3£££ Sensors.
FH-3£££-££
FH-5£££
FH-5£££-££
FHV7£-£££££-
C
FHV7£-£££££-
S££
FHV7£-£££££-
S££-££
FHV7£-£££££-
H££
FHV7£-£££££-
H££-££
Displacement Sensor ZW- Z332 ZW-CE1£ Learning how to Describes the hardware, setup
series use the ZW-series methods and functions of the ZW-
Confocal Fiber Type Dis- Displacement Sen- series Displacement Sensors.
placement Sensors sors.
User’s Manual
ZW-7000/5000-series Z362 ZW-7000£ Learning the set- Describes the Sysmac Studio set-
Confocal Fiber Type Dis- ZW-5000£ ting procedures for ting procedures for
placement Sensor ZW-7000/5000-ser- ZW-7000/5000-series Displace-
User’s Manual ies Displacement ment Sensors.
Sensors.
ZW-7000/5000-series Z363 ZW-7000£ Learning the com- Describes the Sysmac Studio set-
Confocal Fiber Type Dis- ZW-5000£ munication setting ting procedures for
placement Sensor procedures for ZW-7000/5000-series Displace-
User’s Manual ZW-7000/5000-ser- ment Sensors.
for Communication Set- ies Displacement
tings Sensors.
NA-series V117 NA5-£W££££ Learning the speci- Information is provided on NA-ser-
Programmable Terminal fications and set- ies Programmable Terminal speci-
Hardware tings required to in- fications, part names, installation
User’s Manual stall an NA-series procedures, and procedures to
Programmable Ter- connect an NA Unit to peripheral
minals and connect devices. Information is also pro-
peripheral devices. vided on maintenance after opera-
tion and troubleshooting.
NA-series Programmable V118 NA5-£W££££ Learning about NA- Describes the pages and object
Terminal series PT pages functions of the NA-series Pro-
Software User’s Manual and object func- grammable Terminals.
tions.
NA-series Programmable V119 NA5-£W££££ Learning the meth- Describes how to connect NA-ser-
Terminal Device Connec- ods to connect NA- ies PT with other devices.
tion User's Manual series PT with each
device.

36 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Related Manuals

Manual name Cat. No. Model numbers Application Description

NA-series Programmable V126 NA-RTLD£££ Learning the basic Describes the basic use of Soft-
Terminal Soft-NA User's use of Soft-NA and NA and the differences from NA-
Manual the differences series PT.
from NA-series PT.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 37

Revision History

Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front and back covers of the
manual.

Cat. No. W504-E1-39

Revision code

Revision
Date Revised content
code
24 April 2018 • Japanese catalog number was changed.
• Revisions for an upgrade to Sysmac Studio version 1.23.
25 July 2018 • Revisions for an upgrade to Sysmac Studio version 1.24.
26 October 2018 • Revisions for an upgrade to Sysmac Studio version 1.25.
27 January 2019 • Revisions for an upgrade to Sysmac Studio version 1.26.
28 April 2019 • Revisions for an upgrade to Sysmac Studio version 1.27.
29 July 2019 • Revisions for an upgrade to Sysmac Studio version 1.29.
30 October 2019 • Revisions for an upgrade to Sysmac Studio version 1.30.
31 January 2020 • Revisions for an upgrade to Sysmac Studio version 1.31 and the sup-
port of Sysmac Studio (64 bit).
32 April 2020 • Revisions for an upgrade to Sysmac Studio version 1.40.
33 July 2020 • Revisions for an upgrade to Sysmac Studio version 1.41.
34 August 2020 • Revisions for an upgrade to Sysmac Studio version 1.42.
35 October 2020 • Revisions for an upgrade to Sysmac Studio version 1.43.
36 January 2021 • Revisions for an upgrade to Sysmac Studio version 1.44.
37 April 2021 • Revisions for an upgrade to Sysmac Studio version 1.45.
38 July 2021 • Revisions for an upgrade to Sysmac Studio version 1.46.
39 October 2021 • Revisions for an upgrade to Sysmac Studio version 1.47.

38 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 1 1

Introduction
This section provides an overview and lists the specifications of the Sysmac Studio
and describes its features and components.

1-1 The Sysmac Studio ........................................................................................ 1-2

1-2 Features .......................................................................................................... 1-3
1-3 Specifications ................................................................................................. 1-4
1-3-1 Product Model Numbers.................................................................................. 1-4
1-3-2 Support Software That You Can Install from the Sysmac Studio DVD
and Enclosed Data .......................................................................................... 1-5
1-3-3 Supported Languages ..................................................................................... 1-5
1-3-4 Applicable Models ........................................................................................... 1-6
1-3-5 Types of Licenses............................................................................................ 1-7
1-3-6 Applicable Computers ..................................................................................... 1-8
1-4 Components ................................................................................................. 1-10

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 1-1

1 Introduction

1-1 The Sysmac Studio

The Sysmac Studio Automation Software provides an integrated development environment to set up,
program, debug, and maintain SYSMAC NJ/NX/NY-series Controllers and other Machine Automation
Controllers, as well as EtherCAT slaves.

Flexible Development Environment

The Sysmac Studio provides an environment for programming with variables.
There is no need for concern about memory addresses. This eliminates the need to wait for memory
address definitions for hardware before the start of software development. Hardware and software can
be designed independently and developed in parallel.
POUs (program organization units) that include programs, functions, and function blocks can be used
to design programming that does not depend on any one specific system. This increases the reusabili-
ty of programming.

Development Environment for Multiple Programmers

The Sysmac Studio provides an environment for programming with variables and POUs.
Programming is designed with POUs (programs, functions, and function blocks). The programs are
then assigned to tasks and the program execution order is defined. This reduces the interdependence
of the programs and therefore allows more than one programmer to easily work at the same time.
The assignments of variables to hardware and the definitions of the relations between information that
is shared between different programs can be set at any time.

1-2 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 1 Introduction

1-2 Features

1-2 Features
More Support for IEC 61131-3 Programming Languages
The Sysmac Studio is based on the International Standard IEC 61131-3. It provides a state-of-the-art
programming environment based on the ladder diagram and structured text programming languages 1
and on POUs, which include programs, functions, and function blocks.

Easy Operation
The Sysmac Studio places as few restrictions as possible on the design procedures to allow you to
start design work from any part of the system. The design concept features easy-to-understand oper-
ating procedures with suitable guides that do not interfere with the workflow so that you can see the
flow of design work.
This provides user-friendly operation for flexible design work in which even mistakes in settings and
procedures can be corrected immediately or left until the project is finalized as long as they will not
lead to serious accidents. The Sysmac Studio is designed to achieve optimum functionality and ease
of operation to combine Machine Automation Controllers, such as those in the NJ/NX/NY Series, with
Sysmac-compliant EtherCAT slaves and other Sysmac devices.

Complete Debugging
The Sysmac Studioprovides complete functions for debugging sequence control, such as changing
present values and changing programming online. It also provides debugging functions with motion
control simulations of motion control, such as displaying trace results in 2D or 3D and displaying
traces on virtual devices. These functions enable debugging on images that are closer to the physical
devices.
Also, debugging through Vision System simulation with a Vision Sensor is supported. With the Vision
Edition, you can perform simulation for individual Vision Sensors. With the Standard Edition, you can
also perform integrated simulation with a Controller.

Maintenance
The Sysmac Studio lets you check the Controller status on a status list. Troubleshooting functions let
you easily check error details and corrections for Controller errors.
You can also assign user-defined errors in the same way as Controller errors are assigned.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 1-3

1 Introduction

1-3 Specifications
1-3-1 Product Model Numbers
The product Sysmac Studio includes a DVD media and licenses. Each of them is given a model num-
ber and the DVD media comes as 32-bit or 64-bit application. The licenses are the same for 32-bit and
64-bit applications.
If you are purchasing the Sysmac Studio for the first time, purchase both a DVD media and one or
more licenses. The media is the same for all of the licenses. If you are purchasing the product for ad-
ditional licenses, you can purchase only the licenses. You can also purchase the DVD separately.
The DVD is not included with the licenses.

DVD
Product 32-bit/64-bit application Model number
Sysmac Studio 32-bit application SYSMAC-SE200D
Standard Edition 64-bit application SYSMAC-SE200D-64
Version 1.££

Licenses
Product Number of licenses Model number
Sysmac Studio 1 license SYSMAC-SE201L
Standard Edition 3 licenses SYSMAC-SE203L
Version 1.££ 10 licenses SYSMAC-SE210L
30 licenses SYSMAC-SE230L
50 licenses SYSMAC-SE250L
Sysmac Studio 1 license SYSMAC-VE001L
Vision Edition*1
Version 1.££
Sysmac Studio 1 license SYSMAC-ME001L
Measurement Edition*2 3 licenses SYSMAC-ME003L
Version 1.££
Sysmac Studio 1 license SYSMAC-NE001L
NX-IO Edition*3
Version 1.££
Sysmac Studio 1 license SYSMAC-DE001L
Drive Edition*4
Version 1.££
Sysmac Studio 1 license SYSMAC-FE0££L
Safety Edition*5
Version 1.££
*1. You can use the Vision Edition only for the FQ-M-series Vision Sensors and FH-series Vision Sensors.
*2. With the Measurement Edition, you can use only the setup functions for ZW-series Displacement Sensors.
*3. You can use the NX-IO Edition only for EtherNet/IP Slave Terminals that use an NX-series EtherNet/IP Cou-
pler Unit or PROFINET Coupler Unit.
*4. You can use the Drive Edition only for 1S-series and G5-series Servo Drives.

1-4 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 1 Introduction

*5. You can use the Safety Edition only for safety control systems that use an NX-series Communication Con-

1-3 Specifications
trol Unit or NX-series EtherNet/IP Coupler.

Sysmac Studio Options

You must purchase an option license to use the functions supported by the option. To use an option
license, register it after you install the Sysmac Studio.
1
Product name Number of licenses Model number
Sysmac Studio 1 license SYSMAC-TA401L

1-3-2 Support Software That You Can Install from the Sysmac Studio DVD and Enclosed Data
Team Development Option*1 3 licenses SYSMAC-TA403L
10 licenses SYSMAC-TA410L
30 licenses SYSMAC-TA430L
50 licenses SYSMAC-TA450L
Sysmac Studio 1 license SYSMAC-SA401L-64
3D Simulation Option*2 3 licenses SYSMAC-SA403L-64
10 licenses SYSMAC-SA410L-64
30 licenses SYSMAC-SA430L-64
50 licenses SYSMAC-SA450L-64
*1. Refer to the Sysmac Studio Project Version Control Function Operation Manual (Cat. No. W589) for details
on the Team Development Option.
*2. Refer to the Sysmac Studio 3D Simulation Function Operation Manual (Cat. No. W618) for details on the 3D
simulation option.

1-3-2 Support Software That You Can Install from the Sysmac Studio
DVD and Enclosed Data
The following table lists the Support Software that you can install from the Sysmac Studio DVD and
the data that is included on the DVD.

Installable Software Version Classification Enclosed data

• Sysmac Studio Ver. 1.£ Automation Software • CPS
• CX-Integrator*1 Ver. 2.£ Support Software • Manuals (PDF files)
• CX-Designer*1 Ver. 3.£ Support Software
• CX-Protocol*1 Ver. 1.£ Support Software
• Network Configurator*1 Ver. 3.£ Support Software
• CX-ConfiguratorFDT*1 Ver. 2.£ Support Software
• Adept Robot IP Address Setting Tool Ver. 1.£ Support Software
• CX-Server*1 Ver. 5.£ Communication Middleware
• Communications Middleware Ver. 1.£ Communication Middleware
*1. This software cannot be installed from the Sysmac Studio Vision Edition, Measurement Edition, or Drive Edi-
tion.

Refer to 10-1 Support Software Provided with the Sysmac Studio on page 10-2 for information on
Support Software.

1-3-3 Supported Languages

The Sysmac Studio supports the following languages.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 1-5

1 Introduction

Japanese, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, and
Korean

1-3-4 Applicable Models

The models that you can select when you create a project on the Sysmac Studio are given in the fol-
lowing tables.

Controllers Vision Sensors

Model numbers Model numbers Model numbers
NX701-16££ NY532-13££ FQ-MS12£-ECT*2
NX701-17££ NY532-14££
FQ-MS12£-M-ECT*2
NJ501-13££ NY532-15££
FQ-MS12£*2
NJ501-14££ NY532-54££
FQ-MS12£-M*2
NJ501-15££ NY512-13££
FH-1£££
NJ501-43££ NY512-14££
FH-1£££-££
NJ501-44££ NY512-15££
FH-2£££
NJ501-45££ NX102-10££
FH-2£££-££
NJ501-53££ NX102-11££
FH-3£££
NJ501-R£££*1 NX102-12££
FH-3£££-££
NJ301-11££ NX102-90££
FH-5£££
NJ301-12££ NX1P2-10££££
FH-5£££-££
NJ101-10££ NX1P2-10££££1
FHV7£-£££££-C
NJ101-90££ NX1P2-11££££
FHV7£-£££££-S££
*1. Supported by the Sysmac NX1P2-11££££1
FHV7£-£££££-S££-££
Studio (64 bit) only. NX1P2-90££££
FHV7£-£££££-H££
NX1P2-90££££1
FHV7£-£££££-H££-££
NX1P2-9B££££
*1. Supported by the Sysmac Studio
NX1P2-9B££££1
(32 bit) only.

Displacement Sensors HMIs Slave Terminals

Model numbers Model numbers Model numbers
ZW-CE1£ NA5-15W££££ NX-EIC£££
ZW-CE1£T NA5-12W££££ NX-PNC£££
ZW-C1£ NA5-9W££££
ZW-C1£T NA5-7W££££
ZW-8000 NA-RTLD££
ZW-8000T
ZW-7000
ZW-7000T
ZW-5000
ZW-5000T

1-6 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 1 Introduction

Drives Safety Network Controllers Application Controllers

1-3 Specifications
Model numbers Model numbers Model numbers
R88D-1SN£££-ECT NX-CSG£££ AM101-1000*1*2
R88D-KN£££-ECT(-L) *1. Supported by the Sysmac Studio
(64 bit) only.
*2. Select Application Manager when
you select a device.
1
Additional Information

1-3-5 Types of Licenses

• Some Controllers support OPC UA. Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit OPC UA User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W588) for details on the OPC UA and the models of the Controllers that
support OPC UA.
• The NJ501-££20, NJ101-££20, NX701-££20, and NX102-££ are Controllers that sup-
port DB connection. Refer to the NJ/NX-series Database Connection CPU Units User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W527) for details.
• The NJ501-1340 supports GEM Services. Refer to the NJ-series SECS/GEM CPU Units
User's Manual (Cat. No. W528) for details.
• The NJ501-4£££ support robot control. Refer to the NJ-series NJ Robotics CPU Unit
User’s Manual (Cat. No. W539) for details.
• The NJ501-5300 and NY532-5400 are Controllers that support CNC function. Refer to the
NJ/NY-series NC Integrated Controller User’s Manual (Cat. No. O030) for details.
• The NX-CSG£££ is a Communication Control Unit that is necessary to use the NX-SL5££
£ Safety CPU Unit. Refer to the NX-series Safety Control Unit / Communication Control Unit
User’s Manual (Cat. No. Z395) for details.
Download the PDF files of the manuals from your OMRON website.

1-3-5 Types of Licenses

Edition Description
Standard Edition This edition allows you to use all the models that are listed under 1-3-4 Applicable Mod-
els on page 1-6.
Vision Edition You can use this edition only for FQ-M-series Vision Sensors and FH-series Vision Sen-
sors.
Measurement Edition You can use this edition only for ZW-series Displacement Sensors.
NX-IO Edition You can use this edition only for EtherNet/IP Slave Terminals that use an NX-series
EtherNet/IP Coupler Unit or PROFINET Coupler Unit.
Drive Edition You can use this edition only for 1S-series and G5-series Servo Drives.
Safety Edition You can use this edition only for safety control systems that use an NX-series Communi-
cation Control Unit or NX-series EtherNet/IP Coupler.
Trial Version You can use all of the functions of the Standard Edition for 30 days after you install the
(without a License) software.

You can register more than one license at the same time. The priority of license validity is given in the
following table.

Priority Types of Licenses

1 (high) Standard Edition
2 Vision Edition
Measurement Edition
NX-IO Edition
Drive Edition
Safety Edition

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 1-7

1 Introduction

Priority Types of Licenses

3 (low) Trial Version

• If licenses with different priorities are registered at the same time, the license with the highest priori-
ty is valid.
Example: If you register a license for the Vision Edition when the Trial Version is already installed in
the Sysmac Studio, you can use only Vision Sensors. In this case, you cannot use the Trial Version
of the Sysmac Studio.
• If licenses with the same priorities are registered at the same time, all of the licenses are valid.
Example: If you register a license for the Vision Edition when a license for the Measurement Edition
is already registered in the Sysmac Studio, you can use both Displacement Sensors and Vision
Sensors.
Refer to 3-3-12 Displaying and Registering Licenses on page 3-29 for the procedure to register li-
censes.

License Activation (Advanced Warning)

For future versions of the Sysmac Studio, activation will be required for installation and re-installation.

Activation is necessary to create a relationship between the OMRON software product and the computer on
which you will use it.

This allows OMRON to help prevent illegal usage and copying of software.

When license activation is introduced, you will need to perform a license activation procedure.
If you do not perform license activation at that time, you will be able to use the software for only a limited period
of time.

1-3-6 Applicable Computers

The Sysmac Studio is an application that runs on Microsoft Windows.
The Sysmac Studio comes as either 32-bit or 64-bit applications. The supported OS and system re-
quirements are given in the following table.

System Requirements
The system requirements for the Sysmac Studio are given in the following table.

 For Sysmac Studio (32 bit)

OS CPU*1 RAM Display
Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit edition) DOS/V (IBM AT compatible ma- 2 GB min. XGA
Windows 8 (32-bit or 64-bit edition) chines) personal computers equip- 1,024 × 768,
Windows 8.1 (32-bit or 64-bit edi- ped with Intel® Core™ i5 M520 (2.4 16 million colors
tion) GHz) or equivalent/faster processors 4 GB min. WXGA
Windows 10 (32-bit or 64-bit edition) are recommended. recom- 1,280 × 800,
mended 16 million colors
recommended
*1. If you create a user program with a memory size over 20 MB, the personal computer equipped with In-
tel® Core™ i7 or an equal/faster processor and the RAM of 8 GB or more is recommended.

Apply the latest updates to the OS installed on your computer to ensure that it is always up-to-date.

1-8 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 1 Introduction

In addition, installation of the following applications is a system requirement for the Sysmac Studio.

1-3 Specifications
• .NET Framework 3.5
• .NET Framework 4.6.1
They are installed automatically if they are not already installed on the computer when the Sysmac
Studio is installed.

Other system requirements are given below.

1
System requirement Specification
Available hard disk space required at the start of DVD installation 11 GB min.

1-3-6 Applicable Computers

Available hard disk space required at the start of auto-updating 13 GB min.*1
Optical drive DVD-ROM
Communications port Ethernet or USB (USB 2.0)
*1. Available hard disk space required when you click the Install Button in the OMRON Automation
Software Upgrade Utility Window to execute auto-updating.

 For Sysmac Studio (64 bit)

OS CPU*1*2 RAM*2 Display*2
Windows 10 DOS/V (IBM AT compatible machines) personal 4 GB min. XGA
(64-bit edi- computers equipped with Intel® Core™ i5-3xxx (3rd 1,024 × 768,
tion) generation: Ivy Bridge) or equivalent/later processors 16 million colors
are required. 8 GB min. WXGA
recommend- 1,280 × 800,
ed 16 million colors rec-
ommended
*1. If you create a user program with a memory size over 20 MB, the personal computer equipped with In-
tel® Core™ i7 or an equal/faster processor and the RAM of 8 GB or more is recommended.
*2. Refer to the Sysmac Studio 3D Simulation Function Operation Manual (Cat. No. W618) for recommend-
ed system requirements to use the 3D Simulation Option function.

Apply the latest updates to the OS installed on your computer to ensure that it is always up-to-date.
In addition, installation of the following applications is a system requirement for the Sysmac Studio.
• .NET Framework 3.5
• .NET Framework 4.6.1
They are installed automatically if they are not already installed on the computer when the Sysmac
Studio is installed.

Other system requirements are given below.

System requirement Specification

Available hard disk space required at the start of DVD installation 15 GB min.
Available hard disk space required at the start of auto-updating 17 GB min.*1
Optical drive DVD-ROM
Communications port Ethernet or USB (USB 2.0)
*1. Available hard disk space required when you click the Install Button in the OMRON Automation
Software Upgrade Utility Window to execute auto-updating.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 1-9

1 Introduction

1-4 Components
The components of the DVD and license are listed below. Make sure that all components are included.

 DVD Media (SYSMAC-SE200D/SYSMAC-SE200D-64)

Component Description
Introduction An introduction to the Sysmac Studio is provided.
Setup disk (DVD-ROM) 1

 Licenses (SYSMAC-SE2££L/SYSMAC-VE£££L/SYSMAC-ME£££L/
SYSMAC-NE£££L/SYSMAC-DE£££L)
Component Description
License Agreement The license agreement gives the usage conditions and warranty for the Sysmac
Studio.
License Card The following are given: Model number, version, license number, and number of li-
censes.
License Stickers The following are given: Model number, version, license number, and number of li-
censes. Two stickers are provided.
User Registration Two cards are provided, one for Japan and one for other countries.
Card
Address Sheet This is an address sheet that is used when the license is purchased outside of Ja-
pan.

Precautions for Correct Use

The license number, which is required for installation, is given on the license certificate.
Keep it in a safe place so that it is not lost.

1-10 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 2
2
Installation and Uninstallation
This section describes how to install and uninstall the Sysmac Studio.

2-1 Installing the Sysmac Studio ........................................................................ 2-2

2-1-1 Confirmations before Installation..................................................................... 2-2
2-1-2 Requirements for Installation........................................................................... 2-2
2-1-3 Installing the Sysmac Studio ........................................................................... 2-3
2-2 Uninstalling the Sysmac Studio ................................................................. 2-12
2-2-1 Uninstalling the Sysmac Studio..................................................................... 2-12
2-3 Auto-updating the Sysmac Studio.............................................................. 2-16
2-3-1 Confirmations before Implementing Auto-updating ....................................... 2-16
2-3-2 Implementing an Auto-update ....................................................................... 2-16

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 2-1

2 Installation and Uninstallation

2-1 Installing the Sysmac Studio

2-1-1 Confirmations before Installation
Check the following items before you install the Sysmac Studio.
• To install the Sysmac Studio, log onto Windows as the administrator or as a user with administrator
rights. There are files that a user without administrator rights cannot write. An access error will occur
if you log on without administrator rights.
• Apply the latest updates to the OS to ensure that it is always up-to-date.
• Exit all applications that are running on the computer before you install the Sysmac Studio.
• You cannot install the Sysmac Studio from a network drive, such as a DVD drive or hardware drive
that is shared on a network. Always install the Sysmac Studio from a DVD drive on the computer
onto which you need to install the Sysmac Studio.
• Corrupted files cannot be restored on a compressed drive. Do not install the Sysmac Studio on a
compressed drive.
• Do not cancel the setup while it is in progress. Files that were copied may remain in the installation
directory.
• Do not turn OFF the power to the computer or reset the computer while the installation is in prog-
ress. Computer data may be corrupted.
• You may need to restart Windows after you install the Sysmac Studio. Restart as required according
to Installation Wizard messages.

2-1-2 Requirements for Installation

Supported OS
You can install the Sysmac Studio on computers with any of the following operating systems.

Sysmac Studio (32 bit) Sysmac Studio (64 bit)

OS Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit edition) Windows 10 (64-bit edition)
Windows 8 (32-bit or 64-bit edition)
Windows 8.1*1 (32-bit or 64-bit edition)
Windows 10 (32-bit or 64-bit edition)
*1. Windows 8.1 Update (KB2919355) must be applied to the OS.

CX-One Installation
If the CX-One is installed on the computer, the operation when you install the Sysmac Studio depends
on the version of the CX-One.

 Versions Earlier Than CX-One Version 4

Installation is cancelled and the Sysmac Studio cannot be installed. Uninstall the CX-One before
you install the Sysmac Studio.

2-2 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 2 Installation and Uninstallation

 CX-One Version 4 or Higher

2-1 Installing the Sysmac Studio

You can install the Sysmac Studio*1.
The Support Software*2 and CX-Server are installed in the installation folder of the CX-One. If the
same Support Software is already installed, it is overwritten.
*1. If the Sysmac Studio is installed on a computer with the CX-One and then the CX-One is uninstalled, the
Support Software may no longer operate correctly.
*2. Here, “Support Software” indicates the CX-Integrator, CX-Designer, CX-Protocol, Network Configurator,
and CX-ConfiguratorFDT.

Installed Application Software 2

The following application software is installed.

2-1-3 Installing the Sysmac Studio

Name Version
• Sysmac Studio Ver. 1.£

Support Software: CX Common Tools

Name Version
• CX-Integrator Ver. 2.£
• CX-Designer Ver. 3.£
• CX-Protocol Ver. 1.£
• Network Configurator Ver. 3.£
• CX-ConfiguratorFDT Ver. 2.£

Support Software: Other Tools

Name Version
• Adept Robot IP Address Setting Tool*1 Ver. 1.£
*1. The tool is always installed.

Communications Middleware

Name Version
• CX-Server Ver. 5.£
• Communications Middleware Ver. 1.£

Other Application Software

Name Version
• .NET Framework Ver. 3.5 SP1
Ver. 4.6.1
• DirectX Ver. 9.£
• WinPcap Ver. 4.£

2-1-3 Installing the Sysmac Studio

This section provides the procedure to install the Sysmac Studio.*1
*1. If the CX-One is installed on the computer, you may not be able to install the Sysmac Studio depending on the
version of the CX-One. Refer to 2-1-2 Requirements for Installation on page 2-2 for details.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 2-3

2 Installation and Uninstallation

Preparations for Installation

1 Set the Sysmac Studio installation disk into the DVD-ROM drive.
The setup program is started automatically and the Select Setup Language Dialog Box is dis-
played.

2 Select the language to use, and then click the OK Button.

The Sysmac Studio Setup Wizard is started.

• If the OS is not up-to-date, you may be asked to apply the latest updates to the OS. Apply
the latest updates to the OS and install the Sysmac Studio again.
• If .NET Framework is not installed on the computer, the .NET Framework Installation Dialog
Box is displayed. The dialog box depends on the version of .NET Framework.

a) Computer with Windows 7, Windows 8, or Windows 8.1 Where .NET Framework 4.6.1
Is Not Installed
The Microsoft .NET Framework 4.6.1 Setup Dialog Box is displayed. Follow the instructions
given in the dialog boxes and install .NET Framework 4.6.1.
When .NET Framework has been installed, a confirmation dialog box to restart the comput-
er is displayed. Always select the Yes, I want to restart my computer now. Option and
click the Finish Button to restart the computer.
After the computer is restarted, double-click the Setup.exe under the DVD-ROM drive to
start the setup again.
b) Computer with Windows 7 Where .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 Is Not Installed
The Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 Setup Dialog Box is displayed.
Click the Install Button to start installation of .NET Framework 3.5 SP1. Click the Cancel
Button to cancel installation of the Sysmac Studio.

3 Click the Next Button.

2-4 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 2 Installation and Uninstallation

The License Agreement Dialog Box is displayed.

2-1 Installing the Sysmac Studio

4 Read the License Agreement carefully. If you agree to all of the conditions, select the I accept
the terms of the license agreement Option, and then click the Next Button.

2-1-3 Installing the Sysmac Studio

The User Information Dialog Box is displayed.

5 The names that are registered on the computer are automatically entered for the user name
and company name. Enter the license number*1 and then click the Next Button.
*1. You must purchase a license separately.
If you do not enter a license number, trial operation is provided for a 30-day period. Refer to
1-3-1 Product Model Numbers on page 1-4 in 1-3 Specifications on page 1-4 for information on li-
censes.

The Regional Information Dialog Box is displayed.

Note If the CX-One is installed, the Regional Information Dialog Box is not displayed and the location
that was selected for the CX-One is used. Go to step 7.

6 Select the region where you purchased the Sysmac Studio, and then click the Next Button.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 2-5

2 Installation and Uninstallation

The Choose Destination Location Dialog Box is displayed.

7 Check the installation folder, and then click the Next Button.
The default installation folder is C:\Program Files\OMRON\.

The Setup Type Dialog Box is displayed.

8 Select the Complete or Custom Option, and then click the Next Button.

If you select the Complete Option, go to step 10.

If you select the Custom Option, go to step 9.
Note If CX-One version 4 is installed, the dialog box is not displayed. Go to step 10.

2-6 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 2 Installation and Uninstallation

2-1 Installing the Sysmac Studio

Select the CX Common Tools Check Box, and then click the Next Button.
The Sysmac Studio and communications middleware are installed by default. The selections of
these cannot be cleared.

2-1-3 Installing the Sysmac Studio

The Ready to Install the Program Dialog Box is displayed.

10 Click the Install Button.

To change the installation settings, click the Back Button.

Installation of the Sysmac Studio starts.

Installing the USB Device Driver for the Controller

During installation wizard execution, a Windows Security Dialog Box is displayed.

1 Click the Install Button.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 2-7

2 Installation and Uninstallation

The OMRON Corporation Modems are installed and then the next Windows Security Dialog
Box is displayed.

2 Click the Install Button.

The OMRON Corporation Ports (COM & LPT) are installed.

3 Click the Install Button.

NA5-V1 USB Client xXX Driver is installed.

Installing WinPcap
During the installation, a dialog box will prompt you to install the WinPcap component of the communi-
cations middleware.

1 Click the OK Button.

2-8 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 2 Installation and Uninstallation

The WinPcap Setup Wizard is displayed.

2-1 Installing the Sysmac Studio

2 Click the Next Button.

2-1-3 Installing the Sysmac Studio

The WinPcap Installation Wizard is displayed.

3 Click the Next Button.

The License Agreement Dialog Box is displayed.

4 Read the License Agreement carefully. If you agree to all of the conditions, click the I Agree
Button.
The Installation options Dialog Box is displayed.

5 Select the Automatically start the WinPcap driver at boot time Option, and then click the
Install Button.
Installation of WinPcap starts.

6 Click the Finish Button.

This completes the installation of WinPcap.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 2-9

2 Installation and Uninstallation

Ethernet Card Selection

During installation wizard execution, the Direct Ethernet Connection: Network Card Selection Dia-
log Box is displayed.

1 Select the network card for connecting the Controller with an Ethernet cable from the computer
that runs the Sysmac Studio, and then click the OK Button.

The network card for a direct Ethernet connection is selected and installation continues.

Installing the USB Driver for OMRON SYSMAC PLCs and NS-series
PTs
During installation wizard execution, a Windows Security Dialog Box is displayed.

1 Click the Install Button.

The OMRON Universal Serial Bus controllers are installed and then the InstallShield Wizard
Complete Dialog Box is displayed.
If you are using Windows 8 or later and selected the Complete Option in step 8 or the CX
Common Tools Check Box in step 9, the following message appears before the InstallShield
Wizard Complete Dialog Box is displayed:
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 is required to use CX-ConfiguratorFDT. After installing
Sysmac Studio, install the .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 from the Internet.

2-10 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 2 Installation and Uninstallation

2-1 Installing the Sysmac Studio

Select the Yes, I want to restart my computer now Option, and then click the Finish Button.

2-1-3 Installing the Sysmac Studio

The computer is restarted.
This completes the installation of the Sysmac Studio.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 2-11

2 Installation and Uninstallation

2-2 Uninstalling the Sysmac Studio

2-2-1 Uninstalling the Sysmac Studio
Use the following steps to uninstall the Sysmac Studio.
(1) Uninstall the Sysmac Studio.
(2) Uninstall the Communications Middleware.
(3) Uninstall the CX-Server Driver Manager*1 and the CX-Server.*1
*1. These are displayed if the Support Software is installed or if the Sysmac Studio is installed on a computer with
the CX-One. To uninstall the CX-One, refer to the CX-One Setup Manual for the procedure.

Precautions for Correct Use

To uninstall the Sysmac Studio, log onto Windows as the administrator or as a user with admin-
istrator rights. Without administrator rights, you may not be able to access some folders, which
results in unsuccessful uninstallation.

Uninstalling the Sysmac Studio

1 Open the Control Panel from the Windows Start Menu and then select Programs and
Features.
The Uninstall or change a program Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select Sysmac Studio, and then click the Uninstall Button.

A dialog box is displayed to confirm deletion of the Sysmac Studio.

3 Click the Yes Button.

2-12 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 2 Installation and Uninstallation

2-2 Uninstalling the Sysmac Studio

The Sysmac Studio is uninstalled and then a dialog box is displayed to confirm uninstallation of
CX Common Tools.

4 Click the Yes Button to continue removal of the CX Common Tools.

2
The CX Common Tools are removed.

2-2-1 Uninstalling the Sysmac Studio

Note Always click the Yes Button and remove the CX Common Tools completely.
A dialog box is displayed after uninstallation of the Sysmac Studio is completed.

5 Click the Finish Button.

This completes the uninstallation of the Sysmac Studio.

Uninstalling the Communications Middleware

1 Open the Control Panel from the Windows Start Menu and then select Programs and
Features.
The Uninstall or change a program Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select Communications Middleware, and then click the Uninstall Button.

The following dialog box is displayed to confirm the uninstallation of Communication Middle-
ware.

3 Click the Yes Button.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 2-13

2 Installation and Uninstallation

Uninstallation of the Communications Middleware is started.

4 Delete the Communications Middleware according to the messages in the dialog box.
The Maintenance Completed Dialog Box is displayed when uninstallation is completed.

Uninstalling the CX-Server Driver Manager and the CX-Server

1 Open the Control Panel from the Windows Start Menu and then select Programs and
Features.
The Uninstall or change a program Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select CX-Server Driver Manager Tool, and then click the Uninstall/Change Button.
The following dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the Yes Button.

A dialog box is displayed to select the driver to remove.

4 Click the Yes Button to remove all device drivers.

2-14 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 2 Installation and Uninstallation

2-2 Uninstalling the Sysmac Studio

5 Delete the CX-Server Driver Manager according to the messages in the dialog box.
The Maintenance Completed Dialog Box is displayed when the uninstallation of the CX-Serv-
er Driver Management Tool is completed.
2

2-2-1 Uninstalling the Sysmac Studio

6 Continue by selecting the CX-Server and repeat the above procedure for uninstallation of CX-
Server.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 2-15

2 Installation and Uninstallation

2-3 Auto-updating the Sysmac Studio

You can use an Internet connection to automatically update the Support Software that is included in
the Sysmac Studio package to the most current versions. If you use auto-updating, searches are
made automatically for the newest versions of the currently installed Support Software from the Sys-
mac Studio package. When updates are found, they are installed to keep the Support Software that is
installed from the Sysmac Studio package on your computer up to date.

2-3-1 Confirmations before Implementing Auto-updating

Check the following points before you start to update the software.
• Log onto Windows as the administrator or as a user with administrator rights.
• Exit all applications.
• Connect to the Internet.

2-3-2 Implementing an Auto-update

1 Select All Programs - OMRON - Sysmac Studio - OMRON Automation Software

AutoUpdate from the Windows Start Menu.
The OMRON Automation Software Upgrade Utility starts and a list of the applications that are
installed is displayed.
(a)

(b)

(e) (f) (g) (c) (d)

No. Item Description

(a) Message area Tells whether updates are available.
(b) Update display area Displays available updates and messages from OMRON.

2-16 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 2 Installation and Uninstallation

2-3 Auto-updating the Sysmac Studio

No. Item Description
(c) Download Only Button Downloads the selected updates and saves them to your computer.
Click this button to install the updates later.
(d) Install Button Downloads the selected updates and installs them on your computer.
(e) Description Button Displays an update description area at the bottom of the dialog box.
(f) History Button Displays a list of the applications that are installed and the updates that
have been installed for each.
(g) Setting Button Displays a dialog box of the settings to periodically check for updates.

Click the + icon to see the updates that you can apply to an application.

The first time you implement an update, a dialog box is displayed for user confirmation before 2
the OMRON Automation Software Upgrade Utility starts.

2-3-2 Implementing an Auto-update

Enter the items in the following table, and click the OK Button.
This dialog box is displayed only the first time that you install updates.

Item Description
E-mail Address Enter your email address.
License Number (16 digits) Input the license number of the Sysmac Studio that you purchased.
Region Select the region where you purchased the software.
• Japan
• Europe, Africa, or Middle East
• North or South America
• China
• Southeast Asia, India, or Pacific region
• Taiwan
• Korea

2 Select the updates to install and click the Install Button.

The selected updates are downloaded and installation starts automatically.
A dialog box that asks you to restart your computer is displayed after installation is completed.

3 Click the Yes Button to restart your computer and complete the updates. To restart later, click
the No Button.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 2-17

2 Installation and Uninstallation

Additional Information

• If there are updates to install for the OMRON Automation Software Upgrade Utility, the follow-
ing dialog box is displayed when you start the utility. Click the OK Button to download the up-
dates.

• You use Programs and Features in the Control Panel to uninstall the updates.

2-18 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3
System Design
3
This section describes the basic concepts for designing an NJ/NX/NY-series System
with the Sysmac Studio and the basic operating procedures.

3-1 Basic Flow of System Design 1 .................................................................... 3-3

3-2 Basic Flow of System Design 2 .................................................................... 3-6
3-3 Creating a Project .......................................................................................... 3-9
3-3-1 Starting and Exiting the Sysmac Studio .......................................................... 3-9
3-3-2 Creating a Project File....................................................................................3-11
3-3-3 Closing a Project File and Returning to the Start Page................................. 3-16
3-3-4 Saving the Project File .................................................................................. 3-16
3-3-5 Saving a Project File Under a Different Name .............................................. 3-17
3-3-6 Opening a Project File................................................................................... 3-18
3-3-7 Exporting a Project File ................................................................................. 3-20
3-3-8 Importing a Project File ................................................................................. 3-21
3-3-9 Password Protection for Project Files ........................................................... 3-23
3-3-10 Project Update History Management ............................................................ 3-26
3-3-11 Creating a Project from an Online Connection.............................................. 3-28
3-3-12 Displaying and Registering Licenses ............................................................ 3-29
3-3-13 Project Version Control.................................................................................. 3-30
3-4 Parts of the Window..................................................................................... 3-31
3-4-1 Application Window ....................................................................................... 3-31
3-4-2 Multiview Explorer (1).................................................................................... 3-32
3-4-3 Edit Pane (3) ................................................................................................. 3-35
3-4-4 Toolbox (4)..................................................................................................... 3-40
3-4-5 Changing the Display Location of Window Parts .......................................... 3-43
3-4-6 Saving and Restoring the Window Layout .................................................... 3-47
3-5 Menu Command Structure .......................................................................... 3-51
3-6 Basic Editing Operations ............................................................................ 3-57
3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations ................................................... 3-60
3-7-1 Setting Parameters........................................................................................ 3-60
3-7-2 Programming................................................................................................. 3-66
3-7-3 Library Functions........................................................................................... 3-69
3-7-4 Project Management ..................................................................................... 3-70
3-7-5 Debugging ..................................................................................................... 3-71
3-7-6 Simulation...................................................................................................... 3-73
3-7-7 Monitoring Information................................................................................... 3-74
3-7-8 Communications............................................................................................ 3-74
3-7-9 Maintenance.................................................................................................. 3-75

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-1

3 System Design

3-7-10 Security Measures......................................................................................... 3-76

3-7-11 Customizing Function.................................................................................... 3-77
3-7-12 Window Operation......................................................................................... 3-77
3-7-13 Online Help.................................................................................................... 3-77
3-7-14 OPC UA Functions ........................................................................................ 3-78
3-7-15 Function Specifications of DB Connection Function ..................................... 3-79
3-7-16 CNC Functions .............................................................................................. 3-79
3-7-17 EtherNet/IP Connection Settings................................................................... 3-80
3-7-18 EtherNet/IP Slave Terminal Settings ............................................................. 3-80
3-7-19 PROFINET Slave Terminal Settings.............................................................. 3-81
3-7-20 Function Specifications of Safety Control Units ............................................ 3-82
3-7-21 Function Specifications of NA-series Programmable Terminals.................... 3-87
3-7-22 Vision Sensor Functions................................................................................ 3-93
3-7-23 Displacement Sensor Functions.................................................................... 3-98
3-7-24 Team Development Option............................................................................ 3-99
3-7-25 3D Simulation Function ............................................................................... 3-100
3-7-26 Robot Function ............................................................................................ 3-101
3-7-27 Application Manager Function..................................................................... 3-103

3-2 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-1 Basic Flow of System Design 1

3-1 Basic Flow of System Design 1

This section gives the basic flow and settings that are required to use the Sysmac Studio to design a
user program that takes advantage of the characteristics of IEC 61131-3 programming.
This basic flow is suitable for user program design in a development scenario in which hardware and
software specifications are determined in phases. The procedures are described below.

 Creating a Project
A project file is created.
1. Starting the Sysmac Studio: Start the Sysmac Studio. 3-3-1 Starting and Exit-
ing the Sysmac Studio
on page 3-9
2. Creating a Project: Create a project. 3-3-2 Creating a Project 3
File on page 3-11

 Designing the User Program

Variables and POUs are registered.
1. Registering Global Variables: Register user-defined variables that are used 4-1 Variable Registra-
in more than one program in the Global Variables. tion on page 4-3
2. Registering POUs: Register the programs, functions, and function blocks as 4-2 Registering POUs
POUs. on page 4-57
3. Registering Local Variables: Register the user-defined variables that are 4-1 Variable Registra-
used in only one POU in the Local Variables for that POU. tion on page 4-3
4. Registering Axis Variables: Register the Axis Variables that are used in the 4-1 Variable Registra-
user program in the Axis Settings. tion on page 4-3
5. Registering Axes Group Variables: Register the Axes Group Variables that 4-1 Variable Registra-
are used in programs that control interpolates axes in the Axes Group tion on page 4-3
Settings.
6. Registering Cam Data Variables: Register the cam data variables that are 4-1 Variable Registra-
used in the user program in the Cam Data Settings. tion on page 4-3
7. Creating the POU Algorithms: Create the POU algorithms. 4-5 Programming on
page 4-85
4-6 Searching and Re-
placing on page 4-155

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-3

3 System Design

 Controller Configurations and Setup

The Controller Configurations and Setup are created.
• Controller Configurations:
1. Creating the EtherCAT Configuration: Register the EtherCAT slaves in 5-2 EtherCAT Configu-
the EtherCAT Configuration. ration and Setup on
page 5-4
2. Creating the CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration: Register the Units in 5-5 CPU/Expansion
the CPU/Expansion Racks Configuration. Rack Configuration and
Setup on page 5-44
3. Registering Device Variables: Register device variables to user-defined 4-1 Variable Registra-
variables in the I/O Map to use or to edit and use device variables in the tion on page 4-3
user program. The device variables interface the user program with I/O in-
formation from the devices (slaves and Units).
• Controller Setup:
1. Editing Slave Parameters: Edit the Operation Settings of the slaves. 5-4 Setting EtherCAT
Drives on page 5-37
2. Editing Unit Parameters: Edit the Operation Settings of the Units. 5-5 CPU/Expansion
Rack Configuration and
Setup on page 5-44
3. Editing Controller Setup: Edit the Operation Settings of the Controller in 5-6 Controller Setup on
the Controller Setup. page 5-63
4. Editing Axes: Edit the Operation Settings of the axes that you registered 5-7 Motion Control Set-
in the Axis Settings. up on page 5-78
5. Editing Axes Groups: Edit the Operation Settings of the interpolated ax- 5-7 Motion Control Set-
es that you registered in the Axes Group Settings. up on page 5-78

 Designing Tasks
The tasks, which are used to execute programs, are created.
1. Registering Tasks: Register the tasks in Tasks. 5-9 Task Settings on
page 5-109
2. Designing Tasks: Design the operation of the tasks. 5-9 Task Settings on
page 5-109
3. Editing Tasks: Assign programs to the tasks. 5-9 Task Settings on
page 5-109
4. Editing Tasks: Design the I/O that are controlled by the tasks and the varia- 5-9 Task Settings on
bles that are shared between tasks. page 5-109

 Offline Program Debugging

The Simulator is used to debug the program.
1. Debugging through Simulation: Start the Simulator and debug the user pro- 7-3 Offline Debugging on
gram. page 7-80

3-4 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

 Preparations for Online Debugging

The settings that are required for online debugging are made.
1. Assigning Axis Variables and I/O Devices: Assign the axis variables and I/O 7-4-2 Assigning Axis Var-

3-1 Basic Flow of System Design 1

devices in the Axis Settings. iables and I/O Devices
on page 7-117
2. Assigning Variables and Real I/O: Assign the user-defined variables and I/O 7-4-1 Assigning Varia-
devices in the I/O Map. bles and Real I/O on
page 7-115

 Online Program Debugging

Debugging is performed on the physical system. 3
1. Transferring Data to the Controller: Transfer the user program, system con- 7-5-1 Transferring/
figuration, and variable information to the Controller. Comparing Data to/from
the Controller on page
7-120
2. Testing Axis Operation: Use the MC Test Run to check wiring. 7-5-2 Testing Axis Oper-
ation (MC Test Run) on
page 7-142
3. Checking I/O: Use the I/O Map to check the I/O status between internal I/O 7-5-3 Checking I/O Wir-
devices and external I/O devices, and the wiring to external I/O devices. ing on page 7-146
4. Checking Assignments: Use a Watch Tab Page to check the assignments 7-5-4 Checking I/O As-
between user-defined variables and I/O devices. signments on page
7-147

 Testing Operation
Final debugging of the user program is performed using trial operation.
1. Debugging Programming with Data Traces: Execute data traces to check the 7-2-11 Data Tracing on
operation of the user program. page 7-52

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-5

3 System Design

3-2 Basic Flow of System Design 2

This section gives the basic flow and settings that are required to use the Sysmac Studio to design a
user program in a traditional top-down fashion.
This basic flow is suitable for user program design in a development scenario in which hardware and
software specifications are determined in advance. The procedures are described below.

 Creating a Project
A project file is created.
1. Starting the Sysmac Studio: Start the Sysmac Studio. 3-3-1 Starting and Exit-
ing the Sysmac Studio
on page 3-9
2. Creating a Project: Create a project. 3-3-2 Creating a Project
File on page 3-11

 Controller Configurations and Setup

The Controller Configurations and Setup are created.
• Controller Configurations:
1. Creating the EtherCAT Configuration: Register the EtherCAT slaves in 5-2 EtherCAT Configu-
the EtherCAT Configuration. ration and Setup on
page 5-4
2. Creating the CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration: Register the Units in 5-5 CPU/Expansion
the CPU/Expansion Racks Configuration. Rack Configuration and
Setup on page 5-44
• Controller Setup:
1. Editing Slave Parameters: Edit the Operation Settings of the slaves. 4-1 Variable Registra-
tion on page 4-3
2. Editing Unit Parameters: Edit the Operation Settings of the Units. 5-9 Task Settings on
page 5-109
3. Editing Controller Setup: Edit the Operation Settings of the Controller in 5-5 CPU/Expansion
the Controller Setup. Rack Configuration and
Setup on page 5-44
4. Registering Axis Variables: Register the Axis Variables that are used in 4-1 Variable Registra-
the user program in the Axis Settings. tion on page 4-3
5. Registering Axes Group Variables: Register the Axes Group Variables 4-1 Variable Registra-
that are used in programs that control interpolates axes in the Axes Group tion on page 4-3
Settings.
6. Editing Axes: Edit the Operation Settings of the axes that you registered 5-7 Motion Control Set-
in the Axis Settings. up on page 5-78
7. Editing Axes Groups: Edit the Operation Settings of the interpolated ax- 5-7 Motion Control Set-
es that you registered in the Axes Group Settings. up on page 5-78

3-6 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

 Designing the User Program

The variables are registered and the POUs are created.
1. Registering Global Variables: Register user-defined variables that are used 4-1 Variable Registra-

3-2 Basic Flow of System Design 2

in more than one program in the Global Variables. tion on page 4-3
2. Registering POUs: Register the programs, functions, and function blocks as 4-2 Registering POUs
POUs. on page 4-57
3. Registering Local Variables: Register the user-defined variables that are 4-1 Variable Registra-
used in only one POU in the Local Variables for that POU. tion on page 4-3
4. Registering Device Variables: Register device variables to user-defined vari- 4-1 Variable Registra-
ables in the I/O Map to use or to edit and use device variables in the user pro- tion on page 4-3
gram. The device variables interface the user program with I/O information
from the devices (slaves and Units).
5. Registering Cam Data Variables: Register the cam data variables that are 4-1 Variable Registra-
used in the user program in the Cam Data Settings. tion on page 4-3
6. Creating the POU Algorithms: Create the POU algorithms. 4-5 Programming on 3
page 4-85
4-5-1 Programming Lad-
der Diagrams on page
4-85
4-5-2 Programming
Structured Text on page
4-140

 Designing Tasks
The tasks, which are used to execute programs, are created.
1. Registering Tasks: Register the tasks in Tasks. 5-9 Task Settings on
page 5-109
2. Editing Tasks: Assign programs to the tasks. 5-9 Task Settings on
page 5-109
3. Editing Tasks: Design the I/O that are controlled by the tasks and the varia- 5-9 Task Settings on
bles that are shared between tasks. page 5-109

 Offline Program Debugging

The Simulator is used to debug the program.
1. Debugging through Simulation: Start the Simulator and debug the user pro- 7-3 Offline Debugging on
gram. page 7-80

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-7

3 System Design

 Preparations for Online Debugging

The settings that are required for online debugging are made.
1. Assigning Axis Variables and I/O Devices: Assign the axis variables and I/O 7-4-2 Assigning Axis Var-
devices in the Axis Settings. iables and I/O Devices
on page 7-117
2. Assigning Variables and Real I/O: Assign the user-defined variables and I/O 7-4-1 Assigning Varia-
devices in the I/O Map. bles and Real I/O on
page 7-115

 Online Program Debugging

Debugging is performed on the physical system.
1. Transferring Data to the Controller: Transfer the user program, system con- 7-5-1 Transferring/
figuration, and variable information to the Controller. Comparing Data to/from
the Controller on page
7-120
2. Testing Axis Operation: Use the MC Test Run to check wiring. 7-5-2 Testing Axis Oper-
ation (MC Test Run) on
page 7-142
3. Checking I/O: Use the I/O Map to check the I/O status between internal I/O 7-5-3 Checking I/O Wir-
devices and external I/O devices, and the wiring to external I/O devices. ing on page 7-146
4. Checking Assignments: Use a Watch Tab Page to check the assignments 7-5-4 Checking I/O As-
between user-defined variables and I/O devices. signments on page
7-147

 Testing Operation
Final debugging of the user program is performed using trial operation.
1. Debugging Programming with Data Traces: Execute data traces to check the 7-2-11 Data Tracing on
operation of the user program. page 7-52

3-8 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-3 Creating a Project

This section describes how to start and exit the Sysmac Studio, create and save projects, and perform
other basic operations.

3-3 Creating a Project

3-3-1 Starting and Exiting the Sysmac Studio

Precautions for Correct Use

Observe the following precautions when you start the Sysmac Studio or any of the Sup-
port Software that is provided with it.
• If you start the Sysmac Studio as a user without administrator rights, you may not be able to
use some functions due to a file access error. In this case, enable the User Account Control
(UAC) of Windows and restart the Sysmac Studio.
3
• If you use the simulation features of a Controller or HMI, log onto Windows as the administra-
tor or as a user with administrator rights and start the Sysmac Studio.

3-3-1 Starting and Exiting the Sysmac Studio

• Exit all applications that are not necessary to use the Sysmac Studio. For virus checker or
other software that could affect the startup and operations of the Sysmac Studio, take meas-
ures such as to remove the Sysmac Studio from the scope of virus checking.
• If any hard disks or printers that are connected to the computer are shared with other com-
puters on a network, isolate them so that they are no longer shared.
• With some notebook computers, the default settings assign the USB port to a modem or in-
frared communications. Refer to the user documentation for your computer and set the USB
port as a normal serial port.
• With some notebook computers, the default settings do not supply power to the USB port or
Ethernet port to save energy. There are energy-saving settings in Windows, and also some-
times in utilities or the BIOS of the computer. Refer to the user documentation for your com-
puter and disable all energy-saving features.

Starting the Sysmac Studio

Use one of the following methods to start the Sysmac Studio.
• Double-click the Sysmac Studio shortcut icon on your desktop.

• Select All Programs - OMRON - Sysmac Studio - Sysmac Studio from the Windows Start Menu.

The Sysmac Studio starts and the following window is displayed. This window is called the Start page.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-9

3 System Design

Exiting the Sysmac Studio

Use one of the following methods to exit the Sysmac Studio.
• Click the Close Button in the title bar.

• Select Exit from the File Menu.

The Sysmac Studio will close.

Note This menu is not displayed if the Start page is displayed. Click the Close Button in the title bar.

Additional Information

If there is unsaved data when you exit the Sysmac Studio, a dialog box will appear that asks if
you want to save the data.

Save the data if required. The Sysmac Studio will close after this operation.

3-10 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-3-2 Creating a Project File

This section describes how to create a project file.

Creating a Project File from the Start Page

3-3 Creating a Project

Use the following procedure to create a project file from the Start page.

1 Click New Project on the Start page.

3-3-2 Creating a Project File

The Project Properties Screen is displayed.
The following table gives the functions of the buttons.

Button Function
New Project Creates a project file.
Open Project Opens an existing project file.

2 Enter the project name (mandatory), author (optional), and comment (optional) in the
Project Properties Screen, select the device category, the device to use, and the version, and
then click the Create Button.

The property settings are listed below.

Property Description
Project name Enter the project name.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-11

3 System Design

Property Description
Author Enter the author name. If this is the first time you are creating a project after in-
stalling the Sysmac Studio, the user name that you entered when you logged on-
to Windows is displayed.*1
Comment Enter a comment.
Type Select the project type.
• Standard Project
This type is used for a normal project.
• Library Project
This type is used to create a library project. Refer to 9-3 Creating and Using
Libraries on page 9-8 for information on libraries.
• IAG Project
This type is used to create an IAG to use with an NA-series PT. Refer to the
NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. V118)
for details.
*1. You can change the author name that is displayed when you create a project. Change it in the op-
tion settings. Refer to the 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for details.

You can change the properties later. Refer to Editing Project File Properties on page 3-14, be-
low.

Additional Information

In the Sysmac Studio (64 bit), at the bottom left of the start page, Robot System – Open in
Emulation Mode is displayed. This feature is only available for projects that use Robot Inte-
grated CPU Units. For more information, refer to the Sysmac Studio Robot Integrated System
Building Function with Robot Integrated CPU Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. W595).

If you select a Vision Sensor, specify the model of the Vision Sensor in the next dialog box and
then click the OK Button.

A project file is created and the following window is displayed.

A project file is created with the specified device already inserted.

3-12 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Adding Devices

3-3 Creating a Project

Right-click the Controller Icon and select Add Device from the menu.

Or, select the device directly from the Insert Menu. Example: Controller−NJ501.
3
The Add Device Dialog Box is displayed.

3-3-2 Creating a Project File

Select the device and then click the OK Button. The device is added to the project.

To add Vision Sensors, Displacement Sensors (Measurement Sensors), HMIs, or Slave Terminals, se-
lect them from the Insert Menu.
To change the target device, select a device from the list.

Changing Devices
Right-click the device icon and select Change Device from the menu. Or, select the Change Device
from the Controller Menu.

The Change Device Dialog Box is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-13

3 System Design

Select the device and then click the OK Button. The device is changed.

Precautions for Correct Use

• If you change the device, the settings for functions that are not supported by the new model
will be lost.
• You cannot change the device for a Vision Sensor.
• You cannot change to a different category.

Controller Versions
If you select a Controller for the device, set the version.
You can set the version to the unit version of the Controller that you are using or to any earlier unit
version. You can program and make settings within the ranges that are supported for the unit version
that you set for the Controller. If you attempt to use functions that are not supported by the unit version
that you set, you will not be able to use them or errors will occur.

For example, if you set the version to 1.01 for an NJ-series Controller, you can use the Controller with-
in the ranges that are supported by unit version 1.01 of the Controller. In this case, you can transfer
the user program that you created to a Controller with unit version 1.02, but you cannot transfer it to a
Controller with a unit version of 1.00.

You can change the version after you add a Controller.

Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) and NY-series Industrial
Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558) for information on Controller
unit versions and supported functions.

Precautions for Correct Use

If you change the unit version, the settings for functions that are not supported by the new unit
version will be lost.

Precautions for Safe Use

If the configuration of the EtherCAT network includes an EtherCAT slave that cannot be used by
the Controllers after changing model, the configuration and settings of the EtherCAT network
will be all cleared. In that case, create and set an EtherCAT network configuration again.

Editing Project File Properties

Use the following procedure to edit the properties of a project file.

1 Click Open Project on the Start page and select the project file to edit.

3-14 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-3 Creating a Project

2 Click the Properties Button. Or click the Edit Properties icon ( ) that appears to the left of
the selected project file.
3

3-3-2 Creating a Project File

The Project Properties Dialog Box is displayed.

Property Value
Type Select a standard project or a library project. Refer to 9-3 Creating and Using Li-
braries on page 9-8 for information on library projects.
Enable password Select this option to enable setting password protection for the project file. Refer
protection for the to 3-3-9 Password Protection for Project Files on page 3-23 for details.
project file

3 Edit the properties, and then click the Save Button.

The properties are saved.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-15

3 System Design

3-3-3 Closing a Project File and Returning to the Start Page

When you close a project file, you will return to the Start page.
Use the following procedure.

1 Select Close from the File Menu.

A dialog box is displayed to ask if you need to save the project.

2 Click the Yes Button in the following dialog box.

The project name is registered in the project properties and the Start page is displayed.

If you click the No Button, the Start page is displayed without saving the project.
You can check the name of the registered project if you click Open Project on the Start page.

3-3-4 Saving the Project File

This section describes how to save the project file.

3-16 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

1 Select Save from the File Menu. (Or press the Ctrl + S Keys.)

3-3 Creating a Project

The current project file is saved.
To use a project file on a different computer, export the project file as described in 3-3-7 Export-
ing a Project File on page 3-20.
3
Additional Information

3-3-5 Saving a Project File Under a Different Name

• Information on synchronization is updated in the project file when synchronization is per-
formed. After you perform synchronization, save the project file before you close it. If you do
not save the project file, a message that says that the program execution IDs are different
and that all data will be transferred is displayed the next time you perform synchronization.
• If you register any EtherCAT slaves from other manufacturers in a project, the ESI for the
slaves is saved in the project file. If you open or import any project that was created on Sys-
mac Studio version 1.08 or lower, save the project file.

3-3-5 Saving a Project File Under a Different Name

This section describes how to save a project file under a different name.

1 Select Save As from the File Menu.

The Project Properties Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Change the project file name, and then click the Save Button.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-17

3 System Design

The project file is saved.

Additional Information

Information on synchronization is updated in the project file when synchronization is performed.

After you perform synchronization, save the project file before you close it.
If you do not save the project file, a message that says that the program execution IDs are dif-
ferent and that all data will be transferred is displayed the next time you perform synchroniza-
tion.

3-3-6 Opening a Project File

Use the following procedure to open an existing project file.

1 Click Open Project on the Start page.

The Project Screen is displayed.

3-18 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

(a)

(b)

3-3 Creating a Project

(c)

Item Description
3
(a) Project Name Search Enter a text string. Then, the project list will be narrowed to
display projects with names that contain the text string you en-

3-3-6 Opening a Project File

ter.
The number of projects that are currently displayed in the
project list is displayed to the right.
(b) Project list A list of projects is displayed.
(c) Property informa- Project The project names that were entered as a mandatory item
tion*1 name when the projects were created are displayed.
The default name is NewProject.
Comment The comment that was entered when the project was created
is displayed.
Last modi- The last date and time that the project was modified is dis-
fied played.
Created The date and time that the project was created is displayed.
Author The creator that was entered when the project was created is
displayed.
*1. You can drag the column headings to change the order of the property items.

2 Select a project from the list of project names and click the Open Button.

The project is opened.

Additional Information

If you open a project that was created with Sysmac Studio version 1.01 or lower with version
1.05 or higher, a dialog box will appear for you to select the model of the CPU Unit. Select the
model of the CPU Unit that is actually connected.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-19

3 System Design

3-3-7 Exporting a Project File

You can use the following methods to export a project file.
Method 1: Exporting from the Start page
Method 2: Exporting from the Menu Bar of the Application Window

 Method 1: Exporting from the Start page

1 Select Close from the File Menu to return to the Start page.

2 Click Open Project on the Start page.

3 Select the project to export from the list of project names and click Export.

The Export Project Dialog Box is displayed.

4 Specify a directory, enter a file name, select the file type, and then click the Save Button.

The project is exported to a file.

Extension Description
smc2*1 or smc One file contains all of the project data.

csm2*1 or csm*2 One file contains all of the project data. The file is smaller than the smc file. However,
the project is always built before the data is transferred to the Controller.
*1. Project files with this extension are supported by Sysmac Studio version 1.08 or higher.
*2. Project files with this extension are supported by Sysmac Studio version 1.04 or higher.

3-20 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Precautions for Correct Use

The trace data is not included in csm files exported from Sysmac Studio version 1.05 or higher
or in csm2 export files. Export any required trace data separately.

Additional Information

3-3 Creating a Project

• The exported project file has the same contents as a project that was saved on the Sysmac
Studio.
• An improved save algorithm in Sysmac Studio version 1.06 or higher exports smaller files
than those that are exported from version 1.05 or lower.
• You can export the contents of a project file for which password protection is set. Refer to
3-3-9 Password Protection for Project Files on page 3-23 for the procedure to set password
protection.

 Method 2: Exporting from the Menu Bar of the Application Window 3

3-3-8 Importing a Project File

Select Export from the File Menu in the Application Window.

The Export Project Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Specify a directory, enter a file name, and then click the Save Button.
The project is exported to a file.

Precautions for Correct Use

If any EtherCAT slaves from other manufacturers are registered in a project, first save the
project file, and then select the smc2 or csm2 format and export the file.
If you import an exported project file to Sysmac Studio version 1.08 and save the project file,
the ESI for the slaves is lost.

3-3-8 Importing a Project File

You can use the following methods to import a project file.
Method 1: Importing from the Start page
Method 2: Importing from the Menu Bar of the Application Window

 Method 1: Importing from the Start page

1 Click Import.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-21

3 System Design

The Import file Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select a project file with an .smc2, .csm2, .smc, or .csm file name extension, and then click the
Open Button.

The project file is imported.

 Method 2: Importing from the Menu Bar of the Application Window

1 Select Import from the File Menu in the Application Window.

The Import file Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select a project file and then click the Open Button.

The project file is imported.

3-22 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Additional Information

If you import a project that was created with Sysmac Studio version 1.01 or lower with version
1.05 or higher, a dialog box will appear for you to select the model of the CPU Unit. Select the
model of the CPU Unit that is actually connected.

3-3-9 Password Protection for Project Files

3-3 Creating a Project

You can set password protection for project files to protect your assets.
If password protection is set, a password is required for the following operations.
• Opening the project file
• Changing the properties of the project file
• Importing the contents of the project file

3
Setting and Clearing Password Protection for Project Files

3-3-9 Password Protection for Project Files

The procedures to set and clear password protection are given below.

1 Select a project on the Start page. Then, click the Properties Button or click the Edit

Properties icon ( ).
The Project Properties Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the Enable password protection for the project file Check Box, enter the password, and
click the Save Button. The file is saved.

Password protection is now set.

To clear the password protection, clear the selection of the Enable password protection for the
project file Check Box and click the Save Button. The file is saved.

Precautions for Correct Use

• For the password, enter a string of 8 to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters. The pass-
word is case sensitive.
• If you forget the password, you will no longer be able to open the project file, change the
properties of the project file, or import the contents of the project file. Be sure to record the
password in case you forget it.
• Password protection for project files does not apply to data that is transferred to the Control-
ler. To prevent reading data from the Controller, set operation authorities or data protection.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-23

3 System Design

Additional Information

If you place password protection on a project that has more than one version, the same pass-
word protection will be placed on all versions in the project.

Opening a Project File for Which Password Protection Is Set

Use the following procedure to open a project file for which password protection is set.

1 Click Open Project on the Start page.

The Project Screen is displayed.

2 Select a project from the list of project names and click the Open Button.

The Enter a password Dialog Box is displayed.

3 Enter the password, and click the OK Button.

The project is opened.

Changing the Properties of a Project File for Which Password Pro-

tection Is Set
Use the following procedure to change the properties of a project file for which password protection is
set.

1 Select the project file to edit on the Start page.

3-24 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-3 Creating a Project

2 Click the Properties Button. Or click the Edit Properties icon ( ) that appears to the left of
the selected project file.
The Enter a password Dialog Box is displayed.
3

3-3-9 Password Protection for Project Files

3 Enter the password, and click the OK Button.
The Project Properties Dialog Box is displayed.

Importing a Project File for Which Password Protection is Set

Use the following procedure to import a project file for which a password was set when the project was
exported.

1 Click Import.

The Import file Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select a project file with an .smc2, .csm2, .smc, or .csm file name extension, and then click the
Open Button.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-25

3 System Design

The Enter a password Dialog Box is displayed.

3 Enter the password, and click the OK Button.

The project file is imported.

3-3-10 Project Update History Management

You can assign numbers to projects to manage the project history. The project numbers are displayed
in a hierarchy in the Project Screen.
You can also compare the project between different project numbers offline.

(a)
(b)
(c)

(d)

Number Item Description

(a) Newest project This is the most recent project.

3-26 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Number Item Description

(b) Project with dif- These are the project versions that were saved when the project number was
ferent project changed. The project number is automatically added after the project name.
numbers
(c) Properties The properties of the selected project number are displayed.
(d) Compare This button compares the selected projects or different versions of the same
project to show the differences. You can merge the differences. Refer to 4-9 Off-

3-3 Creating a Project

line Comparison on page 4-167 for the offline comparison and merging proce-
dures.

Saving a Project with a New Project Number

Use the following procedure to save a project with a new project number.
3
1 Select Save As New Number from the File Menu.

3-3-10 Project Update History Management

The Project Properties Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Edit the properties, and then click the Save Button.

The project is saved with the most recent project number.

The project number is automatically added to the project that was saved and the project is dis-
played in a hierarchy for the project.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-27

3 System Design

Additional Information

• A hierarchy is not displayed for the project when a project is first created or when there is
only one project number.
• The project numbers are displayed in order in the hierarchy with the newest project at the top.
• A new number is automatically added for the project number. You cannot change the project
numbers.
• Project properties are set for each project number.

Opening a Project with a Specific Project Number

Use the following procedure to open a project with a specific project number.

1 Select the project with the desired project number from the project hierarchy and click the
Open Button.

The selected project is opened.

Additional Information

You cannot overwrite a project that was opened for a specific project number. To make
changes, either save the project under a different name or save it for the most recent project
number.

3-3-11 Creating a Project from an Online Connection

If you go online with the Controller when there is no project, a project is created automatically.

3-28 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

You can go online with the Controller and upload the project even if there is no project file on the com-
puter.
Click Connect to Device.

3-3 Creating a Project

Refer to 6-2-8 Going Online without a Project on page 6-8 for the procedure.

3
3-3-12 Displaying and Registering Licenses

3-3-12 Displaying and Registering Licenses

Use the following procedure to check and register licenses.

1 Click License on the Start page.

The licensed products that are currently registered are displayed.

If you click the license in the product name column, detailed information is displayed in the
product detailed information column.
The number of days that remains for the trial edition is displayed under License.

2 To register a new license, click the Register License Button.

A License Registration Dialog Box is displayed.

3 Enter the license number, and then click the Register Button.
If the license is registered normally, a message appears asking you to restart the software.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-29

3 System Design

Restart the Sysmac Studio to complete registration.

3-3-13 Project Version Control

Use the following procedure to display the version-controlled project list of the Sysmac Studio.

You can use the project version control function to control the changes made to Sysmac Studio
projects.
To use the Sysmac Studio project version control function, you need to separately purchase a license
of the Sysmac Studio Team Development Option.
Refer to the Sysmac Studio Project Version Control Function Operation Manual (Cat. No. W589) for
details on the Sysmac Studio project version control function.

3-30 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-4 Parts of the Window

This section gives the names, functions, and basic arrangement of the parts of the Sysmac Studio
Window.
You can change the display locations of the parts of the window. Refer to 3-4-5 Changing the Display

3-4 Parts of the Window

Location of Window Parts on page 3-43 for detailed procedures.

3-4-1 Application Window

This is the main Sysmac Studio window.
Menu bar Toolbar

3-4-1 Application Window

Configurations
and Setup Header

(4) (5)
(1)
Programming
Header

(3)

(6)
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)
(2)
(7)

Status Bar

Number Name
(1) Multiview Explorer
(2) Filter Pane
(3) Edit Pane
(4) Toolbox
(5) Search and Replace Pane
(6) Controller Status Pane
(7) Simulation Pane
(8) Cross Reference Tab Page
(9) Output Tab Page
(10) Watch Tab Page
(11) Build Tab Page
(12) Search and Replace Results Tab Page
(13) Differential Monitor Tab Page

Hiding/Showing the Menu Bar, Toolbar, and Status Bar

You can hide or show the menu bar, toolbar, and status bar.
Right-click the title bar in the main window and select the items to display from the menu. Checkmarks
will appear by them. To hide the items, select them again. The checkmarks will disappear.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-31

3 System Design

You can also press the Alt Key to display the menu bar when it is hidden.

3-4-2 Multiview Explorer (1)

• This pane is your access point for all Sysmac Studio data. It is separated into
Configurations and Setup and Programming. Each of these is displayed in a
tree structure.

• Click the icons ( or ) in front of each item in the tree to expand or col-
lapse the tree.
• A pop-up menu is displayed if you right-click any data items that can be set.

 Items in the Multiview Explorer

Configurations and Setup Programming
EtherCAT POUs
CPU/Expansion Racks Programs
CPU Rack Functions
Expansion Racks Function Blocks
I/O Map Data
Controller Setup Data Types
Operation Settings Global Variables
Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings Tasks
Motion Control Setup
Axis Settings
Axes Group Settings
Cam Data Settings
Event Settings
Task Settings
Data Trace Settings

Device List and Device Icon for the Project

Use this list and icon to switch the device to edit and add/delete devices.

3-32 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

 Device List
Devices that are registered in the project are displayed.
Select the device to edit in the device list and configure the device or create a program.

You can display the device list in either of the following two ways.
Right-click the device icon and select Switch Device Control Display from the pop-up menu, or

3-4 Parts of the Window

click the device icon to toggle the display.

 Device Icon
The icon for the device that is selected in the device list is displayed.
3
You can add or change devices, or switch the display method of the device list in the pop-up menu
that appears when you right-click the device icon.

3-4-2 Multiview Explorer (1)

Color Codes
You can display marks in five colors on the categories and members of the Multi-
view Explorer.

You can define how you want to use these marks, e.g., to indicate data develop-
ment status or developer assignments. You can also use them as filter conditions in
the Filter Pane that is described later in this section.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-33

3 System Design

Error Icons
The error icon indicates when there is an error in the edited data.

Click this icon to display the item with the error in the Edit Pane.

Precautions for Correct Use

You cannot download the data to the NJ/NX/NY-series Controller if an error icon is displayed.

Filter Pane (2)

The Filter Pane allows you to search for color codes and for items with an error icon. The results are
displayed in a list. Click the Filter Pane Bar to display the Filter Pane. The Filter Pane is hidden auto-
matically if the mouse is not placed in it for more than five seconds at a time. Automatically hiding the

Filter Pane can be canceled by clicking the pin ( ) icon.

You can search for only items with a specific color code or items with error icons to display a list with
only items that meet the search condition. This allows you to edit multiple items from a single list.
Click any item in the search result to display the item in the Edit Pane.

3-34 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-4-3 Edit Pane (3)

3-4 Parts of the Window

The Edit Pane is used to display and edit the data for any of the items.
Double-click an item in the Multiview Explorer to display details of the selected item in the Edit Pane. 3
The Edit Pane is displayed as tab pages, and you can switch the tab page to display in the Edit Pane
by clicking the corresponding tab.

3-4-3 Edit Pane (3)

You can undock the Edit Pane from the main window. Refer to 3-4-5 Changing the Display Location of
Window Parts on page 3-43 for details.

Additional Information

• You can use an option setting to change the number of tab pages in the Edit Pane that can
be displayed at a time. The default setting is 10, and the maximum display number is 20. Al-
so, you can set so that an old tab page that has not been used is closed automatically when
the maximum display number is exceeded. Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on
page 8-123 for details on the settings.
• When you perform any of the following operations, all of the tab pages that are not the target
of operation are closed automatically.
a) Online editing
b) Synchronization
c) Simulation
d) Setting the Setting Change during RUN Mode parameter in the Controller Setup
e) Uploading the results of data tracing
f) Displaying the Troubleshooting Dialog Box
g) Transferring all Controller data
• You can close the Edit Pane from the pop-up menu that appears when you right-click one of
the tabs.

Menu command Description

Close All But This Select this command to close all tab pages and floating edit windows, except
for the selected tab page.
Close All Except Select this command to close all tab pages and floating edit windows for other
Active Device devices, leaving those for the selected device.
Close All Select this command to close all tab pages and floating edit windows, including
the selected tab page.

 Display Color of Each Tab

The color of each tab in the Edit Pane indicates the selection status of both the tab page and the
device.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-35

3 System Design

Tab page Device Display Description

Selected Selected Both the tab page and the device are selected. A tab
changes to this state when it is clicked.
Not select- The tab page is selected and it is for a device that is
ed not selected in the device list.
Not select- Selected The tab page is not selected and it is for the device
ed that is selected in the device list.
Not select- The tab page is not selected and it is for a device
ed that is not selected in the device list.

 Creating a Tab Group

When more than one tab page exists in the Edit Pane, you can click any of the tabs to switch the
tab page displayed in the Edit Pane. Such a group of tabs that you can click to switch the displayed
tab page is called tab group.
By creating tab groups, you can organize and manage more than one tab page.

To create a tab group, right-click any of the tabs to display the pop-up menu.

Menu com-
Description Remarks
mand
New Horizon- Select this command to divide the Edit Pane into You can display the pop-up menu
tal Tab Group upper and lower sections and move the selected when the current tab group has more
tab page to the tab group that is newly created. than one tab page.
New Vertical Select this command to divide the Edit Pane into You can display the pop-up menu
Tab Group left and right sections and move the selected tab when the current tab group has more
page to the newly created tab group. than one tab page.
Move to Next Select this command to move the selected tab You can display the pop-up menu
Tab Group page to the tab group below or to the right of the when there is a tab group below or to
current tab group. the right of the current tab group.
Move to Previ- Select this command to move the selected tab You can display the pop-up menu
ous Tab Group page to the tab group above or to the left of the when there is a tab group above or to
current tab group. the left of the current tab group.

Additional Information

• You can group tab pages only when the Edit Pane has tab pages.
• You can also move tab pages between tab groups by dragging the mouse. Refer to Docking
and Undocking on page 3-43 for the procedure.

Smart Project Search

You can search the Multiview Explorer for the items you want to display.
When there are a large number of programs or sections registered in the Multiview Explorer, you can
quickly display the desired program or section by searching for it.

1 Select Smart Project Search from the View Menu. Or, press the Ctrl + Shift + F Keys.
The Smart Project Search Dialog Box is displayed.

3-36 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-4 Parts of the Window

2 Enter in the Search Box part of the name of the item to display in the Edit Pane.
The items in the Multiview Explorer or menus that contain the entered text string are displayed
on the left side of the search result list.

3-4-3 Edit Pane (3)

The search results are displayed from the top in the order they are displayed in the Multiview
Explorer.
On the right side of the search result list, the level that is one higher than the item that resulted
from the search is displayed.

3 Double-click the desired item in the search result list. Or, press the Enter Key.
The Search Dialog Box is closed and the selected item is displayed in the Edit Pane.
To close the Search Dialog Box without selecting an item, click in a pane other than the Search
Dialog Box or press the Esc Key.

Additional Information

• You can enter English characters into the Search Box to search for item names that contain
words that start with the entered characters in capitals.
Example: If you enter is0 in the Search Box, an item named InitialSetting0 is displayed in the
search result list.
• You can search for the items displayed in the Edit Pane when online only when the Sysmac
Studio is online.

 Related Item List

If you search for a section or cam definition in the Search Dialog Box, any other sections or cam
definitions that are in the same level as the sections and cam definitions in the search results are
displayed. This allows you to quickly check the sections and cam definitions that are related to the
item that you searched for.
The following procedure uses a search for a section as an example. The procedure for searching
for cam definitions is essentially the same.

1 Select a section that is displayed in the search result list.

If there are any other sections in the program to which the selected section belongs, a related
item list is displayed to the right side of the search result list.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-37

3 System Design

All of the other sections that are at the same level as the selected section are displayed.

2 Double-click the desired section in the related item list. Or, press the Ctrl + Up or Ctrl + Down
Keys to select the section and then press the Enter Key.
The related item list and Search Dialog Box are closed and the selected section is displayed in
the Edit Pane.

Displaying Recently Closed Windows

For the currently selected device, you can display a thumbnail index of the windows that were previ-
ously displayed in the Edit Pane, and you can select a window from the thumbnail index to display it
again.

1 Select Recently Closed Windows from the View Menu. Or, press the Ctrl + Shift + H Keys.
The windows previously displayed in the Edit Pane are displayed in the thumbnail index of re-
cently closed windows.

The thumbnails of up to the 20 most recently closed windows are displayed in the order they
were closed from the upper left to the bottom right.
Select the window to display with the mouse or the Arrow Keys. You can select more than one
window if you click the windows while you hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key or if you press the
Arrow Keys while you hold down the Shift or Ctrl Key.

2 Double-click the window to display. Or, press the Enter Key.

The thumbnail index is closed and the selected window is displayed in the Edit Pane.
To close the thumbnail index without selecting a window, click in a pane other than the thumb-
nail index or press the Esc Key.

3-38 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Additional Information

• The history of recently closed windows is retained for each device.

• If data of a window is protected, a blank thumbnail is displayed for the window in the index of
windows. These windows are not displayed in the Edit Pane even if you double-click them.
• If you upload data from a different device, the history of recently closed windows from the de-
vice that was displayed before the upload is cleared.

3-4 Parts of the Window

 Clearing the Histories of Recently Closed Windows
You can delete all of the histories of recently closed windows from a project.
Select Clear Recently Closed Windows History from the View Menu, and then click the Yes But-
ton in the confirmation dialog box that is displayed. All of the histories are deleted.

Jumping to the Multiview Explorer 3

From the selected tab page in the Edit Pane, you can jump to the relevant location in the Multiview

3-4-3 Edit Pane (3)

Explorer.

1 Select the target tab page in the Edit Pane and right-click on it, and select Jump to Multiview
Explorer from the pop-up menu, or select Jump to Multiview Explorer from the Edit Menu.
Or, select the tab page in the Edit Pane and press the Shift + Alt + L Keys.

The focus moves to the relevant location in the Multiview Explorer.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-39

3 System Design

3-4-4 Toolbox (4)

The Toolbox shows the objects that you can use to edit the data that is displayed in
the Edit Pane.
The contents for the items displayed in the Edit Pane are displayed.

You can expand or omit the display of objects by selecting Expand All or Collapse
All from the pop-up menu.

Search and Replace Pane (5)

In the Search and Replace Pane, you can search for and replace strings in the data under Program-
ming in the Multiview Explorer.

Controller Status Pane (6)

The Controller Status Pane shows the current operating status of the Controller. The Controller Status
Pane is displayed only while the Sysmac Studio is online with the Controller.

Additional Information

The Controller Status Pane is not displayed when the Sysmac Studio is offline.

3-40 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Simulation Pane (7)

3-4 Parts of the Window

The Simulation Pane is used to set up, start, and stop the Simulator for the Controller.

Additional Information

The Simulation Pane is not displayed when the Sysmac Studio is online with the Controller.

3
Cross Reference Tab Page (8)

3-4-4 Toolbox (4)

A Cross Reference Tab Page displays a list of where variables, data types, I/O ports, functions, and
function blocks are used in the Sysmac Studio.
You can select a variable or other item in the Ladder Editor or a variable table to display a list of the
locations where the item is used.
You can click any of the items in the list to jump to the location where the item is used.

Output Tab Page (9)

The Output Tab Page shows the results of building.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-41

3 System Design

Watch Tab Page (10)

The Watch Tab Page shows the monitor results of the Simulator or online Controller.
You can monitor the current values of variables by inputting the variables directly or by dragging them
from a variable table or program rung.

Build Tab Page (11)

The Build Tab Page shows the results of program checks and building.
Double-click any of the results to display the location of the program check error, program check warn-
ing, or building error in the Edit Pane of the Sysmac Studio so that you can edit it.

Search and Replace Results Tab Page (12)

The Search and Replace Results Tab Page shows the results when Search All or Replace All is exe-
cuted.
Double-click any of the search/replace results to display the location in the Edit Pane of the Sysmac
Studio so that you can edit it.

Differential Monitor Tab Page (13)

3-42 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

You can detect the number of times the specified BOOL variable or BOOL member changes to TRUE
or FALSE and display the count in this tab page.
You can check if bits turn ON and OFF and the number of times that they turn ON and OFF.

3-4-5 Changing the Display Location of Window Parts

3-4 Parts of the Window

You can change the positions of the parts of the main Sysmac Studio window. You can also hide and
display parts of the window.

Docking and Undocking

You can undock the Edit Pane, Watch Tab Pages, and other window parts from the main Sysmac Stu-
dio window and position them as desired. You can dock windows into tab groups.
3
Undocking is when you separate a part of the main window. Docking is when you join a window as a
part of the main window again. A window that was separated from the main window is called a floating

3-4-5 Changing the Display Location of Window Parts

window. A window that is docked with the main window is called a docked window.

 Undocking Parts of the Window

1 Click and drag the title bar of a pane or the tab of a tab page.
Docking guides are displayed.

2 Release the mouse button when the pane or tab page is at any location other than the docking
guides.
The pane or tab page will become a floating window.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-43

3 System Design

 Docking Windows

1 Click and drag the title bar of the window or the tab of a tab page.
Docking guides are displayed in the locations where you can dock the window or tab page.
The docking guide icons that are displayed depend on the position of the mouse cursor. The
icons that are displayed are shown in the following table.

Icon Description
The window or tab page that you drag is aligned vertically or horizontally with the object
where the icon is displayed.

The window or tab page that you drag is placed in a tab group with the object where the
icon is displayed.

When you align the mouse cursor with a docking guide icon, a blue shaded area is displayed in
the window docking position.

2 Align the mouse cursor with any of the docking guide icons and release the mouse button.
The window is positioned at the docking position with the blue shaded area.

3-44 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-4 Parts of the Window

Windows are classified into the following two groups depending on where you can dock the
3
windows.

Window group Target object Dockable locations

3-4-5 Changing the Display Location of Window Parts

Edit windows Tab pages in the Edit Edit Pane
Pane
Tool windows Multiview Explorer Any tool window or anywhere in the main window except for
Toolbox the Edit Pane
Search and Replace
Pane
Watch Tab Page
Controller Status Pane
Simulation Pane
Output Tab Page
Build Tab Page
Cross Reference Tab
Page
Search and Replace
Results Tab Page
Differential Monitor Tab
Page

Here, “tool windows” refers to the window group of panes and tab pages that are not displayed
in the Edit Pane.
You can place windows that are in the same group into tab groups.

Additional Information

• When you drag a tool window, you can horizontally or vertically align it or overlap it in a tab
group with not only the main window, but also with other floating tool windows.
• You can group tab pages in the Edit Pane from the pop-up menu that appears when you
rightclick one of the tabs.
• You can use the following methods to switch between a floating and docked window.
a) Double-click the title bar of the window/pane or the tab of the tab page.
b) Right-click the title bar or tab and select Float/Dock from the menu.
• For the currently selected pane, the upper part of the title bar is displayed in light blue.

 Moving the Focus between Objects

You can use the Ctrl+Tab Keys to move the focus between windows, panes, and tab pages.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-45

3 System Design

1 Press the Ctrl+Tab Keys when an edit window or a tool window is active.
The Change Display Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Hold down the Ctrl Key and press the Tab Key or an Arrow Key to select the desired object
name.
When you release the key, the Change Display Dialog Box is hidden and the focus moves to
the selected object.

 Restoring the Default Window Layout

You can restore the window layout to the Sysmac Studio default layout.
Select Reset Window Layout from the View Menu.

Displaying/Hiding Docked Windows

You can hide and display the tool windows in the main window.
The following procedure uses the Toolbox as an example.

1 Click the Pin Button on the Toolbox.

The Toolbox is hidden and a Show/Hide Tab is displayed on the closest adjacent edge of the
main window.

If you move the mouse cursor over the Show/Hide Tab, the Toolbox is displayed. When you
move the cursor off the Show/Hide Tab, the Toolbox is hidden again.

2 To display the Toolbox again, click the Show/Hide Tab and then click the horizontal Pin Button.

3-46 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-4-6 Saving and Restoring the Window Layout

You can save the display positions of window parts that make up the Sysmac Studio main window
(hereinafter called window layout) on your computer and restore the window layout based on the infor-
mation.
The following functions are available for saving and restoring the window layout.

3-4 Parts of the Window

Function Description
Automatic Window Layout The window layout is automatically saved to your computer when you close a
Saving and Restoration project. The saved window layout is automatically restored when you open the
project.
Window Layout Template The currently displayed window layout is saved as a template. Saved templates
Management are displayed in a list.
You can select any template from the list and then change the layout of the dis-
played window.
3
Saving and restoring the window layout support all window parts except for the following.

3-4-6 Saving and Restoring the Window Layout

• Toolbar
• Filter Pane
• Edit Pane
Refer to 3-4-1 Application Window on page 3-31 for details on the window parts.

Automatic Window Layout Saving and Restoration

You can choose whether to manage the window layout information for each project or as common for
all projects. Change the management method in the option settings. Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Op-
tion Settings on page 8-123 for details on the option settings.

Window Layout Template Management

Manage the window layout in the Window Layout Template Management Dialog Box.

1 Select Manage Window Layout Templates from the View Menu.

The Window Layout Template Management Dialog Box is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-47

3 System Design

(a) (b)
(c)

(f)
(d) (g)
(e)
(h)

(i)

No. Item Description

(a) Templates A list of registered window layout templates is displayed.
(b) Update with Current Use this button to update the selected window layout template with the
Window Layout Button currently displayed window layout.
(c) Apply To Window Use this button to apply the selected window layout template to the
Layout Button currently displayed window layout.
(d) Create New Template Use this button to create a new template. Save the currently displayed
Button window layout with any name.
(e) Rename Button Use this button to rename the selected template.
(f) Up Button and Down Use these buttons to move the selected template up and down to
Button change the display order of templates.
(g) Delete Button Use this button to delete the selected template.
(h) Window layout Set the window layout to apply to the project that you open. This set-
opening a project ting is displayed only when you select Save/restore the window layout
as the common setting with all projects in the option settings. Refer to
8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for details on the
option settings.
Window layout of Select this option to open the project with the window layout of the last
the last closed closed project.
project
Sysmac Studio de- Select this option to open the project with the default window layout.
fault window layout
Registered template Select this option to open the project with the window layout of a regis-
tered template.
Select the window layout to apply to the project from the registered
templates.
(i) Close Button Use this button to close the Window Layout Template Management Di-
alog Box.

 Registering a New Template

Use the following procedure to register the currently displayed window layout as a template.

1 In the Window Layout Template Management Dialog Box, click the Create New Template
Button.

3-48 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

The Create New Template Dialog Box is displayed.

3-4 Parts of the Window

2 Enter a name in the Template Name box, and then click the OK Button.
The currently displayed window layout is saved and registered as a new template.

3-4-6 Saving and Restoring the Window Layout

 Updating a Window Layout Template
Use the following procedure to update a registered window layout template with the currently dis-
played window layout.

1 In the Window Layout Template Management Dialog Box, select the template to update, and
then click the Update with Current Window Layout Button.

An update confirmation dialog box is displayed, which asks if you want to apply it.

Clicking the Yes button updates the target template with the currently displayed window layout.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-49

3 System Design

 Applying a Window Layout Template

Use the following procedure to apply a registered window layout template to the currently displayed
window layout.

1 In the Window Layout Template Management Dialog Box, select the template to apply to the
currently displayed window layout, and then click the Apply To Window Layout Button.

A confirmation dialog box is displayed, which asks if you want to apply it.

Clicking the Yes button displays the currently displayed window using the selected window lay-
out template.

Additional Information

• This function can be used only in a standard project.

• The automatic window layout saving and restoration functions can be used simultaneously.

3-50 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-5 Menu Command Structure

The menu commands that are always displayed when a Controller is selected are listed below.

3-5 Menu Command Structure

For specific device menu commands, refer to the manual for the specific device.

Menu Submenu/command
File Close ---
Save
Save As
Save As New Number
Import
Export
Offline Comparison 3
Page Settings
Print
Exit
Edit Undo ---
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
Select All
Search and Replace
Jump
View Multiview Explorer ---
Toolbox
3D Visualizer
Output Tab Page
Watch Tab Page
Watch Tab Page (Table)
Cross Reference Tab Page
Build Tab Page
Search and Replace Results Tab Page
Simulation Pane
Differential Monitor
Variable Table
Variable Manager
Smart Project Search
Recently Closed Windows
Clear Recently Closed Windows History
Zoom Zoom In
Zoom Out
Zoom to Fit
Zoom Reset
Reset Window Layout ---

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-51

3 System Design

Menu Submenu/command
Insert Circuit Parts Line
N.O. Input
N.C. Input
OR with N.O. Input
OR with N.C. Input
Output
NOT Output
Function
Function Block
Insert Controller NJ101
NJ301
NJ501
NX102
NX1P2
NX701
NY512
NY532
Application Manager ---
Safety Network Controller NX
Drive ---
Slave Terminal EtherNet/IP Coupler or PROFINET Coupler
Vision Sensor FH
FQ-M
Measurement Sensor ZW
HMI NA5
Program Ladder
ST
Section
Function Ladder
ST
Function Block Ladder
ST
Debug Program Ladder
ST
Section
Axis Settings ---
Axes Group Settings
Cam Data Settings ---
Data Trace

3-52 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Menu Submenu/command
Project Check All Programs ---
Check Selected Programs
Build Controller

3-5 Menu Command Structure

Rebuild Controller
Abort Build
Memory Usage
Online Edit Start
Transfer
Cancel
Go to Edit Pane
Library Show References
Library Setting
Create Library 3

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-53

3 System Design

Menu Submenu/command
Controller Communications Setup ---
Change Device
Online
Offline
Synchronization
Transfer To Controller
From Controller
Mode RUN Mode
PROGRAM Mode
Monitor ---
Stop Monitoring
Set/Reset Set
Reset
Forced Refreshing TRUE
FALSE
Cancel
Cancel All
MC Test Run Start
Stop
MC Monitor Table ---
SD Memory Card
Controller Clock
Release Access Right
Update CPU Unit Name
Security Setting of Operation Authority
ID for User Program Execution
CPU Unit Write Protection
Set/Release Data Protection
Temporary Release of Change Prohibition
Finish Temporary Release of Change Pro-
hibition
Temporary Release of Display/Change
Prohibition
Finish Temporary Release of Display/
Change Prohibition
Clear All Memory ---
Reset Controller

3-54 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Menu Submenu/command
Simulation Run ---
Run in PROGRAM mode
Pause

3-5 Menu Command Structure

Stop
Step Execution
Step In
Step Out
Continuous Step Execution
Execute One Scan
Jump to Current Position
Breakpoint Window
Set/Clear Breakpoint
Enable/Disable Breakpoint 3
Clear All Breakpoints
Calibration
Run in Execution Time Estimation Mode
Transfer All Variable Present Values
Run with NA Simulator
Start NS Integrated Simulation
Tools Troubleshooting ---
Event Log Viewer ---
EtherCAT Diagnosis/Statistics Information ---
Viewer
Backup Backup Controller
Restore Controller
Compare with Backup File
Import Backup File
Export Backup File
Backup Variables and Memory
Restore Variables and Memory
Export Global Variables Network Configurator
CX-Designer
Comments for Variables and Data Types Import
Export
Import ST Program ---
Import Motor sizing tool Results ---
Update Configurations and Setup Transfer ---
Data
EtherNet/IP Connection Settings ---
Option ---

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-55

3 System Design

Menu Submenu/command
Window Close ---
Float
Dock
New Horizontal Tab Group
New Vertical Tab Group
Move to Next Tab Group
Move to Previous Tab Group
Close All But This
Close All Except Active Device
Close All
Close Tab
Open Next Tab
Open Previous Tab
Help Help Contents ---
Instruction Reference
System Defined Variable Reference
Keyboard Mapping Reference
Manual Download
Online Registration
About Sysmac Studio

3-56 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-6 Basic Editing Operations

The following table lists the basic operations that you can perform in the Multiview Explorer and Edit

3-6 Basic Editing Operations

Pane.
The operations that you can use depend on the item that you are editing.

Pop-up menu Mouse opera-

Operation Button Menu command Shortcut keys
command tion
Inserting --- --- Insert --- R or Shift + R
Cutting Edit - Cut Cut Drag Ctrl + X

Copying Edit - Copy Copy Press Ctrl and Ctrl + C

drag. 3
Pasting Edit - Paste Paste Drop Ctrl + V

Deleting Edit - Delete Delete --- Delete

Deleting to the left --- --- --- --- BackSpace

Changing a name --- --- Rename --- ---
Selecting rows --- --- Select All Enclose items. Ctrl + ↑
Undoing Edit - Undo Undo --- Ctrl + Z

Redoing Edit - Redo Redo --- Ctrl + Y

Entering Edit Mode --- --- Edit Double-click F2

Leaving Edit Mode --- --- --- Click Enter
Moving the cursor --- --- --- --- ↑, ↓, ←, or →
Moving the cursor to next or previous --- --- --- --- Tab or Shift + Tab
item
Moving the cursor to the beginning of --- --- --- --- Home
the row
Moving the cursor to the end of the --- --- --- --- End
row
Moving to the next page --- --- --- --- PageDown
Moving to previous page --- --- --- --- PageUp
Finding and replacing --- --- --- --- Ctrl + F
Go To Rung --- --- --- --- G
Display Rung Comment List --- --- --- --- L

Note 1. The editing operation depends on the item/row.

Note 2. Refer to A-5 Shortcut Keys on page A-19 for other shortcut keys.

Pop-up Menus
Pop-up menus are provided to facilitate data editing in the panes.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-57

3 System Design

Right-click the data item and select the command (e.g., Add, Rename, Copy, or Paste) from the pop-
up menu.

Entry Assistance
When you enter characters from the keyboard at the following times, the list of candidates that is dis-
played for selection is automatically narrowed.

 Entering Variable Names and Data Types

• Entering Variables Names in the Ladder Editor or ST Editor
• Entering Data Types in the Ladder Editor or ST Editor for Functions or Function Blocks
• Entering Data Types in Variable Tables

Example: When you enter a variable name in the Ladder Editor, the variable names that you can
enter are displayed in a list when you click the mouse button.

 Entering Text in the ST Editor

• When you enter text in the ST Editor or in an Inline ST Box, the cursor moves to the first item in
the list that starts with the character that you entered.

3-58 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-6 Basic Editing Operations

• When you press the Tab Key after entering the first keyword of a construct (“IF” in this example),
the rest of the construct is automatically entered.
3

• When you drag an ST statement (here, an IF statement) from the Structured Text Tools in the
Toolbox of the ST Editor, the keywords for the construct for the ST statement are automatically
entered.

Drag

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-59

3 System Design

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Opera-

tions
This section lists the operations of the Sysmac Studio.

3-7-1 Setting Parameters

Item Description Reference
EtherCAT Configuration and You create a configuration in the Sysmac Studio of the Ether- 5-2 EtherCAT Config-
Setup CAT slaves that are connected to the built-in EtherCAT port on uration and Setup on
the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit or NY-series Industrial PC, and set page 5-4
the parameters in the master and slaves in that configuration.
Registering slaves You can set up devices by dragging slaves from the device list 5-2-2 Registering
displayed in the Toolbox Pane to the locations where you want Slaves Offline to Con-
to connect them. figure EtherCAT on
page 5-4
5-2-3 Registering
Slaves Online to Con-
figure EtherCAT on
page 5-6
Changing the Coupler You change the model number or unit version of a Coupler Unit. 5-3-1 Creating the
model Use this function to change the model number and version of EtherCAT Slave Ter-
the Coupler Unit registered in the project to the new model num- minal Configuration on
ber and version when replacing a Coupler Unit. page 5-26
Changing the Servo You can change the model number or the unit version of a Ser- Refer to the Sysmac
Driver model vo Driver registered in a project when replacing an actual Servo Studio Drive Functions
Driver. Operation Manual
(Cat. No. I589) for de-
tails on the function.
Setting master param- You set the common parameters of the EtherCAT network (e.g., 5-2-4 Setting Master
eters the fail-soft operation and wait time for slave startup settings). Parameters on page
5-8
Setting slave parame- You set the standard slave parameters and assign PDOs (proc- 5-2-5 Setting Slave
ters ess data objects). Parameters on page
5-9
Comparing and merg- The EtherCAT network configuration information in the NJ/NX- 5-2 EtherCAT Config-
ing network configura- series CPU Unit or NY-series Industrial PC and in the Sysmac uration and Setup on
tion information Studio are compared and the differences are displayed. page 5-4
Transferring the net- The EtherCAT network configuration information is transferred 7-5-1 Transferring/
work configuration in- to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit or NY-series Industrial PC. Or, the Comparing Data to/
formation EtherCAT network configuration information in the CPU Unit or from the Controller on
PC is transferred to the Sysmac Studio and displayed in the page 7-120
EtherCAT Editor.
Installing and uninstal- ESI (EtherCAT slave information) files are installed and uninstal- 5-2-7 Installing and
ling ESI files led. Uninstalling ESI Files
on page 5-17

3-60 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Item Description Reference

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

EtherCAT Slave Terminal The configuration of any Slave Terminal that is connected to an 5-3 EtherCAT Slave
Configuration and Setup EtherCAT network is created on the Sysmac Studio. The NX Terminal Configura-
Units that compose the Slave Terminal are set in the configura- tion and Setup on
tion. page 5-25
Registering NX Units A Slave Terminal is built by dragging NX Units from the device 5-3-1 Creating the
list displayed in the Toolbox to the locations where you want to EtherCAT Slave Ter-
mount them. minal Configuration on
page 5-26
Setting NX Units The I/O allocations, mounting settings, and Unit operation set- 5-3-1 Creating the
tings of the NX Units are edited. EtherCAT Slave Ter-
minal Configuration on
page 5-26
Displaying the width of The width of the Slave Terminal configuration is displayed 5-3-1 Creating the
a Slave Terminal con- based on the Unit configuration information. EtherCAT Slave Ter- 3
figuration minal Configuration on
page 5-26

3-7-1 Setting Parameters

Comparing and merg- When online, you can compare the configuration information in 5-3-1 Creating the
ing the Slave Terminal the project with the physical configuration. You can also select EtherCAT Slave Ter-
configuration informa- the missing Units and add them to the project. minal Configuration on
tion page 5-26
Transferring the Slave The Unit configuration information is transferred to the NJ/NX- 5-3-1 Creating the
Terminal configuration series CPU Unit or NY-series Industrial PC. The synchronize EtherCAT Slave Ter-
information function is used. minal Configuration on
page 5-26

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-61

3 System Design

Item Description Reference

CPU/Expansion Rack Con- You create the configuration in the Sysmac Studio of the Units 5-5 CPU/Expansion
figuration and Setup mounted in the CPU Rack and Expansion Racks of NJ-series Rack Configuration
CPU Unit, NX102 and NX1P2 and set the Special Units. and Setup on page
5-44
Registering Units A Rack is built by dragging Units from the device list displayed 5-5-1 CPU/Expansion
in the Toolbox Pane to the locations where you want to mount Racks for the NX102
them. CPU Unit or NX1P2
CPU Unit on page
5-44
5-5-2 CPU Rack and
Expansion Racks for
NJ-series CPU Units
on page 5-53
Creating Racks An Expansion Rack (Power Supply Unit, I/O Interface Unit, and 5-5-2 CPU Rack and
End Cover) is added. Expansion Racks for
NJ-series CPU Units
on page 5-53
Switching Unit dis- For NJ-series CPU Units, model numbers, unit numbers, and 5-5-1 CPU/Expansion
plays slot numbers are displayed. For NX102 and NX1P2 CPU Units, Racks for the NX102
model numbers and unit numbers are displayed. CPU Unit or NX1P2
CPU Unit on page
5-44
5-5-2 CPU Rack and
Expansion Racks for
NJ-series CPU Units
on page 5-53
Setting Special Units The input time constants are set for Input Units and parameters 5-5-2 CPU Rack and
are set for Special Units. Expansion Racks for
NJ-series CPU Units
on page 5-53
Displaying Rack For NJ-series CPU Units, rack width, current consumption, and 5-5-2 CPU Rack and
widths, current con- power consumption are displayed based on the Unit configura- Expansion Racks for
sumption, and power tion information. For NX102 and NX1P2 CPU Units, rack width NJ-series CPU Units
consumption is displayed based on the Unit configuration information. on page 5-53
Comparing the CPU/ When online, you can compare the configuration information in 5-5-1 CPU/Expansion
Expansion Rack con- the project with the physical configuration. You can also select Racks for the NX102
figuration information the missing Units and add them. CPU Unit or NX1P2
with the physical con- CPU Unit on page
figuration 5-44
5-5-2 CPU Rack and
Expansion Racks for
NJ-series CPU Units
on page 5-53
Transferring the CPU/ The Unit configuration information is transferred. The synchron- 5-5-1 CPU/Expansion
Expansion Rack con- ize function is used. Racks for the NX102
figuration information CPU Unit or NX1P2
CPU Unit on page
5-44
7-5-1 Transferring/
Comparing Data to/
from the Controller on
page 7-120
Printing the Unit con- The Unit configuration information is printed. 8-5 Printing on page
figuration information 8-25

3-62 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Item Description Reference

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Controller Setup The Controller Setup is used to change settings related to the 5-6 Controller Setup
operation of the Controller. on page 5-63
The Controller Setup contains PLC Function Module operation
settings and built-in EtherNet/IP Function Module port settings.
Operation Settings The Startup Mode, SD Memory Card Diagnosis at Startup, Write 5-6-1 Operation Set-
Protection at Startup, Controller Error Level Changes, and other tings on page 5-63
settings are made.
Transferring Operation The synchronization function is used to transfer the operation 5-6-1 Operation Set-
Settings settings to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit or NY-series Industrial tings on page 5-63
PC.
Built-in EtherNet/IP These settings are made to perform communications using the 5-6-2 Built-in Ether-
Port Settings built-in EtherNet/IP port on the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit or NY- Net/IP Port Settings
series Industrial PC. on page 5-69
Transferring Built-in The synchronization function is used to transfer the built-in 5-6-2 Built-in Ether- 3
EtherNet/IP Port Set- EtherNet/IP port settings to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit or NY- Net/IP Port Settings
tings series Industrial PC. on page 5-69

3-7-1 Setting Parameters

Built-in I/O Settings You make the settings related to built-in I/O of the NX1P2 CPU 5-6-3 Built-in I/O Set-
Unit. tings on page 5-75
Transferring Built-in The synchronization function is used to transfer the built-in I/O 5-6-3 Built-in I/O Set-
I/O Settings settings to the NX1P2 CPU Unit. tings on page 5-75
Option Board Settings You make the settings related to the option boards mounted on 5-6-4 Option Board
the NX1P2 CPU Unit. Settings on page
5-76
Transferring Option The synchronization function is used to transfer the option 5-6-4 Option Board
Board Settings board settings to the NX1P2 CPU Unit. Settings on page
5-76
Memory Settings You make the settings related to the memory area for CJ-series 5-6-5 Memory Set-
Units in the NX102, NX1P2 and NX701-1£20 CPU Units. tings on page 5-77
Transferring Memory The synchronization function is used to transfer the memory 5-6-5 Memory Set-
Settings settings to the CPU Unit. tings on page 5-77
Motion Control Setup The Motion Control Setup is used to create the axes to use in 5-6-2 Built-in Ether-
motion control instructions, assign those axes to Servo Drives Net/IP Port Settings
and encoders, and set axis parameters. on page 5-69
Axis Settings Axes are added to the project. 5-7 Motion Control
Setup on page 5-78
Axis Setting Table The Axis Setting Table is a table of all registered axis parame- 5-7 Motion Control
ters. You can edit any axis parameters here just as you can on Setup on page 5-78
the Axis Settings Tab Page.
Axes Group Settings You can set up axes to perform interpolated motions as an axes 5-6 Controller Setup
group. on page 5-63
Axes Group Basic Set the axes group number, whether to use the axes group, the
Settings composition, and the composition axes.
Operation Settings Set the interpolated velocity, the maximum interpolated acceler-
ation and deceleration, and the interpolated operation settings.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-63

3 System Design

Item Description Reference

Cam Data Settings The cam data settings are used to create electronic cam data. 5-8 Cam Data Set-
When you build the project for the Controller, a cam table is cre- tings on page 5-89
ated according to the cam data settings.
Registering cam data Cam data settings are added to the project. 5-8 Cam Data Set-
settings tings on page 5-89
Editing cam data set- You can set properties and node points for cam data settings. 5-8 Cam Data Set-
tings tings on page 5-89
Transferring cam data You can select to transfer all or part of the cam data. 5-8 Cam Data Set-
settings tings on page 5-89
Importing cam data You can import cam data settings from a CSV file. 5-8 Cam Data Set-
settings tings on page 5-89
Exporting cam data You can export cam data to a CSV file. 5-8 Cam Data Set-
settings tings on page 5-89
Registering cam defi- You add new cam definitions to change a cam table in the pro- 5-8-10 Registering
nitions gram. Cam Definitions on
page 5-101
Editing cam definitions You set cam definitions. 5-8-10 Registering
Cam Definitions on
page 5-101
Transferring cam defi- You transfer cam definitions to the Controller. 5-8-11 Transferring
nitions Cam Definitions on
page 5-105
Exporting cam tables You can export a cam table to a CSV file. 5-8 Cam Data Set-
tings on page 5-89
Transferring cam ta- You can save a cam table in the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit or NY- 5-8 Cam Data Set-
bles from the Control- series Industrial PC to a CSV file. tings on page 5-89
ler to files
Transferring cam ta- You can transfer a cam table that is saved in a CSV file to up- 5-8 Cam Data Set-
bles from files to the date the contents of a cam table that is already in the NJ/NX- tings on page 5-89
Controller series CPU Unit or NY-series Industrial PC.
Superimposing Cam You can superimpose the cam table from a CSV file on the cam 5-8 Cam Data Set-
Data profile curve position graph that is currently displayed. tings on page 5-89
Task Settings Programs are executed in tasks in an NJ/NX-series CPU Unit or 5-9 Task Settings on
NY-series Industrial PC. The task settings define the execution page 5-109
period, the execution timing, the programs executed by the task,
the I/O refreshing performed by the task, and which variables to
share between tasks.
Registering tasks The tasks, which are used to execute programs, are registered. 5-9-1 Registering
Tasks on page 5-109
Setting task I/O The task I/O settings define what Units the task should perform 5-9-3 Task I/O Set-
I/O refreshing for. tings on page 5-110
Assigning programs Program assignments define what programs a task will execute. 5-9-4 Program Assign-
ments on page 5-111
Setting exclusive con- You can specify if a task can write to its own values (known as a 5-9-5 Settings for Ex-
trol of variables in refreshing task) or if it can only access them (an accessing task) clusive Control of Vari-
tasks for global variables. ables in Tasks on
This ensures concurrency for global variable values from all page 5-112
tasks that reference them.

3-64 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Item Description Reference

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

I/O Map Settings The I/O ports that correspond to the registered EtherCAT 4-1 Variable Registra-
slaves and to the registered Units on the CPU Rack and tion on page 4-3
Expansion Racks are displayed. The I/O Map is edited to as-
sign variables to I/O ports. The variables are used in the user
program.
Displaying I/O ports I/O ports are displayed based on the configuration information 4-1 Variable Registra-
of the devices (slaves and Units). tion on page 4-3
Assigning variables Variables are assigned to I/O ports. 4-1 Variable Registra-
tion on page 4-3
Creating device varia- Device variables are created in the I/O Map. 4-1 Variable Registra-
bles You can either automatically create a device variable or manual- tion on page 4-3
ly enter the device variable to create.
Checking I/O assign- The assignments of external I/O devices and variables are 7-5-4 Checking I/O
ments checked. Assignments on page 3
7-147
Setting Vision Sensors Vision Sensor settings and calibration are set. 3-7-22 Vision Sensor

3-7-1 Setting Parameters

Functions on page
3-93
Displacement Sensor Set- Displacement Sensor settings and calibration are set. 3-7-23 Displacement
tings Sensor Functions on
page 3-98
DB Connection Function Set- You can set and transfer the DB connection function settings. 3-7-15 Function Spec-
tings ifications of DB Con-
nection Function on
page 3-79
EtherNet/IP Connection Set- You can make settings related to tag data links (connections) in 3-7-17 EtherNet/IP
tings an EtherNet/IP network. Connection Settings
on page 3-80
EtherNet/IP Slave Terminal You can make and transfer settings for EtherNet/IP Slave Termi- 3-7-18 EtherNet/IP
Settings nals. Slave Terminal Set-
tings on page 3-80
NA-series Programmable You can make settings and transfer projects for NA-series Pro- 3-7-21 Function Spec-
Terminal (PT) Settings grammable Terminals. ifications of NA-series
Programmable Termi-
nals on page 3-87

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-65

3 System Design

3-7-2 Programming
Item Description Page
Instruction list (Toolbox) A hierarchy of the instructions that you can use is displayed in 3-4-4 Toolbox (4) on
the Toolbox. You can drag the required instruction to a program page 3-40
in the Ladder Editor or ST Editor to insert the instruction.

3-66 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Item Description Page

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Programming ladder dia- Ladder diagram programming involves connecting circuit parts 4-5-1 Programming
grams with connecting lines to build algorithms. Circuit parts and con- Ladder Diagrams on
necting lines are entered in the Ladder Editor. page 4-85
Starting the Ladder The Ladder Editor for the program is started. 4-5-1 Programming
Editor Ladder Diagrams on
page 4-85
Adding and delet- You can divide your ladder diagrams into smaller units for easier 4-5-1 Programming
ing sections management. These units of division are called sections. Ladder Diagrams on
page 4-85
Inserting circuit You insert circuit parts in the Ladder Editor to create an algo- 4-5-1 Programming
parts rithm. Ladder Diagrams on
page 4-85
Inserting and delet- You can insert a function block instruction or user-defined func- 4-5-1 Programming
ing function blocks tion block into the Ladder Editor. Ladder Diagrams on 3
page 4-85
Inserting and delet- You can insert a function instruction or user-defined function into 4-5-1 Programming

3-7-2 Programming
ing functions the Ladder Editor. Ladder Diagrams on
page 4-85
Inserting and delet- You can insert a circuit part in a ladder diagram to enable pro- 4-5-1 Programming
ing inline ST gramming in ST. This allows you to include ST in a ladder dia- Ladder Diagrams on
gram. page 4-85
Editing circuit parts You can copy and paste circuit parts. 4-5-1 Programming
Ladder Diagrams on
page 4-85
Inserting and delet- You can insert a jump label in the rung to jump to and then 4-5-1 Programming
ing jump labels specify that jump label when you insert a jump. Ladder Diagrams on
and jumps page 4-85
Inserting and delet- You can add bookmarks to the beginning of rungs and move be- 4-5-1 Programming
ing bookmarks tween them. Ladder Diagrams on
page 4-85
Rung comments You can add comments to rungs. 4-5-1 Programming
Ladder Diagrams on
page 4-85
Displaying rung er- When you enter a circuit part, the format is always checked and 4-5-1 Programming
rors any mistakes are displayed as errors. Ladder Diagrams on
If there are any errors, a red line is displayed between the rung page 4-85
number and the left bus bar.
Entry assistance When you enter instructions or parameters, each character that 3-6 Basic Editing Op-
you enter from the keyboard narrows the list of candidates that erations on page 3-57
is displayed for selection.
Displaying varia- You can display variable comments along with the variables in 8-23 Sysmac Studio
bles with com- the circuit parts of a ladder program. You can change the length Option Settings on
ments of the displayed variable comments to make them easier to page 8-123
read.
Element comment You can add an element comment on the ladder circuit parts. 4-5-1 Programming
Ladder Diagrams on
page 4-85
Rung comment list Displays a list of rung comments for a ladder program. Double- 4-5-1 Programming
click a comment in the list to go to the related rung. Ladder Diagrams on
page 4-85

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-67

3 System Design

Item Description Page

Programming structured text You combine different ST statements to build algorithms. 4-5-2 Programming
Structured Text on
page 4-140
Starting the ST Ed- The ST Editor for programs or for functions/function blocks is 4-5-2 Programming
itor started. Structured Text on
page 4-140
Editing ST You combine different ST statements to build algorithms. 4-5-2 Programming
Structured Text on
page 4-140
Entering calls to You can enter the first character of the instance name of the 4-5-2 Programming
functions and func- function or the function block in the ST Editor to call and enter a Structured Text on
tion blocks function or function block. page 4-140
Entering constants You can enter constants in the ST Editor. 4-5-2 Programming
Structured Text on
page 4-140
Entering com- Enter (* at the beginning and *) at the end of any text to be 4-5-2 Programming
ments treated as a comment in the ST Editor. Structured Text on
If you only want to comment out a single line, enter a double for- page 4-140
ward slash // at the beginning of the line.
Copying, pasting, You can copy, paste, and delete text strings. 4-5-2 Programming
and deleting ST el- Structured Text on
ements page 4-140
Indenting You can indent nested statements to make them easier to read. 4-5-2 Programming
Structured Text on
page 4-140
Moving to a speci- You can specify a line number to jump directly to that line. 4-5-2 Programming
fied line Structured Text on
page 4-140
Bookmarks You can add bookmarks to any lines and move between them. 4-5-2 Programming
Structured Text on
page 4-140
Entry assistance When you enter instructions or parameters, each character that 3-6 Basic Editing Op-
you enter from the keyboard narrows the list of candidates that erations on page 3-57
is displayed for selection.
Namespaces Namespaces allow you to group and nest the names of func- 4-4 Namespaces on
tions, function block definitions, and data types so that you can page 4-79
manage them. This reduces the chance of duplicated names
and makes the entities easier to access.
Variable Manager A list of the variables in the global and local variable tables is 4-1 Variable Registra-
displayed in a separate window. You can display variable usage, tion on page 4-3
sort and filter the variables, edit and delete variables, or move
variables while displaying another editing view.
Changing variable comments You can globally change variable comments and data type com- 8-16 Changing Varia-
and data type comments ments to other comments. You can change the comments to dif- ble Comments and
ferent language for users in a different country. Data Type Comments
on page 8-109
Exporting/importing variable You can export/import variable comments, comments of struc- 4-1-9 Entering Varia-
comments ture members and union members, and variable element com- ble Attributes on page
ments of array variables to an Office Open XML file (xlsx file). 4-36

3-68 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Item Description Page

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Sorting and filtering variables You can sort and filter the variables in each variable table. 4-1-1 Creating Global
Variables on page
4-4
4-1-3 Creating Local
Variables on page
4-22
Searching and replacing You can search for and replace strings in the data of a project. 4-6 Searching and Re-
placing on page 4-155
Retrace search You can search for and jump to program inputs and input pa- 4-5-1 Programming
rameters that use the variable assigned to a program output or Ladder Diagrams on
the output parameter of a function or function block. page 4-85
You can also search for and jump to program outputs and out-
put parameters that use the variable assigned to a program in-
put or the input parameter of a function or function block.
3
Jumping You can jump to the specified rung number or line number in the 4-5-1 Programming
program. Ladder Diagrams on

3-7-3 Library Functions

page 4-85
Build- Building The programs in the project are converted into a format that is 4-8 Building and Re-
ing executable in the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit or NY-series Industrial building on page
PC. 4-165
Rebuilding A rebuild is used to build project programs that have already 4-8 Building and Re-
been built. building on page
4-165
Aborting a build You can abort a build operation. 4-8 Building and Re-
operation building on page
4-165
Creating applications for NA- You can create and transfer pages and subroutines for NA-ser- Refer to 3-7-21 Func-
series PTs ies Programmable Terminals. tion Specifications of
NA-series Program-
mable Terminals on
page 3-87

3-7-3 Library Functions

Item Description Page
Libraries You can create programs, functions, function block definitions, 9-3 Creating and Us-
and data types in a library file to reuse them as objects in other ing Libraries on page
projects. 9-8
Creating libraries You can create library files to enable using programs, functions, 9-3-1 Creating a Li-
function block definitions, and data types in other projects. brary on page 9-8
Using libraries You can access and use objects from library files that were cre- 9-3-2 Using a Library
ated in other projects. on page 9-11

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-69

3 System Design

3-7-4 Project Management

Item Description Page
File opera- Creating a A project file is created. 3-3-2 Creating a
tions project file Project File on page
3-11
Opening a A project file is opened. 3-3-6 Opening a
project file Project File on page
3-18
Saving the The project file is saved. 3-3-4 Saving the
project file Project File on page
3-16
Saving a project A project file is saved under a different name. 3-3-5 Saving a Project
file under a differ- File Under a Different
ent name Name on page 3-17
Project update You can assign numbers to projects to manage the project his- 3-3-10 Project Update
history manage- tory. History Management
ment on page 3-26
Exporting a You can export a project to an .smc2 or .csm2 project file (ver- 3-3-7 Exporting a
project file sion 1.08 or higher). You can also export a project to a previous Project File on page
project file format, i.e., .smc or .csm. 3-20
Importing a You can import a project from an .smc2 (version 1.08 or high- 3-3-8 Importing a
project file er), .csm2 (version 1.08 or higher), .smc, or .csm project file. Project File on page
3-21
Importing ST pro- You can import ST program files that were created with the Si- 8-18 Importing ST
grams mulink® PLC Coder™ version R2013a or higher from Math- Programs on page
8-113
Works® Inc.
IEC 61131-10 You can import program/function/function block POUs of the 8-19 Importing IEC
XML IEC 61131-10 XML format, global variables and data types. 61131-10 XML Files
on page 8-115
Offline compari- You can compare the data for an open project with the data for 4-9 Offline Compari-
son a project file and display the results. You can also compare the son on page 4-167
open project with an exported .smc2 (version 1.08 or higher)
or .smc project file.
Or, you can merge detailed comparison results.
Importing motor You can import the EtherCAT configuration and motion control 8-20 Importing Motor
sizing tool results settings created by the motor sizing tool. Sizing Tool Results on
page 8-119
Cutting, copying, and pasting You can cut, copy, or paste items that are selected in the Multi- 3-6 Basic Editing Op-
view Explorer or any of the editors. erations on page 3-57
Printing You can print various data. You can select the items to print. 8-5 Printing on page
8-25
Data shar- Creating a deriv- You can copy a controller in a project. The copied controller pro- 9-4 Program Sharing
ing ative device. gram (POU, Data-type, global variables) are shared with the in Derived Devices on
source controller. page 9-16
Setting a shared You can share a program (POU, Data-type, global variables) be- 9-4 Program Sharing
program between tween controllers in a project. in Derived Devices on
devices page 9-16

3-70 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-7-5 Debugging

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Item Description Page
Monitoring Variables are monitored during ladder program execution. 7-2-1 Monitoring on
You can monitor the TRUE/FALSE status of inputs and outputs page 7-4
and the present values of variables in the NJ/NX-series CPU
Unit or NY-series Industrial PC. You can monitor operation on
the Ladder Editor, ST Editor, Watch Tab Page, or I/O Map.
Differential monitoring You can detect the number of times the specified BOOL variable 7-2-2 Differential Mon-
or BOOL member changes to TRUE or FALSE and display the itor on page 7-21
count in the Differential Monitor Dialog Box. You can check if
bits turn ON and OFF and the number of times that they turn
ON and OFF.
Changing present values and You can change the values of variables that are used in the user 7-2-3 Changing
TRUE/FALSE program and settings to any desired value, and you can change Present Values and
program inputs and outputs to TRUE or FALSE. This allows you Set/Reset Using
3
to check the operation of the user program and settings. Forced Refreshing on
page 7-24

3-7-5 Debugging
Changing the present values You can change the present values of user-defined variables, 7-2-3 Changing
of variables system-defined variables, and device variables as required. Present Values and
You can do this in the Ladder Editor, ST Editor, Watch Tab Set/Reset Using
Page, or I/O Map. Forced Refreshing on
page 7-24
Forced refreshing Forced refreshing allows the user to refresh external inputs and 7-2-3 Changing
outputs with user-specified values from the Sysmac Studio. The Present Values and
specified value is retained even if the value of the variable is Set/Reset Using
overwritten from the user program. Forced Refreshing on
You can use forced refreshing to force BOOL variables to TRUE page 7-24
or FALSE in the Ladder Editor, Watch Tab Page, or I/O Map.
Online editing Online editing allows you to edit programs on systems that are 7-2-5 Online Editing
currently in operation. on page 7-40
Online editing can be used to edit only POUs and global varia-
bles. User-defined data types cannot be edited with online edit-
ing.
Cross Reference Tab Page Cross references allow you to see the programs and locations 7-2-4 Cross Referen-
where program elements (variables, data types, I/O ports, func- ces on page 7-36
tions, or function blocks) are used.
You can view all locations where an element is used from this
list.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-71

3 System Design

Item Description Page

Data tracing Data tracing allows you to sample the specified variables and 7-2-11 Data Tracing
store the values of the variables in trace memory without any on page 7-52
programming.
You can choose between two trace methods: a triggered trace,
where you set a trigger condition and data is saved before and
after that condition is met, or a continuous trace, in which con-
tinuous sampling is performed without any trigger and the re-
sults are stored in a file on your computer.
However, you can still display data retrieved on the Sysmac
Studio and save those results to a file even if you use a trig-
gered trace. These same functions can be used with the Simu-
lator as well.
Setting sampling inter- The interval to perform sampling on the target data is set. Sam- 7-2-11 Data Tracing
vals pling is performed for the specified task period, at the specified on page 7-52
time, or when a trace sampling instruction is executed.
Setting triggers To perform a triggered trace, you set a condition to trigger sam- 7-2-11 Data Tracing
pling. A suitable trigger condition is set to record data before on page 7-52
and after an event.
Setting a continuous The method to save the data traced during a continuous trace is 7-2-11 Data Tracing
trace set. on page 7-52
Setting variables to The variables to store in trace memory are registered. The sam- 7-2-11 Data Tracing
sample pling intervals can also be set. on page 7-52
Starting and stopping The data trace settings are transferred to the NJ/NX-series CPU 7-2-11 Data Tracing
tracing Unit or NY-series Industrial PC and the tracing starts. If you se- on page 7-52
lected Single as the trace type, tracing waits for the trigger to
begin sampling. If you selected Continuous, sampling begins
immediately and all traced data is transferred to the computer
as it is gathered and saved to a file.
Displaying trace re- You view the results of the traced data in either a chart or in the 7-2-11 Data Tracing
sults 3D Motion Monitor. on page 7-52
After sampling begins, sample data is immediately transferred
and drawn on the graph.
The trace target variable table shows the maximum, minimum,
and average values for each variable.
You can also change the colors of the lines on the graph.
Exporting/importing Trace results are saved within your project automatically when 7-2-11 Data Tracing
trace results you save the project on the Sysmac Studio. on page 7-52
If you want to save this data as a separate file, you can export
the data to save it in a CSV file. You can import trace results
that you have exported.
Printing trace results You can print out data trace settings along with digital and ana- 7-2-11 Data Tracing
log charts. on page 7-52
Debugging a Vision Sensor You can debug the Vision Sensor offline. 3-7-22 Vision Sensor
Functions on page
3-93
Debugging a Displacement You can debug the Displacement Sensor offline. 3-7-23 Displacement
Sensor Sensor Functions on
page 3-98

3-72 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-7-6 Simulation

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Item Description Page
Programs for debugging You can create programs for debugging that are used only to 7-3-1 Debugging with
execute simulations and specify virtual inputs for simulation. Program Simulation
on page 7-80
Executing Selecting what to You can select the programs to simulate from all of the pro- 7-3-1 Debugging with
a simula- simulate grams in the Sysmac Studio. Programs can be dragged to se- Program Simulation
tion lect them. on page 7-80
Setting break- You can set breakpoints to stop the simulation in the Program 7-3-1 Debugging with
points Editor. Program Simulation
on page 7-80
Executing and You can control simulation execution to monitor the user pro- 7-3-1 Debugging with
stopping simula- gram or to check operation through data tracing. Step execution Program Simulation
tions and pausing are also possible. on page 7-80
3
You can perform a linked simulation between sequence control ---
and continuous control (operations controlled by Simulink) to

3-7-6 Simulation
debug the sequence control program and continuous control
program. MATLAB/® R2013a or higher is required.
Changing the You can change the execution speed. 7-3-1 Debugging with
simulation speed Program Simulation
on page 7-80
Task period simu- You can display the task periods. 7-3-1 Debugging with
lation Program Simulation
on page 7-80
Batch transfer of You can save the values of variables at specific times during 7-3-1 Debugging with
the present val- simulations in a file, or you can write the values of variables that Program Simulation
ues of variables were saved in a file back to the Simulator. This allows you to on page 7-80
write the initial values of variables, e.g., for test applications, be-
fore you start a simulation.
Integrated NS- You can simulate the linked operation of a sequence program 7-3-6 Integrated NS-
series PT simula- and an NS-series Programmable Terminal to debug the se- series PT Simulation
tion quence program and screen data offline. for Offline Debugging
of Sequence Control
and NS-series PTs on
page 7-112
Simultaneous You can simultaneously simulate sequence control and NA-ser- 7-3-5 Offline Debug-
simulation of ies PT operation, including displaying pages and subroutines ging with Sequence
Controller and created with Visual Basic and debugging the sequence pro- Control and NA-series
NA-series PT gramming. PT Simulator (Simulta-
neous Simulation of
Controller with NA-ser-
ies PT) on page 7-109
Setting the Creating 3D You can create a 3D equipment model at the control target to 7-2-11 Data Tracing
virtual equipment mod- monitor with 3D motion monitoring. on page 7-52
equipment els*1
3D Motion Moni- You set the axis variables for each element of the 3D equipment 7-2-11 Data Tracing
tor Display model, and then set the 3D equipment into motion according to on page 7-52
Mode*1 those axis motions.
Displaying 2D You can display the 2D paths of the markers for the projections 7-2-11 Data Tracing
paths*1 in the 3D display. on page 7-52
*1. Not supported by the Sysmac Studio (64 bit).

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-73

3 System Design

3-7-7 Monitoring Information

Item Description Page
Displaying unit production in- You can display the production information of the NJ/NX-series 8-8-1 Displaying CPU
formation CPU Unit, NY-series Industrial PC, and Special Units, including Unit Production Infor-
the models of the Units and unit versions. mation on page 8-36
Monitoring task execution You can monitor the execution time of each task when the user 7-2-9 Task Execution
times program is executed on an NJ/NX-series CPU Unit, NY-series Time Monitor on page
Industrial PC, or in the Simulator. When the Simulator is con- 7-49
nected, you can also monitor the real processing time of tasks.
This allows you to perform a Controller performance test.
Troubleshooting You can use troubleshooting to check the errors that occurred in 8-15 Troubleshooting
the Controller, display corrections for the errors, and clear the on page 8-90
errors.
Controller errors Any current Controller errors are displayed. (Observations and 8-15-2 Controller Er-
information are not displayed.) rors on page 8-91
User-defined errors Information is displayed on current errors. 8-15-4 User-defined
Errors on page 8-99
Controller event log You can display a log of Controller events (including Controller 8-15-3 Controller
errors and Controller information). (You cannot display logs from Event Log on page
EtherCAT slaves.) 8-95
User-defined event log The log of user-defined events that were stored for the Create 8-15-5 User-defined
User-defined Error (SetAlarm) instruction and the Create User- Event Log on page
defined Information (SetInfo) instruction is displayed. 8-100
Event Settings Table The Event Setting Table is used to register the contents dis- 8-15-6 Event Setting
played on the Sysmac Studio and on HMIs for user-defined Table on page 8-101
events that occur for execution of the Create User-defined Error
(SetAlarm) instruction and the Create User-defined Information
(SetInfo) instruction.
User memory usage monitor An estimate of the space that is used by the user program that 8-4 User Memory Us-
you are editing in the Sysmac Studio is displayed in relation to age Monitor on page
the size of the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit or NY-series Industrial 8-23
PC’s memory.
Setting clock information You can read and set the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit or NY-series 8-2 Clock Information
Industrial PC’s clock. The computer’s clock information is also Settings on page
displayed. 8-7
DB connection function You can monitor information for the database connection. 3-7-15 Function Spec-
ifications of DB Con-
nection Function on
page 3-79

3-7-8 Communications
Item Description Page
Going online with a Controller An online connection is established with the Controller. 6-2 Going Online with
You also can transfer a project from the connected Controller to a Controller on page
the computer with a simple operation without creating a new 6-3
project or opening an existing project.
Checking for forced refreshing When you go offline, any forced refreshing is cleared. 6-2-7 Checking for
Forced Refreshing on
page 6-7

3-74 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Item Description Page

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Synchronize The data (project file) in the computer is compared with the data 7-5-1 Transferring/
in the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit and NY-series Industrial PC that Comparing Data to/
are connected online, the difference is displayed in a list, and from the Controller on
batch transfer can be performed for the individually-specified page 7-120
data.
Batch transfer You transfer data between the computer and NJ/NX-series CPU 8-10 Transferring All
Unit or NY-series Industrial PC that are connected online. You Controller Data on
can select the same data to transfer as in the synchronization page 8-58
operation. Unlike the synchronization operation, the data is
transferred in the specified direction without displaying the com-
parison results.

3-7-9 Maintenance
3
Item Description Page
Changing the operating There are two operating modes for NJ/NX/NY-series Control- 7-2-6 Changing the

3-7-9 Maintenance
mode of the Controller lers, depending on if control programs are executed or not. Operating Mode on
These are RUN mode and PROGRAM mode. page 7-45
Resetting the Controller The operations and status when the power supply to the Con- 7-5-5 Resetting the
troller is cycled are emulated. Controller on page
This can be performed only in PROGRAM mode. You cannot re- 7-148
set the Controller in RUN mode.
Clear All Memory The Clear All Memory Menu command is used to initialize the 8-6 Clearing Memory
user program, Controller Configurations and Setup, and varia- on page 8-31
bles in the CPU Unit to the defaults from the Sysmac Studio.
SD Memory Cards The following procedures are used to execute file operations for 8-1 SD Memory Card
the SD Memory Card mounted in the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit or Operations on page
the Virtual SD Memory Card of the NY-series Industrial PC 8-3
(hereafter called SD Memory Card), and to copy files between
the SD Memory Card and computer.
Formatting the SD The SD Memory Card is formatted. 8-1 SD Memory Card
Memory Card Operations on page
8-3
Displaying properties The properties of the selected file or folder in the SD Memory 8-1 SD Memory Card
Card are displayed. Operations on page
8-3
Copying files and fold- The selected file or folder in the SD Memory Card is copied to 8-1 SD Memory Card
ers in the SD Memory the SD Memory Card. Operations on page
Card 8-3
Copying files and fold- The selected file or folder in the SD Memory Card is copied to 8-1 SD Memory Card
ers between the SD the computer. Operations on page
Memory Card and the Or, the selected file or folder in the computer is copied to the SD 8-3
computer Memory Card.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-75

3 System Design

Item Description Page

Backup functions You can back up, restore, and compare the user program and 8-9 Backup Functions
other data of the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit or NY-series Industrial on page 8-40
PC to replace hardware, such as the CPU Unit, or to restore de-
vice data.
Controller backup You can back up data (user program and settings, variable val- 8-9-1 Controller Back-
ues, memory values, Unit settings, and slave settings) from a up Functions on page
Controller to a file or restore the backed up data from the file to 8-41
the Controller.
SD Memory Card You can backup the Controller data to an SD Memory Card 8-9-2 SD Memory
backup mounted in the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit or to the Virtual SD Card Backup Func-
Memory Card of the NY-series Industrial PC, or compare the tions on page 8-45
Controller data to the data in these SD Memory Cards.
Variables and memory You can back up the contents of retained memory to a file and 8-9-3 Backing Up Vari-
backup restore the contents of the backup file. You can individually se- ables and Memory on
lect the Retain variables to restore. page 8-46
Importing/exporting to/ You can import the data in a backup file created for a Controller 8-9-4 Importing/
from backup files backup or SD Memory Card backup to a project. Also, you can Exporting Backup
export project data to a backup file. Files on page 8-54

3-7-10 Security Measures

Item Function Page
Prevention Confirming CPU If the name or the serial ID is different between the project and 6-2-6 Confirming Seri-
of incorrect Unit names and the CPU Unit when an online connection is established, a con- al IDs on page 6-6
connec- serial IDs firmation dialog box is displayed.
tions
Prevention Operation author- You can set any of five levels of operation authority (Administra- 8-3-1 Operation Au-
of incorrect ity verification tor, Designer, Maintainer, Operator, and Observer) for a Sysmac thority Verification on
operation Studio project file, NJ/NX-series CPU Unit or NY-series Industri- page 8-8
al PC to restrict the operations that can be performed according
to the operation authority of the user.
Write protection You can prevent the Sysmac Studio from overwriting data in the 8-3-3 Write Protection
of the CPU Unit CPU Unit. of the CPU Unit on
page 8-17
Prevention Authentication of You can ensure that a user program cannot be operated on an- 8-3-2 Authentication of
of the theft user program ex- other CPU Unit even if copied. User Program Execu-
of assets ecution IDs tion IDs on page
8-15
User program The program source code is not transferred. If this option is se- 7-5-1 Transferring/
transfer with no lected, programs are not displayed even if uploaded from anoth- Comparing Data to/
restoration infor- er computer. from the Controller on
mation However, variables and settings are transferred even if this op- page 7-120
tion is selected.
Password protec- You can set password protection for project files to protect your 3-3-9 Password Pro-
tion for project assets. tection for Project
files Files on page 3-23
Data protection You can set passwords for individual POUs (programs, func- 8-3-4 Data Protection
tions, and function block definitions) to prohibit displaying, on page 8-19
changing, and copying them.

3-76 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-7-11 Customizing Function

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Item Function Page
Option settings You can change the color theme, display of each program edi- 8-23 Sysmac Studio
tor, and program check method as required. Option Settings on
page 8-123
Shortcut key allocation You can change the shortcut keys allocated for the main menu A-5-7 Changing Short-
and context menus of the ladder editor. cut Keys on page
A-23

3-7-12 Window Operation

Item Description Page
Docking You can dock and undock configuration tab pages, program edi- 3-4-5 Changing the
tors, Watch Tab Pages, Cross Reference Tab Page, and other Display Location of 3
window parts to/from the main Sysmac Studio window. Window Parts on page
3-43

3-7-11 Customizing Function

3-7-13 Online Help
Item Description Page
Sysmac Studio help system You can access Sysmac Studio operating procedures. A-4 Online Help on
Instructions reference Information is provided on how to use the instructions that are page A-17
supported by the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit or NY-series Industrial
PC.
System-defined Variable Ref- You can display a list of descriptions of the system-defined vari-
erence ables that you can use on the Sysmac Studio.
Keyboard mapping reference You can display a list of convenient shortcut keys that you can
use on the Sysmac Studio.
Manual download You can access manual download page of the web site from the A-12 Downloading
Sysmac Studio and download the latest Sysmac Studio related Manuals on page
manuals. A-84

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-77

3 System Design

3-7-14 OPC UA Functions

Item Description Reference
Setting Parameters --- Refer to the NJ/NX-
OPC UA Settings Settings for OPC UA. series CPU Unit OPC
UA User’s Manual
OPC UA Settings for OPC UA Server operation set from the OPC UA
(Cat. No. W588) for
Server Set- Server Settings tab.
details on functions.
tings
Settings and Displays Server Certificate and allows uses to manipulate it.
display for Also displays Client and Issuer Authentication of Certificate List
Certificate and Revocation List , and allows users to manipulate them.
Security Set- Sets up user name or password to authenticate, prohibits or
tings permits anonymous login, sets security policy to permit as a
server and transfers the settings to the CPU Unit.
Programming function ---
Creation of variables Creates variables to be used for OPC UA communications.
for OPC UA communi-
cations
Publishing of To publish global variables to the OPC UA communications, the
global varia- Network Publish attribute of the variables is set to Publish Only,
bles to OPC Input, or Output.
UA communi-
cations
Shutdown instruction Requests termination of OPC UA Server and make the system
power down safely.
Instruction name: OPCUA_Shutdown
Monitoring information ---
Server Status Displays the operating status of the OPC UA Server and termi-
nates (shutdown) the OPC UA Server.
Operation Log Win- Displays the list of operation logs and allows users to manipu-
dow late them.

3-78 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-7-15 Function Specifications of DB Connection Function

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Item Description Reference
Setting Parameters --- Refer to the NJ/NX-
DBMS settings The database to connect is selected. series Database
Connection CPU Units
Run mode setting of Operation Mode is selected to send SQL statements when DB
User’s Manual (Cat.
the DB connection connection instructions are executed or Test Mode is selected to
No. W527) for details
service not send SQL statements when DB connection instructions are
on functions.
executed.
Spooling settings You can set the service so that SQL statements are spooled
when problems occur and resent when operation is restored.
Operation log settings Settings are made for the execution log for execution of the DB
connection service, the debug log for execution of SQL state-
ments for the DB connection service, and the SQL execution
failure log for SQL execution failures. 3
DB connection func- Settings are made to control operation in order to end the DB
tion shutdown settings connection service after automatically storing the operation log

3-7-15 Function Specifications of DB Connection Function

files on an SD Memory Card.
Program- DB connec- You can use the following DB connection instructions to write
ming tion instruc- the user program for controlling the data in the database.
tions DB_Insert (Insert DB Record)
DB_Select (Retrieve DB Record)
DB_Update (Update DB Record)
DB_Delete (Delete DB Record)
Monitoring information ---
Monitoring the DB The status of the DB connection service is monitored.
connection service
Monitoring the DB The status of each DB connection is monitored.
connections
Displaying the opera- The contents of the execution log, debug log, and SQL execu-
tion logs tion failure log are displayed.

3-7-16 CNC Functions

Item Description Reference
Setting Parameters --- Refer to the NJ/NY-
CNC Setup You can register the CNC coordinate system and CNC motors series NC Integrated
to use with CNC instruction. You can also assign the Servo Controller User’s
Drives to the CNC motors and configure the CNC motor param- Manual (Cat. No.
eters. O030) for details on
functions.
CNC Coord The coordinate system is added to the project and you can as-
Settings sign CNC motor to the coordinate system.
CNC Motor The CNC motor is assigned to the project and you can config-
Settings ure its parameters.
CNC Motor The CNC Motor Compensation Table is assigned to the project
Compensa- and you can set the CNC motor compensation data.
tion Table
Program- NC Program- You can create the NC Program by using G Code language.
ming ming

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-79

3 System Design

3-7-17 EtherNet/IP Connection Settings

Item Description Reference
EtherNet/IP Connection Set- Functions related to tag data link (connection) settings in the Refer to the NJ/NX-
tings EtherNet/IP network are provided. series CPU Unit Built-
Setting Editing Tag You create tags and tag sets using network variables. in EtherNet/IP Port
Connec- Sets User’s Manual (Cat.
tions No. W506) or NY-
Editing Target You add target devices to connect to.
series Industrial Panel
Devices
PC / Industrial Box PC
Editing Con- You select tag sets from a list and create connections.
Built-in EtherNet/IP
nections
Port User’s Manual
Adding EDS You can add the types of EtherNet/IP devices that can be set as (Cat. No. W563) for
Files targets. details on functions.
Transfer- Synchronized All the connection settings in the Controller or the project are
ring Con- Transfer and transferred at the same time.
nections Batch Trans-
fer
Individual You can transfer or compare the connection settings of each
Transfer and EtherNet/IP device individually.
Comparison
Monitoring Status Moni- The operating status of one or more connections is displayed.
Connec- tor You can start or stop all the connections at the same time.
tions Tag/Tag Set The detailed operation information of tags and tag sets, such as
Monitor the presence or absence of tags and the connection times of
tag sets, is displayed.
Ethernet Infor- The detailed operation information of EtherNet/IP devices, such
mation Moni- as bandwidth usage (pps), is displayed.
tor

3-7-18 EtherNet/IP Slave Terminal Settings

Item Description Reference
EtherNet/IP Slave Terminal You create the configuration of a Slave Terminal to be connect- Refer to the NX-series
Configuration and Setup ed to the EtherNet/IP network on the Sysmac Studio and set the EtherNet/IP Coupler
NX Units that compose the Slave Terminal. Unit User’s Manual
Registering the NX You configure the Slave Terminal by dragging the NX Units from (Cat. No. W536) for
Units the device list displayed in the Toolbox to the positions where to details on functions.
mount the Units.
Setting the NX Units You edit the I/O allocation settings, mounting settings and Unit
operation settings of the NX Units.
Displaying the Width The width of the Slave Terminal configuration is displayed
of a Slave Terminal based on the Unit configuration information.
Configuration
Comparing and Merg- You can compare the configuration information on the project
ing Slave Terminal with actual configuration online, select the Units with different in-
Configuration Informa- formation to correct, and merge the information.
tion
Transferring the Slave You transfer the Unit configuration information to the Slave Ter-
Terminal Configuration minal.
Information

3-80 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-7-19 PROFINET Slave Terminal Settings

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Item Description Reference
PROFINET Slave Terminal You create the configuration of a Slave Terminal to connect to Refer to the NX-series
Configuration and Setup the PROFINET network on the Sysmac Studio and set the NX PROFINET Coupler
Units that compose the Slave Terminal. Unit User's
Registering the NX You configure the Slave Terminal by dragging the NX Units from Manual(W623-E2) for
Units the device list displayed in the Toolbox to the positions whereto function details.
mount the Units.
Setting the NX Units You edit the I/O allocation settings, mounting settings and Unit
operation settings of the NX Units.
Displaying the Width The width of the Slave Terminal configuration is displayed
of a Slave Terminal based on the Unit configuration information.
Configuration
Comparing and Merg- You can compare the configuration information on the project 3
ing Slave Terminal with actual configuration online, select the Units with different in-
Configuration Informa- formation to correct, and merge the information.

3-7-19 PROFINET Slave Terminal Settings

tion
Transferring the Slave You transfer the Unit configuration information to the Slave Ter-
Terminal Configuration minal.
Information

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-81

3 System Design

3-7-20 Function Specifications of Safety Control Units

Item Description Reference
Setting Parameters --- Refer to the NX-series
Safety I/O Settings You make a setting for safety process data communications and Safety Control Unit
connection with safety I/O devices. User’s Manual (Cat.
No. Z930) for details
Safety Proc- You select Safety I/O Units to perform safety process data com-
on functions.
ess Data munications (FSoE communications) and make necessary set-
Communica- tings.
tions Settings
Safety Device You set the connection between Safety I/O Units and safety de-
Allocation vices.
Settings
SRA Parameter Settings You can configure safety functions and parameter settings of
1S-series Servo Drive.
EtherNet/IP Safety Con- You can register target devices of EtherNet/IP Safety network
nection Settings and configure the connection settings.
Standard Exposed Vari- You set whether to expose global variables of the Safety CPU
I/O Set- able Settings Unit. The values of exposed variables can be referenced from
tings NJ/NX-series CPU Units and NY-series Industrial PCs.
Standard You set the devices and ports of the Standard I/O Units for the
Process Data exposed variables of the Safety CPU Unit.
Communica-
tions
Safety Task Settings You define the execution cycle and timing of the safety task and
programs to be executed in the task.
Assigning You assign safety programs to execute to the task.
Programs
I/O Map Settings The ports of Safety I/O Units used in safety process data com-
munications are displayed. You assign device variables used in
safety programs to the I/O ports.
Export/ Import I/O map settings can be exported to and imported from a CSV
file.

3-82 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Item Description Reference

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Creating Safety Programs --- Refer to the NX-series
Instruction List (Toolbox) A hierarchy of the functions and function blocks that you can Safety Control Unit
use is displayed in the Toolbox. You can drag the required func- User’s Manual (Cat.
tions and function blocks onto the FBD editor to insert it to a No. Z930)for details
safety program. on functions.

FBD Programming You connect variables, functions, and function blocks with con-
necting lines to build networks. The FBD editor is used to enter
them.
Adding FBD You create FBD networks on the FBD editor to create algo-
Networks rithms.
Inserting and You insert and delete functions and function blocks on the FBD
Deleting editor.
Functions and
Function 3
blocks
Entry Assis- When you enter functions, function blocks, or parameters, each

3-7-20 Function Specifications of Safety Control Units

tance character that you enter from the keyboard narrows the list of
candidates that is displayed for selection.
Commenting You can comment out each FBD network. When a network is
Out FBD Net- commented out, it is no longer executed.
works
Program Pat- You can duplicate an FBD program with the same program pat-
tern Copy tern (logic part). The variable name of the program can be set
automatically according to the variable name generation rules.
Converting You can convert the safety program into user-defined function
Programs into block.
Function
Blocks
Automatic Programming A safety programs can be automatically generated from input
and output signals and expected values of the program.
Creating Variables You create variables used in safety programs in the global or lo-
cal variable table.
User-defined Function You create user-defined function blocks.
Blocks
Help Refer- You can display the user-defined function block help with the
ence popup menu or shortcut key.
Export/Import POUs can be exported and imported.
Programs You can export/import POUs.
User-defined You can export/import user-defined function blocks.
Function
Blocks
IEC 61131-10 You can import the IEC 61131-10-compliant XML programs,
XML function block POUs, and global variables.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-83

3 System Design

Item Description Reference

Searching and Replacing You can search for and replace strings in the variable tables,
programs, and function blocks of a Safety CPU Unit.
Retrace Search If the selected variable is used as an output in the program, you
can jump to the place where the selected variable is used as an
input. If the selected variable is used as an input in the program,
you can jump to the place where the selected variable is used
as an output.
Deleting Unused Varia- You can delete all unused variables in a program at once.
bles
Variable Comment Variable comments shown in safety programs and variable table
Switching can be collectively replaced to other comments. You can switch
the language of comments for users in other countries.

3-84 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Item Description Reference

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Debugging --- Refer to the NX-series
Monitoring Variables are monitored during safety program execution. Safety Control Unit
You can monitor the present values of device variables as- User’s Manual (Cat.
signed to Safety I/O Units and user-defined variables. The val- No. Z930) for details
ues can be monitored on the FBD editor or Watch Tab Page. on functions.

Changing the Present You can change the present values of user-defined variables
Values of Variables and device variables as required. You can do this on the FBD
editor or Watch Tab Page.
Forced Refreshing The inputs from external devices and outputs to external devi-
ces are refreshed with a specified value on the Sysmac Studio.
The specified value is retained even if the value of the variable
is overwritten from the user program. You can use forced re-
freshing on the FBD editor or Watch Tab Page.
Cross References It is possible to see in which programs and in which place a 3
safety program variable is used.
Offline Debugging You can check if the control program logic works as designed in

3-7-20 Function Specifications of Safety Control Units

advance using a special debugging function for the Simulator
without connecting online with the Safety CPU Unit.
Initial Value You can set the initial values of variables when you start execu-
Settings tion of simulation.
Feedback You can set input status that is linked to changes in output sta-
Settings tus when simulator is running.
Simple Auto- You can check that expected values of the outputs to the inputs
matic Test of the program are designed as intended using the Simulator
functions of the Safety CPU Unit.
User Memory Usage The memory usage of the safety control system and usage of
Monitor safety network such as I/O data size are displayed.
Online Functional Test This function helps you to check the safety functional operation
of the safety system.
You can produce output device operation relative to the input
and check whether the system operates as expected. It is possi-
ble to output the check results.
CIP Safety Monitor You can monitor device status of the CIP Safety target devices,
connection status to the Safety CPU Unit, and parameter val-
ues.
Safety Safety Valida- You append the safety-validated information to a safety program
tion when you can ensure safety of the program after you complete
debugging.
Changing Op- There are four operating modes; PROGRAM mode, DEBUG
erating Mode mode (STOPPED), DEBUG mode (RUN), and RUN mode. The
RUN mode can be selected only for the validated safety pro-
grams.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-85

3 System Design

Item Description Reference

Mainte- Generating Settings to use the safety data logging function can be generat- Refer to the NX-series
nance Safety Data ed as a file. Safety Control Unit
Logging Set- User’s Manual (Cat.
tings File No. Z930) for details
Generating A file of safety program and settings to be transferred to the on functions.
Safety Unit Safety CPU Unit using an SD memory card is generated for
Restore File Safety Unit Restore function.
Security Measures ---
Preven- Setting the You set a unique name for each Safety CPU Unit to confirm that
tion of In- Node Name you operate the correct Safety CPU Unit.
correct
Connec-
tions
Preven- Safety Pass- You can prevent unauthorized access to safety functions of
tion of In- word Safety CPU Units by setting a safety password for online opera-
correct tions that affect the safety functions.
Opera-
tion
Preven- Data Protec- You can set passwords for individual programs to prohibit dis-
tion of tion (Pro- playing or changing them.
the Theft grams)
of Assets Data Protec- You can set passwords for individual user-defined function
tion (User-de- blocks to prohibit displaying or changing them.
fined Function
Blocks)

3-86 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-7-21 Function Specifications of NA-series Programmable Terminals

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Item Function Reference
Parameter Settings --- Refer to the NA-series
Device references Devices, such as Controllers, through which the NA-series PT Programmable
can read and write information with communications are created Terminal Software
on the Sysmac Studio and settings are made for them. User’s Manual (Cat.
No. V118) for details
Displaying in- Controllers that were created in the project are displayed.
on functions.
ternal devices
Registering Devices, such as Controllers, that were not created in the
external devi- project are registered. The communications settings of the devi-
ces ces to communicate with the NA-series PT and information,
such as variables and addresses within the devices that the NA-
series PT will read and write, are also registered.
Mapping variables The information on the devices registered in the device referen- 3
ces, such as variables and addresses, are mapped to the global
variables of the NA-series PT.

3-7-21 Function Specifications of NA-series Programmable Terminals

HMI settings Settings for NA-series PT operation are made.
Device set- Settings, such as the startup page, default language, layout of
tings the USB keyboard, automatic logout, screen saver, screen
brightness, and method to change to the System Menu, are
made.
TCP/IP set- Settings for the Ethernet port that is built-in to the NA-series PT
tings are made.
FTP settings Settings to communicate with FTP clients using the Ethernet
port are made.
NTP settings Settings to communicate with an NTP server using the Ethernet
port are made.
FINS settings Settings to communicate with devices that support FINS are
made.
VNC settings Settings to communicate with VNC clients using the Ethernet
port are made.
Print settings Print settings are made.
Security settings Settings, such as user registration and permissions to restrict
NA-series PT operation and displays, are made.
User account The user names, login passwords, and permissions for each
settings user to operate the NA-series PT are set.
Permission The range of information that can be accessed for different per-
and access missions are set.
level settings
Troubleshooter Troubleshooter settings are made.
Language settings Language settings to perform multi-language displays on the
NA-series PT are made.
Operation log settings Settings to take operation logs in the NA-series PT are made.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-87

3 System Design

Item Function Reference

Creating Data and Program- --- Refer to the NA-series
ming Programmable
Editing pages The pages to display on the NA-series PT are edited. Terminal Software
User’s Manual (Cat.
Adding and Pages are added, deleted, or copied with the Multiview Explor-
No. V118) for details
deleting pa- er. Pages can also be copied to other projects.
on functions.
ges
Adding and Groups to organize and manage pages on the Multiview Explor-
deleting page er are added and deleted. Pages can be added to or moved to
groups the groups.
Page proper- The page type, overlapping, background color, etc., are set in
ties settings the Properties Window.
Changing the If using multiple languages is set in the language settings, the
display lan- resources displayed on the Page Editor are displayed in the lan-
guage guage set for each resource.
Changing the You can check display status changes for lamp and other ob-
display status jects on the Page Editor.
of each object
Displaying ob- The objects and groups that were added to each page can be
ject configura- confirmed in a tree structure using the Page Explorer.
tion
Adding ob- Objects, such as buttons or graphics, to display on a page are
jects added by dragging them from the Toolbox to the Page Editor.
Grouping ob- Settings to operate multiple objects together as a group are
jects made.
Aligning ob- Multiple objects are aligned.
jects
Editing ob- Objects and groups can be copied within a page or to another
jects page. Objects can also be deleted, and locations, sizes, rota-
tions, and position relationships with other objects can be set.
Also, labels can be edited.
Setting object Entry order of Data Edit objects can be set.
entry order
Object proper- Properties, such as the colors and shapes of objects and the
ty settings mapped variables, can be changed. Properties are displayed
and changed in the Properties Window.
Duplicating You can duplicate a specified number of objects. Offsets are set
objects to the element numbers of the array set for the object.
Animation set- Animation to modify dynamically the appearance of objects are
tings set. Animation is displayed and changed in the Animation Win-
dow.
Event and ac- The events that can be set for objects and the actions that can
tion settings be executed when an event occurs are set. Displaying and
changing the settings for events and actions is performed in the
Events and Actions Window.
Import and Text, variables and conditional expressions of some objects can
export be imported from or exported to an Excel file.
Page import Pages can be imported and exported.
and export

3-88 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Item Function Reference

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Creating Data and Program- --- Refer to the NA-series
ming Programmable
Programming with Visual Subroutines are created with Visual Basic. Terminal Software
Basic User’s Manual (Cat.
No. V118) for details
Language Visual Basic 2008 and .NET Compact Framework 3.5 are sup-
on functions.
specifications ported.
Adding sub- Groups to organize and manage global subroutines on the Mul-
routine groups tiview Explorer are added or deleted. Subroutines can be added
or moved to the groups.
Editing sub- Subroutines are created using the Code Editor, which is opti-
routines mized for Visual Basic.
Bookmarks Bookmark can be added to any code line and you can move be-
tween the bookmarks.
Data entry as- The characters that are entered from the keyboard are used to 3
sistance display candidates when entering source code.
User alarms Settings for detection conditions and displaying messages for

3-7-21 Function Specifications of NA-series Programmable Terminals

user alarms are made.
Adding and Groups to organize and manage user alarms on the Multiview
deleting user Explorer are added or deleted. User alarms can be created in
alarm groups the groups.
Registering Settings for detection conditions for user alarms and displaying
and deleting messages or popup pages are made for user alarm groups.
User Alarm
Copying user User alarms can be copied within a group or to another group.
alarms
Event and ac- Events and the actions that are executed when the events occur
tion settings are set for the user alarms. Displaying and changing the set-
tings for events and actions is performed in the Events and Ac-
tions Window.
Import and User alarms and user-alarm text strings can be imported from or
export exported to an Excel file.
Control- User-defined Settings for pages that can be changed from user-defined even-
ler event settings ts' display in Troubleshooter.
events
Data logging Data logging is set to log specified data in the NA-series PT at
the specified times.
Adding and Data sets are added to perform data logging.
deleting data
sets
Log condition Conditions to perform data logging and target global variables
setting are set for the data sets.
Broken-line graph Settings for the data that is displayed in a broken-line graph.
Adding and Data groups for which a broken-line graph is drawn are added
deleting data and deleted.
groups
Log condition Conditions to display a broken-line graph and target global vari-
setting ables are set for data groups.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-89

3 System Design

Item Function Reference

Creating Data and Program- --- Refer to the NA-series
ming Programmable
Recipes Data groups that are retained in the NA-series PT and can be Terminal Software
switched for user requests are set. User’s Manual (Cat.
No. V118) for details
Adding and Data storage locations, value ranges, and data names are add-
on functions.
deleting tem- ed or deleted.
plates
Recipe data The actual data is set for each recipe.
settings
Keypad customization Keypads can be customized.
Global events The events that are detected on any page and the actions that
are executed when the events occur are set.
Resource management All of the character strings and graphics that are displayed on
pages are managed. Also, registered resources can be indirect-
ly accessed.
Registering The character strings that are displayed on pages are registered
and deleting and deleted, except for character stings used for user alarms.
general char-
acter strings
Registering The character strings used for user alarms are added or delet-
and deleting ed.
character
strings for
user alarms
Registering Document files that are displayed with the Document Viewer are
and deleting set or deleted.
document
files
Registering Image files that are displayed for objects are set or deleted.
and deleting
image files
Registering Movie files that are displayed for Media Player objects are set or
and deleting deleted.
movies
Importing and The general character strings and alarm character strings can
exporting be imported and exported using Excel files.
Exporting Im- The registered image files can be exported.
age files
Scaling Values of variables and objects are converted by a specified
scaling factor set for them.
Searching and replacing You can search all strings in a project to find and replace a
specified string.
Cross reference Where a specified program element (variable, data type, page,
or resource) is used in a project can be checked with a list.
You can access the use locations of the element from the list.
Building The project is converted into a format that can be executed in
the NA-series PT.

3-90 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Item Function Reference

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Reusability --- Refer to the NA-series
IAGs (intelligent applica- Multiple objects and subroutines are combined to create a reus- Programmable
tion gadgets) able object. Terminal Software
User’s Manual (Cat.
Creating IAGs An IAG that consists of multiple objects and subroutines is cre-
No. V118) for details
ated as a functional unit in an IAG project.
on functions.
Creating IAG A created IAG is built and saved as a module that can be dis-
collection files tributed and reused.
Creating user- You can create user-defined events that can be used in an IAG.
defined
events
Using IAGs IAG collection files are imported using the IAG Collection Man-
ager. The imported IAGs are displayed in the Toolbox and can
be used in the same way as other objects.
Custom objects The selected objects are registered in a reusable format in the 3
Toolbox.

3-7-21 Function Specifications of NA-series Programmable Terminals

Registering Objects or grouped objects are dragged to the Toolbox to regis-
custom ob- ter them.
jects
Using custom Custom objects are displayed on a page by dragging them from
objects the Toolbox to the Page Editor.
File Opera- Import/Export The data in the NA-series PT can be exported and saved as a
tions file and the data can be imported from the file to a project.
Synchroniza- The data in the NA-series PT that is online is compared with the
tion data in the Sysmac Studio. You can check the differences and
then transfer the data after specifying the transfer direction.
Transferring The data in a storage media in the computer is compared with
files via stor- the data in the Sysmac Studio. You can check the differences
age media and then transfer the data to the storage media. You can use
the System Menu to transfer a saved project file to the NA-ser-
ies PT.
Clearing all All of the data except for the clock information is deleted from
memory the NA-series PT.
Simulation ---
Executing simulations A project file on the computer is virtually executed to debug it.
Setting and Breakpoints can be set at the specified positions in a subrou-
clearing tine.
breakpoints
Synchronized Sequence control and NA-series PT operation, such as display-
simulation ing pages and subroutine operation, is simulated together to de-
with Controller bug the application in the NA-series PT.
Simulator
Monitoring Setting clock The clock information in the NA-series PT can be checked and
Information information set.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-91

3 System Design

Item Function Reference

Communica- Going online The computer can be placed online with the NA-series PT. How- Refer to the NA-series
tions with NA-ser- ever, information in the NA-series PT, such as the values of vari- Programmable
ies PT ables, cannot be read. Terminal Software
Upgrading When the Sysmac Studio is online with the NA-series PT, the User’s Manual (Cat.
system pro- system program in the NA-series PT can be upgraded as re- No. V118) for details
gram quired. on functions.
Print Printing Settings of each project can be printed out.
Security Preventing If the name or serial ID of the project and the NA-series PT are
malfunctions different when the Sysmac Studio goes online, a confirmation
dialog box is displayed.
Preventing in- You can prevent data in the NA-series PT from being overwrit-
correct opera- ten from the Sysmac Studio.
tion

3-92 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-7-22 Vision Sensor Functions

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

 FQ-M-series Vision Sensors
Item Description Reference
Setting Parameters --- Refer to the
Main Basic Settings The basic information on the Sensor is displayed and set. FQ-M-series
editing Specialized
Sensor connection You can change the connection status between the computer and
Vision Sensor
Sensor, and set the conditions for communications.
for Positioning
Online Sensor controls Various controls are performed for the online Sensor (e.g., chang-
User’s Manual
ing the mode, transferring data, and starting monitoring).
(Cat. No. Z314)
Sensor error history You can display or clear the error history of the online Sensor. for details on
Tools You can restart the Sensor, initialize the Sensor, update the firm- functions.
ware of the Sensor, read Sensor data, save Sensor data, print the
Sensor parameters, and display help. 3
Editing Setting imaging condi- You can adjust the imaging conditions.
scene tions

3-7-22 Vision Sensor Functions

data Specifying calibration You can select a registered calibration pattern.
patterns
Registering inspection You can register the inspection items to use in the measure-
items ments. You can select from the following inspection items: Edge
Position, Search, Labeling, and Shape Search.
Setting calculations You can set basic arithmetic operations and function operations
using inspection item judgment results and measurement data.
Setting the items to log You can make the settings for logging, such as setting the meas-
urement results of inspection items and calculation results.
Setting output data You can set the data to output to external devices.
Settings for operation You can change the mode of the Sensor or start monitoring of
measurement results.
Editing Setting trigger condi- You can set the trigger types and timing for imaging.
system tions
data Setting I/O You can make settings for the output terminals. You can check
the condition of I/O wiring for the online Sensor.
Setting the encoder You can make settings for the encoder, such as the common en-
coder settings, ring counter settings, and encoder trigger settings.
Setting Ethernet com- You can make settings for Ethernet communications. You can se-
munications lect any of the following for data I/O: no-protocol data, PLC link
data, and programmable no-protocol data.
Setting EtherCAT com- You can make settings for EtherCAT communications.
munications Set the communications settings to match those of the EtherCAT
master.
Setting logging condi- You can set the conditions to log data to the internal memory of
tions the Sensor.
Sensor settings You can set the startup scene control function, password setting
function, and judgment condition adjustment function.
Setting calibration scene data You can calculate, check, and edit the calibration parameters.
Both general-purpose calibration and calibration for conveyor
tracking are provided.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-93

3 System Design

Item Description Reference

Debug- Offline debugging of Measurement operation is simulated offline (i.e., without a con- Refer to the
ging Sensor operation nection to a Sensor). Image data is prepared in an external file, FQ-M-series
measurements are preformed according to conditions that are set Specialized
offline, and the results are displayed. Vision Sensor
Offline debugging of The linked operation of the sequence controls in the NJ/NX/NY- for Positioning
Sensor control pro- series Controller and the FQ-M Sensor operation is simulated for User’s Manual
grams and Sensor oper- an EtherCAT system. (Cat. No. Z314)
ation This enables offline debugging of processing for measurements for details on
and outputting results when measurement triggers and other con- functions.
trol signals are input to the Sensor.

Note Not supported by the Sysmac Studio (64 bit).

 FH-series Vision Sensors

Item Description Reference
Setting Parameters --- Refer to the Vision
Main ed- Sensor Infor- The basic information on the Sensor is displayed and set. System FH/FHV
iting mation Series Operation
Manual for Sysmac
Online You can change the connection status between the computer
Studio (Cat. No. Z343)
and Sensor and use various controls (e.g., restarting and initial-
for details on func-
izing a Sensor).
tions.
Line edit- Monitor Tab You can monitor Sensor measurement images and detailed re-
ing Page sults from processing units.
Scene Main- You can edit, manage, and save scenes and scene groups.
tenance Tab
Page
Editing Editing the You can combine the required processing units to create a proc-
scene flow essing flow.
data Editing proc- You can edit processing units.
essing units
Editing Camera set- You can check Camera connection status, Camera image cap-
system tings ture timing, and baud rates.
data Controller set- You can set up the Sensor’s system environment.
tings
Parallel I/O You can make settings for output terminals.
settings
RS-232C/422 You can make settings for RS-232C/422 communications.
settings
Ethernet com- You can make settings for Ethernet communications.
munications
settings
EtherNet/IP You can make settings for EtherNet/IP communications.
settings
EtherCAT You can make settings for EtherCAT communications.
communica-
tions settings
PROFINET You can make settings for PROFINET communications.
Communica-
tion Settings
Encoder set- You can make settings for an encoder.
tings

3-94 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Item Description Reference

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Setting Parameters --- Refer to the Vision
Tools I/O command You can set your own communications commands. System FH/FHV
customize tool Series Operation
Manual for Sysmac
File saving You can copy or transfer files that are in Sensor memory.
Studio (Cat. No. Z343)
tool
for details on func-
Calibration You can check the calibration information.
tions.
support tool
User data tool You can edit user data that is shared in the Sensor.
Security set- You can edit the security settings of the sensor.
ting tool
Scene group You can set the destination to save the scene group data.
save destina-
tion setting
tool 3
Image file You can save the logging images and image files stored in the
save tool sensor memory.

3-7-22 Vision Sensor Functions

Registered You can save the images used for model registration and refer-
image man- ence registration as registered images.
agement tool
Reference po- You can edit all reference positions of more than one processing
sition update unit.
tool
Scene group You can create the scene group data with more than 128
data conver- scenes.
sion tool
Scene control You can make a setting for complementing and expanding the
macro tool measurement flow and scene control.
Conveyor cali- You can calibrate cameras, conveyors, and robots in a conveyor
bration wizard tracking application.
tool
Calibration You can print out calibration patterns that are used in the Con-
plate print tool veyor Calibration Wizard.
Conveyor You can display a panoramic image in a conveyor tracking ap-
panorama dis- plication.
play tool
Variable As- Shows a list of system and scene variable assignments regis-
signment List tered to FH/FHV Vision Sensors.
Quick Access Defines identifier name, absolute path, and display name for
Setting Tool Quick Access.
Quick Access settings allows you to select Quick Access when
specifying a file or folder path.
Settings according to different environments enable path set-
tings without considering environment-dependent drive configu-
ration.
Debugging Offline debug- Measurement operation is simulated offline (i.e., without a con-
ging of Sen- nection to a Sensor). Image data is prepared in an external file,
sor operation measurements are preformed according to conditions that are
set offline, and the results are displayed.
Offline De- The linked operation of the sequence controls in the NJ/NX/NY-
bugging of series Controller and the FH Sensor operation is simulated for
Sensor Con- an EtherCAT system.
trol Program You can debug a series of operations offline to perform the
and Sensor measurement and other processing and output the results when
Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation a
Operation control(W504)
Manual signal such as measurement trigger is input to the 3-95
Sensor.
3 System Design

 FHV-series Vision Sensors

Item Description Reference
Setting Parameters --- Refer to the Vision
Main Edit Sensor Infor- The basic information on the Sensor is displayed and set. System FH/FHV
mation Series Operation
Manual for Sysmac
Online You can change the connection status between the computer
Studio (Cat. No. Z343)
and Sensor and use various controls (e.g., restarting and initial-
for details on func-
izing a Sensor).
tions.
Line Edit Operation You can monitor Sensor measurement images and detailed re-
View sults from processing units.
Scene Main- You can edit, manage, and save scenes and scene groups.
tenance View
Scene Flow Edit You can combine the required processing units to create a proc-
Data Edit essing flow.
Process Unit You can edit processing units.
Edit
Sensor Camera Set- You can check Camera connection status, Camera image cap-
System tings ture timing, and baud rates.
Data Edit Controller You can set up the Sensor’s system environment.
Settings
Parallel I/O You can make settings for output terminals.
Settings
RS-232C/422 You can make settings for RS-232C/422 communications.
Settings
Ethernet You can make settings for Ethernet communications.
Communica-
tion Settings
EtherNet/IP You can make settings for EtherNet/IP communications.
Communica-
tion Settings
EtherCAT You can make settings for EtherCAT communications.
Communica-
tion Settings
PROFINET You can make settings for PROFINET communications.
Communica-
tion Settings
Encoder Set- You can make settings for an encoder.
tings
Tools File Saving You can copy or transfer files that are in Sensor memory.
Tool
Calibration You can check the calibration information.
Support Tool
Security Set- You can edit the security settings of the sensor.
ting Tool
Registered You can save the images used for model registration and refer-
Image Man- ence registration as registered images.
agement Tool
Scene Group You can create the scene group data with more than 128
Data Conver- scenes.
sion Tool
Variable As- Shows a list of system and scene variable assignments regis-
signment List tered to FH/FHV Vision Sensors.

3-96 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Item Description Reference

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Debugging Offline De- Measurement operation is simulated offline (i.e., without a con- Refer to the Vision
bugging of nection to a Sensor). Image data is prepared in an external file, System FH/FHV
Sensor Oper- measurements are preformed according to conditions that are Series Operation
ation set offline, and the results are displayed. Manual for Sysmac
Offline De- The linked operation of the sequence controls in the NJ/NX-ser- Studio (Cat. No. Z343)
bugging of ies CPU Unit or NY-series Industrial PC and the FHV Sensor for details on func-
Sensor Con- operation is simulated for an EtherCAT system. tions.
trol Program You can debug a series of operations offline to perform the
and Sensor measurement and other processing and output the results when
Operation a control signal such as measurement trigger is input to the
Sensor.
Security Prevention of You can prevent unauthorized access by setting an account
Incorrect Op- password for online operations.
eration
3

3-7-22 Vision Sensor Functions

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-97

3 System Design

3-7-23 Displacement Sensor Functions

Item Description Reference
Setting Parameters --- Refer to the ZW-series
Main ed- Basic Settings The basic information on the Sensor is displayed and set. Confocal Fiber Type
iting Displacement Sensor
Sensor con- You can change the connection status between the computer
User’s Manual (Cat.
nection and Sensor, and set the conditions for communications.
No. Z332) for details
Online Sensor You can perform various controls for the Sensor online (e.g.,
on functions.
controls changing the mode, controlling internal logging, and monitor-
ing).
Tools You can restart the Sensor, initialize the Sensor, update the
firmware of the Sensor, recover ROM data, print the Sensor pa-
rameters, and display help.
Editing Setting sens- You can adjust the light reception conditions for each measure-
bank da- ing conditions ment region.
ta Setting task You can select the measurement items to use in measurements.
conditions You can select from the height, thickness, or calculations.
The following are set for the measurement items: scaling, filters,
holding, zero-resetting, and judgement conditions.
Setting I/O You can set parameters for outputting judgements and analog
conditions values to external devices.
Editing Sensor set- You can set the following: ZW Sensor Controller’s key lock,
system tings number of displayed digits below the decimal point, the bank
data mode, the analog output mode, and timing/reset key inputs.
Setting Ether- You can set Ethernet communications and field bus parameters.
net communi-
cations
Setting You can make settings for RS-232C communications.
RS-232C
communica-
tions
Data output You can set serial output parameters for holding values.
settings
Monitoring Sensor moni- You can monitor the light-detection status and the measurement
toring results of the sensor.
Trend moni- You can log and monitor the measurement results that meet the
toring specific conditions of the sensor.
Debugging Offline debug- The linked operation of the sequence controls in the NJ/NX/NY-
ging of Sen- series Controller and the ZW Sensor operation is simulated for
sor control an EtherCAT system.
programs and This allows you to simulate the operation of signals when timing
Sensor opera- signals and other control signals are input to the Sensor to de-
tion bug the control logic offline.

3-98 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-7-24 Team Development Option

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Item Description Reference
Project version control function You can control a project version in concert with the version Refer to the Sysmac
control system (Git™). Studio Project Version
History Showing the You can see the change history of project data in a branch, local Control Function
manage- project log repository, and remote repository. Operation Manual
ment (Cat. No. W589) for
Comparing You can compare specific revisions from the project change his-
details on functions.
projects tory.
Reverting a You can restore a project to any revision.
project
Multiple- Developing a You can develop controller programs per POU concurrently. The
person program con- changes of concurrent development are merged automatically.
develop- currently
ment 3
Deriva- Creating a You can create and edit data derived from a master project.
tive de- branch

3-7-24 Team Development Option

velop- Merging Changes in a branch are automatically reflected in the master
ment data.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-99

3 System Design

3-7-25 3D Simulation Function

The function is supported by the Sysmac Studio (64 bit) only.

Item Description Reference

3D Simulation This function enables to check the followings visually on a PC: Refer to the Sysmac
behaviors of the equipment controlled by NJ/NX/NY Controllers Studio 3D Simulation
and conveyance of parts to be processed or assembled. Function Operation
Adding 3D CAD Data Adds 3D CAD data. Manual (Cat. No.
3D ob- W618) for details on
Cylinder Adds a cylinder.
ject functions.
Box Adds a box.
Mechanical Adds a mechanical component controlled by I/O or motion axis.
Component*1
Virtual Part Adds a virtual sensor to detect a part position.
Detection
Sensor
Shape Adding a pro- Adds a program to replicate the part behavior on a 3D simula-
Script gram tion.
Programming Edit a program with Shape Script Editor.
Automatic Automatically generate the Shape Script to replicate the behav-
generation of ior of a limit switch in a specific mechanism.
a virtual out-
put program
for a limit
switch
Automatic Automatically generate the Shape Script to replicate the behav-
program gen- ior of Part Detection Sensor detecting a virtual part.
eration for
Part Detection
Sensor
Execution Executes Shape Script
Execut- Execution*1 Executes 3D Simulation
ing 3D Collision de- Detects a contact between 3D objects (e.g. equipment compo-
Simula- tection nents, part) during operation.
tion
*1. 3D Simulation Option is required to operate the mechanical components in a 3D simulation.

3-100 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-7-26 Robot Function

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

The function is supported by the Sysmac Studio (64 bit) only.

Item Description Reference

Robot --- Refer to the Sysmac
Parame- EtherCAT You can register an Omron robot as an EtherCAT node. Studio Robot
ter Set- Settings Integrated System
tings Building Function with
Robot Com- You can assign I/O that controlled with V+ program written in a
Robot Integrated CPU
mon Settings robot control language.
Unit Operation Manual
Robot Basic You can assign robot numbers to robots.
(Cat. No. W595) for
Settings
details on functions.
Controller You can configure common settings for robot controllers.
Settings
Save Configu- You can configure the setting to save V+ programs, V+ varia- 3
ration bles, and task settings at startup to the Controller’s non-volatile
memory (SD memory card).

3-7-26 Robot Function

Monitor Win- You can issue a control command directly to a robot system.
dow
Robot Set- You can configure settings for each robot.
tings
Program- V+ Program You can register, edit, and debug V+ programs.
ming Editor
V+ Variables You can register and edit V+ variables.
Search/ Search/replace in V+ program.
Replace
Commu- Online Con- You can establish an online connection between PC and Con-
nication nection troller.
Synchroniza- You can compare data in the PC (project file) with that in the on-
tion line-connected Robot Integrated CPU Unit to see differences in
a list.
Also, you can transfer the specified data all at once, together
with Robot Controller Common Settings and V+ programs.
Transfer All You can transfer data between the online-connected Robot Inte-
grated CPU Unit and PC. The data to be transferred is the same
as that of Synchronization. Unlike Synchronization, data is
transferred to the specified direction without showing compari-
son result.
Robot Controller Common Settings and V+ programs are also
transferred at the same time.
V+ Program You can compare V+ programs and V+ variables in the PC
Synchroniza- (project file) with those in the online-connected Robot Integrated
tion CPU Unit, and differences are shown in a list. You can specify
data to transfer at once.
Push to V+ You can transfer all V+ programs and V+ variables in the PC
Memory (project file) and online-connected Robot Integrated CPU Unit
from PC to Controller at the same time.
Pull from V+ You can transfer all V+ programs and V+ variables in the PC
Memory (project file) and online-connected Robot Integrated CPU Unit
from Controller to PC at the same time.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-101

3 System Design

Item Description Reference

Robot --- Refer to the Sysmac
Project Open in Emu- Select this option before opening the project to configure Robot Studio Robot
Manage- lation Mode Control Function Module, edit V+ program and do offline debug- Integrated System
ment ging. Building Function with
Robot Integrated CPU
Enable Emu- You can enable the emulation mode and reopen the project.
Unit Operation Manual
lation Mode
(Cat. No. W595) for
Disable Emu- You can disable the emulation mode and reopen the project.
details on functions.
lation Mode
Print You can print V+ programs, V+ variables, robot settings, and
others.
Application You can create a sample of Pack manager or Robot Vision
Sample Manager as a project of Application Manager device, based on
a robot configuration crated by EtherCAT Editor.
Debug- 3D Visualizer You can check or change the robot’s position. During a simula-
ging tion, you can check movements of the robot.
Task Status This user interface enables an online connection to Robot Con-
Control trol Function Module, robot’s power state control, monitor speed
setting, and activation of other debugging functions.
Task Manager You can allocate V+ program to a task managed by Robot Con-
trol Function Module to control execution of the program.
IO Watcher You can monitor robot’s digital I/O in a list.
Virtual Front You can monitor robot’s mode, power state, and emergency
Panel stop button state. This function is available in the emulation
mode.
V+ Jog Con- You can determine a position of the selected robot checking the
trol 3D Visualizer. Position of the robot’s tip is to be registered to a
location variable.
Informa- Troubleshoot- You can check errors in the Controller, instruct countermeas-
tion Mon- ing/Event Log ures, clear errors, or confirm it.
itoring System Moni- You can monitor robot’s parameters in real time.
tor
eV+ Log You can display processing history of Robot Control Function
Modules.
Mainte- Hardware Di- You can check robot’s motor status.
nance agnostics
Data Collec- You can display or save the robot system data.
tion
Motor Tuning You can send a square wave signal positioning command to the
specified motor to monitor its response.
Security Robot System This function prevents illegal changes in Robot Control Function
Operation Au- Module settings or V+ program editing both online and offline.
thentication
Customi- V+ Program You can define headers generated when creating a new V+ pro-
zation gram, configure intellicences, etc.

3-102 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

3-7-27 Application Manager Function

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

The function is supported by the Sysmac Studio (64 bit) only.

Item Description Reference

Application Manager --- Refer to the Sysmac
Setting IP Address You can set Application Controller’s IP address. Studio Robot
Integrated System
Port Number You can set the port numbers of Application Manager running
Building Function with
on the Application Controller.
IPC Application
Add 3D 3D CAD Data You can add 3D CAD data.
Controller Operation
Object Cylinder You can add cylinders. Manual (Cat. No.
Box You can add boxes. W621) for details on
Mechanical You can add mechanical components controlled by I/O or mo- functions.
Component*1 tion axes.
Virtual Part You can add virtual sensors that detect position of the part. 3
Detection
Sensor

3-7-27 Application Manager Function

Robot Vi- Belt Latch You can calibrate the positional relation between the robot and
sion Calibration latch.
Manager Belt Calibra- You can calibrate the positional relation between the robot and
tion conveyor belt.
Camera Cali- You can calibrate the positional relation between the robot and
bration camera.
Gripper Offset You can define where on the part the robot can pick it and
Table flange-centered relationship among pick spot, part model, and
robot.
Vision Se- You can display the order and dependency of vision tools to be
quence executed.
Overlap Tool This function makes the part moving on the conveyor belt proc-
essed only once, even if it appears in multiple images.
Communica- You can configure settings for sending results of image sensing
tion Tool associated with the belt to the Controller’s queue to make the
robot process them.
Camera Virtual Cam- You can set a virtual camera that vision tools reference. During
Settings era simulation, the emulation camera is used, but in the real ma-
chine, it switches to the Basler camera.
Emulation You can emulate saved images as if taken by a camera.
Camera
Basler Cam- You can configure settings to use the Basler camera.
era
Sentech Cam- You can configure settings to use the Sentech camera.
era
Custom De- Using C# programs, you can acquire images from any camera
vice device or external vision system.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-103

3 System Design

Item Description Reference

Application Manager --- Refer to the Sysmac
Configu- Controller You can connect Application Manager running on the Applica- Studio Robot
ration Connection tion Controller to the Robot Integrated CPU Unit and configure Integrated System
Startup settings to instruct controls, at a startup of Application Manager. Building Function with
IPC Application
Data Mapper Function that allows changes in the state of robot I/O or other to
Controller Operation
be assigned to other robot I/O or other process state changes.
Manual (Cat. No.
Note You can create text documents.
W621) for details on
OPC Contain- You can set an OPC container to communicate data with an ex- functions.
er ternal PC.
Program Sys- You can specify C# program which run automatically when an
tem Startup Application Manager project running on the Application Control-
ler is opened.
Recipe Man- This function enables batch management of initial values of V+
ager variables, vision tools, cameras, and others, according to the
objects handled by equipment.
Recipe Man- You can manage recipes with C# script.
ager Script
Feeders AnyFeeder You can configure settings to use AnyFeeder.
IO Feeder You can configure settings to use a general feeder.
Process Part Buffer You can set a location where the part is temporarily stored if the
target cannot be used to accept the part.
Part Target You can configure settings of a part that the robot places, which
handled in Process Manager.
Part You can configure settings of a part that the robot picks, which
handled in Process Manager.
Belt You can configure a conveyor belt.
Process Man- You can manage allocations and control queuing of multiple
ager controllers, robots, conveyors, parts, and targets.
Allocation You can create Custom Part Allocation Program used in Proc-
Script ess Manager with C#.
Pallet It is the base object to pick and place multiple parts.
Vision Refine- With this function, you can configure position of upward-facing
ment Station camera in order to adjust orientations of the part and gripper.

3-104 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 3 System Design

Item Description Reference

3-7 Sysmac Studio Settings and Operations

Application Manager --- Refer to the Sysmac
Vision Finder This function creates a vectorized depiction of an object or ob- Studio Robot
ject function and usually returns a result by coordinate. Integrated System
Building Function with
Inspection By identifying pixel information, you can check the various as-
IPC Application
pects of the detected objects or features, such as color devia-
Controller Operation
tions, defects, and product density.
Manual (Cat. No.
Reader You can acquire character string data from characters in code or
W621) for details on
image.
functions.
Calculation You can create new entity in an image based on user-defined or
existing entities.
Image Proc- This function provides helpful operations and features to ana-
ess lyze and process images.
Custom You can directly control processing methods for images and
tools. 3
Pro- C# Program You can reference and compute the data handled by Application
grams Manager with C# program to create an application.

3-7-27 Application Manager Function

Variables You can define a variable in the Variables section in Multiview
Explorer when you need a variable shared with multiple C# pro-
grams.
Search/ Search/replace in C# program.
Replace
Commu- Online Con- You can establish an online connection between PC and Appli-
nication nection cation Manager on the Application Controller.
Synchroniza- You can compare data in the PC (project file) with that in the on-
tion line-connected Application Manager to see differences in a list.
Also, you can transfer the specified data all at once.
Project Open in Emu- Select this option before opening the project to configure Appli-
Manage- lation Mode cation Manager, Robot Control Function Module, edit V+ pro-
ment gram and do offline debugging.
Enable Emu- You can enable the emulation mode and reopen the project.
lation Mode
Disable Emu- You can disable the emulation mode and reopen the project.
lation Mode
Print You can print settings of Application Manager and programs.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 3-105

3 System Design

Item Description Reference

Application Manager --- Refer to the Sysmac
Debug- 3D Visualizer You can check or change position of the robot, belt, or other ob- Studio Robot
ging jects. During a simulation, you can check movements of the ro- Integrated System
bot and parts. Building Function with
IPC Application
Task Status You can monitor and control Process manager of Application
Controller Operation
Control Manager and execution of C# program. This user interface ena-
Manual (Cat. No.
bles an online connection to Robot Control Function Module, ro-
W621) for details on
bot’s power state control, monitor speed setting, and activation
functions.
of other debugging functions.
Task Manager You can allocate V+ program to a task managed by Robot Con-
trol Function Module to control execution of the program.
IO Watcher You can monitor robot’s digital I/O in a list.
Virtual Front You can monitor robot’s mode, power state, and emergency
Panel stop button state. This function is available in the emulation
mode.
V+ Jog Con- You can determine a position of the selected robot checking the
trol 3D Visualizer. Position of the robot’s tip is to be registered to a
location variable.
Informa- System Moni- You can monitor Process Manager of Application Manager, exe-
tion Mon- tor cution status of C# program, and robot’s parameters in real
itoring time.
Security Robot System This function prevents illegal changes in Application Manager
Operation Au- Settings both online and offline.
thentication
*1. 3D Simulation Option is required to operate mechanical components during 3D simulation.

3-106 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4
Programming
This section describes how to create programs with the Sysmac Studio.

4-1 Variable Registration ..................................................................................... 4-3

4-1-1 Creating Global Variables................................................................................ 4-4
4-1-2 Creating Device Variables ..............................................................................4-11
4-1-3 Creating Local Variables ............................................................................... 4-22
4-1-4 Creating Axis Variables ................................................................................. 4-27
4-1-5 Creating Axes Group Variables ..................................................................... 4-30
4-1-6 Creating Cam Data Variables ........................................................................ 4-32
4-1-7 Creating Function Block Instance Variables .................................................. 4-35
4-1-8 System-defined Variables.............................................................................. 4-36
4-1-9 Entering Variable Attributes ........................................................................... 4-36
4-1-10 Variable Manager .......................................................................................... 4-48
4-2 Registering POUs......................................................................................... 4-57
4-2-1 Displaying POUs ........................................................................................... 4-57
4-2-2 Registering Programs.................................................................................... 4-57
4-2-3 Registering Function Blocks.......................................................................... 4-60
4-2-4 Registering Functions.................................................................................... 4-62
4-2-5 Copying, Pasting, and Deleting Multiple POUs ............................................. 4-64
4-3 Creating Data Types..................................................................................... 4-69
4-4 Namespaces ................................................................................................. 4-79
4-4-1 Data for Which You Can Use Namespaces................................................... 4-79
4-4-2 Setting Namespaces ..................................................................................... 4-79
4-4-3 Using Namespaces ....................................................................................... 4-82
4-5 Programming ................................................................................................ 4-85
4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams .................................................................... 4-85
4-5-2 Programming Structured Text...................................................................... 4-140
4-5-3 Comparison before Pasting Dependents .................................................... 4-152
4-6 Searching and Replacing .......................................................................... 4-155
4-6-1 Scope of Searching and Replacing ............................................................. 4-155
4-6-2 Search and Replace Pane .......................................................................... 4-155
4-6-3 Items to Set ................................................................................................. 4-156
4-6-4 Searching .................................................................................................... 4-159
4-6-5 Replacing .................................................................................................... 4-160
4-6-6 Searching All ............................................................................................... 4-161
4-6-7 Replacing All ............................................................................................... 4-161
4-6-8 Replacing All N.O. and N.C. Inputs ............................................................. 4-161
4-7 Program Checks......................................................................................... 4-162
4-7-1 Check All Programs..................................................................................... 4-162

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-1

4 Programming

4-7-2 Check Selected Programs........................................................................... 4-162

4-8 Building and Rebuilding ............................................................................ 4-165
4-9 Offline Comparison .................................................................................... 4-167
4-9-1 Procedure for Offline Comparison ............................................................... 4-167
4-9-2 Merging Detailed Comparison Results........................................................ 4-172

4-2 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-1 Variable Registration

• Variable Registration
You can create variables to hold the data that is used in the control algorithms in the NJ/NX/NY-ser-
ies Controller. You can define the following types of variables.

Variable
Description
type

4-1 Variable Registration

Global varia- You can read and write global variables from any POU (program, function, or function block).
bles You declare global variables in the global variable table.
You use global variables to interface different POUs.
You can read and write a global variable from any POU that is executed on the CPU Unit where
the global variable was declared. However, a POU that runs on another CPU Unit cannot access
these variables.
Device variables that are automatically generated from the Unit configuration and slave configu-
ration are automatically registered as global variables. The Axis Variables and Axes Group
Variables that are automatically generated from the axes and axes groups are also automatical-
ly registered as global variables.
4
Device varia- A device variable is used to access data in a device (i.e., slave or Unit).

4-1-1 Creating Global Variables

bles The data is accessed through logical interface ports that are called I/O ports.
You assign device variables to the I/O ports that are automatically created when you create the
EtherCAT slave configuration information or the Unit configuration information in the I/O Map of
the Sysmac Studio.
Local varia- A local variable can be used only within one POU.
bles A local variable is declared in the local variable table for the POU.
You cannot access the values of local variables from outside of the POU.
Even if you declare a local variable with the same name in a different POU, those variables do
not share the same memory space.
Axis Varia- Axis Variables are system-defined variables. They are structures that provide information on
bles axes (such as physical quantities, status, and error information). They are used to access Ether-
CAT slaves that are assigned to an axis.
Axes Group Axes Group Variables are structures for axes groups. An axes group contains multiple axes that
Variables are interpolated. Axes Group Variables are used for interpolated motions in programs.
Cam data You use these variables to access cam data. You create them in the Cam Data Settings in the
variables Sysmac Studio. A cam data variable is a structure array variable that consists of phases and
displacements.
Function Function block instance variables are names that are assigned to function block instances so
block in- that you can manage the function block instances individually.
stance varia- A function block that has a given name and can retain internal variables is called a function
bles block instance. Instances of function blocks are automatically registered as local variables.
Specify the instance variable name when you call a function block from another POU.
Derivative Derivative variables have user-defined data types. They group together variables of different da-
variables ta types into a single variable. You can give any name to the data type.
(structures, You must specify the variable name that uses the user-defined data type and at least one
unions, and member in that variable.
enumera-
tions)
System-de- System-defined variables are provided in advance in an NJ/NX/NY-series Controller. The varia-
fined varia- bles and all attributes are defined by the system. They have specific functions. System-defined
bles variables are supplied for each function module.
You cannot change the variable names or any other attributes.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-3

4 Programming

4-1-1 Creating Global Variables

• Creating Global Variables
You can create variables that you can access from different POUs (programs, functions, or function
blocks).
The device variables that are used to access slave and Unit data, such as EtherCAT slave and CJ-
series Unit device variables, are also registered as global variables.

 Opening the Global Variable Tab Page

Double-click Global Variables under Programming - Data in the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-click
Global Variables under Programming - Data and select Edit from the menu.

The global variable table is displayed.

 Creating Global Variables

1 Press the Insert Key in the global variable table, or right-click in the global variable table and
select Create New from the menu.

2 Enter values for each item, and then press the Enter Key.

4-4 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

The variable is registered. Always set the variable name and the data type.
Refer to 4-1-9 Entering Variable Attributes on page 4-36 for information on entering values for
attributes.

4-1 Variable Registration

 Editing Global Variables

1 Click the cell to edit for the variable.

4
For the Data Type cell, if you press the Ctrl + Space Keys or enter the first character of the
data type, a drop-down list is displayed.

4-1-1 Creating Global Variables

2 Change the setting, and then press the Enter Key.
The change is applied to the variable.

 Deleting Variables

1 Click the header on the row of the variable to delete to select the entire row.

2 Press the Delete Key. Or, right-click a row and select Delete from the menu. To delete a global
variable together with external variables that refer to the global variable, press the Ctrl + Shift +
Delete Keys, or select Delete (including external variables) from the pop-up menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-5

4 Programming

The variable is deleted.

If you select Delete (including external variables), all external variables that refer to the glob-
al variable will be deleted.

 Copying and Pasting Cells

1 Click any cell.

2 Press the Ctrl + C Keys. Or, right-click and select Copy from the menu.

3 Press the Ctrl + V Keys for the cell to which you want to paste the data. Or, right-click and se-
lect Paste from the menu.
The copied data is pasted to the target cell.

 Copying and Pasting Variables

There are the following menus to copy variables.
• Copy: Only variables are copied.
• Copy with Dependents: Not only variables but also data type definitions of the variables are
copied.

1 Click the header on the row of the variable to copy to select the entire row.

2 Press the Ctrl + C Keys. Or, right-click the row and select Copy from the menu. If you want to
copy data together with the data type definitions of variables, select Copy with Dependents.

4-6 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-1 Variable Registration

The specified variable is copied.

3 Press the Ctrl + V Keys in the destination variable table. Or, right-click and select Paste from
the menu.

4-1-1 Creating Global Variables

• When Copy is selected
A copy of the variable is registered with _Copy added to the name of the variable that was
copied.

• When Copy with Dependents is selected

Not only variables but also data type definitions of the variables are pasted. If a data type
definition with the same name and different attribute already exists in the destination, the
Comparison before pasting dependents Dialog Box is displayed.
For details on the Comparison before pasting dependents Dialog Box, refer to 4-5-3 Com-
parison before Pasting Dependents on page 4-152.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-7

4 Programming

Precautions for Correct Use

If you enter any invalid characters or out of range values, the cell is highlighted in red. An error
will occur when the program is checked. For information on restrictions on variable names, refer
to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial
Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558).

Additional Information

• If no variables are registered, There are no variables in the table. Click here to add. is dis-
played. Click to add a new variable.
• A global variable is registered automatically when you perform any of the following opera-
tions.
a) When you enter a new variable in the Variable Column of the I/O Map with Global
Variable specified in the Variable Type Column.
b) When you create a new interface variable between tasks.
c) When you create a new axis, axes group, cam, or cam definition in the Multiview Explorer.
• You can register new variables that are entered into the Ladder Editor or ST Editor as global
variables. Select the Select the local or global variable and register it Check Box in the
option settings to select the location in which variables are registered. Then, specify Global
as the variable type when you enter the variables. Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Set-
tings on page 8-123 for details on the option settings.
• When you change the name of a registered global variable, you can also change at the same
time the name of the same variable where it is used in programs or external variables. Set
the Change the variable name used in programs Check Box in the option settings. Refer to
8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for details.
• If the same variable names exist when variables are copied and pasted from other variable
tables or spreadsheets, a dialog box that lists the source and destination variables is dis-
played. Select the variable to overwrite and execute the paste.
• If an NA-series PT is registered in the project, you can drag variables from the global variable
table to the NA-series PT Page Editor to add them as objects.
Refer to the NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. V118) for
details.

 Selecting Rows
Click the header on the row, and the entire row is selected.

Hold down the Ctrl or Shift Key and click the headers of rows to select more than one row.

 Moving Rows
You can drag and drop the grip at the left end of the row to change the order of the rows.

4-8 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

 Sorting Global Variables

You can sort the global variable table in ascending or descending order according to any column.

4-1 Variable Registration

Click the title row cell for the column to use to sort the variable table.

A sort icon is displayed in the title row and the relative column is sorted in ascending order. 4

4-1-1 Creating Global Variables

Click the cell in the title row again to sort the table in descending order.

2 To cancel sorting, right-click the title row cell for the column that you used to sort the variable
table and select Clear Sorting.

Additional Information

The sorting results are lost when you close the global variable table.

 Filtering Global Variables

You can apply a filter to the variable table to display only specific variables.

1 Right-click the title row cell for the column to use to filter the variable table and select Filtering.

The Filtering Dialog Box is displayed.

The contents of the dialog box depends on the column that is selected.
The following example is for the variable name.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-9

4 Programming

2 Enter the text string and condition to use for filtering in the Filtering Dialog Box, and click the
OK Button.
An icon that indicates filtering is active appears in the title row and only the variables that meet
the specified condition are displayed.

3 To cancel filtering, right-click the title row cell for the column that you used to filter the variable
list and select Clear Filtering − Selected Column or All Columns.

Additional Information

• You can apply filtering to more than one column to restrict the variables that are displayed
even further.
• The filtering results are lost when you close the global variable table.
• If you copy variables while a filter is active, the variables that are hidden will not be copied.

 Showing and Hiding Columns

You can show and hide columns in the variable table.

1 Right-click the title row cell for the desired column and select Display Columns.
A list of the displayed columns is displayed.

All columns are selected by default.

2 Clear the selections of the columns to hide.

The columns are hidden.

4-10 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-1-2 Creating Device Variables

• Device Variables
A device variable is used to access data in a device (i.e., slave or Unit).
This data is accessed through a port that acts as an interface to an external device. This logical port
is called an I/O port.

Creating Variables

4-1 Variable Registration

You can create device variables in the I/O Map.
You can either automatically create a device variable or manually enter the device variable name to
create it.

 Manually Entering a Device Variable Name

You can enter a device variable name manually.
You create device variables with this method in the following cases.
• To assign your own name for a slave I/O Terminal or a Basic I/O Unit. 4

4-1-2 Creating Device Variables

Create the slave configuration information or Unit configuration information.

2 Select an I/O port in the I/O Map and enter a variable in the Variable Column.
To specify a variable table for the variable type, specify the variable type in advance.

Device variables are automatically assigned to the I/O ports for each slave or Unit. These de-
vice variables are also automatically registered in the variable table specified in the Variable
Type Column.

 Automatically Creating Device Variables

The device variables are named automatically from a combination of the device names or any
strings and the I/O port names.

Menu Description
Create Device Vari- The variables are named automatically from a combination of the device names and
able the I/O port names.
Create Device Vari- The variables are named automatically from a combination of any prefixes or suffixes
able with Prefix and the I/O port names. When None is selected, the variables with the I/O port names
are generated automatically.

You create device variables with this method in the following cases.
• To eliminate the work that is involved in obtaining the device variable names.
• To automatically create device variables to use to access operating data and setup data for CJ-
series Special Units.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-11

4 Programming

1 Create the slave configuration information or Unit configuration information.

2 For each device whose name you can change, set a device name in the Edit Pane.

The default device names are as follows:

• For NX Units, the default device names start with an N followed by a sequential number
starting from 1.
• For slaves, the default device names start with an E followed by a sequential number starting
from 001.
• For CJ-series Units, the default device names start with a J followed by a sequential number
starting from 01.

3 Select a slave, Unit, or one or more I/O ports in the I/O Map, right-click, and then select Create
Device Variable or Create Device Variable with Prefix from the menu.
To specify a variable table for the variable type, specify the variable type in advance.
When you select Create Device Variable with Prefix, specify Prefix, Suffix, or None in the
next dialog box.

Device variables are automatically assigned to the I/O ports for each slave or Unit. These de-
vice variables are also automatically registered in the variable table specified in the Variable
Type Column.

Precautions for Correct Use

When you use an instruction with a UnitProxy input variable for a Unit on an NX-series Slave
Terminal, perform the following operation.
1. Right-click the Unit and select Display Node Location Port from the menu. The Node
Location Information row is displayed in the table.
2. Set a device variable.

4-12 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Additional Information

• We recommend that you set the device names.

• If you do not specify anything in the Variable Type Column when you register a variable or
create device variables, the variables are automatically registered in the global variable table.

• Example of Creating Device Variables

The variable is created from the user-defined slave or Unit name and the selected I/O port name.

Device variable notation

4-1 Variable Registration

Registered slave or
Slave or Description Variable name
Unit I/O port name
Unit name
NX-ID3344 N1 Input Bit 00 --- N1_Input_Bit_00
GX-ID1611 E001 Bit00 --- E001_Bit00
GX-AD0471 E002 CH0 input 16-bit --- E002_CH0_input_16-
bit
CJ1W-ID212 J01 Ch1_In00 Bit 00 on input word J01_Ch1_In00
1
CJ1WAD041-V1 J02 Ch1_PkHdCmd Holds peak value for J02_Ch1_PkHdCmd 4
input 1.

4-1-2 Creating Device Variables

 Selecting from the Registered Variables
You can select variables that are already registered on the I/O Map.
You create device variables with this method in the following cases.
• To program before you create the slave configuration information or Unit configuration informa-
tion.
• To reuse programs from another project.
Use the following procedure.

1 Register the variables in advance in the global variable table.

2 Program using those variables.

3 Create the slave configuration information or Unit configuration information.

4 Select a variable from a pull-down list in the I/O Map View to assign it to an I/O port.

Select a user-defined variable that has already

been registered in the global variable table.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-13

4 Programming

Additional Information

To remove the variable assigned to an I/O port, clear the Variable Column or right-click the vari-
able and select Reset Assignment from the menu.
The device variable assignment is removed. However, removing the assignment does not de-
lete the variable from the variable table where it is registered.

 Device Variable Attributes

Device variables are registered in the variable table specified in the Variable Type Column under
the following conditions.

Changes
Attribute Setting
to settings
Name Automatically generated variables: [device_name] + [I/O_port_name] Possible.

The default device names are as follows:

• For NX Units, the device names start with an N followed by a sequential
number starting from 1.
• For CJ-series Units, the device names start with a J followed by a
sequential number starting from 01.
• For EtherCAT slaves, the device names start with an E followed by a
sequential number starting from 001.
• For the built-in I/O port*1, the device names are fixed to BIO.
• For Option Boards*1, the device names are fixed to OP1 or OP2.
Refer to 4-1-2 Creating Device Variables on page 4-11 for information on
I/O port names.

If entered manually, the variable name is simply the string you enter.
Data Type The data type must have the same size as the data type of the I/O port. Possible.
Initial Value None*2 Possible.
AT • Device variables for EtherCAT slaves: Not possi-
ECAT://node#[node_number]/[I/O_port_name] ble.
• Device variables for NX Units on CPU Rack:
IOBus://unit#[NX_Unit_number]/I/O_port_name
• Device variables for NX Units on EtherCAT Slave Terminal:
ECAT://node#[EtherCAT_Coupler_node_address, NX_Unit_number]/I/
O_port_name
• Device variables for CJ-series Units:
IOBus://rack#[rack_number]/slot#[slot_number]/[I/O_port_name]
• Device variables for built-in I/O port*1:
BuiltInIO://cpu/#[physical_port_number]/[I/O_port_name]
• Device variables for Option Boards*1:
BuiltInIO://opt/#[physical_port_number]/[I/O_port_name]
Retain • Device variables for NX Units: Not retained. Not possi-
• Device variables for EtherCAT slaves: Not retained. ble.
• Device variables for CJ-series Units assigned to the
Operation Data (CIO Area): Not retained.
Device variables for CJ-series Units assigned to the Setup Data (DM
Area): Retained.
• Device variables for built-in I/O port*1: Not retained.
• Device variables for Option Boards*1: Not retained.
Constant Yes for variables assigned to Setup Data (DM Area) for an I/O port that is Possible.
set to R (read-only). Other variables: None

4-14 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Changes
Attribute Setting
to settings
Network Publish Do not publish. Possible.
Comment Enter a user-defined comment. Possible.
*1. This is available only for an NX1P2 Controller.
*2. Some Basic I/O Units have more than one access method for the same I/O port, such as bit string data
and BOOL data. If you use initial values for this type of I/O port, set the initial values for one of the ac-
cess types to None.

Display in Variable Table

4-1 Variable Registration

To access the I/O port by
bit, set the initial value to
TRUE.

Set the initial value for

word access to None.

4
Display in I/O Map

4-1-2 Creating Device Variables

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-15

4 Programming

Additional Information

• You can select any of the following items in the I/O Map to create a group of device variables
at one time.

Network line

Unit line

Parent I/O port line

One I/O port line

Multiple I/O port lines

• The operation results are given in the following table.

The variables are created based on the user-defined Unit name and the selected I/O port
name.

User action Result

Selected one I/O port A variable for the selected I/O port is created.
line If the selected I/O port line contains other lower level I/O ports, variables for
those lower level I/O ports are also created.
Selected multiple I/O Variables for the selected I/O ports are created.
port lines If the selected I/O port line contains other lower level I/O ports, variables for
those lower level I/O ports are also created.
Selected a parent I/O Variables for all I/O ports under the selected I/O port are created.
port line
Selected a Unit line Variables are created for all I/O ports of the selected Unit.
Selected network line Variables are created for all I/O ports of the selected network.

Additional Information

• To register a variable in any other variable table besides the global variable table, change the
variable table type in the Variable Type Column before selecting Create Device Variables.
If you do not specify anything in the Variable Type Column, the variables are automatically
registered in the global variable table.
If a variable of the same name already exists when you create a device variable, a "unique ID
number" is appended to the end of the variable.
• You can copy variables from the I/O Map and paste them into a spreadsheet (e.g., Excel). Or,
you can copy variables from a spreadsheet and paste them into the I/O Map. Copy the varia-
ble name, variable comment, and variable type columns (including the title row) on the
spreadsheet, and then select the first variable at which to paste the data on the I/O Map and
paste the data.
With Sysmac Studio version 1.05 or higher, you can paste the data on the I/O Map without
copying the title row. You can also copy and paste just the variable name column or the varia-
ble name and variable comment columns. To do so, display the desired columns of the I/O
Map. If pasting data to the I/O Map fails, the location where the paste failed is displayed on
the Output Tab Page.

4-16 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Copying and Pasting Variables between I/O Map and Spreadsheet

You can copy data from the I/O Map and paste it into a spreadsheet (e.g. Excel). Or, you can copy
data edited in a spreadsheet and paste it into the I/O Map.

4-1 Variable Registration

You can configure the I/O Map by registering the name of variables and comments to be assigned to
each port in a spreadsheet and pasting the data into the I/O Map.

 Copying and Pasting Variables from the I/O Map into a Spreadsheet 4
If you paste the I/O Map data into a spreadsheet, the configuration is displayed as follows.
Data pasted in a spreadsheet is classified into four items.

4-1-2 Creating Device Variables

(a)

(b)

(d)

(c)

Edit-
Name Meaning Remarks
ing
(a) Column header Displays the item for each col- No The first row only
umn.
(b) Device informa- Displays information on each No Variable information is write-protected
tion device. on the I/O Map.
(c) Port information Displays the port information No Consists of five data: Position (always
on each device. blank), port name, port description, read/
write attribute, and data type.
(d) Variable informa- Displays variable information Yes Consists of three data: Variable, variable
tion that is assigned to each port. comment, and variable type.

If more than one device is registered in the I/O Map, (b) Device information, (c) Port information,
and (d) Variable information are pasted by device.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-17

4 Programming

Copying and Pasting Variables from a Spreadsheet into the I/O Map
When you paste data edited in a spreadsheet into the I/O Map, you need to follow the rules for pasted
data so that they are properly identified in the Sysmac Studio. Paste data according to the following
rules.

 (a) When All I/O Map Data Including (a) Column Header Is Copied from a
Spreadsheet and Pasted into the I/O Map

1 Delete the row of (b) Device information for the first device under (a) Column header before
copying data.
If you copy data of multiple devices, copy the data without deleting rows of (b) Device
information of the second and subsequent devices.

2 Select the top port of the top device on the I/O Map and paste the data.

 Operation Example of (a)

• Creating variable data of a newly added device in a spreadsheet and pasting it into the I/O Map

1 If you create a device configuration on the Sysmac Studio, the I/O Map is automatically creat-
ed. Display and right-click the I/O Map and select Expand All/Collapse All.
Ports for each device are displayed.

2 Select the overall I/O Map with the Ctrl + A Keys, copy it with the Ctrl + C Keys, select a cell on
the upper left corner in a spreadsheet, and then paste the data.

4-18 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-1 Variable Registration

3 Delete the line of (b) Device information under (a) Column header.

4-1-2 Creating Device Variables

4 Register variables and variable comments on the spreadsheet.

5 Select all data with the Ctrl + A Keys on the spreadsheet and copy the data with the Ctrl + C
Keys.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-19

4 Programming

6 Paste the copied data into the I/O Map. Specify the top port of the top device as paste position.

All variables are pasted as global variables.

7 If you change them to local variables, change the Variable Type to the (POU name) Internals.

4-20 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

 b) When Only (d) Variable Information of Some Devices Is Copied from a

Spreadsheet and Pasted into the I/O Map

1 Copy all (d) Variable information to apply to the I/O Map.

If you select all (d) Variable information of multiple devices at once, select it in a rectangle with-
out separation.

2 Specify a port position to paste copied data on the I/O Map and paste the data.

4-1 Variable Registration

 Operation Example of (b)
• Changing some data of variables assigned to a port on a spreadsheet and pasting the data into
the I/O Map

1 Select a port to change the variable information on the I/O Map and copy the data with Ctrl + C
Keys.

4-1-2 Creating Device Variables

2 Paste it into a spreadsheet.

3 Change the variable information, select the changed part, and copy it with the Ctrl + C Keys.

4 Select the target port on the I/O Map and paste the changed data.
If you change variable names in a spreadsheet, variables assigned to the port on the I/O Map
are deleted when the data is pasted. If you want to retain the variables, right-click the device
and select Reset Assignment from the pop-up menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-21

4 Programming

The changed variable information is applied to the I/O Map.

Precautions for Correct Use

Variable names and comments of ports whose data type is array cannot be properly pasted
from a spreadsheet into the I/O Map.
When you copy all I/O Map data including (a) Column header and paste the data into the I/O
Map, data of ports whose data type is array may be included. Pasting the data may fail in that
case.

Additional Information

Using the leftmost column in the figure below makes it easy to select a row of the port on the
I/O Map.

Click the column to select a row.

4-1-3 Creating Local Variables

• Creating Local Variables

4-22 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

You can register variables that are used only within one POU (program, function, or function block).
The following variable groups exist for local variables.

POU type
Variable group for
Description Function
local variables Program Function
block
Internal variables Used to create local variables for use in programs Support- Supported. Supported.
and internal variables for use in functions or func- ed.
tion blocks.
Input/output varia- Used to create input variables, output variables, --- Supported. Supported.

4-1 Variable Registration

bles and in-out variables for use in functions or function
blocks.
External variables Used to register variables from the global variable Support- Supported. Supported.
table. ed.
You can create external variables to access exter-
nal data from within a POU (program, function, or
function block).
Return values Used to register return values of functions. --- Supported. ---
4
 Opening the Local Variable Tab Page
The following is an example that uses a registered ladder diagram program. Refer to 4-2 Register-

4-1-3 Creating Local Variables

ing POUs on page 4-57 for information on creating programs, functions, and function blocks
(POUs).

1 Double-click Section0 under Programming - POUs - Programs - Program0 in the Multiview

Explorer.
The section is displayed in the Edit Pane.

2 Click the Variables Bar. Or, press the Ctrl+Shift+V Keys.

The local variable table is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-23

4 Programming

3 Select the variable group from the side tabs in the local variable table and register the local
variable.

Additional Information

You can change the display position for the local variable table in the option settings. Refer to
8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for details.

 Creating Local Variables

Local variables are created in the same way as global variables.
You can create them directly in the Ladder Editor.

1 Click a new input or new output instruction in the Ladder Editor.

2 Enter a new variable name.

The variable name that you entered is registered in the Internals Side Tab Page.

4-24 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-1 Variable Registration

Additional Information

You can also register new variables that are entered into the ST Editor as internal variables. Re-
fer to 4-5-2 Programming Structured Text on page 4-140 for the procedure.

 Editing, Deleting, and Copying and Pasting Local Variables, and Selecting
and Moving Rows
4
You can edit, delete, copy, and paste local variables, and select and move rows with the same pro-
cedures as for global variables.

4-1-3 Creating Local Variables

Additional Information

If you change the name of a local variable in the variable table, you can also change the name
of the variable in the program at the same time. Set the Change the variable name used in
programs Check Box in the option settings. Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on
page 8-123 for details.

 Sorting, Filtering, and Showing/Hiding Columns in Local Variable Tables

You can sort, filter, and show/hide columns in a local variable table with the same procedures as for
the global variable table.

 Moving Internal Variables

You can move internal variables to the global variables.

1 Right-click the internal variable to move and select Move to Global from the pop-up menu.

The selected variable is registered in the global variable table and also moved from the internal
variables to the external variables.

 Moving External Variables

You can move external variables (global variables) to the internal variables.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-25

4 Programming

1 Right-click the external variable to move and select Move to Internals from the pop-up menu.

The selected variable is moved from the external variables to the internal variables.

Precautions for Correct Use

If you move an external variable to an internal variable, a dialog box is displayed to confirm
whether to delete the global variable that corresponds to the external variable. Delete a global
variable only after confirming that it is not used in any other POU.

 Applying Change in In-Out Variables to a Ladder Program

When you change the in-out variables of a function or function block, you can apply the change to
a called function or function block on a ladder program.

1 Right-click the in-out variable group and select Apply inputs and outputs to the ladder
program from the pop-up menu.

A message box appears to confirm whether you want to update all functions and function
blocks called.

4-26 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

 Applying Return Values to a Ladder Program

When you change the data type of return values and comments of a function, you can apply the
change to the called function on a ladder program.

1 Right-click the return value variable group and select Apply return values to the ladder
program from the pop-up menu.

4-1 Variable Registration

A message box appears to confirm whether you want to update all functions called.

4-1-4 Creating Axis Variables

Additional Information

If you right-click on a function or a function block called on a ladder program and select Update
from the pop-up menu, change in in-out variables of functions or function blocks and return val-
ues of functions can be applied.

4-1-4 Creating Axis Variables

• Axis Variables
An Axis Variable is a structure variable that is used to specify an axis in a program. An Axis Variable
contains members used for axis control (axis settings) and members used to monitor the status of
the axis in the programs or Sysmac Studio (axis monitor).

 Creating Axis Variables

When you create an axis in the Axis Settings, the Axis Variable is automatically added as a global
variable.

1 Right-click Axis Settings under Configurations and Setup - Motion Control Setup in the
Multiview Explorer and select Add - Axis Settings from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-27

4 Programming

MC_Axis000 is added to the tree.

2 Double-click Global Variables under Programming - Data in the Multiview Explorer.

The MC_Axis000 Axis Variable is automatically added to the global variable table.

 Changing Axis Variable Names

1 Right-click the Axis Variable to rename in the Multiview Explorer and select Rename from the
menu.

2 Enter a new name for the Axis Variable.

4-28 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

 Deleting Axis Variables

1 Right-click the Axis Variable to delete in the Multiview Explorer and select Delete from the
menu.

4-1 Variable Registration

A deletion confirmation dialog box is displayed.

4-1-4 Creating Axis Variables

Click the Yes Button.

3 Double-click Global Variables under Programming - Data in the Multiview Explorer.

You can confirm that the Axis Variable was automatically deleted.

 Copying Axis Variables

1 Right-click the Axis Variable to copy in the Multiview Explorer and select Copy from the menu.

The specified Axis Variable is copied.

2 Right-click Axis Settings in the Multiview Explorer and select Paste from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-29

4 Programming

A copy of the Axis Variable is registered with Copy_1_of added to the front of the name of the
Axis Variable that was copied.

4-1-5 Creating Axes Group Variables

• Axes Group Variables
An Axes Group Variable is a structure variable that is used to specify an axes group that represents
axes linked for synchronization or interpolation in programs.

 Creating Axes Group Variables

When you create an axes group, the Axes Group Variable is automatically added as a global varia-
ble.

1 Right-click Axes Group Settings under Configurations and Setup - Motion Control Setup
in the Multiview Explorer and select Add - Axes Group Settings from the menu.

MC_Group000 is added to the tree.

2 Double-click Global Variables under Programming - Data in the Multiview Explorer.

You can confirm that the MC_Group000 Axes Group Variable was automatically added.

4-30 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

 Changing Axes Group Names

1 Right-click the Axes Group Variable to rename in the Multiview Explorer and select Rename
from the menu.

4-1 Variable Registration

4
2 Enter a new name for the axes group.

4-1-5 Creating Axes Group Variables

 Deleting Axes Group Variables

1 Right-click the Axes Group Variable to delete in the Multiview Explorer and select Delete from
the menu.

A deletion confirmation dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Yes Button.

3 Double-click Global Variables under Programming - Data in the Multiview Explorer.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-31

4 Programming

You can confirm that the Axes Group Variable was automatically deleted.

 Copying Axes Group Variables

1 Right-click the Axes Group Variable to copy in the Multiview Explorer and select Copy from the
menu.

The specified Axes Group Variable is copied.

2 Right-click the Axes Group Variable in the Multiview Explorer and select Paste from the menu.

A copy of the Axes Group Variable is registered with Copy_1_of added to the front of the name
of the Axes Group Variable that was copied.

4-1-6 Creating Cam Data Variables

• Cam Data Variables
A cam data variable defines the motion of a slave axis in relation to a master axis for synchroniza-
tion and interpolation motions for electronic gears and cams. This allows you to use variables in pro-
grams to define cam motions.

 Creating Cam Data Variables

When you create cam data, the cam data variable is automatically added as a global variable.

1 Right-click Cam Data Settings under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer
and select Add - CamProfile from the menu.

4-32 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-1 Variable Registration

Cam profile 0 is added to the tree.

2 Double-click Global Variables under Programming - Data in the Multiview Explorer.

4-1-6 Creating Cam Data Variables

You can confirm that the cam data variable was automatically added.

 Changing Cam Data Variable Names

1 Right-click the cam data variable to rename in the Multiview Explorer and select Rename from
the menu.

2 Enter a new cam data variable name.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-33

4 Programming

 Deleting Cam Data Variables

1 Right-click the cam data variable to delete in the Multiview Explorer and select Delete from the
menu.

A deletion confirmation dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Yes Button.

3 Double-click Global Variables under Programming - Data in the Multiview Explorer.

You can confirm that the cam data variable was automatically deleted.

 Copying Cam Data Variables

1 Right-click the cam data to copy in the Multiview Explorer and select Copy from the menu.

4-34 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

2 Right-click Cam Data Settings under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer
and select Paste from the menu.

A copy of the cam data variable is registered with Copy_1_of added to the front of the name of
the cam data variable that was copied.

4-1 Variable Registration

4-1-7 Creating Function Block Instance Variables
• Function Block Instance Variables
4
When you create an instance of a function block, the function block instance is registered in the lo-
cal variable table as a data type.

4-1-7 Creating Function Block Instance Variables

Specify the instance name when you call a function block from another POU.

 Creating Function Block Instance Variables

1 Click Enter Function Block for the instance of the function block instruction created in the Lad-
der Editor.

2 Enter an instance name and press the Enter Key.

When you set an instance name, the function block instance is registered as an instance varia-
ble in the local variable table.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-35

4 Programming

 Editing, Deleting, Copying, and Pasting Function Block Instance Variables

You can edit, delete, copy, and paste function block instance variables with the same procedures
as for global variables.

4-1-8 System-defined Variables

• System-defined Variables
System-defined variables are pre-defined by the system. All system-defined variable attributes are
fixed.
The names and all other attributes of these variables are defined, and special functions are as-
signed to them. You cannot change the names or any other attributes.

• You can use system-defined variables as soon as you register the Controller on the Sysmac Studio.
• System-defined variable names start with an underbar, as shown below.

• You can select them from lists in the Ladder Editor or ST Editor.
• There are system-defined variables for each of the four function modules, as listed in the following
table.

Function module Type of system-defined variable

PLC Function Module System-defined variables for PLC Function Module
Motion Control Function Module System-defined variables for motion control
EtherNet/IP Function Module System-defined variables for EtherNet/IP
EtherCAT Master Function Module System-defined variables for EtherCAT master
• For information on system-defined variables, refer to System Defined Variable Reference on the
Help Menu, or to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series
Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558).

4-1-9 Entering Variable Attributes

This section describes how to enter variable attributes.
The following table shows which attributes exist for different variable types and POUs (programs, func-
tions, and function blocks).

Attributes Supported by Each Type of Variable

Programs Function blocks
Type of Global
Internal External Internal Input var- Output In-out External
variable variables
variables variables variables iables variables variables variables
Name Support- Support- Support- Support- Support- Support- Support- Support-
ed. ed. ed. ed. ed. ed. ed. ed.

4-36 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Programs Function blocks

Type of Global
Internal External Internal Input var- Output In-out External
variable variables
variables variables variables iables variables variables variables
Data Support- Support- Support- Support- Support- Support- Support- Support-
Type ed. ed. ed. ed. ed. ed. ed. ed.
Initial Support- Support- Not sup- Support- Support- Not sup- Not sup- Not sup-
Value ed. ed. ported. ed. ed. ported. ported. ported.
AT Spec- Support- Support- Not sup- Support- Not sup- Not sup- Not sup- Not sup-
ification ed. ed. ported. ed. ported. ported. ported. ported.

4-1 Variable Registration

Retain Support- Support- Not sup- Support- Support- Support- Not sup- Not sup-
ed. ed. ported. ed. ed. ed. ported. ported.
Constant Support- Support- Support- Support- Support- Not sup- Support- Support-
ed. ed. ed. ed. ed. ported. ed. ed.
Network Support- Not sup- Not sup- Not sup- Not sup- Not sup- Not sup- Not sup-
Publish ed. ported. ported. ported. ported. ported. ported. ported.
Com- Support- Support- Support- Support- Support- Support- Support- Support-
ment ed. ed. ed. ed. ed. ed. ed. ed.
In/Out Not sup- Not sup- Not sup- Not sup- Support- Support- Support- Not sup- 4
ported. ported. ported. ported. ed. ed. ed. ported.
Edge Not sup- Not sup- Not sup- Not sup- Support- Not sup- Not sup- Not sup-

4-1-9 Entering Variable Attributes

ported. ported. ported. ported. ed. ported. ported. ported.

Functions
Type of var-
Internal vari- Input varia- Output varia- In-out varia- External vari- Return val-
iable
ables bles bles bles ables ues
Name Supported. Supported. Supported. Supported. Supported. Supported.
Data Type Supported. Supported. Supported. Supported. Supported. Supported.
Initial Value Supported. Supported. Not support- Not support- Not supported. Not support-
ed. ed. ed.
AT Specifi- Not support- Not support- Not support- Not support- Not supported. Not support-
cation ed. ed. ed. ed. ed.
Retain Not support- Not support- Not support- Not support- Not supported. Not support-
ed. ed. ed. ed. ed.
Constant Supported. Supported. Not support- Supported. Supported. Not support-
ed. ed.
Network Not support- Not support- Not support- Not support- Not supported. Not support-
Publish ed. ed. ed. ed. ed.
Comment Supported. Supported. Supported. Supported. Supported. Supported.
In/Out Not support- Supported. Supported. Supported. Not supported. Not support-
ed. ed.
Edge Not support- Not support- Not support- Not support- Not supported. Not support-
ed. ed. ed. ed. ed.

For information on attributes, valid value ranges, and character restrictions, refer to the NJ/NX-series
CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box
PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558).

 Name Attribute

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-37

4 Programming

Enter a string for the name.

 Data Type Attribute

Enter a data type directly or select one from the list.

You can select from the following data types.

4-38 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Classi-
Data type Data type name
fication
Basic Boolean BOOL
data Bit strings BYTE, WORD, DWORD, and LWORD
types Inte- Signed SINT, INT, DINT, and LINT
gers Unsigned USINT, UINT, UDINT, and ULINT
Real numbers REAL and LREAL
Durations TIME
Dates DATE

4-1 Variable Registration

Times TIME_OF_DAY
Date and times DATE_AND_TIME
Text strings STRING[256]
After you select STRING[256] as the data type, edit the value inside
the brackets to specify the size of the string including the NULL char-
acter.
Data Array Fixed- ARRAY[?..?] OF ?
type speci- length After you select ARRAY[?..?] OF ? as the data type, edit the question
at- fica- array marks as follows: 4
tribu- tion
Variable table
tes

4-1-9 Entering Variable Attributes

Data type
ARRAY[?..?] OF ?

Array variable data type

Array element last number
Array element first number

Example: ARRAY[0..9]OF INT

This specifies an array variable that contains 10 INT elements from 0
to 9.
Specifying Multi-dimensional Arrays:

Variable table
Data type
ARRAY[1..9,0..9,0..5] OF BOOL

Gives the first number of the elements in the third dimension of the array.

Gives the first number of the elements in the second dimension of the array.

Gives the first number of the elements in the first dimension of the array.

If the first array element number is 0, you can enter the variable as fol-
lows:
Basic_data_type[Number_of_elements]
Example: You can enter ARRAY[0..4,0..9] OF BOOL as BOOL[5,10].

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-39

4 Programming

Classi-
Data type Data type name
fication
Basic Data Array Varia- A method for specifying an array with any number of array elements.
data type speci- ble- This array can be used only for in-out variables of a function/function
types at- fica- length block.*2
tribu- tion array*1
tes • Specifying method
Specify the data type as follows.
ARRAY[*] OF ?

Specify * where each of the array element first number and last num-
ber is entered, and specify the data type of the array elements in ?.
Example: ARRAY[*] OF BOOL
You can enter ARRAY[*] OF BOOL as BOOL[*].

For a multi-dimensional array, specify * for each dimension, such as

ARRAY[*,*,*] OF BOOL.
You cannot mix * and a numerical value to specify the element first
number/last number.
You can enter ARRAY[*,*,*] OF BOOL also as BOOL[*,*,*].
Range specifi- You can specify that an integer variable (INT, SINT, DINT, LINT, UINT,
cation USINT, UDINT, and ULINT) contains only values within a certain
range.

Variable Table This means that the variable

Data type must have a value between
INT(10..100) 10 and 100, inclusive.

End point
Start point

Deriva- Structures Specify a user-defined structure data type or a system-defined struc-

tive da- ture data type in the Structure group of the Data Type Editor.
ta Unions Specify a user-defined union data type or a system-defined union data
types type in the Union group of the Data Type Editor.
Enumerations Specify a user-defined enumerated data type or a system-defined
enumerated data type in the Enumerated group of the Data Type Edi-
tor.
POU instances Specify a system-defined function block name, or a user-defined func-
tion block name.
*1. This setting is supported by CPU Units with unit version 1.18 or later.
*2. For details on how to use variable-length array variables, refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software
User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W558).

 Initial Value Attribute

Specify a value for the variable for one of the following situations when the Retain attribute is not
specified.
• When the power supply is turned ON
• When the operating mode is changed
• When you specify to initialize the value when the program is transferred

4-40 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Enter a value directly or select an item from the list (the values in the list depend on the data
type).
If you do not enter an initial value, 0 is used as the initial value.
Select None for no initial value.
• Initial Values for Union Members: The initial values for union members cannot be edited and are
always 0.
• Enter the initial values for the elements of the array variable or the members of the structure vari-
able in the Initial Value Settings Dialog Box.

4-1 Variable Registration

1 Click the Display Initial Value Settings Dialog Box Button in the initial value entry cell.

The Initial Value Setting Dialog Box is displayed.

Example: Two-dimensional Structure Array

4
(3)

4-1-9 Entering Variable Attributes

(1)

(2)
(5)

(5)

(4)
(6)

No. Item Description

1 Horizontal subscript The subscripts of the specified dimension are displayed horizontally in or-
display area der from 0. The array elements of the structure members are all expanded
on the display.
2 Vertical subscript The subscripts for the dimension that is not displayed in the horizontal sub-
display area script display area are displayed vertically in order from 0. For a three-di-
mensional array, the subscripts for the two dimensions that are not dis-
played in the horizontal subscript display area are displayed in combina-
tions in order.
3 Array display direc- Used to select the directions in which to display the array dimensions from
tion selection list a list.
4 Array element jump Used to jump to a specified element. Enter the array subscripts and click
settings the Go to Button to move to the specified element.
5 Change Page You can scroll the page either vertically or horizontally. Each page displays
26 items vertically and 20 items horizontally. You can scroll the page by
half pages or whole pages.
6 Go to Error Button Jumps to the first initial value error.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-41

4 Programming

In this example, the initial value of the member Struct1[0,0].BoolMem1 is displayed at the inter-
section of the "[0,*]" row and "[*,0].BoolMem1" column.

2 Enter the initial values of the members, and then click the OK Button.
The initial values are set.

Additional Information

• You can change the display format of the Initial Value Settings Dialog Box in the option set-
tings to the format used in Sysmac Studio version 1.06 or lower.

For details on changing the display format, refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on
page 8-123.

 AT Specification Attribute

• When Specifying an Address in Memory Used for CJ-series Units with an NJ-series Controller:
Add a % character to the beginning of the addresses when specifying memory used for CJ-ser-
ies Units. This is shown in the following table.

Area Setting range Format to enter

CIO Area CIO 0 to CIO 6143 %0 to %6143
Work Area W000 to W511 %W0 to %W511
Holding Area H0 to H1535 %H0 to %1535
DM Area D0 to D32767 %D0 to %D32767
EM Area E0_0 to E18_32767 %E0_0 to %E18_32767
• For Device Variables Specified in the I/O Map:
The contents of the AT Fields of the device variables are displayed automatically.
• When an AT address is specified for axis variables or axes group variables:

4-42 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

When _sAXIS_REF or _sGROUP_REF is input in the Data Type input area, the button to show
AT Setting Dialog Box is displayed in the AT input area.

1 Click the button to show AT Setting Dialog Box.

4-1 Variable Registration

Select one variable from the list of axis variable or axes group variable group in the AT Setting
Dialog Box.
Example for axis variables:

(a)

(b) 4

4-1-9 Entering Variable Attributes

Item Description
(a) Current AT specification Displays a variable name corresponds to the input AT.
(b) Variable list Displays all axis variables that are registered in the axis settings.

3 Click the OK Button.

The AT specification for axis variables or axes group variables is set.

 Retain Attribute

Specify whether to retain the value of the variable in the following cases.
• When power is turned ON after a power interruption
• When the operating mode changes to RUN mode
• When programs are transferred from the computer to the Controller
Select the check box when you want to retain the values.
Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series
Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558) for details on the
conditions for retention of the retained variables.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-43

4 Programming

 Constant Attribute

• If you set the Constant attribute, you can set the initial value of the variable when it is download-
ed, but you cannot overwrite the value afterward.

 Network Publish Attribute (Global Variables Only)

Select the setting for the Network Publish attribute from the list. You can select from the following.

Network Publish attrib-

Description
ute setting
Do not publish The variable cannot be accessed from external devices.
However, Support Software can still access the variable regardless of this set-
ting.
Publish Publish On- You can access a variable with this attribute from external devices through CIP
ly communications. Tag data links are not possible for variables with this attribute
setting.
Input You can access a variable with this attribute from external devices through CIP
communications or a tag data link. For tag data links, this will be a variable for
data input (from another Controller to the local Controller).
Output You can access a variable with this attribute from external devices through CIP
communications or a tag data link. For tag data links, this will be a variable for
data output (from the local Controller to another Controller).

 In/Out Attribute (Input/Output Variable Group Only)

For the input/output variable group used in functions or function blocks, specify either an input vari-
able, output variable, or in-out variable from the list.

 Edge (Input/Output Variable Group Only)

The Edge attribute makes a BOOL variable pass TRUE to a function block when the variable
changes from FALSE to TRUE or when it changes from TRUE to FALSE.
This attribute is for function block input variables only.
Select an attribute setting from the list. You can select from the following.

4-44 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Edge attribute setting Description

No edge No edge
Up FALSE to TRUE
Down TRUE to FALSE

 Comment Attribute

4-1 Variable Registration

Enter a comment.
• Use the following procedure to enter the comments for the elements of an array variable or the
comments for structure variable members in the Comment Settings Dialog Box. (The array varia-
ble can be a member of a union.)

1 Click the Display Comment Settings Dialog Box Button in the comment entry cell.

4-1-9 Entering Variable Attributes

The Comment Settings Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Enter the comments for the elements and then click the OK Button.
This completes entering the comments.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-45

4 Programming

Precautions for Correct Use

• If you select the Use global variable comment Check Box in the option settings, you cannot
edit the comments for the corresponding variables that are registered as external variables in
the local variable tables.
• You can register comments for union variables or for array elements in union array variables
with Sysmac Studio version 1.07 or higher. However, if you open a project in which such
comments are registered on Sysmac Studio version 1.06 or lower and then open the Com-
ment Settings Dialog Box for the union variable or union array variable, the comments for the
array elements will be lost.
• You can register comments for structure variable members and for array elements of struc-
ture array variables with Sysmac Studio version 1.09 or higher. However, if you open a
project with such comments on Sysmac Studio version 1.08 or lower, you cannot edit the var-
iable comments. Also, if you open a project in which such comments are registered on Sys-
mac Studio version 1.06 or lower and then open the Comment Settings Dialog Box for the
structure variable or structure array variable, the comments for the structure variable mem-
bers or array elements will be lost.
• If you register a comment for a structure variable member and then change the name of the
member, the variable comment is cleared.
• For a variable-length array variable, you cannot enter a comment for an array element.

Additional Information

• You can globally switch the comments that are displayed. Refer to 8-16 Changing Variable
Comments and Data Type Comments on page 8-109 for the actual procedures.
• You can expand and close more than one level of elements and members displayed for array
variables and structure variables. Right-click a variable, element, or member and select
Expand All under the Selected Item or Collapse All under the Selected Item.
• You can also display the Comment Settings Dialog Box online. Select a variable from the var-
iable table and right-click to select Show Comment Setting Dialog from the pop-up menu.

Exporting/Importing Variable Comments

Export variable comments into an Office Open XML format file (xlsx format file). The comments to be
exported include structure variable member comments, union variable member comments, and array
variable element comments (hereinafter called “element comments”). You can edit a file with exported
comments in spreadsheet software that supports the Office Open XML format such as Excel.
You can import an edited file and change the variable comments at a time. This is useful when you
register comments, in addition to definitions, for structure variable members and for union variable and
array variable elements.
Comments are exported to a file in units of the following variables.
• Global variable
• Internal variable
• In-out variable
• External variable

 Exporting Comments

1 Right-click in the view of the variable table that has the variable element comments you want to
edit, and select Export comment - All variables in this view (including element comments)
or Selected variables (including element comments) from the pop-up menu.

4-46 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

The Save File Dialog Box is displayed.

4-1 Variable Registration

Enter the file name, and then click the Save Button.
The comments for the target variables are saved in an xlsx format file.

Additional Information

• The maximum number of rows is 65,536 for comments to be output to an xlsx format file. If
the number of rows is 65,536 or greater, comments are divided and exported into multiple
files that are serial-numbered automatically.
• Variable comments that are not displayed on screen due to the filtering function are not ex-
ported. 4

 Editing Comments

4-1-9 Entering Variable Attributes

Use the following procedure to edit the xlsx format file that you exported.

1 Open the xlsx file in a spreadsheet software application.

2 Edit a comment.
You can add comments to variables and elements without comments. To delete an existing
comment, make the cell containing it blank.

A B C
1 Sysmac Studio Element Comments File Name Comment
2 max_elements_array root
3 max_elements_array[0] comment of 0
4 max_elements_array[1] comment of 1
5 max_elements_array[2]
6 max_elements_array[3]
7 max_elements_array[4]
8 max_elements_array[5]

Do not change the first row (header row) or data in the name column.

3 Save the file.

Additional Information

You can edit an xlsx format file with spreadsheet software that supports the Office Open XML
format such as Excel 2007 or later.

 Importing Comments
Use the following procedure to import the xlsx format file that you edited to the original variable ta-
ble.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-47

4 Programming

1 Right-click the target variable table and select Import comment from the pop-up menu.

The Select File Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the xlsx format file to import, and then click the Open Button. When comments were div-
ided and exported into multiple files, select all the files.
The import operation starts.

Precautions for Correct Use

You cannot import the data while the filtering function is used. Cancel the filtering function, and
then execute the import operation.

4-1-10 Variable Manager

• The Variable Manager displays a list of the variables in the global or in a local variable table in a
separate window.
• You can display variable usage, sort and filter the variables, edit and delete variables, or move vari-
ables while displaying another editing view.

Starting the Variable Manager

1 Select Variable Manager from the View Menu.

The Variable Manager Window is displayed.

4-48 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

(1)
(2)

(3)

4-1 Variable Registration

(4)

(6) (5) (7)

Parts of the Window

4
No. Part Description
1 Variable table selec- Use this box to select the variable table to display.

4-1-10 Variable Manager

tion box
2 Show Usage Check Select this check box to display columns of the usage of the variables in
Box the variable list.
Clear the selection to hide the usage columns.
3 Assigned variable list This list displays the variables from the variable table that is selected in
the variable table selection box.
You can display and hide columns from the pop-up menu.
4 Always on Top Select this check box to always display the Variable Manager Window on
Check Box top of other windows and dialog boxes.
5 Update Button Click this button update the display to reflect any changes that have been
made to the source variable table.
6 Delete Unused Varia- Click this button to delete all variables that are not used in any program
bles Button from all of the variable tables in the Controller.
7 Close Button Click this button to close the Variable Manager Window.

2 Select the variable table to display in the variable table selection box.
The current contents of the variable table are displayed in the variable list.

Displaying Variable Usage

You can display the number of locations in which each variable is used. You can also search for the
variables that are not used at all as unused variables.

1 Select the Show Usage Check Box in the Variable Manager Window.
The usage columns are displayed in the variable list.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-49

4 Programming

Displayed Columns

Column Description
Use The number of locations in which each variable is used is displayed.
Using POUs The number of POUs in which each variable is used is displayed.
(This is displayed for global variables.)
I/O Mapping If a variable is assigned to I/O, the I/O name is displayed.
(This is displayed for global variables and internal variables.)

2 Clear the Show Usage Check Box to hide the usage columns.

Sorting Variables
You can sort the variable table in ascending or descending order according to any column.

1 Click the title row cell for the column to use to sort the variable list.

4-50 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-1 Variable Registration

The variable list will be sorted in ascending order of the column.

4-1-10 Variable Manager

Filtering Variables
You can apply a filter to the variable list to display only specific variables.

1 Right-click the title row cell for the column to use to filter the variable list and select Filtering.

The Filtering Dialog Box is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-51

4 Programming

2 Enter a text string to use for filtering in the text box, specify the condition, and click the OK
Button.

The variables that meet the specified condition are displayed in the variable list.

3 To cancel filtering, right-click the title row cell for the column that you used to filter the variable
list and select Clear Filtering.

Editing, Copying, and Deleting Variables

For any variable that can be edited on the Variable Manager, you can change the variable name or
comment or you can delete the variable.

 Editing Variables

1 In the variable list, double-click the name or comment of a variable that can be edited or press
the F2 + Tab Keys to select the item to edit.

4-52 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

After you change the name or comment, press the Enter Key to apply the change.
The change is also applied to the source variable table.

4-1 Variable Registration

If you change the name of a variable, a confirmation dialog box is displayed that asks whether
to change the name of the variable in the programs.

4-1-10 Variable Manager

Click the Yes Button to change the name in the programs.

 Copying Variables

1 Right-click the variable to copy in the variable list and select Copy from the pop-up menu.

Select the variable table into which to paste the variable and paste the variable.
The variable is pasted.

 Deleting Variables

1 Right-click the variable to delete in the variable list and select Delete from the pop-up menu.

The selected variable is deleted. The variable is also deleted from the source variable table.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-53

4 Programming

Precautions for Correct Use

• When you change or delete a variable in the Variable Manager, the change is applied directly
to the global variable table and local variable tables. You cannot undo this operation.
• If the results of editing a variable causes an error for that variable, the error is detected in the
source variable table. Error checking is not performed in the Variable Manager.
• Even if the contents of the global variable table or the local variable table that is displayed in
the Variable Manager is changed, the change is not shown in the Variable Manager. If you
attempt to change, copy, or delete a variable that no longer exists, an error message is dis-
played.
• To apply any changes that have been made in the global variable table or the local variable
table, click the Update Button in the Variable Manager.

Moving Variables
You can move a global variable or local variable to a local variable table or to the global variable table.
By moving a variable to the appropriate variable table according to the usage conditions of the varia-
ble, you can make POUs easier to reuse.

 Moving a Global Variable to a Local Variable Table

1 If a variable is used only in one POU, right-click the variable in the variable list and select Move
Variable to Local from the pop-up menu.

The selected variable is moved to the internal variables of the POU and it is deleted from the
global variable table.
The corresponding variable that is registered in the external variables of the POU is also delet-
ed.

 Moving a Local Variable to the Global Variable Table

1 Right-click the variable to move in the variable list and select Move Variable to Global from
the pop-up menu.

The selected variable is moved to the global variable table and it is deleted from the local varia-
ble table.
The variable that was moved is automatically registered as an external variable in the local var-
iable table.

4-54 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Precautions for Correct Use

• If the POU does not exist or if there are two or more POUs when you attempt to move a glob-
al variable to a local variable table, an error will occur and you cannot move it.
• To update the display in the Variable Manager for the results of moving a variable, select the
variable table in the variable table selection box or click the Update Button.

Searching Variables

4-1 Variable Registration

You can search for variables in the variable list.

1 Right-click anywhere in the variable list and select Search from the menu.

4
The Search Dialog Box is displayed.

4-1-10 Variable Manager

2 Enter the search string and click the Search Previous or Search Next Button.
The display will move to the location in the variable list that matches the search condition.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-55

4 Programming

Deleting Unused Variables

You can delete all variables that are not used in any program (i.e., unused variables) from all of the
variable tables in the Controller.

1 Click the Delete Unused Variables Button in the Variable Manager Window.
The following confirmation message is displayed.

Item Description
Delete unused variables assigned to the Select this check box to delete unused variables assigned
ports on the I/O Map. to the ports on the I/O Map.
Delete unused variables published to the Select this check box to delete unused variables published
network. to the network.

Select the check boxes, if necessary.

2 Click the Yes Button.

The unused variables are deleted.

4-56 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-2 Registering POUs

• POUs (Program Organization Units)
A POU is a unit used to build a program. A POU can be a program, function, or function block. Refer
to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial
Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558) for more information.
You begin by first registering a program, function, or function block under Programming - POUs in
the Multiview Explorer, and then coding the POU.

4-2 Registering POUs

4-2-1 Displaying POUs
Click POUs under Programming in the Multiview Explorer.

4
Programs, Functions, and Function Blocks are displayed under POUs.

4-2-1 Displaying POUs

4-2-2 Registering Programs
• Registering Programs
You must create programs that define the control operations. You can design programs as ladder
diagrams or ST, and then assign them to tasks for execution. You can use functions and function
blocks in programs.
For a detailed explanation of programs, refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual
(Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat.
No. W558).

 Registering Ladder Diagram Programs

1 Right-click Programs under Programming - POUs and select Add - Ladder from the menu.

A program with the name Program1 is added (along with a section) under the Programs Layer.
Program0 is registered in advance.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-57

4 Programming

2 Double-click the section.

The variable table and Ladder Editor are displayed in the Edit Pane. From here you can create
local variables and create ladder diagram rungs.

Variable table

Ladder Editor

Additional Information

To add a new section, right-click the ladder diagram program and select Add - Section from the
menu.

 Registering ST Programs

1 Right-click Programs under Programming - POUs and select Add - ST from the menu.

Program1 is added under Programs. (ST programs do not have sections.) Program0 for a lad-
der diagram is registered in advance.

2 Double-click the ST program.

4-58 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

The variable table and ST Editor are displayed in the Edit Pane. From here you can create lo-
cal variables and create ST statements.

Variable table

ST Editor

4-2 Registering POUs

 Deleting Programs
4
1 Right-click the program to delete in the Multiview Explorer and select Delete from the menu.
A deletion confirmation dialog box is displayed.

4-2-2 Registering Programs

Click the Yes Button.
The program is deleted.

 Copying and Pasting Programs

There are the following ways to copy programs.
• Copy: Only data under the selected program is copied.
• Copy with Dependents: Not only the data under the selected program but also variables that
are referenced by the program and the data types of the variables are also copied.

1 Select the program to copy in the Multiview Explorer and press the Ctrl+C Keys. Or, right-click
the program and select Copy from the menu. If you want to copy data together with variables
that are referenced by the program and the data types of the variables, select Copy with
Dependents.

The program is copied.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-59

4 Programming

2 Select Programs in the Multiview Explorer and press the Ctrl+V Keys. Or, right-click Programs
and select Paste from the menu.

• When Copy is selected

The copied program is registered with the name Copy_1_of_Program Name.
Local variables and data in the program are also registered at the same time.

• When Copy with Dependents is selected

Not only the data that are copied with Copy but also referenced global variables and their
data types are pasted.
If a variable or data type with the same name and different attribute already exists, the
Comparison before pasting dependents Dialog Box is displayed.
For details on the Comparison before pasting dependents Dialog Box, refer to 4-5-3 Com-
parison before Pasting Dependents on page 4-152.
You can copy and paste more than one program at the same time. Refer to 4-2-5 Copying,
Pasting, and Deleting Multiple POUs on page 4-64 for details.

Precautions for Correct Use

• When you delete a program, all local variables in that program and section data are deleted
with it.
• After you paste a program, check to be sure that the variables and data types are used cor-
rectly.

Additional Information

• You can change the name of a program or section. Right-click the section or program to re-
name and select Rename from the menu.
• If you copy and paste a program from a different project when the same name already exists,
you can select whether to overwrite or copy.
• You can insert a program between two programs. Right-click the program just after the loca-
tion where you want to insert the program and select Insert Above - Ladder or Insert
Above - ST.

4-2-3 Registering Function Blocks

• Function Blocks
Function blocks are instructions that define operations. Function blocks are written as ladder dia-
grams or ST. You can call them from programs as required. You can use functions inside function
blocks.

4-60 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

For a detailed explanation of function blocks, refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's
Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W558).

 Registering Function Blocks

The following procedure shows how to register a user-defined function block. A ladder function
block is used as an example.
Function block instructions are registered in the Sysmac Studio in advance. You do not need to
register function block instructions to use them.

4-2 Registering POUs

You can register ST function blocks in the same way.

1 Right-click Function Blocks under Programming - POUs in the Multiview Explorer and select
Add - Ladder from the menu.

4-2-3 Registering Function Blocks

A function block named FunctionBlock0 is added under Function Blocks.

2 Double-click the new function block.

The variable table for the function block and Ladder Editor are displayed in the Edit Pane.
From here you can create local variables and create ladder diagram rungs.

Local variable table

for function block

Ladder Editor

 Deleting, Copying, and Pasting Function Blocks

You can delete, copy, and paste function blocks with the same procedures as for programs.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-61

4 Programming

Precautions for Correct Use

• To use a user-created function block definition in a ladder program, register at least one
BOOL input variable and one BOOL output variable in the function block definition. An error
will occur if you use a function block definition that does not have BOOL input and output var-
iables in a ladder program.
• When you delete a function block, all local variables and data in that function block are delet-
ed with it.

Additional Information

• You can also insert a function block between two function blocks. Right-click the function
block just after the location where you want to insert the function block and select Insert
Above - Ladder or ST.
• After you use a function block in a program (that is, after you have created an instance), you
can use that function block as a local variable data type for that program.

4-2-4 Registering Functions

• Functions
A function is an instruction that performs a single function. Functions are written as ladder diagrams
or ST. You can call them from programs or function blocks as required.
For a detailed explanation of functions, refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual
(Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat.
No. W558).

 Registering Functions
The following procedure shows how to register a user-defined function. A ladder function is used as
an example.
Function instructions are registered in the Sysmac Studio in advance. You do not need to register
function instructions to use them.
You can register ST functions in the same way as described in this example.

1 Right-click Functions under Programming - POUs in the Multiview Explorer and select Add -
Ladder from the menu.

A function named Function0 is added under Functions.

2 Double-click the new function.

4-62 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

The variable table for the function and Ladder Editor are displayed in the Edit Pane. From here
you can create local variables and create ladder diagram rungs.

Local variable table

for function

Ladder Editor

4-2 Registering POUs

 Deleting, Copying, and Pasting Functions
You can delete, copy, and paste functions with the same procedures as for programs.

Precautions for Correct Use

• To use a user-created function definition in a ladder program, register at least one BOOL in-
put variable and one BOOL output variable in the function definition. An error will occur if you 4
use a function definition that does not have BOOL input and output variables in a ladder pro-
gram.

4-2-4 Registering Functions

• When you delete a function, all local variables and data in that function are deleted with it.

Additional Information

• You can also insert a function between two functions. Right-click the function just after the lo-
cation where you want to insert the function and select Insert Above - Ladder or ST.

Displaying Properties
The properties of the POU are displayed. Use the following procedure to set the POU name, name-
space, version, and other POU properties.

1 Right-click the POU and select Properties from the menu.

The Properties Dialog Box for the POU is displayed.

You can change the following items.

Item Description
Name Displays the name that is currently set for the POU.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-63

4 Programming

Item Description
Namespace*1 Displays the namespace that is currently set.
If this field is blank, the name is set as a global namespace.
Version*2 Displays the major and minor versions of the POU.

Author*2 Displays the name of the person that created the POU. If this is the first time you are
creating a POU after installing the Sysmac Studio, the user name that you entered
when you logged onto Windows is displayed.*3
Comment*2 Displays the comment for the POU.
*1. Refer to 4-4 Namespaces on page 4-79 for information on namespaces.
*2. The items that you enter here are displayed at the bottom of the Toolbox to describe the library ob-
ject when the function or function block is reused as a library object. Refer to 9-3 Creating and Us-
ing Libraries on page 9-8 for information on library objects.
*3. You can change the author name that is displayed when you create a POU. Change it in the option
settings. For details, refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123.

4-2-5 Copying, Pasting, and Deleting Multiple POUs

You can copy, paste, and delete multiple POUs (programs, functions, or function blocks) at the same
time.

Copying and Pasting Multiple POUs

You can select multiple POUs on the selection dialog box, and copy and paste them together.

 Copying Multiple POUs

Select the POUs you want to copy on the Select and Copy Multiple POUs Dialog Box.

1 Right-click one of the following items in the Multiview Explorer and select Select and Copy
Multiple Items from the menu.

Item Select and Copy Multiple Items option

POU Available
Programs Available
Ladder programs Available
Section Not available
ST programs Available
Function Blocks Available
Ladder programs Available
ST programs Available
Functions Available
Ladder programs Available
ST programs Available

The figure below shows what are displayed on the menu when you right-click POUs, as an ex-
ample.

4-64 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-2 Registering POUs

The Select and Copy Multiple POUs Dialog Box is displayed.

4-2-5 Copying, Pasting, and Deleting Multiple POUs

2 Select the check boxes for the POUs you want to copy in the tree displayed on the Select and
Copy Multiple POUs Dialog Box.
In addition, select whether or not to include in the copy the variables and data types referenced
by the selected POUs.

Item selected in Reference Description

Do not include Copies the selected POUs only.
Include global variable and data type Includes in the copy the global variables and data types refer-
enced by the selected POUs.
Include POU, global variable, and data Includes in the copy the functions, function blocks, global vari-
type ables, and data types referenced by the selected POUs.

3 Click the Copy Button.

The selected POUs and the referenced items are copied to the clipboard.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-65

4 Programming

 Pasting Multiple Variables

After you copy multiple POUs, paste the copied POUs.

1 Right-click POUs in the Multiview Explorer and select Paste Multiple Items from the menu.

If there is unsaved data in the project when you select Paste Multiple Items, a message box
appears to confirm whether you want to save the project.

If a POU with the same name exists in the destination, the copied program is pasted with
“Copy_1_of_” added to the front of its program name.

If you select an item other than Do not include in Reference in the Select and Copy Multiple
POUs Dialog Box, the following occurs.
• When the POUs were copied with Include global variable and data type selected in
Reference
Not only the selected POUs but also referenced global variables and data types are regis-
tered.
If a variable or data type with the same name and different attribute already exists, the
Comparison before pasting dependents Dialog Box is displayed.
For details on the Comparison before pasting dependents Dialog Box, refer to 4-5-3 Com-
parison before Pasting Dependents on page 4-152.
• When the POUs were copied with Include POU, global variable, and data type selected in
References
Not only the selected POUs but also referenced functions, function blocks, global variables,
and data types are registered. If a global variable or data type with the same name and dif-
ferent attribute already exists, the Comparison before pasting dependents Dialog Box is
displayed.

4-66 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

For details on the Comparison before pasting dependents Dialog Box, refer to 4-5-3 Com-
parison before Pasting Dependents on page 4-152.

Precautions for Correct Use

After you paste the POUs, make sure that you can use the variables and data types without
problems.

Additional Information

If you copy and paste multiple POUs to a different Controller at the same time, you can select

4-2 Registering POUs

whether to overwrite or make copies of all existing POUs.

4-2-5 Copying, Pasting, and Deleting Multiple POUs

Deleting Multiple POUs
You can select and delete multiple POUs at the same time on a dialog box.

 Deleting Multiple POUs

Select the POUs you want to delete on the Delete Multiple POUs Dialog Box.

1 Right-click one of the following items in the Multiview Explorer and select Delete Multiple
Items from the menu.

Item Delete Multiple Items option

POUs Available
Programs Available
Ladder programs Available
Section Not available
ST programs Available
Function Blocks Available
Ladder programs Available
ST programs Available
Functions Available
Ladder programs Available
ST programs Available

The figure below shows what are displayed on the menu when you right-click POUs, as an ex-
ample.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-67

4 Programming

The Delete Multiple POUs Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the check boxes for the POU you want to delete in the tree displayed on the Delete
Multiple POUs Dialog Box.
A message box appears to confirm whether you want to delete the POUs.

3 Click the Yes Button.

The selected POUs are deleted.

4-68 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-3 Creating Data Types

• Creating Data Types
Creating a data type involves defining a new data type by combining existing data types.
Data types registered using the Data Type Editor can be selected from the list of data types in the
Variable Editor and used like any other data type. You can define data types that are structures, un-
ions, or enumerations.
For information on data types, refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No.

4-3 Creating Data Types

W501) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No.
W558).

 Opening the Data Types Tab Page

1 Double-click Data Types under Programming - Data in the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-click
Data Types under Programming - Data and select Edit from the menu.
4

The Data Type Editor is displayed.

 Creating Structure Data Types

After you register the data type, add members.

1 Click the Structures Side Tab in the Data Type Editor.

The Structure Data Type Editor is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-69

4 Programming

2 If, as in this example, no data types are registered, click the Data Type Editor. A data type reg-
istration line is displayed.

If you have already registered at least one data type, but you want to add more, press the In-
sert Key with the cursor inside the Data Type Editor. Or, right-click inside the Data Type Editor
and select Create New Data Type from the menu.

3 Enter values for each item, and then press the Enter Key.

The data type is registered.

Refer to Entering Data Type Attributes on page 4-77 for information on entering values for at-
tributes.

4 Next, add a member. Right-click the data type you just registered and select Create New
Member from the menu.

4-70 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-3 Creating Data Types

The member is created.

5 Enter values for each item, and then press the Enter Key.
The new member is added to the structure data type.
4

Refer to Entering Data Type Attributes on page 4-77 for information on entering values for at-
tributes.

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add additional members as required.

 Creating Unions
After you register the data type, add members.

1 Click the Union Side Tab in the Data Type Editor.

The Union Data Type Editor is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-71

4 Programming

2 If, as in this example, no data types are registered, click the Data Type Editor. A data type reg-
istration line is displayed.
If you have already registered at least one data type, but you want to add more, press the In-
sert Key with the cursor inside the Data Type Editor. Or, right-click inside the Data Type Editor
and select Create New Data Type from the menu.

3 Enter values for each item, and then press the Enter Key.

The data type is registered.

Refer to Entering Data Type Attributes on page 4-77 for information on entering values for at-
tributes.

4 Next, add a member. Right-click the data type you just registered and select Create New
Member from the menu.

5 Enter values for each item, and then press the Enter Key.

4-72 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

The new member is added to the union data type.

Refer to Entering Data Type Attributes on page 4-77 for information on entering values for at-
tributes.

4-3 Creating Data Types

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add additional members as required.

 Creating Enumerations
After you register the data type, add members.

1 Click the Enumerated Side Tab in the Data Type Editor.

The Enumeration Data Type Editor is displayed. 4

2 If, as in this example, no data types are registered, click the Data Type Editor. A data type reg-
istration line is displayed.
If you have already registered at least one data type, but you want to add more, press the In-
sert Key with the cursor inside the Data Type Editor. Or, right-click inside the Data Type Editor
and select Create New Data Type from the menu.

3 Enter values for each item, and then press the Enter Key.

The data type is registered.

Refer to Entering Data Type Attributes on page 4-77 for information on entering values for at-
tributes.

4 Next, add a member (i.e., an enumerator). Right-click the data type you just registered and se-
lect Create New Member from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-73

4 Programming

The new member (enumerator) is added to the enumeration data type.

5 Enter values for each item, and then press the Enter Key.

Refer to Entering Data Type Attributes on page 4-77 for information on entering values for at-
tributes.

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add additional members as required.

 Changing Data Types and Members

1 Click the cell to edit in the data type or member.

2 Change the setting, and then press the Enter Key.

4-74 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-3 Creating Data Types

The change is applied to the data type or member.

 Deleting Data Types and Members

1 Click any cell on the line of the data type or member to delete to select the entire line.

2 Press the Delete Key. Or, right-click a row and select Delete from the menu.

The data type or member is deleted.

 Copying and Pasting Data Types and Members

1 Click any cell on the line of the data type or member to copy.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-75

4 Programming

2 Press the Ctrl + C Keys. Or, right-click the row and select Copy from the menu.

3 Press the Ctrl + V Keys. Or, right-click and select Paste from the menu.

The data type or member is copied with _Copy added to the name of the data type or member
that was copied.

4-76 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-3 Creating Data Types

Precautions for Correct Use

If you use another structure as a member of a structure, you cannot specify a structure that re-
sults in recursion or a loop. An error is detected during the program check.

Additional Information 4
If the same data type names or member names already exist when you copy and paste data
types or members from spreadsheets or other sources, a dialog box that shows a list of the
source and destination data types and members is displayed. Select the data types and mem-
bers to overwrite and execute the paste.

 Entering Data Type Attributes

This section describes how to enter data type attributes.
For information on attributes, valid value ranges, and character restrictions, refer to the NJ/NX-
series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC /
Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558).

Data type attribute Description

Name Enter a text string for the name.

Base Type Enter a data type directly or select one from the list. However,
structures must be STRUCT and unions must be UNION.

Offset Type Select the type of offsets to use for structure members.
Refer to Specifying Offsets for Structure Members on page 4-78,
below, for details.

Offset Byte Set the offset of the member from the start of the structure varia-
ble. The current setting is displayed.
You can enter a byte offset when the offset type is set to User.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-77

4 Programming

Data type attribute Description

Offset Bit Set the offset of the member from bit 0 at the specified byte posi-
tion. The current setting is displayed.
You can enter a bit offset when the offset type is set to User.

Enum Value Enter the integer value that corresponds to the enumerator.

Comment Enter a comment.

 Specifying Offsets for Structure Members

You can specify offsets for structure members to set the memory configuration of the members.
You can align the memory configuration of the members of a structure when you use tag data links
with CJ-series CPU Units or with other external devices that have different memory structures.
For details, refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-
series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558).

Set the offset type according to your purpose.

Offset
Description
Type
NJ The optimum memory configuration for an NJ/NX/NY-series Controller is used for the fastest op-
eration. Normally it is not necessary to make any changes.
CJ The memory configuration of the CJ-series CPU Units is used. Suitable values are set for the
byte and bit offsets.
User This offset type allows you to set suitable values for the byte and bit offsets. You can set the byte
and bit offsets that are necessary to match the memory structure of the external device.

Version Information

A CPU Unit with unit version 1.01 or later and Sysmac Studio version 1.02 or higher are re-
quired to set offsets for structure members.

Precautions for Correct Use

You cannot set initial values for variables that use structures for which member offsets are set.
If you specify initial values, an error will occur.

Additional Information

• You can globally switch the comments that are displayed. Refer to 8-16 Changing Variable
Comments and Data Type Comments on page 8-109 for the actual procedures.

4-78 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-4 Namespaces
 Namespaces
Namespaces allow you to group and nest the names of data types, functions, and function block
definitions so that you can manage them. This reduces the chance of duplicated names and makes
the entities easier to access.
Use the following notation for names that use namespaces.

Device_A\Read_recipe
Name of Short name

4-4 Namespaces
namespace

Fully qualified name

Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series
Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558) for details on
namespaces.
4
Version Information

4-4-1 Data for Which You Can Use Namespaces

With Sysmac Studio version 1.14 or higher, you cannot create namespaces that start with
OmronLib.
If you open a project that was created with Sysmac Studio version 1.13 or lower on Sysmac
Studio version 1.14 or higher and the project contains a namespace that starts with OmronLib,
an error will not occur, but you cannot create new namespaces that start with OmronLib.

Additional Information

• The root of a namespace is called the global namespace.

• Namespaces can be nested to up to three levels.

4-4-1 Data for Which You Can Use Namespaces

You can use namespaces for the following data.
• Data types
• Functions and function block definitions

4-4-2 Setting Namespaces

Data Types
Set the namespace and create the data type under it.

 Displaying Namespace Settings

1 Display the Data Type Editor and then click the Namespace Tree Button on the left edge of the
table.
The namespace tree is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-79

4 Programming

2 Select the namespace from the namespace tree.

All of the data types that belong to the selected namespace are displayed in the Data Type Edi-
tor.

 Adding Namespaces

1 Right-click a namespace and select Create new child namespace from the menu.

A namespace is added in the level below the selected namespace.

Additional Information

You can change the names of the namespaces. Right-click a namespace and select Rename
from the menu or press the F2 Key.

 Deleting Namespaces

1 Right-click the namespace to delete and select Delete from the menu.
The namespace is deleted.

Precautions for Correct Use

When you delete a namespace, all of the namespaces at the levels below it and all data types
that belong to it are also deleted.

4-80 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Additional Information

You can delete all namespaces except for global namespaces at the same time. Right-click a
global namespace and select Delete from the menu.

 Adding Data Types to Namespaces

1 Click the namespace to which to add a data type.

All of the data types that belong to the selected namespace are displayed in the Data Type Edi-
tor.

4-4 Namespaces
Register a data type using the normal data type registration procedure.
The data type is registered under the selected namespace.

Additional Information

You can delete, move, copy, and paste data types in the Data Type Editor for a namespace.
4

Functions and Function Block Definitions

4-4-2 Setting Namespaces

Use the following procedure to set a namespace in the properties of a function or function block defini-
tion.

1 Right-click the function or function block definition and select Properties from the menu.
The properties of the function or function block definition are displayed.

2 Enter the namespace as text for the Namespace Field in the properties.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-81

4 Programming

The fully qualified name of the function or function block definition is displayed in the Multiview
Explorer.

Additional Information

• You can set the name of the namespace in the editor for the function or function block defini-
tion.
Click the Namespace-Using Declaration Bar in the editor, and then enter the name of the
namespace in the Namespace Field.

4-4-3 Using Namespaces

You can use the names of data types, functions, and function block definitions that use namespaces in
the same way as you use names that do not use namespaces.
When you enter them, enter the fully qualified name. For functions that display candidates during text
entry, the fully qualified names are displayed.

 Examples of Entering Fully Qualified Names

Item Examples of fully qualified names
Data type Namespace1\StructType1
Functions and • Entry Example for Variable Table
function block definitions Namespace1\NamespaseSUB1\FB1
• Entry Example for Ladder or ST Editor
\\Namespace1\NamespaceSUB1\FN1

The following section describes a special method for that you can use for namespaces.

 Usage Declaration
When programming a ladder diagram or ST, you can declare a namespace for the POU in ad-
vance. This allows you to use the short names for function names and function block names.

4-82 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

1 Display the variable table in the Ladder Editor or ST Editor and click the Namespace − Using
Bar.

4-4 Namespaces
The Namespace and Using setting areas are displayed.

4-4-3 Using Namespaces

Note Refer to Programming Ladder Diagrams and Programming Structured Text for the procedures to
display the Ladder Editor and ST Editor.

2 Enter the namespaces for the functions or function blocks to use in ladder programming or ST
programming.
Example: The Namespace1\NamespaceSub1\FN1 namespace for the function is declared in
the ST Editor.

This allows you to enter the short name in the ladder diagram or ST.
Example:

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-83

4 Programming

Precautions for Correct Use

• An error will occur during the program check if all of the names of namespaces are not
unique when you enter the short names of function names and function block names after
you declare the use of more than one namespace. If that occurs, enter the fully qualified
names.
• When you specify a data type in a variable table, you must enter the fully qualified name even
if you have declared a namespace.

Additional Information

• You can enter the fully qualified names even if the use of a namespace is declared.
• When you use functions or function block definitions that are in the same namespace, you
can enter the short names even if you do not declare them.
• Backslashes (\) in names that use namespaces in the ST Editor may be displayed as Yen
symbols depending on the font that you use for the display. You can change the font in the
option settings. Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for details.

4-84 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-5 Programming
The following sections describe how to enter programming code.
You can use either ladder diagrams (LD) or ST (structured text) to code the algorithms used in POUs
(programs, functions, or function blocks).

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

• Programming Ladder Diagram

4-5 Programming
Programming a ladder diagram involves connecting circuit parts with connecting lines to build algo-
rithms. You can enter circuit parts and connecting lines in the Ladder Editor.

Opening and Using the Ladder Editor

 Programs 4

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

Double-click a section of a ladder diagram program under Programming - POUs - Programs
in the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-click the section and select Edit from the menu.

The Ladder Editor for the program is displayed.

Refer to 4-2-2 Registering Programs on page 4-57 for the procedure to register a ladder dia-
gram program.

 Functions and Function Blocks

1 Double-click a ladder diagram function under Programming - POUs - Functions or a ladder

diagram function block under Programming - POUs - Function Blocks in the Multiview Explorer.
Or, right-click a ladder diagram function or function block and select Edit from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-85

4 Programming

The Ladder Editor for the function or function block is displayed.

For information on registering ladder diagram functions or function blocks, refer to 4-2-3 Regis-
tering Function Blocks on page 4-60 or 4-2-4 Registering Functions on page 4-62.

Adding and Deleting Sections

• Sections
You can divide ladder diagrams into smaller units for easier management. These units of division
are called sections.

 Adding Sections

1 Select a ladder diagram program under Programming - POUs - Programs in the Multiview
Explorer.

2 Right-click the ladder diagram program and select Add - Section from the menu.

A section is added under the selected ladder diagram program.

4-86 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

 Changing the Order of Sections

Programs are executed from top to bottom in the order that the sections are displayed in the Multi-
view Explorer. To change the order of execution, you must change the order of the sections.

4-5 Programming
Select the section to change the order of under Programming - POUs - Programs in the Mul-
tiview Explorer.

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

2 Right-click the section and select Move Up from the menu to move the section up, or select
Move Down from the menu to move the section down. You can also drag the sections to
change the order.

The selected section is moved up or down.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-87

4 Programming

Right-click an existing section and select Insert Above - Section. A new section is inserted
above the selected section.

 Deleting Sections

1 Select the section to delete from a ladder diagram program under Programming - POUs -
Programs in the Multiview Explorer.

2 Right-click the section and select Delete from the menu. Or, select Delete from the Edit menu.
You can also press the Delete Key to delete the section.

The selected section is deleted.

 Copying and Pasting Sections

There are the following ways to copy sections.
• Copy: Only circuit data in the section is copied.
• Copy with Dependents: Not only the circuit data of the section but also variables that are refer-
enced by the section and the data types of the variables are copied.

1 Select the section to copy from a ladder diagram program under Programming - POUs -
Programs in the Multiview Explorer.

2 Press the Ctrl + C Keys. Or, right-click the section and select Copy from the menu. If you want
to copy data together with referenced variables and their data types, select Copy with
Dependents.

4-88 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-5 Programming
3 Press the Ctrl + V Keys. Or, right-click and select Paste from the menu.
4

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

• When Copy is selected
The copied section is added. If a section with the same name already exists, a message box
appears to confirm whether you want to overwrite the section. Click the Yes Button to over-
write the section. If you click the No Button, the section is added with the name
Copy_1_of_Section Name.

• When Copy with Dependents is selected

Not only the data that are copied with Copy but also global variables and their data types
used in the section are pasted to the destination program.
If a variable or data type with the same name and different attribute already exists in the des-
tination program, the Comparison before pasting dependents Dialog Box is displayed.
For details on the Comparison before pasting dependents Dialog Box, refer to 4-5-3 Com-
parison before Pasting Dependents on page 4-152.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-89

4 Programming

Precautions for Correct Use

• You cannot undo or redo actions performed on sections in the Multiview Explorer. After you
delete a section, you cannot restore it.
• Changes that you make to a program affect all sections under that program as well.
• After you paste a section, check to be sure that the variables and data types are used cor-
rectly.

Additional Information

To switch the display between different sections, click the tab for the desired section name.

Basic Circuit Part Operations

• Inserting Circuit Parts
You insert circuit parts in the Ladder Editor to create an algorithm.
The following circuit parts are supported.

Circuit Part Description

Input A program input.

Output A program output.

Function block An instruction that defines an operation.

Function An instruction to perform a single function.

Inline ST An ST program that is entered in a ladder program.

4-90 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Circuit Part Description

Jump A jump starting point to another rung.

Jump label A label that designates a jump destination.

 Methods for Inserting Circuit Parts

There are four basic ways to insert circuit parts.
Method (1) Drag a circuit part from the Toolbox.

4-5 Programming
Method (2) Right-click a connecting line and select Insert Circuit Part from the menu.
Method (3) Select a connecting line and press the shortcut key to insert a circuit part.
Method (4) Select a connecting line and then select a circuit parts from Insert - Circuit Parts on
the Main Menu.

4
Inserting and Deleting Program Inputs and Outputs

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

 Inserting a Program Input in an AND Structure
There are four methods to insert an input in an AND structure.
Method (1) Drag an input from the Toolbox.
Method (2) Right-click a connecting line and select Insert Input from the Menu.
Method (3) Select a connecting line and press the C Key.
Method (4) Select the location at which to insert the input and select Insert - Circuit Parts - N.O.
Input.

The procedures to insert the input that is shown in the following figure are given below.

Method (1) Dragging an Input from the Toolbox

Select Input in the Ladder Tools in the Toolbox and drag it to the location where you want to insert
it in the Ladder Editor.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-91

4 Programming

Drag

The input is inserted.

Method (2) Right-clicking a Connecting Line and Selecting Insert Input from the Menu
Right-click the connecting line where you want to insert the input and select Insert Input from the
menu.

The input is inserted.

Method (3) Selecting a Connecting Line and Pressing the C Key

Select a connecting line and then press the C Key.

The input is inserted.

Method (4) Selecting the Location at Which to Insert the Input and Selecting Insert - Circuit
Parts - N.O. Input.
Select the location at which to insert the input and then select Insert - Circuit Parts - N.O. Input.

4-92 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

The input is inserted.

4-5 Programming
 Inserting a Program Input in an OR Structure
There are five ways to insert an input in an OR structure.
Method (1) Drag an input from the Toolbox to the input that is above where you want to insert the
input.
Method (2) Right-click the input where you want to insert the OR input and select Insert Parallel
4
Input Above or Insert Parallel Input Below from the menu.

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

Method (3) Drag the connecting line from the start point to insert the input to the connecting line at
the end point.
Method (4) Select an input and press the W Key. For a NOT input, press the X Key.
Method (5) Select the location at which to insert the input and select Insert - Circuit Parts - OR
with N.O. Input.

The procedures to insert the input that is shown in the following figure are given below.

Method (1) Dragging an Input from the Toolbox to the Input that Is Above Where You Want to
Insert the Input
Select Input in the Ladder Tools in the Toolbox and drag the input to the input that is above the
location where you want to insert it in the Ladder Editor.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-93

4 Programming

Drag

The input is inserted in an OR structure.

Method (2) Right-clicking the Input Where You Want to Insert the OR Input and Selecting
Insert Parallel Input Above or Insert Parallel Input Below from the Menu
Right-click the input where you want to insert the OR input and select Insert parallel input below
from the menu.

The input is inserted in an OR structure.

Method (3) Dragging the Connecting Line from the Start Point to Insert the Input to the Con-
necting Line at the End Point
Drag the connecting line from the start point where you want to insert the input to the end point.

Drag

The pop-up menu is displayed.

4-94 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-5 Programming
Select N.O. Input. Or, press the Enter Key.

The input is inserted in an OR structure.

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

If you drag a connecting line to connect across the rung without a program input, a program input is
inserted automatically.
Insertion Example:

Drag

Select Add Vertical Line from the pop-up

menu or press the Enter Key.

Method (4) Selecting an Input and Pressing the W Key For a NOT input, press the X Key.
Select the input above the location where you want to insert the input and press the W Key.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-95

4 Programming

The input is inserted in an OR structure.

Method (5) Selecting the Location at Which to Insert the Input and Selecting Insert - Circuit
Parts - OR with N.O. Input
Select the input above the location at which to insert the input and then select Insert - Circuit
Parts - OR with N.O. Input

The input is inserted in an OR structure.

 Inserting Program Outputs in Series in an AND Structure

There are four ways to insert outputs in series.
Method (1) Drag an output from the Toolbox.
Method (2) Right-click a connecting line and select Insert Output from the menu.
Method (3) Select a connecting line and then press the O Key. For a NOT output, press the Q Key.
Method (4) Select the location at which to insert the output and select Insert - Circuit Parts -
Output.

The procedures to insert the output that is shown in the following figure are given below.

Method (1) Dragging an Output from the Toolbox

Select Output in the Ladder Tools in the Toolbox and drag it to the location where you want to
insert it in the Ladder Editor.

4-96 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Drag

4-5 Programming
The output is inserted.

4
If you drop the output on a connecting line, the output is inserted in series.

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

Method (2) Right-clicking a Connecting Line and Selecting Insert Output from the Menu
Right-click the connecting line where you want to insert the output and select Insert Output from
the menu.

The output is inserted.

Method (3) Selecting a Connecting Line and Pressing the O Key For a NOT output, press the
Q Key.
Select the output above the location where you want to insert the output and press the O Key.

The output is inserted.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-97

4 Programming

Method (4) Selecting the Location at Which to Insert the Output and Selecting Insert - Circuit
Parts - Output.
Select the location at which to insert the output and then select Insert - Circuit Parts - Output.

The output is inserted.

 Inserting Program Outputs in an OR Structure

There are three ways to insert outputs.
Method (1) Drag an output from the Toolbox to the location above the coil with which an OR struc-
ture is required.
Method (2) Drag the connecting line from the start point to insert the output to the end point at the
right bus bar
Method (3) Right-click the output where you want to create the OR structure in the Ladder Editor
and select Insert Parallel Output from the menu.

The procedures to insert the output that is shown in the following figure are given below.

Method (1) Dragging an Output from the Toolbox

Select Output in the Ladder Tools in the Toolbox and drag it to the location where you want to
insert it in the Ladder Editor.

Drag

The output is inserted.

4-98 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

If you drop the output on a connecting line, the output is inserted in series.

Method (2) Dragging the Connecting Line from the Start Point to Insert the Output to the
End Point at the Right Bus Bar
Drag the connecting line from the start point where you want to insert the output to the right bus bar
at the end point.

4-5 Programming
Drag

The pop-up menu is displayed.

4

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

Select Output. Or, press the Enter Key.

The output is inserted.

Method (3) Right-clicking the Output Where You Want To Create the OR Structure in the Lad-
der Editor and Selecting Insert Parallel Output from the Menu
Right-click the output where you want to insert the OR output and select Insert parallel output
above or Insert parallel output below from the menu.

The output is inserted in an OR structure.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-99

4 Programming

Procedures for Changing Circuit Parts

 Editing Program Inputs and Outputs (Negating Inputs and Outputs)

1 Select an input or an output, and then press the / Key. Or, right-click the input or output and
select Invert from the menu.

The N.O./N.C. state of the input or output is reversed.

 Editing Program Inputs and Outputs (Setting Differentiation)

1 To set upward differentiation, right-click the input or output and select Diff Up from the menu.
To set downward differentiation, select Diff Down from the menu.

Upward differentiation or downward differentiation is set.

 Editing Function Blocks (Entering Parameters)

1 Click the parameter you want to edit in the function block.

4-100 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Click

2 Enter the variable name to use. If there are variable names with a usable data type, you can
also select from the variables displayed in the list.

4-5 Programming
4

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

 Editing Function Blocks (Reversing Inputs)

1 Right-click a BOOL input variable name in the function block and select Toggle Negate from
the menu.

The input for the selected parameter is inverted.

A small circle is displayed

for reversed parameters.

 Editing Functions (Entering Parameters)

Parameters are entered in the same way as for function blocks.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-101

4 Programming

Procedures for Deleting Circuit Parts

 Deleting Program Inputs

1 Right-click the input you want to delete and select Delete from the menu. Or, select the input
and press the Delete Key.

The selected input is deleted.

In this case, any variables assigned to the input are not deleted from the local variable table or
global variable table.

 Deleting Outputs

1 Right-click the output you want to delete and select Delete from the menu. Or, select the output
and press the Delete Key.

The selected output is deleted.

4-102 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

In this case, any variables assigned to the output are not deleted from the local variable table

4-5 Programming
or global variable table.

Additional Information

You can specify the rung display width to align the positions of the right bus bars of rungs.
Specify the rung display width in the option settings. Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Set-
tings on page 8-123 for details. 4

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

Entering Variables in Circuit Parts
Use the following method to enter variables into a program input or output that you have inserted.
All variables with the correct data type are displayed in the list.

Entering Global Variables

Method (1) Select a variable that is already registered in the global variable table from the list in the
Ladder Editor.

Local Variables
Method (1) Select a variable that is registered in the local variable table from the list in the Ladder Edi-
tor.
Method (2) Drag a variable from the local variable table of the POUs to the Ladder Editor.
Method (3) Enter a variable in the Ladder Editor (or the ST Editor) before you register the variable in
the local variable table.

The procedures to enter the variables that are shown in the following figure are given below.

Method (1) Selecting a Variable in the Ladder Editor

Select the input, click Enter Variable or press the Ctrl + Space Keys, and then select a variable from
the list. The variables of the same type as the input are displayed as candidates in the list.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-103

4 Programming

The variable is entered.

Method (2) Dragging a Variable from the Local Variable Table of the POUs
Drag the variable you want from the local variable table to the input.

Drag

The variable is entered.

Method (3) Enter a variable in the Ladder Editor (or the ST Editor) before you register the varia-
ble in the local variable table.
Select a program input, click Enter Variable, and enter the variable directly.

The variable is entered.

4-104 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Additional Information

• Members of derivative variables also appear in the list as long as they have the correct data
type.
• You cannot view addresses in memory for CJ-series Units or I/O ports in the Ladder Editor,
only the variable names. You also cannot see if a variable has an AT specification.
• The variable names of any new variables that you enter in the Ladder Editor are automatical-
ly registered in the local variable table. You can select the Select local or global variable
and register it Check Box in the option settings to specify the variable table in which the vari-
able names are registered. Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for
details.
• You can identify the following types of variables in the Ladder Editor by their color.
a) Global variables: Red-purple

4-5 Programming
b) Local variables: Black
You can change the color of the global variables in the option settings.
• If you select the Show comment Check Box for variable comments in the option settings, you
can enter a variable comment when you enter a variable.

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

• You can change the display width for variable names in the option settings.
• If an NA-series PT is registered in the project, you can drag program inputs and program out-
puts from the Ladder Editor to the NA-series PT Page Editor to add them as buttons and
lamps. Refer to the NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (Cat. No.
V118) for details.
• If you move the mouse over a circuit part or select Show Tooltip, supplemental information
on the variable that you entered is displayed in the tooltip. Refer to Show Tooltip on page
4-131 for detail.

 Inserting Rungs
You can use the following procedures to insert rungs.
Method (1) Select Rung under Ladder Tools in the Toolbox and then drag the rung to the be-
ginning of the rung in front of the location where you want to insert the rung.

Drag

Method (2) Select the start of a rung and press the R Key. (Press the Shift + R Keys to insert
a rung above the selected rung.)
Method (3) Right-click a rung and select Insert rung above or Insert rung below.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-105

4 Programming

A rung is inserted above or below the selected rung.

Inserting Function Block Instructions and User-defined Function

Blocks
You can use the following methods to insert function block instructions and user-defined function
blocks (collectively called “function blocks” below).
Inserting Function Block Instructions
Method (1) Drag a function block instruction from the Toolbox.

Inserting User-defined Function Blocks and Function Block Instructions

Method (2) Drag a function block from the Toolbox.
Method (3) Right-click the desired location and select Insert Function Block from the menu.
Method (4) Move the cursor to the insertion position and press the F Key.

The procedures to insert the function block that is shown in the following figure are given below.

 Method (1) Dragging a Function Block Instruction from the Toolbox

1 Select SendCmd under Communications in the Toolbox and then drag it to the location
where you want to insert it.

4-106 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Drag

A rung for the SendCmd function block is inserted.

4-5 Programming
2 Click Enter Function Block at the top of the function block you inserted and enter an instance
name for the function block. If the function block instance is registered in the local variable ta-
ble, you can also select this instance.

4
The instance name is registered

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

in the local variable table.

This completes the insertion of the function block.

If you entered a new instance name, it is registered in the local variable table.

 Method (2) Dragging a Function Block from the Toolbox

1 Select Function Block under Ladder Tools in the Toolbox and then drag it to the location
where you want to insert it.

Drag

The function block is added to the rung.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-107

4 Programming

2 Click Enter Type Name inside the function block you inserted, press the Ctrl + Space Keys or
enter the first character, and then select a function block or function block instruction from the
drop-down list.

The selected function block is displayed.

3 Click Enter Function Block in the function block you inserted and enter an instance name for
the function block. If the function block instance is registered in the local variable table, you can
also select this instance.

The instance name

is registered in the
local variable table.

This completes the insertion of the function block. If you entered a new instance name, it is
registered in the local variable table.

For the following methods 3 and 4, you first must register a function block definition as a data
type in the local variable table.

 Method (3) Right-clicking the Desired Location and Selecting Insert

Function Block from the Menu

1 Right-click a connecting line and select Insert Function Block from the menu.

4-108 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

The function block is added.

2 Click Enter Function Block at the top of the function block you inserted and enter an instance
name for the function block. If the function block instance is registered in the local variable ta-
ble, you can also select this instance.

4-5 Programming
4

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

This completes the insertion of the function block.
If you entered a new instance name, it is registered in the local variable table.

 Method (4) Moving the Cursor to the Insertion Position and Pressing the F
Key
Select the connecting line at the insertion location and press the F Key.
An empty function block is added.
The rest of the procedure is the same as for method 3.

Additional Information

You can insert a function block by dragging the mouse between two connecting lines.
Select Function Block from the pop-up menu that is displayed when you release the mouse but-
ton.

Deleting Function Block Instructions and User-defined Function

Blocks
Right-click the function block instance to delete and select Delete from the menu. Or, select the
function block instance and press the Delete Key.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-109

4 Programming

The selected function block instance is deleted.

However, the variables used for parameters are not deleted.

Entering Parameters in Function Blocks

Use the following method to enter parameters into a function block that you have inserted.
All variables with the correct data type are displayed in the list.

Global Variables
Method (1) Select a variable that is registered in the global variable table from the list in the Ladder
Editor.

Local Variables
Method (1) Select a variable that is registered in the local variable table from the list in the Ladder Edi-
tor.
Method (2) Drag a variable from the local variable table of the POUs to the Ladder Editor.
Method (3) Enter a variable in the Ladder Editor (or the ST Editor) before you register the variable in
the local variable table.

The procedures to enter the variables that are shown in the following figure are given below.

4-110 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Method (1) Selecting a Variable in the Ladder Editor

4-5 Programming
Select the function block, click Enter Variable or press the Ctrl + Space Keys, and select a variable
from the list.

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

All variables with the correct data type are displayed in the list. The selected variable is entered into
the function block.

Method (2) Dragging a Variable from the Local Variable Table of the POUs
Drag the variable you want from the local variable table to the function block parameter.

The variable is entered.

Method (3) Entering Variable Names Directly in the Ladder Editor or ST Editor
Enter a variable name directly before you register the variable in the local variable table.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-111

4 Programming

The variable is entered and registered in the local variable table.

Additional Information

• Members of derivative variables also appear in the list as long as they have the correct data
type.
• You cannot view addresses in the Ladder Editor, only the variable names. You also cannot
see if a variable has an AT specification.
• The variable names of any new variables that you enter in the Ladder Editor are automatical-
ly registered in the local variable table. You can select the Select the internal or global
variable Check Box in the option settings and specify registering the variable in the global
variable table. Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for details.
• If you enter a new variable on the Ladder Editor, the data type for the parameter where you
enter the variable is automatically entered. If the data type cannot be determined, a dialog
box is displayed for you to enter the data type.
• Examples are given below of the notation to use to enter constants (literals) for the parame-
ters of function blocks that you insert in a program.
a) data_type_name#base#numeric_value

Examples: Entering a hexadecimal number: INT#16#001A

Entering a decimal number: INT#10#26
Entering an octal number: INT#8#32
Entering a binary number: INT#2#00011010
b) data_type_name#numeric_value
Example: INT#26
Note: In this case, the base is treated as a decimal number.
Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-
series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558)
for details on the notation of constants (literals).
• If you select and right-click a function block instruction and select Update from the pop-up
menu, differences between parameters of the function block definition and selected function
block called are solved. For a user-defined function block, a message box appears to confirm
whether to update all other function blocks called.
The following conditions may cause differences between parameters of a function block defi-
nition and selected caller.
a) A user-defined instruction is used in a ladder program and then an in-out variable or re-
turn variable of the instruction is changed.
b) A system-defined instruction is used in a ladder program and then the Controller version
is changed, which causes instruction parameter to change.
• If you move the mouse over a variable that you entered or select Show Tooltip, supplemen-
tal information on the variable is displayed in the tooltip. Refer to Show Tooltip on page 4-131
for detail.

4-112 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Inserting Function Instructions and User-defined Functions

You can use the following methods to insert function instructions and user-defined functions (collec-
tively called functions below).

Inserting Function Instructions

Method (1) Drag a function instruction from the Toolbox.

Inserting User-defined Functions and Function Instructions

Method (2) Drag a function from the Toolbox.
Method (3) Right-click the desired location and select Insert Function from the menu.

4-5 Programming
Method (4) Move the cursor to the insertion position and press the I Key.

The procedures to insert the function that is shown in the following figure are given below.

4
 Method (1) Dragging a Function Instruction from the Toolbox

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

Select SINT_TO_DWORD under Data Type Conversion in the Toolbox and then drag it to the lo-
cation where you want to insert it. Or, right-click the desired location and select Insert Function
from the menu. The function is inserted.

Drag

The selected function is inserted.

 Method (2) Dragging a Function from the Toolbox

1 Select Function from Ladder Tools in the Toolbox and then drag it to the location where you
want to insert it.
The function is inserted.

Drag

2 Click Enter Function in the function you inserted, press the Ctrl + Space Keys or enter the first
character, and then select a function or function instruction from the drop-down list.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-113

4 Programming

The selected function is inserted.

Additional Information

You can connect multiple functions or function blocks together with connecting lines. For infor-
mation on the possible connection forms, refer to information on ladder diagrams in the NJ/NX-
series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC /
Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558).

 Method (3) Right-clicking the Desired Location and Selecting Insert

Function from the Menu

1 Right-click a connecting line in the Ladder Editor and select Insert Function from the menu.

An empty function is added.

2 Enter the function name and select the specific function to use.

If you enter characters, registered functions that start with those characters are displayed.

4-114 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

 Method (4) Moving the Cursor to the Insertion Position and Pressing the I
Key

1 Select the connecting line at the insertion location and press the I Key
An empty function is added.
The rest of the procedure is the same as for method 3.

Additional Information

You can insert a function by dragging the mouse between two connecting lines. Select Function
from the pop-up menu that is displayed when you release the mouse button.

4-5 Programming
Deleting Function Instructions and User-defined Functions

1 Right-click the function to delete and select Delete from the menu. Or, select the function and
press the Delete Key.
4

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

The selected function is deleted.
Variables used as parameters are not deleted.

Additional Information

When you insert or delete circuit parts, connecting lines are automatically created to connect
the circuit parts together.

Entering Parameters in Functions

Use the following method to enter parameters into a function that you have inserted.
All variables with the correct data type are displayed in the list.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-115

4 Programming

Global Variables
Method (1) Select a variable that is registered in the global variable table from the list in the Ladder
Editor.

Local Variables
Method (1) Select a variable that is registered in the local variable table from the list in the Ladder Edi-
tor.
Method (2) Drag a variable from the local variable table of the POUs to the Ladder Editor.
Method (3) Enter a variable in the Ladder Editor (or the ST Editor) before you register the variable in
the local variable table.

The procedures to enter the variables that are shown in the following figure are given below.

Method (1) Selecting a Variable in the Ladder Editor

Select the function, click Enter Variable or press the Ctrl + Space Keys, and select a variable from the
list.

All variables with the correct data type are displayed in the list. The selected variable is entered into
the function.

Method (2) Dragging a Variable from the Local Variable Table of the POUs
Drag the variable you want from the local variable table to the function parameter.

4-116 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Drag

4-5 Programming
The variable is entered.

Method (3) Entering Variable Names Directly in the Ladder Editor or ST Editor
Enter a variable name directly before you register the variable in the local variable table.

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

The variable is entered and registered in the local variable table.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-117

4 Programming

Additional Information

• Members of derivative variables also appear in the list as long as they have the correct data
type.
• You cannot view addresses in the Ladder Editor, only the variable names. You also cannot
see if a variable has an AT specification.
• The variable names of any new variables that you enter in the Ladder Editor are automatical-
ly registered in the local variable table. You can select the Select the internal or global
variable Check Box in the option settings and specify registering the variable in the global
variable table. Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for details.
• If you enter a new variable on the Ladder Editor, the data type for the parameter where you
enter the variable is automatically entered. If the data type cannot be determined, a dialog
box is displayed for you to enter the data type.
• Examples are given below of the notation to use to enter constants (literals) for the parame-
ters of functions that you insert in a program.
a) data_type_name#base#numeric_value

Examples: Entering a hexadecimal number: INT#16#001A

Entering a decimal number: INT#10#26
Entering an octal number: INT#8#32
Entering a binary number: INT#2#00011010
b) data_type_name#numeric_value
Example:INT#26
Note: In this case, the base is treated as a decimal number.
Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-
series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558)
for details on the notation of constants (literals).
• If you select and right-click a function instruction and select Update from the pop-up menu,
differences between parameters of the function definition and selected function called are
solved. For a user-defined function, a message box appears to confirm whether to update all
other functions called.
The following conditions may cause differences between parameters of a function definition
and selected caller.
a) A user-defined instruction is used in a ladder program and then an in-out variable or re-
turn variable of the instruction is changed.
b) A system-defined instruction is used in a ladder program and then the Controller version
is changed, which causes instruction parameter to change.
• If you move the mouse over a variable that you entered or select Show Tooltip, supplemen-
tal information on the variable is displayed in the tooltip. Refer to Show Tooltip on page 4-131
for detail.

Displaying the Contents of User-defined Functions and Function

Blocks
You can display the contents of a user-defined function or function block from a ladder program.

1 Right-click the user-defined function or function block name in the ladder program and select
To Lower Layer. You can also double-click the name.

4-118 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-5 Programming
The contents of the function or the definition of the function block is displayed.

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

2 To return from the displayed function or function block definition to the original ladder program,
right-click on the function or function block definition and select To Upper Layer.

The original ladder program is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-119

4 Programming

Additional Information

• You cannot use the To Lower Layer menu command to display the contents of a function or
the definition of a function block in the following cases.
a) The function or function block is defined in a library that is set so that you cannot display
the source.
b) The maximum number of tabs are already displayed in the Edit Pane.
• You can select the To Upper Layer menu command only from a function or function block
definition that you displayed with the To Lower Layer menu command. The To Upper Layer
menu command is valid only while the tab page for the contents of the function or the defini-
tion of the function block is displayed.
However, in the following cases, the contents of the original program is not displayed even if
you select the To Upper Layer menu command.
a) The original program is defined in a library that is set so that you cannot display the
source.
b) The maximum number of tabs are already displayed in the Edit Pane.
• If you display the same function block definition from more than one program and then select
the To Upper Layer menu command from the function block definition, the program where
you last selected the To Lower Layer menu command is displayed.
• If you select the To Lower Layer menu command while online, the contents of the function
block instance are displayed instead of the function block definition. If you then display the
same function block definition from a different instance, the display is overwritten. In that
case, you can select the To Upper Layer menu command only from the function block in-
stance where you last selected the To Lower Layer menu command.

Inserting and Deleting Inline ST

• Inserting Inline ST
You can insert a box in a ladder diagram to enable programming in ST. This allows you to include
ST in a ladder diagram.

Precautions for Correct Use

• You can write up to 1,000 lines of code in an inline ST box. If you write more than 1,000 lines,
an error is detected during the program check or when the user program is built.
• You can insert only one inline ST box per rung. If you insert more than one, an error is detect-
ed during the program check or when the user program is built.
• You cannot insert any circuit parts between an inline ST box and the right bus bar. If you in-
sert one, an error is detected during the program check or when the user program is built.

 Inserting Inline ST

1 Right-click the connecting line where you want to insert the inline ST and select Insert Inline
ST from the menu. Or, drag Inline ST under Ladder Tools in the Toolbox.

4-120 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-5 Programming
An inline ST box is inserted.

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

2 If there are any circuit parts between the inline ST box and the right bus bar, delete them.
Refer to Editing ST on page 4-141 for information on programming in ST.

 Deleting an Inline ST Box

1 Right-click the inline ST box to delete and select Delete from the menu. Or, select the inline ST
box and press the Delete Key.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-121

4 Programming

The inline ST box is deleted.

 Copying and Pasting Inline ST Boxes

1 Right-click the inline ST box to copy and select Copy from the menu.

2 Right-click the connecting line where you want to paste the inline ST box and select Paste
from the menu.

The inline ST box is pasted.

4-122 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-5 Programming
Additional Information

You can drag an inline ST box in the Ladder Editor to move it. Drag the inline ST box to the
connecting line where you want to move it.

4
Copying and Pasting Circuit Parts

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

There are the following ways to copy circuit parts.
• Copy: Only circuit part data is copied.
• Copy with Dependents: Not only the circuit part data but also variables that are referenced by the
circuit part and the data types of the variables are also copied.
If you paste the circuit part into another program, not only the circuit part data but also variables
used in the circuit part and the data types of the variables are added to the program.
If a variable or data type with the same name and different attribute already exists in the destination
program, the Comparison before pasting dependents Dialog Box is displayed.
For details on the Comparison before pasting dependents Dialog Box, refer to 4-5-3 Comparison
before Pasting Dependents on page 4-152.

 Copying and Pasting Program Inputs

1 Right-click the input to copy and select Copy from the menu. Or, select the input and press the
Ctrl + C Keys. If you want to copy data together with referenced variables and their data types,
select Copy with Dependents.

2 Right-click the connecting line where you want to paste the input and select Paste from the
menu. To paste the input in an OR structure, right-click the input above the location where you
want the OR structure and select Paste from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-123

4 Programming

The input is pasted.

If an input is selected, the input is pasted under that input.

 Copying and Pasting Outputs

1 Right-click the output to copy and select Copy from the menu. Or, select the output and press
the Ctrl + C Keys. If you want to copy data together with referenced variables and their data
types, select Copy with Dependents.

4-124 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-5 Programming
4

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

2 Right-click the connecting line where you want to paste the output and select Paste from the
menu. To paste the output in an OR structure, right-click the output above the location where
you want the OR structure and select Paste from the menu.

The output is pasted.

If an output is selected, the output is pasted under that output.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-125

4 Programming

 Copying and Pasting Function Blocks

1 Right-click the function block instance to copy and select Copy from the menu. Or, select the
function block instance and press the Ctrl + C Keys. If you want to copy data together with
referenced variables and their data types, select Copy with Dependents.

2 Right-click the connecting line where you want to paste the function block instance and select
Paste from the menu. To paste the function block instance in an OR structure, right-click the
circuit part above the location where you want the OR structure and select Paste from the
menu.

The function block instance is pasted.

Any variables assigned to parameters for the function block instance are also pasted.

If a circuit part is selected, the function block instance is pasted under that circuit part.

4-126 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

 Copying and Pasting Functions

4-5 Programming
Right-click the function to copy and select Copy from the menu. Or, select the function and
press the Ctrl + C Keys. If you want to copy data together with referenced variables and their
data types, select Copy with Dependents.

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

2 Right-click the connecting line where you want to paste the function and select Paste from the
menu. To paste the function in an OR structure, right-click the circuit part above the location
where you want the OR structure and select Paste from the menu.

The function is pasted.

Any variables assigned to parameters for the function are also pasted.

If a circuit part is selected, the function is pasted under that circuit part.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-127

4 Programming

Precautions for Correct Use

After you paste a circuit part, check to be sure that the variables and their data types are used
correctly.

Additional Information

You can select more than one circuit part at the same time. Either drag the cursor around the
circuit parts to select, or click the circuit parts while holding down the Shift Key.

Moving Vertical Lines

Use the following procedure to change where a connecting line is connected.

1 Drag the connecting line to move as shown in the following figure.

2 Release the mouse button at the new position for the connecting line.
A pop-up menu is displayed.

3 Select Move Vertical Line.

The ladder diagram changes.

4-128 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Editing Data Types

4-5 Programming
If you perform editing offline, you can change the data types of variables on the Ladder Editor.

1 Right-click a variable and select Edit Data Type from the pop-up menu.

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

A dialog box is displayed for you to enter the data type.

2 Enter the new data type and press the Enter Key.

The data type of the variable is changed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-129

4 Programming

Editing Variables

 Changing Variables
You can change the variables that are entered for program inputs, program outputs, and parame-
ters to other variables.
Right-click a program input, program output, or parameter, and select Edit from the pop-up menu.

Registering Variables in Variable Table

You can register variables that are entered for program inputs, program outputs, and parameters in a
variable table.

1 Right-click a variable that is not registered and select Register in Variable Table from the
menu.

The Select the variable type Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select a variable type you want to register on the Select the variable type Dialog Box. If you
entered a variable for a parameter, the Enter the data type Dialog Box is displayed. Enter a
data type and press the Enter Key.

4-130 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

This completes the registration of a new variable in a local or global variable table.

Jumping to a Variable Table

You can display the variable table where a selected variable is registered and jump to the line for that
variable.
Right-click a variable and select Go To Variable Table from the pop-up menu. Or, select the variable
and press the Ctrl + Alt + J Keys.

4-5 Programming
Displaying and Editing Variable Comments
You can display and edit variable comments on the Ladder Editor.

 Displaying Variable Comments

To display variable comments, select Option from the Tools Menu and select the Show comment
Check Box for variable comments before you display the Ladder Editor. Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Stu- 4
dio Option Settings on page 8-123 for the procedure.
You can edit comments that can be edited by clicking them.

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

Additional Information

• You can display the comments for the global variables instead of the comments for the exter-
nal variables. In the option settings, select the Use global variable comment Check Box under
the variable comments in the ladder information. If you select the above check box, you can-
not edit the comments of the external variables.
• You can display variable comments on more than one line. Specify the number of display
lines for the variable comments in the ladder information in the option settings.
When a comment does not fit in the display area, a part of comment that cannot be displayed
will be omitted. You can select the omitted part from beginning, middle, or end of the com-
ment in the option settings.

 Displaying Structure Variable Member Comments

Variable comments for structure variable members are displayed in the following form:
Structure_variable_comment Member_variable_comment (with a space between the two com-
ments).
If the member variable comment is empty, the data type comment for that member is displayed in-
stead of the member variable comment. If both the member variable comment and the data type
comment are empty, only the structure variable comment is displayed.

 Displaying Union Variable Member Comments

Variable comments for union variable members are displayed. If the member variable comment is
empty, the data type comment for that member is displayed. If both the member variable comment
and the data type comment are empty, the union variable comment is displayed.

Show Tooltip
If you move the mouse over a variable that you entered or execute the Show Tooltip menu, supple-
mental information on the variable is displayed in the tooltip.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-131

4 Programming

Attributes of vari-
Displayed information
ables
Name The variable name is displayed.
Data type The data type is displayed.
AT Entered is displayed if an address is allocated to the variable.
Refer to the variable table for details on the AT specification.
Initial value The set initial value is displayed.
Entered is displayed if the variable cannot be identified because the data type is the deriv-
ative data type.
Refer to the variable table for details on the initial value.
Retain The Retain attribute setting is displayed.
Constant The Constant attribute setting is displayed.
Network Publish The Network Publish setting is displayed.
Edge The differential type is displayed.
Comment The comment is displayed.

Inserting and Deleting Jump Labels and Jumps

You can insert a jump label in the rung to jump to and then specify the jump label when you insert a
jump.

 Inserting Jump Labels

1 Right-click the beginning of the rung to jump to and select Insert Jump Label from the menu.

Or, drag a Label under Ladder Tools in the Toolbox to the beginning of the rung.
A jump label entry field is inserted.

4-132 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-5 Programming
2 Enter the name of the jump label.

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

 Inserting Jumps

1 Right-click the connecting line immediately before or after the output for the rung to jump from
and select Insert Jump from the menu. Or, drag a Jump under Ladder Tools in the Toolbox to
the connecting line.

A jump circuit part is displayed.

Precautions for Correct Use

All circuit parts to the right of where you insert a jump are deleted.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-133

4 Programming

2 Click Enter Jump Label for the jump circuit part and enter the name of the label to jump to.

 Deleting Jump Labels and Jumps

1 Right-click the jump you want to delete and select Delete from the menu. Or, select the jump
and press the Delete Key.

The jump is deleted.

The right bus bar is displayed where the jump was deleted.

2 Select the connecting line to the left of the right bus bar and insert an output, function, or func-
tion block to construct the rung.

 Deleting Jump Labels

1 Right-click the jump label you want to delete and select Delete from the menu. Or, select the
jump label and press the Delete Key.

4-134 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

The jump label is deleted.

4-5 Programming
Entering Element Comments
Element comments can be set in the following circuit parts.
Inputs, coils, functions, function blocks, and jumps
4
Example:

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

Version Information

Element comments can be used in projects for the NX102 CPU Unit with unit version 1.31 or
later and the NJ/NX/NY-series CPU Unit with unit version 1.19 or later.

 Adding and Changing Element Comments

To add or change element comments, select a circuit part to set an element comment and perform
one of the following operations.
• Right-click the circuit part and select Edit Element Comment.
• Press the Alt + Enter Keys.

Additional Information

You can show or hide element comments and specify the number of lines to display in the op-
tion settings. Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for details.

Inserting and Deleting Bookmarks

You can add bookmarks to the beginning of rungs and move between them.

1 Right-click the beginning of a rung and select Bookmarks - Toggle Bookmark from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-135

4 Programming

A bookmark is displayed at the beginning of the rung.

2 To delete a bookmark for a rung, right-click the beginning of a rung where you have set a book-
mark and select Bookmarks - Toggle Bookmark from the menu just as you did to insert a
new bookmark.
The bookmark for the selected rung is deleted.

3 To delete all bookmarks at once, right-click the beginning of a rung and select Bookmarks -
Clear All Bookmarks from the menu.
All bookmarks are deleted.

Entering Rung Comments

You can add element comments to each rung.

1 Select the rung header and display the entry field with one of the following methods.
• Right-click and select Edit Rung Comment.
• Press the Enter Key.
• Double-click the left mouse button.

2 Enter a comment.

4-136 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Additional Information

• You can change the Rung comment background color in the option settings. Refer to
8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for details.
• You can start a new line by pressing the Ctrl + Enter Keys.

Displaying Rung Comment List

Rung Comment List is a list to display only rung comments in a Ladder Editor diagram. Rung com-
ments enable you to understand the processing flow of ladder rungs and to identify a rung where you
want to go. It can also display the rung comments hierarchically if you set a title.

4-5 Programming
1 Click the Rung Comment List Bar.
Or, right-click on the rung header and select Display Rung Comment List.

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

The rung comment list is displayed.

2 Double-click a comment.
Or, right-click and select Jump from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-137

4 Programming

The target rungs are displayed on Ladder Editor.

 Setting Titles in Rung Comment List

1 Enter # in the beginning of a rung comment.

It is displayed as a title in Rung Comment List.

You can collapse the rung comments between the titles as the child elements of the title.

Displaying Rung Errors

When you enter a circuit part, the format is always checked and any mistakes are displayed as errors.
If there are any errors, a red line is displayed between the rung number and the left bus bar.
Error Rung

Place the mouse over the red line to view information on the rung error.

Searching for and Jumping to Variables in Ladder POUs

You can sequentially search for inputs, outputs, and instructions in ladder POUs that use a specified
variable and sequentially jump to the locations where the variable is used.

4-138 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

1 Right-click a program input, program output, or variable, and select the destination to jump to
from the menu.

4-5 Programming
4
2 The display will jump to the location of the relevant variable.

4-5-1 Programming Ladder Diagrams

Menu command Description
Go to Next Variable The display will jump to the next location where the selected variable is used.
Go to Next Input The display will jump to the next program input or function/function block input
parameter where the selected variable is used.
Go to Next Output The display will jump to the next program output or function/function block out-
put parameter where the selected variable is used.
Retrace Search*1 If the selected variable is used as a program output or as the output parameter
of a function or function block, this command searches for the program inputs
and the input parameters to functions or function blocks that use the selected
variable. The display jumps sequentially to the locations where the variable was
found starting from the first rung.
If the selected variable is used as a program input or as the input parameter of
a function or function block, this command searches for the program outputs
and the output parameters to functions or function blocks that use the selected
variable. The display jumps sequentially to the locations where the variable was
found.
Back The display returns to the last location that was jumped to for the Next Variable,
Next Input, Next Output, or Retrace Search command.
Go to Rung The display will jump to the start of the specified rung.

*1. This command is not displayed on the menu. Use the shortcut key (the Space Key). Shortcut keys
are also convenient for other menu commands. Refer to A-5 Shortcut Keys on page A-19.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-139

4 Programming

 Splitting the View

You can drag the split bar on the vertical scroll bar of the Ladder Editor to split the view vertically.

4-5-2 Programming Structured Text

• Programming Structured Text
ST (structured text) programming involves using the ST language to build algorithms. To do this, you
enter data processing in the ST Editor.

Starting the ST Editor

 Programs
Double-click an ST program under Programming - POUs - Programs in the Multiview Explorer.
Or, right-click the ST program and select Edit from the menu.
Refer to 4-2 Registering POUs on page 4-57 for the procedure to register a program.
The ST Editor for the program is displayed.

4-140 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

 Functions and Function Blocks

1 Double-click an ST function block (or ST function) under Programming - POUs - Function

Blocks (or Functions) in the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-click the ST function or function
block and select Edit from the menu.
For information on registering ST functions or function blocks, refer to 4-2-3 Registering Func-
tion Blocks on page 4-60 or 4-2-4 Registering Functions on page 4-62.
The ST Editor for the function or function block is displayed.

4-5 Programming
4

4-5-2 Programming Structured Text

Editing ST
• You combine different ST statements to build algorithms.
For information on statement structures and expressions, refer to information on the structured text
language in the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series
Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558).

 Entering Assignment Statements

The following example shows how to assign the sum of variables aaa and bbb into variable ccc.
ccc := aaa + bbb ;

The aaa, bbb, and ccc variables are registered in the variable table in advance.
You can also register new variables in a variable table when you enter unregistered variable names
on the ST Editor. Refer to Registering Variables on the ST Editor on page 4-147 for details.

1 Enter the first letter of the variable ccc into the ST Editor.
A list of possible variable candidates is displayed in a list.

2 Select the variable ccc and press the Enter Key.

The variable ccc is entered.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-141

4 Programming

3 Enter a space and a : (colon) character.

The assignment keyword := is entered automatically.

4 Enter the first letter of the variable aaa.

5 Select the variable aaa from the list of variable candidates and press the Enter Key.
The variable aaa is entered.

6 Enter a space and a + (plus) character and then enter the first letter of the variable bbb.

7 Select the variable bbb from the list of variable candidates, enter a semi-colon (;), and press
the Enter Key.
This completes the assignment statement.

Additional Information

You can use an option setting to prevent the automatic display of the candidate list when enter-
ing text in the ST Editor. Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for the
setting procedure. Even if you prevent the automatic display, you can display the candidate list
by pressing the Ctrl + Space Keys.

 Entering Control Statements

The following example shows how to enter an IF construct.

IF aaa = bbb THEN

ccc := aaa;
END_IF

1 Enter the first letter of the IF statement (i) into the ST Editor.
A list of possible candidates is displayed in a list.

4-142 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

2 Select the IF keyword and press the Enter Key.

4-5 Programming
The IF keyword is entered.

3 Press the Tab Key.

4
The other keywords that make up an IF construct are entered automatically.

4-5-2 Programming Structured Text

4 Enter the statement aaa = bbb.

5 Delete ELSIF, THEN, and ELSE and then enter ccc := aaa ;.
This completes the IF construct.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-143

4 Programming

Additional Information

• Press the Tab Key after entering the first keyword of a construct to automatically complete
the rest of the construct.
• If there is a problem with the format of a construct, a red wavy line is displayed to the right of
the statement keywords.
• You can also drag the control statements from the Structured Text Tools in the Toolbox to en-
ter them.

 Entering the Function Name or Instance Name of the Function Block Di-
rectly into the ST Editor
Enter the function name or instance name of the function block directly into the ST Editor.

1 Enter the first letter of the instance name of the function or the function block into the ST Editor.

2 Select the function name or the function block instance name from the list and press the Enter
Key.

The selected function or function block instance is displayed. When you enter a left
parenthesis, a description of the parameters is displayed.

3 Either click a parameter marker that is displayed for the function or function block instance that
you entered, or press the Tab Key while the mark is still displayed.

A parameter is added.

4-144 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4 Enter the required parameters and complete the statement.

4-5 Programming
 Dragging a Function or Function Block from the Toolbox
Drag a function or function block from the Toolbox.

1 Drag the required function or function block from the Toolbox to the insertion location on the ST
Editor. 4

4-5-2 Programming Structured Text

The function or function block is inserted with temporary variables.
Function Example

Function Block Example

2 Click the variable registration mark and register new variables for the temporary variables or
replace the temporary variables with registered variables to complete the statement.

 Displaying the Contents of User-defined Functions and Function Blocks

You can display the contents of a user-defined function or function block from an ST program.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-145

4 Programming

1 Right-click the user-defined function or function block name in the ST program and select To
Lower Layer.

The contents of the function or the definition of the function block is displayed.

2 To return from the displayed function or function block definition to the original ST program,
right-click on the function or function block definition and select To Upper Layer.

The original ST program is displayed.

4-146 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Additional Information

• You cannot use the To Lower Layer menu command to display the contents of a function or
the definition of a function block in the following cases.
a) The function or function block is defined in a library that is set so that you cannot display
the source.
b) The maximum number of tabs are already displayed in the Edit Pane.
• You can select the To Upper Layer menu command only from a function or function block
definition that you displayed with the To Lower Layer menu command. The To Upper Layer
menu command is valid only while the tab page for the contents of the function or the defini-
tion of the function block is displayed.
However, in the following cases, the contents of the original program is not displayed even if
you select the To Upper Layer menu command.

4-5 Programming
a) The original program is defined in a library that is set so that you cannot display the
source.
b) The maximum number of tabs are already displayed in the Edit Pane.
• If you display the same function block definition from more than one program and then select
the To Upper Layer menu command from the function block definition, the program where
you last selected the To Lower Layer menu command is displayed.
• If you select the To Lower Layer menu command while online, the contents of the function
block instance are displayed instead of the function block definition. If you then display the 4
same function block definition from a different instance, the display is overwritten. In that
case, you can select the To Upper Layer menu command only from the function block in-

4-5-2 Programming Structured Text

stance where you last selected the To Lower Layer menu command.

 Registering Variables on the ST Editor

You can register new variables in a variable table when you enter unregistered variable names on
the ST Editor.
• Adding title
Adding variables using variable registration mark

1 Enter an unregistered variable name.

A variable registration mark is displayed under the variable name.

2 Click the variable registration mark.

A dialog box is displayed for you to enter the data type.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-147

4 Programming

3 Enter a data type and press the Enter Key.

The new variable is registered in the local variable table.

Additional Information

You can select the Select local or global variable and register it Check Box in the option set-
tings to specify the variable table in which the variable names are registered. Refer to 8-23 Sys-
mac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for details.

 Adding Variables Using Pop-up Menu

1 Enter an unregistered variable name.

2 Right-click an entered variable name and select Register in Variable Table from the menu.

The Select the variable type Dialog Box is displayed.

3 Select a variable type you want to register on the Select the variable type Dialog Box.

4 Then, the Enter the data type Dialog Box is displayed. Enter a data type and press the Enter
Key.
This completes the registration of a new variable in a local or global variable table.

4-148 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Additional Information

You can right-click in the ST Editor and select Generate All Pou Variables As Internals from
the pop-up menu to register all of the unregistered variables in the ST Editor as internal varia-
bles at a time. The variable is registered in the variable table and the data type is left blank.
Even if you select the Specify the data type Check Box in the option settings, a text box to
enter the data type is not displayed.

 Editing Data Types

If you perform editing offline, you can change the data types of variables on the ST Editor.

4-5 Programming
Right-click a variable and select Edit Data Type from the pop-up menu.
A dialog box is displayed for you to enter the data type.

4-5-2 Programming Structured Text

2 Enter the new data type and press the Enter Key.
The data type of the variable is changed.

 Jumping to a Variable Table

You can display the variable table where a selected variable is registered and jump to the line for
that variable.
Right-click a variable and select Go To Variable Table from the pop-up menu. Or, select the varia-
ble and press the Ctrl + Alt + J Keys.

 Entering Constants
The following example shows how to assign the hexadecimal value FFFF to variable aaa.

1 Enter aaa := into the ST Editor.

2 Enter the constant as WORD#16#FFFF.

For information on the formats for entering other constants, refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit
Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC
Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558).

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-149

4 Programming

 Entering Comments
Enter (* at the beginning and *) the end of any text to be treated as a comment in the ST Editor. If
you only want to comment out a single line, enter a double forward slash (//) at the beginning of the
line.

 Deleting ST Elements

1 Select the text to delete.

2 Press the Delete Key or the Backspace Key to delete the text.

 Copying and Pasting ST Elements

There are the following ways to copy ST elements.
• Copy: Only selected text strings are copied.
• Copy with Dependents: Not only the selected text string but also variables that are referenced
in the text string and the data types of the variables are copied.

1 Select the text to copy.

2 Right-click the text and select Copy from the menu. Or, select the text and press the Ctrl + C
Keys. If you want to copy data together with referenced variables and their data types, select
Copy with Dependents.

3 Right-click at the location where you want to paste and select Paste from the menu. Or, press
the Ctrl + V Keys.
The copied text string is pasted.
If you select Copy with Dependents and paste the text string into another ST program, not
only the text string but also variables that are referenced in the text string and the data types of
the variables are also added to the destination ST program.
If a variable or data type with the same name and different attribute already exists in the desti-
nation program, the Comparison before pasting dependents Dialog Box is displayed.
For details on the Comparison before pasting dependents Dialog Box, refer to 4-5-3 Com-
parison before Pasting Dependents on page 4-152.

 Indenting
You can indent nested statements to make them easier to read.

1 Right-click at the beginning of the line to indent and select Increase Line Indent from the
menu. Or, press the Tab Key.

4-150 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

The indent moves the starting position of the characters on that line to the right.

2 To bring the indent back, right-click the text and select Decrease Line Indent from the menu or
press the Delete Key.

 Moving to a Specified Line

You can specify a line number to jump directly to that line.

1 Right-click in the ST Editor and select Go To from the menu.

A Jump Dialog Box is displayed.

4-5 Programming
2 Enter a line number and press the Enter Key.
The cursor moves to the beginning of the line you entered. 4

4-5-2 Programming Structured Text

 Bookmarks
You can add bookmarks to any lines and move between them.

Toggle Bookmarks
Right-click a line number in the ST Editor and select Toggle Bookmark from the menu.
A bookmark is displayed at the beginning of the line.

Moving to the Next Bookmark

Right-click a line number in the ST Editor and select Next Bookmark from the menu.
The cursor moves to the next bookmarked line.

Moving to the Previous Bookmark

Right-click a line number in the ST Editor and select Previous Bookmark from the menu.
The cursor moves to the previous bookmarked line.

Deleting a Specific Bookmark

Right-click a line number with the bookmark and select Toggle Bookmark from the menu.
The bookmark is deleted.

Deleting All Bookmarks

Right-click in the ST Editor and select Clear Bookmarks from the menu.
All bookmarks are deleted.

 Statement Error Displays

When you enter a statement, the format is always checked and any mistakes are displayed as er-
rors.
A wavy line is displayed under any line where an error is detected.
Error: Red wavy line

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-151

4 Programming

Warning: Blue wavy line

Place the mouse over the wavy line to view information on the error.

Refer to 11-2 Error Messages for Structured Text Checks on page 11-7 for information on errors.

 Splitting the View

You can drag the split bar on the vertical scroll bar of the ST Editor to split the view vertically.

 Displaying Variable Comments

Variable comments are displayed in tooltips when you move the mouse over variables in the ST
Editor. The display rules for comments are the same as those for the Ladder Editor. Refer to Dis-
playing and Editing Variable Comments on page 4-131 for the comment display rules.

Precautions for Correct Use

• For information on ST input restrictions (restrictions on the number of operators, the number
of nested POU calls, and the number of nested conditional/iterative statements), refer to the
NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial
Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558).
• A single POU (program, function, or function block) can contain up to 10,000 lines of code.
• When you use a function block in the ST Editor, register the function block instance in the
variable table in advance. You cannot register a function block instance in the ST Editor.
• After you paste an ST element, check to be sure that the variables and their data types are
used correctly.

4-5-3 Comparison before Pasting Dependents

When you paste data that was copied by selecting Copy with Dependents from the pop-up menu in
the Multiview Explorer, Ladder Editor or ST Editor, there may already be a variable or data type with
the same name and different attribute in the paste destination. In such a case, the Comparison
before pasting dependents Dialog Box is displayed to confirm whether you want to overwrite the da-
ta.
You can check the differences between data before overwriting.

4-152 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Comparison before Pasting Dependents Dialog Box

(a) (b)

(c)

4-5 Programming
(d) 4

(e)

4-5-3 Comparison before Pasting Dependents

(f)

Item Description
(a) Data before pasting Displays existing data if any difference is detected.
The lines which contain any data differences are displayed in red.
(b) Data to paste Displays data to be pasted if any difference is detected.
(c) Detailed Comparison But- Displays the Detailed Comparison Window that contains difference details.
ton
(d) Overwrite all difference Overwrites all existing data that contain any differences with the data to be
Button pasted.
(e) Overwrite selected data Overwrites the existing data in the selected line with the data to be pasted.
Button
(f) Close Button The Dialog Box is closed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-153

4 Programming

Detailed Comparison Window

(a) (b)

(c) (d) (e)

Item Description
(a) Data before pasting Displays data that already exists.
The lines which contain any data differences are displayed in red.
(b) Data to paste Displays data that is to be pasted.
(c) Copy Selected Right to Overwrites the existing data in the selected line with the data to be pasted.
Left Button
(d) Copy All Right to Left Overwrites all existing data that contain any differences with the data to be
Button pasted.
(e) Back Button Returns to the Comparison before pasting dependents Dialog Box.

4-154 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-6 Searching and Replacing

 Searching and Replacing
You can search and replace strings in the data of the currently selected device.

WARNING

4-6 Searching and Replacing

When you search and replace a string in a project that includes more than one de-
vice, check the device on which to perform the search and replace before you re-
place it. If you replace data of an unintended device, the controlled system may
cause an unexpected operation.

4-6-1 Scope of Searching and Replacing

You can search and replace text strings in the following items.

Variable tables Ladder diagrams ST 4

Variable names Rung comments Text strings
Variable comments Variable names Variable names

4-6-1 Scope of Searching and Replacing

Function names Function names
Function block definition names Function block instance names
Function block instance names
Element comments
Variable comments

4-6-2 Search and Replace Pane

Use the following procedure to display the Search and Replace Pane.

1 Select Search and Replace from the Edit Menu.

The Search and Replace Pane is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-155

4 Programming

4-6-3 Items to Set

The settings in the Search and Replace Pane are explained below.

Setting Description
Search what • Enter a search string.
• You can select from previous search strings in the list.
• If you select All or Variable name in the Look at Box, and enter the letters that are
included in the variable name or press the Ctrl + Space Keys, variable names are dis-
played as candidates in the list.
Replace with • Enter the string to replace the search string with.
• You can select from previous replacement strings in the list.
You cannot use wildcard characters. (If you try to use them, they are treated as normal
text strings.)
Look in Specify the range to search. You can select from the following.
Programming: All of the programming of the Controller is searched.
Checked elements: The item that is selected in the Select search and replace scope
Dialog Box is searched.
Current View: The current view is searched.
Selection: The range that is selected, which is a range of circuits of a ladder program, a
range of text lines of an ST program, or the like, is searched.
Look at Specify the items to search. You can search for text strings in the following items.
All: Searches all text strings (excluding variable comments on ladder)
Variable name: Searches all variable names.
Instructions: Searches instructions (including program inputs and outputs)*1
Variable comment on ladder: Searches variable comments on ladder.*2

4-156 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Setting Description
Use Specify if you want to use wildcard characters.
Default: Do not use wildcard characters.
Wildcard: Use wildcard characters.
If you select to use wildcard characters, you can click the Button to the right to view a
list of characters used for wildcard characters. Select any of these characters to enter
them in the search string.

4-6 Searching and Replacing

*1. This can be used only for searches.
*2. This can be used only for searches only when Ladder Editor - Variable Comment - Show comment
Check Box is selected in the option settings. Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123
for details on the option settings.

Precautions for Correct Use

• If more than one device is registered in the project, the target of a search and replace is the
currently selected device only. Be sure to check the selected device in the device list for the
4
project before you perform a search and replace.
• If you set the Look in Box to the variable table, set the Look at Box to the variable name, and

4-6-3 Items to Set

perform a replacement, only the variable names in the variable table will be changed.

 Selecting a Search and Replace Scope

If you selected Checked elements in the Look in Box, select the range in the Select search and
replace scope Dialog Box. The Select search and replace scope Dialog Box is displayed when
you click the Select search and replace scope Button on the right of the drop-down arrow of the
Look in Box.

Select the check boxes for the items to search, and then click the OK Button.

 Narrowing Down the Search

You can narrow down the searched items even more if you specify a combination of the instruction
name and variable name for the search string.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-157

4 Programming

Enter a single-byte space between the instruction name and variable name.

To search for Search string specification*1

Program input of a specified variable*2 LD variable_name

Program output of a specified variable*2 OUT variable_name

Function that uses the specified variable as a parameter Function_name variable_name
Function block definition that uses the specified variable Function_block_definition_name variable_name
as a parameter*2
Function block instance that uses the specified variable Function_block_instance_name variable_name
as a parameter
*1. You can specify a constant value instead of a variable name.
*2. Only ladder rungs are searched.

 Wildcards
You can use the following wildcard characters.

Meaning Syntax Description Example

Any single character ? Searches for a text string with a “A?C” matches "ABC", "AdC", and
variable character. "AzC".
Any one character or * Searches for a text string that con- “new*” matches "newfile.txt".
series of characters tains a variable text string
Any single number # Searches for any single number. “7#” matches "71".
“ABC#” matches "ABC5".
Character in a set [] Searches for a single character in “ABC[xyz]” matches both "ABCx"
the set. and "ABCy".
“ABC[x-z]” matches both "ABCx"
and "ABCy".
Character not in a set [! ] Searches for a single character “ABC[!xyz]” matches both "ABCa"
that is not in the set. and "ABCd".
“ABC[!x-z]” matches both "ABCa"
and "ABCd".

 Search Options

Item Description
Match case When this option is selected, searches are case sensitive.
Match whole word When selected, only exact string matches are returned.
Invert NO/NC input Replaces N.O. with N.C. and N.C. with N.O. for all BOOL variables used in a ladder
diagram. (Output bits are not affected.)

 Button Functions

4-158 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Item Description
Search Next Performs a search according to the selected options.
Search Previous Performs a search in the reverse order of Search Next.
Search All Searches all items and displays the results in the Search and Replace Results Tab Page.
Replace Performs a replace according to the selected options.
Replace All Replaces all items and displays the results in the Search and Replace Results Tab Page.
Cancel Cancels the current search and replace operation.

4-6 Searching and Replacing

4-6-4 Searching
The procedures for searching are given in this section.
As an example, the following describes a search for a variable name.

1 Enter the search string in the Search what Field.

4-6-4 Searching
2 Select Variable name in the Look at Field to search for variables.

3 Set the Look in Field and search options as required.*

4 Click the Search Next Button.

The searched items are highlighted.

The search starts again from the beginning when the target data is searched to the end.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-159

4 Programming

To display all of the search results at the same time, click the Search All Button. Then, all
searched items in the search range are highlighted and the search results are displayed in the
Search and Replace Results Tab Page.

* For information on the Look in Field and search options, refer to 4-6-3 Items to Set on page
4-156.

Additional Information

• You can use shortcut keys to search. Refer to A-5-3 Searching and Replacing on page A-21
for details on the shortcut keys.
• If you display the Search and Replace Pane with the Ctrl + F Keys or the menu when the
cursor is on a circuit part in the Ladder Editor, the corresponding text string in the following
table is set as the search string.

Cursor position Text string set as the search string

Input or output Variable name of the input/output
Function block Instance name of the function block
Jump Jump label
Parameter for an input, output, function, or function block Variable name of the parameter
• If you display the Search and Replace Pane when a text string is selected in the ST Editor,
the selected text string is set as the search string.
• If you press the Ctrl + F Keys while circuits of a ladder program or text lines of an ST program
are selected, the selected range is set as the search scope.

4-6-5 Replacing
Use the following procedure to search and replace a text string.

1 Enter the search string that you want to replace in the Search what Field.

2 Enter the replace string in the Replace with Field.

3 Set the Look in Field and Look at Field, and select search options as required.*

4 Click the Search Next Button to search for the string to replace.

5 If the string is found, click the Replace Button to replace the string.
* For information on the Look in Field, the Look at Field, and search options, refer to 4-6-3 Items to
Set on page 4-156.

4-160 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-6-6 Searching All

Use the following procedure to search for all occurrences. The search results are displayed in the
Search and Replace Results Tab Page.

1 Enter the search string in the Search what Field.

2 Set the Look in Field and Look at Field, and select search options as required.*

4-6 Searching and Replacing

3 Click the Search All Button.
* For information on the Look in Field, the Look at Field, and search options, refer to 4-6-3 Items to
Set on page 4-156.

4-6-7 Replacing All

Use the following procedure to find and replace all occurrences of a text string. The replacement re-
sults are displayed in the Search and Replace Results Tab Page. 4

1 Enter the search string that you want to replace in the Search what Field.

4-6-6 Searching All

2 Enter the replace string in the Replace with Field.

3 Set the Look in Field and Look at Field, and select search options as required.*

4 Click the Replace All Button.

* For information on the Look in Field, the Look at Field, and search options, refer to 4-6-3 Items to
Set on page 4-156.

Precautions for Correct Use

The targets of replacement for Replace All are strings within the range set in the Look in Field.

4-6-8 Replacing All N.O. and N.C. Inputs

Use the following procedure to find and replace all N.O. and N.C. inputs. The replacement results are
displayed in the Search and Replace Results Tab Page.

1 Enter the variable used in the input to replace in the Search what Field.

2 Specify Variable name in the Look at Field.

3 Select the Invert NO/NC Input option.

4 Set the Look in Field and search options as required.*

5 Click the Replace All Button.

* For information on the Look in Field, the Look at Field, and search options, refer to 4-6-3 Items to
Set on page 4-156.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-161

4 Programming

4-7 Program Checks

• Program Checks
You can check the programs to detect any errors in the POUs (programs, functions, or function
blocks) that you created.
There are two types of program checks.
a) Check All Programs
Checks all programs in the project.
b) Check Selected Programs
Checks only the selected programs.

4-7-1 Check All Programs

1 Select Check All Programs from the Project Menu.

The results of the program check are displayed in the Build Tab Page.

4-7-2 Check Selected Programs

1 Select the POUs or sections to check in the Multiview Explorer.

2 Select Check Selected Programs from the Project Menu.

The results of the program check are displayed in the Build Tab Page.

 Program Check Result Displays

The results of a program check are displayed in the Build Tab Page as follows:

4-162 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Item Example Meaning Remarks

Number of Displays the total num-
errors ber of errors.

Number of Displays the total num-

warnings ber of warnings.

Error or Displays the errors or

warning warnings in the order
number in which they were
found.

4-7 Program Checks

Description Displays a description
of the error or warning.

Location Displays the location You can

where the error or jump di-
warning occurred. rectly to 4
the loca-
tion of the

4-7-2 Check Selected Programs

error.

Additional Information

You can prevent specific warnings from being displayed. Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option
Settings on page 8-123 for details.

 Jumping to the Location of an Error

In the Build Tab Page, double-click the line of the error to jump to.
The relevant location is displayed in the Edit Pane.

Refer to 11-1 Error Messages for Ladder Program Checks on page 11-2 or 11-2 Error Messages
for Structured Text Checks on page 11-7 for information on errors.

 Error Displays in the Multiview Explorer

POUs that contain an error are marked with an exclamation mark ( ) icon.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-163

4 Programming

4-164 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-8 Building and Rebuilding

• Building
Building is the process of converting your project programs into a format that is executable on the
CPU Unit.
A check is performed on the programs and variable data during this process. If there are any errors,

4-8 Building and Rebuilding

the build is not performed and is displayed next to the program or variable data where the error
occurred in the Multiview Explorer. Perform a program check to see the specific errors on the Build
Tab Page. After the first build, only programs that are changed are built again.

Building
The programs are automatically built when the user makes changes to them.

 Execution Timing of Building 4

If you perform no operations for five seconds after you change data types, global variables, or
POUs (including local variables and algorithms), the programs are checked and the programs are
built after the Edit Pane is displayed.

 Progress of Building
The progress of building or rebuilding the programs is displayed in a progress bar at the lower right
of the window.

 Aborting a Build Operation

You cannot check all or some of the programs while building the programs is in progress. Cancel
building to check any of the programs.

Select Abort Build from the Project Menu.

The build operation is aborted and a message that says it was aborted is displayed in the Output
Tab Page.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-165

4 Programming

 Rebuilding
A rebuild is used to build project programs that have already been built. All programs are built
again.

Select Rebuild Controller from the Project Menu.

The build is started and the status during the build is displayed in the Output Tab Page.
The build is complete.

Additional Information

• The status of building is displayed for each of the following in the Output Tab Page.
a) Data types
b) Global variables
c) Cam data settings
d) Variable tables in POUs
e) Algorithms in POUs
• To redisplay all of the program errors on the Build Tab Page, execute the Check All
Programs command.
• You can change whether building is executed automatically. Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Op-
tion Settings on page 8-123 for details.

4-166 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-9 Offline Comparison

The offline comparison operation compares the data for an open project with the data for a project file.
If problems occur after you change the user program, you can search for the problems by comparing
the current version of the user program with the previous version.
Or, you can merge detailed comparison results.

4-9-1 Procedure for Offline Comparison

4-9 Offline Comparison

1 With the Sysmac Studio offline, select Offline Comparison from the File Menu.
The Select Comparison Target Dialog Box is displayed.

4-9-1 Procedure for Offline Comparison

2 Select the project to compare and click the Open Button.
You can either click the Project Button and select the project from a list, or you can click the
File Button and select a project file (file name extension: .smc2, .csm2, .smc, or .csm). A
icon is displayed by the currently open project.
The Offline Comparison Window is displayed. The data for the two projects to compare is dis-
played.
Left side: The currently open project
Right side: The project to compare with the currently open project

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-167

4 Programming

Select the data to compare between the two projects.

Item Description
Compare data in The data items are compared top to bottom in the order that they are displayed in
order the Select Comparison Target Area.
Compare data Data items with the same names are compared when the same names exist both in
with the same the current project and the project to compare.
name If you select the Compare sections in order Check Box, only section data items
are compared top to bottom in the order that they are displayed in the Select Com-
parison Target Area.

3 Select the data to compare, and then click the Compare Button.
To select the data to compare, select the check boxes in both of the Controller project lists.
The comparison will start.
The comparison results are displayed in the Offline Comparison Window after the compari-
son is completed.

Additional Information

If the project accesses a library, you can select Referenced library in the Select Comparison
Target Box to compare the accessed library with the project that was used to create the library.

Offline Comparison Results

The results of the comparison are displayed as shown below.

4-168 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-9 Offline Comparison

The results of the comparison are displayed.

4-9-1 Procedure for Offline Comparison

• Click the Detailed Comparison Button ( ) to display detailed differences.
The results of the comparison are displayed in the following colors.

Text color Status Description

White Same The data in the current project and the selected project are the same.
Red Different The data in the current project and the selected project are different.
Green Exists only on one side The data exists in only one of the projects.

If you select the Compare data with the same name Option, the data items in the project to compare
are reordered in the same order as the current project.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-169

4 Programming

The units for comparison that are shown in the Offline Comparison Window are listed in the following
table.

Lev- Detailed
Data Qty Remarks
el comparison
Project name 0 1 ---
Controller name 1 N ---
POU 2 1 ---
Programs 3 1 ---
Program 4 N --- Ladder programs
Variable table 5 1 Available Ladder programs
Section 5 N Available Ladder programs
Program 4 N --- ST
Variable table 5 1 Available ST
Program Body 5 1 Available ST
Functions 3 1 ---
Function 4 N --- Ladder programs
Variable table 5 1 Available Ladder programs
LadderBody 5 1 Available Ladder programs
Function 4 N --- ST
Variable table 5 1 Available ST
Program Body 5 1 Available ST
Function blocks 3 1 ---
FunctionBlock 4 N --- Ladder programs
Variable table 5 1 Available Ladder programs
LadderBody 5 1 Available Ladder programs
FunctionBlock 4 N --- ST
Variable table 5 1 Available ST

4-170 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

Lev- Detailed
Data Qty Remarks
el comparison
Program Body 5 1 Available ST
Data 2 1 ---
Data types 3 1 Available
Global variables 3 1 Available
Libraries 2 1 ---
The data from this level depends on
the structure of the library.

4-9 Offline Comparison

(The data that can be compared is the
same as the data that is given above.)

Additional Information

You can edit the project while the Offline Comparison Window is displayed.
If the data to compare increases or decreases as the result of editing a project while the Offline
Comparison Window is displayed, close and then reopen the Offline Comparison Window, se-
lect the data to compare, and then execute the comparison again.
4

Detailed Comparison

4-9-1 Procedure for Offline Comparison

Click the Detailed Comparison ( ) Button to display the following window.

(c)

(d)

(a)
(b)

(e)

No. Description
(a) Programming from the currently open project.
(b) Programming from the selected project.
(c) Displays the next difference.
(d) Displays the relevant location in the Editor.
(e) Returns the display to the Comparison Results Dialog Box.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-171

4 Programming

The detailed results of the comparison are displayed in the following background colors.

Background color Meaning

No change The rungs or lines are the same.
Red The rungs or lines exist in both projects, but the contents are different.
Green The rung or line exists only in the open project.
Blue The rung or line exists only in the selected project.

Double-click a row where the data is different or select the row and click the Jump Button to display
the corresponding program.

4-9-2 Merging Detailed Comparison Results

Here, merging means to unify differences in data between two projects or versions of the same
project.
On the Detailed Comparison Results Dialog Box, you can copy data from the project to which the cur-
rent project was compared and overwrite the data in the current project with it.

Procedure

1 Select the lines or rungs to merge in the Detailed Comparison Results Dialog Box and click the
Copy Selected Right to Left Button.
If you want to merge all of the differences, click the Copy All Right to Left Button.

The selected lines or rungs are copied from the project to which the current project was com-
pared to the current project.
If you clicked the Copy All Right to Left Button, all lines or rungs with differences are copied
from the project to which the current project was compared to the current project.

4-172 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 4 Programming

4-9 Offline Comparison

4

4-9-2 Merging Detailed Comparison Results

2 Click the Apply Button.
The changes are applied to the data for the current project.

Precautions for Correct Use

The results of copying from right to left are applied to the project when the Apply Button is
clicked. If you click the Back, Recompare, or Close Button before you apply the copy results,
the copy results will be lost.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 4-173

4 Programming

Additional Information

To undo the results of copying right to left, click the Undo Selected Button or the Undo All
Button. You cannot undo the changes after you click the Apply Button.

4-174 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5
Controller Configurations and
Setup
This section describes how to create programs with the Sysmac Studio.

5-1 Overview of Controller Configurations and Setup...................................... 5-3

5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup .............................................................. 5-4 5
5-2-1 Procedure to Open the EtherCAT Tab Page ................................................... 5-4
5-2-2 Registering Slaves Offline to Configure EtherCAT .......................................... 5-4
5-2-3 Registering Slaves Online to Configure EtherCAT .......................................... 5-6
5-2-4 Setting Master Parameters.............................................................................. 5-8
5-2-5 Setting Slave Parameters................................................................................ 5-9
5-2-6 Exporting Slave Settings ............................................................................... 5-15
5-2-7 Installing and Uninstalling ESI Files .............................................................. 5-17
5-2-8 Transferring the Network Configuration Information...................................... 5-18
5-2-9 Exporting EtherCAT Network Configuration Information ............................... 5-19
5-2-10 Printing an EtherCAT Configuration .............................................................. 5-23
5-2-11 Starting Vision Sensor or Displacement Sensor Setup ................................. 5-23
5-3 EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration and Setup.................................. 5-25
5-3-1 Creating the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration ................................... 5-26
5-3-2 Transferring the Slave Terminal Configuration Information ........................... 5-34
5-3-3 Exporting the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration Information............... 5-35
5-4 Setting EtherCAT Drives.............................................................................. 5-37
5-4-1 Applicable EtherCAT Drives .......................................................................... 5-37
5-4-2 Overview of the Structure of the EtherCAT Drive Tab Page.......................... 5-37
5-4-3 Setting EtherCAT Drives ............................................................................... 5-38
5-4-4 Monitoring EtherCAT Drives .......................................................................... 5-43
5-5 CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration and Setup ........................................ 5-44
5-5-1 CPU/Expansion Racks for the NX102 CPU Unit or NX1P2 CPU Unit .......... 5-44
5-5-2 CPU Rack and Expansion Racks for NJ-series CPU Units........................... 5-53
5-6 Controller Setup ........................................................................................... 5-63
5-6-1 Operation Settings......................................................................................... 5-63
5-6-2 Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings .................................................................. 5-69
5-6-3 Built-in I/O Settings........................................................................................ 5-75
5-6-4 Option Board Settings ................................................................................... 5-76
5-6-5 Memory Settings ........................................................................................... 5-77
5-7 Motion Control Setup................................................................................... 5-78
5-7-1 Setting Axes .................................................................................................. 5-78
5-7-2 Setting Axes Groups ..................................................................................... 5-86
5-8 Cam Data Settings ....................................................................................... 5-89
5-8-1 Registering Cam Data Settings ..................................................................... 5-89

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-1

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-8-2 Editing Cam Data Settings ............................................................................ 5-89

5-8-3 Procedure to Transfer Cam Data Settings .................................................... 5-95
5-8-4 Importing Cam Data Settings ........................................................................ 5-95
5-8-5 Exporting Cam Data Settings ........................................................................ 5-96
5-8-6 Exporting Cam Tables ................................................................................... 5-97
5-8-7 Transferring Cam Tables from the Controller to Files.................................... 5-98
5-8-8 Transferring Cam Tables from Files to the Controller.................................... 5-99
5-8-9 Superimposing Cam Tables ........................................................................ 5-100
5-8-10 Registering Cam Definitions........................................................................ 5-101
5-8-11 Transferring Cam Definitions....................................................................... 5-105
5-8-12 Updating Cam Definition Settings ............................................................... 5-107
5-9 Task Settings .............................................................................................. 5-109
5-9-1 Registering Tasks ........................................................................................ 5-109
5-9-2 Procedure to Set Tasks ............................................................................... 5-109
5-9-3 Task I/O Settings ..........................................................................................5-110
5-9-4 Program Assignments ..................................................................................5-111
5-9-5 Settings for Exclusive Control of Variables in Tasks.....................................5-112

5-2 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-1 Overview of Controller Configura-

tions and Setup

5-1 Overview of Controller Configurations and Setup

The following is a list of the configurations and setups for NJ/NX/NY-series Controllers.
• EtherCAT Configuration and Setup
• EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration and Setup
• CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration and Setup
• Controller Setup
• Motion Control Setup
• Cam Data Settings
• Task Settings

WARNING
Check the parameters for proper execution before you use them for actual operation.

Precautions for Safe Use 5

If verifying revisions is not selected in the Revision Check Method parameter in the master
settings in EtherCAT configuration, parameters are also transferred to slaves with different revi-
sions. If an incompatible revision of a slave is connected, incorrect parameters may be set and
operation may not be correct. If you disable the revision check, make sure that only compatible
slaves are connected before transferring the parameters.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-3

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup

• EtherCAT Configuration and Setup
This is the configuration in the Sysmac Studio of the EtherCAT slaves connected to the built-in
EtherCAT port of the NJ/NX/NY-series Controller, and the settings of EtherCAT masters and slaves
in that configuration.
In the Sysmac Studio, you can construct an EtherCAT configuration just like you would put together
with the actual physical devices.
Select Configurations and Setup - EtherCAT in the Multiview Explorer to open the Edit Pane to
create the EtherCAT Configuration. You can set up devices by dragging slaves from the device list
displayed in the Toolbox to the locations where you want to connect them.

Precautions for Correct Use

If the Controller model is changed from a CPU Unit with unit version 1.40 or later to a CPU Unit
with unit version earlier than 1.40, the unsupported EtherCAT settings are discarded.

5-2-1 Procedure to Open the EtherCAT Tab Page

Double-click EtherCAT under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-click
EtherCAT under Configurations and Setup and select Edit from the menu.
The EtherCAT Tab Page is displayed in the Edit Pane.

5-2-2 Registering Slaves Offline to Configure EtherCAT

 Procedure to Register Slaves on the EtherCAT Tab Page

1 Drag a slave from the Toolbox to the master in the EtherCAT Tab Page. Or, select the master
on the EtherCAT Tab Page, and then double-click the slave in the Toolbox.
The slave is added under the master.

2 As in step 1, drag a slave from the Toolbox to the slave to connect it to in the EtherCAT Tab
Page. Or, select the slave to connect to on the EtherCAT Tab Page, and then double-click the
slave in the Toolbox.
The slave is added under the selected slave.

5-4 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup

3 Change the node address of the slave that you added to the EtherCAT Tab Page to the node
address of the physical slave.

Additional Information
5
• You can right-click a slave in the EtherCAT Tab Page and select Reset Node Address from
the menu to set the node address to the lowest node address that is not used by another

5-2-2 Registering Slaves Offline to Configure EtherCAT

slave.
• If a slave has a hierarchical structure, you can expand and collapse the structure. Right-click
a slave with the icon that indicates a hierarchy and select Expand All or Collapse All.
• For CPU Units with unit version 1.40 or later, you can also prepare a ring topology configura-
tion in which cables are connected in a ring shape to make a communications path redun-
dant. Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in EtherCAT Port User’s Manual (Cat. No.
W505) for details.

 Procedure to Delete Slaves from the EtherCAT Tab Page

Right-click the slave to delete and select Delete from the menu.
The slave is deleted.

 Procedure to Cut and Paste Slaves on the EtherCAT Tab Page

1 Right-click the first slave to move and select Cut from the menu.

2 Right-click the master or slave to which to connect the slaves that you cut and select Paste
from the menu.
The result is that the slaves are moved in the network.

Precautions for Correct Use

If you delete or cut a slave that is assigned to an axis, the assignment to the axis is deleted. If
necessary, assign the slave to the axis again.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-5

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Additional Information

The cut/paste operation for slaves moves the selected slave and all the slaves that are connect-
ed after it.

 Procedure to Copy and Paste Slaves on the EtherCAT Tab Page

1 Right-click the first slave to copy and select Copy from the menu.

2 Right-click the slave to connect the copied slaves to and select Paste from the menu.
A copy of the slave is pasted.

Additional Information

The copy/paste operation for slaves copies the selected slave and all the slaves that are con-
nected after it.
When you copy a slave, all settings except for the device name and node address are copied
with it. When you paste a slave, the device name and node address are automatically set to
values that are not used by other slaves.

5-2-3 Registering Slaves Online to Configure EtherCAT

 Procedure to Automatically Create the Network Configuration on the Sys-

mac Studio from the Actual EtherCAT Network Configuration

1 Go online and right-click the master in the EtherCAT Tab Page and select Write Slave Node
Address.
The Slave Node Address Writing Dialog Box is displayed.

2 If the present value for the node address for a slave is 0 or if the same address is assigned to
more than one slave, set or correct the node address in the set value column and click the
Write Button.
(If the correct node addresses are set for all of the slaves, click the Cancel Button.)

Change node address.

5-6 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The node address is written to the physical slave.

3 Cycle the power supply to the slave for which Set value of the node address is changed.
The set node address becomes valid.

4 Click the Update With Latest Actual Network Configuration Button.

The present values of each slave node address are read and Present value of node address-
es are updated.

5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup

Check that Present value and Set value of the node address for all slaves show the same
values, and close the Slave Node Address Writing Dialog Box.

5 Right-click the master in the EtherCAT Tab Page and select Compare and Merge with Actual
Network Configuration.

5-2-3 Registering Slaves Online to Configure EtherCAT

The actual network configuration is read and compared with the network configuration on the
Sysmac Studio. The results are displayed in the Compare and Merge with Actual Network
Configuration Dialog Box.

6 Click the Apply actual network configuration Button.

7 The actual network configuration is duplicated in the Sysmac Studio network configuration, and
the Comparison results Column shows that everything in the configurations agree. (The net-
work configuration on the Sysmac Studio is created based on the actual network configura-
tion.)
The network configuration on the Sysmac Studio will be the same as the actual network config-
uration.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-7

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

8 Click the Close Button.

Returns the display to the EtherCAT Tab Page.

Precautions for Correct Use

• In any of the following cases, the Compare and Merge with Actual Network Configuration
Dialog Box or the Slave Node Address Writing Dialog Box may not be displayed, but an er-
ror message or error dialog box may be displayed.
a) If there are slaves exceeding the maximum number.
b) If the wiring of communications cables between the master and slaves is not correct.
c) If there is a slave for which the node address is not set or the same address is set for
more than one slave in the actual network configuration.
According to the contents of the message, set the wiring or node address correctly and try
again. For details, refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in EtherCAT Port User’s Manual
(Cat. No. W505) or the NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Built-in EtherCAT
Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W562).
• A warning dialog box is displayed if a Node Duplicated Address Error has occurred for the
network structure on the Sysmac Studio and you click the Apply actual network
configuration Button to automatically create the network configuration on the Sysmac Stu-
dio. If you click the Apply Button, any of the following configuration and settings that were
previously set on the Sysmac Studio are discarded: network configuration, master settings,
and any slave settings (including enable settings, PDO map settings, setting parameter set-
tings, backup parameter settings, device variable assignments in the I/O map, slave assign-
ments to Axis Variables registered in the axis settings, and master settings to control slaves
that are registered in the task settings).
• Even if you click the Apply actual network configuration Button, any lower-level networks
of the EtherCAT slaves (such as for an EtherCAT Slave Terminal) will not be applied to the
lower-level network configurations on the Sysmac Studio if those configurations do not match
or cannot be compared. You must perform compare and merge operations individually for
each lower-level network.
• When the compare and merge operation is performed, the synchronization between the Sys-
mac Studio and the Controller is lost. Synchronize the Sysmac Studio and Controller before
you perform any online operations for the slaves. Refer to 7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data
to/from the Controller on page 7-120 for information on the synchronization operation.

5-2-4 Setting Master Parameters

 Setting Master Parameters

Select the master icon to view the parameter settings for the master.

5-8 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Master icon Setting master parameters

5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup

Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in EtherCAT Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W505) or NY-
series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Built-in EtherCAT Port User’s Manual (Cat. No.
W562) for a list of the master parameters.

5
5-2-5 Setting Slave Parameters

5-2-5 Setting Slave Parameters

 Setting Slave Parameters
Select a slave to view the parameter settings for that slave.

Setting slave parameters

Slave icon

You can edit the parameters for the selected slave.

Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in EtherCAT Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W505) or NY-
series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Built-in EtherCAT Port User’s Manual (Cat. No.
W562) for information on slave parameters that are not described here.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-9

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Precautions for Correct Use

Make sure that the connections between the master and slaves are correct before you perform
this operation.

 Procedure to Set Serial Numbers

You can get the serial numbers of all of the slaves connected to a master and apply them as the
serial numbers of the slaves in the settings on the Sysmac StudioSysmac Studio.

Use the following procedure.

Go online, right-click the master on the EtherCAT Tab Page, and select Get Slave Serial
Numbers.
The serial numbers of the slaves are read and used as the serial numbers in the slave parame-
ter settings.

Additional Information

A Network Configuration Verification Error occurs if the serial number on the Sysmac Studio
and the serial number of the physical slave do not agree when the Serial Number Check
Method in the master settings is set to Setting = Actual device.

 PDO Map Settings

PDO Map Settings
Objects must be mapped for communications with process data objects (PDOs) to exchange infor-
mation in realtime with a fixed period.

1 Double-click EtherCAT under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-
click EtherCAT under Configurations and Setup and select Edit from the menu.
The EtherCAT Tab Page is displayed in the Edit Pane.

2 Select the slave and then click the Edit PDO Map Settings Button in the Parameter Settings
Area on the right side of the tab page.

The PDO Map Settings Window is displayed.

3 Select the PDO mappings that contain the entries to exchange information for in the PDO Map
List Area, and then click the OK Button.

5-10 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

You can add or delete PDO entries, change the order of PDO entries, or edit PDO entries for
which Editable is displayed in the Flag Column. Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in
EtherCAT Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W505) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial
Box PC Built-in EtherCAT Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W562) for details.

5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup

5

5-2-5 Setting Slave Parameters

Additional Information

The default PDO mappings are selected for each slave. The display color is changed for any
PDO mappings that are selected other than the default mappings and any PDO mappings for
which the default PDO entries have been edited so that you can distinguish them from the de-
fault settings.

 Setting Parameter Settings

Of the parameters that are set in the slaves, the parameters that are saved in the CPU Unit are
called setting parameters.

1 Click the Edit Setting Parameters Button in the Parameter Settings Area for the slave.
The Edit Setting Parameters Dialog Box for the selected slave is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-11

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

2 Edit the parameters, and then click the OK Button.

Additional Information

The parameters that are displayed in the Edit Setting Parameters Dialog Box are saved in the
CPU Unit as part of the overall EtherCAT settings.
Default settings are defined for each slave. Items with set values that are different from the de-
fault values are displayed in a different color so that you can distinguish them.
You can click the Return to Default Button to restore all set values that have changed on the
Sysmac Studio to the default values.

Precautions for Correct Use

The settings in the CPU Unit are not restored to the default settings as soon as you click the
Return to Default Button.

 Backup Parameter Settings

Parameters that set for a slave and that are backed up in the slave are called backup parameters.

1 Click the Edit Backup Parameter Settings Button in the Parameter Settings Area for the
slave.
The Edit Backup Parameter Settings Tab Page for the selected slave is displayed.

5-12 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup

If the slave is an EtherCAT Drive, the EtherCAT Drive Tab Page is displayed. Refer to 5-4 Set-
ting EtherCAT Drives on page 5-37 for information on the slaves and EtherCAT Drive Tab
Page.
5
2 Edit the parameters, and then click the OK Button.

5-2-5 Setting Slave Parameters

Additional Information

The settings that are displayed in the Edit Backup Parameter Settings Tab Page are saved in
non-volatile memory in the slaves. Refer to the manuals for the slaves for information on when
these settings are actually applied to slave operation.
Default settings are defined for each slave. Items with set values that are different from the de-
fault values are displayed in a different color so that you can distinguish them.
You can click the Return to Default Button to restore all set values that have changed to the
default values.

Precautions for Correct Use

The settings that are saved in the slaves are not restored to the default settings as soon as you
click the Return to Default Button.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-13

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

 Assigning Slaves to Axes

If you are using 1S-series or G5-series Servo Drives as slaves, you can assign them to the motion
control axes that you added newly.

1 Right-click the master on the EtherCAT Tab Page and click Assign Drives to Axes.

The following confirmation message is displayed.

2 Click the OK Button.

The EtherCAT Drives that have been assigned to the added motion control axes are displayed.

3 Check the display content and then click the OK Button.

5-14 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-2-6 Exporting Slave Settings

1 Right-click the slave to export settings for and select Export Slave Settings from the menu.

5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup

The Save File Dialog Box is displayed.
5
2 Enter a file name, and then click the Save Button.

5-2-6 Exporting Slave Settings

An EtherCAT slave parameter file with an .ets extension is saved.

Additional Information

All settings except for the device name and node address are saved in the EtherCAT slave pa-
rameter file. (That includes the settings that are made in the EtherCAT Drive Tab Page.)

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-15

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

 Importing Slave Settings

1 Right-click the master or slave and select Import Slave Settings and Insert New Slave from
the menu.

The Open File Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the EtherCAT slave parameter file, and then click the Open Button.
The slave is added to the selected master or slave according to the settings in the parameter
file.

Precautions for Correct Use

You cannot import slave settings that are exported from a CPU Unit with unit version 1.40 or
later into Sysmac Studio version 1.28 or lower.

5-16 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-2-7 Installing and Uninstalling ESI Files

Displaying the ESI Library

Display the installed ESI Library. You can check whether the slave definition file exists and the version.

1 Select the master in the EtherCAT Tab Page, right-click, and then select Display ESI Library

5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup

from the pop-up menu.
The ESI Library Dialog Box is displayed.

5-2-7 Installing and Uninstalling ESI Files

Installing ESI Files
Install the ESI files for using the slaves.
To connect to an EtherCAT slave from another manufacturer, obtain the ESI file that conforms to the
most recent ETG ESI standards.

1 In the ESI Library Dialog Box, click the Install (File) Button or the Install (Folder) Button. To
install an individual ESI file, select Install (File), and to install all the ESI files in the folder at
one time, select Install (Folder).
The file selection dialog box or folder selection dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the ESI file or the folder in which ESI files are stored, and click the Open Button.
The ESI files are installed and the corresponding slaves are displayed in the ESI Library Dia-
log Box.

Uninstalling ESI Files

1 In the ESI Library Dialog Box, select the slave whose ESI file is to be uninstalled, and click the
Uninstall Button.
The dialog box to confirm execution is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-17

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

2 Click the Yes Button.

The ESI file is uninstalled and the corresponding slave is deleted from the ESI Library Dialog
Box.

Precautions for Correct Use

To install and uninstall ESI files, you must log onto Windows as a user with administrator rights.
If an access permission confirmation dialog box is displayed by Windows, permit access to the
folder to continue.

Additional Information

• If you save or export a project that contains any EtherCAT slaves from other manufacturers
with Sysmac Studio version 1.09 or higher, the ESI for the slaves is saved in the project file.*1
When you import this type of project, the creation dates/times on the source ESI files for the
ESI saved in the project may be different from the creation dates/times of the ESI files instal-
led on the computer. If they are different, a dialog box is displayed to ask you if you want to
update the ESI saved in the project with the information from the ESI files on the computer.

Confirm that there is no problem in overwriting the ESI saved in the project with the informa-
tion from the ESI files installed on the computer. If there is no problem, update the informa-
tion.
*1. Refer to 3-3-7 Exporting a Project File on page 3-20 for the export procedure.
• To apply any changes in an ESI file to the Controller, you must update the Configurations and
Setup transfer data and then transfer it to the Controller. To update the transfer data, either
edit the Configurations and Setup or use the Update Configurations and Setup Transfer Data
menu command. You select Update Configurations and Setup Transfer Data from the
Tools Menu. Refer to 8-21 Updating the Configurations and Setup Transfer Data on page
8-121 for details.

5-2-8 Transferring the Network Configuration Information

Use the synchronize operation to transfer the network configuration information.
Refer to Synchronizing (Uploading/Downloading after Automatic Verification) on page 7-120 for more
information on synchronizing.

1 Go online and select Synchronization from the Controller Menu.

5-18 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The Synchronization Window is displayed.

2 Click the Transfer To Controller Button.

5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup

5

5-2-9 Exporting EtherCAT Network Configuration Information

The network configuration information is downloaded from the Sysmac Studio to the Controller.

5-2-9 Exporting EtherCAT Network Configuration Information

You can output the EtherCAT configurations to CSV files. You can use them to confirm that the Ether-
CAT configurations were created correctly.

 Procedure for Exporting Configuration Information

1 Right-click the master in the EtherCAT Tab Page and select Export Configuration
Information.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-19

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The Browse For Folder Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the folder in which to save the CSV files of configuration information and click the OK
Button.

CSV files (comma delimited) that contain the EtherCAT network configuration information and
the EtherCAT Slave Terminal configuration information are saved in the selected folder.
Refer to 5-3-3 Exporting the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration Information on page 5-35
for detailed information on the CSV file that contains the EtherCAT Slave Terminal configura-
tion information.

 Interpreting the Configuration Information File Contents

This section describes how to interpret the CSV file that contains the EtherCAT network configura-
tion information (EtherCAT.csv).
As an example, the contents of the CSV file that contains the following EtherCAT configuration is
shown when opened with Excel or other spreadsheet software.

5-20 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

EtherCAT Configuration

5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup

5

5-2-9 Exporting EtherCAT Network Configuration Information

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-21

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

CSV File

The slave information on the EtherCAT Tab Page and the positions of the slaves in the EtherCAT
configuration (paths and “connected from” slaves) are displayed. The items are described in the fol-
lowing table.

Item Description Remarks

Device Displays information on the slaves.
Node address Displays the node address of the slave.
Device name Displays the device name of the slave.
Model name Displays the model number of the slave.
Revision Displays the revision of the slave.
Input PDO commu- Displays the total input data size of the PDO map-
nications data size ping settings of the slave.
[bits]
Output PDO com- Displays the total output data size of the PDO map-
munications data ping settings of the slave.
size [bits]
Path on tool Displays the Junction Slaves through which the
slaves are connected to the master on the EtherCAT
Tab Page.
Path The Junction Slaves through which the slaves are If a slave is connected
connected are displayed as follows: through more than one Junc-
/Node_address Junction_Slave_Model (De- tion Slave, they are dis-
vice_name) played in order from the most
If there is no Junction Slave in the path, “/” is dis- upstream Junction Slave.
played.
Connect from Displays the slave to which a slave is connected on
the EtherCAT Tab Page.
Node address Displays the node address of the slave to which the If the slave is connected to
slave is connected. the master, “Master” is dis-
played.
Device name Displays the device name of the slave to which the
slave is connected.
Model name Displays the model number of the slave to which the
slave is connected.
Revision Displays the revision of the slave to which the slave
is connected.
Port name Displays the port name of the slave to which the The port name on the slave
slave is connected. to which the slave is con-
nected is displayed.

5-22 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-2-10 Printing an EtherCAT Configuration

You can print the EtherCAT configuration, master settings, and slave settings.
To do so, select the EtherCAT Network Configuration and Unit Operation Settings Check Box in
the tab page to select the items to print. Refer to 8-5 Printing on page 8-25 for the printing procedure.

If the EtherCAT configuration does not fit on one page, it will be printed on multiple pages as shown
below.

5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup

Page 1 Page 2

Page 3 Page 4

5-2-10 Printing an EtherCAT Configuration

5-2-11 Starting Vision Sensor or Displacement Sensor Setup
You can display the tab page to set up a Vision Sensor or Displacement Sensor that is registered as a
slave in the EtherCAT configuration.

Precautions for Correct Use

FQ-M-series Vision Sensors are not supported by the Sysmac Studio (64 bit).

Here, the procedure to set up a Vision Sensor is described as an example.

1 Right-click the Vision Sensor and select Edit from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-23

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The General Settings view is displayed.

Additional Information

Refer to the FQ-M-series Specialized Vision Sensor for Positioning User’s Manual (Cat. No.
Z314) for the setup procedures for a FQ-M-series Vision Sensor.
Refer to the Vision System FH/FHV Series Operation Manual for Sysmac Studio (Cat. No.
Z343) for the setting procedures for FH-series Vision Sensors.
Refer to the ZW-series Confocal Fiber Type Displacement Sensor User’s Manual (Cat. No.
Z332) for the setup procedure for a Displacement Sensor.

5-24 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-3 EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configura-

tion and Setup

5-3 EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration and Setup

• EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration and Setup
The configuration of any Slave Terminal that is connected to an EtherCAT network is created on the
Sysmac Studio. The NX Units that compose the Slave Terminal are set in the configuration.
A configuration in which an EtherCAT Coupler Unit, NX Units, and End Cover are connected is
called an EtherCAT Slave Terminal. The Sysmac Studio is used to build the EtherCAT Slave Termi-
nal just like you would assemble actual Units.
The EtherCAT Slave Terminal configuration is created by registering an EtherCAT Coupler Unit in
the EtherCAT network configuration and then opening the Slave Terminal Tab Page from the regis-
tered EtherCAT Coupler Unit (a Communications Coupler Unit).

WARNING
If you set inappropriate parameters when you change the levels of NX Unit events,
unexpected machine operation may result. Confirm that the machine will not be ad-
versely affected before you transfer the data.
5
Precautions for Safe Use

• If any inappropriate parameters are set when you transfer the following settings, unexpected
machine operation may result. Confirm that the machine will not be adversely affected before
you transfer the data. Also, confirm that the Unit configuration, I/O allocations, and Unit oper-
ation settings are correctly set in the Slave Terminal before you start actual operation.
a) Communications Coupler Unit and NX Unit settings
b) Node address and Unit number settings for the Communications Coupler Unit and NX
Units
c) PDO map settings for the Communications Coupler Unit and NX Units
• If inappropriate Unit configuration information is transferred to the Slave Terminal, unexpect-
ed machine operation may result. Even if appropriate Unit configuration information is set,
confirm that the controlled system will not be adversely affected before you transfer the data.
• If you execute communications instructions for NX Units with inappropriate path information,
unexpected machine operation may result. Confirm that the path information is correct before
you start actual operation.
• After you import Communications Coupler Unit and NX Unit settings, confirm that the Unit
configuration, I/O allocations, and Unit operation settings are correctly set in the Slave Termi-
nal before you start actual operation.

Refer to the NX-series EtherCAT Coupler Units User’s Manual (Cat. No. W519) for details on Ether-
CAT Slave Terminals.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-25

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-3-1 Creating the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration

Opening the Slave Terminal Tab Page to Edit the EtherCAT Slave
Terminal Configuration

1 Double-click the EtherCAT Coupler Unit under EtherCAT in the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-
click the EtherCAT Coupler Unit and select Edit from the menu.
The Slave Terminal Tab Page is displayed in the Edit Pane.

Additional Information

You can open the Slave Terminal Tab Page from the EtherCAT Tab Page in the Edit Pane with
either of the following procedures.
• Right-click the EtherCAT Coupler Unit and select Edit Slave Terminal Configuration from
the popup menu.
• Click the Edit Slave Terminal Configuration Button in the network setting item list.

Registering NX Units Offline (Building the Slave Terminal Configu-

ration)

 Registering NX Units in a Slave Terminal

1 Drag an NX Unit from the Toolbox to the Slave Terminal Tab Page.
The NX Unit is added.

 Deleting Registered NX Units

1 Right-click the Unit to delete and select Delete from the menu.
The Unit is deleted.

5-26 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

 Deleting all NX Units

1 Right-click at any location where there are no Units and select Clear All from the menu.
All of the registered Units are deleted.

5-3 EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration and Setup

 Moving NX Units

1 Right-click the Unit to move and select Cut from the menu.

2 Right-click at the location where you want to insert the Unit and select Paste from the menu.
The result is that the Unit is moved.

Precautions for Correct Use

If you delete an NX Unit that is assigned to an axis, the assignment to the axis is deleted. Also,
if you move an NX Unit, the assignment to the axis may be deleted. If necessary, assign the NX
Unit to the axis again.

Additional Information

You can also move the Unit by dragging it to the location where you want to insert it. 5

 Copying and Pasting NX Units

5-3-1 Creating the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration

1 Right-click the Unit to copy and select Copy from the menu.

2 Right-click at the location where you want to insert the Unit and select Paste from the menu.
The copied Unit is inserted.

Additional Information

When you copy and paste a Unit, all settings except for the device name and Unit number are
copied with it. A unique device name and Unit number are set automatically.

 Switching NX Unit Displays

Use the following procedure to change between displaying Unit appearances and displaying model
numbers and unit names.

1 Right-click in the Slave Terminal Tab Page and select Show Model/Unit Name from the menu.
The model numbers and Unit names are displayed in boxes.
To return to appearance displays, select Show Model/Unit Name from the menu again to re-
move the checkmark.

 Displaying the Slave Terminal Width

1 Click the Button to the right of the Slave Terminal.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-27

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The width of the Slave Terminal is displayed.

EtherCAT Coupler Unit and NX Unit Settings

This section describes the EtherCAT Coupler Unit and NX Unit settings that you can make on the
Slave Terminal Tab Page.
The settings apply to both the EtherCAT Coupler Unit and the NX Units unless NX Unit is specified.
Use the following procedure to set the Unit parameters in a Unit setting item list.

1 Select a Unit on the Slave Terminal Tab Page. The Unit setting item list is displayed.
Use this list to allocate I/O and make the operation settings for the Unit.

 I/O Allocation Settings

1 Click the Edit I/O Allocation Settings Button in the Unit setting item list.
The I/O allocations are displayed so that you can edit them.

5-28 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-3 EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration and Setup

 NX Units Mounting Setting
If you disable an NX Unit that is scheduled to be added in the future, you can continue to perform
Unit settings and debugging for other Units even if the disabled NX Unit does not actually exist in
the Slave Terminal.

1 Select Disabled for the NX Unit mounting setting parameter in the Unit setting item list.
An icon is displayed to show that the Unit is disabled. 5

5-3-1 Creating the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration

Change the setting to Enabled in the Unit setting item list to enable the Unit again.

Additional Information

Regardless of whether the NX Unit mounting setting parameter is set to Enabled or Disabled,
the I/O allocation settings for the NX Unit are applied to the I/O data.
Operation changes as follows if the parameter is set to Disabled:
• If the NX Unit is not mounted, a Unit Configuration Verification Error does not occur, an NX
Unit number is assigned, and the input value is locked at 0.
• If the NX Unit is mounted, a Unit Configuration Verification Error will occur.

 Unit Operation Settings

1 Double-click a Unit. Or, right-click the Unit and select Edit Unit Operation Settings from the
menu.
The Edit Unit Operation Settings Tab Page is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-29

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Additional Information

The specific parameters depend on the Unit. Refer to the user’s manual for the specific Unit for
details.

 Exporting NX Unit Settings

Use the following procedure to save the NX Unit settings in a file with an NSF file name extension.

1 Right-click an NX Unit on the Slave Terminal Tab Page and select Export NX Unit Settings.
A Save File Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Enter the file name, and then click the OK Button.

The file is saved.

 Importing NX Unit Settings to Insert a New Unit

Use the following procedure to import the settings from an NX Unit settings file with an NSF file
name extension and use the settings to add a new NX Unit to the Slave Terminal.

1 Right-click a Unit on the Slave Terminal Tab Page and select Import NX Unit Settings and
Insert New Unit.
A Select File Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the file and then click the OK Button.

An NX Unit is added to the Slave Terminal based on the settings in the file.

 Exporting All NX Unit Settings

Use the following procedure to save all the NX Unit settings in a file with an NSPF file name exten-
sion.

1 Right-click an EtherCAT Coupler Unit on the Slave Terminal Tab Page and select Export All
NX Unit Settings.
A Save File Dialog Box is displayed.

5-30 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

2 Enter the file name, and then click the OK Button.

The file is saved.

 Importing All NX Unit Settings

5-3 EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration and Setup

Use the following procedure to import all the NX Unit settings from a file with an NSPF file name
extension and add newly all the NX Units included in the file.
You can import all NX Unit settings only when there is no NX Unit registered in the EtherCAT Cou-
pler Unit.

1 Right-click an EtherCAT Coupler Unit on the Slave Terminal Tab Page and select Import All
NX Unit Settings.
A Select File Dialog Box is displayed. An error message is displayed if there is any registered
NX Unit. In this case, delete all the registered NX Units and select Import All NX Unit
Settings again.

2 Select the file and then click the OK Button.

All the NX Units included in the file are added to the Slave Terminal.

Changing the Model of an EtherCAT Coupler Unit or NX Unit 5

Use the following procedures to change the model or unit version of an EtherCAT Coupler Unit or NX

5-3-1 Creating the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration

Unit that is already registered.

 EtherCAT Coupler Unit

Use the EtherCAT Tab Page to change the model of an EtherCAT Coupler Unit.

1 Right-click the EtherCAT Coupler Unit on the EtherCAT Tab Page and select Change Model
from the menu.
The Units that you can change to are displayed in the Change Model Dialog Box.

2 Select the Unit to change to and then click the OK Button.

The Unit is changed to the selected model and unit version.

Precautions for Safe Use

Check the user program, data, and parameter settings for proper execution before you use
them for actual operation.

Precautions for Correct Use

• If the unit version that you changed to is old and mounting an NX Unit registered in the Slave
Terminal is not supported by the Sysmac Studio, an unsupported Unit error occurs for the NX
Unit. Confirm that the model of the EtherCAT Coupler Unit after the change supports the NX
Units on the Slave Terminal before you change the model.
• Any settings in the EtherCAT Coupler Unit before the change that are not supported by the
EtherCAT Coupler Unit after the change will be lost when you change the model.
• If the performance of the EtherCAT Coupler Unit is different after changing the model, the tim-
ing of I/O may change.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-31

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

 Changing NX Unit Models

1 Right-click the Unit for which to change the model in the Slave Terminal Tab Page and select
Change Model from the menu.
The Units that you can change to are displayed in the Change Model Dialog Box.

2 Select the Unit to change to and then click the OK Button.

The Unit is changed to the selected model and unit version.

Precautions for Safe Use

Check the user program, data, and parameter settings for proper execution before you use
them for actual operation.

Precautions for Correct Use

• If you change the model of an NX Unit that is assigned to an axis, the assignment to the axis
is deleted. If necessary, assign the NX Unit to the axis again.
• Any settings in the NX Unit before the change that are not supported by the NX Unit after the
change will be lost when you change the model.
• If the performance of the NX Unit is different after changing the model, the timing of I/O may
change.

Registering NX Units Online (Building the Slave Terminal Configu-

ration)
Use the following procedure to automatically create the configuration on the Sysmac Studio from the
actual configuration of the Slave Terminal.

1 Go online, right-click in the Slave Terminal Tab Page and select Compare and Merge with
Actual Unit Configuration.
The actual Unit configuration is read and compared with the Unit configuration on the Sysmac
Studio. The results are displayed in the Compare and Merge with Actual Unit Configuration
Dialog Box.

5-32 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-3 EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration and Setup

2 Click the Apply actual Unit configuration Button to synchronize with the actual Unit configu- 5
ration with the Unit configuration on the Sysmac Studio.

5-3-1 Creating the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration

Click the OK Button.
The Slave Terminal Tab Page is displayed again.

Precautions for Safe Use

Check the user program, data, and parameter settings for proper execution before you use
them for actual operation.

Precautions for Correct Use

• If you automatically create the Slave Terminal configuration on the Sysmac StudioSysmac
Studio by clicking the Apply actual Unit configuration Button, any previously set Slave Ter-
minal configuration, Communications Coupler Unit settings, and NX Unit settings are discard-
ed.
To merge the Slave Terminal information without losing the current settings in the Sysmac
Studio, do not use the Apply actual Unit configuration Button, and use the compare and
merge operation to create the configuration. Refer to 7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/
from the Controller on page 7-120 for information on the compare and merge operation.
• When the compare and merge operation is performed for the actual Unit configuration, the
synchronization between the Sysmac Studio and the Controller is lost. Synchronize the Sys-
mac Studio and Controller before you perform any online operations for the Slave Terminal.
Refer to 7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the Controller on page 7-120 for informa-
tion on synchronization.
• If an NX Unit that is assigned to an axis is deleted as the result of a compare and merge op-
eration with the actual Unit configuration, the assignment to the axis is also deleted. If neces-
sary, assign the NX Unit to the axis again.

 Reading Serial Numbers

The serial numbers can be read from the Units in the actual Unit configuration and applied to the
Slave Terminal configuration on the Sysmac Studio.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-33

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

1 Go online, right-click in the Slave Terminal Tab Page, and select Get Serial Numbers of All
NX Units.
A dialog box is displayed to confirm reading the serial numbers.

2 Click the Get Button.

The serial numbers are read from the Units in the actual Unit configuration and applied to the
Units in the Slave Terminal on the Sysmac Studio.

Additional Information

If the NX Unit mounting setting parameter is set to Disabled, the serial number of the NX Unit is
cleared to 0.

5-3-2 Transferring the Slave Terminal Configuration Information

Use the synchronize operation to transfer the Slave Terminal configuration information.
Refer to Synchronizing (Uploading/Downloading after Automatic Verification) on page 7-120 for details
on the synchronization operation.

1 Go online and select Synchronization from the Controller Menu.

The Synchronization Window is displayed.

2 Select the EtherCAT Coupler Unit Check Box under EtherCAT Slave Settings in the Synchro-
nization Window, and then click the Transfer To Controller Button.

5-34 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The Slave Terminal configuration information is downloaded from the Sysmac Studio to the
Controller.

5-3-3 Exporting the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration Informa-

5-3 EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration and Setup

tion
You can output the Slave Terminal configuration to a CSV file. You can use it to confirm that the Slave
Terminal configuration was created correctly.

 Procedure for Exporting Configuration Information

The Slave Terminal configuration information is exported from the EtherCAT Tab Page. Refer to
5-2-9 Exporting EtherCAT Network Configuration Information on page 5-19 for the procedure.
The Slave Terminal configuration information for all of the EtherCAT Coupler Units on the EtherCAT
Tab Page is saved in the same CSV file.

 Interpreting the Configuration Information File Contents

This section describes how to interpret the CSV file that contains the Slave Terminal configuration
information (EtherCAT_NXBus.csv).
As an example, the contents of the CSV file that contains the following Slave Terminal configuration
is shown when opened with Excel or other spreadsheet software. 5
Slave Terminal Configuration

5-3-3 Exporting the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration Information

CSV File

The EtherCAT Coupler Unit information and NX Unit information in the Slave Terminal configuration
are displayed.
The items are described in the following table.

Item Description
Upper device Displays the EtherCAT Coupler Unit information on the EtherCAT Tab Page.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-35

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Item Description
Node address Displays the node address of the EtherCAT Coupler Unit.
Device name Displays the device name of the EtherCAT Coupler Unit.
Device Displays information on the NX Units in the Slave Terminal configuration.
NX Unit number Displays the unit number of the NX Unit.
Device name Displays the device name of the NX Unit.
Model name Displays the model number of the NX Unit.
Unit version Displays the unit version of the NX Unit.
Input allocated data size Displays the total input data size in the I/O allocation settings of the NX Unit.
[bits]
Output allocated data Displays the total output data size in the I/O allocation settings of the NX Unit.
size [bits]

5-36 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-4 Setting EtherCAT Drives

 Setting EtherCAT Drives
You can set and monitor OMRON Drives (including Servo Drives/Servomotors and Inverters). Se-
lect the Servo Drive or Inverter from the EtherCAT Tab Page to set or monitor it.
The description below is related to the setup methods of MX2/RX/RX2-series Inverters. Refer to
the Sysmac Studio Drive Functions Operation Manual (Cat. No. I589) for the setup methods and
precautions for the Servo Drive.

Additional Information

5-4 Setting EtherCAT Drives

The backup parameters of EtherCAT slaves are not subject to synchronization and are not
downloaded to the slaves for the default settings. To transfer the backup parameters, clear the
selection of the Do not transfer Special Unit parameters and backup parameters of
EtherCAT slaves (out of synchronization scope) Check Box in the Synchronization Window
before you click the Transfer To Controller Button.

5-4-1 Applicable EtherCAT Drives

You can set and monitor the following Drives. 5
Drive series EtherCAT display Slave models

5-4-1 Applicable EtherCAT Drives

1S Series R88D-1SN£-ECT R88D-1SN£-ECT
G5 Series R88D-KN£-ECT(-L) R88D-KN£-ECT(-L) (version 1.0 or later)
MX2 Series 3G3AX-MX2-ECT 3G3MX2-£ (version 1.1 or later)
3G3MX2-£-V1 (version 1.0 or later)
RX Series 3G3AX-RX-ECT 3G3RX-£-V1 (version 1.0 or later)
RX2 Series 3G3AX-RX2-ECT 3G3RX2-£ (version 1.0 or later)

5-4-2 Overview of the Structure of the EtherCAT Drive Tab Page

Register the EtherCAT Drive in the EtherCAT Tab Page and then right-click the Drive in the Multiview
Explorer to set or monitor the Drive.
Also, the online/offline status of the Drive is displayed in the Multiview Explorer.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-37

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Display in the Multiview Explorer

Function Display Area (Configuration Area)

5-4-3 Setting EtherCAT Drives

Setting the Model

Set the Drive model and software number.

1 Double-click the Drive under Configurations and Setup - EtherCAT in the Multiview Explorer
or right-click the Drive and select Edit from the menu.

The Drive Settings Tab Page is displayed.

2 Click the General Button ( ) in the Drive Settings Tab Page.

5-38 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The General view appears in the Edit Pane.

3 Set the model and software number.

5-4 Setting EtherCAT Drives

Additional Information

You can also display the Drive Settings Tab Page if you right-click the slave (3G3AX-MX2-ECT/
3G3AX-RX-ECT/3G3AX-RX2-ECT) in the topology display and select Drive Settings from the
menu.

5-4-3 Setting EtherCAT Drives

Setting the Parameters
Use the following procedure to set the Drive parameters.

1 Right-click the Drive under Configurations and Setup - EtherCAT in the Multiview Explorer
and select Parameters from the menu.

The Parameters Tab Page is displayed in the Edit Pane.

2 Set the axis parameters.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-39

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Toolbar in the Parameters tab page

You can perform the following operations with the buttons in the toolbar.

Button Function
Returns the selected parameter to the default setting.

Returns all parameters to the default settings.

Downloads all parameters to the Drive.

Uploads all parameters from the Drive.

Compares the parameters between the project and the Drive.

Downloads the selected parameters to the Drive.

Uploads the selected parameters from the Drive.

Prints the parameters.

Sets options for setting the parameters.

Going Online with a Drive

Use the following procedure to go online with a Drive.
You can use this procedure only when the Sysmac Studio is online.

1 Right-click the Drive under Configurations and Setup - EtherCAT in the Multiview Explorer
and select Online from the menu.

5-40 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

An online connection is made with the Drive.

Downloading the Parameters to the Drive

Use the following procedure to download the parameters to the Drive.

5-4 Setting EtherCAT Drives

You can use this procedure only when the Sysmac Studio and Drive are online.

1 Click the icon in the Toolbar on the Parameters Tab Page.

5-4-3 Setting EtherCAT Drives

All parameters are downloaded to the Drive.

Additional Information

If you download the parameters to the Inverter in operation, the parameters will not be stored in
the non-volatile memory. Note that no error will be displayed in this case. To store the parame-
ters in the non-volatile memory, confirm that the Inverter is not in operation before you execute
the download.

Comparing Drive Parameters

Use the following procedure to compare the parameters between the project and the Drive.

1 Click the Button on the Parameters Tab Page.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-41

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The display of the drive values on the Parameters Tab Page are refreshed and the Comparison
Results Dialog Box is displayed.
If there are no differences, click the OK Button. The Comparison Results Dialog Box is closed.

2 If parameters with differences are displayed, click the Yes Button in the Comparison Results
Dialog Box.
The Comparison Results Dialog Box closes and only the parameters with differences are dis-
played.

In this status, you can transfer just the parameters with differences to the Drive or transfer
them from the Drive.

If you click the No Button in the Comparison Results Dialog Box, all parameters are displayed
and you can compare them again.

3 If only parameters with differences are displayed, click the Compare Button again.
The Parameters Tab Page returns to the status in which you can compare the parameters
again.

Option Settings
Use the following procedure to set the operation options for transferring parameters.

1 Click the Option Button ( ) on the Parameters Tab Page.

An Option Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Change the settings and click the OK Button.

The settings are applied.

The option settings are listed in the following table.

Setting Set value Description

Transfer Automatically transfer to drive updated pa- Parameters that are changed online are immedi-
rameters ately transferred to the drive.

5-42 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Setting Set value Description

Confirma- Confirm transfer operation A confirmation dialog box is displayed when the
tion button is clicked to transfer parameters.

5-4-4 Monitoring EtherCAT Drives

Displaying Drive Errors

You can display a list of errors that occurred in the Drive.
The errors are displayed only when the Sysmac Studio and Servo Drive are online.

5-4 Setting EtherCAT Drives

1 Right-click the Drive under Configurations and Setup - EtherCAT in the Multiview Explorer
and select Alarms from the menu.

5-4-4 Monitoring EtherCAT Drives

The Alarms Tab Page is displayed in the Edit Pane.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-43

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-5 CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration

and Setup
In the Sysmac Studio, you can construct a CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration just like you would
put together with the actual physical Units.
Select Configurations and Setup − CPU/Expansion Racks in the Multiview Explorer to open the Ed-
it Pane to create CPU/Expansion Racks Configuration. You can build a Rack by dragging Units from
the device list displayed in the Toolbox Pane to the locations where you want to mount them.
The Units that can be mounted in the CPU/Expansion Racks depend on the CPU Unit. The following
describes the configurations and setup of the CPU/Expansion Racks for the CPU Units listed below.
• NX102 or NX1P2 CPU Units
• NJ-series CPU Units

WARNING
• Check the parameters for proper execution before you use them for actual opera-
tion.
• If inappropriate parameters are set as a result of changing the event level of an NX
Unit error, unexpected system operation may result. Confirm that the system will not
be adversely affected before you transfer the parameters.

Precautions for Safe Use

• Always confirm safety before you reset components.

• Before you restart the EtherNet/IP Unit, make sure that doing so will not adversely affect the
controlled system.

Additional Information

• For the NX701 CPU Unit and NY-series Industrial PCs, the CPU/Expansion Racks Tab Page
is not displayed because there is no Unit that can be mounted on them.
• For NX-series CPU Units and NY-series Industrial PCs, you can display their production infor-
mation from the Multiview Explorer. Go online with the Controller, right-click CPU Rack under
CPU/Expansion Racks and select Display Production Information.

5-5-1 CPU/Expansion Racks for the NX102 CPU Unit or NX1P2 CPU
Unit
The procedures to operate the CPU/Expansion Racks for the NX102 or NX1P2 CPU Unit are given
below.
You can mount NX Units*1 on an NX102 or NX1P2 CPU Unit.
*1. There are NX Units that cannot be used with NX102 or NX1P2 CPU Units. For details, refer to the NJ/NX-
series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501).

Hereafter NX1P2 CPU Units are used for explanation as an example.

Opening the CPU and Expansion Racks Tab Page

5-44 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

1 Double-click CPU Rack under Configurations and Setup - CPU/Expansion Racks in the
Multiview Explorer. Or, right-click CPU Rack and select Edit from the menu.
The CPU and Expansion Racks Tab Page is displayed in the Edit Pane.

5-5 CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration and Setup

Registering NX Units Offline (Building the CPU Rack Configuration)

 Registering the NX Units

1 Drag an NX Unit from the Toolbox to the location where you want to add it in the CPU and 5
Expansion Racks Tab Page. Or, double-click an NX Unit.
The NX Unit is added.

5-5-1 CPU/Expansion Racks for the NX102 CPU Unit or NX1P2 CPU Unit

 Deleting Registered NX Units

1 Right-click the Unit to delete and select Delete from the menu.
The Unit is deleted.

 Deleting all NX Units

1 Right-click any location where there are no Units and select Clear All from the menu.
All of the registered Units are deleted.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-45

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

 Moving NX Units

1 Right-click the Unit to move and select Cut from the menu.

2 Right-click the location where you want to insert the Unit and select Paste from the menu.
The Unit is moved.

Precautions for Correct Use

If you delete an NX Unit that is assigned to an axis, the assignment to the axis is deleted. Also,
if you move an NX Unit, the assignment to the axis may be deleted. If necessary, assign the NX
Unit to the axis again.

Additional Information

You can also move the Unit by dragging it to the location where you want to insert it.

 Copying and Pasting NX Units

1 Right-click the Unit to copy and select Copy from the menu.

2 Right-click the location where you want to insert the Unit and select Paste from the menu.
The copied Unit is inserted.

Additional Information

When you copy a Unit, all settings except for the device name and unit number are copied with
it. The device name and unit number are automatically set to values that are not used by other
Units.

Changing How NX Units Are Displayed

You can change how Units are displayed between the appearance diagram view and the model/Unit
name view.

1 Right-click in the CPU and Expansion Racks Tab Page and select Show Model/Unit Name
from the menu.
The model numbers and device names are displayed in boxes.
To restore the previous view, select Show Model/Unit Name again to clear the selection.

Displaying the Width of the CPU Rack Configuration

1 Click the Button at the right end of the CPU Rack configuration.

5-46 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-5 CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration and Setup

The width of the CPU Rack configuration is displayed.

5
Setting NX Units

5-5-1 CPU/Expansion Racks for the NX102 CPU Unit or NX1P2 CPU Unit
The following describes the NX Unit setting items that you can configure in the CPU and Expansion
Racks Tab Page.

Set the Unit parameters in the Unit setting item list.

1 Select the Unit to configure in the CPU and Expansion Racks Tab Page. The Unit setting item
list is displayed.
Configure the I/O allocation and Unit operation settings.

 I/O Allocation Settings

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-47

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

1 Click the Edit I/O Allocation Settings Button in the Unit setting item list.
The I/O allocations are displayed so that you can edit them.

 NX Unit Mounting Setting

If you disable an NX Unit that is scheduled to be added in the future, you can continue to perform
Unit settings and debugging for other Units even if the disabled NX Unit does not actually exist in
the CPU Rack.

1 Select Disabled for the NX Unit mounting setting parameter in the Unit setting item list.
An icon is displayed to show that the Unit is disabled.

Change the setting to Enabled in the Unit setting item list to enable the Unit again.

Additional Information

Regardless of whether the NX Unit mounting setting parameter is set to Enabled or Disabled,
the I/O allocation settings for the NX Unit are applied to the I/O data of the CPU Unit.
Operation changes as follows if the parameter is set to Disabled:
• If the NX Unit is not mounted, a Unit Configuration Verification Error does not occur, an NX
Unit number is assigned, and the input value is locked at 0.
• If the NX Unit is mounted, a Unit Configuration Verification Error will occur.

 NX Unit Operation Settings

1 Double-click a Unit. Or, right-click the Unit and select Edit Unit Operation Settings from the
menu.

5-48 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The Edit Unit Operation Settings Tab Page is displayed.

5-5 CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration and Setup

Additional Information

The specific parameters depend on the Unit. Refer to the user’s manual for the specific Unit for
details. 5

 Exporting NX Unit Settings

5-5-1 CPU/Expansion Racks for the NX102 CPU Unit or NX1P2 CPU Unit
Use the following procedure to save the NX Unit settings in a file with an NSF file name extension.

1 Right-click an NX Unit in the CPU and Expansion Racks Tab Page and select Export NX Unit
Settings.
A Save File Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Enter the file name, and then click the OK Button.

The file is saved.

 Importing NX Unit Settings to Insert a New Unit

Use the following procedure to import the settings from an NX Unit settings file with an NSF file
name extension and use the settings to add a new NX Unit to the CPU Rack.

1 Right-click a Unit in the CPU and Expansion Racks Tab Page and select Import NX Unit
Settings and Insert New Unit.
A Select File Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the file and then click the OK Button.

An NX Unit is added to the CPU Rack based on the settings in the file.

 Exporting All NX Unit Settings

Use the following procedure to save all the NX Unit settings in a file with an NSPF file name exten-
sion.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-49

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

1 Right-click the CPU Unit in the CPU and Expansion Racks Tab Page and select Export All NX
Unit Settings.
A Save File Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Enter the file name, and then click the OK Button.

The file is saved.

 Importing All NX Unit Settings

Use the following procedure to import all the NX Unit settings from a file with an NSPF file name
extension and add newly all the NX Units included in the file.
You can import all NX Unit settings only when there is no NX Unit registered in the CPU Unit.

1 Right-click the CPU Unit in the CPU and Expansion Racks Tab Page and select Import All NX
Unit Settings.
A Select File Dialog Box is displayed. An error message is displayed if there is any NX Unit. In
this case, delete all the registered NX Units and select Import All NX Unit Settings again.

2 Select the file and then click the OK Button.

All the NX Units included in the file are added to the CPU Unit.

Changing the NX Unit Model

Use the following procedure to change the model or unit version of an NX Unit that is already regis-
tered.

1 Right-click the Unit for which to change the model in the CPU and Expansion Racks Tab Page
and select Change Model from the menu.
The Units that you can change to are displayed in the Change Model Dialog Box.

2 Select the Unit to change to and then click the OK Button.

The Unit is changed to the selected model and unit version.

Precautions for Safe Use

Check the user program, data, and parameter settings for proper execution before you use
them for actual operation.

Precautions for Correct Use

• If you change the model of an NX Unit that is assigned to an axis, the assignment to the axis
is deleted. If necessary, assign the NX Unit to the axis again.
• Any settings in the NX Unit before the change that are not supported by the NX Unit after the
change will be lost when you change the model.
• If the performance of the NX Unit is different after changing the model, the timing of I/O may
change.

5-50 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Registering NX Units Online (Building the CPU Rack Configuration)

Use the following procedure to automatically create the configuration in the Sysmac Studio from the
actual CPU Rack configuration.

5-5 CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration and Setup

1 Go online, right-click in the CPU and Expansion Racks Tab Page, and select Compare and
Merge with Actual Unit Configuration.
The actual Unit configuration is read and compared with the Unit configuration in the Sysmac
Studio. The results are displayed in the Compare and Merge with Actual Unit Configuration
Dialog Box.

5-5-1 CPU/Expansion Racks for the NX102 CPU Unit or NX1P2 CPU Unit
2 Click the Apply actual Unit configuration Button to synchronize the Unit configuration in the
Sysmac Studio with the actual Unit configuration.

3 Click the OK Button.

The CPU and Expansion Racks Tab Page is displayed again.

Precautions for Safe Use

Check the user program, data, and parameter settings for proper execution before you use
them for actual operation.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-51

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Precautions for Correct Use

• If you automatically create the CPU Rack configuration in the Sysmac StudioSysmac Studio
by clicking the Apply actual Unit configuration Button, any previously set CPU Rack config-
uration and NX Unit settings are discarded.
To merge the CPU Rack information without losing the current settings in the Sysmac Studio,
do not use the Apply actual Unit configuration Button, and use the compare and merge op-
eration to create the configuration. Refer to 7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the
Controller on page 7-120 for information on the operation to compare and merge with the ac-
tual network configuration in the Sysmac Studio.
• When the compare and merge operation is performed for the actual Unit configuration, the
synchronization between the Sysmac Studio and the Controller is lost. Synchronize the Sys-
mac Studio and Controller before you perform any online operations for the CPU Rack. Refer
to 7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the Controller on page 7-120 for information on
synchronization.
• If an NX Unit that is assigned to an axis is deleted as the result of a compare and merge op-
eration with the actual Unit configuration, the assignment to the axis is also deleted. If neces-
sary, assign the NX Unit to the axis again.

 Reading Serial Numbers

The serial numbers can be read from the Units in the actual Unit configuration and applied to the
CPU configuration in the Sysmac Studio.

1 Go online, right-click in the CPU and Expansion Racks Tab Page, and select Get Serial
Numbers of All NX Units.
The Get Serial Numbers of All NX Units Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Click the Get Button.

The serial numbers are read from the Units in the actual Unit configuration and applied to the
Units in the CPU Rack on the Sysmac Studio.

Additional Information

If the NX Unit mounting setting parameter is set to Disabled, the serial number of the NX Unit is
cleared to 0.

Transferring the CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration Information

Use the synchronize operation to transfer the CPU/Expansion Rack configuration information.
Refer to Synchronizing (Uploading/Downloading after Automatic Verification) on page 7-120 for details
on synchronization.

1 Go online and select Synchronization from the Controller Menu.

The Synchronization Window is displayed.

5-52 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

2 Select the CPU/Expansion Racks Check Box in the Synchronization Window and then click
the Transfer To Controller Button.

5-5 CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration and Setup

The CPU Rack configuration information is downloaded from the Sysmac Studio to the Control-
ler.
5
5-5-2 CPU Rack and Expansion Racks for NJ-series CPU Units

5-5-2 CPU Rack and Expansion Racks for NJ-series CPU Units
The procedures to operate the CPU Rack and Expansion Racks for NJ-series CPU Units are given
below.
You can mount CJ-series Units on an NJ-series CPU Unit.

Opening and Using the Unit Editor

1 Double-click CPU/Expansion Racks under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Ex-
plorer. Or, right-click CPU/Expansion Racks under Configurations and Setup and select
Edit from the menu.
The Unit Editor is displayed in the Edit Pane.

Unit Informa- Displays device information for the selected Unit, such as the device name, model
tion number, rack number, slot number, unit number, number of unit numbers assigned,
response time, and error information.
Rack Informa- Click the tab to the right of a Rack to view its power consumption and size.
tion

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-53

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Registering Units Offline to Create the Unit Configuration

 Procedure to Add Units

1 Drag the Unit selected in the Model Selection Pane to the Unit Editor. Or, double-click the Unit.
The Unit is added.

2 If you add a Special Unit, set the unit number.

 Procedure to Delete Units

1 Right-click the Unit to delete and select Delete from the menu.

2 The Unit is deleted.

 Procedure to Move Units

1 Right-click the Unit to move and select Cut from the menu.

2 Right-click at the location where you want to insert the Unit and select Paste from the menu.
The result is that the Unit is moved.

Additional Information

You can also move the Unit by dragging it to the location where you want to insert it.

 Procedure to Copy and Paste Units

1 Right-click the Unit to copy and select Copy from the menu.

2 Right-click at the location where you want to insert the Unit and select Paste from the menu.
The Unit is pasted.

Additional Information

When you copy a Unit, all settings except for the device name and unit number (for a Special
Unit) are copied with it. The device name and unit number (for a Special Unit) are automatically
set to values that are not used by other Units.
Each Rack can contain a maximum of 10 Units.

 Procedure to Change the Unit

1 Right-click the Unit and select Change Model from the menu.
The Change Model Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the Unit and then click the OK Button.

The Unit is changed to the selected model.

5-54 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

 Procedure to Change the Power Supply Unit Model

1 Right-click the Power Supply Unit and select Change Model from the menu.
The Change Model Dialog Box is displayed.

5-5 CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration and Setup

2 Select the Power Supply Unit, and then click the OK Button.

Creating Racks

 Procedure to Add Racks

1 Right-click at any location where there are no Units and select Add Rack from the menu.
The Rack is added.

 Procedure to Delete Racks

1 Select a Unit of the Rack to delete.

5
2 Right-click at any location where there are no Units and select Delete Rack from the menu.
The Rack is deleted.

5-5-2 CPU Rack and Expansion Racks for NJ-series CPU Units
 Procedure to Delete All Racks and Units

1 Right-click at any location where there are no Units and select Clear All from the menu.
All Racks and Units are deleted.

Changing How Units Are Displayed

Right-click at any location where there are no Units and select Show Model/Unit Name from the
menu.

The unit numbers, model names, and device names are displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-55

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Displaying Rack Widths, Current Consumptions, and Power Con-

sumptions

1 Click Button at the right end of a Rack.

The rack width, current consumption, and power consumption are displayed.

Setting Basic Input Units

 Editing the Settings of Basic Input Units

You can set the input response time of a Basic Input Unit in the Unit Information in the Unit Editor.

Setting Special Units

 Procedure to Edit the Special Unit Setup

1 Double-click a Unit. Or, right-click the Unit and select Edit Special Unit Settings from the
menu.

The Edit Special Unit Settings Tab Page for the selected Unit is displayed.

5-56 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-5 CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration and Setup

5

5-5-2 CPU Rack and Expansion Racks for NJ-series CPU Units
2 Edit the parameters, and then click the OK Button.

Additional Information

Default settings are defined for each Special Unit. Items with set values that are different from
the default values are displayed in a different color so that you can distinguish them.
You can click the Return to default Button to restore all set values that have changed on the
Sysmac Studio to the default values.

Precautions for Correct Use

No checks are made to verify the logical consistency between data items in the Special Unit
Setup. Therefore, always check the logical consistency between all settings before transferring
the Special Unit Setup to the Controller and starting operation, especially when you perform
tasks such as enabling or disabling a setting from another setting. Depending on the settings,
logical inconsistencies could result in unintended operation.
For example, assume that setting item 1 specifies either defaults or user settings and that the
user settings start from setting item 2. Here, even if you set the user settings from item 2 on-
ward, the setting of setting item 1 will not be automatically changed to specify using the user
settings. In this case, if you do not also change the setting of setting item 1 to specify using the
user settings, the settings from items 2 onward will be ignored.
The settings for the Special Units in the CPU Unit are not restored to the default settings as
soon as you click the Return to default Button.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-57

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

 Procedure to Save the Special Unit Settings

1 Right-click a Unit and select Save Special Unit Settings from the menu.

A Save File Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Enter a file name, and then click the Save Button.

A Unit parameter file with a .upf extension is saved.

Additional Information

All settings except for the device name and unit number are saved in the Unit parameter file.

 Procedure to Read Special Unit Setting File

1 Right-click a Unit and select Read Special Unit Settings from the menu.

5-58 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-5 CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration and Setup

A Open File Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select a Unit parameter file, and then click the Open Button.

5-5-2 CPU Rack and Expansion Racks for NJ-series CPU Units
The parameters are read from the file.

Additional Information

All settings except for the device name and unit number are saved in the Unit parameter file.

Registering Units Online to Configure the CPU Rack and Expan-

sion Racks

 Procedure to Automatically Create the Configuration on the Sysmac Stu-

dio from the Actual Unit Configuration

1 Go online, right-click anywhere in the Unit Editor where there is no Unit and select Compare
and Merge with Actual Unit Configuration.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-59

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The actual Unit configuration is read and compared with the Unit configuration on the Sysmac
Studio. The results are displayed in the Compare and Merge with Actual Unit Configuration
Dialog Box.

2 Click the Apply actual Unit configuration Button to synchronize with the actual Unit configu-
ration.

3 Click the OK Button.

This returns you to the Unit Editor.

5-60 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Transferring the CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration Information

Use the synchronize operation to transfer the CPU/Expansion Rack configuration information.
Refer to Synchronizing (Uploading/Downloading after Automatic Verification) on page 7-120 for more
information on synchronizing.

5-5 CPU/Expansion Rack Configuration and Setup

1 Go online and select Synchronization from the Controller Menu.

The Synchronization Window is displayed.

2 Select the CPU/Expansion Racks Check Box in the Synchronization Window and then click
the Transfer To Controller Button.

5-5-2 CPU Rack and Expansion Racks for NJ-series CPU Units

The CPU/Expansion Racks configuration information is downloaded from the Sysmac Studio to
the Controller.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-61

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Additional Information

The parameters of the Special Units in the configuration information for the CPU/Expansion
Racks are not subject to synchronization and are not downloaded to the CPU Unit for the de-
fault settings. To transfer the parameters of the Special Units in the configuration information for
the CPU/Expansion Racks, clear the selection of the Do not transfer the following. (All items
are not transferred.) -CJ-series Special Unit parameters and EtherCAT slave backup
parameters. Check Box and select the check box for the CPU Rack and Expansion Racks in
the Synchronization Window before you click the Transfer To Controller Button.

5-62 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-6 Controller Setup

Use the Controller Setup to change settings related to the operation of the Controller.
The Controller Setup contains PLC Function Module operation settings and built-in EtherNet/IP Func-
tion Module port settings.
Note that specific settings are required depending on the Controller.

5-6-1 Operation Settings

• Operation Settings
These settings are related to the operation of the PLC Function Module, such as the Startup Mode,
the routing tables, and the event levels of Controller errors. There are basic settings, FINS settings,

5-6 Controller Setup

and event level settings.
The settable items vary with the Controller. Refer to the manuals for the specific Controllers for de-
tails.

 Procedure to Open the Operation Settings Tab Page

1 Double-click Operation Settings under Configurations and Setup - Controller Setup in the
5
Multiview Explorer. Or, right-click Operation Settings and select Edit from the menu.

5-6-1 Operation Settings

The Operation Setting Tab Page is displayed in the Edit Pane.

 Procedure to Open the Basic Settings View

1 Double-click Operation Settings under Configurations and Setup - Controller Setup in the
Multiview Explorer. Or right-click Operation Settings and select Edit from the menu.
The Basic Settings view is displayed on the Operation Settings Tab Page in the Edit Pane.

2 If the Basic Settings view does not appear, click the Basic Settings Button ( ).

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-63

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The basic settings are listed below.

Basic Settings

Category Setting Description

Operation Set- Startup Mode Sets the operating mode to enter when the
tings power is turned ON.
Start delay time at startup*1 Sets the time to wait for an NS-series PT to per-
form the tag verifications with priority during
startup after the power supply is turned ON.
Battery-related error detection*2 Sets whether to perform battery-related error
detection.
SD Memory Card Memory Card Diagnosis at Startup Sets whether to execute self-diagnosis (file sys-
Settings*3 tem check and restoration) on the inserted SD
Memory Card when the power is turned ON.
Virtual SD Memo- Virtual SD Memory Card Sets whether to use the shared folder as a Vir-
ry Card Settings*4 tual SD Memory Card.
Computer name Sets the Windows computer name.
IP address Sets the IP address of the Windows internal
port.
Shared folder name Sets a shared folder name used as a Virtual SD
Memory Card.
User name Sets a shared user name to use the shared
folder as a Virtual SD Memory Card.
Password Sets a password to access the shared folder as
a Virtual SD Memory Card.
System Service System service execution interval Sets the interval to monitor system service exe-
Monitoring Set- [ms] cution.
tings*5 System service execution time ratio Sets the ratio to monitor execution of system
[%] services in relation to overall processing of the
CPU Unit.

5-64 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Category Setting Description

SD Memory Card Program transfer by systemdefined Enables or disables the program transfer from
Program Transfer variable the SD Memory Card.
Setting*3*6 Password Sets the password that is used for verification
when you execute the program transfer from
the SD Memory Card.
Valid number of characters: 8 to 32
Valid type of characters: Single-byte alphanu-
meric characters (case sensitive)
SD Memory Card Restore by system-defined variable Enables or disables the restore of data from the
Restore Set- SD Memory Card.
ting*3*7 Password Sets the password that is used for verification
when you execute the restore of data from the
SD Memory Card.

5-6 Controller Setup

Valid number of characters: 8 to 32
Valid type of characters: Single-byte alphanu-
meric characters (case sensitive)
Shutdown Wait User Program Sets the time spent waiting for the start of shut-
Time Setting*4 down processing on the Controller after a back-
up signal output from the UPS turns ON or a
shutdown instruction is given by the power sup-
ply button. 5
OS Sets the time spent waiting for the detection of
shutdown completion on the Windows after a

5-6-1 Operation Settings

shutdown instruction is given by the Controller
to the Windows.
Event Log Set- Instruction Error Output Sets whether to output instruction errors to a
tings*8 Controller event log when an error occurs in an
instruction.
Refer to 8-15 Troubleshooting on page 8-90
for information on the event logs.
Security Settings Write Protection at Startup Sets whether to write-protect the CPU Unit
when the power supply is turned ON.
Disabling backups to SD Memory Sets whether to enable or disable SD Memory
Cards*9 Card backups.
Setting Change • Start As long as the parameters match between the
during RUN • Transfer project and the Controller, you can write the fol-
Mode • Cancel lowing settings during RUN mode.
• Write protection at startup
• Disabling backups to SD Memory Cards
Refer to 8-3-3 Write Protection of the CPU Unit
on page 8-17 for details on write protection.
--- Reset all to default. Returns all of the basic settings and FINS set-
tings to their default settings.
*1. This setting is supported by CPU Units with unit version 1.10 or later.
*2. This is displayed only for an NX102 or NX1P2 Controller.
*3. This is not displayed for an NY-series Controller.
*4. This is displayed only for an NY-series Controller.
*5. This is displayed only for an NJ-series CPU Unit.
*6. This setting is supported by NJ/NX-series CPU Units with unit version 1.11 or later.
*7. This setting is supported by NJ/NX-series CPU Units with unit version 1.14 or later.
*8. This setting is supported by CPU Units with unit version 1.02 or later.
*9. This setting is supported by CPU Units with unit version 1.03 or later.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-65

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

For details on the settings, refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No.
W501) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No.
W558).

Precautions for Correct Use

You cannot undo or redo operations in the Basic Settings view.

Additional Information

If there is a mistake in any set value, it is highlighted in red. Move your mouse over any location
for which an error is displayed to view the error message as a tooltip.

 Procedure to Open the FINS Settings View

You can use FINS networks and FINS communications with NX102 or NX1P2 Controller and NJ-
series Controllers.

1 Double-click Operation Settings under Configurations and Setup - Controller Setup in the
Multiview Explorer. Or right-click Operation Settings and select Edit from the menu.
The Basic Settings view is displayed on the Operation Setting Tab Page in the Edit Pane.

2 Click the FINS Settings Button ( ) displayed on the Operation Settings Tab Page in the Edit
Pane.

The FINS Settings view is displayed.

FINS Settings

5-66 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Setting Item or set value Default Description

Local Unit type • CPU Bus Unit*1 CPU Bus Select the Unit type.
Network Unit*1
• Special I/O Unit*1
Table
• Built-in EtherNet/IP port
Unit number • CPU Bus Unit: 0 to 15 ---*2 If the Unit is a CPU Bus Unit or
• Special I/O Unit: 0 to 95 Special I/O Unit, set the unit
• Built-in EtherNet/IP port: number.
250
Unit/Port • Unit Unit*3 If the Unit is a CPU Bus Unit,
• Port 1 specify the Unit or port that con-
• Port 2 nects to the network.
Local network 1 to 127 --- Set the local network number.
Remote Remote net- 1 to 127 --- Set the number of the network to

5-6 Controller Setup

Network work connect to.
Table Relay network 1 to 127 --- Set the number of the relay net-
work closest to the local net-
work.
Relay node 1 to 254 --- Set the node number that is con-
nected to the relay network from
the local network.
Gateway counter Standard (2) or Extension Standard (2) Set the GCT (gateway counter), 5
(7) which determines how many lev-
els of the network to go through

5-6-1 Operation Settings

when a FINS command or FINS
response is sent.
Standard: Up to 3 levels (GCT =
02 hex)
Extension: 4 to 8 levels (GCT =
07 hex)
--- Reset all to default. --- The Reset all to default Button
resets all the settings to their de-
fault values.
*1. Displayed only with the NJ-series CPU Unit.
*2. If the Unit is the built-in EtherNet/IP port, this value is always 250.
*3. If the Unit is a Special I/O Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port, this value is always Unit.

Additional Information

If there is a mistake in any set value, it is highlighted in red. Move your mouse over any location
for which an error is displayed to view the error message as a tooltip.

 Procedure to Open the Event Level Settings View

1 Click the Event Level Settings Button ( ) in the Operation Settings tab page of the Edit Pane.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-67

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The event name and event code are displayed. You can change the event level.

Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series
Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558) for the Con-
troller events for which you can change the event levels and the NJ/NX-series Troubleshooting
Manual (Cat. No. W503) or NY-series Troubleshooting Manual (Cat. No. W564) for details on
the events.

Version Information

A CPU Unit with unit version 1.03 or later and Sysmac Studio version 1.04 or higher are re-
quired to change the event levels.

Precautions for Correct Use

If you change the event level of a Controller error, the output status when the error occurs may
change. Confirm safety before you change an event level.

 Transferring Operation Settings

Use the synchronize operation to transfer the operation settings to the Controller.
Refer to Synchronizing (Uploading/Downloading after Automatic Verification) on page 7-120 for
more information on synchronizing.

1 Go online with the Controller.

2 Select Synchronization from the Controller Menu.

The Synchronization Window is displayed.

3 Select Operation Settings under the Controller Setup in the Synchronization Window and
then click the Transfer To Controller Button.
The settings are transferred.

5-68 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-6-2 Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings

• Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings
These settings are made to perform communications using the built-in EtherNet/IP port of the Con-
troller.

 Procedure to Open the Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings Tab Page

Double-click Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings under Configurations and Setup - Controller
Setup in the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-click Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings and select Edit
from the menu.
The Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings Tab Page is displayed.

5-6 Controller Setup

5

5-6-2 Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings

Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings

Setting Button Description

TCP/IP Set- Set the EtherNet/IP port TCP/IP settings.
tings

Link Settings Set the baud rate for the EtherNet/IP port.

FTP Settings Select whether to use the FTP server, and set up the FTP server if it is re-
quired.

NTP Settings Select whether to use NTP (automatic time setting), and set up NTP if it is
required.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-69

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Setting Button Description

SNMP Set- Select whether to use SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), and
tings set up SNMP if it is required.

SNMP Trap Select whether to use SNMP traps (to detect network problems), and set up
Settings SNMP traps if they are required.

FINS Set- Make the FINS communications settings for the built-in EtherNet/IP port.
tings*1 Refer to FINS Settings on page 5-63 for details.

CIP*2 Select whether to use CIP routing, and set up CIP routing if it is used.

TCP/UDP Select whether to use the TCP/UDP message service, and set up the
message TCP/UDP message service if it is used.
service*3
*1. This is displayed only for an NJ-series Controller and NX102 or NX1P2 Controller.
*2. This is displayed only for an NY-series Controller.
*3. This is displayed only for an NX102 Controller.

Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in EtherNet/IP Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W506) or
NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Built-in EtherNet/IP Port User’s Manual (Cat. No.
W563) for a list of the settings.

 Procedure to Open the Settings Views

The Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings Tab Page is used to configure settings. The TCP/IP Settings
view is used as an example in the following procedure.

1 Click the TCP/IP Settings Button ( ) on the Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings Tab Page.
The TCP/IP Settings view is displayed.

Use the same procedure to display the other settings views.

5-70 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

 Procedure to Download Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings

Use the synchronize operation to transfer the Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings to the Controller.
Refer to Synchronizing (Uploading/Downloading after Automatic Verification) on page 7-120 for
more information on synchronizing.

1 Go online with the Controller.

2 Select Synchronization from the Controller Menu.

The Synchronization Window is displayed.

3 Select Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings under the Controller Setup in the Synchronization
Window and then click the Transfer To Controller Button.
The settings are transferred.

5-6 Controller Setup

Precautions for Correct Use

You cannot undo and redo operations in the Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings Tab Page.

Additional Information

• If there is a mistake in any set value, it is highlighted in red. Move your mouse over any loca- 5
tion for which an error is displayed to view the error message as a tooltip.
• If you select Obtain from BOOTP Server as the IP address acquisition method in the TCP/IP

5-6-2 Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings

Settings, you can display the acquired IP address in the Controller Status Pane. Refer to the
Controller Status Monitor on page 7-45 for the procedure to open the Controller Status
Pane.

 Procedure to Open the FINS Settings View

• FINS Settings
Configure the FINS settings to perform FINS network communications from the built-in
EtherNet/IP port of the NJ-series CPU Unit, or the NX102 and NX1P2 CPU Unit.

1 Click the FINS Settings Button ( ) on the Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings Tab Page.
The FINS Settings view is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-71

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Category Description
FINS Node Address Settings Set the FINS node address.
FINS/UDP Set FINS/UDP communications.
FINS/TCP*1 Set FINS/TCP communications.
*1. This is not displayed for an NX1P2 CPU Unit.

The settings are listed below for each setting category.

FINS Node Address Settings

Set
Setting Description Default Condition
value
Node address of Set the FINS node address. The 1 to 1 The IP Address- FINS
built-in EtherNet/IP FINS node address is determined 254 Address Conversion
port*1 by the IP Address-FINS Address Method must be set to
Conversion Method setting in the Combination or IP Address.
FINS/UDP settings.
*1. The target port varies depending on the model. Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in EtherNet/IP
Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W506) for details.

FINS/UDP

Set De- Con-

Setting Description
value fault dition
FINS/UDP Port Set the FINS/UDP port number. 1 to 9600 ---
Number 65535
*1

5-72 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Set De- Con-

Setting Description
value fault dition
IP Address-FINS Select the conversion method to use when determining the Auto- Auto- ---
Address Conver- FINS address from the IP address. matic matic
sion Method • Automatic Generation Gen- Gen-
• The FINS node address is determined from the lower era- era-
eight bits of the IP address as shown below. tion, tion
• Lower 8 bits of subnet address are 0: Com-
The lower 8 bits of the IP address are set as the FINS bina-
node address. tion,
Example: or IP
Ad-
FINS node dress
IP address Subnet mask
address
192.168.250.129 255.255.255.0 129

5-6 Controller Setup

192.168.250.129 255.255.128.0 129
192.168.250.129 255.255.0.0 129

• Lower 8 bits of subnet address are not 0:

The host address that is created from the IP address and
the subnet mask is set as the FINS node address.
Example:
5
FINS node
IP address Subnet mask
address

5-6-2 Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings

192.168.250.129 255.255.255.128 1
192.168.250.129 255.255.255.192 1

• Combination
The address specified in the FINS node address setting
or in the IP address table is used.
• IP Address
The address set in the IP address table is used.
IP Address Table Set the table of corresponding IP addresses and FINS ad- FINS Blank The IP
dresses to determine the FINS addresses. node Addre
ad- ss-
dress: FINS
1 to Addre
254 ss
Conve
rsion
Metho
d
must
be set
to
Combi
nation
or IP
Addre
ss.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-73

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Set De- Con-

Setting Description
value fault dition
Dynamically Set whether to dynamically change the IP address of the Con- Con- ---
Change Remote IP remote node. vert or vert
Do
Not
Con-
vert
*1. Port numbers that are reserved by the system cannot be set. Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in
EtherNet/IP Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W506) for details.

5-74 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

FINS/TCP

Set De-
Setting Description Condition
value fault
FINS/TCP Port Set the FINS/TCP port number. 1 to 9600 ---
Number 65535*
1

FINS/ Con- Displays the connection number. Can- No. 1 ---

TCP nec- not be to No.
Con- tion chang 16
nec- No. ed
tion Serv- Set if this is a server or a client. Serv- Server ---
Set- er/ er/
tings Client Client

5-6 Controller Setup

Con- Set the IP address to connect to. *2 0.0.0.0 The Protect with IP Address Op-
nected tion must be selected or Server/
IP ad- Client must be set to Client.
dress
Auto- Set whether to use automatic as- Select- Select- Server/Client must be set to
matic signment. ed or ed. Server.
As- not se-
sign- lected 5
ment
Auto- Set the FINS address that corre- 1 to 239 to Server/Client must be set to

5-6-3 Built-in I/O Settings

mati- sponds to the IP address. 254 254 Server and Automatic Assignment
cally (line 1 must be selected.
as- to line
signed 16)
FINS
node
ad-
dress
Pro- When the Controller is the client, --- --- ---
tect protection is provided with the
with IP destination IP address.
Ad-
dress
*1. Port numbers that are reserved by the system cannot be set. Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in
EtherNet/IP Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W506) for details.
*2. Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in EtherNet/IP Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W506) for details
on the setting ranges of IP addresses.

5-6-3 Built-in I/O Settings

You can configure the built-in I/O port settings for an NX1P2 Controller.

 Procedure to Open the Built-in I/O Settings Tab Page

1 Double-click Built-in I/O Settings under Configurations and Setup - Controller Setup in the
Multiview Explorer. Or, right-click Built-in I/O Settings and select Edit from the menu.
The Built-in I/O Settings Tab Page is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-75

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Refer to the NX-series NX1P2 CPU Unit Built-in I/O and Option Board User's Manual (Cat. No.
W579) for details on the setting items.

5-6-4 Option Board Settings

You can configure the Option Board settings for an NX1P2 Controller.

 Procedure to Open the Option Board Settings Tab Page

1 Double-click Option Board Settings under Configurations and Setup - Controller Setup in
the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-click Option Board Settings and select Edit from the menu.
The Option Board Settings Tab Page is displayed.

Refer to the NX-series NX1P2 CPU Unit Built-in I/O and Option Board User's Manual (Cat. No.
W579) for details on the setting items.

5-76 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

 Reading the Actual Configuration

You can read the configuration of actually mounted Option Boards for display in the Sysmac Studio
while online.

1 Go online and click the Apply Actual Configuration Button.

The current settings configured in the Sysmac Studio are compared with the actual configura-
tion and the results are displayed.

2 To apply the configuration when the comparison results show a difference, click the Yes button.
The actual configuration is applied to the Option Boards in the Sysmac Studio.

5-6-5 Memory Settings

5-6 Controller Setup

You can configure the memory used for CJ-series Units for an NX102 or NX1P2 Controller.

 Procedure to Open the Memory Settings Tab Page

1 Double-click Memory Settings under Configurations and Setup - Controller Setup in the
Multiview Explorer. Or, right-click Memory Settings and select Edit from the menu.
5
The Memory Settings for CJ-series Units Tab Page is displayed.

5-6-5 Memory Settings

Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) for details on the
setting items.

Additional Information

Configuring the memory used for CJ-series Units allows the use of variable memory according
to the set memory size. Refer to 8-4 User Memory Usage Monitor on page 8-23 for the check
procedure for the usage of variable memory.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-77

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-7 Motion Control Setup

• Motion Control Setup
The Motion Control Setup is used to create the axes to use in motion control instructions, assign
those axes to Servo Drives and encoders, and set axis parameters.

5-7-1 Setting Axes

1 Right-click Axis Settings under Configurations and Setup − Motion Control Setup in the
Multiview Explorer and select Add − Motion Control Axis or Single-axis Position Control
Axis*1 from the menu.

The axis MC_Axis000(0) is added under Axis Settings.

The number in parentheses in MC_Axis000(0) is the axis number.

For an NX/NY-series Controller, axes are displayed in the following form: MC_Axis000(0,MC1).
The axis number and the task that executes the motion controls are in the parentheses.
*1. This is displayed only for an NX102 or NX1P2 Controller.

2 Double-click MC_Axis000(0).

5-78 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The Axis Parameter Settings tab page is displayed in the Edit Pane. The basic parameters are
displayed on the initial display.

5-7 Motion Control Setup

3 Select the following settings to use a servo axis.
a) Axis Use: Used Axis or Unused axis (changeable to used axis)
b) Axis Type: Servo Axis

4 Select a servo for the Output device 1 setting.

5-7-1 Setting Axes

Note Refer to 5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup on page 5-4 for the procedure to set slaves.

Additional Information

For an NJ-series CPU Unit with a unit version of 1.04 or earlier, select the Servo that is regis-
tered as the input device.

5 Click the buttons on the left side of the Axis Basic Settings Tab Page to complete different set-
tings. The parameters you can set for each button are given below.
Settings Buttons and Axis Parameters

Button Name Description

Axis Basic Settings Set the task to execute motion controls,*1 whether to use the
axis, the axis type, the axis number, control function*2 an input
or output device, and the channel.
Unit Conversion Set- Set the unit of display and gear ratio of the electronic gear. Set
tings number of command pulses and the travel distance per motor
rotation. With a CPU Unit with unit version 1.11 or later, you can
set items for using a reducer.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-79

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Button Name Description

Operation Settings Set the velocity, acceleration rate, deceleration rate, torque
warning values, and other monitor parameters.

Other Operation Set- Set the I/O for the Servo Drive.
tings

Limit Settings Set software limits and following error limits.

Homing Settings Set the homing operation.

Position Count Settings Set Count Mode of the Controller.

Servo Drive Settings Set the Servo Drive parameters.

*1. This item is set for an NX701 Controller. The setting item is not displayed for an NJ-series Control-
ler.
*2. This is displayed only for an NX102 or NX1P2 Controller. In the default setting, All is selected if you
added Motion Control Axis or Single-axis position control only is selected if you added Single-
axis Position Control Axis.

Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Motion Control User’s Manual (Cat. No. W507) or NY-
series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Motion Control User’s Manual (Cat. No. W559)
for details on each setting.

Precautions for Safe Use

If you change the detailed settings of the Axis Basic Settings Tab Page, make sure that the
device or machine performs the expected operation before you start actual operation. If the re-
lationship between the functions of the Motion Control Function Module and the EtherCAT slave
process data that is assigned to the axes are not correct, the device or machine may perform
unexpected operation.

Additional Information

Parameters that you change in the Axis Parameter Settings Tab Page are automatically updat-
ed in the Axis Setting Table.

Setting the Task to Execute Motion Control

When you register an axis, the primary periodic task is set by default as the task to execute motion
control.
With an NX701 Controller, you can set the task to execute motion control to either the primary periodic
task or the priority-5 periodic task.
Use the following procedure to set the priority-5 periodic task as the task to execute motion control.

1 Register the priority-5 periodic task in the Task Settings. Refer to 5-9-1 Registering Tasks on
page 5-109 for the task registration procedure in the Task Settings.

5-80 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

2 In the I/O Control Task Settings under the Task Settings, select the task for the priority-5 pe-
riodic task as the task for the slave/Unit assigned to the axis.

5-7 Motion Control Setup

3 Select the slave/Unit to which you assigned the priority-5 periodic task for the input device or 5
output device in the Axis Basic Settings.

5-7-1 Setting Axes

4 Select the priority-5 periodic task in the Motion control Box.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-81

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The priority-5 periodic task is set as the task to execute motion control.

Precautions for Correct Use

• If you assign a slave/Unit to an axis, the task that is set in the Axis Basic Settings is given
priority over the task that is set in the I/O Control Task Settings under the Task Settings as
the task assigned to that slave/Unit.
To change the task assignment for a slave/Unit that is assigned to a task for an NX701 Con-
troller, change the task that is set for motion control in the Axis Basic Settings. The task in
the I/O Control Task Settings in the Task Settings for the slave/Unit is automatically
changed to the task that is set in the Axis Basic Settings.
• If you want to assign a different task in the I/O Control Task Settings in the Task Settings
for a slave/Unit that is assigned to an axis, clear the slave/Unit selection for the input device
or output device in the Axis Basic Settings first.

Axis Setting Table

 Axis Setting Table

The Axis Setting Table is a table of all registered axis parameters.
You can edit any axis parameters here just as you can on the Axis Settings Tab Page.

 Opening the Axis Setting Table

1 Right-click Axis Settings under Configurations and Setup − Motion Control Setup and se-
lect Axis Setting Table from the menu.

The Axis Setting Table is displayed.

5-82 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-7 Motion Control Setup

Note Each line represents an axis parameter, and each column is for one axis number. All registered ax-
es are displayed. You can collapse the table by axis parameter category.

 Changing Axis Parameters

1 Click the parameter to change. 5

2 Enter the new setting for the parameter.

5-7-1 Setting Axes

 Copying Axis Parameters

1 Right-click the cell to copy and select Copy from the menu.

2 Right-click the cell to paste in and select Paste from the menu.

Additional Information

Hold down the Ctrl or Shift Key and click cells to select more than one cell.

 Copying All of the Axis Parameters at the Same Time

1 Right-click the axis name of the axis parameters to copy and select Copy Selected Columns
from the menu.

2 Right-click the axis name of the axis parameters to paste in and select Paste from the menu.

 Adding an Axis
Right-click the axis name and select Add New Axis. A new axis is added to the right side of the
Axis Setting Table.

Additional Information

You can also copy an existing axis to add a new axis. Right-click the axis name from which to
copy the parameters and select Copy, and then right-click and select Add New Axis and
Paste the Settings.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-83

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

 Filtering Axis Parameters

You can switch between displaying all axis parameters and only those that are used the most often.

1 Open the Axis Setting Table.

2 Select either All or Basic Settings under Parameters to show at the top of the Axis Setting
Table.

 Selectively Displaying Axis Parameters

You can select the axis parameters to display.

1 Open the Axis Setting Table.

2 Right-click anywhere in the Axis Setting Table and select Select Axes to Show from the menu.
The following Select Axes to Show Dialog Box is displayed.
NX701 Controllers

NJ/NY-series Controllers and NX102 or NX1P2 Controllers

5-84 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Button Description Remarks

Select MC1: Primary Selects only the axes for which motion control process- This is displayed only
Periodic Task ing is executed in the primary periodic task (MC1). for an NX701 Control-
ler.
Select MC2: Priori- Selects only the axes for which motion control process- This is displayed only
ty-5 Periodic Task ing is executed in the priority-5 periodic task (MC2). for an NX701 Control-
ler.
Select All Selects all of the axes.
Clear All Clears the selections of all of the axes.

3 Select the axes to display and click the OK Button.

Only the selected axes are displayed in the Axis Setting Table.

5-7 Motion Control Setup

Additional Information

Any changes made in the Axis Setting Table are automatically updated in the Axis Parameter
Settings Tab Page.

Updating Axis Settings with Drive Information

If 1S-series or G5-series Servo Drives (excluding Linear Servo Drives) are assigned to axes whose 5
axis type is set to Servo Axis, you can acquire information from the Servo Drives to update the axis
settings.

5-7-1 Setting Axes

The following axis settings will be updated.
Unit Conversion Settings: Command pulse count per motor rotation, travel distance per motor rota-
tion, work travel distance per rotation
Operation Settings: Maximum velocity, maximum jog velocity
Other Operation Settings: Maximum positive torque limit, maximum negative torque limit
Position Count Settings: Encoder type

Perform the following procedure with the Sysmac Studio connected online with a Controller.

1 Right-click Axis Settings in the Multiview Explorer and select Apply drive data to axis
settings from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-85

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

An update confirmation dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Yes Button.

The results are displayed when the update of the axis settings is completed.

3 Check the values of the updated axis settings.

5-7-2 Setting Axes Groups

• Setting Axes Groups
You can set axes to perform interpolated motions as an axes group.

 Procedure to Set Axes Groups

• Opening the Axes Group Settings Tab Page

1 Right-click Axes Group Settings under Configurations and Setup - Motion Control Setup
in the Multiview Explorer and select Add - Axes Group Settings from the menu.

2 The axes group MC_Group000(0) is added under Axes Group Settings.

The number in parentheses in MC_Group000(0) is the axes group number.

For an NX/NY-series Controller, axes groups are displayed in the following form:
MC_Group000(0,MC1). The axes group number and the task that executes the motion controls
are in the parentheses.

5-86 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

3 Double-click MC_Group000(0).
The Edit Pane for Axes Group Basic Settings is displayed.

4 Click the buttons on the left side of the Axes Group Basic Settings Tab Page to change be-

5-7 Motion Control Setup

tween different settings.
The parameters you can set for each button are given below.

Settings Buttons and Axes Group Parameters

Button Name Description

Axes Group Basic Set- Set the axes group number, the task to execute motion con-
tings trols,*1 whether to use the axes group, or the axis composition.

Axes Group Operation Set the interpolated velocity, the maximum interpolated acceler-
5
Settings ation and deceleration, and the interpolated operation settings.

5-7-2 Setting Axes Groups

*1. This item is set for an NX701 Controller. The setting item is not displayed for an NJ-series Control-
ler.

For details on each item, refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Motion Control User’s Manual
(Cat. No. W507) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Motion Control User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W559).

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-87

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Precautions for Correct Use

• If you are using an NX701 Controller, before selecting the priority-5 periodic task (MC2) for
motion control in the Axes Group Basic Settings, register the priority-5 periodic task in the
task settings. Refer to 5-9-1 Registering Tasks on page 5-109 for the task registration proce-
dure in the task settings.
• With an NX701 Controller, set the same task for motion control in the Axis Basic Settings
for the configuration axes and for motion control in the Axes Group Basic Settings. An error
will occur if they are not the same.
• With an NX701 Controller, if you need to change the tasks assigned for motion control in the
Axis Basic Settings of the configuration axes and the tasks assigned to the slaves and Units
that are assigned to the configuration axes, you can do so at the same time by changing the
task assigned for motion control in the Axes Group Basic Settings.
When you change the task that is set for motion control in the Axes Group Basic Settings, a
dialog box is displayed asking whether to change the tasks that are set for motion control in
the Axis Basic Settings of the configuration axes.

Yes Button: The tasks that are set for motion control for the configuration axes are
automatically changed. In the same way, the tasks that are set in the
task settings of the slaves and Units assigned to the configuration ax-
es are also changed.
No Button: Only the task that is set for motion control in the Axes Group Basic
Settings is changed. In this case, a mismatch error will occur for the
task that is set for motion control in the Axes Group Basic Settings
and the tasks that are set for motion control in the Axis Basic
Settings in the configuration axes.
Cancel Button: The change is canceled.

5-88 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-8 Cam Data Settings

The cam data settings are used to create electronic cam data.
You can create more than one cam profile containing the cam data settings.
The cam table defines the relationship of the phases of the master axis and the corresponding dis-
placements in the slave axis for the electronic cam. “Cam data” refers to one master axis phase and
the corresponding slave axis displacement in the cam table.
When you build the project for the Controller, a cam table is created according to the cam data set-
tings.
The cam profiles that you build from the cam data settings contain the cam data settings and a cam
table.

5-8 Cam Data Settings

Of the cam data settings in the cam profile, the data that is required for the Generate Cam Table in-
struction to create a cam table is called the cam definition.

5-8-1 Registering Cam Data Settings

1 Right-click Cam Data Settings under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer
5
and select Add - CamProfile from the menu.

5-8-1 Registering Cam Data Settings

The CamProfile0 cam profile is added under the Cam Data Settings.

5-8-2 Editing Cam Data Settings

1 Starting the Cam Editor

Right-click the cam profile to edit and select Edit from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-89

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The Cam Editor starts.

You must use the Cam Editor to set the cam table properties and cam nodes that are necessa-
ry to create a cam table.

2 Setting Cam Table Properties

Set the properties of the cam table.

Cam table
properties

Cam nodes

Cam profile
curve

3 Registering Node Points (Defining Curves)

For the cam nodes, enter the node points that the cam operation must pass through. (Enter the
master axis phase and the corresponding slave axis displacement for each node point.)
• Click the Add Button ( ).

5-90 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

• A node point is added.

5-8 Cam Data Settings

• Enter the phase of the master axis and the displacement of the slave axis and then specify
the shape of the curve.
Note Enter the phase of the master axis and the displacement of the slave axis before you add the
next node point.

The cam profile curve is drawn on the graph.

5-8-2 Editing Cam Data Settings

The cam profile curve is displayed as a graph of the cam operation for the cam table proper-
ties and the cam nodes that you set.
The graphs that display the velocity, acceleration rate, and jerk for a cam operation when the
master axis is at a constant velocity are called the velocity graph, acceleration graph, and
jerk graph.
The velocity, acceleration rate, and jerk are calculated based on the settings of the cam cy-
cle time, cam table properties, and cam nodes.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-91

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

4 Editing Node Points

You can use the following two methods to edit node points.
a) Entering the Phase and Displacement Directly
Enter the phase, displacement, curve, and phase pitch for the node.
b) Moving the Points on the Graph with the Mouse

Enable the position graph display on the toolbar ( ) to display the graph.

Click the pointers that represent the start and end points of the curve ( ) and drag
them to the positions you want.
Note 1 If you drag a point to a location where it cannot be moved, the curve is not changed and
only the pointer moves.
2 You can perform this same operation for the velocity graph, acceleration graph, and jerk
graph.

Additional Information

• Enter the phases of the master axis in ascending order.

• You can register up to 360 node points. This includes the 0.00 node point, which is registered
by default.

The items that are set are described in the following tables.

 Cam Table Properties

Parameter Range/unit Description
Master axis unit deg, inch, mm, Set the unit to use for the master axis.
pulse, μm, or nm
Slave axis unit deg, inch, mm, Set the unit to use for the slave axis.
pulse, μm, or nm

5-92 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Parameter Range/unit Description

Number of null cam 0, 10, 50, 100, 500, Set a value to insert data with the phase of the master axis and
data 1000, 5000, or the displacement of the slave axis set to zero after the end point
10000 of the cam.
Cam cycle time s Set the time for one cam cycle.
Maximum velocity mm/s Set the maximum velocity for the slave axis. The set value is
displayed on the velocity graph as a blue dotted line.
Maximum accelera- mm/s^2 Set the maximum acceleration for the slave axis. The set value
tion is displayed on the acceleration graph as a blue dotted line.
Maximum jerk mm/s^3 Set the maximum jerk for the slave axis. The set value is dis-
played on the jerk graph as a blue dotted line.
Initial velocity mm/s Displays the velocity when the phase of the master axis is 0.
If a phase of 0 is followed by a polynomic 3, polynomic 5, or

5-8 Cam Data Settings

free curve, you can specify the initial velocity.
Initial acceleration mm/s^2 Displays the acceleration rate when the phase of the master ax-
is is 0.
You can specify the initial acceleration rate when a polynomic 5
curve is connected after a phase of 0.

 Cam Nodes
Item Description 5
Master axis Enter the phase of the master axis.
Slave axis Specify the displacement of the slave axis for the master axis.

5-8-2 Editing Cam Data Settings

Cam curve Specify the curve for the connection to the previous node point. Refer to Cam Curves
under Cam Nodes on page 5-93, below, for the types of curves.
Connecting Velocity You can specify the velocity for the connecting section between a polynomic 3, poly-
nomic 5, or free curve and to the next curve. Use this setting for smooth connections
between curves.
Connecting Accel- You can specify the acceleration rate for the connecting section between a polynomic
eration 5 curve and the next curve. Use this setting for smooth connections between curves.
Phase Pitch The phases of the cam profile curve are divided by the specified pitch to create the
cam data. There must be no more than 65,535 nodes in the cam data. Division is per-
formed when the project is built.

Cam Curves

Connection condi-
Curve shape Main applications
tion specification
Constant Not possible. Used to create a dwell range between a block start point and
block end point.
Straight Line Not possible. Used to move at a constant velocity.
Parabolic Not possible. Used to accelerate/decelerate at a constant rate or to restrict
the maximum acceleration/deceleration rate.
Modified Constant Not possible. Used for medium-velocity, high-load equipment.
Velocity
Modified Trapezoid Not possible. Used for high-velocity, low-load equipment.
Modified Sine Not possible. Used for high-velocity, medium-load equipment. Used to reduce
the effect on the motor for load variations.
Cycloidal Not possible. Used to suppress residual vibration even for a high acceleration
rate.
Trapecloid Not possible. Used to suppress residual vibration even for a high-velocity,
high-load equipment.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-93

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Connection condi-
Curve shape Main applications
tion specification
Reverse-Trapecloid Not possible. Used to accelerate smoothly.
Simple Harmonic Not possible. Used for low-velocity motion or non-stopping operation.
Double Harmonic Not possible. Used to accelerate relatively smoothly or for one-dwell motion.
Reverse-Double Not possible. Used to decelerate relatively smoothly.
Harmonic
NC2 Curve Not possible. Used to reduce the effect on the motor for load variations. Used
to suppress residual vibration.
Polynomic 3 Possible (Connect- Used to specify the velocity between a block start point and
ing Velocity). block end point.
Polynomic 5 Possible (Connect- Used to specify the velocity and acceleration rate between a
ing Velocity and block start point and block end point.
Connecting Accel-
eration).
Free Curve Possible (Connect- Used to accelerate/decelerate smoothly. Used to specify the ve-
ing Velocity). locity between a block start point and block end point.

Additional Information

• You can use only a free curve, straight line, or constant curve before and after a free curve.
• If free curves are connected to each other, you can specify a connection condition only for the
last point.

 Graph View List

Icon Description
Shows or hides the grid on the graph.

Shows or hides the marker at the end of the graph.

Shows or hides the cursors and value-at-cursor display.

Y-axis value

X-axis value

Shows or hides the maximum values for the velocity, acceleration/deceleration rate, and jerk
on the graph. These values are indicated by dotted blue lines.

Shows or hides the properties.

Shows or hides node points.

Shows or hides the position graph.

Shows or hides the velocity graph.

Shows or hides the acceleration rate (deceleration rate) graph.

5-94 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Icon Description
Shows or hides the jerk graph.

Shows or hides the plot of the superimposed cam data when displaying superimposed
graphs. This icon can be used only when superimposed graphs are displayed.

 Graph Operations
Rotate the mouse wheel to increase or decrease the scale.
• Rotate the mouse wheel in the center of the graph to zoom in or zoom out of the entire graph.
• Move your mouse over the X or Y axis and rotate the mouse wheel to increase or decrease the
scale of only the X or Y axis.

5-8 Cam Data Settings

Precautions for Correct Use

You can use a straight line or straight line with constant displacement only before and after a
free form curve.

5-8-3 Procedure to Transfer Cam Data Settings

Use the synchronization operation to transfer the cam data settings to the Controller. 5
Refer to Synchronizing (Uploading/Downloading after Automatic Verification) on page 7-120 for more
information on synchronizing.

5-8-3 Procedure to Transfer Cam Data Settings

Use the following procedure.

1 Go online with the Controller.

2 Select Synchronization from the Controller Menu.

The Synchronization Window is displayed.

3 Select the cam profile to transfer under Cam Data Settings in the Synchronization Window
and then click the Transfer To Controller Button.
The transfer starts.

5-8-4 Importing Cam Data Settings

You can import cam data settings from a CSV file.

1 Right-click Cam Data Settings under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer
and select Import from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-95

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The Open Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the CSV file to import, and then click the Open Button.

The imported cam profile is registered under Cam Data Settings with a serial number added.

Precautions for Correct Use

To import cam data settings, use a CSV file encoded with UTF-8 character codes.

5-8-5 Exporting Cam Data Settings

You can export cam data settings to a CSV file.

1 Right-click the cam data settings to export and select Export from the menu.

The Save Dialog Box is displayed.

5-96 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

2 Specify the file location and name, and then click the Save Button.

5-8 Cam Data Settings

The cam data settings are saved in CSV format.

Precautions for Correct Use 5

The exported CSV file of cam data settings is encoded in UTF-8 character codes.

5-8-6 Exporting Cam Tables

5-8-6 Exporting Cam Tables
You can export a cam table to a CSV file.

1 Right-click the cam profile for the cam table to export and select Export Cam Table to CSV
File from the menu.

The Save Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Specify the file location and name, and then click the Save Button.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-97

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Precautions for Correct Use

To export a cam table, you must first build the project.

5-8-7 Transferring Cam Tables from the Controller to Files

You can save a cam table in the Controller to a CSV file.

1 Right-click the cam profile for the cam table to export and select Transfer Cam Table
[Controller to File] from the menu.

The Save Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Specify the file location and name, and then click the Save Button.

5-98 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-8 Cam Data Settings

The cam table from the Controller is saved in a CSV file.

5-8-8 Transferring Cam Tables from Files to the Controller

You can transfer a cam table that is saved in a CSV file to update the contents of a cam table that is 5
already in the Controller.

5-8-8 Transferring Cam Tables from Files to the Controller

1 Right-click the cam profile for the cam table to import and select Transfer Cam Table [File to
Controller] from the menu.
The Open File Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Specify the name of the file to transfer, and then click the OK Button.

3 To enable the cam table that was transferred, reset the Controller or cycle the power supply to
the Controller after you transfer the cam table.

Precautions for Correct Use

• You must synchronize with the Controller before you can transfer a cam table from a file to
the Controller. Refer to Synchronizing (Uploading/Downloading after Automatic Verification)
on page 7-120 for more information on synchronizing.
• The number of cam data in the cam table that is transferred from a file to the Controller must
be the same as the number of cam data in the cam table in the Controller.
• The cam table that is transferred from a file to the Controller is not saved in the project on the
Sysmac Studio.
• You cannot use the Controller synchronization function to transfer to the project on the Sys-
mac Studio, a cam table that was transferred from a file to the Controller. To save a cam table
in the Controller to a file, select Transfer Cam Table [Controller to File] from the menu.
• If you perform verification after transferring a cam table from a file to the Controller, an incon-
sistency is not detected even if the contents of the cam table differs from the cam data set-
tings.
• If you synchronize the Controller data after you transfer a cam table from a file to the Control-
ler, you will need to transfer the cam table again.
• You cannot transfer a cam table from a file to the Controller when performing a simulation for
debugging.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-99

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-8-9 Superimposing Cam Tables

You can superimpose the cam table from a CSV file on the cam profile curve position graph that is
currently displayed. This allows you to visually confirm the differences between the cam profile curve
and the cam table in the CSV file.

1 Right-click the cam profile that is currently displayed and select Superimpose Cam Table from
the menu.

The Open File Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the CSV file that contains the cam table to superimpose, and then click the Open But-
ton.

The cam table from the CSV file is superimposed on the currently displayed position graph.

5-100 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-8 Cam Data Settings

Red: Currently displayed cam profile curve
Green: Cam table from CSV file
5
5-8-10 Registering Cam Definitions

5-8-10 Registering Cam Definitions

This section describes how to register and delete cam definitions.
A cam definition is the data that must be extracted from a cam profile in order to create a cam table. It
is used to change a cam table from a program.
When you register the cam definition with a cam profile, the cam definition variables are automatically
created. The cam definition variables are used by the Generate Cam Table instruction to enable a pro-
gram to create a cam table.
“Cam definition variables” is a generic name for the cam property variable and cam node variable.
For an outline of creating cam tables, refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Motion Control User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W507) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Motion Control User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W559).
For details on the cam definition variables and Generate Cam Table instruction, refer to the NJ/NX-
series Motion Control Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W508) or NY-series Motion Control
Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W561).

Version Information

A CPU Unit with unit version 1.08 or later and Sysmac Studio version 1.09 or higher are re-
quired to use this function.

 Creating Cam Definitions

When you create a cam definition, it inherits the settings of the cam profile. The cam definition vari-
ables that are created from the cam definition are automatically added to the global variables.
The cam definition settings are stored separately from the cam profile settings in the project.

1 Right-click the cam profile under Configurations and Setup - Cam Data Settings in the Multi-
view Explorer and select Create Cam Definition from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-101

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The cam definition is registered below the corresponding cam profile and displayed as follows:
Cam_definition_name(Cam_property_variable_name,Cam_node_variable_name)

The cam property variable and cam node variable are registered in the global variable table.
You can change the attributes of the cam property variable and cam node variable from the
Cam Definition Tab Page. You cannot edit them in the global variable table.

Precautions for Correct Use

The cam definition variables are created with the Retain attribute set to Retained. This attribute
cannot be changed for cam definition variables. If the Controller’s limit for the number or data
size of retained variables is exceeded when a cam definition is created, creating the cam defini-
tion fails. Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-
series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558) for in-
formation on the limits to the number or data size of retained variables.

 Editing Cam Definitions

Use the following procedure to edit the cam definition data for cam definition variables.

1 Right-click the cam definition to edit in the Multiview Explorer and select Edit from the menu.

The Cam Definition Tab Page is displayed.

5-102 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-8 Cam Data Settings

2 You can edit the settings of the cam property variable and cam node variable.

Here, we describe the settings for the cam definition variables.

For the items that have the same names as the settings in the cam profile, refer to 5-8-2 Editing
Cam Data Settings on page 5-89.

Cam Property Variable 5

Items That Correspond to Members

5-8-10 Registering Cam Definitions

Item Description Set values Remarks
Cam cycle time Set the time for one cam cycle. ---
Initial velocity Displays the velocity when the --- You can specify the initial velocity
phase of the master axis is 0. if polynomic 3 or polynomic 5 is
set as the curve for the next cam
node after the start node. This
item is set automatically for other
curves.
Initial accelera- Displays the acceleration rate --- You can specify the initial acceler-
tion when the phase of the master axis ation if polynomic 5 is set as the
is 0. curve for the next cam node after
the start node. This item is set au-
tomatically for other curves.

Items That Correspond to Attributes

Item Description Set values Remarks

Cam property Set the name of the cam property --- You change the variable name
variable name variable. here, and not in the global variable
table.
Network publish Set the Network Publish attribute Do not publish. You change this attribute here,
of the cam property variable. The Publish Only and not in the global variable ta-
same setting is used for the cam (default) ble.
node variable. Input
Output

Note You cannot change any attributes of the variables that are not given above.

Cam Node Variable

Items That Correspond to Members

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-103

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Item Description Set values Remarks

Cam node Register a node point. --- Refer to 5-8-2 Editing Cam Data
(node point) The total of the number of null Settings on page 5-89 for the pro-
cam nodes and node points must cedure to register node points.
be 360 or less.
Master axis Enter the phase of the master ax- ---
is.
Slave axis Specify the displacement of the ---
slave axis for the master axis.
Cam curve Specify the curve for the connec- --- You cannot select a free curve for
tion to the previous node point. the cam curve in a cam definition.
Refer to Cam Curves under Cam
Nodes on page 5-93 for the types
of curves.
Connecting Select this check box when poly- ---
velocity nomic 3 or polynomic 5 is selected
Check Box to enable specifying the connect-
ing velocity.
Connecting You can specify the velocity for --- A value is set automatically for
velocity the connecting section between a curves other than polynomic 3 or
polynomic 3 or polynomic 5 curve polynomic 5.
and the next curve. Use this set-
ting for smooth connections be-
tween curves.
Connecting Select this check box when poly- ---
acceleration nomic 5 is selected to enable
Check Box specifying the connecting acceler-
ation.
Connecting You can specify the acceleration --- A value is set automatically for
acceleration rate for the connecting section be- curves other than polynomic 5.
tween a polynomic 5 curve and
the next curve. Use this setting for
smooth connections between
curves.
Phase pitch The phases of the cam profile ---
curve are divided by the specified
pitch to create the cam data.
There must be no more than
65,535 nodes in the cam data.

Items That Correspond to Attributes

Item Description Set values Remarks

Cam node vari- Set the cam node variable name. --- You change the variable name
able name here, and not in the global variable
table.
Number of null Set the number of data elements 0 to 359 The total of the number of null
cam nodes that are reserved in the cam node cam nodes and node points deter-
variable. mines the array size of the cam
The total of the number of null node variable.
cam nodes and node points must
be 360 or less.

5-104 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

Item Description Set values Remarks

Network publish Set the Network Publish attribute Do not publish. You change this attribute here,
of the cam node variable. The Publish Only and not in the global variable ta-
same setting is used for the cam (default) ble.
property variable. Input
Output

Note You cannot change any attributes of the variables that are not given above.

The master axis unit setting, slave axis unit setting, maximum velocity, and maximum acceleration
are used only to display the cam profile curve graph.
The number of null cam data is always set to 0. You cannot change it in the cam definition. Use the
cam profile settings to change the number of null cam data.

5-8 Cam Data Settings

Precautions for Correct Use

The cam data that is created by the Generate Cam Table instruction is stored in the cam data
variable. The array size of the cam data variable is determined by the settings of the cam pro-
file.
Depending on the settings of the number of node points and phase pitch of the cam node varia-
ble, the size of the cam data that is created by the Generate Cam Table instruction may exceed
the array size of the cam data variable that was set with the cam profile, resulting in an execu-
tion error for the instruction.
Ensure that there is a sufficient number of null cam data in the cam profile settings so that the 5
cam data size created by the Generate Cam Table instruction does not exceed the size of the
cam data variable.

5-8-11 Transferring Cam Definitions

 Deleting Cam Definitions

1 Right-click the cam definition to delete in the Multiview Explorer and select Delete from the
menu.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Yes Button in the confirmation dialog box.

The cam definition is deleted and the cam definition variables registered in the global variable
table are also deleted.

5-8-11 Transferring Cam Definitions

This section describes how to transfer cam definitions and how to read and write cam definition val-
ues.

 Transferring Cam Definitions

Use the synchronization operation to transfer a cam definition and cam definition variables to the
Controller.
Refer to Synchronizing (Uploading/Downloading after Automatic Verification) on page 7-120 for de-
tails on synchronization.

Use the following procedure.

1 Go online with the Controller.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-105

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

2 Select Synchronization from the Controller Menu.

The Synchronization Window is displayed.

3 Select the cam definition to transfer under Cam Data Settings in the Synchronization Window
and then click the Transfer To Controller Button.
The transfer starts.
When the transfer is completed, a dialog box to transfer the cam definition settings is dis-
played.

4 Click the Yes Button in the dialog box.

The cam definition settings are written to the cam definition variables.

Precautions for Correct Use

The cam definition settings are not applied to the cam definition variables merely by transferring
the cam definition and cam definition variables to the Controller. After you transfer the cam defi-
nition, you must perform the procedure in Writing Cam Definition Values on page 5-106.

 Writing Cam Definition Values

After you transfer the cam definition and cam definition variables to the Controller, you must write
the cam definition settings to the cam definition variables in the Controller.

1 While the Controller is online, right-click the cam definition in the Multiview Explorer and select
Transfer Cam Definition Values to Controller from the menu.

A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Yes Button in the confirmation dialog box.

The cam definition settings are written to the cam definition variables in the Controller.

Additional Information

If you right-click Cam Data Settings or a cam profile in the Multiview Explorer and select the
transfer menu command, you can transfer all of the cam definition values under the selected
item to the Controller at the same time.

 Reading Cam Definition Values

You can read cam definition variable values that were changed on the Controller to the cam defini-
tion.

1 While the Controller is online, right-click the cam definition in the Multiview Explorer and select
Transfer Cam Definition Values from Controller from the menu.

5-106 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Yes Button in the confirmation dialog box.

The cam definition variable values on the Controller are read to the cam definition.

Additional Information

5-8 Cam Data Settings

• If you right-click Cam Data Settings or a cam profile in the Multiview Explorer and select the
transfer menu command, you can transfer all of the cam definition values under the selected
item from the Controller at the same time.
• The values of the initial velocities, initial accelerations, connecting velocities, and connecting
accelerations in the cam profile and cam definition are automatically calculated according to
the cam node settings and curve types. If you read the values in the cam definition variables
after you change from an HMI an initial velocity or initial acceleration in the cam property vari-
able or a connecting velocity or connecting acceleration in the cam node variable in the Con- 5
troller, a different value is sometimes displayed on the HMI and Sysmac Studio depending on
the cam node settings and curve type.

5-8-12 Updating Cam Definition Settings

5-8-12 Updating Cam Definition Settings
This section describes how to apply cam definition settings to the cam profile and how to apply the
cam profile settings to the cam definition.

 Applying Cam Profile Changes to the Cam Definition

If you change the source cam profile settings after you create the cam definition, you can apply the
changes to the cam definition.

1 Right-click the cam profile in the Multiview Explorer and select Apply Cam Profile Settings to
Cam Definitions from the menu.

A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Yes Button in the confirmation dialog box.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-107

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

The settings of the cam profile are applied to all cam definitions below the cam profile.

 Applying Cam Definition Changes to the Cam Profile

Use the following procedure to apply the cam definition settings to the cam profile.

1 Right-click the cam definition in the Multiview Explorer and select Apply Cam Definition
Settings to Cam Profile from the menu.

A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Yes Button in the confirmation dialog box.

The cam definition settings are applied to the cam profile.

5-108 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-9 Task Settings

• Task Settings
Programs are executed in tasks in an NJ/NX/NY-series Controller.
Task settings define the execution period, the execution timing, the programs executed by the task,
the I/O refreshing performed by the task, and which variables to share between tasks.

5-9-1 Registering Tasks

Use the following procedure to register a task to execute programs.

1 Double-click Task Settings under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer.

5-9 Task Settings

2 Click the Task Settings Button ( ) in the Edit Pane.

3 Click the Button to add a task and enter the task type.
The primary periodic task (execution priority 4) is registered by default and cannot be deleted.
You can register periodic tasks and event tasks. 5

5-9-1 Registering Tasks

Selected item Maximum number of tasks
Priority-5 periodic task*1 1

Priority-16*2, -17, or -18 periodic task 1 periodic task with each priority
Priority-8 or -48 event task*3 A total of 32 event tasks
*1. This can be used only for an NX701 Controller.
*2. This cannot be used for an NX102 or NX1P2 Controller.
*3. A CPU Unit with unit version 1.03 or later and Sysmac Studio version 1.04 or higher are required.

5-9-2 Procedure to Set Tasks

1 Double-click Task Settings under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer.
The Task Settings Tab Page is displayed in the Edit Pane.

2 If the Task Settings view does not appear on the Task Settings Tab Page in the Edit Pane,
click the Task Settings Button ( ).

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-109

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

3 Select the task name, period/execution conditions, task period exceeded detection, task execu-
tion timeout detection time, and variable access time [%] from the lists for the registered task.
For details on the settings, refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat.
No. W501) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat.
No. W558).

Additional Information

Set the period of each periodic task to an integer multiple of the period of the primary periodic
task.
If you set the task period of a periodic task and then change the period of the primary periodic
task so that the task period of the periodic task is no longer an integer multiple, the period set-
ting for the periodic task is automatically changed to the nearest integer multiple that can be
set.
Example: If the period of the primary periodic task is set to 1 ms and the period of the priority-16
periodic task is set to 25 ms for an NJ-series CPU Unit and then the period of the primary peri-
odic task is changed to 2 ms, the period of the priority-16 periodic task is automatically changed
to 30 ms.

5-9-3 Task I/O Settings

• Task I/O Settings
The task I/O settings define what Units the task should perform I/O refreshing for.

Procedure to Set Task I/O Settings

1 Double-click Task Settings under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer.

2 Click the I/O Control Task Settings Button ( ) on the Task Settings Tab Page in the Edit
Pane.

The I/O Control Task Settings is displayed.

5-110 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-9 Task Settings

3 Select the task that should perform I/O refreshing for the registered Unit from the list.

5-9-4 Program Assignments

Task I/O settings can be defined only for the primary periodic task (priority 4), the priority-5 pe-
riodic task*1, and the priority-16 periodic task*2. You cannot define task I/O settings for priori-
ty-17 and priority-18 periodic tasks. Units specified in task I/O settings must already be regis-
tered under Configurations and Setup − CPU/Expansion Racks and EtherCAT.
*1. This can be used only for an NX701 Controller.
*2. This cannot be used for an NX102 or NX1P2 Controller.

Additional Information

You cannot change the task assignment for a slave/Unit that is assigned to an axis from the I/O
Control Task Settings under the Task Settings. To change the task, change the task that is
set for motion control in the Axis Basic Settings or clear the slave/Unit selection for the input
device or output device in the Axis Basic Settings before you change the task.

5-9-4 Program Assignments

• Program Assignments
Program assignments define what programs a task will execute.
The programs that are assigned to a task are executed in the order that they are assigned.
With CPU Unit version 1.08 or later, you can set the startup operation for each program.

 Procedure to Assign Programs

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-111

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

1 Double-click Task Settings under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer.

2 Click the Program Assignment Settings Button ( ) in Task Settings Tab Page in the Edit
Pane.

3 Select the programs to assign to the task from the list.

Any program you assign must already be registered under Programming - POUs.

 Adding, Reordering, and Deleting Assigned Programs

You can use the following buttons to add assigned programs, change the assigned order, or delete
assigned programs.

Button Description
Adds a line for an assigned program.

Moves the program on the line with the button up or down by one line to change the assigned
order.
Deletes the assigned program on the line with the button.

Additional Information

• You can also drag the program lines to change the order.
• When you change the assigned order or delete programs, you can select multiple continuous
lines. Either hold down the Shift Key and press the Up or Down Key, or hold down the Shift
Key and click the program lines with the mouse.
• You can expand and collapse the display of all of the programs that are registered in the
tasks. Right-click the task title bar and select Expand All or Collapse All from the pop-up
menu.

5-9-5 Settings for Exclusive Control of Variables in Tasks

You can use these settings to restrict tasks that refresh global variables and identify tasks that access
global variables.
This ensures concurrency for global variable values from all tasks that reference them.
Configure the settings for exclusive control of variables in tasks from the task settings. You can regis-
ter variables to the settings for exclusive control of variables in tasks from the global variable table or
the POU displayed in the Ladder Editor.

 Procedure to Set Exclusive Control of Variables in Tasks

First, register the global variables to refresh in the primary periodic or periodic task (refreshing
task). Then, specify tasks that only read the global variables (accessing tasks).

5-112 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

1 Double-click Task Settings under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer.

2 Click the Settings for Exclusive Control of Variable in Tasks Button ( ) on the Task Settings
Tab Page in the Edit Pane.

3 Register variables that require exclusive control between tasks. Select the global variables for
which to specify a refreshing task. Then select the accessing task for the global variables.

5-9 Task Settings

 Adding or Deleting the Global Variables for Which to Specify the Refresh- 5
ing Task

5-9-5 Settings for Exclusive Control of Variables in Tasks

You can use the following buttons to add or delete the variables.

Button Description
Adds a line for the global variable that tasks refresh.

Deletes the global variable of the selected line.

 Procedure to Quickly Register Variables to the Exclusive Control Settings

from Global Variable Table
From the global variable table, register variables to the exclusive control settings.
You can change the settings of refreshing tasks and accessing tasks for multiple global variables at
once.

1 Double-click Global Variables under Programming in the Multiview Explorer.

The global variable table is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-113

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

2 Click the headers on the lines of the desired variables to select the entire lines and then right-
click to select Register to Settings for Exclusive Control of Variable in Tasks.

The Register to Settings for Exclusive Control of Variables in Tasks Dialog Box is dis-
played.

3 Click the combo box of tasks to update variable value to select a task that refreshes the varia-
bles.

5-114 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-9 Task Settings

4 The check boxes of tasks to reference variable are checked by default. To prohibit a task from
reading the variables, uncheck the check box.

5 Click the OK Button. 5-9-5 Settings for Exclusive Control of Variables in Tasks
When the registration is completed, the variables are registered to settings for exclusive control
of variables in tasks and the registration results are displayed in the Output Tab Page.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-115

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

You can deregister a registered variable from the exclusive control settings through the
Settings for Exclusive Control of Variables in Tasks Page.

Additional Information

• If you apply this function to a variable already registered to the exclusive control settings, a
dialog box is displayed to confirm whether to overwrite the variable settings.
• You can detect network-published variables that are not registered in the settings for exclu-
sive control of variables in tasks during the program check or when the user program is built.
Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for detail.

 Procedure to Quickly Register Variables to the Exclusive Control Settings

from the Ladder Editor
From the POU displayed in the Ladder Editor, register variables assigned to circuit parts to the ex-
clusive control settings. The variables that you can register are as follows.
• Variables assigned to coils
• Variables assigned to output parameters of functions and function blocks
You can specify tasks that refresh or reference these variables.

1 In the Ladder Editor, right-click a coil or an output parameter of a function or function block, and
then select Register to Settings for Exclusive Control of Variable in Tasks.
When the following conditions are met, Register to Settings for Exclusive Control of
Variable in Tasks of the pop-up menu is enabled.
• The circuit part variable is registered to both the global variable table and local variable table,
and is also not a system-defined variable,
• The POU is assigned to tasks, and
• The status is offline.

5-116 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 5 Controller Configurations and Setup

5-9 Task Settings

The Register to Settings for Exclusive Control of Variables in Tasks Dialog Box is dis- 5
played.

5-9-5 Settings for Exclusive Control of Variables in Tasks

In Tasks to update variable value, a task to which the POU containing the specified circuit
part is assigned is displayed.

2 The check boxes of tasks to reference variable are all checked by default. To prohibit a task
from reading the variable, uncheck the check box.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 5-117

5 Controller Configurations and Setup

3 Click the OK Button.

When the registration is completed, the variable is registered to Settings for Exclusive
Control of Variables in Tasks and the registration results are displayed in the Output Tab
Page.

You can deregister a registered variable from the exclusive control settings through the
Settings for Exclusive Control of Variables in Tasks Page.

5-118 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 6
Online Connections to a Control-
ler
This section describes how to go online with a Controller.

6-1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 6-2

6-2 Going Online with a Controller ..................................................................... 6-3
6-2-1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 6-3
6-2-2 Setting the Connection Method ....................................................................... 6-4
6-2-3 Going Online ................................................................................................... 6-5
6-2-4 Going Online after Checking the Connection Method ..................................... 6-6 6
6-2-5 Going Offline ................................................................................................... 6-6
6-2-6 Confirming Serial IDs ...................................................................................... 6-6
6-2-7 Checking for Forced Refreshing...................................................................... 6-7
6-2-8 Going Online without a Project........................................................................ 6-8

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 6-1

6 Online Connections to a Controller

6-1 Overview
 Online Connections to a Controller
You must go online with the Controller or connect to the Simulator to communicate with them from
the Sysmac Studio.
The Sysmac Studio supports the following online connections for different applications.

Connection made
Online connection Application
to
Online connection Controller To perform debugging, startup, or normal maintenance, the
same project file as in the Controller is opened on the Sysmac
Studio and then an online connection is made. An online con-
nection is made based on the Communications Setup in the
project file.
Simulator connec- Simulator The Simulator is used to debug the user program offline. The
tion Communications Setup in the project file is not used.

Additional Information

Refer to 7-3 Offline Debugging on page 7-80 for information on connecting to the Simulator
and debugging operations.

6-2 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 6 Online Connections to a Controller

6-2 Going Online with a Controller

You can simultaneously go online with more than one Controller in a project from the Sysmac Studio.
The operations that are described in this section apply to the currently selected Controller. If there is
more than one Controller that is registered in the project, confirm the Controller to manipulate before
connecting to it.

6-2-1 Overview
To go online with a Controller, there are four types of hardware connections that can be used. These
are described in the following table.

6-2 Going Online with a Controller

Connection
Connection diagram Description
method
Direct connec- The USB port on the computer is connected
tion via USB*1 directly to the peripheral USB port on the
Controller.

Direct connec- The Ethernet port on the computer is con-

tion via Ether- nected directly to the built-in EtherNet/IP port
net on the Controller.
6
Remote con- The USB port on the computer is connected

6-2-1 Overview
nection via directly to the peripheral USB port on a Con-
USB troller and then a connection is made
through the Ethernet network to the built-in
EtherNet/IP port on another Controller.*2

Ethernet con- The Ethernet port on the computer is con-

nection via a nected through the Ethernet network to the
hub built-in EtherNet/IP port on a Controller.*2

*1. This is not displayed for NY-series Controllers and NX102 or NX1P2 Controllers.
*2. You cannot go online with a Controller through the port on a CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 6-3

6 Online Connections to a Controller

6-2-2 Setting the Connection Method

You must set the connection method, IP address to connect to, and other parameters for communica-
tions between the computer and Controller.

1 Select Communications Setup from the Controller Menu.

The Communications Setup Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the connection method in the Connection Type Field.

For a remote USB connection or Ethernet hub connection, enter the IP address of the Control-
ler to which you need to connect in the Remote IP Address Field.
Select any required options and enter the response timeout time if required.
Refer to Communications Setup Dialog Box Settings on page 6-4 for information on the
settings.

3 Click the OK Button.

This completes the settings.

 Communications Setup Dialog Box Settings

Item Description
Connec- Select the connection port to use to go online.
tion Type The selected method is normally used to go online.
Remote If you specify a USB remote or Ethernet hub connection, set the IP address of the Controller
IP Ad- that you normally will connect to.
dress USB Communications Test Button These buttons perform a communications test with the
Ethernet Communications Test Controller at the specified remote IP address. The re-
Button sult is displayed as follows:
• Normal: Communications test successful.
• Error: The Controller was not found, There is more
than one Controller with the specified IP address, or
a communications error occurred.

6-4 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 6 Online Connections to a Controller

Item Description
Options Confirm the serial ID when going on- If you select this option, the names and serial IDs are
line. compared between the project and the Controller
when you go online to make sure that a connection is
made to the intended Controller.
Check forced refreshing when going When this option is selected, a check is made when
offline. breaking the connection for inputs or outputs that have
forced refreshing.
Response You can set the response monitoring time for communications with the Controller.
Monitor An error is displayed if a response is not received before this time expires.
Time • The time can be set to between 1 and 3,600 s.

Additional Information

6-2 Going Online with a Controller

To connect to a Controller via two or more networks such as when using a VPN connection, a
response timeout may occur because it takes long time to establish communication. In such a
case, set a sufficiently large value for the response monitoring time.

6-2-3 Going Online

Use the following procedure to place the Sysmac Studio online with the Controller.

1 Select Online from the Controller Menu. Or, click the Go Online Button ( ) in the toolbar.
The following message is displayed the first time you go online. 6
After you write the project name, this message is not displayed.

6-2-3 Going Online

2 Click the Yes Button.
The Sysmac Studio goes online and the color of the top of the Edit Pane changes to yellow.

Precautions for Correct Use

Do not reconnect the USB for at least 10 seconds after you disconnect it.
After you connect the USB cable, do not disconnect it until Windows detects the connection.
It may become impossible for Windows to detect when the cable is connected or disconnected,
which would effectively disable the USB port. If that occurs, restart the computer. Otherwise,
you will not be able to use the USB device until Windows recovers from the suspended status.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 6-5

6 Online Connections to a Controller

Additional Information

If the Windows firewall is enabled, a dialog box is sometimes displayed to confirm the connec-
tion the first time you go online with a Controller after you install the Sysmac Studio. In this
case, click the Allow access Button with the Public networks Check Box selected.
If you do not allow access, you cannot transfer EtherNet/IP connection settings or monitor
EtherNet/IP connections. Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in EtherNet/IP Port User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W506) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Built-in
EtherNet/IP Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W563) for details.

6-2-4 Going Online after Checking the Connection Method

Use the following procedure to go online if you selected the option to select the connection method
whenever you connect the computer with the Controller in the Communications Setup Dialog Box.

1 Select Online from the Controller Menu. Or, click the Go Online Button ( ) in the toolbar.
The Communication Settings Dialog Box is displayed.

The IP address that is set in the Communications Setup Dialog Box is displayed to the right of
the remote connection methods.

2 Select the connection method and then click the OK Button.

The Sysmac Studio goes online.

Precautions for Correct Use

Do not reconnect the USB for at least 10 seconds after you disconnect it.
After you connect the USB cable, do not disconnect it until Windows detects the connection.
It may become impossible for Windows to detect when the cable is connected or disconnected,
which would effectively disable the USB port. If that occurs, restart the computer. Otherwise,
you will not be able to use the USB device until Windows recovers from the suspended status.

6-2-5 Going Offline

Use the following procedure to go offline.

Select Offline from the Controller Menu. Or, click the Go Offline Button ( ) in the toolbar.
The Sysmac Studio goes offline.

6-2-6 Confirming Serial IDs

The serial ID is verified when going online if the option to do so was selected in the Communications
Setup Dialog Box. If the serial ID of the project on the Sysmac Studio is different from that of the Con-
troller, the following confirmation dialog box is displayed when you attempt to go online.

6-6 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 6 Online Connections to a Controller

1 Click the Yes Button.

The serial ID of the project on the Sysmac Studio is rewritten to the same value as that of the

6-2 Going Online with a Controller

Controller.

6-2-7 Checking for Forced Refreshing

Forced refreshing is checked when going offline if the option to do so was selected in the
Communications Setup Dialog Box. If there are any variables that have been forced refreshed, the
following confirmation dialog box is displayed after you go online.

6-2-7 Checking for Forced Refreshing

1 Click the Cancel All And Go Offline Button.
All of the forced refreshing is released.

2 Click the Go Offline Button.

The Sysmac Studio goes offline.

Precautions for Correct Use

• If a direct or remote USB connection is used, an Ethernet IP address of 192.168.255.xxx is

used internally. When using a USB connection, do not use an IP address of 192.168.255.xxx
for the Ethernet interface card in the computer, or do not remotely connect to a Controller with
an IP address of 192.168.255.xxx.
• Socket ports 9600 and 2224 are used for Ethernet UDP/IP communications. When using
Ethernet UDP/IP communications, do not use these ports for any other application.
• When using Direct connection via Ethernet and there is more than one Ethernet interface
card mounted in the computer, you must select the Ethernet interface card to use. Refer to
A-2 Specifying One of Multiple Ethernet Interface Cards on page A-7 for the selection pro-
cedure.
• If you select Direct connection via Ethernet to connect to the NX701 or NX102 Controller,
connect the cable to port 1 on the Controller. You cannot go online if you connect the cable to
port 2.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 6-7

6 Online Connections to a Controller

Additional Information

• Refer to 11-4 Error Messages for Sysmac Studio Operation on page 11-11 for corrections for
errors that occur when you go online.
• If operation authority is set in the Controller, a Verification Dialog Box is displayed when you
go online. Refer to 8-3-1 Operation Authority Verification on page 8-8 for details.

6-2-8 Going Online without a Project

You can go online with the Controller without creating or opening a project.
When you are online, you can upload the project data or perform troubleshooting.

1 Start the Sysmac Studio and click Connect to Device on the Start page.
Settings are displayed.

Item Description
Device Select the type of device to connect to.
Connection type Select the method to use to connect to the Controller.
Connection set- If you selected a remote connection via USB or an Ethernet connection via a hub,
tings set the destination IP address.

6-8 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 6 Online Connections to a Controller

Item Description
Operation after Select the operation to perform after connecting.
Connection • Transfer from The data is uploaded from the Controller if there is a project
Device in the Controller. If you select this check box, check boxes to
select the items to upload are displayed.
• CPU Unit The data in the CPU Unit, such as the pro-
grams, configurations, and settings, are
uploaded.
This data includes the EtherCAT connec-
tion settings (i.e., the tag data link set-
tings), but it does not include the data from
the CJ-series Units or EtherCAT slaves.
This data is always uploaded.
• CJ-series If you select this check box, the data from

6-2 Going Online with a Controller

Units (NJ- the CJ-series Units and EtherCAT slaves
series only)/ is uploaded.
EtherCAT
slaves
• Display the The Troubleshooting Dialog Box is displayed.
Troubleshooting
Dialog Box:

2 Click the Connect Button.

A new project is created automatically and the Sysmac Studio goes online with the Controller
according to the settings made in step 1, above. 6
A project named Auto Connect Project is created. To save the project, either select Save As
from the File Menu or click the Yes Button on the Save Confirmation Dialog Box that appears

6-2-8 Going Online without a Project

when you close the project.

Additional Information

For the author of the created project, the author name that is set in the option settings is set
automatically. Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for details on the op-
tion settings.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 6-9

6 Online Connections to a Controller

6-10 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7
Debugging
This section describes how to debug the programs online on the Controller or debug it
offline with the Simulator.

7-1 Debugging Operations on the Simulator and Controller............................ 7-2

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging.......................... 7-4
7-2-1 Monitoring........................................................................................................ 7-4
7-2-2 Differential Monitor ........................................................................................ 7-21
7-2-3 Changing Present Values and Set/Reset Using Forced Refreshing ............. 7-24
7-2-4 Cross References.......................................................................................... 7-36
7-2-5 Online Editing ................................................................................................ 7-40
7-2-6 Changing the Operating Mode ...................................................................... 7-45
7-2-7 Monitoring Controller Status.......................................................................... 7-45 7
7-2-8 Task Execution Status Monitor ...................................................................... 7-49
7-2-9 Task Execution Time Monitor ........................................................................ 7-49
7-2-10 Axis Status Monitor (MC Monitor Table)........................................................ 7-50
7-2-11 Data Tracing .................................................................................................. 7-52
7-3 Offline Debugging ........................................................................................ 7-80
7-3-1 Debugging with Program Simulation ............................................................. 7-80
7-3-2 Offline Debugging of Sequence and Motion Control Programs .................. 7-100
7-3-3 Offline Debugging for Sequence Control and Vision Sensor....................... 7-103
7-3-4 Offline Debugging for Sequence Control and Displacement Sensor .......... 7-107
7-3-5 Offline Debugging with Sequence Control and NA-series PT Simula-
tor (Simultaneous Simulation of Controller with NA-series PT)................... 7-109
7-3-6 Integrated NS-series PT Simulation for Offline Debugging of Se-
quence Control and NS-series PTs ..............................................................7-112
7-3-7 3D Simulation ...............................................................................................7-114
7-4 Preparations for Online Debugging.......................................................... 7-115
7-4-1 Assigning Variables and Real I/O .................................................................7-115
7-4-2 Assigning Axis Variables and I/O Devices....................................................7-117
7-5 Performing Online Debugging .................................................................. 7-119
7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the Controller ................................... 7-120
7-5-2 Testing Axis Operation (MC Test Run) ........................................................ 7-142
7-5-3 Checking I/O Wiring .................................................................................... 7-146
7-5-4 Checking I/O Assignments .......................................................................... 7-147
7-5-5 Resetting the Controller............................................................................... 7-148
7-5-6 Restarting Units........................................................................................... 7-149

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-1

7 Debugging

7-1 Debugging Operations on the Simula-

tor and Controller
The operations that can be used to debug the programs on the Sysmac Studio are listed below. De-
bugging can be performed online on the Controller or offline with the Simulator.

Operations for Debugging Controller Simulator Reference

Monitoring Supported. Supported. 7-2-1 Monitoring on page
7-4
Monitoring in a Watch Tab Page Supported. Supported. 7-2-1 Monitoring on page
7-4
Monitoring in the I/O Map Supported. Supported. 7-2-1 Monitoring on page
7-4
Differential monitoring Supported. Supported. 7-2-2 Differential Monitor
on page 7-21
Controlling BOOL variables Supported. Supported. 7-2-3 Changing Present
Values and Set/Reset Us-
ing Forced Refreshing on
page 7-24
Forced Refreshing (TRUE/FALSE/Cancel) Supported. Supported. 7-2-3 Changing Present
Values and Set/Reset Us-
ing Forced Refreshing on
page 7-24
Changing present values of data Supported. Supported. 7-2-3 Changing Present
Values and Set/Reset Us-
ing Forced Refreshing on
page 7-24
Clear All Memory operation Supported. Not support- 8-6 Clearing Memory on
ed. page 8-31
Cross-references Supported. Supported. 7-2-4 Cross References
on page 7-36
Online editing Supported. Supported. 7-2-5 Online Editing on
page 7-40
Monitoring Controller information Supported. Not support- 7-2-7 Monitoring Controller
ed. Status on page 7-45
Monitoring task execution status Supported. Supported. 7-2-8 Task Execution Sta-
tus Monitor on page 7-49
Monitoring axis status Supported. Supported. 7-2-10 Axis Status Monitor
(MC Monitor Table) on
page 7-50
Changing the operating mode Supported. Supported. 7-2-6 Changing the Oper-
ating Mode on page 7-45
Resetting the Controller Supported. Not support- 7-5-5 Resetting the Con-
ed. troller on page 7-148
Data tracing Supported. Supported. 7-2-11 Data Tracing on
page 7-52
Setting triggers Supported. Supported. 7-2-11 Data Tracing on
page 7-52
Setting variables to sample Supported. Supported. 7-2-11 Data Tracing on
page 7-52

7-2 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Operations for Debugging Controller Simulator Reference

Starting and stopping tracing Supported. Supported. 7-2-11 Data Tracing on
page 7-52
Displaying trace results Supported. Supported. 7-2-11 Data Tracing on
page 7-52
Saving trace results Supported. Supported. 7-2-11 Data Tracing on
page 7-52
Setting the 3D equipment model Supported. Supported. 7-2-11 Data Tracing on
page 7-52
Displaying timing charts Supported. Supported. 7-2-11 Data Tracing on

7-1 Debugging Operations on the Simulator and Controller

page 7-52
Displaying 3D axis paths Supported. Supported. 7-2-11 Data Tracing on
page 7-52
Monitoring task execution times Supported. Supported. 7-2-9 Task Execution Time
Monitor on page 7-49
Estimating execution processing times Not support- Supported. 7-3-1 Debugging with Pro-
ed. gram Simulation on page
7-80
Debugging with program simulations Not support- Supported. 7-3-1 Debugging with Pro-
ed. gram Simulation on page
7-80
Setting what to simulate Not support- Supported. 7-3-1 Debugging with Pro-
ed. gram Simulation on page
7-80
Changing the simulation speed Not support- Supported. 7-3-1 Debugging with Pro-
ed. gram Simulation on page
7-80
Setting breakpoints Not support- Supported. 7-3-1 Debugging with Pro-
7
ed. gram Simulation on page
7-80
Step execution Not support- Supported. 7-3-1 Debugging with Pro-
ed. gram Simulation on page
7-80
Troubleshooting Supported. Supported. 8-15 Troubleshooting on
page 8-90
Monitoring error information Supported. Supported. 8-15 Troubleshooting on
page 8-90
Displaying error logs Supported. Supported. 8-15 Troubleshooting on
page 8-90
Event Setting Table Supported. Supported. 8-15 Troubleshooting on
page 8-90
User Memory Usage Monitor Supported. Supported. 8-4 User Memory Usage
Monitor on page 8-23
Clock Information Settings Supported. Not support- 8-2 Clock Information Set-
ed. tings on page 8-7
Releasing access rights Supported. Not support- 8-7 Releasing Access
ed. Rights on page 8-35

Note For the functional differences between the Controller and Simulator, refer to A-3 Differences between the
Simulator and the Physical Controller on page A-9.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-3

7 Debugging

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and

Offline Debugging
7-2-1 Monitoring

 Overview
You can monitor the TRUE/FALSE status of program inputs and outputs and the present values of
variables in the Controller. You can monitor operation on the Ladder Editor, ST Editor, Watch Tab
Page, or I/O Map.

Monitoring on the Ladder Editor

 Monitoring on the Ladder Editor

You can check the execution status of a ladder diagram on the Ladder Editor.

 Procedure to Monitor on the Ladder Editor

1 Double-click the ladder program or ladder function block under Programming in the Multiview
Explorer.
The rungs are displayed on the Ladder Editor in monitor status.

Yellow indicates
online status.

Light gray indicates

that editing is not
possible.

The TRUE/FALSE status of the connecting lines is displayed while the task is executed in RUN
mode.

Circuit parts are displayed as follows during monitoring:

You can change the display color in the option settings.

7-4 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Input and Output Bits

Circuit part TRUE FALSE

Program input

Program output

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

Functions and Function Blocks

When the execution sta-

Circuit part Being executed Not being executed tus cannot be monitored
*3

Functions and
function blocks*1

*2

*1. While the task is in execution in RUN mode, a function block is always displayed in execution in
progress status regardless of the TRUE/FALSE status of the connecting line before it.
*2. The present values are displayed in parentheses to the left of input variables and to the right of out-
put variables.
The present values are displayed in parentheses to the left and right of in-out variables.
*3. The execution status cannot be displayed under the following conditions. In these cases, the circuit
part and the connecting lines after it are displayed in yellow.
• Inputs, functions, and function block instances from immediately after going online until the moni- 7
tored values are displayed
• Function block instances for which arrays with subscript variables are specified

7-2-1 Monitoring
• Inputs, functions, and function block instances that do not exist in the Controller when synchroni-
zation is not consistent
• Functions that meet the following conditions:
a) Some instructions that do not have an ENO output
Examples of instructions for which execution status cannot be monitored:
Timer (Hundred-ms Timer), Get**Clk (Get Clock Pulse Group), and comparison instruc-
tions, such as LT, EQ, and NE, when the comparison data is duration data, date data, time
of day data, or STRING data.
Examples of instructions for which execution status can be monitored:
TestABit (Test A Bit), TestABitN (Test A Bit Not), and comparison instructions such as LT,
EQ, and NE when the comparison data is BOOL data, bit string data, integer data, or RE-
AL data
b) All instructions in regions that are defined with the MC and MCR instructions
c) All user-defined functions
• POUs that use the P_PRGER variable
• Programs for which the value of the P_PRGER variable is TRUE

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-5

7 Debugging

Additional Information

• If you use a variable for a subscript to specify an array element or member in an array varia-
ble, structure array variable, or union array variable, the present value is displayed as follows
(example for a two-dimensional array): Value_of_variable_element_or_member,
[subscript_value, subscript_value].

Variable name entry format example

Present value display
for global variables
ArrayVar[index1,index2,index3] Value_of_ArrayVar[index1,index2,index3],[value_of_in-
dex1, value_of_index2, value_of_index3]
StructArrayVar[index1,index2].member Value_of_StructArrayVar[index1,index2].member,[val-
ue_of_index1, value_of_index2]
StructArrayVar[index1,index2].member Value_of_StructArrayVar[index1,index2].member
[0,index3] [0,value_of_index3],[value_of_index1, value_of_index2],
[0, value_of_index3]
You can set an option so that the present values of array subscripts are not displayed. Refer to
8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for details.
• If the value of the P_PRGER variable changes to TRUE and monitoring is disabled, change
the value of the P_PRGER variable to FALSE from a Watch Tab Page to enable monitoring
again.

Monitoring on the ST Editor

 Monitoring on the ST Editor

You can confirm the present values of variables in structured text in the ST Editor.
Use the following procedure to monitor present values.

1 Double-click the ST program or ST function block under Programming in the Multiview Explor-
er.
The ST Editor is displayed.

7-6 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Additional Information

If you use a variable for a subscript to specify an array element or member in an array variable,
structure array variable, or union array variable, the present value is displayed as follows (ex-
ample for a two-dimensional array): Value_of_variable_element_or_member, [subscript_value,
subscript_value].

Variable name entry format example for

Present value display
global variables
ArrayVar[index1,index2,index3] Value_of_ArrayVar[index1,index2,index3],[value_of_in-
dex1, value_of_index2, value_of_index3]

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

StructArrayVar[index1,index2].member Value_of_StructArrayVar[index1,index2].member,[val-
ue_of_index1, value_of_index2]
StructArrayVar[index1,index2].member Value_of_StructArrayVar[index1,index2].member
[0,index3] [0,value_of_index3],[value_of_index1, value_of_index2],[0,
value_of_index3]

You can set an option so that the present values of array subscripts are not displayed. Refer to
8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for details.

Monitoring Function Block Instances

You can monitor the execution status of ladder diagrams or ST programs for individual function block
instances.

1 Go online and then double-click the function block definition on the Multiview Explorer. Or, dou-
ble-click the function block definition in the Edit Pane.
The Choose Instance Dialog Box is displayed. 7

2 Select the function block instance to monitor and click the Select Button. 7-2-1 Monitoring

The contents of the selected instance are displayed. The name of the selected instance is dis-
played on the tab.

 Monitoring the Present Values of In-Out Variables in Function Block In-

stances
The operation of monitoring the present values of in-out variables in function block instances differs
depending on the combination of the Sysmac Studio version and the project unit version of the
model.
The combinations that allow you to monitor the present values of in-out variables in the function
block instances are as follows. Except for the following combinations, you cannot monitor the
present values. A hyphen is displayed for the present value.

Sysmac Studio version 1.41 or higher

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-7

7 Debugging

Model Project unit version

NX701-1£00, NX701-1£20 Version 1.23 or later
NX102-1£20, NX102-9£20 Version 1.35 or later
NJ501-1£20, NJ501-4320 Version 1.23 or later
NJ101-£020 Version 1.23 or later

Sysmac Studio version 1.43 or higher

Model Project unit version

NX1P2 Version 1.42 or later
NX102-1£00, NX102-9£00 Version 1.42 or later
NJ501-1£00 Version 1.42 or later
NJ301-1£00 Version 1.42 or later
NJ101-£000 Version 1.42 or later

Sysmac Studio version 1.44 or higher

Model Project unit version

NJ501-R£00, NJ501-R£20 Version 1.43 or later

Sysmac Studio version 1.45 or higher

Model Project unit version

NY512-1£00, NY512-Z£00, NY532-1£00, NY532- Version 1.24 or later
Z£00

Monitoring in a Watch Tab Page

 Monitoring in a Watch Tab Page

You can check the present value of one or more variables in the Watch Tab Page.
There are the following types of Watch Tab Pages.
• Watch (Project)
This Watch Tab Page contains information for devices that are registered in the project. You can
check the current values for more than one device at the same time.
• Watch (Table)
This Watch Tab Page contains information for Controllers that are registered in the project. You
can use it to check the present values of array variable elements and structure members in tabu-
lar form.

 Displaying a Watch Tab Page

1 Select Watch Tab Page from the View Menu. To display the Watch (Table), select Watch Tab
Page (Table).
The Watch (Project) 1 or Watch (Table) 1 is displayed.

7-8 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

To close a Watch Tab Page, click the Close Button for the tab page. To display a Watch Tab
Page, select Watch Tab Page from the View Menu again.

Additional Information

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

You can change the tab title for Watch Tab Pages. Select Edit Title from the pop-up menu for
the tab.

 Contents of the Watch Tab Page

• Watch Tab Page (Project)

Item Meaning Editing Remarks

Device name The device name is displayed. Support-
ed.
Name The variable name is displayed. Support-
ed.
Online value The present values of the device are ---
displayed.
Modify The new value is displayed. Support-
ed.
Comment*1 A comment for the variable is dis- ---
played.
The data type is displayed. --- Refer to Format to Register
7
Data type*1
Variables on Registering Varia-
bles in the Watch Tab Page on

7-2-1 Monitoring
page 7-11 for the data types that
you can register.
AT*1 The address of an AT specification in ---
memory for CJ-series Units or an I/O
port is displayed.
Display format*1 The display format (decimal, hexa- Support- Refer to Changing the Display
decimal, etc.) of the present value ed. Format of a Present Value in the
and modify value is displayed. Watch Tab Page on page 7-15
for the data formats that you can
select.
*1. You can right-click the title row cell for the column to show and hide columns.

• Watch Tab Page (Table)

This tab page is described using the following figure as an example.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-9

7 Debugging

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h)

(i)
(j)

(k) (m)
(l)

(l)
(o) (n)

No. Item Meaning Editing Remarks

(a) Device name The Controller name is displayed. Supported.
(b) Name The variable name is displayed. Supported.
(c) Index The subscript of the structure mem- ---
ber or array element that is selected
in the present value table is dis-
played. If a member is selected, the
member name is also displayed.
(d) Modify The new value is displayed. Supported.
(e) Comment The comment for the variable is dis- ---
played.
(f) Data type The data type is displayed. ---
(g) AT The address of an AT specification in ---
memory for CJ-series Units or an I/O
port is displayed.
(h) Display format The display format used for both the Supported. • Refer to Changing the
present values in the present value Display Format of a
table and the Modify value is dis- Present Value in the
played. Watch Tab Page on
page 7-15 for the dis-
play formats that you
can select.
• For structure variables
or structure array varia-
bles, the present values
displayed in the present
value table will not
change even if you
change the display for-
mat.
(i) Array display Used to select the directions in which Supported. A list is displayed only for
direction selec- to display the array dimensions from an array variable with a
tion list a list. basic data type or a struc-
ture array variable with
two or more dimensions.

7-10 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

No. Item Meaning Editing Remarks

(j) Horizontal sub- The subscripts of the specified di- ---
script display mension are displayed horizontally in
area order from 0. The array elements of
the structure members are all ex-
panded on the display.
(k) Vertical sub- The subscripts for the dimension that ---
script display is not displayed in the horizontal sub-
area script display area are displayed ver-
tically in order from 0. For a three-di-

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

mensional array, the subscripts for
the two dimensions that are not dis-
played in the horizontal subscript dis-
play area are displayed in combina-
tions in order.
(l) Change Page You can scroll the page either verti- Supported.
cally or horizontally. Each page dis-
plays 26 items vertically and 20 items
horizontally. To change the page, en-
ter the page number and press the
Enter Key. You can click the Change
Page Buttons to change the page by
half pages ( ) or whole pages ( ).
(m) Present value The present values of the structure Supported.
table members or array elements are dis-
played.
If a structure variable or structure ar-
ray variable is displayed, you can se-
lect the members to display in the 7
present value table. Right-click in the
present value table and select Select

7-2-1 Monitoring
Structure Members to Display.
(n) Wrapping posi- You can set the position at which to Supported. This item and button are
tion wrap the present value table for a displayed only for a one-
one-dimensional array. Enter the dimensional array variable
wrapping position, and click the with a basic data type or a
Update Button. one-dimensional array
variable that is an enumer-
ation.
(o) Array element Used to jump to a specified element. Supported.
jump settings Enter the array subscripts and click
the Go to Button to move to the
specified element.

 Registering Variables in the Watch Tab Page

There are two ways to register variables.
Method (1) Enter the variable name in the name cell in the Watch Tab Page.
Method (2) Drag the variable to the Watch Tab Page from an editor or variable table.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-11

7 Debugging

 Method (1) Entering the Variable Name in the Name Cell in the Watch Tab
Page

1 Specify the device name and click the cell that says Input Name at the bottom of the Watch
Tab Page.

2 Enter the variable name to display the present value.

3 As you enter characters, a list of candidate variable names is displayed. Select the variable
name from the list.
The variable name is registered.

 Method (2) Dragging Variables to the Watch Tab Page from an Editor or
Variable Table
The procedure to register variables from the ST Editor is given below. Go offline to perform this
procedure.

1 Select the required variable in the ST Editor and drag it to the cell that says Input Name at the
bottom of the Watch Tab Page.

The variable name is registered.

Dragging Variables to the Watch Tab Page

Source Item Operation

Ladder Editor Program input or output The variable name that is assigned to the input or output
is registered.
Function or function The function block instance variable and the input, output,
block and in-out variables that are assigned in the function or
function block are registered.

7-12 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Source Item Operation

ST Editor Variable name The specified variable name is registered.
Global variable table Variable or function The specified variable name or function block instance
or local variable table block instance name in name is registered.
the variable table

Format to Register Variables

The formats that you use to enter variable names are given below.
(1) Formats for Global and Local Variables

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

Variable Format to enter Example
Global variables Variable name Start_SW1
Local variable for program Program_name.variable_name Program1.Start_SW1

(2) Formats for Different Data Types

Variable data
Format to enter Display
type
Basic data Variable name The specified variable is displayed.
types
Arrays array_variable_name If you register an array variable in a Watch Tab Page
(Table), the array elements are displayed in a tabular
format.
array_variable_name[number] The specified element is displayed.
array_variable_name[number- The elements in the specified range are compressed
number] on the display.
or
array_variable_name[num-
ber..number]
(range specification)
7
array_variable_name[integer_vari- The specified element is displayed.

7-2-1 Monitoring
able_name]*1*2
Structures structure_variable_name The structure members are compressed on the dis-
play.*3
In the Watch Tab Page (Table), the members are dis-
played in a tabular format.
structure_variable_name.mem- The specified member is displayed.*3
ber_name
Unions union_variable_name The union members are compressed on the dis-
play.*3
union_variable_name.mem- The specified member is displayed.*3
ber_name
POU instance POU_instance_variable_name The variables in the POU are compressed on the
of function or display.
function block POU_instance_variable_name. The specified variable is displayed.
variable_name_in_POU*4*5
Enumerations variable_name The specified variable is displayed.
*1. You can use a variable for an array subscript to specify an element for up to a three-dimensional array.
Example for a Three-dimensional Array: ArrayVar[index1,index2,index3] (The following are integer
variables: index1 to index3.)
*2. You can also use variables for subscripts to specify array elements and members in structure array vari-
ables and union array variables.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-13

7 Debugging

Example for the Member of a Structure/Union Two-dimensional Array Variable: StructArrayVar[in-

dex1,index2].member (The following are integer variables: index1 and index2.)
*3. The member variable comments are displayed for structure variable and union variable members. If the
member variable comment is empty, the data type comment for the member is displayed. If both the
member variable comment and the data type comment are empty, the variable comment for the structure
variable or union variable to which the member belongs is displayed.
*4. For input variables in function blocks, you cannot monitor the present values of the input variables for
which default initial values are not applied. A hyphen is displayed for the present value.
Refer to the NJ/NX-series Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W502) or NY-series Instructions
Reference Manual (Cat. No. W560) for information on input variables for which default initial values are
not applied.
*5. The operation of monitoring the present values of in-out variables in function block instances differs de-
pending on the combination of the Sysmac Studio version and the project unit version of the model.
Refer to Monitoring the Present Values of In-Out Variables in Function Block Instances on page 7-7 for
the version combinations.

7-14 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

 Changing the Display Format of a Present Value in the Watch Tab Page
If the Sysmac Studio is online with a Controller in Monitor Mode, the present value of a variable is
displayed when the variable name is registered. You can use the Display format Column to change
the display format of the present value. The display formats that you can select depend on the data
type.

Display Formats

Display format Description

Boolean TRUE or FALSE

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

Binary Groups of four digits are displayed. The groups are separated by sin-
gle-byte spaces.
Decimal For signed decimal, “+x_xxx_xxx” is displayed. (“x_xxx_xxx” is the
present value. If the value is negative, “-” is displayed instead of “+”.)
For unsigned decimal, “x_xxx_xxx” is displayed. (“x_xxx_xxx” is the
present value. There is no sign.)
Hexadecimal The value is displayed in hexadecimal.
Real (floating-point) Zero:
0.0
Subnormal Number:
The conversion results based on display specifications for normalized
numbers is displayed.
Normalized Number:
(sign) decimal_mantissa e decimal_exponent (with no spaces) (The
mantissa is 17 digits for a LREAL number and 9 digits for a REAL num-
ber.)
Example: +1.2345678901234567e-17
Infinity:
The conversion results based on display specifications for normalized 7
numbers is displayed.
String The text string for the UTF-8 text is displayed.

7-2-1 Monitoring
Duration (- negative value) xxx d yy h zz m uu s vvv.vvvv ms (with no spaces)
xxx is the number of days, yy is the number of hours, zz is the number
of minutes, uu is the number of seconds, and vvv.vvv is the number of
milliseconds.
Leading zeros are not displayed.
If a number for one of the units is 0, 0 is displayed with the unit. Howev-
er, if there are no numbers on the left of a 0 number that are not 0, then
0 and the unit are not displayed.
Example for 5 minutes, 0 seconds, and 23 milliseconds
5m0s23ms
Date yyyy-mm-dd
Leading zeros are displayed.
Example for August 17, 2010
2010-08-17-13:00:05.00
Time of day hh:nn:ss.ss
Leading zeros are displayed.
Date and time yyyy-mm-dd-hh:nn:ss.ss
Leading zeros are displayed.
ASCII The values of variables are displayed in ASCII values.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-15

7 Debugging

Data Types and Supported Display Formats

Data type Display format (The default formats are set in bold text.)
BOOL Boolean, Decimal, Hexadecimal, String, or Binary
SINT Decimal, Boolean, Hexadecimal, or Binary
USINT Decimal, Boolean, Hexadecimal, or Binary
INT Decimal, Boolean, Hexadecimal, or Binary
UINT Decimal, Boolean, Hexadecimal, or Binary
DINT Decimal, Boolean, Hexadecimal, or Binary
UDINT Decimal, Boolean, Hexadecimal, or Binary
LINT Decimal, Boolean, Hexadecimal, or Binary
ULINT Decimal, Boolean, Hexadecimal, or Binary
BYTE Hexadecimal, Boolean, Decimal, Binary, or ASCII
WORD Hexadecimal, Boolean, Decimal, Binary, or ASCII
DWORD Hexadecimal, Boolean, Decimal, or Binary
LWORD Hexadecimal, Boolean, Decimal, or Binary
REAL Real
LREAL Real
TIME String (Time)
DATE String (Date)
TIME_OF_DAY String (Time of day)
DATE_AND_TIME String (Date and time)
STRUCT Depends on the data type of the members.
UNION Depends on the data type of the members.
STRING String
ENUM Decimal, String

Changing the Display Format

Select the display format from the Display format Column on the Watch Tab Page.
The present value changes to the specified display format.

Present Value Displays When Using a Variable for a Subscript to Specify an Array Element
If you use a variable for a subscript to specify an array element or member in an array variable,
structure array variable, or union array variable, the present value is displayed as follows (example
for a two-dimensional array): PV_of_variable_element_or_member, [subscript_value,
subscript_value].

Variable name entry format example for

Present value display
global variables
ArrayVar[index1,index2,index3] Value_of_ArrayVar[index1,index2,index3],
[value_of_index1, value_of_index2, value_of_index3]
StructArrayVar[index1,index2].member Value_of_StructArrayVar[index1,index2].member,
[value_of_index1, value_of_index2]

7-16 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Variable name entry format example for

Present value display
global variables
StructArrayVar[index1,index2].member[0,in- Value_of_StructArrayVar[index1,index2].member[0,val-
dex3] ue_of_index3], [value_of_index1, value_of_index2],[0, val-
ue_of_index3]

 Deleting Variable Names from the Watch Tab Page

1 Right-click the line of a variable name to delete on the Watch Tab Page and select Delete from

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

the menu. Or, press the Backspace Key to delete the device name for the variable to delete.

The variable name and the row it was displayed on are deleted.

 Copying and Pasting Variable Names from the Watch Tab Page

1 Right-click the variable name to copy on the Watch Tab Page and select Copy (or press the 7
Ctrl + C Keys).

7-2-1 Monitoring
2 Right-click the row at which to insert the copied row on the Watch Tab Page and select Paste
from the menu (or press the Ctrl + V Keys).
The copied variable name is registered.

Additional Information

You can copy variable names from a Watch Tab Page and paste them into a spreadsheet (e.g.,
Excel).

 Adding a Watch Tab Page

You can add one or more Watch Tab Pages to the Watch (Project) or Watch (Table).

1 Right-click the tab of a Watch Tab Page and select Add Watch Tab Page from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-17

7 Debugging

A new Watch Tab Page is added.

For the Watch (Project), you can add up to 20 Watch Tab Pages, for the Watch (Table), you
can add up to 10 Watch Tab Pages.

2 To delete a Watch Tab Page, right-click the tab of the Watch Tab Page and select Delete Tab
Page from the menu.
The specified Watch Tab Page and all variable names that are registered in it are deleted.

7-18 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Precautions for Correct Use

The display behavior of the Watch Tab Pages differs between Sysmac Studio version 1.19 or
lower (between version 1.10 and version 1.19) and Sysmac Studio version 1.20 or higher.
• Maximum number of tab pages

Watch (Project) Watch Tab Page Watch (Table)

Version 1.19 or lower 1 max. 9 max. 9 max.
Ver.1.20 or Ver.1.21 10 max. Not provided 10 max.
Version 1.22 or later 20 max.

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

• If you open a project that was saved in a different version of Sysmac Studio, the data that is
registered in a Watch Tab Page is displayed as follows.
If a project that was saved in Sysmac Studio version 1.19 or lower is opened in version 1.20,
1.21, 1.22 or higher

Display location
Registration lo-
in version 1.20 or Display location in version 1.22 or higher
cation of data
1.21
Watch (Project) The data is displayed in the Watch (Project) 1.
Watch Tab Page The data regis- Data registered in the Watch Tab Pages for devices are dis-
for each device - tered in the Watch played in the Watch (Project) 2, Watch (Project) 3, .... When
Watch Tab Page Tab Pages for all variables are not registered in the Watch (Project) for a
1, Watch Tab the devices are project saved using version 1.19 or lower, data in the Watch
Page 2, ... displayed in the Tab Pages such as the Watch Tab Page 1 and Watch Tab
Watch (Project) 1. Page 2 are displayed in the Watch (Project) 1, Watch
(Project) 2, ....
In the order in which the devices were registered and the
Watch Tab Pages were added in a project saved using ver-
sion 1.19 or lower, data for a maximum of 20 Watch Tab Pa- 7
ges including the Watch (Project) are displayed. Additional
data after the maximum number of Watch Tab Pages is

7-2-1 Monitoring
reached will be all displayed in the 20th page - the Watch
(Project) 20.
Watch (Table) The data that is registered in the Watch Tab Pages for each Controller is dis-
played in the Watch (Table) 1, Watch (Table) 2, ....

If a project that was saved in version 1.20 or higher is opened in version 1.19 or lower

Registration location of data Display location in version 1.19 or higher

Watch (Project) 1, Watch Only the data that is registered in the Watch (Project) 1 (the first
(Project) 2, ... Watch (Project) that was created) is displayed in the Watch (Project).
Data in the Watch (Project) 2 and later is not displayed.
Watch (Table) 1, Watch (Table) No data is displayed.
2, ...

Monitoring in the I/O Map

 Monitoring in the I/O Map

You can monitor the present values of Unit I/O ports in the I/O Map when the Sysmac Studio is
online with a Controller.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-19

7 Debugging

 Monitor Displays in the I/O Map

1 Double-click I/O Map under Configurations and Setup on the Multiview Explorer.
The I/O Map is displayed.
The present values of the registered Unit I/O ports are displayed in the Variable Column.

The data types that are given in the following table can be monitored in the I/O Map.
• Data Types and Present Value Displays in the I/O Map

Data type Number of bytes Range

BOOL 2 0 or 1
BYTE 1 16#00 to FF
WORD 2 16#0000 to FFFF
DWORD 4 16#00000000 to FFFFFFFF
LWORD 8 16#0000000000000000 to FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
SINT 1 -128 to +127
INT 2 -32768 to +32767
DINT 4 -2147483648 to +2147483647
LINT 8 -9223372036854775808 to +9223372036854775807
USINT 1 0 to +255
UINT 2 0 to +65535
UDINT 4 0 to +4294967295
ULINT 8 0 to +18446744073709551615
REAL 4 -3.40282347e+38 to 3.40282347e+38
LREAL 8 -1.7976931348623157e+308 to 1.7976931348623157e+308

 Changing the Display Format in the I/O Map

1 Select the display format from the Monitor Type Area in the I/O Map.

The present value in the Value Column changes to the specified display format.

7-20 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

The display formats that you can select for each data type are given in the following table.

Display format Description Remarks

Data type The present value is displayed in the format
for the data type.
Binary The present value is displayed in binary. The bit order can also be specified
(MSB-LSB or LSB-MSB). (The default
bit order is MSB-LSB.)
Hexadecimal The present value is displayed in hexadeci-
mal.
Signed decimal The present value is displayed in signed
decimal.
7
Unsigned deci- The present value is displayed in unsigned
mal decimal.

7-2-2 Differential Monitor

Additional Information

• Structures and arrays cannot be monitored.

• REAL and LREAL data are displayed in the REAL and LREAL data formats even if the moni-
tor type is changed.

7-2-2 Differential Monitor

With the Differential Monitor, you can detect the number of times a specified BOOL variable or BOOL
member changes to TRUE or changes to FALSE and display the count in the Differential Monitor. You
can check if bits turn ON and OFF and the number of times that they turn ON and OFF.

Version Information

A CPU Unit with unit version 1.03 or later and Sysmac Studio version 1.04 or higher are re-
quired to use differential monitoring.

Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial
Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558) for information on differential
monitoring.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-21

7 Debugging

Opening the Differential Monitor Tab Page

1 Right-click the BOOL variable to register in the Differential Monitor in the Ladder Editor and se-
lect Add to Differential Monitor from the menu. Or, select Differential Monitor from the View
Menu or click the Differential Monitor Button ( ) on the toolbar.
The Differential Monitor is displayed.

(3) (4)

(1)

(2) (5)

(6)

Parts of the Pane

No. Part Description

1 Start Differential Monitor and Click these buttons to start and stop differential monitoring.
Stop Differential Monitor But-
tons
2 Variable Name Enter the variables for differential monitoring.
3 Differentiation Condition But- Click these button to specify whether to detect changes to TRUE (rising)
tons or changes to FALSE (falling).
4 Count This column displays the number of times the condition for the variable
was met (change to TRUE or change to FALSE).
5 Condition Satisfied Indicators These indicators flash when the conditions for the variables are met
(change to TRUE or change to FALSE).
6 Add Item and Delete Item But- Click these buttons to add and delete selected variables for differential
tons monitoring.

Entering Differentiation Conditions

1 You can drag variables from the Ladder Editor, the ST Editor, or a variable table to the Differen-
tial Monitor. You can also right-click the variables to monitor in the Ladder Editor and select
Add to Differential Monitor from the pop-up menu.
The variables for differential monitoring are registered.

7-22 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

You can register up to eight variables for differential monitoring.

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

Additional Information

You can also click the Add Variable Button in the Differential Monitor Tab Page to add variables.

Executing Differential Monitoring

1 Click the Start Differential Monitor Button ( ) in the Differential Monitor Tab Page.
Differential monitoring is started and the number of times the condition (change to TRUE or
change to FALSE) is met is displayed in the count list for each variable.

Additional Information

7-2-2 Differential Monitor

• The values in count list are reset to zero every time the Start Differential Monitor Button is
clicked.
• You can add variables for differential monitoring while differential monitoring is under execu-
tion. To monitor the variables that you add, stop differential monitoring and then start it again.

Stopping Differential Monitoring

1 Click the Stop Differential Monitor Button in the Differential Monitor Tab Page during differential
monitoring.
Differential monitoring stops.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-23

7 Debugging

Precautions for Correct Use

You can register variables for another Controller in the same project for differential monitoring.
However, only the variables for the Controller that is currently selected are actually monitored
when differential monitoring is executed.

7-2-3 Changing Present Values and Set/Reset Using Forced Refresh-

ing

 Changing Present Values and Set/Reset Using Forced Refreshing

You can change the values of variables that are used in the user program and settings to any de-
sired value, and you can use the Set/Reset command to change program inputs and outputs to
TRUE or FALSE. This allows you to check the operation of the user program and settings.

WARNING
Sufficiently confirm safety before you change the values of I/O ports or variables
on the I/O Map when the Sysmac Studio is online with the CPU Unit. Incorrect op-
eration may cause the devices that are connected to Output Units to operate re-
gardless of the operating mode of the Controller.

CAUTION
• Always confirm the safety at the destination node before you transfer a user pro-
gram to a node or perform an operation that changes device variables.
Not doing so may result in injury.
• Sufficiently confirm safety before you change the values of variables on a Watch
Tab Page when the Sysmac Studio is online with the CPU Unit. Incorrect opera-
tion may cause the devices that are connected to Output Units to operate re-
gardless of the operating mode of the Controller.

Precautions for Safe Use

Always confirm the safety of the system before you perform forced refreshing.

Controlling BOOL Variables

 Controlling BOOL Variables

You can change the value of any BOOL variable to TRUE or FALSE. The specified value is then
overwritten by the execution results of the user program. If the operating mode is changed or the
power supply is cycled, the initial value is restored.
You can control BOOL variables in the Ladder Editor, Watch Tab Page, or I/O Map.

Additional Information

• Go online and select Monitor from the Controller Menu to enter monitor status before you
perform the following procedure.
• On the ST Editor, the procedure that is given below in Changing the Present Values of Varia-
bles on page 7-27 is used to set/reset BOOL variables.

7-24 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

 Controlling BOOL Variables in the Ladder Editor (Set/Reset)

• Controlling BOOL Variables in the Ladder Editor (Set/Reset)
You can use the Set and Reset menu commands to change program inputs and outputs in the
Ladder Editor to TRUE or FALSE.

• Procedure

1 Double-click the ladder program, ladder function, or ladder function block under Programming
in the Multiview Explorer.

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

The rungs are displayed on the Ladder Editor in monitor status.

2 Right-click the input or output and select Set/Reset − Set to change the input or output to
TRUE. Or, right-click the input or output and select Set/Reset − Reset to change the input or
output to FALSE.
The input or output in the Ladder Editor changes to TRUE or FALSE and the execution condi-
tion changes accordingly.

7-2-3 Changing Present Values and Set/Reset Using Forced Refreshing

 Controlling BOOL Variables in the Watch Tab Page (Set/Reset)
Controlling BOOL Variables in the Watch Tab Page (Set/Reset)
You can change the status of BOOL variables that are registered in a Watch Tab Page to TRUE or
FALSE.
The monitor values in the Watch Tab Page change to TRUE or FALSE.
Procedure

1 Select Watch Tab Page from the View Menu to display a Watch Tab Page.
The rungs are displayed on the Ladder Editor in monitor status.

2 Select a BOOL variable in the Watch Tab Page.

3 Select TRUE in the Modify Column to change the variable to TRUE. Select FALSE in the
Modify Column to change the variable to FALSE.
The value in the Online value Column changes to TRUE or FALSE.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-25

7 Debugging

Additional Information

If the status of a BOOL variable that is used in a ladder diagram is changed, the execution sta-
tus in the Ladder Editor changes accordingly.

 Controlling Boolean I/O Ports in the I/O Map

Controlling Boolean I/O Ports in the I/O Map
You can change the status of the BOOL I/O ports in the I/O Map.
Procedure

1 Double-click I/O Map under Configurations and Setup on the Multiview Explorer. The I/O
Map is displayed.

2 Select the BOOL I/O port in the I/O Map.

3 Enter TRUE in the Value Column to change the variable to TRUE. Enter FALSE in the Value
Column to change the variable to FALSE.

The status of the BOOL device variable changes to TRUE or FALSE and the value in the Value
Column in the I/O Map changes to TRUE or FALSE.

7-26 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Changing the Present Values of Variables

 Changing the Present Values of Variables

You can change the present values of user-defined variables, system-defined variables, and device
variables as required. You can do this in the Ladder Editor, ST Editor, Watch Tab Page, or I/O Map.

 Changing Present Values on the Ladder Editor

Changing Present Values on the Ladder Editor

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

You can change the present values of variables directly on the Ladder Editor.

Procedure

1 On the Ladder Editor, right-click a variable and select Edit Variable Value or double-click the
present value that is displayed for a variable.

You can now change the present value.

2 Enter the new value and press the Enter Key.

7

The present value is changed. 7-2-3 Changing Present Values and Set/Reset Using Forced Refreshing

Precautions for Correct Use

If you use a variable for a subscript to specify an array element, a confirmation dialog box is
displayed for the element for which the present value is to be changed. Check the present val-
ues of the variable for the subscript to make sure that the present value of the correct element
will be changed before you click the OK Button.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-27

7 Debugging

 Changing Present Values on the ST Editor

Changing Present Values on the ST Editor
You can change the present values of variables directly on the ST Editor.

Procedure

1 On the ST Editor, click the drop-down arrow for the present value of a variable.
A text box or combo box is displayed below the present value according to the data type of the
variable.

2 Enter the new value and press the Enter Key.

The present value is changed.

Precautions for Correct Use

If you use a variable for a subscript to specify an array element, a confirmation dialog box is
displayed for the element for which the present value is to be changed. Check the present val-
ues of the variable for the subscript to make sure that the present value of the correct element
will be changed before you click the OK Button.

 Changing Present Values on a Watch Tab Page

Changing Present Values on a Watch Tab Page
You can change the present value of variables that are registered in a Watch Tab Page.

Procedure

1 Select Watch Tab Page from the View Menu to display a Watch Tab Page.

2 Move the cursor to the cell in the Modify Column on the Watch Tab Page, enter a value that is
compatible with the format that is given in the Display format Column, and then press Enter
Key. Press the Esc Key to cancel entering a value.
The present value is changed.

The format for entering a value in the Modify Column depends on the format that is given in the
Display format Column.
For details, refer to Display Formats under Changing the Display Format of a Present Value in
the Watch Tab Page on page 7-15.

7-28 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

• Examples of Entries in the Modify Column:

Display format Example

Boolean TRUE or FALSE
Decimal 10, -100
Real (floating-point) 123.4 1.234e2, 1.234E2, -1.23e-3
Hexadecimal 1001, FFFF8000
Binary 11110000
String abc, ABC

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

Duration 12345.678, -12345.678
Date 2030-04-05

Precautions for Correct Use

If you use a variable for a subscript to specify an array element, a confirmation dialog box is
displayed for the element for which the present value is to be changed. Check the present val-
ues of the variable for the subscript to make sure that the present value of the correct element
will be changed before you click the OK Button.

Additional Information

If you enter an illegal value in the Modify Column, an error is detected and the cell is highlighted
in red.

 Changing Present Values in the I/O Map

Changing Present Values in the I/O Map
You can change the present value of I/O ports in the I/O Map.

Procedure 7

7-2-3 Changing Present Values and Set/Reset Using Forced Refreshing

Double-click I/O Map under Configurations and Setup on the Multiview Explorer. The I/O
Map is displayed.

2 Select the I/O ports in the I/O Map.

3 Enter a value in the Value Column.

The present value is changed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-29

7 Debugging

Refer to Monitoring in the I/O Map on page 7-19 for the formats to enter.

Additional Information

If the value is entered in the wrong format, an error occurs. The illegal values are highlighted in
red and an error icon is displayed. Place the mouse over the error icon to view the error details.

Forced Refreshing

 Forced Refreshing
Forced refreshing allows the user to refresh external inputs and outputs with user-specified values
from the Sysmac Studio to debug the system.
Forced refreshing is executed not for the specified device variables, but for the I/O ports that are
assigned to the device variables.
The state that is specified with forced refreshing is retained until forced refreshing is cleared from
the Sysmac Studio. Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501)
or NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558) for
details on holding and clearing status changes in the CPU Unit.
All forced refreshing is cancelled when a fatal error occurs, when a Clear All Memory operation is
performed, when the operating mode is changed, when power is interrupted, or when the project is
downloaded.

CAUTION
Sufficiently confirm safety at the connected slave or Unit before you change the
value of an I/O port or device variable.
Not doing so may result in injury.

7-30 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Precautions for Safe Use

• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before you use forced refreshing.
• Forced refreshing ignores the results of user program execution and refreshes I/O with the
specified values.
If forced refreshing is used for program inputs for which it is not supported, the program in-
puts will first take the specified values, but they will then be overwritten by the user program.
• Discrepancies in the forced status may cause unexpected operation of the controlled system.

Precautions for Correct Use

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

If you use a variable for a subscript to specify an array element, a confirmation dialog box is
displayed for the element for which the forced status is to be changed. Check the values of the
variable for the subscript to make sure that the correct element will be changed before you click
the OK Button.

 Forced Refreshing and Canceling Forced Refreshing in the Ladder Editor

Forced Refreshing and Canceling Forced Refreshing in the Ladder Editor
Forced refreshing forces a program input or output to TRUE or FALSE in the Ladder Editor. Can-
celing forced refreshing removes the forced TRUE/FALSE values of the inputs and outputs.

Procedure for Forced Refreshing in the Ladder Editor

1 Double-click the ladder program or ladder function block under Programming in the Multiview
Explorer.

The rungs are displayed on the Ladder Editor. 7-2-3 Changing Present Values and Set/Reset Using Forced Refreshing

2 Right-click the program input or output and select Forced Refreshing - TRUE. The input or
output is forced to TRUE. Right-click the program input or output and select Forced
Refreshing - FALSE. The input or output is forced to FALSE.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-31

7 Debugging

The input or output in the Ladder Editor changes to TRUE or FALSE and the execution condi-
tion changes accordingly.
An icon also appears by the input or output that represents its current forced value.

 Procedure to Cancel Forced Refreshing from the Ladder Editor

1 Right-click the program input or output to clear in the Ladder Editor and select Forced
Refreshing - Cancel.

The forced value for the selected input or output is cleared and the forced value icon disap-
pears.
The TRUE/FALSE value does not change.

Additional Information

To cancel the forced status of all inputs and outputs, right-click and select Forced Refreshing -
Cancel All.

7-32 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

 Forced Refreshing and Clearing Forced Refreshing on a Watch Tab Page

Forced Refreshing and Clearing Forced Refreshing on a Watch Tab Page
You can force the I/O ports or memory addresses for CJ-series Units that are assigned to BOOL
variables that are registered on a Watch Tab Page to TRUE or FALSE and clear the forced values
on the Watch Tab Page.

Procedure for Forced Refreshing on a Watch Tab Page

1 Select Watch Tab Page from the View Menu.

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

A Watch Tab Page is displayed.

2 Select a BOOL variable in the Watch Tab Page.

3 Right-click the BOOL variable and select Forced Refreshing − TRUE from the menu. The I/O
port or memory address is forced to TRUE. Right-click the BOOL variable and select Forced 7
Refreshing - FALSE from the menu. The I/O port or memory address is forced to FALSE.

7-2-3 Changing Present Values and Set/Reset Using Forced Refreshing

The present value is displayed in the Watch Tab Page as shown below.
• When you select TRUE: True
• When you select FALSE: False
An icon also appears by the BOOL variable that represents its current forced value.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-33

7 Debugging

 Procedure for Canceling Forced Refreshing in a Watch Tab Page

1 Right-click the BOOL variable on the Watch Tab Page, and then select Forced Refreshing -
Cancel.
The forced value for the selected BOOL variable is canceled and the forced value icon disap-
pears.
The TRUE/FALSE value does not change.

Additional Information

To cancel the forced status of all BOOL variables, right-click and select Forced Refreshing -
Cancel All.

 Forced Refreshing and Canceling Forced Refreshing in the I/O Map

Forced Refreshing and Canceling Forced Refreshing in the I/O Map
You can force the I/O ports of BOOL device variables to TRUE or FALSE in the I/O Map.

Procedure for Forced Refreshing in the I/O Map

1 Double-click I/O Map under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer or right-click
I/O Map and select Edit from the menu.

The I/O Map is displayed.

2 Select the BOOL device variable in the I/O Map.

3 Right-click the BOOL variable and select Forced Refreshing - TRUE from the menu. The I/O
port is forced to TRUE.

7-34 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

Or, right-click the BOOL variable and select Forced Refreshing - FALSE from the menu. The
I/O port is forced to FALSE.

After you force the BOOL device variable to TRUE or FALSE, the value in the Value column in
the I/O Map changes to TRUE or FALSE to reflect that change.
An icon also appears by the BOOL device variable that represents its current forced value.
7

7-2-3 Changing Present Values and Set/Reset Using Forced Refreshing

 Procedure for Canceling Forced Refreshing from the I/O Map

1 Right-click the BOOL I/O ports in the I/O Map, and then select Forced Refreshing - Cancel.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-35

7 Debugging

The forced value for I/O port of the selected BOOL device variable is cleared and the forced
value icon disappears.
The TRUE/FALSE value does not change.

 Procedure to Clear All Forced Refreshing

1 Select Forced Refreshing - Cancel All from the Controller Menu to clear all of the forced re-
freshing.

7-2-4 Cross References

Cross References
Cross references allow you to see the programs and locations where program elements of the Con-
troller are used.
You can view all locations where an element is used from this list.
The following elements can be cross-referenced.
• Variables
• Data types
• I/O ports
• Functions
• Function blocks

7-36 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Displaying and Manipulating Cross References

1 Select Cross Reference Tab Page from the View Menu.

The Cross Reference Tab Page is displayed.

2 Select a referenced element.

The name of the selected referenced element is displayed in the Reference Target field, and
the locations where the element is used are listed under Cross Reference.

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

If the referenced element is a variable or a member of a variable, you can directly enter the
variable name or member name in the Reference Target field.
Refer to Referenced Element You Can Select on page 7-38 for the elements you can select
for reference.
For the areas where cross reference can be performed, refer to Areas for Cross Reference on
page 7-38.

(a) (b) 7
(c)

7-2-4 Cross References

(d)

Item Description
(a) Lock Button Click this button to lock the display of the referenced element and cross refer-
ence list. Click the button again to release the lock.
(b) Reference Target The referenced element that is currently selected is displayed. Or, you can di-
field rectly enter a variable name or variable member name as the reference target
in this field.*1
(c) Update Button This button is enabled only after the lock button is clicked and the display is
locked. When the Update Button is clicked, the cross reference list is updat-
ed.
(d) Cross reference The locations in which the referenced element is used are displayed. Refer to
list Cross Reference List Details on page 7-39, below, for details on items in the
list.
*1. Note that an error occurs if the following variables are entered. Also, an error occurs if the directly
entered element is not a variable.
• A variable in a POU that is protected with the display prohibition setting
• A variable in a library for which the Disable Source Display setting is used
• A variable in a library for which the Do Not Publish setting is used

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-37

7 Debugging

Referenced Element You Can Select

The following table shows the referenced elements you can select and the locations from which you
can select the referenced elements. You can select only the elements displayed with a focus in the
following locations.

Element Location
Var Global variable, axis • Global variable table
iabl variable, axes group • External variable tab in local variable tables (when you select external variables)
e variable, cam data • Input, output, I/O parameter of functions, or I/O parameter of function blocks on
variable, and exter- the Ladder Editor
nal variable • ST Editor
• Axis or axes group in the Multiview Explorer (when you select axis or axes group
variables)
• Cam profile in the Multiview Explorer (when you select cam data variables)
• Trace target variable table for data tracing
System-defined var- • Input, output, I/O parameter of functions, or I/O parameter of function blocks on
iable the Ladder Editor
• ST Editor
• Trace target variable table for data tracing
Internal variable, in- • Internal variable tab and in-out variable tab in local variable tables
put variable, output • Input, output, I/O parameter of functions, or I/O parameter of function blocks on
variable, and inout the Ladder Editor
variable • ST Editor
• Trace target variable table for data tracing (Note: Variables for functions are ex-
cluded.)
Return value for • Return value tab in local variable tables
functions • Input, output, I/O parameter of functions, or I/O parameter of function blocks on
the Ladder Editor
• ST Editor
I/O port I/O Map
Function • Ladder Editor
• ST Editor
• Function in the Multiview Explorer
Function block • Function block instance variable in local variable tables
• Ladder Editor
• ST Editor
• Function block in the Multiview Explorer
Data type Data Type Editor

Areas for Cross Reference

The following table shows the areas where the usage locations of referenced element are detected.
The areas vary depending on the type of the referenced element you select. The following areas are
displayed in the cross reference list if the referenced element is used in the areas.

Referenced element Areas where usage locations are detected

Variable • Input, output, I/O parameter of functions, or I/O parameter of function blocks on
the Ladder Editor
• Text in ST Editor

7-38 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Referenced element Areas where usage locations are detected

I/O port • I/O Map
• Global variable table
• Internal variable tab in local variable tables
Function • Ladder Editor
• ST Editor
Function block • Ladder Editor
• ST Editor
Data type • Data Type Editor

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

• Global variable table
• External variable tab, internal variable tab, and in-out variable tab in local varia-
ble tables

Cross Reference List Details

The following tables describe the contents of items displayed in the cross reference list. The title of the
displayed items differs depending on the type of the referenced element.

(a) (b) (c) (d)

Titles of items
7
Referenced element (a) (b) (c) (d)
Variable or I/O port Item Location Detail Reference

7-2-4 Cross References

Function Function POU Rung/Line Reference
number
Function block Function Block POU Rung/Line Reference
number
Data type Data Type POU/Definition Not displayed. Reference

Contents of items

Description
(a) The name of the referenced element is displayed.
(b) Locations where the element is used (POU name, global variable, and I/O Map) are displayed. The data
type is displayed if the referenced element is a data type.
(c) If the referenced element is used in the Ladder Editor or ST Editor, the rung numbers or line numbers of
the usage locations are displayed.
(d) The specific location where the referenced element is used is displayed.

List Display Example for Data Type Cross References

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-39

7 Debugging

Additional Information

• If the cross references are for a structure variable member, union variable member, or array
variable element, the variable that contains the member or element is displayed in the cross
reference list in addition to the specified member or element.
• If a cross reference is for an input variable or output variable of a function block instance, the
function block instance is also displayed in the cross reference list.
• You can select Fixed Target Cross Ref. from the pop-up menu on the Ladder Editor or ST
Editor to lock the cross reference items and display the cross reference list.
• If the same variable is used in the Controller and an NA-series PT, after you display the NA-
series PT, the usage locations of the NA-series PT are also displayed in the cross reference
list for the Controller.

Viewing Usage Locations from the Cross Reference List

You can view where elements are used from the cross reference list.
Select the item you want to find references for from the list. The locations where that item is used ap-
pear in the Edit Pane.

7-2-5 Online Editing

Online Editing
The online editing function is used to add to or change part of a program in the CPU Unit directly from
the Sysmac Studio.
You can select any of the following to perform online editing.
• Section and POU (function or function block) written in ladder diagrams

7-40 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

• POU (program, function, or function block) written in ST

• Global variable

Additional Information

You can change the set values of timers and counters during online editing.

WARNING
• Check the user program for proper execution before you use it for actual operation.

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

• Execute online editing only after you confirm that no adverse effects will be caused
to the operation of the master and slave axes if the synchronized control processing
time is extended.
• Before you perform online editing for a function or a function block, check the loca-
tions where the function or function block is used and confirm the range that will be
affected.

What Online Editing Can Do

The following table lists what you can and cannot do with online editing.

Item to edit You can You cannot

Section or POU a. Do the following for all rungs in the selected section a. Delete global or local
(function or function or POU: variables.
block) written in lad- Change the logic, b. Add global variables
der diagrams add or change variables, and change global vari-
add rungs, able attributes.*1
or delete rungs. c. Add local variables (ex- 7
b. Add or change rung comments. cept for internal and ex-
c. Add local variables (only internal variables (VAR) and ternal variables) to the

7-2-5 Online Editing

external variables (VAR_EXTERNAL)) to the selected selected section or
section or POU. POU.
d. Change global or local variable attributes for the se-
lected section or POU.*1
e. Add or delete calls to POUs (functions or function
blocks).
f. Add or change element comments.
A POU written in ST a. Change all of the logic in the selected POU. a. Delete global or local
b. Add local variables (only internal variables (VAR) and variables.
external variables (VAR_EXTERNAL)) to the selected b. Add global variables
POU. and change global vari-
c. Change local variable attributes in the selected able attributes.
POU.*1 c. Add local variables to
d. Add or delete calls to POUs (functions or function the selected POU (ex-
blocks). cept for internal and ex-
ternal variables).
Global variables a. Add variables. a. Delete variables.
b. Change the attributes of the selected variable.*1
*1. Refer to Variable Attribute Change Supported/Not supported on page 7-42 for details.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-41

7 Debugging

 Variable Attribute Change Supported/Not supported

The following table shows which attribute of local and global variables can be changed or cannot
be changed with online editing.
For global variables, whether changing is supported or not depends on the edit target for online ed-
iting.

Online edit changing supported/not support-

ed
Variable attrib- Global variable
Description Local
ute Edit target: Edit target: section or
varia-
global vari- POU written in ladder
ble
able diagram
Name Changing the variable name Not Not support- Not supported.
sup- ed.
ported.
Data Type Changing to a variable of a different Not Not support- Not supported.
type sup- ed.
ported.
Changing to a different size Not Not support- Not supported.
sup- ed.
ported.
AT Enabling/disabling the AT specifica- Not Not support- Not supported.
tion sup- ed.
ported.
Changing the allocated addresses Not Not support- Not supported.
sup- ed.
ported.
Initial Value Changing the initial value Sup- Supported. Not supported.
ported.
Retain Enabling/disabling the retain attrib- Not Not support- Not supported.
ute sup- ed.
ported.
Constant Enabling/disabling the constant at- Not Not support- Not supported.
tribute sup- ed.
ported.
Network Publish Specifying/not specifying Network Not Not support- Not supported.
Publish sup- ed.
ported.
Edge Changing the edge detection condi- Not Not support- Not supported.
tion of the input variable sup- ed.
ported.
Comment Changing the comment Sup- Supported. Supported.*1
ported.
*1. When the Use global variable comment check box is selected under External variable comments in
Ladder/ST Editors in the option settings, you can select external variables in the Ladder Editor to change
global variable comments.

Starting Online Editing

Go online with the Controller or Simulator and select Online Edit - Start from the Project Menu. Or,
right-click while the object to edit online is displayed and select Online Edit - Start.

7-42 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

This allows you to edit programs.

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

• To perform online editing, the data in the NJ/NX/NY-series Controller you are connected to must be
the same as the project data in the Sysmac Studio. If they are not the same, an error occurs and
online editing does not start.
• When online editing begins, you can edit the items that are displayed in the Edit Pane.
Example: To edit global variables, display the global variable table first and then start online edit-
ing.
• If there is no data to edit displayed in the Edit Pane, you can edit the selected item in the Multiview
Explorer. When you begin online editing, the selected data is displayed in the Edit Pane.
• You cannot start online editing unless editable data is selected in the Multiview Explorer or displayed
in the Edit Pane.
• You cannot change the item to edit during online editing. You must first stop online editing, change
the item to edit, then start online editing again.
7
Precautions for Correct Use

If the program algorithm check is enabled, the program algorithm check is performed when on-

7-2-5 Online Editing

line editing is started for any data with a different update date between the Controller and
project. If the program algorithms match, online editing is started even if there are differences in
rung comments, variable comments, or element comments.
However, comments may be unintentionally overwritten when the online edits are transferred.
To prevent this, disable the program algorithm check in the option settings. Refer to 8-23 Sys-
mac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for details on the option settings.

Transferring Changes Made during Online Editing

Perform online editing, and then select Online Edit - Transfer from the Project Menu. Or, right-click
while the location that you are currently editing online is displayed and select Online Edit - Transfer.
The results of online editing are transferred to the Controller or Simulator.
• If the item you changed during online editing is modified by any other Support Software (i.e., if Con-
troller data is modified after you start online editing), you cannot transfer the changes made during
online editing. If that happens, end the current online editing session and start online editing again.
• You can transfer changes made during online editing even if other items are modified by other Sup-
port Software.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-43

7 Debugging

Precautions for Correct Use

After you transfer the changes made during online editing, they are applied to the CPU Unit. Do
not turn OFF the power supply to the Controller while the changes are being applied.
While the changes are being applied, confirmation dialog boxes for the items that are transfer-
red and non-volatile memory backup dialog boxes are displayed.
If you turn OFF the power supply to the Controller while the changes are being applied, a major
fault level Controller error will occur when the power supply is restored. If an error occurs,
download the user program again.

Canceling Online Editing

Perform online editing, and then select Online Edit - Cancel from the Project Menu. Or, right-click
while the location that you are currently editing online is displayed and select Online Edit - Cancel.
All changes that were made after the online editing was started are canceled and the display before
the online editing was started is restored.

Displaying the Current Online Edit Pane

You can jump to the current online Edit Pane.

1 Select Online Edit - Go to Edit Pane from the Project Menu. Or, right-click and select Online
Edit - Go to Edit Pane.
The section or ST program for which online editing is currently in progress is displayed in the
Edit Pane.

Simultaneous Online Editing by More Than One User

More than one user can perform online editing simultaneously under the following restrictions with an
NJ/NX/NY-series Controller and the Sysmac Studio.

Operation Editing condition Restrictions Details

Starting online editing --- None If the conditions of the above Starting
Online Editing are satisfied, each user
can start online editing even when one or
more users already started online editing.
Transferring changes Users editing dif- None ---
made with online editing ferent POUs
Users editing the Only the user who Other users must cancel their changes
same POU or transfers the and perform synchronization before they
global variable changes first can start online editing again.
perform the trans-
fer.
Canceling online editing None None ---

Restrictions in Online Editing

• You cannot delete variables from variable tables during online editing.

7-44 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

• You cannot change the attributes of variables during online editing.

7-2-6 Changing the Operating Mode

 Operating Modes
There are two operating modes for NJ/NX/NY-series Controllers, depending on if control programs
are executed or not. These are RUN mode and PROGRAM mode.

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

Precautions for Safe Use

Always confirm the safety of the system before you change the operating mode of the Control-
ler.

 Procedure for Changing the Operating Mode

Use the following procedure to change the operating mode of the connected Controller.

1 Select Mode - RUN Mode or PROGRAM Mode from the Controller Menu.
One of the following confirmation dialog boxes is displayed.

Changing from PROGRAM to RUN Mode Changing from RUN to PROGRAM Mode

2 Confirm that no problem will occur even if you change the operating mode, and then click the
7
Yes Button.

7-2-6 Changing the Operating Mode

• When you change the operating mode, the values of all I/O devices except for those for vari-
ables with a Retain attribute are cleared.
• I/O devices are refreshed even in PROGRAM mode.
Check for any external influences on I/O device operations before you change the operating
mode.

7-2-7 Monitoring Controller Status

Controller Status Monitor

 Controller Status Monitor

You can monitor the connected Controller and displays the results in the Controller Status Pane.
You can view the Controller Status Pane only when online with the Controller or connected to the
Simulator.

 Displaying the Controller Status Pane

The Controller Status Pane is displayed in the same area as the Toolbox when online with the Con-
troller or connected to the Simulator.
Online with the Controller

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-45

7 Debugging

Connected to the Simulator

 Controller Status Pane Extended Operations

Use the buttons ( ) in the title bar of the Controller Status Pane to switch between the basic and
detailed views.

Detailed View When Connected to a Controller

Detailed View When Connected to the Simulator

 Controller Status Information

Detailed View

7-46 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

(c) (b) (a) (d) (e)

(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)

(r)

Basic View

(b)/(c) (a) (f) (d)

7
Displayed information and indi-
Display item Remarks
cator colors

7-2-7 Monitoring Controller Status

(a) Communications state • Normal communications: Green On the Basic View, only the color
• Communications error: Flashing of the indicator is displayed.
red
(b) Errors, Controller error • No Controller error: Green On the Basic View, only the color
• Partial or minor fault level Con- of the indicator is displayed.
troller error: Yellow
• Major fault level Controller er-
ror: Red
(c) Errors, user-defined error • No user-defined error: Green On the Basic View, only the color
• User-defined error: Red of the indicator is displayed.
(d) Controller operating mode • RUN mode: Yellow On the Basic View, only the mode
• PROGRAM mode: Not lit is displayed.
(e) Synchronization status • Synchronized: Green Nothing is displayed for the Simu-
• Not synchronized/Not executed: lator.
Yellow
(f) IP address IP address If the Controller has two
EtherNet/IP ports, both addresses
• NX701 Controller: IP address of
are displayed.
port 1/IP address of port 2
For the Simulator, Simulator is dis-
• NY-series Controller: IP ad-
played on the Basic View and ---
dress of port 1/IP address of in-
is displayed on the Detailed View.
ternal port 1

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-47

7 Debugging

Displayed information and indi-

Display item Remarks
cator colors
(g) Subnet mask Subnet mask If the Controller has two
EtherNet/IP ports, both subnet
• NX701 Controller: Subnet mask
masks are displayed.
of port 1/Subnet mask of port 2
--- is displayed for the Simulator.
• NY-series Controller: Subnet
mask of port 1/Subnet mask of
internal port 1
(h) Operation authority Administrator, Designer, Maintain- --- is displayed for the Simulator.
er, Operator, Observer, or unused
(i) Primary periodic task exe- Execution time (μs) ---
cution time
(j) Primary period Period time (μs) ---
(k) EtherNet/IP Tag Data Link • Communicating --- is displayed for the Simulator.
• One or more connections are
stopped, or no connection set-
ting.
(l) EtherCAT Process Data • Communicating --- is displayed for the Simulator.
Communications • One or more slaves are stop-
ped, or no slave setting.
(m) Serial ID Serial ID --- is displayed for the Simulator.
(n) Variable in Forced Re- Yes/None ---
freshing
(o) Unit version Unit version of CPU Unit --- is displayed for the Simulator.
(p) Project unit version in the The unit version set in the Sysmac --- is displayed for the Simulator.
Controller Studio project stored in the CPU
Unit
(q) Hardware revision The hardware revision of the CPU - is displayed if the hardware revi-
Unit sion is in blank.
--- is displayed for the Simulator.
(r) List of Controllers Con- CPU Unit name, Controller IP ad- The Controller status is displayed
nected Online dress, Communications, for all online Controllers.
Operating mode, Controller error, The items are the same as those
and User-defined error in the Controller Status Details.

7-48 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

7-2-8 Task Execution Status Monitor

 Task Execution Status Monitor

You can monitor the execution status of the tasks that execute programs on an NJ/NX/NY-series
Controller or in the Simulator.

 Displaying the Task Execution Status Monitor

1 Double-click Task Settings under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer.

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

2 Click the Task Execution Status Monitor Button ( ) in the Edit Pane.
The names of all tasks/programs that are currently in execution and their execution status are
displayed.

7-2-9 Task Execution Time Monitor

 Task Execution Time Monitor 7

You can monitor the execution time of each task when the user program is executed on an
NJ/NX/NY-series Controller or in the Simulator. When the Simulator is connected, you can also

7-2-8 Task Execution Status Monitor

monitor the real processing time of tasks.*1
This allows you to perform a Controller performance test.
*1. For an NY-series Controller, you cannot monitor the task execution time when the Simulator is connected.

 Contents of the Task Execution Time Monitor

Connected to the Controller
Go online with the Controller and then perform the following procedure.

1 Double-click Task Settings under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer.

2 Click the Task Execution Time Monitor Button ( ) in the Edit Pane.
You can view the following information for all executing tasks: minimum values, average val-
ues, maximum values, set periods, exceeded periods, task execution times, and task period
exceeded counts.*1
With an NJ-series Controller, you can also monitor the task execution time ratio for the entire
Controller.
*1. The task period exceeded count is the number of times that the task execution time exceeded the
task period. This is not the same as the number of times a Task Period Exceeded Error occurred.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-49

7 Debugging

For details on the settings, refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat.
No. W501) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat.
No. W558).

Connected to the Simulator

When connected to the Simulator, the time required from the beginning of task execution until it
ends is estimated through a simulation.
• You can display the estimated average execution time, maximum task execution time, and
CPU usage*1 for both the execution of periodic tasks and system services*1 that are execut-
ed from when task execution is started until it is completed.
• You can use the estimated times as a guide in determining task periods.
• You can run the Simulator in Execution Time Estimation Mode.
*1. This is displayed only for an NJ-series Controller.
Refer to Estimating Task Execution Times on page 7-86 for details.

Precautions for Correct Use

• The estimated times are not necessarily the same as the actual task execution times on the
physical Controller. Depending on the user program and I/O configuration, the execution
times on the physical control may exceed the estimated maximum value. Use the estimated
times as a guide in determining task periods.
• If you use tag data links, the execution times on the physical control may exceed the estimat-
ed values.

7-2-10 Axis Status Monitor (MC Monitor Table)

Axis Status Monitor

The Axis Status Monitor is used to monitor the error status, input signal status, command values, and
current values.
Note To monitor axis status, the axis must be registered and transferred to the Controller.

1 Go online.

2 Right-click Axis Settings under Configurations and Setup - Motion Control Setup on the
Multiview Explorer and select MC Monitor Table from the menu.
The Axis Status Monitor is displayed.

7-50 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

 Changing the Axis
Use the following procedure to change the axis to monitor.

1 Open the Axis Status Monitor.

2 Right-click anywhere in the pane and select Select the Axes to Show from the menu.
The following dialog box is displayed.
NX701 Controllers

7-2-10 Axis Status Monitor (MC Monitor Table)

NJ/NY-series Controllers and NX102 or NX1P2 Controllers

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-51

7 Debugging

Button Description Remarks

Select MC1: Primary Selects only the axes for which motion control This is displayed only
Periodic Task processing is executed in the primary periodic task for an NX701 Controller.
(MC1).
Select MC2: Priority-5 Selects only the axes for which motion control This is displayed only
Periodic Task processing is executed in the priority-5 periodic for an NX701 Controller.
task (MC2).
Select All Selects all of the axes.
Clear All Clears the selections of all of the axes.

3 Select the axis you want to display in the Axis Status Monitor, and then click the OK Button.
Only the selected axes are displayed in the Axis Status Monitor.

7-2-11 Data Tracing

Data Tracing

 Data Tracing
You can use data tracing to sample variables without any additional programming.
You can choose between two trace methods: a triggered trace, where you set a trigger condition
and data is saved before and after that condition is met, or a continuous trace, in which continuous
sampling is performed without any trigger and the results are stored in a file on your computer.
However, you can still display data retrieved on the Sysmac Studio and save those results to a file
even if you use a triggered trace.
These same functions can be used with the Simulator as well.

 Executing a Data Trace

1 Right-click Data Trace Settings under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer
and select Add - Data Trace from the menu.

7-52 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

DataTrace0 is added to the Multiview Explorer.

2 Double-click DataTrace0 or right-click DataTrace0 and select Edit from the menu.
The Data Trace Tab Page is displayed.

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

7
Additional Information

If there are previous trace results, a confirmation dialog box is displayed to ask whether to load

7-2-11 Data Tracing

the previous trace results when the Data Trace Tab Page is displayed.
When you click the No Button, the previous trace results are not loaded and the Data Trace Tab
Page is displayed faster than when the Yes Button is clicked.
To display the trace results after displaying the Data Trace Tab Page without loading the previ-
ous trace results, close the Data Trace Tab Page, open it again, and click the Yes Button to
confirm loading the previous results.

 Trace Type Setting

Select from the following two different trace types.
• Single Trace
Set a trigger condition to start sampling. Data from before and after the condition is met is saved.
Sampling stops automatically when the specified number of samples is reached. The setting
range of the number of samples is 100 to 10,000 per variable.
• Continuous Trace
Sampling starts without any trigger and continues on even after 10,000 data points are collected.
Sample data is transferred to a computer as it is collected and saved to a file.

Procedure

1 Click the Trace type Box and select either Single or Continuous.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-53

7 Debugging

Precautions for Correct Use

Some data may not be sampled when using a continuous trace depending on your sampling
interval and communications status.

 Setting Sampling Intervals

You can set the interval to perform sampling on the target data. You can set the sampling interval
with any of the three methods described below.
• Every Period of Task
Specify a task. The period of that task is set as the sampling period.
• Time
The time you enter is set as the sampling period. However, the time you enter is rounded off to
an integer multiple of the primary periodic task.
• Use Sampling Instruction
With this method, sampling is performed whenever the TraceSamp instruction is executed in the
user program.

Procedure

1 Click the sampling interval selection box and select Every period of task, Time, or Use
sampling instruction.

2 If you select Every period of task, select the task you want to use as the sampling period in the
task box.
If you chose Time, enter a time in the Time field. The time you entered is automatically rounded
off to the nearest integer multiple of the period of the primary period task. (The maximum value
is 65,535 times the task period of the primary periodic task.)

 Setting Number of Samplings

When you select Single for the trace type, set the number of samplings per variable to 100 to
10,000.

7-54 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

 Setting Triggers
• Setting Triggers

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

To perform a triggered trace, you set a condition to trigger sampling. A suitable trigger condition
is set to record data before and after an event.

Procedure

1 Select Single for the trace type.

A dialog box to set the trigger is displayed.

2 Select the Enable trigger condition Check Box.

7
3 Enter the variable name to use as a trigger.

7-2-11 Data Tracing

Set a condition for the variable. (Example: X1>100, x2<16#FF)

5 Set the Post-trigger data ratio Slider to the position of the trigger within the sampled data.
If the ratio is set to 100%, all data is sampled after the trigger condition is met. If the ratio is set
to 0%, all data is sampled before the trigger condition is met.

Additional Information

• The trigger changes to TRUE when the Trigger ON Button ( ) is clicked or when the Data
Trace Trigger (TraceTrig) instruction is executed.
• You can also drag variables from the Variable Manager to the trigger condition area to regis-
ter them.

 Setting a Continuous Trace

The method to save the data traced during a continuous trace is set.

Procedure
• Continuous Trace Settings Dialog Box

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-55

7 Debugging

1 Set the number of samples to save in each file.

2 Set the maximum size to save in a file.

3 Set the maximum time period to save data for.

4 Select from the following two actions to take when the size or time limit is reached.
• Stop tracing: Stops sampling.
• Delete old files: Continues sampling but deletes the oldest saved data to make room.

5 Select the folder where you want to save the file.

6 Enter the prefix for the file name.

The filename is output as follows: "prefix" "start_time" "5-digit_serial_number".csv (with no
spaces).

 Setting Variables to Sample

You must set the variable to trace. For information on the variables that you can set, refer to the
NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC /
Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558).

Procedure
• Trace Target Variable Table

 Adding Variables for Tracing

1 Click the Add Target Button ( ).

A trace variable line is added to the list.

2 Enter the variable name. Start typing in the field to see a list of variable candidates. Select the
variable you want to trace from this list.

7-56 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Additional Information

• You can also drag variables to the registration area from a variable table, from the Variable
Manager, or from the trace target variable table of other data trace settings to register them.
• Drag the sampled variables to change the order in which they are displayed. Press the Shift
Key or Ctrl Key to drag more than one variable at the same time.
• You can display sampled variables in ascending or descending order of the following items.
a) Check box
b) Analog/digital
c) Variable name
Click the title of the corresponding column to change the order.

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

 Deleting a Variable for Tracing

1 Select the line of the variable you want to delete.

2 Click the Remove Target Button or press the Delete Key.

 Starting and Stopping Tracing

You transfer the data trace settings to the Controller to start tracing. If you selected Single as the
trace type, tracing waits for the trigger to begin sampling. If you selected Continuous, sampling be-
gins immediately and all traced data is transferred to the computer as it is gathered and saved to a
file.

Procedures

 Starting a Trace
7
1 Go online with the Controller.

7-2-11 Data Tracing

2 Click the Execute Button.

If displaying a graph during tracing is enabled, the graph is drawn as soon as sampling starts.

 Stopping a Trace

1 Click the Stop Button.

Traces also stop automatically in the following cases.
• When the trace type is Single and the number of samples reaches the specified number of
samples
• When the trace type is Continuous, the maximum size or time period is reached, and the ac-
tion to take when a limit has been reached is set to Stop Tracing

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-57

7 Debugging

Additional Information

• If you select the Start tracing at switching from PROGRAM mode to RUN mode Check Box in
the Data Trace Tab Page, data tracing begins automatically the next time the Controller en-
ters RUN mode.
• You can perform more than one data trace at the same time. (The number of data traces de-
pends on the model of the CPU Unit.) You can change the trace number in the Data Trace
Setup Dialog Box to perform data tracing with different settings even if another trace is being
performed with a different number. With continuous tracing, you can run only one trace at the
same time. You cannot perform traces for other trace numbers from the same computer dur-
ing a continuous trace. (You can perform other traces from another computer.)
• If you attempt to start more than one data trace with the same trace number on the same
Controller, the data trace does not start even if you click the button.
• You can click the Upload Trace Data Button ( ) while the data trace is stopped if there is
sampled data on the Controller to upload the data trace settings (except for a continuous
trace) and data for the specified trace number. The graph for this data is displayed.
• Remain online during a continuous trace until you stop the trace. If you do go offline during a
continuous trace, go online and stop the current trace, and then start the continuous trace
again.

 Displaying Trace Results

You view the results of the traced data in either a chart or in 3D Motion Monitor. Refer to 3D Motion
Monitor Display Mode on page 7-66 for information on the 3D Motion Monitor Display Mode.
After sampling begins, sample data is immediately transferred and drawn on the graph.
The trace target variable table shows the maximum, minimum, and average values for each varia-
ble.

 Switching Graphs
You can toggle between the three different types of graphs: a digital chart for BOOL data, an ana-
log chart for all other types of data, and a 3D Motion Monitor Display Mode for viewing the opera-
tion of motion axes. You can also view the digital and analog charts overlaid on top of each other.

Procedure
Click the required button.

The buttons are described in the following table.

Button Description
Displays and hides a digital chart for BOOL data.

Displays and hides an analog chart for non-BOOL data.

Displays and hides the overlayed display of the digital and analog charts.

Displays and hides a 3D motion monitor results for the operation check of motion control
axes.

7-58 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

 Selecting the Display Target

You can show or hide trace target variable graphs.
Select or clear the check box for a trace target variable. Then, the graph appears or disappears
accordingly.

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

To select or clear the check boxes for all trace target variables at the same time, click the button in
the title row, and select Select all or Clear all.

Additional Information

You can also select the display target in the dialog box that is displayed when you select
Settings from the menu button in the title row.
7
 Changing the X Axis

7-2-11 Data Tracing

Used the following procedure to change the X axis of the digital and analog charts. You can also
specify a trace target variable.

Procedure

1 Select the data you want to use for the X axis in the X Axis Box.

The digital or analog chart is redrawn using the specified data as the X axis.

 Changing the Y Axis Display Mode

You can select whether to use a different Y axis for each variable or a common Y axis for all varia-
bles.

Procedure

1 Click the Independent Y Axis Mode Button.

2 Select the variable to display as the Y axis in the table.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-59

7 Debugging

3 You can change the display range for the Y axis for each variable. However, you cannot set the
Y offset.

 Zoom In and Zoom Out

You can zoom in and zoom out to view digital and analog charts. Digital charts can only be zoomed
in and out along the X axis.

Procedure

1 You can click the Zoom In ( ) or Zoom Out ( ) Buttons instead.

• This changes the scale of each axis. Zooming in and out along the X axis is reflected in both
the digital and analog charts.

• Click the Fit to Display Button ( ) to automatically scale the graph so that it completely fits
on the display.

Additional Information

You can also use the following methods to zoom in and out of the graph.
• Move your mouse over the axis you want to zoom in or zoom out, then scroll your mouse
wheel up or down to zoom in or out for that axis.
• Move your mouse over the graph and scroll your mouse wheel up or down to zoom in or out
both the X and Y axes centered on the position of the cursor.
• Hold down the Ctrl Key and drag the mouse to select a range to enlarge it.

 Moving Chart Display Area

This allows you to move the display area of the digital and analog charts.

Procedure

1 Click anywhere inside the chart. The mouse cursor changes into a move cursor.

2 Drag up, down, left, or right to move the display area.

Movement along the X axis is reflected in both the digital and analog charts.

7-60 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

 Specifying a Data Offset

You can shift data on the graph along the X and Y axes. Offsets can be applied only along the X
axis for digital charts.
This is a useful feature to use when you want to compare trends between data sets with different
starting points.

Procedure

1 Enter values for the X offset and Y offset settings in the trace target variable table.

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

The graph is updated to reflect the changes.

 Cursor Display
A cursor is displayed to show the values of all variables at the specified X axis value.

Procedure

1 Click the Cursor Button to show or hide this cursor.

7-2-11 Data Tracing

Select the variable for which to check the value in the table.

3 Drag the cursor to the left or right to display the values for different positions along the X axis.

The values for the variable at the cursor position are displayed.

 Moving the Cursor

You can move the cursor by dragging it on the chart or by using the playback controller.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-61

7 Debugging

(1) (6) (2) (3) (4)(5)

Button Function
(1) Time Slider You can drag the slider to move the cursor. The left edge is the start of the trace data
and the right edge is the end.
(2) Playback The cursor moves automatically at the speed that is specified in the Speed Box.
(3) Pause The cursor stops where it is.
(4) Stop The cursor returns to the start.
(5) Frame Forward Moves the cursor to the next sampled point. Continue to click the button to continu-
ously forward the frame.
(6) Frame Reverse Moves the cursor to the previous sampled point. Continue to click the button to con-
tinuously reverse the frame.

 Displaying the Range Cursors

The range cursors show the difference between the two specified points.
This is useful for displaying such information as the time between when a certain value changed to
TRUE until it changed to TRUE again.

Procedure

1 Click the Show Range Cursors Button to show or hide this cursor.

2 Select the variable for which to check the value in the table.

3 Drag the two cursors to the left or right to display the difference in values in the range between
the two cursors.
The distance between the two cursors (dx, dy) is shown on the graph.

7-62 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

 Displaying the Trigger Location

You can display a Trigger Location Line (a green wave line) to indicate where the trigger changed
to TRUE.
This information is displayed automatically. You do not have to enter it.

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

 Displaying a Digital Data Legend
You can display a digital data legend.

Procedure

1 Click the Show Legends Button.

The legends (variable names) are displayed on the left side of the digital chart.

7
 Changing the Graph Colors
You can change the colors of the lines on the graph.

7-2-11 Data Tracing

Click the color button for each graph color on the trace target variable table and then change the
colors on the Edit Colors Dialog Box.

 Changing the Display Position of the Trace Target Variable Table

You can change the display position of the trace target variable table to above or to the left of the
graphs.

Operation Procedure

1 Click the Switch layout Button on the Data Trace Settings Tab Page.

The display position of the table changes each time you click the button.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-63

7 Debugging

 Exporting Trace Results

Trace results are saved within your project automatically when you save the project on the Sysmac
Studio.
If you want to save this data as a separate file, you can export the data to a CSV file.

Procedure

1 Click the Export Button.

A Save File Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Specify the file name and where you want to save the file.

Precautions for Correct Use

• If you change any data trace settings after data tracing is completed and the graph is dis-
played and then export your data, the data exported will use different settings from when
those results were created. Do not change any settings before exporting the data.
• The exported CSV file of trace results is encoded in UTF-8 character codes.

Additional Information

• The trace number and the specified number of samples are not exported.
• The 3D equipment models are not exported.

 Importing Trace Results

If you want to import trace results or settings that you have exported, you can import a CSV file that
contains trace results data.

Procedure

1 Click the Import Button.

7-64 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

A Select File Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the CSV file you want to import.

Precautions for Correct Use

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

When you import a CSV file, import a file that was exported with the procedure described in
Changing the Display Position of the Trace Target Variable Table on page 7-63, above. If you
edit an exported CSV file, you may not be able to import it.

Additional Information

• If you import trace results when sampled variables are already registered or existing trace re-
sults are displayed, the sampled variables and the graphs are imported and added while oth-
er settings are not imported. Do not allow the total number of registered sampled variables
and sampled variables of imported trace results to exceed the maximum numbers that can be
registered. You cannot import data if the total number exceeds the limit.
• If you want to add data from a file to the trace results but the time axes are not the same,
enter an X axis offset to adjust the data accordingly.

 Importing Continuous Trace Data 7

You can consecutively import continuous trace results from more than one file. You can select the
trace range to display from the box to change the data that is displayed.

7-2-11 Data Tracing

1 Click the Import Button, select one of the CSV files of continuous trace data, and import it.
The data from the selected file is displayed and the selected range is displayed in the
Continuous Trace Range Selection Box.

2 Select the trace range for which to display the results from the list for the box.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-65

7 Debugging

The corresponding CSV file for the trace range is read and the graph is displayed.

Precautions for Correct Use

• You cannot use the above procedure for CSV files that do not contain continuous trace data.
• Place all of the CSV files that contain the separated continuous trace data in the same folder.
Do not change the names of the CSV files that were created. If you do, they cannot be read
with the above procedure.

Additional Information

The last trace range is displayed in the Continuous Trace Range Selection Box immediately af-
ter the continuous trace is completed.

 Printing Trace Results

You can print out data trace settings along with digital and analog charts.

Procedure

1 Select Print from the File Menu.

2 Expand Data Trace Settings in the tree in the Print Tab Page and select the check box beside
the trace data you want to print.

3 Click the Print Button.

3D Motion Monitor Display Mode

You set the axis variables for each element of the 3D equipment model, and then set the 3D equip-
ment into motion according to those axis motions. Refer to Creating 3D Equipment Models on page
7-73 for the procedure to create 3D equipment models.
• This motion is linked to the data trace time chart graph.

7-66 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

• You can also display the path of a marker on the 3D equipment at the same time.
• You can also display a two-dimensional path marker for each projection of the 3D display.

Precautions for Correct Use

This function is not supported by the Sysmac Studio (64 bit). The Display 3D Motion Monitor
Button is not displayed.

Additional Information

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

Sysmac Studio (64 bit) version 1.40 or higher support 3D Simulation which enables to check
operations or motions of 3D equipment models and parts in 3D Visualizer. Refer to the Sysmac
Studio 3D Simulation Function Operation Manual (Cat. No. W618) for details and the conditions
of use on 3D Simulation.

 Procedure for 3D Motion Monitor Display Mode

Procedure

1 Add an axis to the Multiview Explorer and then set the parameters of the axis variable.
Refer to 5-7 Motion Control Setup on page 5-78 for the setting procedure.

2 Create a program to operate the equipment.

Refer to Section 4 Programming on page 4-1 for the programming procedures.

3 Create the 3D equipment model with a data trace.

4 Register the trigger setting and variables to trace for the data trace.
Refer to 7-2-11 Data Tracing on page 7-52 for the operating procedures for data tracing. 7

7-2-11 Data Tracing

Go online with the Controller, change the operating mode to RUN mode, and execute the user
program.

6 Start tracing the data with the data trace to sample the data.

7 Check the trace results on the Data Trace Tab Page.

8 Click the Play Button in the Data Trace Tab Page.

The various items move synchronously on the display.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-67

7 Debugging

Play Button

(a)

(b)

(c)

(e) (d)

Items that move synchronously

(a) The cursor on the trace graph
(b) The elapsed time from the start of the trace
(c) The 3D machine model coordinate values
(d) The 2D display cursor
(e) The 3D equipment model

Additional Information

• You can also perform 3D motion monitoring when the Sysmac Studio is connected to the
Simulator. When the Sysmac Studio is connected to the Simulator, perform steps 4 and 5 for
the Simulator instead of the Controller.
• You can export trace data to save it in a CSV file and then import the data later to check oper-
ation.
Refer to 7-2-11 Data Tracing on page 7-52 for the operating procedures to import and export
trace data.
• If 3D Motion Monitor is displayed on other Data Trace Tab Pages, the 3D motion monitor
graph is displayed only on the tab page with the focus. During that time, the following mes-
sage is displayed on the other Data Trace Tab Pages: The 3D Motion Monitor is displayed on
another view. Click this view to display the 3D Motion Monitor again here.

Recording 3D Equipment Model Operation

Click the Record Button to save the 3D equipment model operation into an AVI file. Click the Stop
Button to stop recording.

 2D Path Display
The 2D paths of the markers for the projections in the 3D display are also shown.
The 2D path appears when you select X-Y, Y-Z, or X-Z in the box to switch between 3D/2D path
displays on the 3D Motion Monitor View.
• Optimizing Camera Position and Scale

7-68 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

The axis scale resolution and camera position are automatically optimized so that the entire path
fits onto the display.
• Viewpoint Manipulation Restrictions
On the 2D path display, you can only zoom in or zoom out. You cannot move or rotate your view-
point.
• Hidden Virtual 3D Machines
Even if virtual 3D machines are currently shown on the 3D path display, these virtual 3D ma-
chines are not shown on the 2D path display.

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

Display When X-Y Is Selected
This is what appears when you select X-Y in the box to switch between 3D/2D path displays on the
3D Motion Monitor View. In this case, the horizontal axis is the X axis and the vertical axis is the Y
axis.

7-2-11 Data Tracing

Display When Y-Z Is Selected
This is what appears when you select Y-Z in the box to switch between 3D/2D path displays on the
3D Motion Monitor View. In this case, the horizontal axis is the Y axis and the vertical axis is the Z
axis.

Display When X-Z Is Selected

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-69

7 Debugging

This is what appears when you select X-Z in the box to switch between 3D/2D path displays on the
3D Motion Monitor View. In this case, the horizontal axis is the X axis and the vertical axis is the Z
axis.

 Operations on the 3D Motion Monitor View

Viewpoint Operations
The movement of the mouse cursor affects the viewpoint depending on which of the three view-
point operation buttons is currently selected.

From left to right, these buttons are:

Move, Rotate, Zoom In/Zoom Out.

How the viewpoint changes when you drag

your mouse depends on which of these
buttons you click.

Button Icon Function

Move Viewpoint Button The mouse cursor changes when you click this button. This but-
ton allows you to drag the mouse around to change your view-
point up, down, left, or right in the 3D rendering area.

7-70 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Button Icon Function

Rotate Viewpoint Mode The mouse cursor changes when you click this button. This but-
Button ton allows you to drag the mouse around to rotate your view-
point around the center of the 3D display area of the Preview
Area.
Zoom In/Zoom Out Button The mouse cursor changes when you click this button. This but-
ton allows you to drag the mouse around to zoom in or zoom
out in the 3D display area.
Overhead View Button Click this button to automatically move the camera so that you
can display the entire equipment model from overhead in the

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

Preview Area.

You can also use the following keyboard shortcuts to change how you want to change the view-
point.
Shift: Move
Ctrl: Rotate
Shift + Ctrl: Zoom In/Zoom Out
If your mouse has a mouse wheel, you can scroll the wheel up or down to zoom in and zoom out.

Displays
Click the Add Display Button ( ) to add another display that is the same as the current display.

7-2-11 Data Tracing

You can now change the viewpoint independently for these two displays.

Example: Overhead View and End Effector Focus

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-71

7 Debugging

2D Path Display
In the View Mode Box, change 3−D to X−Y, Y−Z, or X−Z to display the motion path on a 2D plane.

Reading Trace Data

You can click the trace data loading button ( ) to load the most recent trace data and update the
3D Motion Monitor View.

7-72 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

Item Description
Load only the command values Check If you select this check box and read the trace data, only the
Box command values are used to draw the operation and trajectory
of a 3D equipment model.

Precautions for Correct Use

Even if you redisplay the 3D Motion Monitor View, the data is not updated until the trace data
loading button is clicked. Even if you change the 3D equipment model or otherwise redisplay
the 3D Motion Monitor, the 3D Motion Monitor display may not agree with the actual trace data.
To change the trace data, click the trace data loading button to update the display. 7

Additional Information

7-2-11 Data Tracing

If the trace data is updated while the 3D Motion Monitor is displayed, e.g., when the data trace
is completed, traced variables are deleted, or trace results are imported, a dialog box will ap-
pear to confirm loading the trace data. Click the Yes Button in the dialog box to load the most
recent trace data and update the display.

Creating 3D Equipment Models

You can create a 3D equipment model at the control target to monitor with 3D motion monitoring.

Precautions for Correct Use

This function is not supported by the Sysmac Studio (64 bit). The Display 3D Motion Monitor
Button is not displayed.

Procedure

1 Start the data trace and click the Display 3D Motion Monitor Button ( ).

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-73

7 Debugging

2 Click the Settings Button ( ) for the 3D equipment model in the 3D Motion Monitor View and
select Add from the menu.

The 3D Equipment Model Display appears.

3 Click the Overhead View Button ( ) in the Preview Area at the bottom of the 3D Equipment
Model Display.

The camera is positioned so that the entire device model can be seen from overhead in the
Preview Area.

4 Set the parameters, and then click the OK Button. The 3D equipment model is added.
The parameters are described below.
The 3D Equipment Model Window is made up of three sections. The procedures to set up
these sections are given below.

7-74 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

3D Machine Model
Parameter Settings
3D Machine Model List

Actual position in 3D
Machine selected for
preview

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

 3D Machine Model List
• You can edit the 3D machine model names in this list. If the name you enter conflicts with anoth-
er name elsewhere, an icon ( ) is displayed to indicate the error.
• You can click any check box in the list to select a 3D machine model. The color of the check box
that you select turns blue, and the parameter settings for that 3D machine model are shown in
the yellow-framed area on the right side of the figure above.
• Clear the check boxes beside the 3D machine models you do not want to display when you per-
form a 3D equipment motion test. Make sure that unwanted 3D machine models do not appear in
the Preview Area.
• Click the Add Button to add a 3D machine model to the list.
• Click the Delete Button to delete a 3D machine model from the list. After you click the button,
click the line of the 3D machine model you want to delete.
• When the 3D machine model display first appears, the first 3D model name in the list is selected
automatically.

 3D Machine Model Parameter Settings 7

Select a 3D machine type in the Type Box.

7-2-11 Data Tracing

Next, set the parameters for the 3D machine length, rotation direction for rotational axes, and cor-
responding axes to link axis variables with the movable parts of the 3D machine. The specific pa-
rameters depend on the type of 3D machine.

Additional Information

For an axes group in the Motion Control Function Module, select 2, 3, or 4 axes.

The following is an example of the parameter settings for an XYZ stage + rotational axis (upward)
3D machine.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-75

7 Debugging

Item Setting
X Stage: Length 1000
Y Stage: Length 1000
Rotate Axis: Rotate Direction CW (or CCW)
Corresponding axis settings Enter the following variables directly into the text boxes, or press the
Ctrl + Space Keys and select them from the list.
Axis MC_Axis000 for X stage,
Axis MC_Axis001 for Y stage,
Axis MC_Axis002 for Z axis,
Axis MC_Axis003 for rotational axis
Note The axes that you added in the previous section, Axis Settings for
3D Equipment Models, will appear in the boxes in the Value Col-
umn.
Present position 0,0,0
Orientation 0,0,0

 Preview
The 3D machine you have set up appears in the 3D coordinate system (world coordinates). The
position and orientation of the 3D machine is determined by the coordinate values.

Operations in the 3D Display

Button Icon Function

Selection Mode The mouse cursor changes when you click this button. This allows you
Button to select the 3D machines or other models in the Preview Area with
your mouse. Use this button to switch between Move Viewpoint Mode
(described below) and Selection Mode.
Move Viewpoint The mouse cursor changes when you click this button. This button al-
Button lows you to drag the mouse around to change your viewpoint up, down,
left, or right in the 3D display area in the Preview Area.
Rotate Viewpoint The mouse cursor changes when you click this button. This button al-
Mode Button lows you to drag the mouse around to rotate your viewpoint around the
center of the 3D display area of the Preview Area.
Zoom In/Zoom Out The mouse cursor changes when you click this button. This button al-
Button lows you to drag the mouse around to zoom in or zoom out in the 3D
display area of the Preview Area.
Overhead View Click this button to automatically move the camera so that you can dis-
Button play the entire device model from overhead in the Preview Area.

7-76 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Button Icon Function

Coordinate Sys- Click one of these buttons to change to a right-handed or left-handed
tem Buttons coordinate system for the equipment model display.
• Rotation direction for right-handed coordinate system: Right-hand
thread direction
• Rotation direction for left-handed coordinate system: Lefthand thread
direction

3D Space Size
You can change the coordinate axes of the 3D space and the size of the grid plane. If you change

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

the size of the 3D space, the length of the coordinate axes and the size of the grid in the Preview
Area also change.

Scale Resolution
You can change the scale resolution of the coordinate axes.

Unit
Select the coordinate axis scale unit from the following units: μm, nm, mm, cm, m, inches, or feet.

Precautions for Correct Use

If you create a new 3D equipment model on Sysmac Studio version 1.14, the unit will be fixed
at millimeters.

 Present Position
The position gives the home position where the 3D machine model is placed in the 3D coordinate
system (world coordinates) in the Preview Area. You can change this position by entering the differ-
ence (X, Y, Z) from the world coordinate home (0, 0, 0) where you would like the placement home
for the model to be. The position in the Preview Area is represented by two purple square pyra- 7
mids.

7-2-11 Data Tracing

 Orientation
The orientation is the angle of rotation of the 3D machine model local axes (Rx, Ry, Rz) centered
around the placement home point in 3D world coordinates.

Precautions for Correct Use

The rotation direction for a left-handed coordinate system is different for Sysmac Studio version
1.13 or lower and Sysmac Studio version 1.14 or higher.
• Sysmac Studio version 1.13 or lower: Left-handed coordinate system, right-hand thread di-
rection
• Sysmac Studio version 1.14 or higher: Left-handed coordinate system, left-hand thread direc-
tion
Therefore, if you open a 3D equipment model that was created on Sysmac Studio version 1.13
or lower on Sysmac Studio version 1.14 or higher, the sign of all orientation values is reversed.

 Placement Home
Click the shape made up of two purple square pyramids in the Preview Area. The local axes (X, Y,
Z) are displayed. Drag these local axes with your mouse to place the object directly in the Preview
Area. Select between position and orientation to modify the actual position and angle of rotation of
the model.

Setting Example

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-77

7 Debugging

In the following example, we add one orthogonal robot (XYZ + rotational axis) 3D machine and cre-
ate equipment made up of two orthogonal robots.

1 Click the Add Button ( ) in the 3D Machine Model List to add another 3D machine.
A new model is added to the 3D Machine Model List.

2 Select a 3D machine type in the Type Box.

3 Move the position of the 3D machine 500 (mm) along the X axis. Enter 500 into the "X" text box
in the Present Position Area. Confirm that the 3D machine changed positions in the Preview
Area.

7-78 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

7-2 Operations Used for Both Online and Offline Debugging

4 Click the OK Button.
The information you entered is saved, and the 3D Equipment Model Display closes.
A table representing the two orthogonal robots is added and the coordinate values for the end
effector position of each robot appears in the 3D Motion Monitor.

7-2-11 Data Tracing

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-79

7 Debugging

7-3 Offline Debugging

Offline debugging allows you to debug a program when you are not connected online to a Controller.
You can debug on a Simulator to check control program logic before transferring the project to the
Controller.

CAUTION
• Although the Simulator simulates the operation of the Controller, there are differ-
ence from the Controller in operation and timing. After you debug the user program
on the Simulator, always check operation on the physical Controller before you use
the user program to operate the controlled system.
Accidents may occur if the controlled system performs unexpected operation.
• The Simulator instructions are not processed on the physical Controller and all out-
puts from the instructions will be FALSE. After you debug the user program on the
Simulator, always check operation on the physical Controller before you use the
user program to operate the controlled system.
Accidents may occur if the controlled system performs unexpected operation.
• Simultaneous simulation for offline debugging of sequences and the HMI can be
performed to simulate the linked operation of the Controller and HMI. However,
there are differences in the operation and timing between this simulation and the
actual combination of the HMI and Controller. After you debug operation with the
simulation, always check operation on the physical Controller and HMI before you
use them in the actual system.
Accidents may occur if the controlled system performs unexpected operation.

7-3-1 Debugging with Program Simulation

To debug a control program, it is best to simulate the control program on the computer first to check
the operation logic and parameter settings. This process is called simulation debugging. The Sysmac
Studio comes with a Simulator that emulates all CPU Unit functions.

Simulation Procedures
Use the following procedure to start the Sysmac Studio and connect to the Simulator.

1 Start the Sysmac Studio and create a project.

2 Select Simulation Pane from the View Menu.

The Simulation Pane is displayed below the Toolbox Pane on the right of the window.

7-80 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

3 Use the Sysmac Studio to set the Controller Configurations and Setup and create a program.

7-3 Offline Debugging

4 Select Build Controller from the Project Menu to build the user program.
If you changed the programs, select Build Controller from the Project Menu to build them
again.

5 If you want to execute a specific task or only a part of a section or program, select the item for
simulation under Programming − Tasks in the Multiview Explorer. (Refer to Setting Simulation
Programs on page 7-82.)
7
6 Click the Run Button in the Simulation Pane. Or, select Run from the Simulation Menu.

7-3-1 Debugging with Program Simulation

7 After the Simulator is started and connected, the Online Indicator in the Controller Status Pane
is lit green and Simulator is displayed. In this status, the project is completely transferred to the
Simulator and RUN mode continues.

8 To stop the simulation, click the Stop Button in the Simulation Pane.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-81

7 Debugging

The connection to the Simulator is broken and the Simulator is exited.

9 To end the simulation, click the Close Button (×) in the Simulation Pane.

Precautions for Correct Use

You can start a simulation even if the user program exceeds the memory size. Check memory
usage before you transfer the user program to the Controller. Refer to 8-4 User Memory Usage
Monitor on page 8-23 for the confirmation procedure.

Additional Information

You can start the Simulator in PROGRAM mode during simulation execution. Select Run in
PROGRAM mode from the Simulation Menu.
Select Mode − RUN Mode from the Controller Menu to change to RUN mode after starting the
Simulator in PROGRAM mode.

Setting Simulation Programs

 Simulation Programs
You can set the task or programs to simulate. You can choose to simulate some or all of the pro-
grams in the user program.

 Procedure for Setting Simulation Programs

1 Select Simulation Pane from the View Menu.

The Simulation Pane is displayed.

A check box is displayed to the left of the names of programs listed under tasks in the Multi-
view Explorer to designate programs for simulation.
These check boxes are selected by default.

7-82 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

2 Clear the check boxes in the Multiview Explorer for any tasks, programs, or sections you do not
want to simulate.

Simulations are performed only for the selected tasks and programs.

7-3 Offline Debugging

Setting the Debug Programs

 Debug Programs
A debug program is program code used for offline debugging. This code contains instructions to
perform virtual input processing on inputs received from outside of the Controller, force user-de-
fined errors, and perform other such debugging tasks. 7
The debug program attributes can be set for each program. These programs can be executed only
on the Simulator. Simulation programs are treated as normal programs by the Simulator. Assign

7-3-1 Debugging with Program Simulation

them to a task to execute them. Debug programs are not included in the Simulator’s estimation of
execution times. This can increase the accuracy of the time estimates.

 Procedure for Setting Debug Programs

1 Right-click the program to debug in the Multiview Explorer and select Settings For Debugging
- Enable from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-83

7 Debugging

The program is given a debug program attribute.

2 Double-click the debug program.

The Ladder Editor or ST Editor is displayed.

3 Enter program code to test (virtual input processing, forcing user-defined errors to occur, etc.).

• After you have written a program as a debug program, you can right-click the debug program
and select Settings For Debugging - Disable to change the program to a normal program.

7-84 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

4 Assign the completed debug program to a task.

 Debug Program Example with Special Instructions

The following example shows a debug program that uses special simulation instructions.
You can use the simulation instructions only in the Debug Program Editor.
Refer to A-6 Simulation Instructions on page A-32 for details.

Main Program Example

An external signal is used to record the latch position for axis 0. Execution of positioning continues.

7-3 Offline Debugging

7

7-3-1 Debugging with Program Simulation

Debug Program Example

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-85

7 Debugging

When SIMSEL_En turns ON, an external input signal is sent to LatchID (1) for axis 0.

You can check the operation of the debug program by performing a data trace.

Latched position
recorded.

External latch input signal turned ON.

Estimating Task Execution Times

The time required from the beginning of task execution until it ends is approximated through a simula-
tion.
• You can display the estimated average and maximum task execution time for both the execution of
periodic tasks and for system services*1 that are executed from when task execution is started until
it is completed.
• You can use the estimated times as a guide in determining task periods.
Run the Simulator in Execution Time Estimation Mode after you have calibrated execution time esti-
mation.
*1. This is displayed only for an NJ-series Controller.

7-86 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Precautions for Correct Use

• The estimated times are not necessarily the same as the actual task execution times on the
physical Controller. Depending on the user program, I/O configuration, and whether commu-
nications are used the execution times on the physical control may exceed the estimated
maximum value. Use the estimated times as a guide in determining task periods.
• With an NX-series Controller, you can display estimated values only for the primary periodic
task.
• You cannot display the estimated values on NY-series Controllers.
• You can calculate the estimated values for the priority-5 periodic task of an NX701 Controller
on paper. Refer to Estimating the Task Execution Time of the Priority-5 Periodic Task of an
NX701 Controller on page 7-91.

Additional Information

• The system services for NX701 Controllers are executed in parallel with other processes.
They are not displayed in the Task Execution Time Monitor because they do not affect the
task execution time.
• You can calculate the estimated values for the task execution time of an NY-series Controller
on paper. Refer to the NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W558) for details on the calculation method.

7-3 Offline Debugging

 Calibrate for Execution Time Estimates
To calculate estimated program execution times, calibration is performed for the relative perform-
ance of the physical Controller and the CPU of the computer.
To increase the accuracy of execution time estimation, perform this procedure at least once after
you install the Sysmac Studio and once after each automatic update.

Additional Information 7
Perform the following operations before you calibrate for execution time estimation.

7-3-1 Debugging with Program Simulation

• Except for this utility, exit all applications that are running on the computer, including the Sys-
mac Studio. This utility will continue operation even if you close the Sysmac Studio.
• If you are using a notebook computer, set the power supply to remain ON continuously.

Procedure

1 Select Calibration from the Simulation Menu.

The calibration tool for execution time estimation is started.

2 Follow the instructions in the dialog box and click the Execute Button.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-87

7 Debugging

Calibration is started.
Approximately 10 minutes is required to complete calibration.

 Displaying Estimated Task Execution Times

To run the Simulator in Execution Time Estimation Mode, set the following configurations so that
they agree with the actual configurations and create the programs to execute.
• EtherCAT axes and slave configuration
• CPU Unit and Unit configuration

Additional Information

Exit all applications that are running on the computer except for the Sysmac Studio.
Other applications may affect the accuracy of estimates.

Procedure

1 Select Run in Execution Time Estimation Mode from the Simulation Menu.
The Simulation Pane is displayed and simulation is started in the Execute Time Estimation
Mode.

The Execution Time Estimation Mode is displayed.

If the Unit has a hardware revision, a dialog box is displayed to select the hardware revision.
Select the hardware revision of the CPU Unit you will use.

2 Double-click Task Settings under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer.
The Task Settings Tab Page is displayed in the Edit Pane.

3 Click the Task Execution Time Monitor Button ( ).

The Task Execution Time Monitor is displayed.

7-88 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

The Task Execution Time Monitor contains the following items.

Item Description
Task Execution Time • Average and Maximum: The estimated, average and maximum execution
times for each task are displayed from when execution of the primary peri-

7-3 Offline Debugging

odic task was started.
• Set Period: The task period that is set in the Task Setup is displayed.
• Task Execution Count: The number of times the task is executed is dis-
played.
Real Processing The I/O refreshing time, system common processing times, user program exe-
Times of Tasks cution time, motion control processing time, and the total of all those times are
displayed.
System service exe- The system service execution time ratio that is set in the System Service
Monitoring Settings of the Controller Setup is displayed.
7
cution ratio*1
Tag data link service The predicted value of the percentage of the tag data link execution time in the

7-3-1 Debugging with Program Simulation

execution ratio*1*2 task execution time is displayed.
Estimated CPU usage The percentage of the total of the following times in the task period is dis-
rate*1 played.
• Estimated maximum value of the task processing time
• Required system service processing time (for system service monitoring)
• Tag data link service execution time
If 100% is exceeded for the total of these values, it means that there is not suf-
ficient time for the task processing time, the system service monitoring set-
tings, and the tag data link service execution time.
Resetting Execution Click the Reset Button. The average and maximum task execution times and
Times the real processing times of the tasks are initialized and estimated again.
Expanded number of Enter the total number of input and output words for CJ-series Units.
I/O points for CJ-ser-
ies Unit*1
Built-in EtherNet/ Set the parameters for calculating the predicted value of the tag data link exe-
IP*1*2 cution time.
*1. This is displayed only for an NJ-series Controller.
*2. A CPU Unit with unit version 1.03 or later and Sysmac Studio version 1.04 or higher are required to
use this function.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-89

7 Debugging

4 If you are using a CJ-series Unit with an NJ-series Controller, click the Expanded number of
I/O points for CJ-series Unit Button.

The Expanded Number of I/O Points for CJ-series Unit Dialog Box is displayed.

5 Create the user-defined variables for the specified CJ-series Special Units, enter the total size
of the expansion area for AT specifications (e.g., fixed I/O allocations for DeviceNet Units), and
the click the OK Button.

The size of the expansion areas is used to calculate the I/O refresh time for the specific CJ-
series Special Units.

6 If you are using tag data links, click the Built-in EtherNet/IP Button.
The Tag Data Link Settings Dialog Box is displayed.

7-90 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Edit the parameters for the tag data links, and then click the OK Button.
The parameters that you set are used to calculate the tag data link service execution time.
If you are using a CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit, click the Expanded number of I/O points for
CJ-series Unit Button and make the settings for the tag data links.
Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) for information
on the parameters.

7 Make sure that the task execution times do not exceed the task execution processing times
(i.e., the task periods).

 Estimating the Task Execution Time of the Priority-5 Periodic Task of an

NX701 Controller

7-3 Offline Debugging

To estimate the task execution time for the priority-5 periodic task of an NX701 Controller, use the
transmission delay times of the EtherCAT master that are displayed on the Sysmac Studio. For in-
formation on how to calculate the estimated task execution times on paper, refer to the NJ/NX-
series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501).
This section describes how to display the transmission delay times of the EtherCAT master.

1 Right-click the master or a slave and select Calculate Transmission Delay Time of the 7
Master in the EtherCAT Tab Page.

7-3-1 Debugging with Program Simulation

2 The transmission delay times of PDO communications cycle 1 and PDO communications cycle
2 are displayed in the Output Tab Page.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-91

7 Debugging

Additional Information

You cannot select this menu command if there is an error in the EtherCAT configurations and
setup.

Changing the Simulation Speed

 Changing the Simulation Speed

When debugging, you may want to run the Simulator at a slower speed than normal. To do this,
drag the Simulation Speed Slider in the Simulation Pane. You can change the simulation speed
from 0.1x to 1x. You can change simulation speed while a simulation is in progress or when it is
stopped.

 Procedure

1 Drag the Simulation Speed Slider in the Simulation Pane.

The simulation speed on the computer will change between 0.1x and 1x.

Setting Breakpoints

 Setting Breakpoints
You can set breakpoints to stop execution of a simulation, e.g., to see the status after a specific
program is executed.

 Procedure
There are three ways to set breakpoints.
• Right-click an element in a ladder diagram rung or a specific line of ST code, and select
Breakpoints - Set/Clear Breakpoint. A breakpoint is added at the specified position in the pro-
gram.
• Select a ladder diagram element or line of ST code and select Simulation - Set/Clear
Breakpoint from the Main Menu.
• Select a ladder diagram element or line of ST code and click the Set/Clear Breakpoint Button in
the Simulation Pane.

7-92 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Use the following procedure to set a breakpoint in the ST Editor.

1 Click the Run Button in the Simulation Pane.

2 Place your cursor on the line number of the line where you want to set a breakpoint in the ST
Editor.

3 Select Set/Clear Breakpoint from the Simulation Menu.

7-3 Offline Debugging

A breakpoint is set on the line designated by the cursor in the ST Editor, as shown below. The 7
program stops at the breakpoints you set.

7-3-1 Debugging with Program Simulation

Enabling/Disabling Breakpoints
You can disable breakpoints while maintaining their set positions and enable them back again.
The program continues to run without stopping even if it reaches disabled breakpoints during simula-
tion.
You can enable or disable breakpoints in the Ladder Editor or ST Editor.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-93

7 Debugging

 Procedure to Enable or Disable a Breakpoint

1 Right-click an element in a ladder diagram rung or a specific line of ST code where a break-
point is set, and select Breakpoints - Enable/Disable Breakpoint from the pop-up menu.
The breakpoint is disabled and the breakpoint icon changes to the disabled status.

Icon Enabled Disabled

Breakpoint

Conditional breakpoint

To enable the breakpoint again, select Enable/Disable Breakpoint from the pop-up menu
again.

Additional Information

You can also use the following method to enable or disable breakpoints.
• Select Enable/Disable Breakpoint from the Simulation Menu.
• Press the Ctrl + F9 Keys.

Step Execution

 Step Execution
You can execute a program one line at a time in the ST Editor or one instruction at a time in a lad-
der diagram.

1 When offline or when you execute a program through the Simulator, click the Step Execution
Button in the Simulation Pane when the program is stopped or when it is paused at a break-
point.

The cursor moves to the next execution step in the ST Editor.

2 Select Watch Tab Page from the View Menu. The Watch Tab Page is displayed so that you
can check for changes in the value of variables.

7-94 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Additional Information

The position where the program is paused is highlighted in yellow.

Continuous Step Execution

Use the following procedure to perform continuous step execution.

When offline or when you execute a program through the Simulator, click the Continuous Step
Execution Button in the Simulation Pane when the program is stopped at a breakpoint, paused,
or stopped during step execution.

The cursor moves to the next execution step in the ST Editor after a fixed period of time (1 second).
The time required to move to the next step depends on the program.

7-3 Offline Debugging

Pausing
Use the following procedure to pause simulations.

Click the Pause Button in the Simulation Pane when a simulation is in progress.

7-3-1 Debugging with Program Simulation

The cursor stops moving. Execution of the program is paused, but the Simulator does not close.

Step In Execution
Use the following procedure to perform step execution of source code inside a function or function
block.

When you execute a program through the Simulator, click the Step In Button in the Simulation
Pane when the program is at a function or function block instance when execution is stopped
for a breakpoint, paused, or stopped during step execution.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-95

7 Debugging

Step Out Execution

Use the following procedure to leave a function or function block currently in Step In Execution.

Click the Step Out Button in the Simulation Pane when the simulation is stopped in a function
block currently in step in execution.

One-period Execution
Use the following procedure to execute the current task for one period. This function pauses execution
at the start of the program in the next period.

When offline or when you execute a program through the Simulator, click the Execute One
Scan Button in the Simulation Pane when the program is stopped at a breakpoint, paused, or
stopped during step execution.

Setting Conditional Breakpoints

Conditional breakpoints allow you to set conditional expressions at breakpoints that are set in a pro-
gram.

1 Click the Breakpoint Window Button in the Simulation Pane.

The Breakpoint Window is displayed with a list of the breakpoints that you have already set.

7-96 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

2 Select a breakpoint. Click the Set Conditional Breakpoint Button.

7-3 Offline Debugging

7

7-3-1 Debugging with Program Simulation

The following dialog box for editing is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-97

7 Debugging

For this example, here we have entered a conditional expression of VarA = 13. (VarA is the
variable name.)

3 In the Edit Condition Area, enter the condition for breaking, and then click the Add Button.

4 Check to confirm that your conditional expression was added under List of Conditions, and
then click the OK Button.

5 Click the Run Button in the Simulation Pane.

Execution pauses at the specified location when any of the specified breakpoint conditions are
met.

Batch Transfer of the Present Values of Variables

You can save the values of variables at specific times during simulations in a file, or you can write the
values of variables that were saved in a file back to the Simulator. This allows you to write the initial
values of variables, e.g., for test applications, before you start a simulation.
The data that is gotten or written includes the retained and non-retained variables in the program for
which the simulation is performed.

 Getting the Present Values of Variables

1 Click the Pause Button in the Simulation Pane. Or, select Pause from the Simulation Menu.

2 Click the Transfer All Variable Present Values Button in the Simulation Pane. Or, select
Transfer All Variable Present Values from the Simulation Menu.

7-98 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

The Transfer All Variable Present Values Dialog Box is displayed.

7-3 Offline Debugging

3 Click the Read Button.
The Save As Dialog Box is displayed.

4 Enter a file name, and then click the Save Button.

A file is created that contains the values of the variables the instant that the Read Button was
clicked.
7
5 Click the Close Button.
The Transfer All Variable Present Values Dialog Box is closed.

7-3-1 Debugging with Program Simulation

Click the Run Button in the Simulation Pane. The simulation is started again.

 Writing the Present Values of Variables

1 To display the Transfer All Variable Present Values Dialog Box, perform the first two steps in
the procedure to get the present variables.

2 Click the Write Button.

The Open File Dialog Box is displayed.

3 Select the file that contains the saved variable values, and then click the Open Button.
The values of the variables that were saved in the file are written.
If you click the Run Button in the Simulation Pane, the simulation is restarted with the written
variable values.

Precautions for Correct Use

If any of the variables that are saved in the selected file are different from the variables in the
program when the variable values are written, only the values of the variables that are in the
program will be written.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-99

7 Debugging

Additional Information

• You can use a text editor to edit the file that is saved. This allows you to delete unnecessary
variables so that you can write only specific variables.
• In Sysmac Studio version 1.17 or higher, the following restrictions apply to mutual use of data
between the Backup Variables and Memory and Transfer All Variable Present Values func-
tions.
a) Although the Backup Variables and Memory function supports the XML and CSV file for-
mats, the Transfer All Variable Present Values supports only the CSV file format.

7-3-2 Offline Debugging of Sequence and Motion Control Programs

You can visualize the operation of sequence and motion control programs in a Data Trace Tab Page.
You use a Data Trace Tab Page for offline debugging when connected to the Simulator. You can use
any of the following three formats on the Data Trace Tab Page.
• Time chart graph for each variable
• Path graph for each axis
• 3D machine operation on 3D graph

Precautions for Correct Use

This function is not supported by the Sysmac Studio (64 bit). You cannot create a 3D equipment
model.

Additional Information

Sysmac Studio (64 bit) version 1.40 or higher support 3D Simulation which enables to check
operations or motions of 3D equipment models and parts in 3D Visualizer. Refer to the Sysmac
Studio 3D Simulation Function Operation Manual (Cat. No. W618) for details and the conditions
of use on 3D Simulation.

Axis Settings for 3D Equipment Models

You must perform axis settings to link axis variables for motion control to a machine model of a 3D
equipment model.
The following is an example of how to set up four axes in a 3D equipment model.

1 Add the axes in the Motion Control Setup.

Right-click Axis Settings under Configurations and Setup - Motion Control Setup and se-
lect Add - Axis Settings from the menu.

7-100 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

As shown below, a new axis called MC_Axis000 (0) is added.

7-3 Offline Debugging

2 Perform the same steps three more times to add axes MC_Axis001 (1) to MC_Axis003 (3).
7

7-3-2 Offline Debugging of Sequence and Motion Control Programs

3 Specify the axis settings.

Right-click Axis Settings and select Axis Setting Table from the menu. Enter the following
settings for axes MC_Axis000 (0) to MC_Axis003 (3).

Item Setting
Axis Use Used axis
Axis type Virtual servo or servo axis
Unit mm

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-101

7 Debugging

 Procedure

1 Add an axis to the Multiview Explorer and then set the parameters of the axis variable.
Refer to 5-7 Motion Control Setup on page 5-78 for the setting procedure.

2 Create a program to operate the equipment.

Refer to Section 4 Programming on page 4-1 for the programming procedures.

3 Create the 3D equipment model with a data trace.

Refer to Creating 3D Equipment Models on page 7-73 for the procedure to create 3D equip-
ment models.

4 Register the trigger setting and variables to trace for the data trace.
Refer to 7-2-11 Data Tracing on page 7-52 for the operating procedures for data tracing.

5 Execute a simulation.
Refer to Simulation Procedures on page 7-80 for the execution procedures.

6 Start tracing the data with the data trace to sample the data.

7 Check the trace results on the Data Trace Tab Page.

8 Click the Play Button on the Data Trace Tab Page.

7-102 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

The following move synchronously: the cursor on the trace graph, the 3D machine model, and
the cursor in the 2D view.
Refer to 3D Motion Monitor Display Mode on page 7-66 for the operating procedures for 3D motion
monitoring.

7-3-3 Offline Debugging for Sequence Control and Vision Sensor

You can simulate the linked operation of sequence control and a Vision Sensor to debug them offline.
Use the following procedure.
1. Add the Vision Sensor to the configuration of EtherCAT slaves.
2. Set up the Vision Sensor.
3. Use the control bits to enter a measurement trigger and confirm the results.
The actual procedure from adding the Vision Sensor to the configuration of EtherCAT slaves to check-
ing the results is given below.

 FQ-M-series Vision Sensors

1 Add an FQ-MS12x-ECT... Vision Sensor to the configuration of EtherCAT slaves.

7-3 Offline Debugging

Refer to 5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup on page 5-4 for the procedure to register
EtherCAT slaves.

7-3-3 Offline Debugging for Sequence Control and Vision Sensor

2 Set up the Vision Sensor.
Double-click FQ-MS12x-ECT... that was added to the Multiview Explorer.

The Setup Tab Page for the FQ-MS12x-ECT... is displayed for the Edit Pane. Make all of the
required setting. Refer to the FQ-M-series Specialized Vision Sensor for Positioning User’s
Manual (Cat. No. Z314) for the setup procedures.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-103

7 Debugging

After you complete setting up the FQ-MS12x-ECT..., change to RUN Mode to perform offline
debugging. Refer to the FQ-M-series Specialized Vision Sensor for Positioning User’s Manual
(Cat. No. Z314) for the setup procedures.

3 Start the monitor.

Right-click the FQ-MS12x... in the Multiview Explorer and select Start Monitoring from the
menu.

4 After the monitor starts, specify the measurement image.

Click the Select Image File Icon, and select the image.

5 Select Run from the Simulation Menu.

The Simulator starts.

6 Manipulate the control bits in the sequence controls to execute measurements. The measure-
ment results are displayed in the Monitoring Area.

7-104 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

7-3 Offline Debugging

Refer to the FQ-M-series Specialized Vision Sensor for Positioning User’s Manual (Cat. No.
Z314) for the items that you can execute during offline debugging.

 FH-series Vision Sensors

1 Add an FH-XXXX Vision Sensor to the configuration of EtherCAT slaves.

7
• Drag a FH-XXXX from the Toolbox to the EtherCAT Tab Page.
• Select the master on the EtherCAT Tab Page, and then double-click FH-XXXX in the

7-3-3 Offline Debugging for Sequence Control and Vision Sensor

Toolbox.

Refer to 5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup on page 5-4 for details on the procedure to
register EtherCAT slaves.

2 Set up the Vision Sensor.

Double-click Scene data or System data under NodeX:FH-XXXX − Line X in the Multiview
Explorer.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-105

7 Debugging

The Setup Tab Page for the scene or system data is displayed in the Edit Pane. Make all of the
required settings. Refer to the Vision System FH/FHV Series Operation Manual for Sysmac
Studio (Cat. No. Z343) for the setup procedures.

3 Write the program to operate the device and build the program.
Refer to Section 4 Programming on page 4-1 for the programming procedures.

4 Open the Monitor Window.

Right-click Line X under FH-XXXX in the Multiview Explorer and select Monitor window from
the menu.

5 Specify the measurement image.

Click the Select Image File Icon, and select the image.

6 Select Run from the Simulation Menu.

The Simulator starts.

When the Simulator is connected, it creates an internal EtherCAT connection between the
NJ/NX/NY-series Controller and FH-series Sensor Controller and the NJ/NX/NY-series Control-
ler enters an Operational state.
Refer to 7-3-1 Debugging with Program Simulation on page 7-80 for the procedures to use the
Simulator.

7 Manipulate the control bits in the sequence controls to execute measurements. The measure-
ment results are displayed in the Monitor Window.

7-106 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

7-3 Offline Debugging

Precautions for Correct Use

You can execute simulations of sensor control programs only for the Vision Sensor that you are
currently editing. You cannot perform simulations for more than one FH Vision Sensor at the
same time.
7
Additional Information

7-3-4 Offline Debugging for Sequence Control and Displacement Sensor

If Run Mode in the Response Area (Status Flag: Run Mode) is OFF when you execute a simu-
lation, open the Monitor Window. Run Mode will turn ON when you open the Monitor Window.

7-3-4 Offline Debugging for Sequence Control and Displacement Sen-

sor
You can simulate the linked operation of sequence control and a Displacement Sensor to debug them
offline.
Use the following procedure.
(1) Add the Displacement Sensor to the configuration of EtherCAT slaves.
(2) Set up the Displacement Sensor.
(3) Input the control flags as necessary and check the measurement results.
The actual procedure from adding the Displacement Sensor to the configuration of EtherCAT slaves to
checking the results is given below.

1 Add an ZW-CE1x Displacement Sensor to the configuration of EtherCAT slaves.

Refer to 5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup on page 5-4 for the procedure to register
EtherCAT slaves.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-107

7 Debugging

2 Set up the Displacement Sensor.

Double-click the ZW-CE1x that you added to the EtherCAT Tab Page.
The Setup Tab Page for the ZW-CE1x is displayed in the Edit Pane. Make all of the required
setting. Refer to the ZW-series Confocal Fiber Type Displacement Sensor User’s Manual (Cat.
No. Z332) for the setup procedures.

3 Set up the simulation data.

When you execute the simulation, specify the file in which to store the measurement values
that are output by the ZW Displacement Sensor. Refer to the ZW-series Confocal Fiber Type
Displacement Sensor User’s Manual (Cat. No. Z332) for the setup procedures.
If the file is not specified, “0 mm” is output as the task measurement values during simulation.

The following format must be used.

File format: CSV
Data format: As shown below (Data for up to 120,000 indices can be read.)

Index, Task1 Task2, Task3, Task4

0, 0.12345, 0.213, 0, 0,
1, 0.12345, 0.213, 0, 0,
2, 0.12345, 0.213, 0, 0,
3, 0.12345, 0.213, 0, 0,
119999, 0.12345, 0.213, 0, 0,

The data for one index is output to the file for each simulation cycle. When all of the data has
been output, the data is output again from the beginning.

4 Select Run from the Simulation Menu.

The Simulator starts.

7-108 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

5 Check the I/O Map.

Double-click I/O Map on the Multiview Explorer. The I/O Map is displayed in the Edit Pane. The
simulation data is updated on the display. Check to see if the program operates as intended.

Additional Information

This simulation can be used to check the behaviour of ZW control signals. Measurement proc-
essing for the control signals is not simulated. (This includes zero reset processing for the zero
reset signal and hold processing for timing signals.)

7-3-5 Offline Debugging with Sequence Control and NA-series PT

Simulator (Simultaneous Simulation of Controller with NA-series
PT)
You can simulate the linked operation of sequence controls and an NA-series PT to perform offline de-
bugging for the sequence program and NA-series PT application at the same time.
Select an NA-series PT in the same project and perform the following procedure.

1 Select Run with NA Simulator from the Simulation Menu.

7-3 Offline Debugging

7

neous Simulation of Controller with NA-series PT)

A dialog box to select the NA-series PT is displayed. 7-3-5 Offline Debugging with Sequence Control and NA-series PT Simulator (Simulta-

2 Select the NA-series PT for which to perform the simulation and click the OK Button.
The simulators for the Controller and NA-series PT will start.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-109

7 Debugging

The Simulation Pane has a button that is used dedicatedly for simultaneous simulation of the
Controller with an NA-series PT. Refer to Dedicated Window for Simultaneous Simulation with
NA-series PT on page 7-110 for information on this pane.

Refer to the NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. V118) for the
features of an NA-series PT that you can use in simultaneous simulation with the NA-series PT
Simulator.

3 To stop simultaneous simulation with the NA-series PT Simulator, click the Stop Button in the
Simulation Pane.
The NA-series PT Simulator is ended and simultaneous simulation with the NA-series PT Sim-
ulator is ended.
To execute simultaneous simulation with the NA-series PT Simulator again, select Run with
NA Simulator from the Simulation Menu.

Dedicated Window for Simultaneous Simulation with NA-series PT

When you perform simultaneous simulation with an NA-series PT, the following dedicated window is
displayed. In this window, you can perform offline debugging for the Controller and an NA-series PT at
the same time.

(a)

(b)

(c)

7-110 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Item Description
(a) Enable/Disable All Use this button to enable or disable all breakpoints that are set for the Con-
Controller Breakpoints troller at once.
Button
Enable/Disable All HMI Use this button to enable or disable all breakpoints that are set for the NA-
Breakpoints Button series PT at once.
NA Integrated Simulation Use this button to display the dedicated breakpoint window for simultaneous
Breakpoint Window But- simulation with an NA-series PT. Refer to NA Integrated Simulation Break-
ton point Window on page 7-111 for details.
(b) Simulation buttons for These buttons are the same as those in the Simulation Pane for Controllers.
Controllers Refer to the descriptions of the simulation buttons in Simulation Procedures
on page 7-80.
(c) Simulation buttons for NA- These buttons are the same as those in the Simulation Pane NA-series PTs.
series PTs Refer to the NA-series Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (Cat.
No. V118) for details.

 NA Integrated Simulation Breakpoint Window

When you perform simultaneous simulation with an NA-series PT, the following dedicated break-
point window is displayed. In this window, you can display the breakpoints for the Controller and an
NA-series PT at the same time to perform condition setting.

7-3 Offline Debugging

(a)(b)(c)(d)(e) (f)

neous Simulation of Controller with NA-series PT)

7-3-5 Offline Debugging with Sequence Control and NA-series PT Simulator (Simulta-
Button name Description
(a) Set Conditional Break- The Set Conditional Breakpoint Dialog Box is displayed. Refer to Setting
point Conditional Breakpoints on page 7-96 for the condition setting procedure.
(b) Clear Breakpoint Use this button to clear the selected breakpoint.
(c) Delete All Breakpoints Use this button to delete all breakpoints for the Controller or NA-series PT.
(d) Jump to Source Code Use this button to display the location in the Editor where the selected
breakpoint is set.
(e) Enable/Disable All Con- Use this button to enable or disable all breakpoints that are set for the Con-
troller Breakpoints troller at once.
(f) Enable/Disable All HMI Use this button to enable or disable all breakpoints that are set for the NA-
Breakpoints series PT at once.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-111

7 Debugging

7-3-6 Integrated NS-series PT Simulation for Offline Debugging of Se-

quence Control and NS-series PTs
You can simulate the linked operation of a sequence program and an NS-series Programmable Termi-
nal to debug the sequence program and screen data offline.
This is done by using the screen data that was created for the NS-series PT with the CX-Designer
Support Software with the following procedure.
Refer to the CX-Designer User’s Manual (Cat. No. V099) for the procedures to create screen data for
the NS-series PT.

1 Select Start NS Integrated Simulation from the Simulation Menu.

If the CX-Designer is not running, the Start NS Integrated Simulation Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Click the Browse Button and select the CX-Designer project file to use in the integrated NS-
series PT simulation.
Then select the host name that was set in the CX-Designer Communications Setup Dialog Box
from the Host Name Box.
Refer to the CX-Designer User’s Manual (Cat. No. V099) for the procedures to create a CX-
Designer project file and for information on setting host names.

3 Click the Run Button.

The Simulator starts and the program that was built for the Simulator is downloaded.
Then the CX-Designer is started and the Test Screen is displayed.

7-112 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Refer to the CX-Designer User’s Manual (Cat. No. V099) for information on the capabilities of

7-3 Offline Debugging

integrated NS-series PT simulation.

4 To stop the integrated NS-series PT simulation, click the Stop Button in the Simulation Pane.
The integrated NS-series PT simulation stops.
To restart the integrated NS-series PT simulation, click the Run Button in the Simulation Pane,
or select Start NS Integrated Simulation from the Simulation Menu.

Precautions for Correct Use 7

The NJ-series Controller must be registered as the host type in the CX-Designer project file that
is used for integrated NS-series PT simulation.

and NS-series PTs

7-3-6 Integrated NS-series PT Simulation for Offline Debugging of Sequence Control
Additional Information

• If the CX-Designer is already running when the integrated NS-series PT simulation is started,
the project that is currently open in the CX-Designer will be used in the integrated NS-series
PT simulation.

Execution is not possible if the CX-Designer is already running in more than one window.
Start the CX-Designer only for the project for which you will execute the integrated NS-series
PT simulation.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-113

7 Debugging

7-3-7 3D Simulation
Sysmac Studio (64 bit) version 1.40 or higher provides the 3D Simulation function for checking opera-
tions or motions of 3D equipment models and parts on 3D Visualizer. To use the Sysmac Studio 3D
simulation, you need to additionally purchase a license of Sysmac Studio 3D Simulation Option.
Refer to the Sysmac Studio 3D Simulation Function Operation Manual (Cat. No. W618) for details on
the 3D simulation.

7-114 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

7-4 Preparations for Online Debugging

 Preparing for Online Debugging
The Sysmac Studio and NJ/NX/NY-series Controllers separate the variables that you use in the
programs from the I/O information for external devices. Therefore, it is necessary to define the con-
nection between variables and I/O information.

7-4-1 Assigning Variables and Real I/O

 Assigning Variables and Real I/O

"Defining the connection between logic and physical devices" means to define the connection be-
tween the variables used in the programs and the actual I/O information of the physical devices.
Specifically, this involves assigning global variables and I/O ports.

7-4 Preparations for Online Debugging

 Procedure to Start Assigning Variables and Real I/O

1 Double-click I/O Map under Configurations and Setup on the Multiview Explorer.

7-4-1 Assigning Variables and Real I/O

Precautions for Correct Use

To perform this operation, the Units in the actual configuration must already be registered under
Controller Configurations and Setup − CPU/Expansion Racks.

 Procedure to Assign Variables and Real I/O

Use the following procedure to assign a variable in the Variable Column to the I/O device in the
Port Column.

1 Click cell for the I/O device in the Variable Column. Or, move the cursor to the cell and press
the F2 Key.
This places you in Edit Mode and displays a list of the global variables.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-115

7 Debugging

2 Select a global variable from the list. (Click the global variable or move your cursor to the varia-
ble you want to select and press the Enter Key.) The specified variable is displayed as shown
below.
You can also enter a variable directly. The list will be narrowed based on the text you enter so
that you can more easily find the variable you need.

• To display I/O ports, you must register the Units in advance in CPU/Expansion Racks under
Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer. After registering a Unit, all I/O ports of that
Unit are registered automatically.

• Click the icons in the Port Column ( , ) to expand or collapse the display of I/O port configu-
ration for the CPU Rack, Expansion Rack, or Unit.
• For variables to appear in the selection lists, you must first register them in the global variable
table.
• You can also enter a variable directly from the I/O map to create a new global variable.

I/O Map Columns

The contents of the I/O Map columns are described below.

Column Meaning Editable

Position Display information on the position of the Unit (for Rack or Unit lines on- No
ly).
Port Displays the networks and Units that the I/O port belongs to in a nested No
hierarchy.
If more than one variable is registered to the same port, a caution icon
and tooltip are displayed.
Description Displays a description of the I/O port. No
R/W Displays the Read/Write attribute of the I/O port as shown below. No
Read only: R, Write only: W, Read/Write: RW
Data type Displays the data type of the I/O port. No
The basic data types and arrays of the basic data types are displayed.

7-116 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Column Meaning Editable

Variable • You can enter a variable directly into the Variable cell to assign that Yes
variable to the port.
• If the variable you enter is already assigned to another port, or if that
variable is already defined under a different data type, an error icon
and tooltip are displayed.
• The variable assigned to the I/O port is displayed here. If no variable is
assigned to the I/O port, this cell is blank.
• Select Mapping List from the popup menu to display all variables as-
signed to the selected port.
Variable com- • Displays comments for the variable. You can edit the comments. Yes
ment • If there is text in the Variable cell, you can edit the comment cell.
Variable type • Displays the variable table that the device variable belongs to. You can Yes
edit the table.
Select one of the following variable tables from the box.
Global variables and registered programs, functions, and function

7-4 Preparations for Online Debugging

blocks
• If a variable is assigned to the I/O port, the variable table that the varia-
ble belongs to is displayed. If no variable is assigned to the I/O port,
this cell is initially blank. If it is blank, the global variable table is select-
ed.

7-4-2 Assigning Axis Variables and I/O Devices

 Assigning Axis Variables and I/O Devices

You can define Axis Variables that are used in the program and the I/O devices that actually oper-
ate the device.
Assign Axis Variables to Drives mounted as EtherCAT slaves and NX-series Position Interface 7
Units.

7-4-2 Assigning Axis Variables and I/O Devices

 Procedure to Assign Axis Variables and I/O Devices
As an example, the procedure to assign EtherCAT slaves to the Axis Variables that are registered
in the Multiview Explorer is given below.

1 Double-click the Axis Variable under Configurations and Setup - Motion Control Setup -
Axis Settings in the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-click the Axis Variable and select Edit from
the menu.

2 The Basic Axis Settings ( ) are displayed. Enter the axis number, axis use, axis type, and
feedback information. You can select from the lists. Select the EtherCAT slave to assign from
the list in the Input device Text Box.
The specified variable is displayed as shown below.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-117

7 Debugging

• You must register the axis to use for the axis variable in advance under Configurations and
Setup - Motion Control Setup - Axis Settings in the Multiview Explorer. When you register
an axis, the variable for that axis is automatically registered as well.
• For the EtherCAT slave to appear in the list in the Input device Text Box, an EtherCAT slave
Axis Function Unit must be registered in advance under Configurations and Setup -
EtherCAT in the Multiview Explorer.
After registering an Axis Function Unit, the EtherCAT slave of that Unit is registered automat-
ically.

7-118 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

7-5 Performing Online Debugging

You can check and adjust the operation of programs you develop by establishing an online connection
between the Sysmac Studio and your NJ/NX/NY-series Controller, then changing variables to TRUE or
FALSE, changing present values, and performing other debugging tasks.
This involves the following operations.
• Transferring data to/from the Controller
• Testing axis operation
• Checking I/O wiring
• Checking I/O assignments
• Resetting the Controller
• Restarting Units

WARNING

7-5 Performing Online Debugging

• Check the user program for proper execution before you use it for actual operation.
• If you use EtherCAT slaves, check the specifications of those slaves in manuals or
other documentation and confirm that the system will not be adversely affected be-
fore you transfer parameters.

CAUTION
• Sufficiently confirm safety at the connected slave or Unit before you change the val-
ue of an I/O port or device variable.
Not doing so may result in injury.
• Always confirm safety at the destination node before you transfer parameters or da-
ta from the Sysmac Studio to another node. 7
Not doing so may result in injury.

7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the Controller

Precautions for Safe Use

• Unexpected operation may result if you transfer inappropriate network configuration settings.
Even if appropriate network configuration settings are set, confirm that the controlled system
will not be adversely affected before you transfer the data.
• Always confirm the safety of the system before you change the operating mode of the Con-
troller.
• Always confirm safety at the destination node before you transfer parameters or data from
the Sysmac Studio to another node on the network configuration.
Not doing so may result in injury.
• Before you restart operation, make sure that the required data, including device variables, the
user program, and parameters, is transferred to a CPU Unit, Special I/O Unit, CPU Bus Unit,
or externally connected device that was replaced.
• After you transfer the user program, the CPU Unit is restarted and communications with the
EtherCAT slaves are cut off. During that period, the slave outputs behave according to the
slave specifications. The time that communications are cut off depends on the EtherCAT net-
work configuration. If the EtherCAT network configuration contains only OMRON EtherCAT
slaves, communications are cut off for a maximum of 45 seconds.
Before you transfer the user program, confirm that the system will not be adversely affected.
• If you transfer only selected programs from the programs that did not match for the synchro-
nization function, there is no way to check on the Sysmac Studio the integrity with the pro-
grams that you do not transfer. After you transfer the programs, confirm safety before you
change the CPU Unit to RUN mode.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-119

7 Debugging

7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the Controller

You can transfer the user program, system configuration, and variable information to the Controller, or
transfer data from the Controller to the Sysmac Studio to have the same data in the Sysmac Studio
and the Controller.

Synchronizing (Uploading/Downloading after Automatic Verifica-

tion)

 Synchronizing
“Synchronize” means to automatically compare the data for the Sysmac Studio on the computer
with the data in the NJ/NX/NY-series Controller and transfer the data in the direction that is speci-
fied by the user.
Use the following procedure.
• Download: Select Synchronization from the Controller Menu, and then click the Transfer To
Controller Button.
• Upload: Select Synchronization from the Controller Menu, and then click the Transfer From
Controller Button.

Precautions for Correct Use

Do not perform any other operations on the Sysmac Studio while the Synchronization Window
is active.
An error occurs and synchronization may be impossible.

Additional Information

• As shown above, the Synchronization Menu Command is used to both upload and download
data on the Sysmac Studio.
The following terms are used in the NJ/NX/NY-series Controller manuals:
a) Transferring data from the Sysmac Studio to the Controller: Download
b) Transferring data from the Controller to the Sysmac Studio: Upload
• Information on synchronization is updated in the project file when synchronization is per-
formed. After you perform synchronization, save the project file before you close it.
If you do not save the project file, a message that says that the program execution IDs are
different and that all data will be transferred is displayed the next time you perform synchroni-
zation.

 Automatic Verification Procedure

1 Physically connect the computer to the Controller and then select Online from the Controller

Menu. (Or click the Button.)

The Sysmac Studio goes online with the Controller.

7-120 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

2 Select Synchronization from the Controller Menu. (Or, click the Button on the toolbar.)

The Synchronization Window is displayed and verification of the user program and parameter
settings between the Sysmac Studio and the Controller is started.
You can press the Cancel Button to cancel the operation.

7-5 Performing Online Debugging

Additional Information
7
If you change comments or undo changes in a program, the verification results will show that
the data is different even when the algorithm of the program is the same.

7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the Controller

At this time, you can execute a program algorithm check to see if the algorithm is the same.
The program algorithm check is enabled or disabled in the option settings. If it is enabled, the
program algorithm check is performed for any data with a different update date between the
Controller and project. If there is a lot of data with different update dates, an execution confir-
mation dialog box is displayed. Time is sometimes required for the program algorithm check.
Refer to 8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings on page 8-123 for details on the option settings.
In the following cases, the results will always show that the data does not match for the pro-
gram algorithm check.
• The version of Sysmac Studio that was used to create the data is different between the Con-
troller and the project.
• If a Differentiation Flag is added to and deleted from a program, but the order of the opera-
tions is different between the Controller and the project.

 Verification Results
The verification results are displayed as shown below. When valid data is not present, - is dis-
played.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-121

7 Debugging

Sysmac Studio (computer) data CPU Unit (Controller) data

Check boxes for data

transfer

Transfer Buttons Repeat Verification Close Button

Button

Verification Results Example

The verification results are displayed as shown in the following example.

Column Item
Computer: Data Name Project name on the Sysmac Studio
Computer: Update Date The last time that the project was built on the Sysmac Studio
Controller: Data Name The project name on the NJ/NX/NY-series Controller
Controller: Update Date The last time that the project on the NJ/NX/NY-series Controller was built
Compare *1

*1. If there are differences in the synchronized data, a Button is displayed in the Details Column.
Refer to the following page for details.

Verification Units
The units for comparison that are shown in the Synchronization Window are listed in the following
table.

De-
tailed
Synchronization data name Level Qty com- Remarks
pari-
son
Controller name 1 1 None
EtherCAT Master Settings 2 1 None
EtherCAT Slave Settings 2 1 None
Slaves 3 N None The settings of the selected slaves
are transferred.
CPU/Expansion Racks*1 2 1 None

CPU Rack*1 3 1 None For an NJ-series Controller, trans-

ferred to memory used for CJ-ser-
ies Units.

7-122 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

De-
tailed
Synchronization data name Level Qty com- Remarks
pari-
son
NX Units*2 4 N None

Units*3 4 1 None

Units*3 5 N None

Expansion Racks*3 3 1 None

Units*3 4 1 None

Units*3 5 N None
Controller Setup 2 1 None
Operation Settings 3 1 None
Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings 3 1 None
Built-in I/O Settings*4 3 1 None

7-5 Performing Online Debugging

Option Board Settings*4 3 1 None

Memory Settings*2 3 1 None

Motion Control Setup 2 1 None
Axis Settings 3 1 None
Axes Group Settings 3 1 None
Cam Data Settings 2 1 None
CamProfile 3 N None
Event Settings 2 1 None
Task Settings 2 1 None
POUs 2 1 None
7
Programs 3 1 None
Programs 4 N None Ladder programs

7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the Controller

Variable table 5 1 Availa- Ladder programs
ble
Section 5 N Availa- Ladder programs
ble
Programs 4 N None ST programs
Variable table 5 1 Availa- ST programs
ble
Program Body 5 1 Availa- ST programs
ble
Functions 3 1 None
Function 4 N None Ladder programs
Variable table 5 1 Availa- Ladder programs
ble
LadderBody 5 1 Availa- Ladder programs
ble
Function 4 N None ST programs
Variable table 5 1 Availa- ST programs
ble
Program Body 5 1 Availa- ST programs
ble
Function Blocks 3 1 None

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-123

7 Debugging

De-
tailed
Synchronization data name Level Qty com- Remarks
pari-
son
FunctionBlock 4 N None Ladder programs
Variable table 5 1 Availa- Ladder programs
ble
LadderBody 5 1 Availa- Ladder programs
ble
FunctionBlock 4 N None ST programs
Variable table 5 1 Availa- ST programs
ble
Program Body 5 1 Availa- ST programs
ble
Data 2 1 None
Data Types 3 1 Availa-
ble
Global Variables 3 1 Availa-
ble
Libraries 2 1 None
The data from this level depends
on the structure of the library.
(The data that can be verified is
the same as the data that is giv-
en above.)
*1. This is displayed only for an NJ-series Controller and NX102 or NX1P2 Controller.
*2. This is displayed only for an NX102 or NX1P2 Controller.
*3. This is displayed only for an NJ-series Controller.
*4. This is displayed only for an NX1P2 Controller.

Icons and Display Text Colors

The verification results are displayed with icons and display text colors.

Icon Text color Status Description

None White Synchronized The Sysmac Studio data and NJ/NX/NY-series Controller
data are the same.
Red Difference The Sysmac Studio data and NJ/NX/NY-series Controller
data are not the same. The following cases are displayed
as differences.
• When there is even one difference in the data for a veri-
fication item
• When the display order of synchronized data is not the
same (If the display order is not the same, the data is
displayed in the order on the Sysmac Studio.)
Green Data missing The data exists either only in the NJ/NX/NY-series Con-
troller or only on the Sysmac Studio.

Gray Build not completed The project is not built or an error has occurred.
Non-synchronized This icon is displayed for parameters for CJ-series Special
data Units and EtherCAT slaves.

Repeating Verification
Click the Recompare Button to repeat the verification.

7-124 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

 Uploading and Downloading Data

If there are any differences in the data, the following dialog box is displayed after automatic verifi-
cation.
Example for an NJ-series Controller

7-5 Performing Online Debugging

Procedure
7
1 Select the items to check for synchronization. The transfer process depends on which of these

7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the Controller

items are selected. This is shown in the following table.
Synchronization Check Items

When trans-
Item Default Description
fer is enabled
Clear the present values of Not selected. Values written If this check box is selected, the
variables with Retain attribute to Controller present values of Retain variables
(Valid for Transfer to Control- are cleared after the data is down-
ler). loaded.
Do not transfer the program Not selected. Values written If this check box is selected, pro-
source (Valid for Transfer to to Controller grams are not displayed when they
Controller). All data will be re- are uploaded from another comput-
transferred when this operation er.
is charged.*1 However, variables and settings are
transferred even if this check box is
selected.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-125

7 Debugging

When trans-
Item Default Description
fer is enabled
Do not transfer the following. Selected. Transferred If this check box is selected, the fol-
(All items are not transferred) both direction lowing parameters and data are not
• NX Unit application data on transferred.
the CPU Rack*2 and CJ-ser- • CJ-series Special Unit and Ether-
ies Special Unit parame- CAT slave*5*6 parameters
ters*3 and EtherCAT slave • Unit operation settings and appli-
cation data for NX Units
backup parameters*4
• Unit operation settings and
NX Unit application data on
Slave Terminals.
Do not transfer the EtherNet/IP Selected. Transferred If this check box is selected, the
connection settings (i.e., the both direc- EtherNet/IP connection settings are
tag data link settings). tions not transferred. For information on
EtherNet/IP connection settings, re-
fer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit
Built-in EtherNet/IP Port User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W506) or NY-
series Industrial Panel PC /
Industrial Box PC Built-in
EtherNet/IP Port User’s Manual
(Cat. No. W563).
*1. When this check box is changed from Selected to Not selected without transferring the program
source to the Controller, all data is transferred.
*2. This is displayed only for an NX102 or NX1P2 Controller.
*3. This is displayed only for an NJ-series Controller.
*4. Data is not transferred if the data in the Controller and on the Sysmac Studio are not the same.
*5. Parameters for ZW-series Displacement Sensors are not transferred regardless of whether this
check box is selected or not. To transfer parameters for a Displacement Sensor, right-click the Dis-
placement Sensor and select Online from the pop-up menu. A Synchronization Dialog Box is dis-
played. Click the Transfer from Sensor or Transfer to Sensor Button to transfer the parameters.
*6. Parameters for FQ-M-series Vision Sensors and FH-series Vision Sensors are not transferred re-
gardless of whether this check box is selected or not. When the data is uploaded, the parameters
for Vision Sensors in the project are initialized. Connect the computer and Vision Sensor via Ether-
net to transfer the parameters for a Vision Sensor. Display the Online View from the Edit Menu of
the Vision Sensor, and then click the Transfer from Sensor or Transfer to Sensor Button. For an
FQ-M-series Vision Sensor, change to Setup Mode first.

2 Select the items to transfer from the verification results in the Details Area of the Synchroniza-
tion Window.
• If the data in the computer is correct Click the Transfer To Controller Button (download).
• If the data in the Controller is correct Click the Transfer From Controller Button (upload).
The Sysmac Studio data and Controller data will be the same after the transfer.

7-126 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

7-5 Performing Online Debugging

This is displayed if the synchronization process is completed successfully.

Precautions for Correct Use

• If the data does not match when the comparison is completed, the only action that is possible
is to write the data that is required to make the data from the Sysmac Studio match that on
the NJ/NX/NY-series Controller. If any other write functions are executed at this time, an exe-
cution error occurs (you cannot change present values).
To continue, you must first clear this state. To do so, select Release Access Right from the
Controller Menu. 7
• If a program algorithm check was performed, the check boxes for the programs for which the
algorithm check was performed are selected to transfer the data regardless of the compari-

7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the Controller

son results.
Even if there are differences in rung comments, variable comments, or element comments,
the comparison results will show a match. If you don't want to overwrite comments when the
data is transferred, clear the selection of the check box of the program unit.
• If an error occurs during data transfer, the EtherNet/IP connection settings are not transfer-
red. If an error occurs, transfer the EtherNet/IP connection settings from the Built-in
EtherNet/IP Port Connection Settings Tab Page.
• If the following data are transferred to the Controller after they are added, deleted or
changed, the retention operation for the present values of variables may be different depend-
ing on the unit version of the CPU Unit: members of a structure variable or union variable with
the retain attribute, or elements of an array variable with the retain attribute. For details on the
retention operation, refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No.
W501) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No.
W558).

Additional Information

• If the following are the same, the program POUs can be transferred individually.
a) Data types
b) Global variables
c) All function block POUs
d) All function POUs
e) All libraries

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-127

7 Debugging

 Closing the Synchronization Window

Click the Close Button to close the Synchronization Window.

 Verification Details
You can perform detailed verifications for POUs (i.e., ST and ladder programs, functions, and func-
tion blocks).
Click the button in the Compare Column ( ) in the Synchronization Window.

The Verify Details Pane is displayed.

Displays differences
in the next program.

Program in Program in
Sysmac Studio Controller

Click this button to return

to the Synchronization
Window.

7-128 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

The differences in the program on the Sysmac Studio are displayed with the following background
colors.

Background
Meaning
color
No change The rung or line is the same on the Sysmac Studio and the Controller.
Red The rung or line exists on both the Sysmac Studio and the Controller, but there are dif-
ferences.
Green The rung or line exists only on the Sysmac Studio.
Blue The rung or line exists only in the Controller.

Additional Information

If there are no differences, Identical is displayed in a message dialog box.

 Device Output Holding during Transfer

CPU Units with unit version 1.13 or later, when combined with Sysmac Studio version 1.17 or high-

7-5 Performing Online Debugging

er, can hold device output when transferring data from the computer to a Controller under specific
settings and conditions. Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No.
W501) for details on the settings and conditions for holding device output.

Precautions for Correct Use

Confirm that the system will not be adversely affected before you transfer the parameters.

Additional Information

If the data being transferred from the computer to the Controller contains any setting that pre-
vents the CPU Unit from holding device output, a confirmation message is displayed. To enable
7
the CPU Unit to hold device output in this case, cancel the transfer, change the setting that pre-
vents the CPU Unit from holding device output back to the previous setting, and execute the

7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the Controller

transfer again.
If the confirmation message still appears, use the following procedure to create the project data
again before you execute the transfer.
1. Export the current project. Refer to 3-3-7 Exporting a Project File on page 3-20 for the
export procedure.
2. Leaving the current project intact, launch another copy of the Sysmac Studio, con-
nect it to the Controller, and transfer data from the Controller to the computer. Go off-
line after the data is transferred. Refer to 6-2-8 Going Online without a Project on
page 6-8 for the procedure. A new project is now created. In the next step and later,
you will perform operations on the new project.
3. Apply the changes that you made under POUs and Data in the Multiview Explorer to
the project created in step (2). Perform offline comparison with the project created in
step (2) and the file that you exported in step (1) and use the merge function to apply
the changes that you made under POUs and Data to the project created in step (2).
Refer to 4-9 Offline Comparison on page 4-167 for the offline comparison and merg-
ing procedures.
4. Apply the changes that you made under items other than POUs and Data to the
project that you created in step (2). Compare the current project with the project cre-
ated in step (2) on the display and, for setting items in the current project to which
changes do not prevent the CPU Unit from holding device output, apply the changes
to the project created in step (2).
5. From the project created in step (2), go online and transfer the data to the Controller.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-129

7 Debugging

 Continuing Safety Process Data Communications during Transfer

If you are using an NX-series Safety Control Unit, if certain conditions are met, safety process data
communications will be continued during data transfer from the computer to a Controller.

Safety process data communications between an NX-series Safety Control Unit and an
EtherCAT master or NX bus master
In the combination of CPU Units with unit version 1.13 or later and Sysmac Studio version 1.17 or
higher, when all of the following conditions are met
• The synchronization check item Do not transfer the following. (All items are not transferred.) is
selected.
• Only the following items have been changed since the previous synchronization.

Item
EtherCAT Backup Parameter Settings of EtherCAT slaves
CPU/Expansion Racks Special Unit Settings of CJ-series Units
I/O Map
Event Settings
Task Settings Program Assignment Settings
POUs Programs
Functions
Function Blocks
Data Data Types
Global Variables
Libraries
EtherNet/IP Connection Settings Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings
DB Connection Settings
If you change an item other than the above to cause a mismatch, the CPU Unit cannot continue
safety process data communications when transferring data from the computer to the Controller.

7-130 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Additional Information

If the data being transferred from the computer to the Controller contains any setting that pre-
vents safety process data communications, a confirmation message is displayed. To continue
safety process data communications in this case, cancel the transfer, change the setting that
prevents continuing safety process data communications back to the previous setting, and exe-
cute the transfer again.
If the confirmation message still appears, use the following procedure to create the project data
again before you execute the transfer.
1. Export the current project. Refer to 3-3-7 Exporting a Project File on page 3-20 for the
export procedure.
2. Leaving the current project intact, launch another copy of the Sysmac Studio, con-
nect it to the Controller, and transfer data from the Controller to the computer. Go off-
line after the data is transferred. Refer to 6-2-8 Going Online without a Project on
page 6-8 for the procedure. A new project is now created. In the next step and later,
you will perform operations on the new project.
3. Apply the changes that you made under POUs and Data in the Multiview Explorer to
the project created in step (2). Perform offline comparison with the project created in
step (2) and the file that you exported in step (1) and use the merge function to apply

7-5 Performing Online Debugging

the changes that you made under POUs and Data to the project created in step (2).
Refer to 4-9 Offline Comparison on page 4-167 for the offline comparison and merg-
ing procedures.
4. Apply the changes that you made under items other than POUs and Data to the
project that you created in step (2). Compare the current project with the project
created in step (2) on the display and, for setting items in the current project to which
changes do not prevent the CPU Unit from continuing safety process data communi-
cations, apply the changes to the project created in step (2).
5. From the project created in step (2), go online and transfer the data to the Controller.

Safety process data communications between Safety Control Units through EtherNet/IP net-
work 7
When the following condition is met during use of the NX102 CPU Unit or NX-CSG Communication
Control Unit, in addition to the conditions specified in Safety process data communications between

7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the Controller

an NX-series Safety Control Unit and an EtherCAT master or NX bus master
• The synchronization check item Do not transfer the EtherNet/IP connection settings (i.e., tag
data link settings) Check Box is selected.
Or, if the Do not transfer the EtherNet/IP connection settings (i.e., tag data link settings) Check
Box is not selected, the comparison results of the EtherNet/IP connection settings for each
EtherNet/IP port match.

Additional Information

If a CPU Unit with more than one built-in EtherNet/IP port is used and you apply changes in the
EtherNet/IP connection settings to the Controller, changes in the EtherNet/IP connection set-
tings for all ports are transferred at the same time.

 Transfer Option for Comment and Programming Group Information

You can exclude the comments in programs, variable comments, and programming group informa-
tion from the data that is transferred to the Controller. This option is set for each Controller that is
registered in a project.

1 Go online, right-click the device icon in the Multiview Explorer, and select Property from the
menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-131

7 Debugging

The Property Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the Do not transfer the comments and the programming group information to the
controller Check Box in the Property Dialog Box that is displayed and click the OK Button.

3 Build the project.

You can transfer the data without the comments and the programming group information.

Precautions for Correct Use

• The setting of this option cannot be changed in the synchronization option settings in the
Synchronization Window.
• This option is different from the option settings on the Tools menu in that it must be set for
each Controller in every project.
• Even in the case any comment or programming group information is not transferred, use of
this option does not affect the operation of the Controller.

Additional Information

• If you select the Do not transfer the comments and the programming group information
to the controller Check Box and transfer the data to the Controller, the comments, element
comments, and programming group information will not be restored when you upload the da-
ta from the Controller.
• You cannot set this transfer option for library projects. The Property menu command is
grayed out. The transfer of comments in a library is controlled by the settings of this transfer
option for the Controller in the project that accesses the library.

Synchronizing, Transferring, and Comparing the EtherCAT Config-

uration
These functions allow you to synchronize data between the Sysmac Studio and an NJ/NX/NY-series
Controller through various methods. You can transfer actual network configurations from the
NJ/NX/NY-series Controller to the Sysmac Studio and transfer slave backup parameter settings be-
tween the Sysmac Studio and the NJ/NX/NY-series Controller.

7-132 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

 Procedure to Display the Compare and Merge with Actual Network Config-
uration Dialog Box

1 Double-click EtherCAT under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-
click EtherCAT under Configurations and Setup and select Edit from the menu.
The EtherCAT Tab Page is displayed in the Edit Pane.

2 Right-click the master in the EtherCAT Tab Page and select Compare and Merge with Actual
Network Configuration.
The actual network configuration is read and compared with the network configuration on the
Sysmac Studio. The results are displayed in the Compare and Merge with Actual Network
Configuration Dialog Box.

7-5 Performing Online Debugging

7
3 If there are slaves for which the comparison results do not match, correct the network configu-
ration on the Sysmac Studio or correct the actual network configuration until the comparison

7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the Controller

results for all slave match.
To correct the network configuration in the Sysmac Studio, you can drag slaves from the actual
network configuration to the Sysmac Studio network configuration, or you can delete slaves
from the Sysmac Studio network configuration.
If you correct the actual network configuration, click the Close Button, return to the EtherCAT
Tab Page and start the Compare and Merge with Actual Network Configuration Dialog Box
again to confirm the comparison results again.

4 Click the Close Button.

The EtherCAT Tab Page is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-133

7 Debugging

Additional Information

• You can right-click a Unit in the actual configuration in the Compare and Merge Window and
select Apply actual network configuration to use the actual network configuration informa-
tion as the configuration information in the project.
If you use this menu command, all of the variable assignments for I/O ports and I/O allocation
settings in the task settings in the project will be cleared.
• Matched, Deleted, Added, Moved, and Node/port not matched are displayed in the
Comparison results Column to give the results of comparing the network configuration on
the Sysmac Studio with the actual network configuration.
The following items are compared.
a) Node addresses
b) Vendor IDs
c) Product codes
d) Revisions
e) Connection ports
The results that are displayed in the Comparison results Column have the following mean-
ings.
Matched: All of the comparison items match for the slave.
Deleted: The slave exists only in the network configuration on the Sysmac Studio.
Added: The slave exists only in the actual network configuration.
Moved: The slave is connected in a different order.
Node/port not matched: There is a difference in the connected Unit or connected port on
the connected Unit for the slave.

Precautions for Correct Use

• Make sure that the communications cables between the master and slaves are connected
correctly before you perform this operation. The Compare and Merge with Actual Network
Configuration Dialog Box is not displayed if the connections are not correct. Refer to the
NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in EtherCAT Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W505) or NY-series
Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Built-in EtherCAT Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W562)
for information on the correct connection methods.
• The Compare and Merge with Actual Network Configuration Dialog Box is not displayed if
there is a slave in the actual network configuration for which the node address is not set or if
the same address is set for more than one slave in the actual network configuration. Make
sure that node addresses are set correctly for the slaves in the actual network configuration
before you perform this operation.
• When the compare and merge operation is performed, the synchronization between the Sys-
mac Studio and the Controller is lost. Synchronize the Sysmac Studio and Controller before
you perform any online operations for the slaves. Refer to 7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data
to/from the Controller on page 7-120 for information on the synchronization operation.

 Procedure for the Comparison and Transfer of Backup Parameter Settings

1 Select the slave in the EtherCAT Tab Page.

2 Click the Edit Backup Parameter Settings Button in the Slave Parameter Settings Area on
the right of the EtherCAT configuration.

7-134 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

The Edit Backup Parameter Settings Tab Page for the selected slave is displayed.

7-5 Performing Online Debugging

7

7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the Controller

3 Click the Compare Button.

The parameters in the Sysmac Studio are compared with the parameters from the slave. If any
parameters are not the same, they are indicated with “≠” in the results.

4 Click the Transfer from Slave Button to transfer the backup parameter settings from the slave
to the Sysmac Studio.
Click the Transfer to Slave Button to transfer the backup parameter settings from the Sysmac
Studio to the slave.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-135

7 Debugging

Synchronizing, Transferring, and Comparing the EtherCAT Slave

Terminal Configuration
These functions allow you to synchronize data between the Sysmac Studio and an NJ/NX/NY-series
Controller through various methods. You can transfer the actual Slave Terminal configuration from the
NJ/NX/NY-series Controller to the Sysmac Studio and transfer NX Unit settings between the Sysmac
Studio and the NJ/NX/NY-series Controller.

 Procedure to Display the Compare and Merge with Actual Unit

Configuration Dialog Box

1 Double-click the EtherCAT Coupler Unit under EtherCAT in the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-
click the EtherCAT Coupler Unit under EtherCAT and select Edit from the menu.
The Slave Terminal Tab Page is displayed in the Edit Pane.

2 Right-click in the Slave Terminal Tab Page and select Compare and Merge with Actual Unit
Configuration.
The actual Unit configuration is read and compared with the Unit configuration on the Sysmac
Studio. The results are displayed in the Compare and Merge with Actual Unit Configuration
Dialog Box.

Additional Information

Matched, Removed, Added, Disabled, Compatible, and Not compatible are displayed in the
Result column to give the results of comparing the Unit configuration on the Sysmac Studio
with the actual Unit configuration. The following items are compared.
• Model numbers
• Unit versions
The results that are displayed in the Result Column have the following meanings.
Matched: All of the comparison items match for the Unit.
Removed: The Unit exists only in the Unit configuration on the Sysmac Studio.
Added: The Unit exists only in the actual Unit configuration.
Disabled: The Unit exists only in the Unit configuration on the Sysmac Studio and it is disabled.
Compatible: A replaceable Unit whose unit version in the actual Unit configuration is later than
the unit version in the Unit configuration in the Sysmac Studio.
Not compatible: A non-replaceable Unit whose unit version in the actual Unit configuration is
earlier than the unit version in the Unit configuration in the Sysmac Studio.

 Transferring and Synchronizing in the Compare and Merge with Actual

Unit Configuration Dialog Box
You can insert Units in the actual Unit configuration into the configuration on the Sysmac Studio.
You can also adjust the Unit configuration on the Sysmac Studio to match the actual Unit configura-
tion.

1 Drag a Unit in the actual Unit configuration in the comparison results on the Compare and
Merge with Actual Unit Configuration Dialog Box to the configuration on the Sysmac Studio.
The selected Unit is inserted into the configuration on the Sysmac Studio.

2 To synchronize the entire Unit configuration, click the Apply Actual Unit Configuration But-
ton.

7-136 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

The Unit configuration on the Sysmac Studio will be made the same as the actual Unit configu-
ration.

3 Click the OK Button.

This returns you to the Unit Editor.

Precautions for Correct Use

If the unit version of the Unit in the actual Unit configuration is not supported by the Sysmac
Studio when you select the Apply Actual Unit Configuration Button, you can replace it with
an earlier unit version.
However, the Unit may not operate properly depending on the unit version. In such a case, you
need to update the Sysmac Studio to have the same unit version for the Unit on the Sysmac
Studio and the Unit in the actual Unit configuration.

Additional Information

If the Unit in the actual Unit configuration and the Unit in the configuration in the Sysmac Studio

7-5 Performing Online Debugging

have the same model number, but different unit versions, you can apply the unit version in the
actual Unit configuration to the Unit configuration in the Sysmac Studio. Right-click in the
Compare and Merge with Actual Unit Configuration Dialog Box and select Apply Actual
Unit Version from the menu.

 Transferring and Comparing Unit Operation Settings

For each Unit in the Slave Terminal configuration, you can compare the Unit settings with the set-
tings in the actual Unit and you can transfer the settings.

1 Right-click a Unit on the Slave Terminal Tab Page and select Edit Unit Operation Settings.
7
The Unit Operation Settings Tab Page is displayed for the selected Unit.

7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the Controller

Click the Compare Button.
The settings in the actual Unit are displayed in the Comparison Result column.

3 To change the settings in the actual Unit to match those on the Sysmac Studio, click the
Transfer to Unit Button. To change the settings on the Sysmac Studio to those in the actual
Unit, click the Transfer from Unit Button.
The settings are transferred and the comparison results will show that they are the same.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-137

7 Debugging

For details on the parameters and settings for each Unit, refer to the user’s manual for the spe-
cific Unit.

Precautions for Correct Use

If you execute Transfer to Unit, the Unit is restarted after the data is transferred. At that time,
I/O communications with the communications master will stop. What is restarted depends on
the selected Unit and the unit version of the EtherCAT Coupler Unit. Refer to the NX-series
EtherCAT Coupler Units User’s Manual (Cat. No. W519) for details.

Additional Information

Instead of going online with the Controller, you can connect directly to the EtherCAT Coupler
Unit with a USB cable to transfer and compare the Unit operation settings. Refer to A-7 Directly
Connecting to an EtherCAT Slave Terminal on page A-53 for the procedure to connect directly
to the EtherCAT Coupler Unit.

Synchronizing, Transferring, and Comparing the CPU Rack Config-

uration of an NX102 or NX1P2 Controller
These functions allow you to synchronize data between the Sysmac Studio and the Controller through
various methods. You can transfer the actual NX Unit configuration of the CPU Rack from the Control-
ler to the Sysmac Studio and transfer NX Unit settings between the Sysmac Studio and the Controller.

 Procedure to Display the Compare and Merge with Actual Unit

Configuration Dialog Box

1 Double-click CPU Rack under Configurations and Setup - CPU/Expansion Racks in the
Multiview Explorer. Or, right-click CPU Rack and select Edit from the menu.
The CPU and Expansion Racks Tab Page is displayed in the Edit Pane.

2 Right-click in the CPU and Expansion Racks Tab Page and select Compare and Merge with
Actual Unit Configuration.
The actual Unit configuration is read and compared with the Unit configuration on the Sysmac
Studio. The results are displayed in the Compare and Merge with Actual Unit Configuration
Dialog Box.

7-138 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

Additional Information

Matched, Removed, Added, Disabled, Compatible, and Not compatible are displayed in the
Result column to give the results of comparing the Unit configuration on the Sysmac Studio
with the actual Unit configuration. The following items are compared.
• Model number
• Unit version
The results that are displayed in the Result Column have the following meanings.
Matched: All of the comparison items match for the Unit.
Removed: The Unit exists only in the Unit configuration in the Sysmac Studio.
Added: The Unit exists only in the actual Unit configuration.
Disabled: The Unit exists only in the Unit configuration in the Sysmac Studio and it is disabled.
Compatible: A replaceable unit whose unit version in the actual Unit configuration is later than
the unit version in the Unit configuration on the Sysmac Studio.
Not compatible: A non-replaceable Unit whose unit version in the actual Unit configuration is
earlier than the unit version in the Unit configuration in the Sysmac Studio.

 Transferring and Synchronizing in the Compare and Merge with Actual

7-5 Performing Online Debugging

Unit Configuration Dialog Box
You can insert Units in the actual Unit configuration into the configuration in the Sysmac Studio.
You can also adjust the Unit configuration in the Sysmac Studio to match the actual Unit configura-
tion.

1 In the Compare and Merge with Actual Unit Configuration Dialog Box, drag a Unit in the
actual Unit configuration in the comparison results onto the configuration in the Sysmac Studio.
The Unit is inserted into the configuration in the Sysmac Studio.

2 To synchronize the entire Unit configuration, click the Apply Actual Unit Configuration But- 7
ton.
The Unit configuration in the Sysmac Studio is now the same as the actual Unit configuration.

7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the Controller

3 Click the OK Button.
This returns you to the Unit Editor.

Precautions for Correct Use

If the unit version of the Unit in the actual Unit configuration is not supported by the Sysmac
Studio when you select the Apply Actual Unit Configuration Button, you can replace it with
an earlier unit version.
However, the Unit may not operate properly depending on the unit version. In such a case, you
need to update the Sysmac Studio to have the same unit version for the Unit on the Sysmac
Studio and the Unit in the actual Unit configuration.

Additional Information

If the Unit in the actual Unit configuration and the Unit in the configuration in the Sysmac Studio
have the same model number, but different unit versions, you can apply the unit version in the
actual Unit configuration to the Unit configuration in the Sysmac Studio. Right-click in the
Compare and Merge with Actual Unit Configuration Dialog Box and select Apply Actual
Unit Version from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-139

7 Debugging

 Transferring and Comparing NX Unit Operation Settings

For each Unit on the CPU Rack, you can compare the Unit settings with the settings in the actual
Unit and you can transfer the settings.

1 Right-click a Unit in the CPU and Expansion Racks Tab Page and select Edit Unit Operation
Settings.
The Unit Operation Settings Tab Page is displayed for the selected Unit.

2 Click the Compare Button.

The settings in the actual Unit are displayed in the Comparison Result column.

3 To change the settings in the actual Unit to match those on the Sysmac Studio, click the
Transfer to Unit Button. To change the settings on the Sysmac Studio to those in the actual
Unit, click the Transfer from Unit Button.
The settings are transferred and the comparison results will show that they are the same.
For details on the parameters and settings for each Unit, refer to the user’s manual for the spe-
cific Unit.

Precautions for Correct Use

If you execute Transfer to Unit, the Unit is restarted after the data is transferred. At that time,
communications between the Unit and the CPU Unit will stop.

 Comparing the Unit Operation Settings for All NX Units

You can compare the operation settings for all of the mounted NX Units with respect to the actual
configuration and the configuration in the Sysmac Studio.
To perform this comparison, it is required that the actual Unit configuration and the Unit configura-
tion in the Sysmac Studio match.

1 Right-click a Unit in the CPU and Expansion Racks Tab Page and select Compare operation
settings of all NX Units.
The comparison results are displayed in a dialog box.
If there are any Units whose Unit settings mismatch, the unit number and model of the Units
are listed.

Additional Information

Units for which the unit mounting setting is set to Disabled are not the target of comparison.

Synchronization, Transferring, and Comparing the CPU Rack and

Expansion Rack Configuration of NJ-series Controllers
These functions allow you to synchronize data between the Sysmac Studio and an NJ-series Control-
ler through various methods. You can transfer the actual unit configuration from the NJ-series Control-
ler to the Sysmac Studio and transfer Special Unit settings between the Sysmac Studio and the NJ-
series Controller.

7-140 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

 Procedure to Display the Compare and Merge with Actual Unit Configura-
tion Dialog Box

1 Double-click CPU/Expansion Racks under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Ex-
plorer. Or, right-click CPU/Expansion Racks under Configurations and Setup and select
Edit from the menu.
The Unit Editor is displayed in the Edit Pane.

2 Right-click anywhere in the Unit Editor where there is no Unit and select Compare and Merge
with Actual Unit Configuration.
The actual Unit configuration is read and compared with the Unit configuration on the Sysmac
Studio. The results are displayed in the Actual Unit Configuration Compare and Merge Win-
dow.

3 Click the Apply actual Unit configuration Button to synchronize with the actual configuration.

7-5 Performing Online Debugging

4 Click the OK Button.
This returns you to the Unit Editor.

Precautions for Correct Use

If you select to unify to the actual Unit configuration, all of the settings for any Units that are
deleted as a result will be discarded (including the input response times, Special Unit settings,
device variable assignments in the I/O map, and control task assignments in the Task setup).
If the slot position of a Basic I/O Unit is different, first correct the Unit configuration on the Sys-
mac Studio so that the slot positions agree in the comparison and then specify unifying to the
actual Unit configuration.
7
Additional Information

7-5-1 Transferring/Comparing Data to/from the Controller

Matched, Unit removed, Unit added, Position changed, and Version not matched are dis-
played in the Result Column to give the results of comparing the Unit configuration on the Sys-
mac Studio with the actual Unit configuration.
The following items are compared.
• Rack numbers
• Slot numbers
• Model numbers
• Unit versions of Special Units
• Unit numbers of Special Units
The results that are displayed in the Result Column have the following meanings.
Matched: All of the comparison items match for the Unit.
Unit removed: The Unit exists only in the Unit configuration on the Sysmac Studio.
Unit added: The Unit exists only in the actual Unit configuration.
Position changed: A Unit has the same model number, Unit version, and unit number, but the
rack number or slot number is different.
Version not matched: The unit version of the Unit does not match.

 Procedure for Comparison and Transfer of the Special Unit Settings

1 Double-click a Unit in the Unit Editor, or right-click and select Edit Special Unit Settings.
The Edit Special Unit Settings Tab Page for the selected Unit is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-141

7 Debugging

2 Click the Compare Button.

The parameters in the Sysmac Studio are compared with the parameters from the NJ-series
Controller. If any parameters are not the same, they are indicated by “≠” in the results.

3 To synchronize the Controller settings with the set values in the Sysmac Studio, click the
Transfer To Controller Button. This transfers the set values from your computer to the Con-
troller.

7-5-2 Testing Axis Operation (MC Test Run)

You can send commands directly from the Controller without any ladder diagrams to operate a motor
in order to check wiring or perform simple operation tests on any OMRON Servo Drive assigned to an
axis.

Precautions for Safe Use

• Confirm the axis number carefully before you perform an MC Test Run.
• An MC Test Run operation involves motor operation. Refer to the operation manual before
you execute an MC Test Run. Be particularly careful of the following points.
a) Confirm safety around all moving parts.
b) When you click the Run Button, the motor begins actual operation at the specified veloci-
ty. Only begin motor operation if you are absolutely sure there is no danger if you start the
motor.
c) Always have an external emergency stop device available.
d) Sometimes you may be unable to stop the motor from your computer. Install an external
emergency stop device so that you can stop the motor immediately if needed.
e) Only operate the motor when you can clearly confirm the motor operation so that you can
react quickly in the case of any danger that may arise due to operation of the motor.
f) Perform test run operations after establishing EtherCAT communications.
g) A communications error will occur if you attempt to begin operations without EtherCAT
communications. Always establish EtherCAT communications first.
• Precautions during MC Test Run Operation
a) During test run execution, only the Sysmac Studio has any control of the operation. Any
commands from motion control instructions are ignored.
b) Make sure that you are operating the correct axis.

Precautions for Correct Use

• Before you start an MC Test Run, make sure that the operation parameters are set correctly.
• If you transfer the axis parameters or slave parameters to the slave during an MC Test Run
from another copy of the Sysmac Studio, the MC Test Run will end when the transfer is com-
pleted and the axes will stop. This also applies if the parameters are transferred from the
Sysmac Studio running on a different computer.

7-142 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

How to Perform MC Test Run

To begin a test run, the following items must be registered or set, and then transferred to the Control-
ler. (Refer to 5-7 Motion Control Setup on page 5-78 for detailed settings.)
• Registration of the axes
• Registration of the slave (Servo) to use
• Links between the axis and slave
You cannot start an MC Test Run in the following condition.
• When the Simulator is online
• During an MC Test Run
• During a Servo Drive Test Run

Let’s look at an example that performs jogging of MC_Axis000 to demonstrate how to do a test run.

1 Eliminate any building errors in the project.

7-5 Performing Online Debugging

If you will create a new project, delete the programs.

2 Go online.

3 Right-click MC_Axis000 under Configurations and Setup − Motion Control Setup − Axis
Settings on the Multiview Explorer and select Start MC Test Run from the menu.

7-5-2 Testing Axis Operation (MC Test Run)

A warning message is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-143

7 Debugging

4 Check the items and then click the OK Button.

The MC Test Run Tab Page is displayed.

5 Select the target axis (MC_Axis000) at the upper left of the MC Test Run View.

6 Click the Servo ON Button.

The Servo turns ON and motor control is enabled.

7-144 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

7 Click the Jogging Tab, and then perform the following operations.

• Click and hold the Rotate CW Button ( ). The motor rotates clockwise as long as you hold
the button.

• Click and hold the Rotate CCW Button ( ). The motor rotates counterclockwise as long as
you hold the button.

8 Right-click MC_Axis000 under Configurations and Setup - Motion Control Setup - Axis
Settings on the Multiview Explorer and select Stop MC Test Run from the menu.
Test Run Mode is left.

MC Test Run Tab Page Functions

The MC Test Run View is made up of the Status Monitor and Test Run sections.

7-5 Performing Online Debugging

 Status Monitor Section
The status monitor displays axis status, motion errors and details on them, and corrections for any
errors that have occurred. You can also reset motion control errors and start the Servo error moni-
tor.

Function Description
Status Displays information about the status of an axis (ready to execute, axis disabled,
stopped, in a discrete motion, in continuous motion, homing, decelerating to a
stop, decelerating to a stop due to an error, home defined, and stopped at
home).
7
Motion Error List Displays a list of errors that have occurred in the motion control functions. The
Message Details Area gives details on the error and the Countermeasure and

7-5-2 Testing Axis Operation (MC Test Run)

Remedy Area contains information about how to fix the error.
Reset Errors Resets all errors that have occurred in the motion control functions. Select an er-
ror from the list of errors that have occurred to display detailed information about
that error in the Message Details Area. Possible solutions to that error can be
found in the Countermeasure and Remedy Area.

 Test Run Section

A test run allows you to operate a motor using the motion control patterns listed below without any
programming. You can switch between each pattern by clicking on the different tabs in this section.

Pattern Description
Jogging Jogs the Servomotor. This operation is only performed while the button is clicked
and held.
Absolute positioning Performs positioning towards the target position at the specified acceleration/
deceleration rate. Specify the target position as an absolute value.
If the rotary counter mode is used for an axis in the test run, you can select the
direction of rotation for the axis.
Relative Positioning Performs positioning towards the target position at the specified acceleration/
deceleration rate. Specify the target position as a relative value from the actual
position.
Homing Performs homing based on the homing settings in the axis parameters.

You can use the following functions to switch between different motions for the axis in operation.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-145

7 Debugging

Function Contents
Stopping Button Decelerates the axis in operation to a stop.
Servo ON/OFF Button Toggles the Servo ON and OFF.
Servo Drive Status Displays connected Servo parameters.

Precautions for Safe Use

• Confirm safety around all moving parts.

When you click the Run Button, the motor begins actual operation at the specified speed. On-
ly begin motor operation if you are absolutely sure that there is no danger if you start the mo-
tor.
• Always have an external emergency stop device available.
Sometimes you may be unable to stop the motor from your computer. Install an external
emergency stop device so that you can stop the motor immediately if needed.
• Operate the motor only when the motor is in plain sight for you to observe.
Operate the motor only when you can clearly confirm the motor operation so that you can re-
act quickly in the case of any danger that may arise due to operation of the motor.
• Perform test run operations after establishing EtherCAT communications.
A communications error will occur if you attempt to begin operations without EtherCAT com-
munications. Always establish EtherCAT communications first.
• Be aware of all the precautions that you need to take during operation.
During test run execution, only the Sysmac Studio has any control of the operation. Any com-
mands from motion control instructions are ignored.
• Make sure that you are operating the correct axis.
Before you start any tests, make sure that the axis number of the axis that you are controlling
is correct.

7-5-3 Checking I/O Wiring

 Checking I/O Wiring

You can check I/O wiring to make sure that I/O devices, such as Units on the CPU Rack, EtherCAT
slaves, and Units on the Slave Terminals, are connected properly with external devices.

 Procedure to Check I/O Wiring

1 Go online and then double-click I/O Map under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview
Explorer. Or, right-click I/O Map under Configurations and Setup and select Edit from the
menu.

7-146 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

7-5 Performing Online Debugging

2 In the I/O Map, perform operations such as Set/Reset, present value change, and forced re-
freshing on output devices. Refer to 7-2-3 Changing Present Values and Set/Reset Using
Forced Refreshing on page 7-24 for the procedures to execute Set/Reset, present value
change, and forced refreshing in the I/O Map.
The results of the operations that you performed are input to external devices. Make sure that
the operation results are input correctly to the intended external device. If the results are not
input correctly, review the wiring connection between the device and the external device.

3 Check the input results from external devices that are connected to input devices.
7
The values of the corresponding devices on the I/O Map are changed. Make sure that the val-
ue of the intended device is changed correctly. If the value is not changed correctly, review the

7-5-4 Checking I/O Assignments

wiring connection between the device and the external device. Refer to 7-2-1 Monitoring on
page 7-4 for details on monitoring in the I/O Map.

7-5-4 Checking I/O Assignments

 Checking I/O Assignments

You can use an I/O assignment check to check the assignments of external I/O devices and varia-
bles.

 Procedure to Check I/O Assignments

1 Execute a wiring connection check between Units and external devices.

2 Open the Watch Tab Page while online.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-147

7 Debugging

3 In the Watch Tab Page, register the variables that are assigned to output devices. Refer to
7-2-1 Monitoring on page 7-4 for details on the procedure to register variables in the Watch Tab
Page.

4 Perform operations such as Set/Reset, present value change, and forced refreshing on varia-
bles that you registered in the Watch Tab Page. Refer to 7-2-3 Changing Present Values and
Set/Reset Using Forced Refreshing on page 7-24 for the procedures to execute Set/Reset,
present value change, and forced refreshing in the Watch Tab Page.
The results of the operations that you performed are input to external devices. Make sure that
the operation results are input correctly to the intended external device. If the results are not
input correctly, review the variable assignments to the device.

5 In the Watch Tab Page, register the variables that are assigned to input devices.

6 Check the input results from external devices that are connected to input devices.
The values of variables that you registered in the Watch Tab Page are changed. Make sure
that the variable values are changed correctly. If the values are not changed correctly, review
the variable assignments to the device. Refer to 7-2-1 Monitoring on page 7-4 for details on
monitoring in the Watch Tab Page.

7-5-5 Resetting the Controller

A Controller reset emulates the operations and status when the power supply to the Controller is cy-
cled.
This can be performed only in PROGRAM Mode. You cannot reset the Controller in RUN Mode.

7-148 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 7 Debugging

You also cannot reset the Controller when connected to the Simulator.

 Procedure

1 Select Reset Controller from the Controller Menu.

A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

2 Confirm that no problem will occur even if you reset the Controller, and then click the Yes But-

7-5 Performing Online Debugging

ton.

Precautions for Safe Use

• Always confirm safety before you reset the Controller.

• Always confirm the safety of the system before you reset Controller.
• It takes up to approximately 10 to 20 s to enter RUN mode after the power is turned ON. Dur-
ing that period, the outputs behave according to the slave and Unit specifications. Use the
RUN output on the Power Supply Unit, for example, to implement fail-safe circuits so that ex-
ternal devices do not operate incorrectly.

Additional Information 7
After a reset is performed, the Sysmac Studio goes offline.

7-5-6 Restarting Units

7-5-6 Restarting Units
Use the following procedure to restart Units.
If you change operation settings for an NX Unit or CJ-series Unit, it may be necessary to restart the
Unit depending on the setting to which you made a change.

Restart an NX Unit

1 Right-click a Unit and select Restart NX Bus/NX Unit from the menu.
A restart confirmation dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Yes Button.

The Unit is restarted.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 7-149

7 Debugging

Additional Information

• If NX Units are mounted on an NX102 or NX1P2 CPU Unit, right-clicking the CPU Unit and
then selecting Restart NX Bus/NX Unit, all the NX Units mounted on the CPU Unit are re-
started.
• Refer to 8-12-4 Maintenance Operations for EtherCAT Slave Terminals on page 8-69 for de-
tails on restarting NX Units on an EtherCAT Slave Terminal.

Restarting CJ-series Special Units

You can restart CJ-series Special Units by using the restart instruction in the user program. Some CJ-
series Special Units can be restarted from the Sysmac Studio.

1 Right-click a Unit and select Edit Special Unit Settings from the menu.
The Special Unit Settings Tab Page is displayed.

2 Click the Restart Button.

Additional Information

Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) for details on us-
ing the restart instruction in the user program.

7-150 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8
Other Functions
This section describes Sysmac Studio functions other than system design functions.

8-1 SD Memory Card Operations ........................................................................ 8-3

8-1-1 SD Memory Card Window Procedures ........................................................... 8-3
8-2 Clock Information Settings............................................................................ 8-7
8-3 Security Settings ............................................................................................ 8-8
8-3-1 Operation Authority Verification....................................................................... 8-8
8-3-2 Authentication of User Program Execution IDs ............................................. 8-15
8-3-3 Write Protection of the CPU Unit ................................................................... 8-17
8-3-4 Data Protection.............................................................................................. 8-19
8-4 User Memory Usage Monitor ...................................................................... 8-23
8-5 Printing.......................................................................................................... 8-25
8-5-1 Items You Can Print....................................................................................... 8-25
8-5-2 Print Setup..................................................................................................... 8-25
8-5-3 Printing .......................................................................................................... 8-28
8
8-5-4 Print Preview ................................................................................................. 8-29
8-6 Clearing Memory .......................................................................................... 8-31
8-6-1 Clearing All Memory of the CPU Unit ............................................................ 8-31
8-6-2 Clearing All Memory of NX Units................................................................... 8-33
8-6-3 Clear All Memory Operation for the Units in a Slave Terminal ...................... 8-33
8-7 Releasing Access Rights ............................................................................ 8-35
8-8 Displaying Unit Production Information .................................................... 8-36
8-8-1 Displaying CPU Unit Production Information................................................. 8-36
8-8-2 Displaying EtherCAT Slave Production Information ...................................... 8-38
8-8-3 Displaying Production Information for Configuration Units in Ether-
CAT Slave Terminals ..................................................................................... 8-38
8-9 Backup Functions ........................................................................................ 8-40
8-9-1 Controller Backup Functions ......................................................................... 8-41
8-9-2 SD Memory Card Backup Functions ............................................................. 8-45
8-9-3 Backing Up Variables and Memory ............................................................... 8-46
8-9-4 Importing/Exporting Backup Files.................................................................. 8-54
8-10 Transferring All Controller Data.................................................................. 8-58
8-10-1 Transferring Data from the Computer to a Controller .................................... 8-58
8-10-2 Transferring Data from the Controller to the Computer ................................. 8-58
8-11 NX Unit Maintenance ................................................................................... 8-60
8-12 EtherCAT Maintenance ................................................................................ 8-61

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-1

8 Other Functions

8-12-1 Disconnecting a Slave from and Reconnecting a Slave to the Network ....... 8-61
8-12-2 Packet Monitoring.......................................................................................... 8-63
8-12-3 Diagnostic and Statistical Information ........................................................... 8-64
8-12-4 Maintenance Operations for EtherCAT Slave Terminals ............................... 8-69
8-13 Grouping for POUs and Global Variables .................................................. 8-71
8-13-1 Displaying the Programming Group Tab Page .............................................. 8-71
8-13-2 Grouping POUs ............................................................................................. 8-72
8-13-3 Grouping Global Variables ............................................................................ 8-75
8-14 Project Shortcut View .................................................................................. 8-79
8-14-1 Displaying the Project Shortcut View ............................................................ 8-79
8-14-2 Adding User Folders...................................................................................... 8-80
8-14-3 Renaming User Folders ................................................................................ 8-81
8-14-4 Copying and Pasting User Folders................................................................ 8-81
8-14-5 Cutting User Folders ..................................................................................... 8-82
8-14-6 Deleting User Folders.................................................................................... 8-82
8-14-7 Editing Comments on User Folders .............................................................. 8-83
8-14-8 Adding Shortcuts ........................................................................................... 8-83
8-14-9 Editing Items from Shortcuts ......................................................................... 8-85
8-14-10 Copying and Pasting Shortcuts ..................................................................... 8-86
8-14-11 Cutting Shortcuts........................................................................................... 8-87
8-14-12 Deleting Shortcuts ......................................................................................... 8-87
8-14-13 Editing Comments on Shortcuts.................................................................... 8-88
8-14-14 Jumping from a Shortcut to the Multiview Explorer ....................................... 8-88
8-15 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 8-90
8-15-1 Troubleshooting Dialog Box........................................................................ 8-90
8-15-2 Controller Errors ............................................................................................ 8-91
8-15-3 Controller Event Log...................................................................................... 8-95
8-15-4 User-defined Errors ....................................................................................... 8-99
8-15-5 User-defined Event Log............................................................................... 8-100
8-15-6 Event Setting Table ..................................................................................... 8-101
8-15-7 Displaying and Editing the Event Setting Table........................................... 8-103
8-15-8 Event Log Viewer ........................................................................................ 8-106
8-16 Changing Variable Comments and Data Type Comments ..................... 8-109
8-16-1 Exporting Comments................................................................................... 8-109
8-16-2 Editing the Comment File ............................................................................ 8-109
8-16-3 Importing Comment Files .............................................................................8-110
8-16-4 Switching the Displayed Comments.............................................................8-111
8-17 Exporting Global Variables ....................................................................... 8-112
8-17-1 Exporting Global Variables for the Network Configurator .............................8-112
8-17-2 Exporting Global Variables for the CX-Designer ..........................................8-112
8-18 Importing ST Programs ............................................................................. 8-113
8-19 Importing IEC 61131-10 XML Files ............................................................ 8-115
8-19-1 Importing Data..............................................................................................8-115
8-19-2 Compare before Importing ...........................................................................8-116
8-20 Importing Motor Sizing Tool Results........................................................ 8-119
8-21 Updating the Configurations and Setup Transfer Data .......................... 8-121
8-22 EtherNet/IP Connection Settings .............................................................. 8-122
8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings................................................................ 8-123

8-2 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-1 SD Memory Card Operations

 SD Memory Card Operations
The SD Memory Card function is provided so that you can operate files in an SD Memory Card that
is mounted in the NJ/NX-series Controller and transfer and copy files between the SD Memory
Card and the computer.
With an NY-series Controller, a Virtual SD Memory Card is used to perform the same function as an
SD Memory Card. In the following description, an SD Memory Card should be replaced by a Virtual
SD Memory Card when you use an NY-series Controller.

8-1-1 SD Memory Card Window Procedures

1 Select SD Memory Card from the Controller Menu when online. The SD Memory Card Win-
dow is displayed.

Toolbar

8-1 SD Memory Card Operations

Address Bar

Current Folder Display Area

Status Bar

Overview of the SD Memory Card Window

8-1-1 SD Memory Card Window Procedures

 Toolbar
Use the buttons in the toolbar or shortcut keys to execute SD Memory Card file operations.

Button Operation (shortcut) Function

Back (Alt + ←) Returns to previous file or folder.

Forward (Alt + →) Goes forward to next file or folder.

Up (Backspace) Goes to one higher folder.

Update (F5) Updates the display to the latest information.

Properties (Alt + Enter) Used to display the properties and change the attributes*1 of the
selected file or folder (cannot be used when no file or folder is se-
lected or when more than one file or folder is selected).
Initialize SD Memory Card*2 Formats the SD Memory Card.
(Ctrl + Alt + A)

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-3

8 Other Functions

Button Operation (shortcut) Function

Delete (Del) Deletes the selected files or folders.

Copy (Ctrl + C) Copies the selected files or folders.

Paste (Ctrl + V) Pastes the copied files or folders.

New Folder (Ctrl + Alt + F) Creates a new folder in the current location.

Rename (F2) Changes the name of the selected file or folder (cannot be used
when no file or folder is selected or when more than one file or
folder is selected).
SD Memory Card Backup (Alt Backs up the Controller data in the SD Memory Card.
+ Shift + B) *3
Compare SD Memory Card Compares the data in a backup file in the SD Memory Card to the
Backup (Alt + Shift + C) *3 Controller data.
Exit (Alt + F4) Ends SD Memory Card operations.

*1. You cannot change the attribute for an NY-series Controller.

*2. You cannot use the operation for an NY-series Controller. The button is grayed out.
*3. Refer to 8-9-2 SD Memory Card Backup Functions on page 8-45 for the procedures for the SD Memory
Card backup functions.

 Address Bar
The address bar displays the current folder on the SD Memory Card. You can also specify the fold-
er you need.

 Current Folder Display Area

This area displays a list of the files in the current folder on the SD Memory Card. The following
items are displayed. Click a title to sort the files by that item.

Title Description
Name File/folder name (long file names)
Size Actual file size (Kbytes)
Type Type of file registered on the computer
Date Time and date the file was modified
Attribute R: Read only

 Status Bar
The status bar displays information on the files in the current folder on the SD Memory Card. The
following items are displayed.

Item Description
Status Number of objects in the file list (number of files and folders)
Note SD Memory Card is not mounted or not formatted is displayed if an SD
Memory Card is not inserted, power is not supplied to the SD Memory Card , or
the SD Memory Card is not formatted.
Volume Label The volume label of the SD Memory Card*1
Free Area The size of free area in the SD Memory Card (KB)
*1. The volume label is not displayed for an NY-series Controller.

8-4 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

SD Memory Card Procedures

 Formatting an SD Memory Card

1 Click the Format Button ( ).

A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Start Button.

 Displaying Properties

8-1 SD Memory Card Operations

1 Select the file or folder.

2 Click the Properties Button ( )

The properties of the selected file or folder are displayed.

When a Folder Is Selected When a File Is Selected

8-1-1 SD Memory Card Window Procedures

 Copying Files and Folders in the SD Memory Card

1 Select files or folders and click the Copy Button ( ).

2 Specify the copy destination, and then click the Paste Button ( ).
The selected files or folders are copied.

 Copying Files and Folders from the SD Memory Card to the Computer

1 Select files or folders in the SD Memory Card Window, and then click the Copy Button ( ).

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-5

8 Other Functions

2 Specify the copy destination in Windows Explorer, and then paste the files or folders (Ctrl + v).
The selected files or folders are pasted.

 Copying Files and Folders from the Computer to the SD Memory Card

1 Select and copy files or folders in Windows Explorer (Ctrl + c).

2 Specify the copy destination in the SD Memory Card Window, and then click the Paste Button

( ).
The selected files or folders are pasted.

Precautions for Correct Use

• Multibyte characters (e.g., Japanese) cannot be used in the CPU Unit even if they can be
used on the computer.
• You can create up to 511 files in the root directory.
You cannot create this many files if you use MS-DOS 8.3 file names or long file names.

8-6 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-2 Clock Information Settings

The computer’s clock information is also displayed. You can read and set the Controller’s clock.

 Displaying and Setting Clock Information

This function can be used only online.

1 Select Controller Clock from the Controller Menu of the Sysmac Studio.

The computer’s clock The Controller’s clock

information is displayed here. information is displayed here.

8-2 Clock Information Settings

2 To set the time zone, select the time zone of the Controller and click the Apply Button for the
time zone.

3 To set the clock in the Controller, set the clock information for the Controller and then click the
Apply Button for the date and time. Click the Synchronize with computer Button and then
click the Apply Button to synchronize the Controller’s clock information with the computer’s
clock information.
8
Precautions for Correct Use

Withe an NY-series Controller, you cannot set the time zone and apply the clock information of
the computer to the Controller. Refer to the NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC
Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558) for details on the clock function of the NY-series Con-
troller.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-7

8 Other Functions

8-3 Security Settings

To protect assets and prevent incorrect operation, you can protect user programs and data in the Con-
troller and restrict operations in the Sysmac Studio.

 Overview of Security Settings

An overview of the applications and functions of security settings is given below.

Function Application Outline of function

Operation authority verification Prevention of incor- This limits the operations that each operator can use
rect operation based on the authority of the operator.
User program execution ID Prevention of the This ensures that a user program cannot be operat-
theft of assets ed on another CPU Unit even if copied.
Write protection of the CPU Prevention of incor- You can prevent the Sysmac Studio from overwriting
Unit rect operation data in the CPU Unit.
Data protection Prevention of the You can set passwords for individual POUs (pro-
theft of assets grams, functions, and function block definitions) and
cam profiles to prevent them from being displayed,
changed, or copied.

8-3-1 Operation Authority Verification

If you change the data in the Controller, operating errors may cause human injury or physical damage.
You can restrict the operations that each operator can perform based on the authority of the operator
to prevent operating mistakes.

Operation Authority Verification

 Operation Authority Verification

You can restrict online operations with operation rights to prevent damage to equipment or injuries
that may be caused by operating mistakes.

An operation authority password is required to go online. If you pass password verification, you can
perform online operations according to your operation authority.

The Administrator sets a password for each operation authority. Users are notified of the operation
authority name and password according to their skills.

Verification of operation authority is performed when you access the Controller from another com-
puter, because the Operation Authority Verification Settings are transferred to the Controller and
stored there.

Precautions for Correct Use

• You can set operation authority verification only online.

• Only the Administrator can change operation authority verification or transfer it to the Control-
ler.
• You cannot go online if you forget the operation authority password. Record the password in
case you forget it.

8-8 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

 Types of Operation Authorities

There are five levels of operation authority for the Sysmac Studio, as given below (in order starting
with the greatest level of authority).
• Administrator
• Designer
• Maintainer
• Operator
• Observer (A password is not required.)

 Applicable Online Operations

The functions, authorities, and operation restrictions that require verification are given below.
Supported: Operation possible, VR: Verification required for each operation, NP: Operation not
possible

Admin- Design- Main- Opera- Observ-

Monitoring status
istrator er tainer tor er
Monitoring Controller status Support- Support- Support- Support- Support-
ed ed ed ed ed
Monitoring the status of Special I/O Units and slaves Support- Support- Support- Support- Support-
ed ed ed ed ed
Troubleshooting and event logs Support- Support- Support- Support- Support-
ed ed ed ed ed
Reading CPU Unit names Support- Support- Support- Support- Support-

8-3 Security Settings

ed ed ed ed ed

Admin- Design- Main- Opera- Observ-

Operations to monitor I/O
istrator er tainer tor er
Reading I/O Support- Support- Support- Support- NP
ed ed ed ed
Writing I/O Support- Support- Support- VR NP
ed ed ed
8
Changing BOOL variables to TRUE/FALSE (SET/ Support- Support- Support- VR NP

8-3-1 Operation Authority Verification

RESET) ed ed ed
Forced refreshing (TRUE/FALSE/Clear) Support- Support- Support- NP NP
ed ed ed
Monitoring programs, functions, and function blocks Support- Support- Support- Support- NP
Differential monitoring ed ed ed ed

Admin- Design- Main- Opera- Observ-

Controller operations
istrator er tainer tor er
RUN mode Support- Support- VR NP NP
ed ed
PROGRAM mode Support- Support- VR NP NP
ed ed
Online editing Support- Support- VR NP NP
ed ed
Data trace operations Support- Support- Support- Support- NP
(starting, stopping, forcing triggers, and uploading set- ed ed ed ed
tings)
Releasing access rights Support- Support- NP NP NP
ed ed

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-9

8 Other Functions

Admin- Design- Main- Opera- Observ-

Controller operations
istrator er tainer tor er
Clearing all memory Support- NP NP NP NP
ed
Resetting the Controller Support- Support- NP NP NP
ed ed
Resetting errors (troubleshooting) Support- Support- Support- VR NP
ed ed ed
Clearing event logs (error logs) Support- Support- Support- NP NP
ed ed ed
Controller clock Support- Support- NP NP NP
ed ed
SD Memory Card operations Support- Support- Support- Support- NP
ed ed ed ed
Updating CPU Unit names Support- Support- NP NP NP
ed ed
Setting user program execution IDs Support- NP NP NP NP
ed
Setting write protection of the CPU Unit Support- Support- Support- NP NP
ed ed ed
MC Test Run Support- Support- VR NP NP
ed ed
Restarting NX Units Support- Support- Support- NP NP
ed ed ed
User calibration (NX Analog I/O Unit) Support- Support- Support- NP NP
ed ed ed
Restarting CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units Support- Support- Support- NP NP
ed ed ed

Admin- Design- Main- Opera- Observ-

Transfer operations
istrator er tainer tor er
Synchronization Support- Support- Support- NP NP
Note: Uploading and downloading are supported ed ed ed
(including transferring only part of a project)
Transferring parameter settings of a CJ-series Unit Support- Support- Support- NP NP
mounted on the CPU/Expansion ed ed ed
Rack to the Controller
Transferring parameter settings of a CJ-series Unit Support- Support- Support- NP NP
mounted on the CPU/Expansion ed ed ed
Rack from the Controller
Transferring operation settings of an NX Unit mounted Support- Support- Support- NP NP
on the CPU/Expansion ed ed ed
Rack to the Controller
Transferring operation settings of an NX Unit mounted Support- Support- Support- NP NP
on the CPU/Expansion ed ed ed
Rack from the Controller
Transferring data to the Controller from the EtherCAT Support- Support- Support- NP NP
Configuration ed ed ed
Display Tab Page
Transferring data from the Controller from the Ether- Support- Support- Support- NP NP
CAT Configuration ed ed ed
Display Tab Page

8-10 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Admin- Design- Main- Opera- Observ-

Transfer operations
istrator er tainer tor er
Transferring data to the Controller from Support- Support- Support- NP NP
the Slave Terminal Unit Settings ed ed ed
Transferring data from the Controller Support- Support- Support- NP NP
from the Slave Terminal Unit Settings ed ed ed
Writing the setting of the Setting Change during RUN Support- Support- Support- NP NP
Mode parameter in the Controller Setup ed ed ed
Transferring operation authority verification settings Support- NP NP NP NP
ed

Admin- Design- Main- Opera- Observ-

Backup and restore operations
istrator er tainer tor er
Backing up and restoring Controller data and compar- Support- Support- Support- NP NP
ing data with Controller data ed ed ed
Backing up data to SD Memory Card and comparing Support- Support- Support- NP NP
data with data in SD Memory Card ed ed ed
Backing up variables and memory Support- Support- Support- NP NP
ed ed ed
Restoring variables and memory Support- Support- NP NP NP
ed ed

Admin- Design- Main- Opera- Observ-

Slave Terminal operations

8-3 Security Settings

istrator er tainer tor er
Clear All Memory Operation Support- Support- Support- NP NP
ed ed ed
Restarting Support- Support- Support- NP NP
ed ed ed
User calibration (Analog I/O Unit) Support- Support- Support- NP NP
ed ed ed

8
 Password Setting Ranges
Item Description

8-3-1 Operation Authority Verification

Valid number of characters 8 to 32
Applicable characters Single-byte alphanumeric characters (case sensitive)

 Procedure for Setting New Authorities

1 Select Security - Setting of Operation Authority from the Controller Menu.

The Setting of Operation Authority Dialog Box is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-11

8 Other Functions

2 Select the Enable the verification of operation authority Check Box and double-click
Administrator in the Operation authority Column.

3 Enter the Administrator’s password in the New password textbox. Enter the same password in
the confirmation field, and click the OK Button.

4 Set the default operation authority to use when the password is not entered.
The operation authority that is set here is used when entering the password is omitted during
verification when going online.

5 Set the password for the operation authority to set.

A password is required for operations that require a higher operation authority than the opera-
tion authority that is set for when the password is not entered.
A password is not required for operations that require an operation authority that is equal to or
less than the operation authority that is set for when the password is not entered. Leave the
password entry box blank.

6 Click the Transfer To Controller Button to write the settings into the Controller.
A dialog box for completion of setting operation authority verification is displayed.

To enable the settings, go online with the Controller again.

 Procedure for Changing Authority Verification Settings

You cannot change authority verification settings unless you are the Administrator.

8-12 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

1 Select Security - Setting of Operation Authority from the Controller Menu.

The Administrator Authentication Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Enter the Administrator’s password, and click the OK Button.

3 Use the same procedure as for a new password to set the password in the Setting of
Operation Authority Dialog Box.

Verification When Going Online

When operation authority verification is set on the Controller, operation authority verification is per-
formed when going online.
If verified, you can perform online operations according to your authority.

 Procedure for the Verification Dialog Box

8-3 Security Settings

The Verification Dialog Box is displayed when you attempt to go online.

1 Select the operation authority, enter the password, and click the OK Button.

8-3-1 Operation Authority Verification

If the password is correct, online operations are enabled.
If you cancel password entry or do not enter a password, the default operation authority will
apply to online operations.
The following warning is displayed if the password does not match. Click the OK Button and
then either continue with operations or go online again.
Click the OK Button to go online as an Observer.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-13

8 Other Functions

Verification for Individual Operations

Verification is performed each time a user with a certain authority or lower performs an operation that
may damage equipment or cause injury due to incorrect operation.
Refer to Applicable Online Operations on page 8-9 for information on the applicable operations.

Be careful when you enter the password in the Verification Dialog Box. The Sysmac Studio is locked
for 10 minutes if you enter the wrong password 5 times.

If you select an operation that cannot be used with the current authority, the following error message is
displayed and the operation is not performed.

Go online again and change the operation authority before you perform the operation.

Operation Lock
You can set a lock on verification to prevent user operations if there are no user operations for the time
that is specified in the Setting of Operation Authority Dialog Box.
This prevents the wrong user from mistakenly performing operations. If operation is locked, you need
to perform verification again.
Operation authority must be set to use the operation lock. It cannot be used alone.

 Procedure to Set the Operation Lock

1 Select Setting of Operation Authority from the Controller Menu.

The Setting of Operation Authority Dialog Box is displayed.

8-14 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

2 Select the Enable Option in the Operation Lock Area, enter the Lock time, and click the
Transfer To Controller Button.

8-3-2 Authentication of User Program Execution IDs

If you enter a specific ID for the Controller in advance (called a user program execution ID), only a
user program that is assigned that ID can be executed on the Controller.

Sysmac Studio

8-3 Security Settings

A user program execution ID
is registered in the CPU Unit.
CPU Unit

User program execution ID

Transfer 8
The CPU Unit can
execute the user
User program User program
program only when

8-3-2 Authentication of User Program Execution IDs

these two match.
User program
execution ID
assigned to user
program. User program execution ID User program execution IDs

This function can be used to achieve the following:

• A Controller can be restricted to execute only a specific user program.
• You can prevent a user program from use on a different Controller (hardware).
This function is different from the protection functions in that the user program can be viewed and edit-
ed.

 Setting Ranges for User Program Execution IDs

Item Description
Valid number of characters 8 to 32 characters
Applicable characters Single-byte alphanumeric characters (case sensitive)

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-15

8 Other Functions

Setting User Program Execution IDs for User Programs

User program execution IDs for user programs are set offline.

Precautions for Correct Use

• A user program execution ID can be set only one time for a user program.
• Record the user program execution ID to ensure you do not lose it.
• We recommend that you backup the project file before you set the user program execution
ID.

1 Select Security - ID for User Program Execution from the Controller Menu.
The User Program Execution ID for Program Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Enter the User Program Execution ID.

3 Enter the same ID in the User Program Execution ID (Confirmation) field, and then click the
OK Button.

 Enabling User Program Execution IDs Verification

Use the following settings to enable user program execution ID verification.

1 Set the same ID as the Controller.

Refer to Setting User Program Execution IDs for Controllers on page 8-16, below.

2 Synchronize (download) the user program for which the user program execution ID is set.

Setting User Program Execution IDs for Controllers

User program execution IDs for Controllers are set online.

8-16 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Precautions for Correct Use

• If operation authority verification is set, you must go online as the Administrator.

• Be sure to record the user program execution ID to ensure you do not lose it. You cannot
change the user program execution ID even if you lose it.
• The user program execution ID that is set for the Controller is deleted by the Clear All Memo-
ry Operation.

1 Select Security - ID for User Program Execution from the Controller Menu.
The Set User Program Execution ID for Controller Dialog Box is displayed.

8-3 Security Settings

2 Enter the same ID as the user program execution ID that is set for the user program, and click
the OK Button.

3 Cycle the power supply to the Controller to enable the setting in the Controller.

8-3-3 Write Protection of the CPU Unit

8
You can prevent the Sysmac Studio from overwriting data in the CPU Unit.

8-3-3 Write Protection of the CPU Unit

Sysmac Studio

CPU Unit CPU Unit

When power
is turned ON
Write-protected Write-protected

Writing is not possible.

Settings for Write Protection at Startup

You can automatically enable write protection for the CPU Unit when the Controller is turned ON to
prevent write operations from the Sysmac Studio.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-17

8 Other Functions

1 Select Operation Settings under Configurations and Setup - Controller Setup.

The Basic Settings Pane for the Controller’s Operation Settings is displayed.

2 Select the Use Option for Write protection at startup in the Security Settings Area.

3 Execute Transfer to Controller to enable the setting.

Clearing Write Protection

You can temporarily clear the write protection on a CPU Unit that is write-protected.

1 Select Security − CPU Unit Write Protection from the Controller Menu while online.

2 Click the Yes Button.

This removes write protection. The following dialog box is displayed.

Setting Write Protection

You can temporarily set write protection on a CPU Unit that is not write-protected from the Sysmac
Studio.

1 Select Security − CPU Unit Write Protection from the Controller Menu while online.

8-18 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

2 Click the Yes Button.

This sets write protection. The following dialog box is displayed.

8-3-4 Data Protection

 Data Protection
The data protection function allows you to set passwords for individual data units to restrict display-
ing, changing, and copying them (access restrictions). You can enter the password to temporarily
clear the protection from a data unit. Data protection is set and canceled offline.

 Access Restrictions

8-3 Security Settings

The following table describes the access restrictions.

Access restric-
Operation Remarks
tion
Display prohibi- The restricted data cannot be displayed. This restriction applies to jumping from oth-
tion er windows, displaying detailed compari-
son results, viewing search results, and
printing previews. 8
Change prohibi- The restricted data cannot be changed. This restriction also applies to online edit-
tion The data can be displayed but not ing and replacement operations.

8-3-4 Data Protection

changed on the display.
Copy prohibi- The restricted data cannot be copied.
tion

 Data That Can Be Protected

The following table lists the data that you can protect from being displayed, changed, and copied.
Protection is implemented by setting a password for each data unit.

Data Remarks
Cam settings Cam profiles Only change prohibition can be set.
Programs Ladder diagrams The restrictions apply to the local variable
ST tables.
Functions Ladder diagrams
ST
Function blocks Ladder diagrams
ST

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-19

8 Other Functions

Data Remarks
Libraries Ladder functions The protection settings for objects in ac-
with source code ST functions cessed libraries cannot be changed.
Ladder function blocks
ST function blocks

 Procedure to Set Protection

1 Select the data to protect, and then select Security − Set/Release Data Protection from the
Controller Menu. Or right-click the data to protect, and select Security − Set/Release Data
Protection from the menu.
The Data Protection Setting Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the Use data protection Check Box and select the access restrictions. Enter the pass-
word, and then click the OK Button.
Data protection is set and the icon on the protected data changes in the Multiview Explorer.

Precautions for Correct Use

You will not be able to temporarily clear protection or remove the protection setting if you forget
the password. Protection settings are also transferred for synchronization operations. If you for-
get the passwords for protected data that was transferred to the Controller, you will no longer be
able to display or change the protected data. Record the password in case you forget it.

 Temporarily Clearing Protection

To perform operations on protected data, you can enter the password to temporarily clear the pro-
tection.

8-20 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

1 Perform the restricted operation for the protected data. If changing the data is restricted, right-
click the data and select Security − Temporary Release of Change Prohibition from the
menu.
The Temporary Release of Data Protection Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Enter the password that was set when data protection was set.
The access restrictions are temporarily cleared.
The following table gives the lengths of time for which the access restrictions are temporarily
cleared.

Access restric-
Length of time that protection is cleared
tion
Display prohibition While the project is open
Change prohibition While the project is open
or until Finish Temporary Release of Change Prohibition is selected from the

8-3 Security Settings

menu
Copy prohibition The password must be entered for each copy operation.

The Sysmac Studio is locked for 10 minutes if you consecutively enter the wrong password 5
times for the same Controller. The Temporary Release of Data Protection Dialog Box is dis-
played again in 10 minutes.

The icons for protected data change as shown in the following table.
8
Data Protected

8-3-4 Data Protection

Ladder diagrams

ST

Ladder debugging programs

ST debugging programs

Cam profiles

Precautions for Correct Use

Even if the access restrictions to prohibit displaying data are set, the dialog box to tem-
porarily clear data protection is not displayed for detailed comparison results, printing,
or printing previews.
For detailed comparison results, clear the protection before you execute the comparison opera-
tion.
For printing and printing previews, display the data from the Multiview Explorer and temporarily
clear protection before you use printing or print previews.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-21

8 Other Functions

 Temporarily Releasing All Protection for a Specific Password

If the same password is used to protect different data, you can temporarily release protection for all
of that data.
The data for which protection is released is all data for which access restrictions prohibit displaying
or changing the data, except for the library data under the Controller.

1 Select Security − Temporary Release of Display/Change Prohibition from the Controller

Menu.
The Temporary Release of Data Protection Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Enter the password for which to release protection.

The access restrictions for the password that you enter are released temporarily.
To release protection for another password, repeat the procedure from step 1.
The protection is released until the effective period for temporarily releasing protection is
reached or until you select Security − Finish Temporary Release of Display/Change
Prohibition from the Controller Menu.
All protection that was temporarily released is restored when you select Finish Temporary
Release of Display/Change Prohibition.

 Procedure to Cancel Protection

1 Select the data for which to cancel protection, and then select Security − Set/Release Data
Protection from the Controller Menu. Or right-click the data for which to cancel protection,
and select Security − Set/Release Data Protection from the menu.
The Temporary Release of Data Protection Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Enter the password, and click the OK Button.

The Data Protection Setting Dialog Box is displayed.

3 Clear the Use data protection Check Box and click the OK Button.
Data protection is cleared and the protection icon returns to the normal icon.

8-22 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-4 User Memory Usage Monitor

 User Memory Usage Monitor
An estimate of the space that is used by the user program that you are editing in the Sysmac Stu-
dio is displayed in relation to the size of the Controller’s memory. If the size of the user program
exceeds the size of memory and it is transferred to the Controller, an error will occur in the Control-
ler when you operate the Controller.

Precautions for Correct Use

The values that are displayed for memory usage are estimates. Use them as guidelines for cur-
rent memory usage.
Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series
Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558) for the restric-
tions on the size of the user program.

Displaying Memory Usage

8-4 User Memory Usage Monitor

1 Select Memory Usage from the Project Menu.
Memory usage is displayed.

Item Displayed information

Number of Data Type Displays the number of data types that are used.
Definitions
Number of Non-retained Displays the number of non-retained variables that are used.
Variable Definitions
Memory of Non-re- Displays the usage of non-retained variable memory.
tained Variable
Number of Retained Displays the number of retained variables with unspecified addresses that
Variable Definitions are used.
(Address Unspecified)
Memory of Retained Displays the usage of retained variable memory.
Variable

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-23

8 Other Functions

Item Displayed information

Number of POU Instan- Displays the number of POU instances that are used.
ces
Program Memory Displays the usage of memory by the program.
Number of Module Files Displays the number of module files to execute. The files are created for
POUs and sections, and the display changes according to the number of
POUs and sections.

8-24 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-5 Printing
This section describes printing operations.

8-5-1 Items You Can Print

You can print the following items. You can select any of the items to print.
• EtherCAT network configuration and Unit operation settings
• Special Unit parameters settings*1
• CPU/Expansion Racks*2
• I/O map
• Controller Setup
• Motion Control Setup (axis settings)
• Cam data settings
• Event settings
• Task settings
• Data trace settings
• Programs, functions, and function blocks in Ladder Editor
• Programs, functions, and function blocks in ST Editor
• Local variable tables (programs, functions, and function blocks)
• User-defined data types in Data Type Editor
• Global variable table
*1. This is displayed only for an NJ-series CPU Unit.

8-5 Printing
*2. This is displayed for NJ-series and NX102 or NX1P2 CPU Units.

Additional Information

• Refer to 8-15 Troubleshooting on page 8-90 for information on printing during troubleshoot-
ing. 8
• For device-specific printing functions other than those for Controllers, refer to the manual for
the device.

8-5-2 Print Setup 8-5-1 Items You Can Print

You can specify settings such as whether to print a cover page and table of contents, as well as the
margins and font when printing.

Use the following procedure to set up printing.

1 Select Page Settings from the File Menu.

The Print Setup Tab Page is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-25

8 Other Functions

2 Use the buttons on the left to select the settings.

Button Icon Description

General Button Set whether to print a cover page and table of contents.

Margin Button Click to set the page margins and header/footer mar-
gins.

Header Button Click to set the header contents.

Footer Button Click to set the footer contents.

Font Button Click to set the font to use for printing.

3 Specify each setting.

Print Setup Items

This section describes print setup items.

 General

8-26 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Setup Item Description

Print the cover page Set whether to print a cover page. The following items are printed on the cover page.
• Project name
• Project properties
• Current Sysmac Studio version
Print the table of con- Set whether to print a table of contents. The headings and page numbers of the items
tents to print are printed in the table of contents.

 Margin

Setup Item Description

Margin Set the top, bottom, left, and right margins of the printed pages.
Header/Footer Margin Set the margin from the top of the page to the header and the margin from the bottom
of the page to the footer.

8-5 Printing
 Header/Footer
Set the text to print in the header and footer. For each, you can specify the text to print at the left
side, center, and right side of the page.
8

8-5-2 Print Setup

You can use the following field codes in the header and footer.

Field
Item Printing example Remarks
code
Date &d 2015/02/24 The printing date is printed.
Time &t 16:38 The printing time is printed.
Page number &# 1 ---
Total pages &o 4 ---
Printed item &l I/O Map ---
Project name &j New Project ---
Controller name &v new_Controller_0 ---
Controller model &y NJ501-1500(1.09) The model and unit version of the Con-
name troller are printed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-27

8 Other Functions

Field
Item Printing example Remarks
code
POU name &p Program0 This is printed only on the pages where
POUs are printed.
Section name &s Section1 This is printed only on the pages where
sections are printed.

 Font
Click the Font Setting Button and set the font to use when printing in the Font Setting Dialog Box
that is displayed. You can set the font type, style, effects, and size.

8-5-3 Printing
Use the following procedure to print.

1 Select Print from the File Menu.

2 Select the check boxes for the items to print.

3 Click the Print Button.

The Print Dialog Box is displayed.

8-28 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

4 Select the printer to use, and then click the Print Button.
The selected items are printed.
Printing Examples:

8-5 Printing
8

8-5-4 Print Preview

8-5-4 Print Preview

Use the following procedure to display a print preview.

1 Select Print from the File Menu.

2 Select the check boxes for items to display in the print preview.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-29

8 Other Functions

3 Click the Preview Button.

A printing preview of the selected items is displayed.

8-30 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-6 Clearing Memory

 Clearing Memory
You can use the Clear All Memory menu command to initialize the data in the CPU Unit and mount-
ed Units to the defaults from the Sysmac Studio.

8-6-1 Clearing All Memory of the CPU Unit

The Clear All Memory menu command initializes the user program, Controller Configurations and Set-
up, variables, and absolute encoder home offsets in the CPU Unit, as well as the data in NX Units, to
the defaults.

 Items Cleared by the Command and Their Status after Clearing Memory
Data Status after Clear All Memory operation
User program One program is assigned to the primary periodic task (task period: 4 ms). The
program will be empty.
Controller configura- The default settings are restored.
tions and setup Security information (protection, verification, etc.) is also initialized.
Var- System-defined Depends on the type of variable
iabl variables
es Device variables Clearing the variable tables deletes the device variables.

8-6 Clearing Memory

User-defined User-defined variables are deleted when the variable tables are cleared.
variables
Absolute encoder Cleared.
home offset
NX Units*1 Memory data in all NX Units on the CPU Rack is cleared.
Event logs Event logs you selected in Clear All Memory operation are cleared.
*1. Applicable when NX Units are mounted on an NX102 or NX1P2 CPU Unit. 8
Precautions for Safe Use

8-6-1 Clearing All Memory of the CPU Unit

After you clear the memory, the Controller operates in the same way as immediately after you
create the system configuration with the Controller in the factory default condition.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-31

8 Other Functions

Precautions for Correct Use

• The Clear All Memory Operation can be performed only in PROGRAM mode.
• The Clear All Memory Operation cannot be performed when write protection of the CPU Unit
is set in the Security Settings. Clear the write protection of the CPU Unit and then perform the
Clear All Memory Operation.
• When the Clear All Memory command is executed, the value of the absolute encoder home
offset is cleared.
To retain the value of the absolute encoder home offset before the Clear All Memory opera-
tion, use the Controller backup function before you execute the Clear All Memory command.
To restore the previous value of the absolute encoder home offset after the Clear All Memory
operation, restore the file that were backed up with the Controller backup function. Refer to
8-9-1 Controller Backup Functions on page 8-41 for details on the Controller backup func-
tion.
• The details of NX Unit areas initialized in the Clear All Memory operation and the state after
initialization depend on the Unit. Refer to the user’s manual for the specific NX Unit for de-
tails.

 Procedure for Clearing Memory

1 Go online and select Clear All Memory from the Controller Menu.
The Clear All Memory Confirmation Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Check the areas to initialize. Select the check box to clear the event logs.

3 Click the OK Button to clear the memory.

After the memory is cleared, the following dialog box is displayed.

4 Click the OK Button.

8-32 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

The Clear All Memory Operation cannot be performed in RUN mode.

8-6-2 Clearing All Memory of NX Units

Data on an NX Unit mounted on the CPU Unit or an NX Unit on the Slave Terminal is initialized on an
individual Unit basis.

1 When the Controller is connected online, right-click on the target NX Unit and select Clear All
Memory.
The Clear All Memory dialog box is displayed.

8-6 Clearing Memory

2 Check the areas to initialize, and click the Execute Button.
A dialog box to confirm execution is displayed.
8
3 Click the Yes Button.

8-6-2 Clearing All Memory of NX Units

The Memory All Clear operation is completed, and the NX Unit is restarted.

Precautions for Correct Use

For NX Units mounted on an NX1P2 CPU Unit, Memory All Clear operation cannot be per-
formed on an individual Unit basis. Clear all memory of the CPU Unit.

8-6-3 Clear All Memory Operation for the Units in a Slave Terminal
You can initialize the data in specified Units or all of the Units on a Slave Terminal.

1 Go online, right-click a Unit on the Slave Terminal Tab Page and select Clear All Memory. To
perform the Clear All Memory Operation for all of the Units, right-click the Communications
Coupler Unit and select Clear All Memory.
The Clear All Memory Dialog Box is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-33

8 Other Functions

2 Check the areas to be initialized and then click the Execute Button. To clear the event log, se-
lect the Clear the event logs Check Box. To perform the Clear All Memory Operation for all of
the Units, select Coupler + NX Units for the Area Selection for Coupler.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the Yes Button.

The Units will be restarted when the Clear All Memory Operation is completed.

Precautions for Correct Use

• Refer to the user’s manual for details on the specific Units for the areas that are initialized
and the status after initialization before the Clear All Memory Operation is performed.
• The Units are restarted after the Clear All Memory Operation is completed. This will cause I/O
communications with the communications master to stop. What is restarted depends on what
memory is cleared and the unit version of the EtherCAT Coupler Unit. Refer to the NX-series
EtherCAT Coupler Units User’s Manual (Cat. No. W519) for details.

8-34 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-7 Releasing Access Rights

 Releasing Access Rights
Access rights may be retained by the Controller if the online connection is abnormally broken be-
tween the Controller and the Sysmac Studio. In this case, normally access from the Sysmac Studio
is no longer possible.
Use the Sysmac Studio to release the access rights in the Controller.

 Procedure for Releasing Access Rights

1 Select Release Access Right from the Controller Menu.

8-7 Releasing Access Rights

2 Click the Yes Button.
The following dialog box is displayed when the access rights are released.

8
3 Click the OK Button.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-35

8 Other Functions

8-8 Displaying Unit Production Informa-

tion
You can display the production information on the CPU Unit, the Units mounted on the CPU Unit, or
EtherCAT slaves in the Production Information Dialog Box. Production information refers to the model,
version, lot number, and other information.
The following describes the common operations to screens and the displayed items for each Unit.

Dialog Box
The Production Information Dialog Box has the outline view and the detail view.

Outline View Detail View

Click the Show Outline Button or the Show Detail Button to change between the outline and detail
views.

Output File
You can save production information to a file.

1 Click the Output file Button in the Production Information Dialog Box.
The Save File Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Enter a file name, and then click the Save Button.

A file with a .csv extension is saved.

8-8-1 Displaying CPU Unit Production Information

NX/NY-series Controllers
Use the following procedure to display the production information on the CPU Unit or Industrial PC. If
NX Units are mounted on it, the production information on the NX Units is displayed. For the NX1P2
CPU Unit, the production information on Option Boards is also displayed.

8-36 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

 Display Method

1 Right-click CPU Rack under CPU/Expansion Racks in the Multiview Explorer and select
Display Production Information.
The Production Information Dialog Box is displayed.

 Displayed Items
The following items are displayed.

CPU Unit/Industrial PC NX Unit*1 Option Board*2

• Model number and Unit version • Model number and Unit version • Model number and Unit version
• Lot number • Lot number • Lot number
• Serial number • Serial number • Serial number
• Hardware revision • Hardware version • Hardware version
• Software version • Software version • Software version
• Total power-ON time*3 • Total power-ON time
*1. This is displayed only when NX Units are mounted on an NX102 or NX1P2 CPU Unit.

8-8 Displaying Unit Production Information

*2. This is displayed only when Option Boards are mounted on an NX1P2 CPU Unit.
*3. This is displayed only for an NX102 or NX1P2 CPU Unit.

Refer to the manual for the specific Unit for details on the displayed items.

NJ-series Controllers
Use the following procedure to display the production information on the CPU Unit and CJ-series Spe-
cial Units.

 Display Method

1 Double-click CPU/Expansion Racks under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Ex- 8
plorer. Or, right-click CPU/Expansion Racks under Configurations and Setup and select
Edit from the menu.

8-8-1 Displaying CPU Unit Production Information

The Unit Editor is displayed in the Edit Pane.

2 Right-click any location where there is no Unit in the Unit Editor and select Production
Information.
The Production Information Dialog Box is displayed.

 Displayed Items
The following items are displayed.

CPU Unit CJ-series Special Unit

• Unit model number and unit version • Rack number, slot number, and unit number
• Lot number • Unit model number and unit version
• Hardware version and hardware revision*1 • Lot number
• Software version • Unit revision
• PCB revision
• Software revision
*1. The hardware revision is not displayed for the Unit that the hardware revision is in blank.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-37

8 Other Functions

Refer to the manual for the specific Unit for details on the displayed items.

8-8-2 Displaying EtherCAT Slave Production Information

Use the following procedure to display the node addresses, models,*1 and serial IDs that are set in the
EtherCAT slaves.
*1. If the model of a slave cannot be determined (e.g., if there is no ESI file), the vendor ID, product code, and
revision number are displayed.

 Display Method

1 Double-click EtherCAT under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-
click EtherCAT under Configurations and Setup and select Edit from the menu.
The EtherCAT Tab Page is displayed in the Edit Pane.

2 Right-click the master in the EtherCAT Tab Page and select Display Production Information.
The Production Information Dialog Box is displayed.

 Displayed Items
The following items are displayed.
• Model number and revision
• Serial number
• Hardware version
• Software version
Refer to the manual for the specific slave for details on the displayed items.

8-8-3 Displaying Production Information for Configuration Units in

EtherCAT Slave Terminals
Use the following procedure to display the production information in Units mounted on an EtherCAT
Slave Terminal.

 Display Method

1 Double-click the EtherCAT Coupler Unit under EtherCAT in the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-
click the EtherCAT Coupler Unit under EtherCAT and select Edit from the menu.
The Slave Terminal Tab Page is displayed in the Edit Pane.

2 Right-click in the Slave Terminal Tab Page and select Display Production Information from
the menu.
The Production Information Dialog Box is displayed.

 Displayed Items
The following items are displayed.
• Model number and Unit version
• Lot number
• Serial number
• Hardware version

8-38 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

• Software version
• Total power-ON time
Refer to the manual for the specific Unit for details on the displayed items.

8-8 Displaying Unit Production Information

8

CAT Slave Terminals

8-8-3 Displaying Production Information for Configuration Units in Ether-

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-39

8 Other Functions

8-9 Backup Functions

With the backup functions, you can back up, restore, and compare the user program and other
NJ/NX/NY-series Controller data to replace hardware, such as the CPU Unit, or to restore device data.
The following functions are supported.

Function Description
Controller backup functions*1 You can back up, restore, or compare all of the data in the
Controller.
SD Memory Card backup functions*1 You can back up all of the data in the Controller to an SD
Memory Card mounted on an NJ/NX-series Controller or to
a Virtual SD Memory Card in an NY-series Controller, and
compare the data.
Variable and memory backup functions*2 You can back up and restore the contents of retained mem-
ory locations in the Controller.
Importing and exporting backup files You can import backup files from Controller backups or SD
Memory Card backups to projects on the Sysmac Studio or
export data from projects on the Sysmac Studio to backup
files.
*1. A CPU Unit with unit version 1.03 or later and Sysmac Studio version 1.04 or higher are required.
*2. The data that is backed up for variable and memory backup is included in the data that is backed up for
Controller backups.

Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial
Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558) for details on the backup func-
tions, the applicable models for the backup functions, and the data that is backed up and restored.

CAUTION
Always confirm safety at the destination node before you transfer a user program,
configuration data, setup data, device variables, or values in memory used for CJ-ser-
ies Units from the Sysmac Studio.
The devices or machines may perform unexpected operation regardless of the operat-
ing mode of the CPU Unit.

Precautions for Safe Use

• The absolute encoder home offsets are stored in the Controller and backed up by a Battery
as absolute encoder information. If any of the following conditions is met, clear the absolute
encoder home offsets from the list of data items to restore, and then restore the data.
Then, define home again. If you do not define home, unintended operation of the controlled
system may occur.
a) The Servomotor or Servo Drive was changed since the data was backed up.
b) The absolute encoder was set up after the data was backed up.
c) The absolute data for the absolute encoder was lost.
• When you restore only part of the data that was backed up, confirm that no problems will oc-
cur if you do not restore all of the backup data. Otherwise, malfunction of the device may oc-
cur.
• If inappropriate backup data is set when you restore backup data to a Unit, unexpected ma-
chine operation may result. Confirm that the machine will not be adversely affected before
you transfer the data.
• The performance may be different if the hardware revisions are different. Before you transfer
the user program, data, and parameter settings to the CPU Units with the different hardware
revisions, check them for proper execution and then use them for actual operation.

8-40 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-9-1 Controller Backup Functions

You can back up the data from the Controller to a file and restore the contents of the backup file.
Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial
Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558) for details on the backup func-
tions, the applicable models for the backup functions, and the data that is backed up and restored.

Backing Up Data

1 Connect the Sysmac Studio to the Controller to back up, and then select Backup − Backup
Controller from the Tools Menu.

A dialog box is displayed for you to specify the folder in which to save the backup file.

8-9 Backup Functions

8

8-9-1 Controller Backup Functions

2 Select the folder and then click the OK Button.

The Backup Dialog Box is displayed.
Example for an NJ-series Controller

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-41

8 Other Functions

3 Select the data to back up, and then click the Execute Button.
The backup is started.
When the backup is completed, a Verification Confirmation Dialog Box is displayed.

If you click the Yes Button, a dialog box is displayed to confirm the data to compare.
Refer to Verifying Data, below, for the verification procedure.

Additional Information

• The backup file name is automatically determined for the Controller for which the data is
backed up. You cannot change the file name.
• Backup files are not compatible between different series of Controllers.

Restoring Data
Before you restore data, change the operating mode of the Controller to PROGRAM mode.

1 Connect the Sysmac Studio to the Controller to restore, and then select Backup − Restore
Controller from the Tools Menu.
A dialog box is displayed to select the folder in which the backup file is saved to restore the
data.

8-42 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

2 Select the folder and then click the OK Button.

The Restore Dialog Box is displayed.
Example for an NJ-series Controller

8-9 Backup Functions

3 Select the data to restore, and then click the Execute Button.
8
The restoration operation is started and the execution progress is displayed.

8-9-1 Controller Backup Functions

When the execution progress display disappears, the restoration operation is completed.

Precautions for Correct Use

• If the model number or unit version of the CPU Unit of the Controller is not the same as those
of the Controller from which the backup file was created, a confirmation dialog box is dis-
played. Confirm that the Controller is the correct one before you restore the data.
• If restoring the data results in changing the IP address of the EtherNet/IP port, communica-
tions may be disconnected. Confirm that the system will not be adversely affected even if the
IP address changes before you restore the data.
If the Sysmac Studio is connected to a Controller with unit version 1.14 or later, you can re-
move the IP address settings for the built-in EtherNet/IP port from the restore target data. To
do so, clear the IP address in Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings Check Box under Target
Data. Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-
series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558) for
details.
• You cannot cancel the operation after you have started to restore the data.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-43

8 Other Functions

Verifying Data

1 Connect the Sysmac Studio to the Controller for which to compare the data, and then select
Backup − Compare with Backup File from the Tools Menu.
A dialog box is displayed to select the folder in which the backup file is saved to compare the
data.

2 Select the folder and then click the OK Button.

The Compare Dialog Box is displayed.
Example for an NJ-series Controller

3 Select the data to compare, and then click the Execute Button.
The comparison is started.
The comparison results are displayed in the Output Tab Page after the comparison is complet-
ed.

8-44 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-9-2 SD Memory Card Backup Functions

With the SD Memory Card backup functions, you can use SD Memory Cards or Virtual SD Memory
Cards to back up, restore, and verify Controller data. These functions are supported by the Controller
itself. You can also execute SD Memory Card backups and verifications on the Sysmac Studio.
Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial
Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558) for details on the data that is
backed up and the procedure to restore the data.

Backing Up Data

1 In the SD Memory Card Window, display the folder in which to create the backup file and then

click the SD Memory Card Backup Button ( ) on the toolbar.

The SD Memory Card Backup Dialog Box is displayed.

8-9 Backup Functions

2 Click the Execute Button.
The backup is started.
When the backup is completed, a Backup Completed Dialog Box is displayed.

8-9-2 SD Memory Card Backup Functions

Precautions for Correct Use

You cannot backup data when data is already being backed up, restored, or compared for the
same Controller. An error message is displayed and the process is not performed.

Additional Information

The backup file name is automatically determined for the Controller for which the data is backed
up. You cannot change the file name.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-45

8 Other Functions

Verifying Data

1 In the SD Memory Card Window, display the file that contains the data to compare and then

click the Compare SD Memory Card Backup Button ( ) on the toolbar.

The Compare SD Memory Card Backup Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Click the Execute Button.

The comparison is started.
The comparison results are displayed in the Output Tab Page after the comparison is complet-
ed.

8-9-3 Backing Up Variables and Memory

 Backing Up Variables and Memory

When you replace an NJ/NX/NY-series Controller, you can back up the retained memory in the
Controller to a file and restore the backed up data from the file to the new Controller.

Precautions for Correct Use

• Store and manage the variable/memory backup file and the project file used to create it as a
set.
• You can also use the variable/memory backup file to restore memory from a copy of the
project file used to create it, or even if the name of the project file is changed.
• If you change a variable, delete a variable, or otherwise edit a backed up variable in the
project file used to create the backup, that variable is not restored to memory. The informa-
tion on variables or memory that was not restored is recorded as errors.

8-46 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Additional Information

If you add members of structure variables and transfer them to a CPU Unit with unit version
1.10 or earlier, the present values of existing members of structure variables are initialized.
You can restore the present values of the members by backing up the present values of the
structure variables with a Retain attribute before you download the new members, and then se-
lecting the structure variables to restore afterward and restoring the present values. Select the
Present value of Retain attribute variables Check Box.
For CPU Units with unit version 1.11 or later, the present values of existing members of struc-
ture variables are retained. For details on the retention operation for present values, refer to the
NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial Panel
PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558).

Backup Data
You can back up or restore following retained memory.

 Contents of the Retained Memory of the Connected Controller

Type of retained memory Description Remarks
Present values of Retain attrib- The values of retained variables defined You can individually select the
ute variables in the Sysmac Studio variables to back up.
Present values in the DM, EM, Data in the DM, EM, and Holding Memory The entire memory areas are
and Holding Memory area area that can be assigned to CJ-series backed up.

8-9 Backup Functions

used for CJ-series Units*1 Special Units in NJ-series CPU Units
Values in the DM, EM, and Holding Mem- The entire areas that are con-
ory area that are assigned in the CJ-ser- figured as the memory used
ies Unit memory settings for an NX102 for CJ-series Units are backed
Controller up.
Values in the DM and Holding Memory
area that are assigned in the CJ-series
Unit memory settings for an NX1P2 Con-
8
troller
Absolute encoder Compensation value that was tuned with Data is not backed up for

8-9-3 Backing Up Variables and Memory

home offset value the absolute encoder NJ101-90££ CPU Units.
*1. This is displayed only for an NJ-series Controller and NX102 or NX1P2 Controller.

Backing Up Data

 Procedure

1 Select Backup − Backup Variables and Memory from the Tools Menu on the Sysmac Stu-
dio.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-47

8 Other Functions

The Backup Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the check boxes for the memory items to back up.

3 Click the View File Selection Dialog Button ( ). The Save As Dialog Box is displayed.
Specify the file path name and file name.
If you select the Present value of Retain attribute variables Check Box as a backup target,
you can select the target variables using the Select Variables Button. Refer to Selecting the
Retained Variables to Back Up on page 8-51 for details.
And if you select only the Present value of Retain attribute variables Check Box, besides
XML, you can select CSV as a file format.
You can change the values of the retained variable by editing the saved CSV file. Refer to Edit-
ing the Values of the Retained Variables That Were Backed Up on page 8-52 for details.

4 Click the Execute Button. The variables are backed up.

When the backup is completed, the results are displayed in the Execution Result Area.

Additional Information

• To back up the data, the contents of the NJ/NX/NY-series Controller and the project must
match. If it does not match, stop the backup and synchronize the data to make it match.
• With Sysmac Studio version 1.05 or higher, you can start a backup when changes are added
after unifying the data by executing synchronization.
• With the following conditions, only the present value of a member with the largest data size
can be the union backup data.
a) Sysmac Studio version 1.25 or higher
b) Comparison results between contents of the projects in the Sysmac Studio and the
NJ/NX/NY-series Controller match.

8-48 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Restoring Data

 Restore Procedure

1 Select Backup − Restore Variables and Memory from the Tools Menu on the Sysmac Stu-
dio.

The Restore Dialog Box is displayed.

8-9 Backup Functions

8

8-9-3 Backing Up Variables and Memory

2 Select the check boxes for the items to restore.

3 Click the View File Selection Dialog Button ( ). The File Selection Dialog Box is dis-
played. Specify the file path.

4 To select the retained variables for which to restore the present values, click the Select
Variables Button.
A list of retained variables is displayed in the Select Variables Dialog Box.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-49

8 Other Functions

(a) (b) (c)

(d)

(e) (f)

Item Description
(a) Program The group to which the retained variables that are read from the backup file belong
(global variable table or programs) is displayed. These fields will be empty if the
programs were deleted from the project or the program names were changed since
the data was backed up.
(b) Name The names of the retained variables read from the backup file are displayed.
(c) Data type The data types of the retained variables in the backup file are displayed. Derivative
is displayed for array and structure variables.
(d) Check boxes Select the check boxes for the retained variables to restore.
(e) Select All The check boxes for all variables are selected.
(f) Clear All All of the selections are cleared.

Select the variables to restore, and then click the OK Button.

5 Click the Execute Button. The variables are restored.

When the restore operation is completed normally, the results are displayed in the Execution
Results Text Display Area. A dialog box for restarting the NJ/NX/NY-series Controller is dis-
played to reflect the results of the restored data.

If the restore operation fails, the data names of the data that was not restored are shown in the
Failed Item List Text Box.

8-50 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Additional Information

• To restore the backup, the contents of the NJ/NX/NY-series Controller and the project must
match. If it does not match, stop the restore process and synchronize the data to make it
match.
• With Sysmac Studio version 1.05 or higher, you can execute a restore operation when
changes are added after unifying the data by executing synchronization.
• In Sysmac Studio version 1.17 or higher, the following restrictions apply to mutual use of data
between the Backup Variables and Memory and Transfer All Variable Present Values func-
tions.
a) Although the Transfer All Variable Present Values function outputs the values of all varia-
bles to a file, the Restore Variables and Memory function targets only the values of re-
tained variables.

Selecting the Retained Variables to Back Up

Select the retained variables to back up during the backup operation.

1 Select the Present value of Retain attribute variables Check Box in the Backup Dialog Box.
The Select Variables Button is enabled.

2 Click the Select Variables Button.

The Select Variables Dialog Box is displayed.

8-9 Backup Functions

(a) (b) (c)

(d)

8-9-3 Backing Up Variables and Memory

(e) (f)

Item Description
(a) Program The group to which the retained variable belongs (global variable table or pro-
grams) is displayed.
(b) Name The names of the retained variables in the project are displayed.
(c) Data type The data types of the retained variables are displayed. Derivative is displayed for
array and structure variables.
(d) Check boxes Select the check boxes for the retained variables to back up.
(e) Select All The check boxes for all variables are selected.
(f) Clear All All of the selections are cleared.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-51

8 Other Functions

3 Select the variables to back up, and then click the OK Button.

Editing the Values of the Retained Variables That Were Backed Up

When you back up the value of retained variables in CSV format, you can edit them with spreadsheet
software.
You can change the value of backed up retained variables and save them to use as recipe data.
After you edit the file with spreadsheet software, save it in CSV format.
This section uses a sample to describe the items when a file is opened in spreadsheet software.

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

(e)
(f)
(h)

(g)

Item Description Editable

(a) Language information Gives the language information from when the file was created. No
(b) Header information Gives the project ID when the data was backed up. No
(c) Separator Gives the separator between variables. No
(d) Variable name Gives the variable name. No
(e) Variable information Gives the variable ID. No
(f) Variable column header Gives the data type of the variable. No
For a structure variable, gives the member name and data type.
For an array variable with two or more dimensions, gives the array el-
ement position, structure member name, and data type for dimen-
sions 2 and higher.
(g) Variable row header For an array variable, gives the element number. No
(h) Variable value Gives the value of the variable. Yes

8-52 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Precautions for Correct Use

• Do not change anything other than the values of the variables. If you change anything else, it
may not be possible to restore the data.
• Enter the values of the variables within the predefined range and format for each data type. If
you enter any values incorrectly, you cannot restore the data. Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU
Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial
Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558) for information on the ranges and formats
of the data types.
• Observe the following precaution if you change the values of TIME_OF_DAY variables in Ex-
cel.
The values of TIME_OF_DAY variables are saved in the following format in CSV files:
hh:mm:ss.tt (Where, hh: hours, mm: minutes, ss: seconds, and tt: milliseconds)
If you open a CSV file in Excel, the values of TIME_OF_DAY variables are displayed in the
following format:
mm:ss (Where, mm: minutes and ss: seconds)
If you save the file in this state, you will lose the data for hours and milliseconds, and an error
will occur for the TIME_OF_DAY variable when you restore the data. To prevent this, change
the display format for the values of TIME_OF_DAY variables to hh:mm:ss.tt before you save
the file.

Restoring Data to Different Controller Models

You can restore data that was backed up on one Controller to another compatible Controller model.

8-9 Backup Functions

You can restore the types and range of data that are supported by the restore destination Controller.
If you select an XML or CSV file that was backed up on a different Controller model during the restore
operation, you can select only the check boxes for data that can be restored.

 Whether Data Can Be Restored to Different Controller Models

Data that can be restored to different Controllers depends on the Controller model.
The table below shows whether or not you can restore data that was backed up on each Controller
to different Controller models. 8
Restore destination Controller

8-9-3 Backing Up Variables and Memory

NX701 Con-
Controller on which back- NX102 or
Data to restore troller, NY- NJ-series
up file was created NX1P2 Con-
series Con- Controller
troller
troller
NX701 Controller, NY-series Present values of retained OK OK OK
Controller variables
Absolute encoder home off- OK OK NG
set data*1
NX102 or NX1P2 Controller Present values of retained OK OK OK
variables
Present values in the DM, NG OK*3 OK
EM, and Holding Memory
area used for CJ-series
Units*2*3
Absolute encoder home off- OK OK NG
set data*1

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-53

8 Other Functions

Restore destination Controller

NX701 Con-
Controller on which back- NX102 or
Data to restore troller, NY- NJ-series
up file was created NX1P2 Con-
series Con- Controller
troller
troller
NJ-series Controller Present values of retained OK OK OK
variables
Present values in the DM, NG OK*3 OK
EM, and Holding Memory
area used for CJ-series
Units*2
Absolute encoder home off- NG NG OK
set data*1*4
*1. If the number of enabled axes in the backup file exceeds the number of axes supported by the restore
destination Controller, only the data corresponding to the number of axes supported by the restore desti-
nation Controller will be restored.
*2. If the size of memory used for CJ-series Units in the backup file exceeds the size supported by the re-
store destination Controller or the size set for the Controller, only the data corresponding to the size sup-
ported by or set for the Controller will be restored.
*3. For NX1P2 Controllers, present values in the DM and Holding Memory area will be restored.
*4. This data is not contained in the backup file for NJ101-90££ CPU Units.

Precautions for Correct Use

In Sysmac Studio version 1.16 or lower, you can use only CSV files to restore data to different
Controller models. You cannot use XML files.

8-9-4 Importing/Exporting Backup Files

On the Sysmac Studio, you can import a backup file that was saved with the Controller backup func-
tion to a new project, or you can export a backup file from a project that can be used to restore data to
a Controller.

Importing Backup Files

1 Select Backup − Import Backup File from the Tools Menu.

The Browse for Folder Dialog Box is displayed.

8-54 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

2 Select the folder that contains the backup file, and then click the OK Button.
The current project is closed and the data in the backup file is imported into a new project.

8-9 Backup Functions

8

8-9-4 Importing/Exporting Backup Files

Exporting Backup Files

1 Open the project from which to export the backup file and select Backup − Export Backup
File from the Tools Menu.
The Browse for Folder Dialog Box is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-55

8 Other Functions

2 Select the folder in which to save the file and click the OK Button.
The Export Setting Dialog Box is displayed.

Option Default Description

CPU Unit name CPU Unit This option sets the name of the Controller.
name in the If you do not want to change the name of the Con-
project troller when you restore the data, set the name of
the Controller here in advance.
Time zone*1 Japan This option sets the time zone for the clock in the
Controller.
If you do not want to change the time zone of the
Controller when you restore the data, set the time
zone of the Controller here in advance.
Do not include the program Not selected. If you select this check box, the programs will not
source. be saved. However, variables and settings are
saved even if this check box is selected.
The following operation is performed for a backup
file that is created when this option is selected.
• If the backup file is used to restore data to a
Controller with the Controller backup or SD
Memory Card backup function, the condition of
the Controller will be the same as when data is
transferred for synchronization with the Do not
transfer the program source Check Box select-
ed.
• If the backup file is imported to a new project,
the program will be empty, and a program error
will occur.
*1. This is not displayed when the selected backup file is for an NY-series Controller.

3 Set the options and then click the Execute Button.

The backup file is created.

8-56 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Precautions for Correct Use

Always confirm that the required data is included before you use a backup file that was export-
ed from a project to restore data to a Controller.

8-9 Backup Functions

8

8-9-4 Importing/Exporting Backup Files

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-57

8 Other Functions

8-10 Transferring All Controller Data

You can transfer the project data on the computer to the Controller or the data on the Controller to the
project on the computer without using the synchronization operation.
This allows you to transfer the data with a shorter procedure than with the synchronization operation.
You can use it to reduce the amount of work required to transfer project data to more than one Con-
troller after operation has been confirmed.

8-10-1 Transferring Data from the Computer to a Controller

1 Place the target Controller online and select Controller − Transfer − To Controller from the

menu. Or, click the Button in the toolbar.

The Transfer to Controller Dialog Box is displayed.

(a)

(b)

(c) (d)

Item Description
(a) Target data Displays the data to transfer.
(b) Options Select the transfer options. The options are the same as for the synchronization
operation. Refer to Uploading and Downloading Data on page 7-125 for details.
(c) Execute Button Starts transferring data to the Controller.
(d) Close Button Closes the Transfer to Controller Dialog Box.

2 Click the Execute Button.

The data is transferred to the Controller. The dialog box closes when the transfer is completed.

8-10-2 Transferring Data from the Controller to the Computer

1 Place the target Controller online and select Controller − Transfer − From Controller from

the menu. Or, click the Button in the toolbar.

The Transfer from Controller Dialog Box is displayed.

8-58 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

(a)

(b)

(c) (d)

Item Description

8-10 Transferring All Controller Data

(a) Target data Displays the data to transfer.
(b) Options Select the transfer options. The options are the same as for the synchronization
operation. Refer to Uploading and Downloading Data on page 7-125 for details.
(c) Execute Button Starts transferring data to the computer.
(d) Close Button Closes the Transfer from Controller Dialog Box.

2 Click the Execute Button.

The data is transferred to the computer. The dialog box closes when the transfer is completed.

8-10-2 Transferring Data from the Controller to the Computer

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-59

8 Other Functions

8-11 NX Unit Maintenance

The following describes the maintenance of NX Units that you can perform with the Sysmac Studio.

Calibrating NX Units
You can correct the characteristics of NX Analog I/O Units that will change over the years.

1 Go online, right-click an Analog Input Unit or Analog Output Unit in the CPU and Expansion
Racks Tab Page or Slave Terminal Tab Page, and select User Calibration from the menu.
The User Calibration dialog box is displayed.

2 Set the channel and calibration values and click the Write Button.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click the Yes Button to write the calibration values.
Refer to the user’s manual for the specific Analog Input Unit or Analog Output Unit for details
on the setting values and operation of user calibration.

8-60 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-12 EtherCAT Maintenance

 EtherCAT Maintenance
The following operations are used for EtherCAT maintenance.
• Disconnecting a slave from and reconnecting a slave to the network
• Packet monitoring
• Diagnostic and statistical information
• Maintenance operations for EtherCAT Slave Terminals

8-12-1 Disconnecting a Slave from and Reconnecting a Slave to the

Network

 Disconnecting a Slave from and Reconnecting a Slave to the Network

You can use this operation to disconnect a slave with active process data communications from the
network without Process Data Communications Error occurring.
You can then reconnect the slave to the network to start process data communications again.

 Procedure for Disconnecting a Slave from the Network

8-12 EtherCAT Maintenance

Use the following procedure to disconnect a slave from the network.

1 Right-click the slave in the EtherCAT Tab Page and select Disconnect/Connect Slave.

work
8-12-1 Disconnecting a Slave from and Reconnecting a Slave to the Net-

The Disconnect/Connect Slaves Dialog Box is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-61

8 Other Functions

2 Click the Disconnect Target Slave and All Downward Slaves Button.
The selected slave and following slaves are disconnected.
The following confirmation dialog box is displayed if disconnection failed.

Additional Information

If you select a slave that has more than one output port and click the Disconnect Target Slave
and All Downward Slaves Button, all of the slaves that are connected after all of the output
ports will be disconnected.
You can remove the communications cables from the disconnected slaves.

Precautions for Correct Use

Disconnecting a slave affects not only the selected slave but all of the slaves connected after
the output ports on the selected slave. When you disconnect slaves, all I/O refreshing for proc-
ess data communications for the slaves is stopped. Always confirm safety before you discon-
nect a slave.

 Procedure for Reconnecting a Slave to the Network

1 Right-click the slave in the EtherCAT Tab Page and select Disconnect/Connect Slave.

The Disconnect/Connect Slaves Dialog Box is displayed.

8-62 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

2 Click the Connect Target Slave Only Button.

The following dialog box is displayed and the selected slave is reconnected to the network. I/O
refreshing with process data communications is restarted.

Note 1. Select the Connect All Disconnected Slaves Button to reconnect all slaves that are currently
disconnected and to restart I/O refreshing through process data communications.
Note 2. Select Connect target slave and the downward slaves to reconnect the specified slave and
all slaves that are connected after its OUT port. I/O refreshing with process data communica-
tions is restarted.

Additional Information

When the EtherCAT configurations are synchronized, the status of the slaves are displayed in
the EtherCAT Tab Page with the following icons. These icons are not displayed if synchroniza-
tion is lost.

Icon Meaning
The slave exists on the actual network.

The slave exists on the actual network but it is disconnected.

The slave is not connected and does not exist (i.e., is not connected) in the actual network.
(This icon could also indicate a slave that was connected in the location of a disconnected
slave without the node address set.)

8-12 EtherCAT Maintenance

The slave does not exist on the actual network.

Communications are disabled for the slave.

8-12-2 Packet Monitoring

Version Information
8
Packet monitoring can be used for a CPU Unit with unit version earlier than 1.40.

8-12-2 Packet Monitoring

 Packet Monitoring
The master can monitor the packets that are transmitted through the network. From the Sysmac
Studio, you can start and stop packet monitoring by the master, and you can get part of the packet
data monitored by the master and save it in a file.

 Procedure

1 Right-click the master in the EtherCAT Tab Page and select Display Packet Monitor.
The Packet Monitor Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Click the Start Button to begin monitoring.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-63

8 Other Functions

3 Click the Stop Button to stop monitoring.

4 Click the Save Packet Data Button to save the results of the monitoring.
The Save File Dialog Box is displayed.

5 Input a file name, and then click the Save Button.

A TCPDump packet data file with a .cap extension is saved.

8-12-3 Diagnostic and Statistical Information

 Diagnostic and Statistical Information

Diagnostic and statistical information provides statistics on diagnosis of EtherCAT communications
status, such as the number of frames that are sent and received. The Diagnosis/Statistics Informa-
tion Tab Page displays information on the EtherCAT master and slaves. This section gives the pro-
cedure to display and operate the Diagnosis/Statistics Information Tab Page, which is displayed on-
line, and the procedure for displaying and operating the EtherCAT Diagnosis/Statistics Information
Viewer that displays the data saved in the Diagnosis/Statistics Information Tab Page in offline state.
Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in EtherCAT Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W505) or NY-
series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Built-in EtherCAT Port User’s Manual (Cat. No.
W562) for details on the displayed information and troubleshooting methods for diagnostic and stat-
istical information.

Diagnosis/Statistics Information Tab Page

 Diagnosis/Statistics Information Tab Page Operating Procedure

1 Right-click the master in the EtherCAT Tab Page and select Display Diagnosis/Statistics
Information.
The Diagnosis/Statistics Information Tab Page is displayed.

8-64 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

(a) (b)

(c)

(d)

(e) (f)

Item Description
(a) Display data (Get Displays the list of dates and times at which you acquired the diagnostic
date) list and statistical information by clicking the Get Button. If you select a date
and time from the list, the display of the diagnostic and statistical infor-
mation for both master and slave are changed to the data for the select-
ed date and time.
(b) Get Button Acquires the master and slave diagnostic and statistical information from
the actual network configuration. The date and time of information ac-

8-12 EtherCAT Maintenance

quisition is added to the Display data (Get date) list.
You can retain a maximum of 100 diagnostic and statistical information
data items acquired while the Diagnosis/Statistics Information Tab
Page is displayed.
(c) Master Diagnosis/ Displays the master diagnostic and statistical information.
Statistics Information
(d) Slave Diagnosis/Statis- Displays the slave diagnostic and statistical information.
tics Information
(e) Output File Button Saves the diagnostic and statistical information, and values of system-
defined variables*1 of the master and slaves at all acquisition dates and 8
times retained in the Diagnosis/Statistics Information Tab Page into a
Viewer format file or CSV format file. The CSV file is encoded in UTF-8

8-12-3 Diagnostic and Statistical Information

character codes.
(f) Return to EtherCAT Closes the Diagnosis/Statistics Information Tab Page and returns the
configuration view display to the EtherCAT Tab Page.
Button
*1. The following system-defined variables of the slaves whose _EC_RegSlavTbl variable is set to
TRUE are saved.
_EC_EntrySlavTbl, _EC_MBXSlavTbl, and _EC_PDSlavTbl

2 Click the Get Button when you want to acquire diagnostic and statistical information.
The display of the master and slave diagnostic and statistical information is updated and the
date and time of acquisition is added to the Display data (Get date) list.
To display the master and slave diagnostic and statistical information that was already ac-
quired, select the date and time of acquisition from the Display data (Get date) list.

3 To save the master and slave diagnostic and statistical information, click the Output File But-
ton.
The file format selection dialog box is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-65

8 Other Functions

File format Description

Viewer Format (Including EtherCAT Configu- Select this format to read and display data offline with
ration Information) the EtherCAT Diagnosis/Statistics Information Viewer.
CSV Format Select this format to display data with spreadsheet soft-
ware such as Excel.

4 Select the file format for saving data, enter any comment, and click the Next Button.
The Save File Dialog Box is displayed.

5 Enter a file name, and then click the Save Button.

When Viewer Format is selected, a file with a .xml extension is saved. When CSV Format is
selected, a file with a .csv extension (comma-separated) is saved.

Precautions for Correct Use

• The data of diagnostic and statistical information acquired with the Get Button are retained
only while the Diagnosis/Statistics Information Tab Page is displayed. When the
Diagnosis/Statistics Information Tab Page is closed, all data are discarded. Save the diag-
nostic and statistical information into a file as needed before you close the Diagnosis/
Statistics Information Tab Page.
• The maximum number of diagnostic and statistical information data items you can retain
while the Diagnosis/Statistics Information Tab Page is displayed is 100. To acquire more
data after the maximum number of retained data items is reached, close the Diagnosis/
Statistics Information Tab Page to discard the retained data, and then open the tab page
again to acquire new data.
• You cannot acquire the slave diagnostic and statistical information when the diagnosis/statis-
tics log of the Controller is in progress. To acquire the slave diagnostic and statistical informa-
tion, finish the diagnosis/statistics log, and then click the Get Button again. When the diagno-
sis/statistics log of the Controller is in progress, Auto logging is displayed in the Error
Frames Column in the slave diagnostic and statistical information table. Refer to the NJ/NX-
series CPU Unit Built-in EtherCAT Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W505) or NY-series
Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Built-in EtherCAT Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W562)
for details on the diagnosis/statistics log.

 Master Diagnostic and Statistical Information

(a)

(b)
(c)

8-66 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Item Description
(a) Master Diagnostic and Statistical In- Displays the master diagnostic and statistical information.
formation list
(b) Clear Master Diagnosis/Statistics Clears the diagnostic and statistical information saved in the
Information Button master.
(c) Show all items Check Box Select this check box to display all items of the master diag-
nostic and statistics information.

If the master diagnostic and statistical information is cleared, the display of the master diagnostic
and statistical information in the Diagnosis/Statistics Information Tab Page is cleared to zeros.
Also, the slave diagnostic and statistical information is acquired automatically and the display of the
Diagnosis/Statistics Information Tab Page is updated.

 Slave Diagnosis and Statistics Information

(a) (b)

8-12 EtherCAT Maintenance

(c)

Item Description
(a) EtherCAT Configuration dis- The EtherCAT Configuration of the project is displayed.
play An error icon that indicates the occurrence of an error is displayed for
the master or the slave where an error occurred. Place the mouse
over the error icon, and the current event is displayed in a tooltip.
(b) Slave Diagnostic and Statisti- Displays the slave diagnostic and statistical information.
8
cal Information list
(c) Clear Slave Diagnosis/ Clears the diagnostic and statistical information saved in the slave.

8-12-3 Diagnostic and Statistical Information

Statistics Information But-
ton*1
*1. This appears only when the unit version of the CPU Unit set in the Sysmac Studio project is 1.11 or later.

If the slave diagnostic and statistical information is cleared, the display of the slave diagnostic and
statistical information in the Diagnosis/Statistics Information Tab Page is cleared to zeros. Also,
the master diagnostic and statistical information is acquired automatically and the display of the
Diagnosis/Statistics Information Tab Page is updated.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-67

8 Other Functions

Precautions for Correct Use

• When the maximum number of acquired diagnostic and statistical information is reached, you
need to discard the acquired data to clear the diagnostic and statistical information. If you
need to save the data, output the file before you execute the clear command.
• You cannot clear the slave diagnostic and statistical information when the diagnosis/statistics
log of the Controller is in progress. Finish the diagnosis/statistics log, and then execute the
clear operation for the slave diagnostic and statistical information again. When the diagnosis/
statistics log of the Controller is in progress, Auto logging is displayed in the Error Frames
Column in the slave diagnostic and statistical information table.
• When you display the slave diagnostic and statistical information, make sure that the actual
EtherCAT network configuration agrees with the network configuration in the project. If the
network configurations do not agree, the slave diagnostic and statistical information display
will not be correct. If you execute the clear command for the slave diagnostic and statistical
information when the network configurations do not agree, the information may not be
cleared properly.

EtherCAT Diagnosis/Statistics Information Viewer

In the EtherCAT Diagnosis/Statistics Information Viewer, you can display diagnostic and statistical in-
formation saved in a file in offline state.
Diagnostic and statistical information data must be saved into a Viewer Format file in advance in the
Diagnosis/Statistics Information Tab Page. Refer to Diagnosis/Statistics Information Tab Page Operat-
ing Procedure on page 8-64 for the procedure to save data into a file.

 EtherCAT Diagnosis/Statistics Information Viewer Operating Procedure

1 Select Tools - EtherCAT Diagnosis/Statistics Information Viewer from the main menu.
The diagnostic and statistical information file selection dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the target diagnostic and statistical information file, and then click the Open Button.
The EtherCAT Diagnosis/Statistics Information Viewer Dialog Box starts, and the selected
diagnostic and statistical information is displayed.

The displayed contents are the same as those displayed in the Diagnosis/Statistics Information
Tab Page.

8-68 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Additional Information

• Data can be saved into a file from the EtherCAT Diagnosis/Statistics Information Viewer
Dialog Box in CSV format only.
• The following buttons are grayed out.
Get, Clear Master Diagnosis/Statistics Information, and Clear Slave Diagnosis/Statistics
Information

 Displaying Diagnostic and Statistical Information File Properties

In the EtherCAT Diagnosis/Statistics Information Viewer Dialog Box, you can display the prop-
erties of the currently displayed diagnostic and statistical information.

1 Click the Properties Button in the EtherCAT Diagnosis/Statistics Information Viewer Dialog
Box.
The Properties Dialog Box is displayed.

8-12 EtherCAT Maintenance

The controller information and comments when the diagnostic and statistical information was
obtained are displayed in the Properties Dialog Box.

8-12-4 Maintenance Operations for EtherCAT Slave Terminals

The following maintenance operations are supported for EtherCAT Slave Terminals. 8
• Restarting Units in a Slave Terminal
• NX Unit Calibration

8-12-4 Maintenance Operations for EtherCAT Slave Terminals

• I/O Wiring Checks

 Restarting Units in a Slave Terminal

Use the following procedure to restart the Units in a Slave Terminal. You can restart all of the Units
in the Slave Terminal or you can restart individual Units.

1 To restart all of the Units in the Slave Terminal, go online, right-click the Communications Cou-
pler Unit on the Slave Terminal Tab Page, and select Restart. To restart individual Units in the
Slave Terminal, go online, right-click the Unit to restart on the Slave Terminal Tab Page, and
select Restart.
The Restart Confirmation Dialog Box is displayed.
Example: When Restarting All of the Units in a Slave Terminal

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-69

8 Other Functions

2 Click the Yes Button.

The restart is completed.

Additional Information

A Communications Coupler Unit with unit version 1.2 or later is required to restart individual
Units.

 NX Unit Calibration
Calibration can be performed to compensate for temporal changes in the characteristics of Analog
I/O Units.
Go online, right-click an Analog Input Unit or Analog Output Unit and select User Calibration.
Refer to 8-11 NX Unit Maintenance on page 8-60 for details.

 I/O Wiring Checks

Refer to 7-5-3 Checking I/O Wiring on page 7-146 for details on wiring checks for NX Units on a
Slave Terminal.

To perform I/O wiring checks for Slave Terminals that are not connected to the Controller, connect
the Sysmac Studio directly to the Slave Terminal. Refer to A-7 Directly Connecting to an EtherCAT
Slave Terminal on page A-53 for details.

8-70 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-13 Grouping for POUs and Global Varia-

bles
This function allows you to group multiple POUs and global variables.
With this function, you can group them by several aspects such as process or functionality, and clearly
organize the programming constitutions.
This function does not affect the operation of programs.

8-13-1 Displaying the Programming Group Tab Page

1 Select Programming Group Tab Page from View in the Main Menu.

8-13 Grouping for POUs and Global Variables

The Programming Group tab page is displayed. 8

8-13-1 Displaying the Programming Group Tab Page

It is displayed below the Filter Pane by default.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-71

8 Other Functions

Additional Information

After you perform any of the following operations, click the Update Button on the Programming
Group tab page to update the display.
• Adding a new group in the global variable table
• Switching a device
• Deleting a POU that is registered in a group
The Programming Group tab page can be used only in a standard project.

8-13-2 Grouping POUs

Multiple POUs can be grouped for display.
Grouping POUs is performed on the Programming Group tab page.

Creating a New Group and Adding POUs

1 Right-click in the Programming Group tab page and select New group and add POUs.

The Enter new group name dialog box is displayed.

2 Enter a group name, and then click the OK Button.

The Add POUs to the group dialog box is displayed.

3 Select the POUs you want to group, and then click the OK Button.

8-72 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Grouped POUs are displayed in the Programming Group tab page.

8-13 Grouping for POUs and Global Variables

The global variables are displayed below the created group at the same time.

Any global variables can be added to the group.

Refer to 8-13-3 Grouping Global Variables on page 8-75 for how to add global variables to a
group.

Adding New POUs to Existing Group

8
1 Right-click an existing group where you want to add POUs, and then select Add POUs to the
group.

8-13-2 Grouping POUs

The Add POUs to the group dialog box is displayed.

2 Select the POUs to add, and then click the OK Button.

The specified POUs are added in the group.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-73

8 Other Functions

Changing Group Name

1 Right-click an existing group to rename and select Rename from the menu.

The Enter new group name dialog box is displayed.

2 Enter a group name, and then click the OK Button.

The present group name is changed.

Ungrouping

1 Right-click an existing group to ungroup and select Ungroup from the menu.

A confirmation dialog box for ungrouping is displayed.

2 Click the OK Button.

8-74 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

The specified group is deleted from the Programming Group tab page.

Removing a POU from a Group

1 Right-click the POU to remove from the group and select Remove from the group from the
menu.

A confirmation dialog box for removing is displayed.

8-13 Grouping for POUs and Global Variables

2 Click the OK Button.
The specified POU is removed from the group.

8-13-3 Grouping Global Variables

Grouping of the global variables is performed in the global variable table.

8
Creating a New Group and Adding Global Variables

8-13-3 Grouping Global Variables

1 Double-click Global Variables in the Multiview Explorer.

The global variable table is displayed.

2 Right-click the header on the row of the global variable to select Add to new group under
Group Settings.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-75

8 Other Functions

The Enter new group name dialog box is displayed.

3 Enter a group name, and then click the OK Button.

The message is displayed to notify that creation of the group and addition of the variables have
been completed.

4 Click the OK Button.

The global variable you selected is added to the created group.
Refer to Checking the Global Variable Added to a Group on page 8-77 to confirm the global
variables added to the group.

Additional Information

After you create a new group, click the Update Button on the Programming Group tab page to
display the created group on the tab page.

Adding a New Global Variable to an Existing Group

1 Right-click the header on the row of a global variable you want to add, and then select Add to
existing group under Group Settings.

8-76 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

The Select group dialog box is displayed.

2 Select a destination group, and then click the OK Button.

8-13 Grouping for POUs and Global Variables

The global variable is added to the selected group.

Checking the Global Variable Added to a Group

8
To check the global variable added to the group, apply the group filter in the global variable table.

8-13-3 Grouping Global Variables

1 Select a group name and then click the Group Filter Button.

Only the global variables in the selected group are displayed.

Click again the Group Filter Button to clear the group filter.
Once you clear the group filter, all global variables are displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-77

8 Other Functions

Removing a Global Variable from a Group

1 Right-click the header on the row of the global variable to remove, and then select Remove
from the group under Group Settings.

A confirmation dialog box for removing global variables from the group is displayed.

2 Click the Yes Button.

The selected global variable is removed from the group.

8-78 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-14 Project Shortcut View

This function enables you to create shortcuts for the Configurations and Setup items and Program-
ming items in the Multiview Explorer.
By registering shortcuts, you can easily access the Configurations and Setup items and Programming
items in the Multiview Explorer.
You can also create folders to organize the created shortcuts.
This function does not affect the operation of programs.

Precautions for Correct Use

This function is supported only by the Sysmac Studio (64 bit).

The created folders or registered shortcuts are not transferred to the Controller.

(a)

8-14 Project Shortcut View

(b)

(c) 8
(d)

8-14-1 Displaying the Project Shortcut View

(e)

Series
(a) Configurations and Setup items
(b) Programming items
(c) Shortcut Root Folder
(d) User folder
(e) Shortcuts for Configurations and Setup items or Programming items

8-14-1 Displaying the Project Shortcut View

1 Select Project Shortcut View from the View Menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-79

8 Other Functions

The Project Shortcut View is displayed in the Filter Pane.

The Shortcut Root Folder is created in the Project Shortcut View.

You cannot delete the Shortcut Root Folder.

By default, only the Shortcut Root Folder is displayed.

Additional Information

• If the project contains any of the following devices, the Project Shortcut View is displayed in
the default position. If the project contains none of the following devices, the Project
Shortcut View is not displayed.
a) Robot Integrated CPU Unit
b) Application Manager
• When the Sysmac Studio has gone online with the Controller without a project open, Project
Shortcut View is not displayed.

8-14-2 Adding User Folders

Right-click the Shortcut Root Folder and select Add Folder.

Under the Shortcut Root Folder, a new folder is created.

8-80 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-14-3 Renaming User Folders

1 Right-click the user folder to rename and select Rename Folder from the menu.

2 You can now rename the user folder in the Edit Pane.

8-14 Project Shortcut View

Enter any name.

8-14-4 Copying and Pasting User Folders

8
1 Right-click the user folder to copy and select Copy Folder from the menu.

8-14-3 Renaming User Folders

2 Right-click the copy destination folder and select Paste Folder or Shortcut from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-81

8 Other Functions

Under the Shortcut Root Folder, or the selected user folder, the copied folder is pasted.

Additional Information

You can perform this operation on more than one selection.

8-14-5 Cutting User Folders

Right-click the user folder to delete or copy and select Cut Folder from the menu.

Refer to 8-14-4 Copying and Pasting User Folders on page 8-81 for how to add a user folder by copy-
ing it.

Additional Information

You can perform this operation on more than one selection.

8-14-6 Deleting User Folders

1 Right-click the user folder to delete and select Delete Folder from the menu.

A deletion confirmation dialog box is displayed.

8-82 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

2 Click the Yes Button.

The user folder is deleted.

Additional Information

You can perform this operation on more than one selection.

8-14-7 Editing Comments on User Folders

You can enter a comment on a user folder to display it in a tooltip.

1 Right-click the user folder, Configurations and Setup item, or Programming item on which to
enter a comment and select Edit Comment.
A dialog box is displayed for you to enter a comment.

8-14 Project Shortcut View

8
2 Enter a comment.

8-14-7 Editing Comments on User Folders

3 Click the OK Button.

8-14-8 Adding Shortcuts

You can add shortcuts from a Configurations and Setup item, Programming item, or user folder.

Adding Shortcuts from a Configurations and Setup Item or Pro-

gramming Item
This function is available only when the Robot Integrated CPU Unit or Application Manager is select-
ed.

1 Select the Configurations and Setup item or Programming item to jump to from a shortcut.

2 Right-click the user folder in which to add a shortcut and select Add Shortcut of Selected
Item from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-83

8 Other Functions

A shortcut is created under the user folder.

It is displayed with an icon for the created Configurations and Setup item or Programming item
( ).

Adding Shortcuts from a User Folder

1 Select the user folder in which to add a shortcut.

8-84 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

2 Right-click the Configurations and Setup item or Programming item for which to create a short-
cut and select Add Shortcut.

A shortcut is created under the user folder.

8-14 Project Shortcut View

It is displayed with an icon for the created Configurations and Setup item or Programming item
( ).
8
Additional Information

8-14-9 Editing Items from Shortcuts

• If the item selected in the Multiview Explorer has child items, a shortcut is created for items
including the child items.
Shortcuts for the items related to the Configurations and Setup item or Programming item are
displayed under the selected folder.
• If there are items related to the item to add, in addition to its shortcut, you can add the short-
cuts for the related items together.
• You can move shortcuts between folders by dragging them from one folder to another. How-
ever, you cannot move child shortcuts of a shortcut.

8-14-9 Editing Items from Shortcuts

Right-click the shortcut to an item to edit and select Multiview Explorer Menu – Edit from the menu.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-85

8 Other Functions

You can now edit it in the Edit Pane.

8-14-10 Copying and Pasting Shortcuts

1 Right-click the shortcut to copy and select Copy Shortcut from the menu.

2 Right-click the copy destination folder and select Paste Folder or Shortcut from the menu.

Under the Shortcut Root Folder, or the selected user folder, the copied shortcut is pasted.

8-86 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Additional Information

You can perform this operation on more than one selection.

8-14-11 Cutting Shortcuts

Right-click the user folder to delete or copy and select Cut Shortcut from the menu.

Refer to 8-14-11 Cutting Shortcuts on page 8-87 for how to add a shortcut by copying it.

Additional Information

You can perform this operation on more than one selection.

8-14-12 Deleting Shortcuts

8-14 Project Shortcut View

1 Right-click the shortcut to delete and select Delete Shortcut from the menu.

A deletion confirmation dialog box is displayed. 8-14-11 Cutting Shortcuts

2 Click the Yes Button.

The shortcut is deleted from the folder.

Additional Information

You can perform this operation on more than one selection.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-87

8 Other Functions

8-14-13 Editing Comments on Shortcuts

You enter a comment on a shortcut to display it in a tooltip.

1 Right-click the shortcut on which to enter a comment and select Edit Comment from the
menu.

A dialog box is displayed for you to enter a comment.

2 Enter a comment.

3 Click the OK Button.

8-14-14 Jumping from a Shortcut to the Multiview Explorer

You can jump from a selected shortcut to the associated item in the Multiview Explorer.

8-88 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

The focus moves to the Configurations and Setup item or Programming item for the selected shortcut.

8-14 Project Shortcut View

8

8-14-14 Jumping from a Shortcut to the Multiview Explorer

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-89

8 Other Functions

8-15 Troubleshooting
 Overview of Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting is used to check the errors that occurred in the Controller, display corrections for
the errors, and clear the errors.

8-15-1 Troubleshooting Dialog Box

The current errors in the online Controller and the contents of the event logs are read and displayed in
the Troubleshooting and Event Logs Dialog Box.

1 Select Troubleshooting from the Tools Menu while online. You can also click the
Troubleshooting Button in the toolbar.
The following Troubleshooting Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Click the following tabs to change the display as required.

Tab Displayed information

Controller Errors This tab page reports Controller errors as well as error details and correc-
tions.
Controller Event Log This tab page displays errors and information recorded in the event logs in
the Controller.
User-defined Errors This tab page reports user-defined errors and user-defined information that is
created by execution of the SetAlarm (Create User-defined Error) instruction
and the SetInfo (Create User-defined Information) instruction.
User-defined Event Log This tab page displays user-defined errors and user-defined information re-
corded in the event log in the Controller.

8-90 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-15-2 Controller Errors

This tab page displays any current Controller errors. (Observations and information are not displayed.)

 Information Displayed for Controller Errors and Functions

8-15 Troubleshooting
Item Description Remarks
Select the Display Target Selects the items to display for errors.
Level Displays the level of the error. When a Controller error is displayed,
this shows whether it is a major fault, a
partial fault, or a minor fault.
Observations and information events
can be checked in the Controller log.
Source Displays the location of the error.
8
Source Details

8-15-2 Controller Errors

Event Name Displays the name of the error.
Event Code Displays the event code of the error.
Details Describes the error and gives the
cause of the error.
Attached information 1 to Displays supplementary information
4 about the error. The meaning of the
data is explained in the details.
Action and correction Gives the action and correction that Select an action and correction to ena-
are required to recover from the error. ble the Jump to Error Button if there
is a setting that you can correct.
Switch display to show Switches the display between the de- Click the button to switch to the display
action and correction tails and attached information 1 to 4, of Switch display to show details.
Button and the corrections.
Jump to Error Button Changes the display to the Correction You cannot jump if the data is not
Display in the Sysmac Studio if cor- synchronized.
recting settings are required.
Error Help Button Displays help if an error in a CJ-series
Unit cannot be dealt with in the Sys-
mac Studio.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-91

8 Other Functions

Item Description Remarks

Reset All Button Clears all current errors. You cannot clear errors individually.
Any errors that remain are displayed
again.
Reset (Selected Units) Resets any errors in the NX Unit se- You cannot select this when the select-
Button lected in the Select the Display Target ed Unit is not an NX Unit.
Area.

 Items Displayed as Sources

Displayed detailed event
Displayed source Location of error
source
PLC Instruction*1*2*3 The error occurred in an instruction.

DB connection service*4 There is an error in the database connection for a

Database Connection CPU Unit.
SECS/GEM*5 An error related to SECS/GEM occurred for an
SECS/GEM CPU Unit.
Windows*6 The Windows was started up or closed on the NY-
series Controller, or an error occurred on the Win-
dows.
Built-in I/O*7 The error occurred in the built-in I/O of the Controller.

Option Board*7 The error occurred in the Option Board that is

mounted on the Controller.
Option Board 1*7 The error occurred in Option Board 1 that is mounted
on the Controller.
Option Board 2*7 The error occurred in Option Board 2 that is mounted
on the Controller.
Blank The error occurred in the data processing section of
the Controller.
I/O bus Master The error occurred between the Controller and a
mounted Unit.
Rack No. Slot No. The error occurred in a Unit that is mounted in the
Controller. The Unit where the error occurred is iden-
tified by the rack number and slot number.
NX bus*8 Master The error occurred between the Controller and a
mounted Unit.
Unit No. (Slot No.) The error occurred in a Unit that is mounted on the
Controller. The Unit where the error occurred is iden-
tified by the Unit number and slot number.

8-92 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Displayed detailed event

Displayed source Location of error
source
EtherNet/IP Communications port The error occurred in communications on the built-in
EtherNet/IP port on the Controller.
CIP The error occurred in a CIP application on the built-in
EtherNet/IP port on the Controller.
FTP The error occurred in an FTP application on the built-
in EtherNet/IP port on the Controller.
NTP The error occurred in an NTP application on the
built-in EtherNet/IP port on the Controller.
SNMP The error occurred in an SNMP application on the
built-in EtherNet/IP port on the Controller.
Communications port 1*9 The error occurred in communications on the built-in
EtherNet/IP port 1 on the Controller.
Communications port 2*9 The error occurred in communications on the built-in
EtherNet/IP port 2 on the Controller.
Internal port 1*6 The error occurred in communications of the internal
port 1 on the NY-series Controller.
CIP1*9 The error occurred in a CIP application on the built-in
EtherNet/IP port 1 on the Controller.
CIP2*9 The error occurred in a CIP application on the built-in
EtherNet/IP port 2 on the Controller.
NX Unit No. An error occurred in a Unit on a Slave Terminal.

8-15 Troubleshooting
EtherCAT Communications port The error occurred in communications on the built-in
EtherCAT port on the Controller.
Master The error occurred in the master for the built-in
EtherCAT port on the Controller.
Node No. The error occurred in a slave connected to the built-
in EtherCAT port on the Controller.
NX Unit The error occurred in a Unit on a Slave Terminal
connected to the built-in EtherCAT port on the Con-
troller.
8
Motion Control Common items The error occurred in the Axis Common section of

8-15-2 Controller Errors

the Controller’s Motion Control Function Module.
Axis No. The error occurred in an axis in the Controller’s Mo-
tion Control Function Module.
Axes Group No. The error occurred in an axes group in the Control-
ler’s Motion Control Function Module.
*1. “Instruction” is displayed only in the Controller event logs.
*2. “Instruction” is displayed only if outputting instruction errors is enabled in the Event Log Settings of the
Controller Setup.
*3. “Instruction” is displayed only if the unit version of the connected CPU Unit is 1.02 or later.
*4. This error is displayed only for an NJ-series Database Connection CPU Unit. Refer to the NJ/NX-series
Database Connection CPU Units User’s Manual (Cat. No. W527) for details on errors.
*5. This error is displayed only for an NJ-series SECS/GEM CPU Unit. Refer to the NJ-series SECS/GEM
CPU Units User's Manual (Cat. No. W528) for details on errors.
*6. This is displayed only for an NY-series Controller.
*7. This is displayed only for an NX1P2 Controller.
*8. This is displayed only for an NX102 or NX1P2 Controller.
*9. This is displayed only for an NX701 Controller and NX102 Controller.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-93

8 Other Functions

 Procedure
Changing to the Correction Display

1 Check the Details and Attached Information Areas to check the details and cause of an error.

2 Check the method to correct the error in the Action and correction Area.

3 Select the correction to make. If there is more than one correction, select one correction to ac-
tually perform.

If you select a correction that allows you to jump to the Correction View, the Jump to Error
Button is enabled.

4 Click the Jump to Error Button.

The display changes to the display for correcting the settings.

5 Correct the settings while the Sysmac Studio is offline.

 Changing the Display Order

You can click the Level or Source heading to sort the errors by that item.
The events are displayed in order of event levels by default.
Example: Changing the Display Order

8-94 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Click Source.

8-15 Troubleshooting
8-15-3 Controller Event Log
You can display a log of Controller events (including Controller errors and Controller information).
(The logs in EtherCAT slaves are not displayed.)

8-15-3 Controller Event Log

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-95

8 Other Functions

List of Controller Event Log Contents and Functions

Item Meaning Remarks
Select the Display Target Selects the items to display in the log.
Displayed Information This switches the information dis- The log contents in the CJ-series Unit
played between the system event log is treated as a system event log.
and the access event log.
Level Changes the information displayed ac-
cording to the event levels.
Entry Displays events with serial numbers by Refer to Display Details for Entries on
event source and by event log type. page 8-97 described later for details.
Time Displays the time and date that the This is time and date information stor-
event occurred. ed in the Controller. The date for
events without occurrence time infor-
mation is displayed as “----/--/-- --:--:--”.
Level Displays the event level. Refer to 8-15-2 Controller Errors on
page 8-91 for information on the dis-
played contents.
Source Displays the location of the event. Refer to 8-15-2 Controller Errors on
Source Details page 8-91 for information on the dis-
played contents.
Event Name Displays the event name.
Event Code Displays the event code.
Details Displays the contents and cause of the
event log that was read.
Attached information 1 to 4 Displays supplementary information
about the event log that was read.
The meaning of the data is explained
in the details.
Action and correction Gives the action and correction that The location to edit is displayed if you
are required to recover from the error. select a correction.
Switch display to show Switches the display between the de- Click the button to switch to the display
action and correction But- tails and attached information 1 to 4, of Switch display to show details.
ton and the corrections.
Update Button Reads and displays the log again. The display is not automatically updat-
ed. The display is updated at the fol-
lowing times.
• When you open the Troubleshooting
Dialog Box
• When you click the Reload Button.
Print Button Prints the displayed log information. Log information that is not displayed
due to the Displayed Information selec-
tions is not printed.
Save Button Saves the event log information into a All of the event log information is saved
Viewer format file or CSV format file. regardless of the display settings.
Use the Event Log Viewer to open a
file saved in Viewer format, and you
can check the contents offline.
Clear Button Deletes the display log. If the system event log is cleared, the
CJ-series Unit log is also cleared.
Error Help Button Displays the causes of and details on ---
errors.

8-96 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Precautions for Correct Use

The Controller event logs display information on events that have occurred. The information
that is displayed in the logs may not reflect the current status of the Controller or programs. Use
this information as reference only.

Additional Information

• To find out the timing of events that do not have time information in the NX Unit, select the NX
Unit in the Select the Display Target Area and check the order of occurrence of the events
with the numerical order of the entries.
• You can check the location of the event on the configuration of the EtherCAT network by
right-clicking in the Controller Event Log Tab Page and selecting Display EtherCAT
Configuration Information (Event Log) from the pop-up menu. For details, refer to the
NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in EtherCAT Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W505) or NY-series
Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Built-in EtherCAT Port User’s Manual (Cat. No.
W562).

 Display Details for Entries

Entries are displayed as follows according to the event sources and log types.
Serial numbers are assigned to events in chronological order of occurrence.

Device/log type Display format Description Display example

Controller System Event C_[nnnn]S [nnnn]: Serial number C_0001S
Log

8-15 Troubleshooting
Controller Access Event C_[nnnn]A [nnnn]: Serial number C_0001A
Log
System Event Log for NX U[aaa]_[nnnn]S [aaa]: Unit number U063_0001S
Unit on CPU Rack [nnnn]: Serial number
Access Event Log for NX U[aaa]_[nnnn]A [aaa]: Unit number U063_0001A
Unit on CPU Rack [nnnn]: Serial number
CJ-series Unit Log R[aa]_SI[bb]_[nnnn]S [aa]: Rack number R01_SI02_0001S
[bb]: Slot number 8
[nnnn]: Serial number
EtherCAT Slave Log N[aaa]_[nnnn]S [aaa]: Node No. N001_0001S

8-15-3 Controller Event Log

[nnnn]: Serial number
System Event Log for NX N[aaa]_U[bbb]_[nnnn]S [aaa]: Node No. N001_U063_0001S
Unit on EtherCAT Slave [bbb]: Unit number
Terminal [nnnn]: Serial number
(Controller connection)
Access Event Log for NX N[aaa]_U[bbb]_[nnnn]A [aaa]: Node No. N001_U063_0001A
Unit on EtherCAT Slave [bbb]: Unit number
Terminal [nnnn]: Serial number
(Controller connection)
System Event Log for NX U[aaa]_[nnnn]S [aaa]: Unit number U063_0001S
Unit on EtherCAT Slave [nnnn]: Serial number
Terminal
(EtherCAT slave terminal
direct connection)
Access Event Log for NX U[aaa]_[nnnn]A [aaa]: Unit number U063_0001A
Unit on EtherCAT Slave [nnnn]: Serial number
Terminal
(EtherCAT slave terminal
direct connection)

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-97

8 Other Functions

 Changing the Display Order

You can click the Time, Level, or Source heading to sort the errors by that item. The events are
displayed in order of dates by default.

 Selecting the Display Range of Event Logs

You can specify the range of event occurrence dates to display event logs in a specific range.

1 Right-click the mouse over the target event log row, and select Show only ones newer than
the selected or Show only ones older than the selected.
Only the event logs with the dates corresponding to the selected menu option will be displayed.

2 Right-click the mouse over the event log row with the date to be used for specifying the range,
and select Show only ones newer than the selected or Show only ones older than the
selected.
According to the selected menu option, the display range of event logs will be narrowed down.
Repeat this to further narrow down the range of dates of event logs to be displayed.

3 To clear the narrowed-down results, right-click the mouse and select Clear the filter for 'Time'.

Saving Controller Event Log

1 Click the Save button.

The dialog box to select the file format is displayed.

File format Description

Viewer Format (Including EtherCAT Select this format to read and display data offline with the
Configuration Information) Event Log Viewer.
CSV Format Select this format to display data with spreadsheet software
such as Excel.

2 Select the file format for saving data, enter any comment, and click the Next Button.
The Save File Dialog Box is displayed.

3 Enter a file name, and then click the Save Button.

When Viewer Format is selected, a file with a .xml extension is saved. When CSV Format is
selected, a file with a .csv extension (comma-separated) is saved.

Precautions for Correct Use

The saved CSV file of the Controller event log is encoded in UTF-8 character codes.

8-98 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-15-4 User-defined Errors

You can display information on current errors.

8-15 Troubleshooting
 Information Displayed for User-defined Errors and Functions
Item Description Remarks
Level Displays the event level categorized by You can change the name of the event
the event code. level in the Event Setting Table.
Group Displays the group registered in the
Event Setting Table.
Event Code Displays the event code. 8
Event Name Displays the event title registered in
the Event Setting Table.

8-15-4 User-defined Errors

Details Displays the event message registered
in the Event Setting Table.
Attached information 1 Displays the values for the Info1 and
and 2 Info2 input parameters for the Create
User-defined Error (SetAlarm) instruc-
tion and the Create User-defined Infor-
mation (SetInfo) instruction.
Reset Button Resets the selected user-defined
event.
Reset All Button Resets all user-defined events.

Additional Information

Only the contents registered in the Language 1 Event Setting Table is shown in the User-de-
fined Error Tab Page. The contents registered for Languages 2 to 9 are not displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-99

8 Other Functions

8-15-5 User-defined Event Log

The log of user-defined events that were stored for the Create User-defined Error (SetAlarm) instruc-
tion and the Create User-defined Information (SetInfo) instruction is displayed.

 Information Displayed for User-defined Event Log and Functions

Item Description Remarks
Time Displays the time and date that the This is time and date information stor-
user-defined event occurred. ed in the Controller.
Level Displays the event level of the user-de- Refer to 8-15-4 User-defined Errors on
fined event. page 8-99 for information on the dis-
Group Displays the group name of the user- played contents.
defined event.
Event Code Displays the event code of the user-
defined event.
Event Name Displays the user-defined event name.
Display Settings, Level Switches the view between user-de- Only user-defined errors are displayed
fined errors (event codes 1 to 40,000) by default.
and user-defined information (event
codes 40,001 to 60,000).
Details Displays a description of the event that Of Languages 1 to 9 in the Event Set-
corresponds to the event code regis- ting Table, only the contents registered
tered in the Event Setting Table. for Language 1 is displayed. You can-
not switch to Languages 2 to 9.
Attached Information 1 Displays the values for the Info1 and
and 2 Info2 input parameters for the Create
User-defined Error (SetAlarm) instruc-
tion and the Create User-defined Infor-
mation (SetInfo) instruction.

8-100 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Item Description Remarks

Update Button Reads and displays the log again. The display is not automatically updat-
ed. The display is updated at the fol-
lowing times.
• When you open the Troubleshooting
Dialog Box
• When you click the Reload Button.
Print Button Prints the event log.
Save Button Saves the event log to a CSV file.
Clear Button Deletes the user log.

 Changing the Display Order

You can click the Time, Level, Group, or Event Code heading to sort the events by that item. The
events are displayed in order of dates by default.

Precautions for Correct Use

The saved CSV file of the user-defined event log is encoded in UTF-8 character codes.

8-15-6 Event Setting Table

The Event Setting Table is used to register the contents displayed on the Sysmac Studio and on HMIs
for user-defined events that occur for execution of the Create User-defined Error (SetAlarm) instruction

8-15 Troubleshooting
and the Create User-defined Information (SetInfo) instruction.
• You can register the items that are described below (event name, level, group, and details) for each
event code.
• You can register up to 5,120 events in the Event Setting Table.
• You can copy data created in Excel and paste it into the Event Setting Table.
• You can also directly edit the Event Setting Table.
8
 Event Name
Register the title of each user-defined event.

8-15-6 Event Setting Table

If the title is not registered, “User Fault Level 1” to “User Fault Level 8” or “User-defined Informa-
tion” is displayed.

 Level
The level of user-defined event is automatically determined according to the event code as shown
in the following table.
The name of the level is registered according to the level.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-101

8 Other Functions

Lev-
Event code Default title setting Remarks
el
1 to 5000 High User fault level 1 These event codes are used in the Create User-
5001 to 10000 ↑ User fault level 2 defined Error (SetAlarm) instruction.
10001 to 15000 ↑ User fault level 3
15001 to 20000 ↑ User fault level 4
20001 to 25000 ↑ User fault level 5
25001 to 30000 ↑ User fault level 6
30001 to 35000 ↑ User fault level 7
35001 to 40000 ↑ User fault level 8
40001 to 60000 Low User-defined Informa- These event codes are used in the Create User-
tion defined Information (SetInfo) instruction.

If the level name is not registered, “User Fault Level 1” to “User Fault Level 8” or “User-defined In-
formation” is displayed.

 Group
Register the group names to indicate the location and type of each user-defined event.

 Details
Register a detailed description of the user-defined event.
The contents registered in the Event Setting Table and the contents displayed in the Troubleshoot-
ing Dialog Box and on an HMI have the following relationship.
Parameters in the Event Setting Table

Information That Is Displayed on the HMI or Troubleshooting Dialog Box

8-102 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

If you use more than one label on the NS-series PT, create more than one language table in the
Event Setting Table.
You can edit up to nine languages in the Event Setting Table.

8-15 Troubleshooting
8-15-7 Displaying and Editing the Event Setting Table
This section provides the procedures for displaying and editing the Event Setting Table.

 Displaying the Event Settings Table

Double-click Event Settings under Configurations and Setup in the Multiview Explorer. Or, right-
click Event Settings under Configurations and Setup and select Edit from the menu. 8
The Editing Pane for the Event Setting Table is displayed.

8-15-7 Displaying and Editing the Event Setting Table

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-103

8 Other Functions

 Displaying and Editing the Event Settings Table

Item Description Remarks
Event Set- Event Code You can specify a number to iden- User-defined errors: 1 to 40,000
tings Table tify the event according to the User-defined information: 40,001
event level. to 60,000
Event Name You can include a title for the 128 characters max.
event.
Event Level You can specify the level of the 32 characters max.
event. There are no restrictions on the
The level is indicated with a num- characters that can be used.
ber. The lower the number is, the Case sensitive.
higher the level is. Reserved words: None
Group You can specify a group name to 32 characters max.
represent the location or type of There are no restrictions on the
the event. You can use user-de- characters that can be used.
fined groupings for the events. Case sensitive.
Reserved words: None
Details You can include a message that 1,024 characters max.
describes the event. You can enter carriage returns in
The user can enter any text string. the text, but each carriage return
The message is used when the is counted as one character.
event is displayed on the Sysmac
Studio or an NS-series PT.
Register the detailed description Register the detailed description You can register up to 128 charac-
to display on the NS-series PT to display on the HMI when a ters.
when a Controller error in the ma- Controller error in the major fault You can enter carriage returns in
jor fault level occurs. level occurs. the text, but each carriage return
When a major fault occurs, the is counted as one character.
text registered here is displayed in
the Troubleshooter Screen of the
HMI.
Comment The comment is attached for each
set of table entries.

 Copying from Excel to the Event Settings Table

This section describes the procedure to copy contents created in Excel to the Event Settings Table.
You can also directly edit information in the Event Settings Table.

1 Use the following format to create data in Excel.

A B C D E
1 Event Code Event Name Event Level Group Details
2 1 Error User fault Level 1 No.1 The in-furnace temperature is an expected value. Please urgent stop.

2 Right-click the part to copy and select Copy from the menu.

A B C D E
1 Event Code Event Name Event Level Group Details
2 1 Error User fault Level 1 No.1 The in-furnace temperature is an expected value. Please urgent stop.

8-104 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

3 Right-click the Event Settings Table and select Paste to paste the data.

 Copying from the Event Settings Table to Excel

This section describes the procedure to copy the contents of the Event Settings Table to Excel.

1 Select the section to copy in the Event Settings Table.

2 Right-click the Event Settings Table and select Copy.

3 Paste the data in Excel.

The data is pasted as shown below.

A B C D E

8-15 Troubleshooting
1 Event Code Event Name Event Level Group Details
2 1 Error User fault Level 1 No.1 The in-furnace temperature is an expected value. Please urgent stop.

 Editing Multiple Tables

You can create more than one language table in an Event Settings Table to change the contents
that is displayed for different HMI labels.
8
1 Select the Edit multiple tables Check Box in the Event Settings Table.

8-15-7 Displaying and Editing the Event Setting Table

2 Select the language to edit from Language 2 to Language 9.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-105

8 Other Functions

3 Use the same method as in Copying from Microsoft Excel to the Event Settings Table,
above.
Select and copy the target data that was created in Excel.

4 Right-click the Event Settings Table and select Paste to paste the data.

Additional Information

Multiple language tables in an Event Setting Table are used to add display contents for the
event registered for Language 1. You cannot use Language 2 to Language 9 to create more
events. (You cannot change the event code field.)
To add an event, set the event for Language 1 in an Event Setting Table.

 Referring to the Other Languages When Editing an Event Settings Table

The contents registered for other languages in the Event Settings Table is displayed when the
mouse is placed on an event.

Example: When Editing the Event Settings Table for Language 1

The contents registered for Language 2 to Language 9 is displayed.

Example: When Editing the Event Settings Table for Language 2 to Language 9
The contents registered for Language 1 is displayed.

8-15-8 Event Log Viewer

In the Event Log Viewer, you can display controller event logs saved in a file in offline state.
Controller event logs must be saved into a Viewer Format file (hereinafter called “controller event log
file”) in advance in the Troubleshooting Dialog Box. Refer to Saving Controller Event Log on page
8-98 for the procedure to save data into a file.

 Event Log Viewer Operating Procedure

1 Select Tools - Event Log Viewer from the main menu.

The controller event log file selection dialog box is displayed.

8-106 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

2 Select the target controller event log file, and then click the Open Button.
The Event Log Viewer Dialog Box starts, and the selected controller event logs are displayed.

The displayed contents are the same as those of the controller event logs displayed in the
Troubleshooting Dialog Box.

Additional Information

8-15 Troubleshooting
• Data can be saved into a file from the Event Log Viewer Dialog Box in CSV format only.
• The Update Button and the Clear Button are grayed out.

 Displaying Controller Event Log File Properties

In the Event Log Viewer Dialog Box, you can display the properties of the currently displayed con-
troller event logs.
8
1 Select the Properties Tab in the Event Log Viewer Dialog Box.

8-15-8 Event Log Viewer

The Properties are displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-107

8 Other Functions

The controller information and comments when the controller event logs were obtained are dis-
played in the Properties Tab.

8-108 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-16 Changing Variable Comments and

Data Type Comments
You can switch the comments that are displayed for variables and data types. You can use this to
globally switch all of the comments for variables and data types that are used in a Controller in a
project. You can export the comments from the Controller, translate them into a different language or
change them to different comments, import them, and then switch all of the comments that are dis-
played.

8-16-1

8-16 Changing Variable Comments and Data Type Comments

Exporting Comments

1 Select the Controller from which to export the comments, and then select Comments for
Variables and Data Types (For switching) - Export from the Tools Menu.
The Properties are displayed.

A Save File Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Enter the file name, and then click the Save Button.
The comments are saved in a CSV file. 8
Additional Information

8-16-1 Exporting Comments

Comments for variables and data types for which display is prohibited with data protection are
not exported. To export these comments, temporarily release the data protection.

8-16-2 Editing the Comment File

Use the following procedure to edit the CSV file that you exported.

1 Open the CSV file in a spreadsheet software application.

CSV File Format

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-109

8 Other Functions

No. Item Description Remarks

1 ID ID numbers are automatically assigned to the variables and data Do not change
types. this item.
2 Table Type Gives the table type. Do not change
Global: Global variable table this item.
POU name: Local variable table
Type: Data type table
3 Type Gives the classification in the local variable table. Do not change
Internal: Internal variable this item.
External: External variable
input,output: Input or output variable
inout: In-out variable
return: Return value
4 Name- Gives the name of the namespace of the data type. Do not change
space this item.
5 Name Gives the name of the variable or data type. Do not change
this item.
6 Comment 1 This is the comment that is currently registered.
7 Comment 2 This comment is separate from the currently registered com-
ment.
Enter the comment to switch to.

2 Enter the comment to switch to in the Comment 2 column. If the cell for comment 2 is left emp-
ty, the comment will be blank.

3 Save the CSV file.

Precautions for Correct Use

• Only array elements for which comments are registered are exported. Elements that have no
comments are not exported to the CSV file. To add or correct a comment of an element, ex-
port/import variable comments. Refer to Exporting/Importing Variable Comments on page
4-46 for details.
• Do not change the names of the items in the exported file. If you change these, you will not
be able to import the file.

8-16-3 Importing Comment Files

Use the following procedure to import the CSV file that you edited to the project.

1 Select the Controller to which to import the comments, and then select Comments for
Variables and Data Types (For switching) - Import from the Tools Menu.

8-110 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

A Select File Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the CSV file to import, and then click the Open Button.
A dialog box is displayed to confirm the import operation.
Click the OK Button. The comments are imported and the comments in the project are re-
placed with the comments in the CSV file.
If an error occurs while importing the comments, it is displayed in the Output Tab Page.

Precautions for Correct Use

• When you import comments from a CSV file, all of the previous comments in the specified
Controller in the project are overwritten with the comments in the CSV file. You cannot undo
this operation.

8-16 Changing Variable Comments and Data Type Comments

• If you delete the comments for any array elements in the project after you export the com-
ments, the comments will not be imported for those elements.
• If you export comments for union variables or array elements in union array variables from
Sysmac Studio version 1.07 or higher and then import them into Sysmac Studio version 1.06,
the comments will be lost.

Additional Information

Comments for variables and data types for which changes are prohibited with data protection
are not imported. To import these comments, temporarily release the data protection.

8-16-4 Switching the Displayed Comments

Use the following procedure to display the new comments from the imported comment file.

1 Select Option from the Tools menu. The Option Dialog Box is displayed.

8-16-4 Switching the Displayed Comments

2 Select the Enable multi-comment selection Check Box for Select comment in the
Comments for Variables and Data Types Area, select the comments to display, and then
click the OK Button.
The new comments are displayed if you display a variable table or the Ladder Editor.

Precautions for Correct Use

If you open a project to which comments were imported from a CSV file on a version of the
Sysmac Studio that does not support switching comments, the comments will not be displayed
correctly.

Additional Information

The comments that are switched on the display can be edited as usual, i.e., in a variable table
or in the Data Type Editor.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-111

8 Other Functions

8-17 Exporting Global Variables

You can export global variables in a format that can be used in the following Support Software.
• Network Configurator
• CX-Designer

8-17-1 Exporting Global Variables for the Network Configurator

You can export global variables to a CSV file that the Network Configurator can read.

 Exported Variables
All global variables that are published to the network as inputs or outputs.

 Export Procedure

1 When there are variables to export, select Export Global Variables − Network Configurator
from the Tools Menu
The Save Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Enter the file name, and then click the Save Button.
The CSV file is saved.

Precautions for Correct Use

You cannot export global variables if the variable names are the same as address expressions
for OMRON CJ-series PLCs, as shown in the following table.

Memory area CIO Area DM Area Work Area Holding Area EM Area
Examples 1234 D1234 W12 H123 ED_1234 or E17_8

8-17-2 Exporting Global Variables for the CX-Designer

You can copy the global variables to the clipboard in a format that the CX-Designer can read.

 Exported Variables
All global variables that are published to the network as inputs, outputs, or publish only variables.

 Export Procedure

1 When there are variables to export, select Export Global Variables − CX-Designer from the
Tools Menu
The global variables are copied to the clipboard.

Precautions for Correct Use

Variables with the following data types cannot be exported: STRING arrays and ENUM.

8-112 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-18 Importing ST Programs

You can import XML files that were output from the Simulink® PLC Coder™ from MathWorks® Inc. for
the OMRON Sysmac Studio.

 Imported Data
You can import programs, functions, function blocks, data types, and global variables.

 Importing Procedure

1 Select Import ST Program from the Tools Menu.

8-18 Importing ST Programs

A Select File Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the XML file to import, and then click the Open Button.

The data is imported and the programs, functions, function blocks, data types, and global varia-
bles in the XML file are added to the project.
The items that are added by importing the data are displayed in the Output Tab Page.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-113

8 Other Functions

Additional Information

You can create code for the OMRON Sysmac Studio with Simulink PLC Coder revision R2013a
or higher.
For information on the Simulink PLC Coder, refer to the Simulink PLC Coder User’s Guide from
MathWorks.

8-114 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-19 Importing IEC 61131-10 XML Files

This function imports XML files that are defined in IEC 61131-10. These XML files contain program-
ming-related data based on the data types, global variables, ladder diagrams, ST, and POUs defined
in IEC 61131-3. You can read programming data that was created with other software into the Sysmac
Studio.

An example of writing XML is installed by default in the following folder.

To check the data supported by this function, refer to the XML schema in the same folder.

 Sysmac Studio (32 bit)

For 32-bit OS:
C:\Program Files\OMRON\Sysmac Studio\Sample\IEC 61131-10 XML\Controller
For 64-bit OS:
C:\Program Files (x86)\OMRON\Sysmac Studio\Sample\IEC 61131-10 XML\Controller

 Sysmac Studio (64 bit)

8-19 Importing IEC 61131-10 XML Files

C:\Program Files\OMRON\Sysmac Studio\Sample\IEC 61131-10 XML\Controller

Version Information

This function can be used in projects for the NX102 CPU Unit with unit version 1.31 or later and
the NJ/NX/NY-series CPU Unit with unit version 1.19 or later.

8-19-1 Importing Data

 Imported Data
You can import programs, functions, function blocks, data types, and global variables.
8
 Importing Procedure

8-19-1 Importing Data

1 Select IEC 61131-10 XML - Import from the Tools Menu.
The IEC 61131-10 XML Import Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Click the View File Selection Dialog Box Button.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-115

8 Other Functions

The Select File Dialog Box is displayed.

3 In the Select File Dialog Box, select the XML file to import, and then click the Open Button.
The screen return to the IEC 61131-10 XML Import Dialog Box, in which the path to the file that
you selected in the Select File Dialog Box is displayed as the import file.

4 Click the Execute Button.

The data is imported and the programs, functions, function blocks, data types, and global varia-
bles in the XML file are added to the project.

If the project already has any data type, global variable, program, function, and/or function
block with the same name but with a different content, the Compare before importing Dialog
Box is displayed.
For details on the Compare before importing Dialog Box, refer to 8-19-2 Compare before Im-
porting on page 8-116.

Precautions for Correct Use

Check the operation of the imported program for proper execution before you use it for actual
operation.

8-19-2 Compare before Importing

If program data exists in the project before import, and there are variables or data types with the same
name and different attributes in the import target, or if there are different ladder diagrams or ST pro-
grams, the Compare before importing Dialog Box is displayed to confirm whether you want to over-
write the data.

8-116 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Compare before Importing Dialog Box

(a) (b)

(c)

(d)

8-19 Importing IEC 61131-10 XML Files

(e)

(f)

Item Description
(a) Data before importing Displays data before importing if any difference is detected.
The lines which contain any data differences are displayed in red.
(b) Data to be imported Displays data to be imported if any difference is detected.
(c) Detailed Comparison Button Displays the Detailed Comparison Window that contains difference de-
tails.
(d) Overwrite all difference But- Overwrites all lines that contain any differences with the data to be im-
ton ported. 8
(e) Overwrite selected data But- Overwrites the selected line with the data to be imported.
ton

8-19-2 Compare before Importing

(f) Close Button Closes the dialog box.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-117

8 Other Functions

Detailed Comparison Window

(a) (b)

(c) (d) (e)

Item Description
(a) Data before importing Displays data before importing.
The lines which contain any data differences are displayed in red.
(b) Data to be imported Displays data to be imported.
(c) Copy Selected Right to Left Overwrites the existing data in the selected line with the data to be import-
Button ed.
(d) Copy All Right to Left Button Overwrites all existing data that contains any differences with the data to
be imported.
(e) Back Button Returns to the Compare before importing Dialog Box.

8-118 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-20 Importing Motor Sizing Tool Results

You can import the results of the Motor sizing tool.

 Imported Data
You can import EtherCAT configurations and settings, Drive settings, axis settings, and axes group
settings.

 Importing Procedure

1 Select Import Motor sizing tool Results from the Tools Menu.

8-20 Importing Motor Sizing Tool Results

An import confirmation dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Yes Button.

The file selection dialog box is displayed.

3 Select the XML file to import, and then click the Open Button.
If the currently selected Controller does not match the Controller in the results of the Motor siz-
ing tool, a dialog box will appear to confirm whether to continue the import operation.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-119

8 Other Functions

4 Click the Yes Button.

The results are imported and the Drive, axes, and axes groups are added to the project. When
the import operation is completed, a completion message box is displayed.
The items added by the import operation and error information are displayed in the Output Tab
Page.

Additional Information

Refer to the Motor Sizing Tool Startup Guide (Cat. No. I820) for details on the Motor sizing tool.

8-120 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-21 Updating the Configurations and Set-

up Transfer Data
You can update the Configurations and Setup data that is transferred to the Controller.
You can do this to apply the contents of an ESI file to the transfer data after you update the ESI file on
the EtherCAT Tab Page.
When you update the Configurations and Setup transfer data, all of the Configurations and Setup data
is transferred when you execute synchronization.

To update the Configurations and Setup transfer data, select Update Configurations and Setup
Transfer Data from the Tools Menu.

8-21 Updating the Configurations and Setup Transfer Data

Additional Information

If you edit the contents of the Configurations and Setup, the edited locations are transferred
when you execute synchronization. It is therefore not necessary to use this menu command.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-121

8 Other Functions

8-22 EtherNet/IP Connection Settings

You can make settings for EtherNet/IP connections.
EtherNet/IP connections (i.e., tag data links) are used for cyclic exchange of data between Controllers
or between Controllers and other devices on an EtherNet/IP network.
Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in EtherNet/IP Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W506) or NY-
series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Built-in EtherNet/IP Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W563)
for details on setting EtherNet/IP connections (i.e., tag data links).

To access the EtherNet/IP connection settings, select EtherNet/IP Connection Settings from the
Tools Menu.

Precautions for Correct Use

If you export a project that includes EtherNet/IP connection settings, select the smc2/csm2 file
format. EtherNet/IP connection settings are not saved in project files exported to the smc/csm
file format.

8-122 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings

 Option Settings
You can set the color theme for the Sysmac Studio, you can hide or display variable comments,
and you can change the settings for program checks.

1 Select Option from the Tools Menu.

An Option Settings Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Change the settings and then click the OK Button. The changes are applied.

8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings

A message is displayed if it is necessary to restart the Sysmac Studio. If a message is dis-
played, restart the Sysmac Studio to apply the changes.

The option setting are listed in the following table.

Category Option Set value Description

Color theme Color theme • Gray (default) This option changes the
• White overall color theme of the
Sysmac Studio.
Startup Fast Startup Enable Fast Startup Sysmac Studio becomes
resident so that it can start
immediately.
8
Project Settings Default Author Enable Default Author You can set the default val-
Name Name ue of the author name that
is displayed as a property
of the project or POU. You
can set up to 127 charac-
ters. In the default setting,
the user name that you en-
tered when you logged on-
to Windows is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-123

8 Other Functions

Category Option Set value Description

Window Edit Pane Maximum number of tab You can set the number of
pages in Edit Pane tab pages in the Edit Pane
and floating edit windows
that can be displayed at a
time.
When the maximum num- If the maximum number of
ber of tab pages in the Edit tab pages in the Edit Pane
Pane is exceeded, close and floating edit windows is
the tab page that has not exceeded when you open a
become active for the lon- new tab page, the tab page
gest time that has not been used for
the longest time is closed
automatically. Note that the
following tab pages are ex-
cluded from this setting.
• MC Test Run Tab Page
• Diagnosis/Statistics In-
formation Tab Page
• Drive Settings Tab Pa-
ges (Auto Tuning, Test
Run, and Damping Con-
trol)
• Trend Monitor Tab Page
for ZW-series Displace-
ment Sensors
Window layout Save/restore the window The window layout is saved
layout as the project-specif- or restored for each project.
ic setting for each
Save/restore the window The window layout is saved
layout as the common set- or restored as common for
ting with all projects all projects.*1
Ladder Editor Local variable table Top Place the local variable ta-
layout ble at the top of the Ladder
Editor.
Bottom Place the local variable ta-
ble at the bottom of the
Ladder Editor.
Left Place the local variable ta-
ble on the left side of the
Ladder Editor.
Right Place the local variable ta-
ble on the right side of the
Ladder Editor.

8-124 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Category Option Set value Description

Rung display Align right bar The right bus bars of the
rungs are aligned accord-
ing to the width specified
with Display width of
rungs [pixel]. If a rung
cannot be displayed within
the specified width due to
so many circuit parts, all
circuit parts in the rung are
displayed in the minimum
displayable width.
Display width of rungs [pix- When you align the right
el] bus bars, specify the rung
width to 200 to 2,000 pix-
els.
You can use the Fit to the
Edit Pane Width Button to
set the rung width to the
width of the Ladder Editor

8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings

that is currently displayed.
The Fit to the Edit Pane
Width Button is enabled
when you open the Option
Settings Dialog Box while
the Ladder Editor is dis-
played.
Display width of var- Fit to variable name The variable name for any
iables ladder diagram object is
displayed on one line.
Specify the max width Variable names are dis-
played within the specified
maximum width. The width 8
is set in pixels on a slider.*2
Specify the fixed width Variable names are dis-
played within the specified
fixed width. The width is set
in pixels on a slider.*2
When not fit in the specified If you specify the maximum
width width or a fixed width, vari-
able names that do not fit in
the specified width are left-
aligned, right-aligned, or
wrapped to multiple lines.*3

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-125

8 Other Functions

Category Option Set value Description

In-Out variable sort Follow the definition order When a function or function
order of Function/ of the variable table of block is called in a Ladder
Function Block Function/Function Block Editor, the display order of
input variables, output vari-
ables and in-out variables
follows the definition order
in the variable table. If you
set this item, the display of
the function or function
block in the Ladder Editor
may be expanded in the
vertical direction.
If you do not set this item,
output variables are abbre-
viated in the display.
Variable Comment Show comment This option allows you to
display or hide variable
comments for ladder dia-
gram objects.
Number of lines*3 You can set the number of
lines to use to display vari-
able comments. (1 to 5
lines)
When a comment does not You can set the part of
fit in the display area comment omitted from the
display when a variable
comment does not fit in the
display area. The begin-
ning, middle, or end part of
the comment can be omit-
ted. The omitted part is dis-
played with ellipsis (...).
Element Comment Show comment This option allows you to
show or hide element com-
ments for ladder diagram
objects.
Specify number of lines You can specify the number
of lines to display between
one to five.
Show whole content The whole content of ele-
ment comments is shown.

8-126 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Category Option Set value Description

Color Selection Focus background color You can change the colors
Rung comments of the elements in the Lad-
Jump labels der Editor.
Global variables
Element comments
Variable comments
Online power flow
Unmonitored power flow
Monitored present values
Rung comment background
color
Ladder background color
(offline)
Ladder background color
(online)
Present Value Dis- Display present values of You can set whether to dis-
play array index variables play the present values of
variables that are used as
subscripts for array varia-

8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings

bles, structure array varia-
bles, and array elements or
members of union array
variables.
Auto Variable Regis- Select local or global varia- You can set whether to dis-
tration ble and register it. play the dialog box to se-
lect the variable table in
which to register new varia-
ble names that are entered
in the Ladder Editor. The
setting is valid only when
the Sysmac Studio is off-
line. 8
Specify the data type You can set whether to dis-
play a dialog box to enter
the data type when the da-
ta type cannot be deter-
mined when a new variable
name is entered on the
Ladder Editor.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-127

8 Other Functions

Category Option Set value Description

ST Editor Local variable table Top Place the local variable ta-
layout ble at the top of the ST Edi-
tor.
Bottom Place the local variable ta-
ble at the bottom of the ST
Editor.
Left Place the local variable ta-
ble on the left side of the
ST Editor.
Right Place the local variable ta-
ble on the right side of the
ST Editor.
Auto Complete Enable Auto Complete (de- A list of candidates is auto-
fault: enabled) matically displayed when
entering instructions or var-
iables.
Font Setting Font You can change the font to
use to display programs in
the ST Editor. A preview of
the selected font is dis-
played in the preview box.
Color Selection Comments You can change the colors
Global variables of the elements in the ST
ST background color (off- Editor.
line)
ST background color (on-
line)
Present Value Dis- Display present values of You can set whether to dis-
play array index variables play the present values of
variables that are used as
subscripts for array varia-
bles, structure array varia-
bles, and array elements or
members of union array
variables.
Upon clicking varia- Select local or global varia- You can set whether to dis-
ble registration mark ble and register it. play the dialog box to se-
lect the registered variable
table when the variable
registration mark is clicked
in the ST Editor. The set-
ting is valid only when the
Sysmac Studio is offline.
Specify the data type You can set whether to dis-
play the dialog box to enter
data types when the varia-
ble registration mark is
clicked in the ST Editor.
HMI Code Editor You can make settings for the NA-series PT Code Editor. Refer to the NA-series
Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. V118) for details.
HMI Page Editor You can make settings for the NA-series PT Page Editor. Refer to the NA-series
Programmable Terminal Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. V118) for details.

8-128 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 8 Other Functions

Category Option Set value Description

Program Check/ Ladder Program Display the following warn- You can select whether to
Build Check ings in ladder program display specific warnings
checks. for ladder diagram program
• Duplicate use of an out- checks.
put
• Duplicate use of a func-
tion block instance
• No reference to an inter-
nal output from others or
no value writing to an in-
ternal input from others
Variable Check Display a warning level Check for network varia-
when network variables are bles that are not registered
not registered in the set- in the settings for exclusive
tings for exclusive control control of network-publish-
of variables in tasks ed variables in tasks.
Program Check/ Run automatically You can select whether to
Build automatically check and
build a program when you

8-23 Sysmac Studio Option Settings

change program data.
Program check Detect an error when an in- Causes the program check-
out variable is passed to er to detect an error when
specific instruction argu- an in-out variable is passed
ment.*4 to a specific instruction ar-
gument in a program.
Variables Initial Value Setting Array layout selectable (de- You can change the display
Dialog fault) format of the dialog box
Vertical layout for arrays that is used to set the initial
values of structure varia-
bles, array variables, and
structure array variables.
When changing a Do not change the variable Set whether to change the 8
variable name on name used in programs same variable name in oth-
the variable table (default) er locations when you
Change the variable name change a variable name. If
used in programs you select the Change the
variable name used in
programs Check Box, the
variable names that are
used in the programs and
external variables will be
changed at the same time
when you change the varia-
ble name in the variable ta-
ble.
Comments for Varia- Select comment Enable multi-comment se- You can switch the variable
ble and Data Types lection comments and data type
Comment 1 (default) comments.
Comment 2

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 8-129

8 Other Functions

Category Option Set value Description

External variable Use global variable com- The comments for the glob-
comments in Lad- ment al variables are displayed
der/ST Editors instead of the comments
for the corresponding exter-
nal variables.
Parameter Editor Online Automatically transfer up- Parameters that are
(Drive) dated parameter(s) to drive changed during online with
the Drive are immediately
transferred to the drive.
Confirm transfer operation When parameters are
transferred to the Drive, a
confirmation message is
displayed.
Allow downloading of inva- Parameters are transferred
lid values even when they are out of
range.
Display Show reserved parameters Parameters that are re-
served by the system are
displayed.
Show all drive parameters All parameters are dis-
played.
Synchronization Comparison Enable algorithm check for You can enable or disable
programs checking the program algo-
rithm when you use syn-
chronization to compare
the data between the
project and Controller.*5
Safety FBD editor You can set the FBD editor for the NX-series Safety Con-
trol Units. Refer to the NX-series Safety Control Unit
User’s Manual (Cat. No. Z930) for details.
Function Block You can set the function blocks for the NX-series Safety
Control Units. Refer to the NX-series Safety Control Unit
User’s Manual (Cat. No. Z930) for details.
Automatic update of You can set the automatic update of the minimum safety
minimum safety task task period for the NX-series Safety Control Units. Refer
period to the NX-series Safety Control Unit User’s Manual (Cat.
No. Z930) for details.
*1. For library projects and IAG projects, a window layout is saved or restored to their own common
templates respectively.
*2. You can set between 50 and 500 pixels. The distance between the left edge of the Ladder Editor
Pane and the left bus bar is 50 pixels. Use it as a guide.
*3. Only one line is always displayed for the variables that are allocated to parameters in functions and
function blocks and for the comments for the variables.
*4. This option is displayed only for Sysmac Studio version 1.02. For details, refer to the NJ/NX-series
Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W502).
*5. Rung comments, variable comments, element comments, configuration data, and setup data are
not checked for differences.

8-130 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 9
Reusing Programming
This section describes how to reuse the programs that you create with the Sysmac
Studio.

9-1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 9-2

9-2 Example of Reusing Device and Program Assets ...................................... 9-4
9-2-1 Changing I/O Assignments.............................................................................. 9-4
9-2-2 Deleting Device Options.................................................................................. 9-5
9-2-3 Adding Device Options.................................................................................... 9-6
9-3 Creating and Using Libraries ........................................................................ 9-8
9-3-1 Creating a Library............................................................................................ 9-8
9-3-2 Using a Library ...............................................................................................9-11
9-4 Program Sharing in Derived Devices ......................................................... 9-16
9-4-1 Overview of Sharing Programs in Derived Devices ...................................... 9-16
9-4-2 Procedure to Share a Program ..................................................................... 9-17
9-4-3 Editing Shared Data ...................................................................................... 9-20
9-4-4 Changing a Sharing Relationship.................................................................. 9-22

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 9-1

9 Reusing Programming

9-1 Overview
The ability to reuse development assets is necessary to reduce development costs, shorten develop-
ment time, and reduce maintenance costs for production facilities.

With previous PLCs, information was exchanged with I/O devices through addresses that were as-
signed to the hardwired devices. These addresses were used to write the program. As a result, chang-
ing the addresses for device changes involved complex procedures to obtain new addresses, move
comments to new addresses, change addresses in the program, etc. This was inevitably accompanied
by mistakes.
The relationship between hardware and software was strong and the function modules were large, so
the affects of changes could not be absorbed by the modules.

With the NJ/NX/NY-series Controllers, information for hardwired I/O devices is handled in I/O devices
that are defined within the system. The programs are created based on these I/O devices and the vari-
ables that are assigned to them by the user. Even if devices are changed, it is often not necessary to
change the programs when the I/O devices that are defined within the system are changed, i.e., it is
only necessary to change the variable assignments to I/O devices.
The hardware-software function modules separate the I/O devices and variables, and the affects of
changes can be absorbed by the function modules.
This reduces the corrections that require complex procedures, which in turn reduces mistakes. Confir-
mation and correction work are also reduced to reduce the cost of development and development
time.

Using Variable Programming to Reuse Programs

The Sysmac Studio provides an environment for programming with variables and POUs (program or-
ganization units), including functions, function blocks, and programs. Variables are assigned to read
external devices and I/O information in the user program.
Refer to 9-2 Example of Reusing Device and Program Assets on page 9-4 for an example of appli-
cable devices.

Creating Libraries to Reuse Programs

You can create libraries of functions, function blocks, and data types to reuse them as objects in other
projects.
Refer to 9-3 Creating and Using Libraries on page 9-8 for details on how to create and use libraries.

Sharing a Machine Project with EtherCAT Configuration

You can use the Enable/Disable EtherCAT Slave function on more than one machine with different
EtherCAT slave configurations to share a machine project.
To do so, create a device project with the maximum number of EtherCAT slaves and enable or disable
each EtherCAT slave by the program depending on the device configuration.
For details on the Enable/Disable EtherCAT Slave function, refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in
EtherCAT Port User’s Manual (Cat. No. W505).

9-2 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 9 Reusing Programming

Reusing Machines by Program Sharing

With the combination of Sysmac Studio version 1.20 or higher and Controllers with unit version 1.16 or
later, you can share the same POUs, data types, and global variables among more than one Control-
lers in a project.
Suppose that you use a single project to manage Controllers for more than one device and share a
program that provides common functions among the Controllers. Then, you can correct the program
for only one Controller to apply the corrections to the programs for other Controllers.
Thus, you can reduce the time and effort to apply corrections that you made to a common program to
all of the devices when you develop devices that are derived from a certain device.
Refer to 9-4 Program Sharing in Derived Devices on page 9-16 for details.

9-1 Overview
9

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 9-3

9 Reusing Programming

9-2 Example of Reusing Device and Pro-

gram Assets
This section describes how design assets would be reused in a typical system upgrade example. It
compares the work required for traditional programming with fixed address as opposed to program-
ming with variables with the Sysmac Studio.

9-2-1 Changing I/O Assignments

• In this example, the long-distance wiring from the I/O devices to Basic I/O Units is converted
to a network device configuration that uses remote I/O slaves to save wiring and changing
the I/O devices to remote I/O slaves to improve the maintainability of the system.

Wiring bundled in ducts

Wiring with a communications cable

Input devices Output devices Input devices Output devices

Goal Traditional programming Programming with the Sysmac Studio

1 Checking the ad- You must confirm the addresses and I/O com- ---
dresses assigned to ments assigned to the Basic I/O Units.
the old devices
2 Checking the ad- You must calculate the addresses assigned to ---
dresses assigned to the remote I/O slaves.
the new devices Note If any of the calculated addresses are
used as work bits, you must assign the
work bits to new work bit addresses.
3 Replacing the ad- You must move the I/O comment information You must delete the Basic I/O Units from the
dresses of the old de- for the previous addresses to the calculated Unit configuration (variable assignments to
vices with the ad- new addresses. I/O devices are cleared).
dresses of the new Note If any of the calculated addresses are
devices. used as work bits, you must move the
I/O comments to the new work bit ad-
dresses.
You must replace the addresses of the old de- You must register the remote I/O slaves in the
vices with the addresses of the new devices. network configuration.
Note If any of the calculated addresses are
used as work bits, you must move the
I/O comments to the new work bit ad-
dresses.
You must register the remote I/O slaves in the You must assign variables to the I/O devices
network configuration. for remote I/O devices.
4 Changing the Unit You must delete the Basic I/O Units from the ---
Configuration in the Unit Configuration.
project You must delete the old addresses from the ---
variable table.

9-4 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 9 Reusing Programming

Goal Traditional programming Programming with the Sysmac Studio

5 Building the devices You must wire the I/O devices to the remote You must wire the I/O devices to the remote
and wiring I/O device terminals according to the device I/O device terminals according to the device
configuration diagrams and wiring diagrams. configuration diagrams and wiring diagrams.
6 Checking wiring and You must visually confirm that wires are con- You must visually confirm that wires are con-
addresses nected according to the wiring diagram using nected according to the wiring diagram using
color codes and use a tester to check continu- color codes and use a tester to check continu-
ity. ity.
You must confirm that the output results to the You must confirm that the output results to the
new addresses are output to the remote I/O variables are output to the remote I/O slave
slave devices and that dummy inputs from I/O devices and that dummy inputs from I/O devi-
devices are reflected in the input words. ces are reflected in the variables.
7 Debugging the pro- You must check for mistakes in address You must make sure that operation timing is
grams changes for device changes and make sure not affected.
that operation timing is not affected.
8 Performing trial oper- You must perform trial operation of the device You must perform trial operation of the device
ation configuration and control programs after the configuration and control programs after the
changes are made. changes are made.

9-2 Example of Reusing Device and Program Assets

9-2-2 Deleting Device Options
• In this example, part of the devices is removed from the system to reduce the production
scale.

Application Traditional programming Programming with the Sysmac Studio

1 Checking the ad- You must check the addresses that are used ---
dresses assigned to by the devices to delete.
the devices to delete 9
2 Checking the control You must check the programming that is used You must check the programs and program
programming for the to control the devices to delete. tasks that are used to control the devices to
9-2-2 Deleting Device Options

devices to delete delete.

You must check the programming that is used You must check the programs and program
to monitor and interlock the devices to delete. tasks that are used to monitor and interlock
the devices to delete.
3 Changing the Unit You must delete the devices to delete from You must delete the devices to delete from
Configuration in the the Unit Configuration. the Unit configuration (variable assignments
project to I/O devices are cleared).

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 9-5

9 Reusing Programming

Application Traditional programming Programming with the Sysmac Studio

4 Deleting the control You must delete the programming that is used You must delete the programs and program
programming for the to control the devices to delete. tasks that are used to control the devices to
unnecessary devices delete.
You must correct the programming that is You must correct the programs that are used
used to monitor and interlock the devices to to monitor and interlock the devices to delete.
delete.
You must delete the addresses that are used ---
by the devices to delete from the variable ta-
ble.
5 Removing Units that You must remove the wiring to the external You must remove the wiring to the external
were used for the de- devices from the Units that were used for the devices from the Units that were used for the
vices to delete devices to delete. devices to delete.
You must remove the external devices and You must remove the external devices and
the Units that were used for the devices to de- the Units that were used for the devices to de-
lete. lete.
6 Debugging the pro- You must check for mistakes in program You must check for mistakes in program
grams changes for the devices to delete and make changes for the devices to delete and make
sure that operation timing is not affected. sure that operation timing is not affected.
7 Performing trial oper- You must perform trial operation of the device You must perform trial operation of the device
ation configuration and control programs. configuration and control programs.

9-2-3 Adding Device Options

• In this example, part of the devices is expanded on the device copy line to increase the pro-
duction scale.

Application Traditional programming Programming with the Sysmac Studio

1 Checking the ad- You must check the addresses to assign to ---
dresses assigned to the Units to use for the devices to add.
the devices to add Note If any of the assigned addresses are
used as work bits, you must assign the
work bits to unused work bits.
You must add variables and comments for the You must register the Units to use for the de-
work bits to use in the programming. vices to add in the Unit Configuration.
You must register the Units to use for the de- You must register the variables to use in the
vices to add in the Unit Configuration. programs.
--- You must assign the variables to use to the
I/O devices.

9-6 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 9 Reusing Programming

Application Traditional programming Programming with the Sysmac Studio

2 Writing the control You must write the control programming. You must write the control programming.
programming for the Note If any of the assigned addresses are
devices to add used as work bits, you must change the
work bits to unused addresses.
You must understand the operation and af- You must understand the operation and af-
fects of interlocks and improve the program- fects of interlocks and improve the program-
ming. ming.
3 Building the devices You must add and wire devices according to You must add and wire devices according to
to add and wiring the device configuration diagrams and wiring the device configuration diagrams and wiring
diagrams. diagrams.
4 Checking wiring and You must visually confirm that wires are con- You must visually confirm that wires are con-
addresses nected according to the wiring diagram using nected according to the wiring diagram using
color codes and use a tester to check continu- color codes and use a tester to check continu-
ity. ity.
You must confirm that the output results to the You must confirm that the output results to the
addresses are output to the devices and that variables are output to the devices and that
inputs from I/O devices are reflected in the in- inputs from I/O devices are reflected in the
put words. variables.

9-2 Example of Reusing Device and Program Assets

5 Debugging the pro- You must debug the programs. You must debug the programs.
grams
6 Performing trial oper- You must perform trial operation of the device You must perform trial operation of the device
ation configuration and control programs after the configuration and control programs after the
changes are made. changes are made.

9
9-2-3 Adding Device Options

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 9-7

9 Reusing Programming

9-3 Creating and Using Libraries

You can create functions, function block definitions, and data types in a library file to reuse them as
objects in other projects.
Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software User's Manual (Cat. No. W501) or NY-series Industrial
Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W558) for details on libraries.

9-3-1 Creating a Library

 Creating a Library
You can create functions, function block definitions, and data types in a library file so that you can
reuse them.

Procedure
Use the following procedure to create a library.

 Creating a Library Project

1 Create a new project on the Start page. Select a library project as the project type, select a
Controller, and click the Create Button.
A project that can be used as a library is created.

2 Create functions, function block definitions, and data types using the standard programming
procedures.

Additional Information

• You must select a Controller as the device for a library project.

• If the device for an existing project is set to a Controller, you can change the project type to a
library project in the project property settings.
• We recommend that you use namespaces for the names of functions, function block defini-
tions, and data types that you create as library objects to prevent duplication of names in dif-
ferent programs. Refer to 4-4 Namespaces on page 4-79 for information on namespaces.

9-8 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 9 Reusing Programming

 Setting Up a Library
The properties of the library are set before the library file is created.

1 Select Library − Library Setting from the Project Menu.

A Library Setting Dialog Box is displayed.

9-3 Creating and Using Libraries

2 Set the library properties in the Library Setting Dialog Box, and select the objects.
After you make all of the settings, click the OK Button.
• Library Properties

Property Description
Name Enter the name of the library.
Version Enter the version and revision of the library. 9
Author Enter the name of the creator of the library. (This setting is optional.)
Comment Enter the a comment for the library. (This setting is optional.)
9-3-1 Creating a Library

Company Enter the name of the company that created the library. (This setting is op-
tional.)
ID A unique ID that is used to access the library is displayed. The ID is auto-
matically created and cannot be changed.
Disable source display Specify whether to show or hide the source when the library objects are
reused. The source is not displayed if this check box is selected.
Attached files Specify the path to a file to attach to the library. The specified file is loaded
to the library file. You can attach more than one file.
Include the referenced If the current library project accesses another library, select whether to in-
library files clude the data from the accessed library in the library that you create.

• Parts Selection

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 9-9

9 Reusing Programming

Item Description
Include Select the objects (programs*1, functions, function block definitions, and
data types) to include in the library. Clear the check boxes of any objects
not to include in the library.
Data types are always included in the library.
Publish*2 You can allow Controllers that access the library to use the selected func-
tions and function block definitions. If you select check boxes, the selected
POUs are displayed in the Toolbox for the Controller and in entry candi-
dates displayed when programming. You can select a Publish Check Box
only when the corresponding Include Check Box is selected.
When the Publish Check Box for POU is cleared, the data types defined in
the library will not be published. However, for POU whose Publish check
box is selected, the data type used for its in-out variables or external varia-
bles will be published.
*1. You can select programs as library objects with Sysmac Studio version 1.06 or higher. You can-
not reference libraries that include programs with Sysmac Studio version 1.05 or lower. Also, you
cannot open or import projects that have libraries that include programs with Sysmac Studio ver-
sion 1.05 or lower.
*2. Caution is required to use the created library on Sysmac Studio version 1.13 or lower. Refer to
Version Information, below.

Version Information

Select the Publish Check Boxes for all library objects in the following cases.
• When you will use a library created on Sysmac Studio version 1.14 or higher on Sysmac Stu-
dio version 1.13 or lower
• When you will open a library saved on Sysmac Studio version 1.14 or higher on Sysmac Stu-
dio version 1.13 or lower
• When you will connect Sysmac Studio version 1.13 or lower to a Controller to which a project
that accesses a library created on Sysmac Studio version 1.14 or higher was downloaded
If there is even one library object for which the Publish Check Box was not selected, you can-
not access the library on Sysmac Studio version 1.13 or lower and you cannot open the library
project on Sysmac Studio version 1.13 or lower.

3 Select Library − Create Library from the Project Menu.

A Create Library File Dialog Box is displayed.

9-10 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 9 Reusing Programming

4 Select the folder in which to save the library file, enter the file name, and then click the Save
Button.
The library file is created.

9-3-2 Using a Library

You can read a library file that you created into a project and use the objects from it. You can use the
library objects that are read in the same way as you can use functions, function block definitions, and
data types that you create in the project.
Use the following procedures to use a library.
1 Library Reference
2 Using Library Objects

Library Reference

 Library Reference
You must register a library to use it in a project. The library file to use is read into the project.

1 Select Library − Show References from the Project Menu.

A Library Reference Dialog Box is displayed.

9-3 Creating and Using Libraries

(a)

(c) (f)
(g)
(d)
(e) (b)
9
9-3-2 Using a Library

Item Description
(a) Library View A list of the libraries that are currently accessed is displayed. Library prop-
erty information is displayed.
Click the ( ) Buttons to expand the tree and display the objects in the li-
braries.
An information icon appears at the left end of the library row if the library ID
included in the project does not match the ID of the reference library file.
(b) Interface View The data that you can access in the library parts is displayed.
(c) Create Reference Click this button to read a library file and add it to the project.
Button
(d) Delete Reference Click this button to remove a library from the list of accessed libraries.
Button

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 9-11

9 Reusing Programming

Item Description
(e) Update the libraries Click this button when the Include the referenced libraries into the
included in the project. Check Box is selected to update the libraries in the project with
project Button the content of the reference library file.
(f) Include the refer- If you select this check box and then save or export the project, the library
enced libraries into files that are accessed in the project will be included in the saved or export-
the project. ed data. You can select this setting for each Controller, which will be trans-
ferred together with the program to the Controller.
(g) Notify if the library ID If you select this check box and then save or export the project or transfer
included in the the user program to a Controller, the library ID included in the project will
project does not be checked against the ID of the reference library file at the following tim-
match with the refer- ings and a message will appear if they do not match.
ence library file ID. • When a saved project is opened
• When an exported project is imported
• When a program that was transferred to a Controller is uploaded
• When the backup file of a program that was transferred to a Controller is
imported

2 Click the Create Reference Button in the Library Reference Dialog Box.
A Refer to Library File Dialog Box is displayed.

3 Select the library file to read into the project and click the Open Button.
The library file is read so that you can use the library objects in the project.

Precautions for Correct Use

• If the fully qualified name of a library object that you attempt to use already exists in the
project or in a library object that was previously read, an error occurs and the library object is
not read. Be sure that all names are unique.
• If both the short name of a library object and the company name in the library properties al-
ready exist for a library object that was previously read, an error occurs and the library object
is not read. Make sure that the names and company names are not duplicated between li-
brary objects.
• Note this if you do not select to include the referenced libraries into the project: If the library
ID included in a Controller is different from the reference library file ID, it may happen during
verification after transfer to the Controller that the POUs, variables, or data types that refer-
ence libraries mismatch.

9-12 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 9 Reusing Programming

Additional Information

• If the library properties are set to display the source, you can right-click a function or function
block definition in the Library View and select Display Source to display the source of the
function or function block definition.
• If data protection is set for a library object for which you try to display the source code, you
must enter the password for data projection.
• When you import library project files with the Include the referenced libraries into the
project. (Include the referenced libraries when saving the project in Sysmac Studio ver-
sion 1.17 or lower) Check Box selected, the save location for the reference library file de-
pends on the Sysmac Studio version.

Version Save location

Version 1.14 When the accessed library file was Under the folder specified in the environ-
or higher saved under the folder specified in the ment variable USERPROFILE on the com-
OS environment variable USERPRO- puter where the file is imported
FILE when the project was exported:
When the library file is saved in any oth- A folder*1 with the same name as the folder
er folder in which the library file was saved when the
project was exported
Version 1.13 A folder*1 with the same name as the folder in which the library file was saved when
or lower the project was exported
*1. If a folder with the same name does not exist, a new folder is created.
• The application scope of the Include the referenced libraries into the project. setting dif-
fers between Sysmac Studio version 1.17 or lower and version 1.18 or higher.

9-3 Creating and Using Libraries

Version 1.18 or
Version 1.17 or lower
higher
Application scope of Include the The setting applies to all Controllers in The setting can be
referenced libraries into the project. the project. enabled or disa-
(Include the referenced libraries bled for each Con-
when saving the project in Sysmac troller in the
Studio version 1.17 or lower) setting project.
Operation when a project that was ex- If the Include the referenced libraries ---
ported in version 1.18 or higher is im- into the project. setting was enabled
ported in version 1.17 or lower for one or more Controllers in the
project, the Include the referenced 9
libraries when saving the project
setting is enabled for the imported 9-3-2 Using a Library
project.

 Deleting a Library Reference

Use the following procedure to delete a library that you read into the project.

1 Select the library, and then click the Delete Reference Button. Or, right-click the library and se-
lect Delete Reference from the menu.

 Updating the Libraries Included in the Project

If the libraries included in the project differ from the reference library file, use this procedure to up-
date the libraries in the project with the content of the reference library file.

1 Select the library to update in the Library View and click the Update the libraries included in
the project Button.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 9-13

9 Reusing Programming

The Library update confirmation Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Check the difference from the reference library file and click the OK button to update the libra-
ries included in the project.

Additional Information

After updating the libraries, you may need to build the POUs, variables, or data types that refer-
ence libraries.

Using Library Objects

You can use objects in a library that has been read into the project.
You use the objects in the same way as you use any other functions, function block definitions, and
data types. Refer to Section 4 Programming on page 4-1 for application procedures.

Object Application method

Functions and function You can use functions and function blocks to create function blocks and pro-
blocks grams.
Data types You can use the data types just like any other data types.

To use a library object, enter the name of the library object displayed in the Refer to Library File Dialog
Box.

Library object name

9-14 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 9 Reusing Programming

Additional Information

If the library object name has a namespace, enter the name of the namespace before the li-
brary object name.
Example:

Library object name Name of namespace Notation

FunctionBlock1 test1\subtest \\test1\subtest\FunctionBlock1

 Using Library Objects in the Ladder Editor

In the Ladder Editor, objects that are read by accessing libraries are displayed in the Toolbox. You
can drag these objects from the Toolbox in the same way as for other circuit parts to insert them
into the program.

1 Display the library objects to add in the Toolbox of the Ladder Editor.

9-3 Creating and Using Libraries

2 Drag the library object to the ladder diagram.
The function block from the library is inserted.

9
9-3-2 Using a Library

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 9-15

9 Reusing Programming

9-4 Program Sharing in Derived Devices

A derived device is a device that is developed based on a certain device by adding and changing
some functionality. A common program in used in a derived device and the device from which it is de-
rived.
Use the following procedures to share programs among more than one device.

Version Information

To use this function, Sysmac Studio version 1.20 or higher and a CPU Unit with unit version
1.16 or later are required.

9-4-1 Overview of Sharing Programs in Derived Devices

Use the following information to share the same POUs, data types, and global variables among more
than one Controller that is registered in a project.

Sharing Target
You can share the following data.
• POUs (Programs, functions, and function blocks)
• Data types
• Global variables

Additional Information

POUs and global variables of the Safety CPU Unit are not shared.

Sharing Methods
Use the following sharing methods.
• Deriving a device from the sharing source Controller
Create a copy of the source Controller to share the target data. You can share either all of the
POUs, data types, and global variables at a time, or only the data that is already shared.
• Configuring the sharing settings for POUs, data types, and global variables individually
Share the POU, data type, and global variable data individually. To share a POU, copy the data from
the sharing source Controller to the sharing destination Controller. To share a data type or global
variable, overwrite the data in the sharing destination Controller with the data in the sharing source
Controller.

Precautions for Correct Use

• You cannot use this function for library projects. In addition, you cannot change projects that
include any Controller that uses this function into library projects.
• When a Safety CPU Unit exists in the CPU rack, you cannot derive a device from the Control-
ler.

9-16 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 9 Reusing Programming

Additional Information

Registering a large number of derived devices (Controllers) in a project may result in low job
performance depending on your computer environment, because the Sysmac Studio consumes
a significant amount of computer memory.
If the number of derived devices in a project is likely to increase, use this function with Sharing
a Machine Project with EtherCAT Configuration on page 9-2.

9-4-2 Procedure to Share a Program

Use the following procedure to share a program.

Creating a Derived Device

Use the following procedure to create a derived device.

1 With the deriving source Controller displayed in the Multiview Explorer, right-click the device
icon and select Derive Device - Share All Programming Data from the pop-up menu. Or, se-
lect Derive Device - Share All Programming Data from the Insert Menu. To share only the
data that is already shared, select Share Shared Programming Data.

9-4 Program Sharing in Derived Devices

The Derive Device Dialog Box is displayed.

9
9-4-2 Procedure to Share a Program

2 Click the OK Button.

A copy of the Controller is added to the project.
For data that is shared, the icons change to indicate the shared status.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 9-17

9 Reusing Programming

Configuring the Sharing Settings for POUs, Data Types, and Global
Variables
Use the following procedure to configure the sharing settings for POUs, data types, and global varia-
bles.

 For POUs
The following example is for a program.

1 Right-click the target program in the Multiview Explorer and select Sharing setting between
devices from the pop-up menu.

The Sharing setting between devices Dialog Box is displayed.

(a)

(b)

9-18 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 9 Reusing Programming

Item Description
(a) Sharing target The selected data is displayed.
(b) Sharing destination All Controllers that are included in the project are displayed.

2 Select the check boxes for the Controllers whose data to share, and then click the OK Button.
You can select more than one Controller.
A dialog box is displayed to indicate that the sharing is completed.

3 Click the OK Button.

For data that is shared, the icons change to indicate the shared status.

Precautions for Correct Use

• You cannot configure the sharing settings if a POU with the same name as that of the target
POU exists in Controllers in the sharing destination. If so, rename the POU in the Controllers
in the sharing destination, or delete the POU and configure the sharing settings again.

9-4 Program Sharing in Derived Devices

• The sharing target is only the selected data. Note the following when you select a POU for
sharing.
a) Although the external variables that are used in POUs are shared, global variables are not
shared. This means that an error occurs if the corresponding global variables do not exist
in Controllers in the sharing destination. In this case, share also the global variables as
needed.
b) For POUs that reference libraries, the library reference settings are not copied to Control-
lers in the sharing destination. Copy the library reference settings as needed.

 For Data Types and Global Variables

1 Right-click Data Types or Global Variables in the Multiview Explorer, and select Sharing
setting between devices from the pop-up menu. 9
The Sharing setting between devices Dialog Box is displayed.
9-4-2 Procedure to Share a Program

2 Select the check boxes for the Controllers whose data to share, and then click the OK Button.
You can select more than one Controller.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed, which asks whether to overwrite data.

3 Click the OK Button.

For data types, data including the namespace name is shared.
For data that is shared, the icons change to indicate the shared status.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 9-19

9 Reusing Programming

Precautions for Correct Use

• You cannot select Controllers that are already shared with another Controller in the Sharing
setting between devices Dialog Box. Their check boxes are disabled.
• To add a new Controller to the sharing destination of data, display the Sharing setting
between devices Dialog Box for the target data in the sharing source Controller and add it
there. Refer to Adding a Sharing Target Controller on page 9-22 for details.
• Among global variables, the following data is not the sharing target. This means that the data
in the sharing source is not copied.
a) Axis variables, axes group variables, cam data variables, and cam definition variables
b) AT values of variable attributes
• You cannot configure the sharing settings if a variable with the same name exists in the glob-
al variable table in the sharing target. Rename it to a unique name, and then try again.
• If a variable with the same name exists in the global variable table in the sharing destination,
all attributes except for the AT attribute will be overwritten.
• If an axis variable, axes group variable, cam data variable, or cam definition variable with the
same name as that of a user-defined variable in the sharing source exists in the sharing des-
tination, it will be registered with the same name as a different variable from the axis variable,
axes group variable, cam data variable, or cam definition variable. In this case, a duplicate
name error will occur. Rename the user-defined variable to a unique name.
• Variables that exist only in Controllers in the sharing destination will be deleted.
• The order of variables will not be shared.

9-4-3 Editing Shared Data

The following describes the operations and operational precautions that apply when you edit shared
data.

Operations and Results for POUs, Data Types, and Global Variables
You can edit shared data from any Controller that shares it. Regardless of from which Controller you
edit shared data, the edited data is shared among the Controllers.
The table below describes the operations that you can perform on shared data and the results of the
operations.

9-20 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 9 Reusing Programming

Shared data Item Operation Result

POUs --- Renaming After operation, the data is shared.
However, you cannot rename data
if a POU with the same name ex-
ists in Controllers in the sharing
destination. Rename the applica-
ble POU in the Controller in the
sharing destination or delete the
POU, and then try again.
Sections (Programs) Edition, addition, deletion, After operation, the data is shared.
order change, renaming
Properties of POUs Edition
Data protection settings Setting, release, tempora-
ry release of change pro-
hibition, finishing tempo-
rary release of change
prohibition
Local variables Edition, addition, deletion After operation, the data is shared.
However, the AT values are not
shared and retained by each Con-
troller.
Breakpoints All operations After operation, the data is not

9-4 Program Sharing in Derived Devices

Bookmarks shared.
Settings for debugging The data is retained by each Con-
troller.
Data types --- Edition, addition, deletion, After operation, the data is shared.
order change
Global variables --- Edition, addition, deletion After operation, the data is shared.
However, the AT values are not
shared and retained by each Con-
troller.

Change Device
You cannot change Controllers in a sharing relationship to other Controllers with unit version 1.15 or 9
earlier. Cancel the sharing relationship before you change to other devices. Refer to Canceling a Shar-
ing Relationship on page 9-23 for the procedure to cancel a sharing relationship.
9-4-3 Editing Shared Data

Build
Build the project for each Controller. The building results are not shared and retained by each Control-
ler.
If shared data is changed by another Controller after building, you must rebuild the project.

Search and Replace

If you replace strings in shared data, the changes made to the data will be shared with other Control-
lers.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 9-21

9 Reusing Programming

Online
If you edit shared data, the changes made to the data will be shared with online Controllers that share
the data.
The table below describes the operations that you can perform online on shared data and the results
of the operations.

Online function Operation Result

Transfer from Controller Transferring only part of shared data The data is updated and the changes
made to the Controller are shared
among Controllers.
Transferring all data from a physical All the shared data is overwritten with
Controller, transferring data from a the data of the physical Controller, with
physical Controller for which Do not the sharing of the data with all other
transfer the program source setting is Controllers canceled.
enabled At this time, the sharing relationship
From a physical Controller, transferring among other Controllers remains un-
the data that has been transferred with changed.
the Do not transfer the comments
and the programming group
information to the controller setting
Monitoring Changing the present value display set- The changes are not shared. The data
ting is displayed in the display format that is
set for each Controller.
Online editing Changing the data The changes are shared.

Precautions for Correct Use

If you make changes to shared data from another Controller after matching it with the data of a
physical Controller, the data will not match with the data of the physical Controller.
Be careful that, if you make changes to shared data without being aware of the sharing relation-
ship among other Controllers, you will end up in having data in the Sysmac Studio that does not
match the data of Controllers connected online.

9-4-4 Changing a Sharing Relationship

Use the following procedures to change a sharing relationship among Controllers.
You can perform the following operations to change a sharing relationship.
• Adding a sharing target Controller
• Canceling a sharing relationship
• Deleting a POU
• Deleting a Controller
Adding a sharing target Controller and canceling a sharing relationship are performed in units of
shared data (POUs, data types, or global variables).

Adding a Sharing Target Controller

Use the following procedure to add a sharing target Controller to a group of Controllers in a sharing
relationship.

9-22 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 9 Reusing Programming

1 Right-click Data Types or Global Variables in the Multiview Explorer, and select Sharing
setting between devices from the pop-up menu.
The Sharing setting between devices Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the check boxes for the Controllers to add as a sharing target, and then click the OK
Button.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed and the selected Controller is added as a sharing target.

Precautions for Correct Use

• You cannot configure the sharing settings if a POU with the same name as that of the target
POU for the Controller to add exists. If so, rename the POU in the Controllers in the sharing
destination, or delete the POU and configure the sharing settings again.

Canceling a Sharing Relationship

Use the following procedure to remove a Controller in a sharing relationship from the sharing target
Controllers.

1 Right-click POUs, Data Types, or Global Variables in the Multiview Explorer, and select

9-4 Program Sharing in Derived Devices

Sharing setting between devices from the pop-up menu.
The Sharing setting between devices Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Clear the check boxes for the Controllers to cancel the sharing relationship, and then click the
OK Button.
If the target is a data type or global variable, the sharing relationship is canceled.

If the target is a POU, a confirmation dialog box is displayed, which asks whether to delete the
target POU from the Controller simultaneously when canceling the sharing relationship.

9
9-4-4 Changing a Sharing Relationship

3 Click the Yes Button to delete the target POU. Click the No Button to leave the target POU.
The sharing of the target is canceled. If you click the Yes Button, the target POU is deleted.

Deleting a POU
You can delete a POU from the pop-up menu that appears when you right-click the target POU.
The table below describes the results when you delete a Controller in a sharing relationship.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 9-23

9 Reusing Programming

Pop-up menu com-

Result
mand
Delete Use this command to delete only the target POU for the selected Controller.
Delete with sharing Use this command to delete the target POUs for all the Controllers in a sharing rela-
target tionship.

Deleting a Controller
Deleting a Controller in a sharing relationship neither cancels the sharing relationship with other Con-
trollers in the sharing destination nor deletes the share data.
However, if there is only one Controller that has a sharing relationship with the deleted Controller, the
sharing relationship with the Controller is canceled.

9-24 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 10 10

Support Software Provided with

the Sysmac Studio
This section describes the Support Software that is provided with the Sysmac Studio.

10-1 Support Software Provided with the Sysmac Studio................................ 10-2

10-2 Starting and Exiting the Support Software ................................................ 10-4
10-2-1 Starting the Support Software Provided with Sysmac Studio........................ 10-4
10-2-2 Exiting the Support Software Provided with Sysmac Studio ......................... 10-4

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 10-1

10 Support Software Provided with the Sysmac Studio

10-1 Support Software Provided with the

Sysmac Studio
 Overview of Support Software
The following table shows the overview of Support Software for the Sysmac Studio. For the operat-
ing procedures on Support Software, refer to the reference manual or Help of each software.

Support Software Description Reference manual/Help

CX-Integrator Configures networks (data links, routing tables, CX-Integrator Operation Manual (Cat.
Communications Unit settings, etc.). No. W464)
CX-Designer Creates screen data for NS-series Programma- CX-Designer User’s Manual (Cat. No.
ble Terminals. V099)
CX-Protocol Creates data transfer protocols for general-pur- CX-Protocol Operation Manual (Cat.
pose devices connected to CJ-series Serial No. W344)
Communications Units.
Network Configura- Configures tag data links for the built-in Ether- NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in Ether-
tor Net/IP ports on NJ/NX-series CPU Units or NY- Net/IP Port User’s Manual (Cat. No.
series Industrial PCs. W506) or NY-series Industrial Panel
PC / Industrial Box PC Built-in Ether-
Net/IP Port User’s Manual (Cat. No.
W563)
CX-Configura- Performs setup for communications between IO- CX-ConfiguratorFDT Help
torFDT Link master and slave units.
Adept Robot IP Ad- Changes IP addresses and subnet masks for Adept Robot IP Address Setting Tool
dress Setting Tool Adept Robot and SmartController EX. Help

 Units Supported by the Sysmac Studio and Applicable Support Software

NX Units and EtherCAT Slaves

Applicable Support
Model Unit name Relevant Manuals Cat. No.
Software
NX-ILM400 IO-Link Master Unit CX-ConfiguratorFDT IO-Link System Us- W570
GX-ILM08C er’s Manual

CPU Bus Units and Special I/O Units

Applicable Support
Model Unit name Relevant Manuals Cat. No.
Software
CJ1W-DRM21 DeviceNet Unit CX-Integrator CX-Integrator Oper- W464
CJ1W-CRM21 CompoNet Master Unit ation Manual
(unit version 1.3 or later) Network Configurator CJ-series W495
CJ1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP Unit with EtherNet/IP
unit version 2.1 or later Units Operation
Manual for
NJ-series CPU Unit
CJ1W-SCU22 Serial Communications CX-Protocol CX-Protocol Opera- W344
CJ1W-SCU32 Units tion Manual
CJ1W-SCU42

Programmable Terminals (HMIs)

10-2 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 10 Support Software Provided with the Sysmac Studio

10-1 Support Software Provided

with the Sysmac Studio
Applicable Support
Model Unit name Relevant Manuals Cat. No.
Software
NS Series Programmable Terminals CX-Designer CX-Designer User’s V099
Manual

10

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 10-3

10 Support Software Provided with the Sysmac Studio

10-2 Starting and Exiting the Support Soft-

ware
This section describes how to start and exit the Support Software that is provided with the Sysmac
Studio.

Precautions for Correct Use

Observe the following precautions when you start the Sysmac Studio or any of the Sup-
port Software that is provided with it.
• Exit all applications that are not necessary to use the Sysmac Studio. For virus checker or
other software that could affect the startup and operations of the Sysmac Studio, take meas-
ures such as to remove the Sysmac Studio from the scope of virus checking.
• If any hard disks or printers that are connected to the computer are shared with other com-
puters on a network, isolate them so that they are no longer shared.
• With some notebook computers, the default settings assign the USB port to a modem or in-
frared communications. Refer to the user documentation for your computer and set the USB
port as a normal serial port.
• With some notebook computers, the default settings do not supply power to the USB port or
Ethernet port to save energy. There are energy-saving settings in Windows, and also some-
times in utilities or the BIOS of the computer. Refer to the user documentation for your com-
puter and disable all energy-saving features.

10-2-1 Starting the Support Software Provided with Sysmac Studio

Use the following procedure to start the Support Software that is provided with the Sysmac Studio.

1 Select All Programs - OMRON - Sysmac Studio from the Windows Start Menu.
A list of the Support Software is displayed.

2 Select the Support Software to start. (Example: CX-Integrator)

The main window for the Support Software is displayed.

10-2-2 Exiting the Support Software Provided with Sysmac Studio

Use the following procedure to exit the Support Software that is provided with the Sysmac Studio.

1 Select Exit from the File Menu.

10-4 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 10 Support Software Provided with the Sysmac Studio

10-2 Starting and Exiting the

Support Software
10

10-2-2 Exiting the Support Software Provided with Sysmac Studio

The Support Software provided with Sysmac Studio is exited.

Additional Information

If there is unsaved data when you select Exit from the menu, a dialog box will prompt saving
the data before the Support Software is exited. Save the data if it is required. Refer to the rele-
vant manual for details.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 10-5

10 Support Software Provided with the Sysmac Studio

10-6 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 11
11
Troubleshooting
This section describes the error messages that are displayed when you check a pro-
gram on the Sysmac Studio and how to correct those errors.

11-1 Error Messages for Ladder Program Checks ............................................ 11-2

11-2 Error Messages for Structured Text Checks ............................................. 11-7
11-3 Error Messages for Variable Check .......................................................... 11-10
11-4 Error Messages for Sysmac Studio Operation........................................ 11-11

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 11-1

11 Troubleshooting

11-1 Error Messages for Ladder Program

Checks
The following table lists the ladder program error messages that are displayed in the Output Tab Page
when detected during a program check on the Sysmac Studio.

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
A parameter is not entered for the Error Refer to the error message. Enter a parameter for the input.
input.
A parameter is not entered for the Error Refer to the error message. Enter a parameter for the output.
output.
A parameter of the MC instruction Error The MC or MCR number argument Correct the MC or MCR instruction
is invalid. Execute the program does not match the MC or MCR parameter.
check to correct the parameter. level number.
A variable not registered in the lo- Error A global variable is defined, but If you want to use the global varia-
cal variable table exists. the corresponding external varia- ble, register an external variable
To use a global variable, a corre- ble is not defined. that corresponds to the global vari-
sponding external variable must able.
be registered. If you want to use a variable other
Register it by right-clicking the var- than the global variable, correct
iable and selecting Register in the variable name.
variable table from the context
menu.
A variable not registered in the Error Refer to the error message. Register the variable in the varia-
variable table exists. ble table or enter the correct varia-
Register it by right-clicking the var- ble name.
iable and selecting Register in
variable table from the context
menu.
A variable whose data type is not Error Refer to the error message. Define the data type or enter the
defined is used. correct variable name.
Any item other than output cannot Error Refer to the error message. Remove any connections other
be connected after an output. than outputs after the output.
An element comment can contain Error Refer to the error message. Reduce the number of characters
up to 250 characters. in the element comment.
An exception such as memory Error An object file could not be created Reduce the sizes of the individual
shortage has occurred. due to insufficient memory. POUs as given below, e.g., by
separating individual POUs into
two or more POUs.
POUs that are ladder programs:
Separate the programs into two or
more sections.
Global variables: Use structures or
arrays to combine variables or use
local variables instead of global
variables whenever possible.
Any parameters other than WORD Warning Unintended operation may occur if Correct the usage of parameter
data may result in an unexpected you use a parameter that is not data types.
operation. WORD data.

11-2 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 11 Troubleshooting

11-1 Error Messages for Ladder Program

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
At least one BOOL input variable Error Refer to the error message. Correct the input variable, output
and at least one BOOL output vari- variable, or return value variable of
able or return variable must be de- the function or function block.
fined.
Be careful not to make the scan Warning A jump was made to an earlier Correct the jump so that it does
time too long when moving upward part of the program. not go to an earlier part of the pro-

Checks
on the program. gram.
Cannot jump into inside the FOR- Error You attempted to jump to a loca- Correct the usage of the FOR and
NEXT loop. tion inside a FOR ... NEXT con- NEXT instructions.
struct from outside the FOR ... 11
NEXT construct.
Contacts must not be connected to Error The input is connected to the right Correct the rung.
the right bus bar. bus bar.
Data may be lost during conver- Warning Some data may be lost in the con- Correct how the data is converted.
sion. version.
data_type_name cannot be con- Error You cannot convert the data to the Correct how the data is converted.
verted to data_type_name. specified data type.
Inline ST can contain up to 1,000 Error The Inline ST box contains more Reduce the number of lines in the
rows. than 1,000 lines. Inline ST box.
Invalid pair of data types. Execu- Error You cannot specify a combination Correct the usage of the data
tion result may be lost. of data types that may result in the types.
loss of execution results.
Invalid pair of input parameters. Error The specified combination of input Correct the usage of input param-
parameter data types is incorrect. eter data types.
It is not recommended to use glob- Warning You used a global variable in a Correct the usage of global varia-
al variables in a function. function. bles in functions.
instruction_name requires a vari- Error You specified a variable that does Correct the usage of the instruc-
able with the range specified. not have a range specification. tion, or specify the variable with a
range specification.
Literal cannot be used in an input Error A literal was specified for the pa- Correct the parameter on the input
parameter of a in-out variable. rameter on the input side for an in- side for the in-out variable.
out variable.
Literal format is wrong or the data Error The format of the literal is incor- Correct the usage of literals, in-
type is not available. rect, or you attempted to use a text cluding the format.
string literal as a different data
type.
member_name is not a member Error You specified an undefined mem- Define the member or correct the
of the data_type_name data type. ber name after the period. member specification.
No JUMP instruction specifies the Warning This warning is displayed when Correct the usage of jumps and la-
label in the same section. only a label is defined in a section. bels.
No need to round integer type vari- Warning Execution is not required for inte- Correct the usage of the integer
ables. ger variables. variables.
No value can be written to a literal. Error You attempted to output to a literal. Correct the output.
No value can be written to a varia- Error You specified a variable that can Correct the usage of the accessing
ble with Read Only attribute set in be accessed in the task as an out- tasks.
the task setting. put parameter.
No value can be written to a varia- Error You specified a variable with the Correct the usage of the Constant
ble with the Constant attribute. Constant attribute as an output pa- attribute for the variable.
rameter.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 11-3

11 Troubleshooting

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
No value can be written to an input Error You attempted to write a value to Correct the usage of input varia-
variable. an input variable inside a function bles in functions and function
or function block. blocks.
No value can be written to input, Error You attempted to write a value to Correct the usage of variables of
output, or in-out variables of a the output variable, input variable, function block instances.
function block instance. or in-out variable of an instance
variable.
No value can be written to the Error You attempted to output a value to Correct the enumeration.
enumerated type of variables. an enumeration.
One rung can contain only one in- Error There is more than one Inline ST Correct the usage of inline ST.
line ST. box on the rung.
One rung can contain up to 1,000 Error Refer to the error message. Reduce the number of instructions
instructions. on the rung.
One section can contain up to Error You attempted to use more than Reduce the number of rungs in the
1,000 rungs. 1,000 rungs in one section. section.
Output parameter type does not Error The data type of the output param- Correct the output parameter or
match output variable type. eter does not match the data type output variable.
of the output variable.
Same name is already used for a Error Refer to the error message. Rename the variable or the label.
variable.
The actual argument is not a varia- Error A constant is specified for a pa- Specify a variable for the parame-
ble. rameter. ter.
The BREAK instruction is used Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of the BREAK
outside the FOR-NEXT loop. instruction.
The BREAK instruction must be Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of the BREAK
connected to the right bus bar. instruction.
The END instruction cannot be Error Refer to the error message. Remove the END instruction from
used in a function or function the function or function block.
block.
The END instruction must be used Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of the END in-
alone on a rung. The rung cannot struction.
contain any other elements.
The FOR instruction must be used Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of the FOR in-
alone on a rung. The rung cannot struction.
contain any other elements.
The MC instruction must be con- Error Refer to the error message. Correct the output of the MC in-
nected to the right bus bar. struction.
The MCR instruction must be used Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of the MCR in-
alone on a rung. The rung cannot struction.
contain any other elements.
The NEXT instruction must be Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of the NEXT in-
used alone on a rung. The rung struction.
cannot contain any other ele-
ments.
The RETURN instruction cannot Error The RETURN instruction was Remove the RETURN instruction
be used in a program POU. used in a program. from the program.
The RETURN instruction must be Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of the RETURN
used alone on a rung. The rung instruction.
cannot contain any other ele-
ments.

11-4 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 11 Troubleshooting

11-1 Error Messages for Ladder Program

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
The array dimension is not correct- Error The array dimensions used do not Correct the array definition or cor-
ly specified. match the array definition. rect the array dimensions.
The array expression is invalid. Error The array expression is incorrect, Correct the array expression.
there is no right bracket, or there is
a character after the right bracket.

Checks
The array index is out of range. Error The literal used for the array sub- Correct the array definition or cor-
script is outside of the range of the rect the array subscript.
array.
The data type range is decreased Error You cannot convert the variable to Correct how the data is converted.
in the conversion from the specified data type. 11
data_type_name to
data_type_name.
The data_type_name data type is Error You attempted to use a variable Define the data type or enter the
not defined. with an undefined data type. correct variable name.
The downward differentiation con- Error The instruction does not support Correct the usage of the
dition cannot be specified for the the ~ condition. instruction_name instruction.
instruction_name instruction.
The function block definition name Error Refer to the error message. Enter a function block definition
is empty. name.
The function block name is not de- Error Refer to the error message. Define the function block or enter
fined. the correct function name.
The function name is empty. Error Refer to the error message. Enter a function definition name.
The function name is not defined. Error Refer to the error message. Define the function or enter the
correct function name.
The inline ST box must be con- Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of inline ST.
nected to the right bus bar.
The input parameter cannot be Error The in-out variable does not have Enter a parameter on the input
omitted for an in-out variable. a parameter on the input side. side for the in-out variable.
The input parameter types cannot Error Refer to the error message. Correct how the data is converted.
be converted to the output param-
eter types.
The input used as an internal bit is Warning Refer to the error message. Check the access relationships of
not written from others. the work bit input.
The instance is doubly used, Warning Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of the instance.
which may cause an unintentional
operation.
The instance variable is empty. Error Refer to the error message. Enter an instance variable.
The label is empty. Error No label was entered for a Jump Enter a label.
instruction (->>) or Label instruc-
tion.
The label specified for the jump Error A label for the jump target does Correct the usage of jumps and la-
destination does not exist in the not exist in the same section. bels.
same section.
The label specified for the jump Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of jumps and la-
destination is used more than bels.
once.
The member expression is invalid. Error The member expression is incor- Correct the member expression.
rect ( e.g., “(a..b)”).

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 11-5

11 Troubleshooting

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
The output is doubly used, which Warning Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of outputs.
may cause unintentional opera-
tion.
The output used as an internal bit Warning Refer to the error message. Check the access relationships of
is not referenced from others. the work bit output.
The rung cannot be branched be- Error Refer to the error message. Correct the rung before the MC in-
fore the MC instruction. struction.
The rung cannot be branched or Error Refer to the error message. Remove any branches or joins af-
converged after an output. ter outputs.
The rung is disjunct. Error There is a disconnection within a Correct the rung.
rung.
The upper limit of nesting levels Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of nesting.
(15) was exceeded.
The upward differentiation condi- Error The instruction does not support Correct the usage of the
tion cannot be specified for the the @ condition. instruction_name instruction.
instruction_name instruction.
There is no corresponding FOR in- Error A FOR instruction was not found in Correct the usage of the FOR and
struction in the same section. the same section as a NEXT in- NEXT instructions.
struction.
There is no corresponding MC in- Error You did not include the MC instruc- Correct the usage of the MC and
struction. tion that corresponds to the MCR MCR instructions.
instruction.
There is no corresponding MCR Error There is an MC instruction without Correct the MC structure between
instruction inside the FOR-NEXT an MCR instruction between the the FOR and NEXT instructions.
loop. FOR and NEXT instructions.
There is no corresponding MCR Error You did not include the MCR in- Correct the usage of the MC and
instruction. struction that corresponds to the MCR instructions.
MC instruction.
There is no corresponding NEXT Error A NEXT instruction was not found Correct the usage of the FOR and
instruction in the same section. in the same section as a FOR in- NEXT instructions.
struction.
There is no corresponding NEXT Error There is a FOR instruction without Correct the FOR structure be-
instruction inside the MC-MCR re- a NEXT instruction between the tween the MC and MCR instruc-
gion. MC and MCR instructions. tions.
Unsigned integers cannot be used Error You cannot use an unsigned inte- Correct the usage of unsigned in-
together with signed integers. ger with a signed integer or a real tegers, signed integers, and real
number. numbers.
When specifying an output param- Error The parameter on the output side Use the same parameter on both
eter of an in-out variable, it must for the in-out variable is not the the input and output sides for an
be same as input parameter. same as the parameter on the in- in-out variable.
put side.
When using the union data type, Error You attempted to use a union vari- Correct the usage of unions.
specify a member. able without a period.
You can only use the following Error You specified a data type that can- Correct the usage of inputs.
types for the input parameter. not be used for an input.

11-6 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 11 Troubleshooting

11-2 Error Messages for Structured Text

11-2 Error Messages for Structured Text
Checks
The following table lists the ST program error messages that are displayed in the Output Tab Page
when detected during a program check on the Sysmac Studio.

Checks
Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
"(" is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert a left parenthesis.
")" is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert a right parenthesis.
11
"." is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert a period.
":" is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert a colon.
":=" is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert a colon and equals sign (:=).
";" is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert a semicolon.
"[" is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert a left bracket.
"]" is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert a right bracket.
A constant cannot be written. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of constants.
A variable with Constant attribute Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of variables with
cannot be written. a Constant attribute.
A value is out of range. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the value.
Address cannot be allocated for Error Refer to the error message. Refer to the error message.
the variable variable_name.
Check the auto allocation option.
An I/O parameter is missing. All Error Refer to the error message. Set the I/O parameter.
I/O parameters must be set.
Array dimension or size does not Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of arrays.
match.
Array index is out of range. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the array index.
Bad Parameter - Variable is not Error Refer to the error message. Correct the parameter.
found.
Constant is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert a constant.
Conversion from source_data to Error Refer to the error message. Correct how the data is converted.
destination_data may cause data
loss.
Conversion from source_data to Error Refer to the error message. Correct how the data is converted.
destination_data is impossible.
"DO" is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert DO.
Definition of the function block Error Refer to the error message. Correct the function block defini-
definition_name is missing. tions.
Definition of the function Error Refer to the error message. Use the function
function_definition_name is function_definition_name.
missing.
Division by zero Error Refer to the error message. Correct the division operation.
Duplicate variable is specified for Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of the variables.
the function.
Duplicate variable is specified. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the variable.
'EN' or 'ENO' cannot be used as Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of the 'EN' and
an input/output variable. 'ENO' variables.
"END_CASE" is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert END CASE.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 11-7

11 Troubleshooting

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
"END_FOR" is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert END FOR.
"END_IF" is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert END IF.
"END_REPEAT" is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert END REPEAT.
"END_WHILE" is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert END WHILE.
End of the comment is not found. Error Refer to the error message. Define the end of the comment.
End of the string is not found. Error Refer to the error message. Define the end of the text string.
Enumerated type identifiers are Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of ENUM enu-
read only. merators.
Failed to retrieve the information of Error Refer to the error message. Correct the variable name.
variable variable_name from
function block variable table.
Field specifier is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the field specifier.
Function block I/O variable is read Error Refer to the error message. Correct the function block I/O vari-
only. able.
Global variable variable_name is Warning Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of the variables.
used.
Identifier is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert an identifier.
Invalid format. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the format.
Invalid value Error Refer to the error message. Correct the value.
Missing parameter. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the number of parameter
specifications.
member_name is not a member Error Refer to the error message. Correct the member_name mem-
of data_type_variable_name. ber of data_type_variable.
Negation is not supported by Error Refer to the error message. Correct the value or the data type.
data_type_variable_name data
type.
Numbers cannot be specified for Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of the NOT ex-
the NOT operation. pression.
"OF" is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert OF.
Output variable of the function is Error Refer to the error message. Correct the output variable.
invalid.
Read-only memory is specified as Error Refer to the error message. Correct the AT specification.
the AT address of the variable
variable_name No value can be
assigned to the variable.
String literal is too long. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the text string.
Strings are not currently support- Error Refer to the error message. Correct the text string.
ed.
Structure variables are not sup- Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage method.
ported.
"THEN" is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert THEN.
"TO" is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert TO.
The AT address specified for the Error Refer to the error message. Correct the AT specification.
variable variable_name is invalid.
The FOR loop declaration contains Error Refer to the error message. Correct the parameter in the FOR
an invalid parameter. loop declaration.
The array index is invalid. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the array index.
The array is short of dimensions. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the array variable.
The constant is invalid. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the constant.

11-8 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 11 Troubleshooting

11-2 Error Messages for Structured Text

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
The expression is invalid. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the expression.
The function block parameter is Error Refer to the error message. Correct the function block parame-
mixed data types. ter.
The in-out variable is invalid. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the in-out variable.
The input variable variable_name Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of the input vari-

Checks
cannot be assigned a value. ables.
The operation is invalid. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the operation.
The operator_name operator is Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of the operator.
not supported by
data_type_name data type.
11
The output variable is invalid. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the output variable.
The output variable Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of the output
variable_name cannot be as- variables.
signed a value.
The statement is invalid. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the instruction.
The variable does not have Error Refer to the error message. Correct the variable size.
enough size.
The variable variable_name is not Error Refer to the error message. Correct the variable_name varia-
a parameter of the function. ble.
The variable variable_name is not Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of the variable
an in-out variable. attributes.
There are too many keywords. Error Refer to the error message. Reduce the number of keywords.
There must be at least one line of Error Refer to the error message. Insert at least one line of valid
valid code (excluding comments). code.
Too many dimensions for an array. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the array variable.
Too many parameters are speci- Error Refer to the error message. Correct the variable.
fied.
Too many variables are specified Error Refer to the error message. Correct the variable specifications.
for the function.
Two variable formats are mixed. Error Refer to the error message. Correct the variable notation.
"UNTIL" is missing. Error Refer to the error message. Insert UNTIL.
Usage mismatch in a variable of Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage of the variables.
the function
Usage mismatch in function block Error Refer to the error message. Correct usage of the function block
variable variables.
Usage mismatch. ':=' cannot be Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage.
used for an output parameter.
Usage mismatch. '=>' cannot be Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage.
used for an I/O parameter.
Usage mismatch. '=>' cannot be Error Refer to the error message. Correct the usage.
used for an input parameter.
When using the union data type, Error You attempted to use a union vari- Correct the usage of unions.
specify a member. able without a period.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 11-9

11 Troubleshooting

11-3 Error Messages for Variable Check

The following table shows the variable check error message that is displayed in the Output Tab Page
when detected during a program check on the Sysmac Studio.

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
Variable concurrency may not be Error Refer to the error message. Change the Sysmac Studio option
ensured between tasks which ref- settings. Refer to 8-23 Sysmac
erence the network-published vari- Studio Option Settings on page
able. 8-123 for detail.
Register the network-published
variable to the Settings for Exclu-
sive Control of Variables in Tasks
to ensure concurrency of the varia-
ble value.

11-10 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 11 Troubleshooting

11-4 Error Messages for Sysmac Studio Op-

11-4 Error Messages for Sysmac Studio
Operation
The following table lists the error messages that are displayed in the Output Tab Page when you per-
form operations on the Sysmac Studio.

eration
Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
£££ cannot be executed. Error • A cable is disconnected. • Check the cable connections.
Go offline and then go online 11
again, and then try again.
• Increase the response monitor-
ing time in the Communications
Setup.
• You used prohibited characters • Correct the volume label.
in the volume label.
• You used prohibited characters • Correct the name of the file or
when you created or renamed a folder.
file or folder.
• The SD Memory Card does not • Check the amount of available
have enough available space space required to copy the data,
for the copy operation. and the amount of available
space left on the SD Memory
Card.
• There is no SD Memory Card. • Insert the SD Memory Card.
• Power is not supplied to the SD • Insert the SD Memory Card
Memory Card. again.
• The protection switch on the SD • Turn OFF the protection switch
Memory Card is turned ON. on the SD Memory Card.
• A format operation is in prog- • Wait until the format operation is
ress. completed, and then try again.
• Other Support Software is cur- • Wait until the other Support
rently accessing the SD Memo- Software is finished, and then
ry Card. try again.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 11-11

11 Troubleshooting

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
A communications error has oc- Error There was a communications error Check the Communications Setup,
curred between the Sysmac Studio and and then try again.
/The communication has been dis- the Controller. (For example, a ca-
connected. ble is disconnected.)
There was an error in a communi- • Check the cable connections
cations message. and go offline, then go online
and try again.
• Increase the response monitor-
ing time in the communications
settings.
• Wait for a while and then try
again (e.g., wait until downloads
from other Support Software are
completed).
An unexpected error occurred dur-
ing exclusive control of com-
mands.
An unexpected error occurred (in-
cluding inconsistent communica-
tions format).
A timeout occurred during the Check the following items:
Communications Setup test. • Cable connections
• The specified IP address
• The network connection and the
IP address setting for the local
area network in the Control Pan-
el on the computer
There was no response from the • Make sure the cables are con-
Controller. nected correctly.
• Increase the response monitor-
ing time in the Communications
Setup.
• Cycle the power supply to the
Controller.
An error occurred when exporting Error The file system is write protected, Make sure the write attribute of the
the project. or some other write error occurred. file system is set correctly.
A project could not be found in the Error The export file was not found. Specify the correct export file.
archive file.
An error has occurred in the MC Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller
Test Run. The MC Test Run is because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.
forced to end.
An error occurred while the Spe- Error The transfer operation for all pa- Check the power supply and wir-
cial Unit parameters were transfer- rameters timed out. ing, and then try again.
red.
An error occurred during backup Error Refer to the error message. Try again.
parameter transfer of EtherCAT
slaves.
An error occurred when importing Error The file system is read protected, Make sure the read attribute of the
the project. or some other read error occurred. file system is set correctly.

11-12 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 11 Troubleshooting

11-4 Error Messages for Sysmac Studio Op-

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
Unexpected error occurred. *** Error Refer to the error message. Try again.
aborted.
/The *** processing was abnormal-
ly terminated due to an unexpect-
ed error.
Cannot change to the MC Test Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller

eration
Run. because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.
Cannot execute the test run. Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller
because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.
Cannot read the axis variable Error There was a communications error Check the Communications Setup, 11
variable_name. between the Sysmac Studio and and then try again.
the Controller.
Cannot start monitoring the axis Error There was a communications error Check the Communications Setup,
status. between the Sysmac Studio and and then try again.
the Controller.
Data is broken. Error The data you attempted to read or
write is corrupted.
Error occurred when exporting Error The export failed due to some Make sure the contents of the file
project problem. and the write attribute of the file
system are correct.
Error occurred when importing Error The import failed due to some Make sure the contents of the file
project problem. and the read attribute of the file
system are correct.
Error while loading file Error The file could not be loaded. Check the file to see if it is corrupt-
ed.
Error while writing file Error The file could not be written to. Make sure that the file is not open
for any other application, and then
try again.
Export Failed Error You cannot write to the save loca- Save the data to a folder that you
tion. You do not have write rights can write to. Save the file under
for the save location. The file you another file name.
are trying to overwrite may be in
use by another application.
Failed to £££ due to out of mem- Error There is insufficient memory for Close the project, restart the Sys-
ory. Sysmac Studio processing. mac Studio, and execute the oper-
Please restart Sysmac Studio and ation again.
then try again.
Failed to add a Rack. Error You have reached the maximum Delete a Rack, and then try again.
number of Racks.
Failed to add a Unit. Error You have reached the maximum Add the Unit to another Rack, or
number of Units that you can add delete a Unit and try again.
to the Rack.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 11-13

11 Troubleshooting

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
Failed to clear the error. Error A timeout occurred or an error re- • Check the cable connections.
sponse was received when you at- Go offline and then go online
tempted to reset a Controller error again, and then try again.
or user-defined error during trou- • Reset the access rights, and
bleshooting. then try again.
• A cable is disconnected. • Wait until the download for the
• You do not have the required other Support Software is finish-
access rights. ed, and then try again.
• A download is in progress for
other Support Software.
Failed to clear diagnosis/statistics Error The system is busy. Try again.
information. The communications timed out. Check the power supply and wir-
ing, and then try again.
Failed to clear the event log. Error A timeout occurred or an error re- • Check the cable connections.
sponse was received when you at- Go offline and then go online
tempted to clear the troubleshoot- again, and then try again.
ing event log or user-defined event • Increase the response monitor-
log or when you attempted to clear ing time in the Communications
all memory to clear the error log. Setup.
• A cable is disconnected. • Reset the access rights, and
• You do not have the required then try again.
access rights. • Release CPU Unit write protec-
• Write protection is enabled. tion, and then try again.
• A download is in progress for • Wait until the download for the
other Support Software. other Support Software is finish-
ed, and then try again.
Failed to communicate with the Error The system is busy. Try again.
EtherCAT slave or the NX Unit. The loads are OFF. Enable the loads, and then try
Process was aborted. again.
A major fault level Controller error Correct the error, and then try
occurred. again.
A partial fault level Controller error Correct the error, and then try
such as a CPU Rack bus error oc- again.
curred in a subsystem.
A Link OFF Error occurred. Check the power supply and wir-
ing of the first slave and then try
again.
Communications are not possible Check the power supply, wiring,
with the target slave. and slave’s node address, and
then try again.
The target slave is disabled. Enable the slave and perform syn-
chronization, and then try again.
The slave cannot be identified. Use the Compare and Merge with
Actual Network Configuration
menu command to make the con-
figurations match, synchronize the
data, and then try again.
Synchronization has not been per- Synchronize the data, and then try
formed. again.

11-14 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 11 Troubleshooting

11-4 Error Messages for Sysmac Studio Op-

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
Failed to compare. Error The communications timed out. Check the power supply and wir-
ing, and then try again.
The system is busy. Try again.
The loads are OFF. Enable the loads, and then try
again.

eration
A major fault level Controller error Correct the error, and then try
occurred. again.
A Link OFF Error occurred. Check the power supply and wir-
ing of the first slave and then try
again. 11
Communications are not possible Check the power supply, wiring,
with the target slave. and slave's node address, and
then try again.
The target slave is disabled. Enable the slave and perform syn-
chronization, and then try again.
The slave cannot be identified. Use the Compare and Merge with
Actual Network Configuration
menu command to make the con-
figurations match, synchronize the
data, and then try again.
Synchronization has not been per- Synchronize, and then perform the
formed. operation.
A slave status change was detect- Make sure you are not performing
ed. any operations in other Support
Software, and then try again.
A change in the configuration was Try again.
detected.
Failed to delete a Rack. Error You cannot delete this Rack.
Failed to execute the command. Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller
because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.
Failed to extend the session. Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller
because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.
Failed to get a session. Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller
because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.
Failed to get actual Unit configura- Error A change in the configuration was Try again.
tion. detected.
The limit to the number of slaves Correct the wiring to reduce the
was exceeded. number of slaves to 192 or less,
and then try again.
The wiring is incorrect. Correct the wiring so that the input
and output ports are connected,
and then try again.
The system is busy. Try again.
The communications timed out. Check the power supply and wir-
ing, and then try again.
A Link OFF Error occurred. Check the power supply of the first
slave. Check the wiring. Try again
after you have solved the problem.
A system error occurred. Contact your OMRON representa-
tive.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 11-15

11 Troubleshooting

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
Failed to get diagnosis/statistics Error The communications timed out. Check the power supply and wir-
information. ing, and then try again.
Failed to get packet data. Error The communications timed out. Check the power supply and wir-
ing, and then try again.
The system is busy. Try again.
The packet monitor was started al- Stop the packet monitor, and then
ready. try again.
The file could not be obtained. Make sure that you are not saving
the packet monitor results with an
instruction or from another tool,
and then try again.
Failed to get serial numbers. Error A change in the configuration was Try again.
detected.
The limit to the number of slaves Correct the wiring to reduce the
was exceeded. number of slaves to 192 or less,
and then try again.
The wiring is incorrect. Correct the wiring so that the input
and output ports are connected,
and then try again.
The system is busy. Try again.
The communications timed out. Check the power supply and wir-
ing, and then try again.
A Link OFF Error occurred. Check the power supply of the first
slave. Check the wiring. Try again
after you have solved the problem.
The actual device configuration Make sure that the device configu-
and the device configuration in the rations match, and then try again.
project do not match.
Failed to get the Controller config- Error The configuration information of Check the status of the power sup-
uration information. Check the the CJ-series Units could not be ply and wiring, and then try the op-
power supply and wiring for any obtained because of a communi- eration again.
abnormality, and retry. cations error.

11-16 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 11 Troubleshooting

11-4 Error Messages for Sysmac Studio Op-

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
Failed to get the production infor- Error A change in the configuration was Try again.
mation. detected.
The limit to the number of slaves Correct the wiring to reduce the
was exceeded. number of slaves to 192 or less,
and then try again.
The communications timed out. Check the power supply and wir-

eration
ing, and then try again.
The wiring is incorrect. Correct the wiring so that the input
and output ports are connected,
and then try again. 11
The system is busy. Try again.
A Link OFF Error occurred. Check the power supply of the first
slave. Check the wiring. Try again
after you have solved the problem.
Check that the slave information Vendor ID=0x{0,0:X8}, Product
on the right is provided in the ESI Code=0x{1,0:X8}, Revision Num-
file library. ber=0x{2,0:X8}
There are two or more slaves with Write a new slave node address to
the same node address in the ac- correct the problem.
tual device configuration.
There is a slave with an out-of- Write a new slave node address to
range node address in the actual correct the problem.
device configuration.
Communications failed. Check the power supply and wir-
ing, and then try again.
Failed to judge the condition. Sim- Error This error is displayed when the Execution pauses at the break-
ulation will stop at the breakpoint. condition for a breakpoint cannot point where the error occurred,
be evaluated due to an internal and this error message is dis-
communications error. played. Stop the simulation, and
* This does not mean that the re- then execute the simulation again.
sult of the evaluation is FALSE.
Failed to load the event log. Error A timeout occurred or an error re- • Check the cable connections.
sponse was received when read- Go offline and then go online
ing the event log for troubleshoot- again, and then try again.
ing. • Increase the response monitor-
• A cable is disconnected. ing time in the Communications
• A download is in progress for Setup.
other Support Software. • Wait until the download for the
• An I/O Bus Check Error occur- other Support Software is finish-
red, and reading the error log of ed, and then try again.
the CJ-series Unit was not pos- • Eliminate all high level errors,
sible. perform an error reset, and then
try to read the event log again.
Failed to lock the servo. Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller
because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.
Failed to monitor the status. Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller
because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.
Failed to read Controller Clock In- Error A timeout occurred when the • Check the cable connections.
formation. Clock Dialog Box was displayed. Go offline and then go online
(For example, a cable is discon- again, and then try again.
nected.)

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 11-17

11 Troubleshooting

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
Failed to read the file. Error You specified a file that is not a Specify a Unit Parameters File.
Unit Parameters File.
Failed to read the list of Controller Error A timeout occurred or an error re- • Check the cable connections.
variables and memory addresses sponse was received when you at- Go offline and then go online
for which forced refreshing is ac- tempted to read forced refreshing again, and then try again.
tive. values after going offline, or when • Increase the response monitor-
all forced refreshing was complet- ing time in the Communications
ed. Setup.
• A cable is disconnected. • Wait until the download for the
• A download is in progress for other Support Software is finish-
other Support Software. ed, and then try again.
Failed to read the serial ID. Error The serial ID could not be ob- There is no correction to be taken.
tained from the CPU Unit when (For example, noise caused the
online. error.)
Failed to read the status. Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller
because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.
Failed to cancel the forced refresh- Error A timeout occurred or an error re- • Check the cable connections.
ings for all of the specified varia- sponse was received when you at- Go offline and then go online
bles/memory in the Controller. tempted to cancel forced refresh- again, and then try again.
ing after going offline, or when all • Increase the response monitor-
forced refreshing was completed. ing time in the Communications
• A cable is disconnected. Setup.
• A download is in progress for • Wait until the download for the
other Support Software. other Support Software is finish-
ed, and then try again.
Failed to reset all axis errors. Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller
because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.
Failed to restore EtherCAT config- Error Add an ESI file that contains the Make sure that the device configu-
uration. device (ID) information. rations match, and then try again.
Failed to save file. Error You do not have the rights that are
required to load the file.
Failed to save the build results to Error There is insufficient memory for Close the project, restart the Sys-
the project due to out of memory. Sysmac Studio processing. mac Studio, and then build the
Please restart Sysmac Studio, and programs before you transfer them
then execute the build again. to the Controller.
Failed to start absolute positioning. Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller
because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.
Failed to start homing. Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller
because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.
Failed to start jogging. Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller
because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.
Failed to start packet monitoring. Error The communications timed out. Check the power supply and wir-
ing, and then try again.
Error The system is busy. Try again.
Failed to start relative positioning. Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller
because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.
Failed to start the MC Test Run. Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller
because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.
Failed to stop jogging. Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller
because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.

11-18 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 11 Troubleshooting

11-4 Error Messages for Sysmac Studio Op-

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
Failed to stop packet monitoring. Error The communications timed out. Check the power supply and wir-
ing, and then try again.
Error The system is busy. Try again.
Failed to stop the axis. Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller
because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.

eration
Failed to transfer to the controller. Error The upload failed (the specified file
does not exist).
Failed to transfer the parameters. Error There was a communications error Check the Communications Setup,
between the Sysmac Studio and and then try again.
the Controller. 11
Failed to transfer from the control- Error The download failed.
ler.
Failed to transfer. Error The communications timed out. Check the power supply and wir-
ing, and then try again.
The system is busy. Try again.
The loads are OFF. Enable the loads, and then try
again.
A major fault level Controller error Correct the error, and then try
occurred. again.
A Link OFF Error occurred. Check the power supply and wir-
ing of the first slave and then try
again.
Communications are not possible Check the power supply, wiring,
with the target slave. and slave's node address, and
then try again.
The target slave is disabled. Enable the slave and perform syn-
chronization, and then try again.
The slave cannot be identified. Use the Compare and Merge with
Actual Network Configuration
menu command to make the con-
figurations match, synchronize the
data, and then try again.
Synchronization has not been per- Synchronize, and then perform the
formed. operation.
A slave status change was detect- Make sure you are not performing
ed. any operations in other Support
Software, and then try again.
A change in the configuration was Try again.
detected.
Failed to transfer the EtherNet/IP Error Communications were blocked Change the Windows firewall set-
connection settings to/from the due to Windows firewall settings. tings to allow access. Refer to the
Controller. (Communication Error) NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Built-in
EtherNet/IP Port User’s Manual
(Cat. No. W506) or NY-series
Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box
PC Built-in EtherNet/IP Port User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W563) for de-
tails.
Failed to unlock the servo. Error You cannot execute the operation Identify and remove the Controller
because of a Controller error. error, and then try again.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 11-19

11 Troubleshooting

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
Failed to write Controller Clock In- Error A timeout occurred when you • Check the cable connections.
formation. clicked the button to apply the time Go offline and then go online
zone and clock settings in the again, and then try again.
Clock Dialog Box. (For example, a
cable is disconnected.)
Failed to write the Controller Error A timeout occurred or an error re- • Check the cable connections.
name. sponse was received when you at- Go offline and then go online
tempted to write the name of the again, and then try again.
Controller while online. • Increase the response monitor-
• A cable is disconnected. ing time in the Communications
• Write protection is enabled. Setup.
• A download is in progress for • Release CPU Unit write protec-
other Support Software. tion, and then try again.
• Wait until the download for the
other Support Software is finish-
ed, and then try again.
Failed to write the ID to the Con- Error A timeout occurred or an error re- • Check the cable connections.
troller. sponse was received when you at- Go offline and then go online
tempted to write the online user again, and then try again.
program execution ID to the Con- • Increase the response monitor-
troller. ing time in the Communications
• A cable is disconnected. Setup.
• RUN mode • Change to PROGRAM mode,
• Write protection is enabled. and then try again.
• A download is in progress for • Release CPU Unit write protec-
other Support Software. tion, and then try again.
• Wait until the download for the
other Support Software is finish-
ed, and then try again.
File operation failed. Error Refer to the error message.
Import Failed Error The CSV file is corrupted. Another If another application is using the
application is using the CSV file. CSV file, close that application,
and then try again.
Incorrect CSV format on line Error The CSV file format is incorrect. Specify a valid CSV file.
line_number.
Insufficient permissions. Error You do not have the read rights re- Make sure the read attribute of the
quired to read the file system stor- file system is set correctly.
ed in the project file.
One of the modules for executing Error For some reason, one of the mod- Restart the Sysmac Studio and
Sysmac Studio stopped. Exit Sys- ules for executing Sysmac Studio then execute the operation again.
mac Studio and try again. stopped.
Problem while reading CSV File Error The CSV file could not be loaded. Make sure that the file is not open
for any other application, and then
try again.
Sysmac Studio cannot be started Error A file that is necessary to start the Uninstall the Sysmac Studio and
because one or more system files Sysmac Studio is missing. then install it again.
are missing. Please uninstall the
Sysmac Studio, and then reinstall
it.
The command is not supported by Error The command does not exist.
the controller and device.

11-20 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 11 Troubleshooting

11-4 Error Messages for Sysmac Studio Op-

Error lev-
Error message Cause Correction
el
The comparison processing could Error • The backup file is corrupted. Make sure that the file is correct
not start. • The data that is required for and execute the operation again.
comparison is not in the backup
file.
The content of the archive file is Error The contents of the export file are Specify the correct export file.
invalid. incorrect (format error).

eration
The Controller was not found. Error A node at the specified IP address • Check the remote IP address in
was not found during the Commu- the Communications Setup.
nications Setup test. (A response
was received, but the specified IP 11
address was not found.)
The data of rung No. ££ is cor- Error The rung data was corrupted for Delete the corrupted rung and cre-
rupted. some reason. ate it again.
Delete the rung No. ££ and cre-
ate it again.
The entered value has an error. Error The value that was entered in one You can view the tooltip of any text
or more of the text boxes in the box with an exclamation mark to
current window is out of range. see how to correct the problem.
Follow the instructions to correct
the value as appropriate.
The file format is illegal. Error Refer to the error message.
The name has already been used. Error A data type with that name is al- Use a different name to define the
ready defined. data type.
The operation cannot be executed Error Refer to the error message.
because it is invalid.
The predefined keywords cannot Error This error is displayed when you Do not use reserved words for da-
be used for data type name. attempt to use a reserved word ta types.
(such as IF) for a data type name.
The system file could not be load- Error A file that is necessary to start the Restart the Sysmac Studio.
ed. Please restart Sysmac Studio Sysmac Studio cannot be read.
and then try again.
The target controller includes data Error An attempt was made to connect Use the newest version of the Sys-
not supported by the current ver- to a Controller with an unsupport- mac Studio.
sion of Sysmac Studio. Use the ed unit version.
latest version of Sysmac Studio. An NX Unit that is not supported is Use the newest version of the Sys-
included in the EtherCAT Slave mac Studio.
Terminal configuration information
in the connected Controller.
The target controller includes data Error If Library Data is also displayed, a Use the newest version of the Sys-
of functions that cannot be used in library in the Controller data was mac Studio.
Sysmac Studio. created with a version of Sysmac
Studio that is newer than the ver-
sion that is currently online.
The Controller includes a library Use the newest version of the Sys-
not supported by the current ver- mac Studio.
sion of Sysmac Studio.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) 11-21

11 Troubleshooting

11-22 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 A
Appendices
A

A-1 Driver Installation for Direct USB Cable Connection................................. A-3

A-1-1 Installing the USB Driver ................................................................................. A-3
A-1-2 Installing a Specified USB Driver .................................................................... A-3
A-1-3 Confirmation Procedure after Installation ........................................................ A-5
A-2 Specifying One of Multiple Ethernet Interface Cards ................................ A-7
A-3 Differences between the Simulator and the Physical Controller.............. A-9
A-3-1 Operation of Functions .................................................................................... A-9
A-3-2 Task Execution .............................................................................................. A-12
A-3-3 Task Execution Times.................................................................................... A-15
A-3-4 Floating-point Data Expressions ................................................................... A-16
A-4 Online Help .................................................................................................. A-17
A-4-1 Sysmac Studio Help Contents....................................................................... A-17
A-4-2 Instruction Reference .................................................................................... A-17
A-4-3 Keyboard Mapping Reference....................................................................... A-18
A-4-4 System Defined Variable Reference ............................................................. A-18
A-5 Shortcut Keys .............................................................................................. A-19
A-5-1 Basic Operations ........................................................................................... A-19
A-5-2 Editing Programs........................................................................................... A-20
A-5-3 Searching and Replacing .............................................................................. A-21
A-5-4 Online ............................................................................................................ A-21
A-5-5 Simulation...................................................................................................... A-22
A-5-6 SD Memory Card........................................................................................... A-22
A-5-7 Changing Shortcut Keys................................................................................ A-23
A-6 Simulation Instructions .............................................................................. A-32
A-6-1 Simulate Positive Limit Input Signal Instruction............................................. A-32
A-6-2 Simulate Negative Limit Input Signal Instruction ........................................... A-33
A-6-3 Simulate Home Proximity Signal Instruction ................................................. A-36
A-6-4 Simulate Immediate Stop Input Signal Instruction......................................... A-37
A-6-5 Simulate External Latch Input Signal Instruction........................................... A-38
A-6-6 Simulate Drive Alarm Instruction ................................................................... A-40
A-6-7 Simulate Drive Warning Instruction ............................................................... A-41
A-6-8 Encoder Velocity Input Instruction ................................................................. A-42
A-6-9 Write Actual Position Instruction.................................................................... A-44
A-6-10 Write Actual Velocity Instruction .................................................................... A-46
A-6-11 Write Actual Torque Instruction ..................................................................... A-48
A-6-12 Detailed Information on Error Codes............................................................. A-50
A-7 Directly Connecting to an EtherCAT Slave Terminal ............................... A-53
A-7-1 Procedure for Directly Connecting to an EtherCAT Slave Terminal .............. A-53

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-1

Appendices

A-7-2 Transferring Settings for an EtherCAT Slave Terminal.................................. A-54

A-7-3 Comparing the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration Information ............ A-55
A-7-4 USB Connection Prohibition Setting for EtherCAT Slave Terminals ............. A-55
A-7-5 I/O Wiring Checks for EtherCAT Slave Terminals ......................................... A-56
A-7-6 Differences in Operation from an Online Connection to an NJ/NX/NY-
series Controller ............................................................................................ A-57
A-8 MDP Settings for EtherCAT Network Slaves ............................................ A-58
A-8-1 Installing ESI Files for MDP Slaves............................................................... A-58
A-8-2 Adding MDP Slaves ...................................................................................... A-58
A-8-3 Editing Module Configurations ...................................................................... A-58
A-8-4 Building Module Configurations Online ......................................................... A-59
A-8-5 Setting MDP Slaves and Transferring/Comparing Module Configurations.... A-59
A-8-6 Displaying Production Information................................................................. A-59
A-9 Changing the Sysmac Studio Display Language..................................... A-61
A-9-1 Changing the Display Language ................................................................... A-61
A-10 Changing models among NJ-, NX-, and NY-series Controllers .............. A-62
A-10-1 Changing between NJ-series and NX701 Controllers................................... A-62
A-10-2 Changing between NJ-series and NY-series Controllers .............................. A-64
A-10-3 Changing between NY-series and NX701 Controllers................................... A-66
A-10-4 Changing between NX1P2 and NJ-series Controllers .................................. A-67
A-10-5 Changing between NX1P2 and NX701 Controllers....................................... A-69
A-10-6 Changing between NX1P2 and NY-series Controllers .................................. A-71
A-10-7 Changing between NX102 and NJ-series Controllers................................... A-72
A-10-8 Changing between NX102 and NX701 Controllers ....................................... A-74
A-10-9 Changing between NX102 and NY-series Controllers................................... A-75
A-10-10 Changing between NX102 and NX1P2 Controllers....................................... A-77
A-11 Report Tools ................................................................................................ A-79
A-11-1 Sysmac Controller Log Upload Tool .............................................................. A-79
A-11-2 Sysmac Studio Error Report Generating Tool ............................................... A-80
A-11-3 Sysmac Coupler Log Upload Tool ................................................................. A-82
A-12 Downloading Manuals ................................................................................ A-84
A-12-1 Displaying the Manual Download Site........................................................... A-84

A-2 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-1 Driver Installation for Direct USB Cable Connection

A-1 Driver Installation for Direct USB Ca-
ble Connection
This section describes the procedures when you connect the computer to the USB port on the Control-
ler or the Communications Coupler Unit the first time, assuming that you are using Windows 7.
These procedures assume that the Sysmac Studio is already installed on the computer.

A-1-1 Installing the USB Driver

1 Turn ON the power supply to the Controller or the Communications Coupler Unit and connect
the USB port on the Controller or the Communications Coupler Unit to the computer with a A
USB cable.
The USB driver is installed automatically after you connect the cable.

A-1-1 Installing the USB Driver

Additional Information

You may need to restart Windows after you install the USB driver. Restart Windows as instruct-
ed on the display.

A-1-2 Installing a Specified USB Driver

If you cannot install the USB driver automatically, use the following procedure to specify the driver to
install.

1 Start the Device Manager from the Control Panel and, in Other devices, double-click
Unknown device.
The Unknown device Properties dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the Update Driver Button.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-3

Appendices

The Update Driver Software Dialog Box is displayed.

3 Click Browse my computer for driver software.

A dialog box is displayed to specify the location to browse for driver software.

4 Click the Browse Button and select the USB driver.

You can find the USB driver in the following location:
Folders for the Controller are shown below. For the Communications Coupler Unit, replace
Controller with Coupler.
• Windows 7 32-bit edition, Windows 8 32-bit edition, Windows 8.1 32-bit edition, or Windows
10 32-bit edition
C:\Program Files\OMRON\Communications Middleware\USB\Controller\7\32bit
• Windows 7 64-bit edition, Windows 8 64-bit edition, Windows 8.1 64-bit edition, or Windows
10 64-bit edition
C:\Program Files (x86)\OMRON\Communications Middleware\USB\Controller\7\64bit
Folders for NA5-££W££££-V1 are shown below.
• Windows 7 32-bit edition

A-4 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-1 Driver Installation for Direct USB Cable Connection

C:\Program Files\OMRON\Communications Middleware\USB\NA5-V1\7\32bit
• Windows 8 32-bit edition or Windows 8.1 32-bit edition
C:\Program Files\OMRON\Communications Middleware\USB\NA5-V1\8\32bit
• Windows 10 32-bit edition
C:\Program Files\OMRON\Communications Middleware\USB\NA5-V1\10\32bit
• Windows 7 64-bit edition
C:\Program Files(x86)\OMRON\Communications Middleware\USB\NA5-V1\7\64bit
• Windows 8 64-bit edition or Windows 8.1 64-bit edition
C:\Program Files(x86)\OMRON\Communications Middleware\USB\NA5-V1\8\64bit
• Windows 10 64-bit edition
C:\Program Files(x86)\OMRON\Communications Middleware\USB\NA5-V1\10\64bit

5 Click the Next Button.

The Windows Security Dialog Box is displayed. A

A-1-3 Confirmation Procedure after Installation

6 Click the Install Button.
When installation of the USB driver is completed, the following dialog box is displayed.

A-1-3 Confirmation Procedure after Installation

 Procedure

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-5

Appendices

1 Connect the computer to the Controller with a USB cable.

2 Start the Device Manager on the computer.

3 Click the Modems Icon in the Device Manager and make sure that the following name is dis-
played.
For Controller: OMRON USB DirectLine
For Communications Coupler Unit: OMRON USB AbstractControl

A-6 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-2 Specifying One of Multiple Ethernet Interface Cards

A-2 Specifying One of Multiple Ethernet
Interface Cards
If more than one Ethernet interface card is mounted in the computer that runs the Sysmac Studio, you
must specify the Ethernet interface card that is connected to the NJ/NX/NY-series Controller to con-
nect directly through Ethernet.
The Ethernet interface card is specified when the Sysmac Studio is installed. You can use a special
utility shown below to change the specification after installation.

Specifying the Ethernet Interface Card

A
1 Select All Programs - OMRON - Communications Middleware Utilities - Direct Ethernet
Utility from the Windows Start Menu.
The Direct Ethernet Utility Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the Ethernet interface card to use to connect the NJ/NX/NY-series Controller in the Di-
rect Ethernet Utility Dialog Box.

3 Click the OK Button. The dialog box is closed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-7

Appendices

Precautions for Correct Use

If any other application that uses the same network becomes unable to communicate and there
is no network card to switch, select the Disable the direct Ethernet connection function
Check Box and disable this feature.

Precautions for Correct Use

The settings that you make with the Direct Ethernet Utility are used for Ethernet connections for
other OMRON software as well, not just for the Sysmac Studio. Make sure that you do not unin-
tentionally change the connected Controller when you change the Ethernet interface card.
Examples of other OMRON software: Network Configurator and CX-Integrator

A-8 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-3 Differences between the Simulator and the Physical

A-3 Differences between the Simulator
and the Physical Controller
A-3-1 Operation of Functions
The Simulator has the following functional differences in comparison with the physical Controller.

Item Differences between Simulator and physical Controller

Controller
Tasks Starting You start the Simulator from the Simulation Menu or the Simulation Pane. (You cannot
start it from the Controller Menu.)
Synchronization The data in the Simulator is synchronized when you go online with the Simulator. (There
is no need to perform synchronization after you start the Simulator.)
Exiting You exist the Simulator from the Simulation Menu or the Simulation Pane. (When you A
exist, the online connection is broken and the programs and other data are deleted from
the Simulator.)

A-3-1 Operation of Functions

Scheduling On the Simulator, tasks are executed according to the Windows scheduling policy.
Task priority and timing are ignored, so operation is not necessarily the same as on the
physical Controller. If a simulation is executed in Execution Time Estimate Mode, time-
outs will not occur even for programs that are not completed within the specified timeout
time, i.e., execution of those programs will continue. When execution is completed, a
Task Execution Timeout minor fault will occur. (On the Controller, a timeout will occur,
resulting in a major fault.)
This allows you to check the estimated execution time of a program that does not com-
plete execution within the timeout time.
For details on the differences in the overall operation of tasks and the task execution
times, refer to A-3-2 Task Execution on page A-12 and A-3-3 Task Execution Times on
page A-15 later in this appendix.
In an NX701 Controller, the primary periodic task and priority-5 periodic task are execut-
ed in parallel. On the Simulator, this type of parallel processing is not performed. The
primary periodic task and priority-5 periodic task are executed sequentially.
Clock The time on the Simulator is different from the time in the operating system. The time on
the Simulator is advanced by adding the time required by the control period each time
the primary periodic task is executed.
Temporarily stopping the programs or performing step execution will not affect the exe-
cution of timers or the operation of programs that access the time.
Monitoring The Simulator displays the estimated execution times for operation on the physical Con-
troller, and not the execution times on the computer.
Resetting The Simulator does not provide a reset function. If you restart the Simulator, all POU in-
stances are initialized except for retained variables.
If you want to initialize retained variables, restart the Sysmac Studio.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-9

Appendices

Item Differences between Simulator and physical Controller

Variables Monitoring The Simulator uses non-synchronized operation to read and write data. This creates the
and memo- present values following functional differences in comparison with the physical Controller.
ry • Changes to the present values of variables on the I/O Map are not always possible on
the physical Controller, but they are always possible on the Simulator.
• If program inputs for which forced refreshing is specified are changed in the user pro-
gram, they may flicker on the monitor displays on the Simulator.
Data on the Simu- Variable data is valid only while the Simulator is running. The user program and all other
lator data in the Simulator are cleared when you exist the Simulator.
Retain attribute If you stop a simulation on the Simulator and then perform any of the following opera-
tions, the values of retained variables are initialized when the simulation is started
again.
• Change the project.
• Change the model or unit version.
• Edit the configurations, setups, or programs.
However, if you start the simulation again without editing the configurations, setups, or
programs, the values of retained variables are retained regardless of the operating
mode when you start the simulation.
Clear All Memory This function is not supported by the Simulator. (Exit the Simulator and then go online
with the Simulator again to clear memory.)
Debugging Using the debug- You can use debugger functions, such as step execution and breakpoints, on the Simu-
ger lator.
Changing the exe- You can change the apparent program execution times on the Simulator. (You change
cution speed the program execution interval on the computer to change the apparent execution
speed.)
Time passage on the Simulator is not affected by changes in the execution speed.
Debug programs You can load and execute programs that are set as debug programs only on the Simula-
tor. (You cannot load debug programs on the physical Controller.)
Partial execution On the Simulator, you can specify to execute only the selected programs. (This is not
of user program possible on the physical Controller.)
Motion Axis control If a Servo axis is specified on the Simulator, Servo operation is emulated.
control If an encoder axis is specified, you can control the axis with the Simulator instructions.
Position and ve- On the Simulator, command values for the axes are used directly as the actual positions
locity control and actual velocities.
Torque control The Simulator does not have mechanical machine information and cannot calculate ve-
locities for torque control. A velocity of 0 is used as the actual velocity.
Touch probe func- With the Simulator, you can use Simulator instructions in the debug program to generate
tion external triggers.
On the Simulator, the Z phase is generated once for each 2,048 pulses that are input.
MC Test Run You cannot perform an MC Test Run when connected to the Simulator.
Cam data The cam data file transfer commands to transfer cam data from the Controller to files or
from files to the Controller are not supported on the Simulator.
Networks Setting communi- Network communications are not performed by the Simulator, so communications ad-
cations addresses dress settings are ignored.
Routing tables Network communications are not performed by the Simulator, so routing table settings
are ignored.
CJ-series Unit configuration The Simulator uses registered I/O directly as real I/O.
Unit First addresses The Simulator ignores the first address settings for slots.
manage- for slots
ment CJ-series Unit set- CJ-series Unit emulation is not performed by the Simulator, so CJ-series Unit settings
tings are ignored.

A-10 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-3 Differences between the Simulator and the Physical

Item Differences between Simulator and physical Controller
Instruc- Communications The Simulator will normally process signal outputs for communications instructions, but
tions instructions it will not execute actual communications for the instructions.
If you execute a serial communications instruction (ExecPMCR, SendCmd, SerialRcv,
or SerialSend), an error (error ID: 0415) is output.
EtherNet/IP com- The Simulator will normally complete the signal output processing for the FTP client
munications in- communications instructions (FTPGetFileList, FTPGetFile, FTPPutFile, FTPRemove-
structions File, and FTPRemoveDir), but it will not execute FTP command processing for these in-
structions.
EtherCAT commu- The Simulator will not operate correctly for the following instructions.

Controller
nications instruc- • EC_StopMon
tions The instruction is processed normally, but the _EC_PktMonStop external variable re-
mains FALSE.
• EC_SaveMon
The instruction is processed normally, but the _EC_PktSaving external variable remains
FALSE.
A
• EC_CopyMon
Even if the file that is specified in the instruction exists, a File Does Not Exist error (error

A-3-1 Operation of Functions

ID: 1403) is output and the instruction ends in an error.
SD Memory Card You can use the SD Memory Card instructions on the Simulator in the same way as you
instructions can on the physical Controller.
The Simulator uses "c:\OMRON\Data\SimulatorData\CARD\Memory001" as a Virtual
SD Memory Card.
However, for the BackupToMemoryCard instruction, signal output processing for the in-
struction is completed normally, but the backup files are not created in the Virtual SD
Memory Card.
Real data and You can use the instructions on the Simulator in the same way as you can on the physi-
conversion in- cal Controller.
structions Rounding error for calculations on the Simulator may produce somewhat different calcu-
lation results.
Expressions for infinity and nonnumeric data are sometimes different for the results of
the Natural Exponential Operation (EXP) instruction or calculation results on the Simula-
tor.
For details, refer to Expressions for Infinity and Nonnumeric Data in Real Number-to-
Text String Conversion Instructions on page A-16 later in this appendix.
Clock instructions The Simulator will normally complete signal output processing for clock and time instruc-
tions, but it will not execute time change processing for the instructions.
Mainte- ID information The Simulator does not have production information (i.e., ID information, such as lot
nance numbers).
Programming by It is assumed that the Simulator is used on one computer by a single programmer. (It is
multiple pro- not possible for more than one programmer to connect to the same Simulator at the
grammers same time.)
Clock information The time that is read from the computer when the Simulator is started is incremented
each time the primary periodic task is executed to generate a virtual clock.
SD Memory Cards You cannot use Memory Cards with the Simulator.
Backing up varia- You cannot back up variables and memory with the Simulator.
bles and memory
Peripheral devices You cannot connect peripheral devices when connected to the Simulator.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-11

Appendices

A-3-2 Task Execution

This section describes the differences in the control methods that are used for task execution between
the physical Controller and the Simulator.

NX701 Controller

 Physical Controller
An NX701 Controller gives the highest priority to execution of the primary periodic task. Tasks other
than the primary periodic task are executed preferentially in order of the execution priority.
The priority-5 periodic task is executed in parallel with the primary periodic task. The priority-16 pe-
riodic task is executed after execution of the primary periodic task is completed.

Task execution condition is met.

Execution Primary period
priority

IO
UPG
MC
IO
UPG
MC

IO
UPG
MC

IO
UPG
MC

IO
UPG
MC
High Primary
periodic task

Task period
MC

MC

MC
Priority-5 IO UPG IO UPG IO UPG
periodic task

Priority-8 UPG
event task

Task period

Priority-16 UPG UPG

periodic task
Execution of event
task started.
Task period

Priority-17 UPG
Low periodic task

IO: Indicates I/O refreshing (data outputs and then data inputs).
UPG: Indicates user program execution.
MC: Indicates motion control.

A-12 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-3 Differences between the Simulator and the Physical

 Simulator
The NX701 Controller Simulator executes the primary periodic task according to the scheduling pe-
riod determined by the scheduler in the Simulator.
Periodic tasks other than the primary periodic task are executed in order of the execution priority.
The priority-5 periodic task is not executed in parallel with the primary periodic task. This differs
from the physical Controller.
The periods of periodic tasks other than the primary periodic task are integral multiples of the
scheduling period of the Simulator.

Task execution condition is met.

Controller
Execution Scheduling period of Simulator
priority
UPG
MC

UPG
MC

UPG
MC
High Primary
periodic task
A
Task period
UPG
MC

UPG
MC
Priority-5

A-3-2 Task Execution

periodic task
UPG

Priority-8
event task

Task period
UPG

Priority-16
periodic task
Execution of event
task started.
Task period

Priority-17 UPG
Low periodic task

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-13

Appendices

NJ/NY-series Controllers and NX102 or NX1P2 Controllers

 Physical Controller
For the NJ/NY-series Controllers and NX102 or NX1P2 Controllers, the tasks are activated every
primary period. The execution of a periodic task with a lower priority is interrupted to execute a task
with a higher priority (such as the primary periodic task).
An example for an NJ-series Controller is given below.

Task execution condition is met.

Execution
Primary period
priority IO
UPG
MC
IO
UPG
MC

IO
UPG
MC

IO
UPG
MC

IO
UPG
MC
High Primary
periodic task
Task period
IO

UPG

UPG
IO
Priority-16
periodic task

Task period
UPG

Priority-17
Low periodic task

IO: Indicates I/O refreshing (data outputs and then data inputs).
UPG: Indicates user program execution.
MC: Indicates motion control.

 Simulator
For the NJ/NY-series Controller and NX102 or NX1P2 Controller Simulator, tasks are executed ac-
cording to the scheduling policies of the Simulator. Execution of the user program cannot be inter-
rupted like it is in the physical Controller.
An example for an NJ-series Controller is given below.

Task execution condition is met. Time stepping (primary period added)

Execution + Scheduling period of Simulator
Scheduling period of Simulator
priority
UPG
MC

UPG
MC

UPG
MC

High Primary
periodic task

Task period
UPG

UPG

Priority-16
periodic task
Task period

Priority-17 UPG
Low periodic task

Other
applications

A-14 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-3 Differences between the Simulator and the Physical

Differences in Task Execution
The differences in the control methods may cause the following differences in operation.
1. Differences in the Timing of Data Exchanges
The end timing of the periodic tasks and the execution order of the tasks are not reproduced pre-
cisely. Therefore, the data exchanges between tasks and the timing of obtaining data trace data
may be different from the Controller.
2. Differences in Timing of Updating the Time
The clock time in the Simulator is updated by adding the time of the primary period when the exe-

Controller
cution of all tasks in that period is completed. If you access the clock time from a program, the op-
eration may be different.
Timer instructions are also evaluated at the same time, so the timers may time out at different
times. A
3. Differences in Operation When Task Execution Times Out
If a simulation is executed in Execution Time Estimation Mode and the execution time is used to

A-3-3 Task Execution Times

execute a long task, the other tasks are not executed until the execution of the long task is com-
pleted. Also, when task processing is completed, a Task Execution Timeout minor fault will occur.
On the Controller, a major fault occurs after a timeout, and operation stops.

A-3-3 Task Execution Times

The Simulator estimates*1 and displays the execution times on the Controller. It displays the results of
desktop calculations as the results of the simulation. (Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software
User's Manual (Cat. No. W501).)
*1. This estimation is not possible on an NY-series Controller.

• I/O Refresh Processing Time

For the NJ/NX-series Controller, the I/O refresh processing time is calculated based on the common
processing time and I/O refresh processing time that are described in A-2 Calculating Guidelines for
the Real Processing Times of Tasks for the NX-series System or A-3 Calculating Guidelines for the
Real Processing Times of Tasks for the NJ-series System in the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Software
User's Manual (Cat. No. W501).
Parameters for each version are given in the above manual.
• Processing Times for the User Program (UPG) and Motion Programs (MCE)
These processing times are estimated with the "calibrated execution time estimation" method (Japa-
nese patent number 4748286).
It is assumed that the estimated value of a task execution time will follow a normal distribution, and
estimates are made at the 95% confidence level.

Additional Information

More processing time may be required depending on other applications running on the comput-
er. Do not run any unnecessary applications while the Simulator is running.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-15

Appendices

A-3-4 Floating-point Data Expressions

Expressions for Infinity and Nonnumeric Data in Real Number-to-

Text String Conversion Instructions
The output results for instructions that convert real data to text strings may be different between the
Controller and Simulator.

Expression on the Controller Expression on the Simulator

Positive infinity inf 1.#INF00e+000
1.#INF0000000000e+000
Negative infinity -inf −1.#INF00e+000
−1.#INF0000000000e+000
Positive nonnumeric data nan 1.#QNAN0e+000
1.#QNAN000000000e+000
Negative nonnumeric data -nan −1.#IND00e+000
−1.#IND0000000000e+000

Note The number of "zeros" after INF, QNAN, IND will vary.

Exponents
Either two or three digits are given for exponents on the physical Controller. However, you must al-
ways give three digits for exponents on the Simulator. When you compare text strings, make sure that
the comparison data has the same number of digits.

A-16 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-4 Online Help

Online Help
You can access online help from a Sysmac Studio menu to see instruction descriptions or to check
shortcut keys. There are four types of help.

A-4 Online Help

• Sysmac Studio help: Contents
• Instruction Reference
• Keyboard Mapping Reference
• System-defined Variable Reference

A-4-1 Sysmac Studio Help Contents A

A-4-1 Sysmac Studio Help Contents

Sysmac Studio Help Contents
This help feature provides operating procedures for the Sysmac Studio.

A-4-2 Instruction Reference

Instruction Reference
The Instructions Reference describes the basic instructions and motion control instructions that you
can use with an NJ/NX/NY-series Controller. For each instruction, the same description as the one in
the following manuals is given.
NJ/NX-series Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W502)
NJ/NX-series Motion Control Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W508)
NY-series Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W560)
NY-series Motion Control Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W561)

 Displaying the Instructions Reference

There are two ways to display the Instructions Reference.
Method (1) From the main menus
Method (2) From the Ladder Editor, ST Editor, or Instruction Navigator

Method (1) From the main menus

Select Instruction Reference from the Help Menu.
The Sysmac Studio Instruction Reference Help is displayed.

Method (2) Displaying the Instructions Reference from the Ladder Editor or ST Editor
In the Ladder Editor or ST Editor, select an instruction that was previously entered or select an
instruction in the Instruction Navigator in the Toolbox, and then press the F1 Key.
The Sysmac Studio Instruction Reference Help is displayed for the selected instruction.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-17

Appendices

A-4-3 Keyboard Mapping Reference

Keyboard Mapping Reference

You can display a list of convenient shortcut keys that you can use on the Sysmac Studio.

 Displaying the Keyboard Mapping Reference

Select Keyboard Mapping Reference from the Help Menu.
The Keyboard Mapping Reference is displayed.
Refer to A-5 Shortcut Keys on page A-19 for details.

A-4-4 System Defined Variable Reference

System Defined Variable Reference

You can display a list of descriptions of the system-defined variables that you can use on the Sysmac
Studio.

 Procedure to Display the System Defined Variable Reference

Select System Defined Variable Reference from the Help Menu.
Tables of the system-defined variables are displayed.

A-18 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-5 Shortcut Keys

The following tables list the shortcut keys that you can use in the Main Window of the Sysmac Studio.
You can change the keyboard mapping of some shortcut keys.

A-5-1 Basic Operations

A-5 Shortcut Keys

Default key/shortcut key
Operation Menu command
setting
Displaying help information F1 Help − Help Contents
Inserting Insert None
Deleting Delete Edit − Delete
Moving the cursor up one cell ↑ None A
Moving the cursor down one cell ↓ None
Moving the cursor right one cell → None

A-5-1 Basic Operations

Moving the cursor left one cell ← None
Moving the cursor to the beginning of the Home None
row
Moving the cursor to the end of the row End None
Placing the cursor in Edit Mode F2 None
Confirming Edit Mode Enter None
Moving the cursor to and from the menus Alt None
Moving the cursor to the next category Tab None
Moving the cursor to the previous category Shift + Tab None
Moving the cursor to the next lower level at → None
an expanded item
Expanding the lower level at a collapsed → None
item
Collapsing the lower level at an expanded ← None
item
Moving the cursor to the next higher level at ← None
a collapsed item
Displaying/hiding the Output Tab Page Alt + 3 View − Output Tab Page
Displaying the Watch Tab Page Alt + 4 View − Watch Tab Page
Displaying/hiding the Cross Reference Alt + 5 View − Cross Reference Tab Page
Tab Page
Displaying/hiding the Build Tab Page Alt + 6 View − Build Tab Page
Displaying/hiding the Search and Replace Alt + 7 View − Search and Replace Results Tab
Results Tab Page Page
Opening the Simulation Pane Alt + 8 View − Simulation Pane
Displaying the Differential Monitor Tab Page Alt + 9 View − Differential Monitor
Displaying the Smart Project Search Dialog Ctrl + Shift + F View − Smart Project Search
Box
Displaying a thumbnail index of recently Ctrl + Shift + H View − Recently Closed Windows
closed windows
Jumping to the Multiview Explorer Shift + Alt + L Edit − Jump to Multiview Explorer
Enlarging the display Alt + → View − Zoom − Zoom In
Reducing the display Alt + ← View − Zoom − Zoom Out

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-19

Appendices

Default key/shortcut key

Operation Menu command
setting
Zooming the display to fit the window width Alt + ↑ View − Zoom
− Zoom to Fit
Restoring the default zoom setting Alt + ↓ View − Zoom − Zoom Reset
Moving to the next page PageDown None
Moving to previous page PageUp None
Selecting a menu command Alt + First underlined letter of None
the command
Saving a project Ctrl + S File − Save
Printing Ctrl + P File − Print
Undoing Ctrl + Z Edit − Undo
Redoing Ctrl + Y Edit − Redo
Cutting Ctrl + X Edit − Cut
Copying Ctrl + C Edit − Copy
Pasting Ctrl + V Edit − Paste
Selecting everything Ctrl + A Edit − Select All
Deleting to the left of the cursor BackSpace None
Inverting an input or output to a NOT input / None
or NOT output
Copying with dependents Ctrl + Shift + C None
Deleting a global variable (including exter- Ctrl + Shift + Delete None
nal variable)

A-5-2 Editing Programs

Default key/shortcut key
Operation Menu command
setting
Showing/hiding variable tables Ctrl + Shift + V View − Variable Table
Inserting a line below the cursor R None
Inserting a line above the cursor Shift + R None
Entering an N.O. input C None
Entering an N.C. input / None
Entering an OR with an N.O. input W None
Entering an OR with an N.C. input X None
Entering an output O None
Entering a NOT output Q None
Setting upward differentiation for an input Ctrl + Shift + U or @ None
Setting downward differentiation for an in- Ctrl + Shift + D or % None
put
Calling a function block F None
Calling a function I None
Calling inline ST S None
Displaying the contents of a user-defined Ctrl + Shift + L None
function or function block
Restoring the previous display from a user- Ctrl + Shift + P None
defined function or function block
Editing variable comments Ctrl + Enter None

A-20 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

Default key/shortcut key

Operation Menu command
setting
Jumping from the Ladder or ST Editor to a Ctrl + Alt + J None
variable table
Adding new members in the Data Type Edi- Ctrl + I None
tor
Checking all programs F7 Project − Check All Programs
Checking the selected programs Shift + F7 Project − Check Selected Programs

A-5 Shortcut Keys

Building the project file F8 Project − Build
Aborting building Shift + F8 Project − Abort Build
Show Tooltip Shift + T None
Enter Element Comment Alt + Enter None

A-5-3 Searching and Replacing A

Default key/shortcut key
Operation Menu command

A-5-3 Searching and Replacing

setting
Searching and replacing Ctrl + F Edit − Search and Replace
Next Variable N None
Previous Variable B None
Next Input Ctrl + Shift + I None
Next Output Ctrl + Shift + O None
Retrace Search Space None
Specified Rung G Edit − Jump
Specified Comment L None
Search Next Alt + N, or F3 None
Search Previous Shift + F3 None

A-5-4 Online
Default key/shortcut key
Operation Menu command
setting
Going online Ctrl + W Controller − Online
Going offline Ctrl + Shift + W Controller − Offline
Changing to PROGRAM mode Ctrl + 1 Controller − Mode
− PROGRAM
Changing to RUN mode Ctrl + 3 Controller − Mode
− RUN
Synchronizing Ctrl + M Controller − Synchronization
Transferring Controller data from computer Ctrl + T Controller − Transfer − To Controller
to Controller
Transferring Controller data from Controller Ctrl + Shift + T Controller − Transfer − From Controller
to computer
Changing the selected program input or Ctrl + Shift + J Controller − Set/Reset
output to TRUE − Set
Changing the selected program input or Ctrl + Shift + K Controller − Set/Reset
output to FALSE − Reset
Forcing a selected input or output to TRUE Ctrl + J Controller − Forced Refreshing − TRUE
Forcing a selected input or output to FALSE Ctrl + K Controller − Forced Refreshing − FALSE

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-21

Appendices

Default key/shortcut key

Operation Menu command
setting
Canceling a selected input or output that Ctrl + L Controller − Forced Refreshing − Cancel
was forced to TRUE or FALSE
Starting online editing Ctrl + E Project − Online Edit − Start
Transferring changes made during online Ctrl + Shift + E Project − Online Edit − Transfer
editing
Canceling online editing Ctrl + U Project − Online Edit − Cancel
Jumping to the current online Edit Pane Ctrl + Shift + G Project − Online Edit − Go to Edit Pane

A-5-5 Simulation
Default key/shortcut key
Operation Menu command
setting
Executing a simulation F5 Simulation − Run
Pausing Ctrl + Alt + Break Simulation − Pause
Stopping Shift + F5 Simulation − Stop
Stepping in F11 Simulation − Step In
Step execution F10 Simulation − Step Execution
Stepping out Shift + F11 Simulation − Step Out
Displaying the Breakpoint Window Alt + F9 Simulation − Breakpoint Window
Setting/clearing a breakpoint at the cursor F9 Simulation − Set/Clear Breakpoints
position
Clearing all breakpoints Ctrl + Shift + F9 Simulation − Clear All Breakpoints

A-5-6 SD Memory Card

Default key/shortcut key
Operation Menu command
setting
Going back Alt + ← None
Going forward Alt + → None
Moving up Backspace None
Refreshing F5 None
Displaying properties Alt + Enter None
Formatting Ctrl + Alt + A None
Deleting Delete None
Copying Ctrl + C None
Pasting Ctrl + V None
Creating a folder Ctrl + Alt + F None
Renaming F2 None
Ending Alt + F4 None

A-22 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-5-7 Changing Shortcut Keys

You can change the assignment of some shortcut keys for the following functions (commands).
• Main menu commands
• Commands supported in the Edit window (Ladder Editor)
You can assign shortcut keys in the Shortcut Key Customization Dialog Box.

A-5 Shortcut Keys

Displaying the Shortcut Key Customization Dialog Box
Select Customize Shortcut Keys from the Tools Menu. The Shortcut Key Customization Dialog
Box is displayed.

(a)
A
(b)

A-5-7 Changing Shortcut Keys

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l)

Displayed item Description

(a) Setting Target Dropdown Select the target device for which to set shortcut keys from the device categories
List included in the current project.
(b) Restore Default Settings Use this button to restore the default settings for the target device selected from the
Button Setting Target Drop-down List.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-23

Appendices

Displayed item Description

(c) Command List This shows a list of commands and shortcut keys assigned to the commands for the
device selected in the Setting Target Drop-down List. From this list, select the com-
mand for which to change the shortcut key.
Command column: Main menu commands and commands supported in the Edit
window are displayed.
ShortcutKey column: Currently assigned shortcut keys are displayed. For com-
mands whose shortcut key settings cannot be changed, shortcut keys are displayed
on a gray background.
For commands whose shortcut key settings have been changed from the default,
commands and shortcut keys are shown in purple.
(d) Remove Shortcut Keys Use this button to remove the shortcut key that is assigned to the command select-
Button ed in the Command List.
(e) Restore Shortcut Keys Use this button to restore the default setting for the command selected in the Com-
Button mand List.
(f) Enter a New Shortcut Key Enter the keys to assign. When you press a key, a text string that represents the
Box pressed key is entered in this box. To clear the entry, press the Delete or Back-
Space Key.
Example: When you press the Ctrl Key, Ctrl+ is displayed.
(g) Assign Button Use this button to assign the shortcut key that is entered in the Enter a New
Shortcut Key Box to the command selected in the Command List.
(h) Command Currently This shows a list of commands to which you assigned shortcut keys, by entering in
Assigned display area a text string the Enter a New Shortcut Key Box. Here, you can check for com-
mands with duplicate shortcut key assignment.
Double-clicking a command in the display area causes the corresponding command
to be selected in the Command List.
(i) Import Button Use this button to import shortcut key assignment settings from a file.
(j) Export Button Use this button to save shortcut key assignment settings to a file.
(k) OK Button Use this button to save the current changes to the shortcut key settings and close
the dialog box.
(l) Cancel Button Use this button to discard the current changes to the shortcut key settings and
close the dialog box.

Assigning Shortcut Keys

Use the following procedure to assign shortcut keys.
Here, you assign the shortcut key Ctrl + W to the Window - Close command for the Controller, as an
example.

1 In the Setting Target Drop-down List of the Shortcut Key Customization Dialog Box, select
the device for which to set the shortcut key. In this example, select Controller.
The current shortcut key settings are displayed in the Command List.

A-24 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-5 Shortcut Keys

A

A-5-7 Changing Shortcut Keys

2 Select the command to which to assign the shortcut key and click the Enter a New Shortcut
Key Box. In this example, select Close under Main menu - Window.

3 Press the keys to assign as the shortcut key. In this example, press the Ctrl Key and then
press the W Key.
Ctrl + W is now displayed in the Enter a New Shortcut Key Box.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-25

Appendices

If the shortcut key that you enter in the Enter a New Shortcut Key Box has already been as-
signed to another command, the command will be displayed in the Command Currently
Assigned display area.

4 Click the Assign Button.

If the shortcut key has not been assigned to any command, the shortcut key assignment for the
command is changed and the change is reflected on the Command List.
If the shortcut key has already been assigned to another command, a confirmation dialog box
is displayed, which asks whether to cancel the current assignment and assign the shortcut key
to the new command.
In this example, a confirmation dialog box is displayed because the shortcut key Ctrl+W has
been assigned to Online: Main menu - Controller.
Click the OK Button to remove the current assignment and assign the shortcut key to the new
command.

A-26 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

Additional Information

• More than one shortcut key can be assigned to one command.

• Different commands in main menus or in the Edit window cannot have the same shortcut key
assigned at the same time. However, commands in main menus and commands in the Edit
window can have the same shortcut key assigned.
• Changing the default shortcut key is not possible for some commands. Refer to Commands
Whose Shortcut Key Assignment Cannot Be Changed on page A-31 for details.
• Some shortcut keys can only be assigned to specific commands. You cannot assign them to

A-5 Shortcut Keys

other commands. Refer to Reserved Shortcut Keys on page A-29 for details.
• To restore the default setting after you change the assignment of a shortcut key, select the
command and click the Restore Shortcut Keys Button.
• To restore all of the default shortcut key settings for the target device selected from the
Setting Target Drop-down List, click the Restore Default Settings Button.
• The shortcut key assignment settings are stored for each user who logs onto the computer.

A
Available Shortcut Keys

A-5-7 Changing Shortcut Keys

This section shows a list of keys that can be used as shortcut keys, shortcut keys that can be as-
signed to main menu commands, and shortcut keys that can be assigned to Ladder Editor commands.
It also shows a list of reserved shortcut keys which you cannot assign as shortcut keys.

 Keys That Can Be Used as Shortcut Keys

The table below shows a list of keys that can be used as shortcut keys. You can use a combination
of modifier keys and other keys to compose a shortcut key.

Display in Enter a New Shortcut

Classification Available keys
Key Box
Character Alphabetic A to Z A to Z (Uppercase)
keys letters
Numbers 0 to 9 0 to 9
Space Space Space
Keyboard- Depending on keyboard layout of the As entered by key
layout de- computer
pendent
Example of available keyboard-layout de-
characters
pendent characters
• Japanese keyboard layout:
\-[],./;:^@
• English keyboard layout:
\-[],./;='`
• Italian keyboard layout:
\'ìè+òàù,.-
Numeric Numbers 0 to 9 0 to 9
keys Operators /* -+ /*-+
Decimal . .
point
Enter Enter Enter

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-27

Appendices

Display in Enter a New Shortcut

Classification Available keys
Key Box
Navigation keys → Right
← Left
↑ Up
↓ Down
Page Up PageUp
Page Down PageDown
Home Home
End End
Tab Tab
Function keys F1 to F24 F1 to F24
Enter key Enter Enter
Pause/Break key Pause/Break Break
Modifier keys Ctrl Ctrl
Alt Alt
Shift Shift

 Shortcut Keys That Can Be Assigned to Main Menu Commands

Among the shortcut keys listed in the Keys That Can Be Used as Shortcut Keys on page A-27, you
can use the following single keys and combinations keys excluding the reserved shortcut keys (see
Reserved Shortcut Keys on page A-29).

Classification of keys Shortcut key that can be assigned

Single keys Function keys
Combination keys Combination with only Shift Key Function keys
Combination with Ctrl and Alt Keys Non-modifier keys that can be used

 Combination of Shortcut Keys That Can Be Used in the Ladder Editor

Among the shortcut keys listed in the Keys That Can Be Used as Shortcut Keys on page A-27, you
can use the following single keys and combinations keys excluding the reserved shortcut keys (see
Reserved Shortcut Keys on page A-29).

Classification of keys Shortcut key that can be assigned

Single keys Character keys Alphabetic letters
Space
Keyboard-layout dependent characters
Numeric keys Operators
Decimal point
Enter
Function keys
Enter key

A-28 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

Classification of keys Shortcut key that can be assigned

Combination keys Combination with only Character keys Alphabetic letters
Shift Key Space
Keyboard-layout depend-
ent characters
Numeric keys Operators
Decimal point

A-5 Shortcut Keys

Enter
Function keys
Enter key
Combination with Ctrl Non-modifier keys that can be used
and Alt Keys

 Reserved Shortcut Keys A

The following shortcut keys are reserved for use by the Sysmac Studio. You cannot assign them to
other commands.

A-5-7 Changing Shortcut Keys

Shortcut key Command
F1 Displaying help informa-
tion
F2 Entering Edit Mode
Ctrl + Tab Switching windows
Ctrl + Shift + Tab
Alt + F7
Alt + Shift + F7
Ctrl + Home Moving to the beginning
Ctrl + End Moving to the end
Shift + Right Selecting an area
Shift + Left
Shift + Up
Shift + Down
Shift + Home
Shift + End
Shift + Page Up
Shift + Page Down
Ctrl + Shift + Right
Ctrl + Shift + Left
Ctrl + Shift + Up
Ctrl + Shift + Down
Ctrl + Shift + Home
Ctrl + Shift + End

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-29

Appendices

Removing Shortcut Keys

Use the following procedure to remove the shortcut keys that are assigned to a command.

1 Select the command for which to remove the shortcut key and click the Remove Shortcut
Keys Button.
The shortcut key assigned to the command is removed.
If the command has more than one shortcut key assigned, the Remove Shortcut Keys Dialog
Box is displayed.

2 Select the shortcut key to remove from the shortcut key list, click the Remove Button, and then
click the OK button.
The selected shortcut key is removed from the Command List.

Exporting/Importing Shortcut Keys

You can export/import shortcut key assignment settings after a change to/from an external file.

 Export
The export procedure is described below.

1 In the Shortcut Key Customization Dialog Box, click the Export Button.
The dialog box to specify the export destination is displayed.

2 Select the export destination folder and click the Save Button.
The current shortcut key assignment settings are saved in the file.

 Import
The import procedure is described below.

1 In the Shortcut Key Customization Dialog Box, click the Import Button.
The dialog box to select the file to import is displayed.

2 Select the file from which to import shortcut key settings, and then click the Open Button.
The shortcut key settings are imported.

A-30 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

Commands Whose Shortcut Key Assignment Cannot Be Changed

For the following commands, you cannot change shortcut key assignment.

Menu Shortcut key

Edit Undo Ctrl + Z
Redo Ctrl + Y

A-5 Shortcut Keys

Cut Ctrl + X
Copy Ctrl + C
Paste Ctrl + V
Delete Delete
Select All Ctrl + A
View Zoom In Alt + Right
Zoom Out Alt + Left A
Zoom to Fit Alt + Up
Zoom Reset Alt + Down

A-5-7 Changing Shortcut Keys

Window Open Next Tab Ctrl + F6
Open Previous Tab Ctrl + Shift + F6

If Controller is selected from the Setting Target Drop-down List, you cannot change the following
shortcut key assignment as well.

Menu Shortcut key

Insert Circuit Parts Line ---
N.O. Input ---
N.C. Input ---
OR with N.O. Input ---
OR with N.C. Input ---
Output ---
NOT Output ---
Function ---
Function Block ---

Ladder Editor Shortcut key

Edit/Insert Start Edit Enter
F2
To Upper Layer Ctrl + Shift + P
To Lower Layer Ctrl + Shift + L
Edit Data Type ---
Go To Variable Table Ctrl + Alt + J
Bookmarks Toggle Bookmark ---
Next Bookmark ---
Previous Bookmark ---
Clear All Bookmarks ---
Fixed Target Cross Ref. ---
Edit Connect Line Move Line Connection Point Above Ctrl + UP
Move Line Connection Point Below Ctrl + Down
Move Line Connection Right Ctrl + Right
Move Line Connection Left Ctrl + Left

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-31

Appendices

A-6 Simulation Instructions

To simulate motion control instructions, you must create virtual external signals, such as the home
proximity input signal and limit input signals.
Use the simulation instructions to create virtual external signals.
• Simulate Positive Limit Input Signal Instruction
• Simulate Negative Limit Input Signal Instruction
• Simulate Home Proximity Signal Instruction
• Simulate Immediate Stop Input Signal Instruction
• Simulate External Latch Input Signal Instruction
• Simulate Drive Alarm Instruction
• Simulate Drive Warning Instruction
• Encoder Velocity Input Instruction
• Write Actual Position Instruction
• Write Actual Velocity Instruction
• Write Actual Torque Instruction

Precautions for Correct Use

You cannot use simulation instructions inside event tasks.

A-6-1 Simulate Positive Limit Input Signal Instruction

This instruction creates a virtual positive limit input signal.
This instruction can be used only when a Servo axis is set.

FB/
Instruction Name Graphic expression ST expression
FUN
SIM_SigPosLmt Simulate FB SIM_SigPosLmt_instance SIM_SigPosLmt_instance (
Positive SIM_SigPosLmt Axis :=Parameter,
Limit Input Axis Axis Enable :=Parameter,
Signal Enable Status Status =>Parameter,
Busy
Busy =>Parameter,
Error
ErrorID
Error =>Parameter,
ErrorID =>Parameter
);

Variables

 Input Variables
Name Meaning Data type Valid range Default Description
Enable Enable BOOL TRUE or FALSE The positive limit input signal turns ON when
FALSE Enable changes to TRUE.

A-32 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

 Output Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Status Input signal ON BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the input signal is ON.
FALSE

A-6 Simulation Instructions

Busy Executing BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the instruction is acknowledged.
FALSE
Error Error BOOL TRUE or TRUE while there is an error.
FALSE
ErrorID Error code WORD --- Contains the error code when an error occurs.
A value of 16#0000 indicates normal execution.

 In-Out Variables
Valid A
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Axis Axis _sAXIS_REF --- Specifies the axis.*1

A-6-2 Simulate Negative Limit Input Signal Instruction

*1. Specify an Axis Variable that was created in the Axis Basic Settings of the Sysmac Studio (The default axis variable
names are MC_Axis***.) or a user-defined variable that specifies the address of an Axis Variable.

Function
• When Enable changes to TRUE, a virtual positive limit input signal is created for the axis specified
by Axis.
• When Enable changes to FALSE, the positive limit input signal turns OFF for the axis specified by
Axis.

Precautions for Correct Use

This instruction must be used only for simulation. Use it only in debug programs. If you use it in
a normal program, it is not executed on the physical CPU Unit, but it creates a virtual input sig-
nal. Debug programs cannot be executed on the physical CPU Unit.

Errors
An error occurs if there is no slave for the axis specified by Axis. The error code (0406 hex) is output
to ErrorID.
Refer to A-6-12 Detailed Information on Error Codes on page A-50 later in this manual for information
on error codes.

A-6-2 Simulate Negative Limit Input Signal Instruction

This instruction creates a virtual negative limit input signal.
This instruction can be used only when a Servo axis is set.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-33

Appendices

FB/
Instruction Name Graphic expression ST expression
FUN
SIM_SigNegLmt Negative FB SIM_SigNegLmt_instance SIM_SigNegLmt_instance (
Limit Input SIM_SigNegLmt Axis :=Parameter,
Signal Axis Axis Enable :=Parameter,
Enable Status Status =>Parameter,
Busy
Busy =>Parameter,
Error
ErrorID
Error =>Parameter,
ErrorID =>Parameter
);

Variables

 Input Variables
Name Meaning Data type Valid range Default Description
Enable Enable BOOL TRUE or FALSE The negative limit input signal turns ON
FALSE when Enable changes to TRUE.

 Output Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Status Input signal ON BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the input signal is ON.
FALSE
Busy Executing BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the instruction is acknowledged.
FALSE
Error Error BOOL TRUE or TRUE while there is an error.
FALSE
ErrorID Error code WORD --- Contains the error code when an error occurs.
A value of 16#0000 indicates normal execution.

 In-Out Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Axis Axis _sAXIS_REF --- Specifies the axis.*1
*1. Specify an Axis Variable that was created in the Axis Basic Settings of the Sysmac Studio (The default axis variable
names are MC_Axis***.) or a user-defined variable that specifies the address of an Axis Variable.

Function
• When Enable changes to TRUE, a virtual negative limit input signal is created for the axis specified
by Axis.
• When Enable changes to FALSE, the negative limit input signal turns OFF for the axis specified by
Axis.

A-34 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

Precautions for Correct Use

This instruction must be used only for simulation. Use it only in debug programs. If you use it in
a normal program, it is not executed on the physical CPU Unit, but it creates a virtual input
signal. Debug programs cannot be executed on the physical CPU Unit.

A-6 Simulation Instructions

Errors
An error occurs if there is no slave for the axis specified by Axis. The error code (0406 hex) is output
to ErrorID.
Refer to A-6-12 Detailed Information on Error Codes on page A-50 later in this manual for information
on error codes.

A-6-2 Simulate Negative Limit Input Signal Instruction

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-35

Appendices

A-6-3 Simulate Home Proximity Signal Instruction

This instruction creates a virtual home proximity signal.
This instruction can be used only when a Servo axis is set.

FB/
Instruction Name Graphic expression ST expression
FUN
SIM_SigOrgProx Simulate FB SIM_SigOrgProx_instance SIM_SigOrgProx_instance (
Home Prox- SIM_SigOrgProx Axis :=Parameter,
imity Signal Axis Axis Enable :=Parameter,
Enable Status Status =>Parameter,
Busy
Busy =>Parameter,
Error
ErrorID
Error =>Parameter,
ErrorID =>Parameter
);

Variables

 Input Variables
Name Meaning Data type Valid range Default Description
Enable Enable BOOL TRUE or FALSE The home proximity signal turns ON when
FALSE Enable changes to TRUE.

 Output Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Status Input signal ON BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the input signal is ON.
FALSE
Busy Executing BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the instruction is acknowledged.
FALSE
Error Error BOOL TRUE or TRUE while there is an error.
FALSE
ErrorID Error code WORD --- Contains the error code when an error occurs.
A value of 16#0000 indicates normal execution.

 In-Out Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Axis Axis _sAXIS_REF --- Specifies the axis.*1
*1. Specify an Axis Variable that was created in the Axis Basic Settings of the Sysmac Studio (The default axis variable
names are MC_Axis***.) or a user-defined variable that specifies the address of an Axis Variable.

Function
• When Enable changes to TRUE, a virtual home proximity signal is created for the axis specified by
Axis.
• When Enable changes to FALSE, the home proximity signal turns OFF for the axis specified by Ax-
is.

A-36 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

Precautions for Correct Use

This instruction must be used only for simulation. Use it only in debug programs. If you use it in
a normal program, it is not executed on the physical CPU Unit, but it creates a virtual input sig-
nal. Debug programs cannot be executed on the physical CPU Unit.

A-6 Simulation Instructions

Errors
An error occurs if there is no slave for the axis specified by Axis. The error code (0406 hex) is output
to ErrorID.
Refer to A-6-12 Detailed Information on Error Codes on page A-50 later in this manual for information
on error codes.

A
A-6-4 Simulate Immediate Stop Input Signal Instruction
This instruction creates a virtual immediate stop input signal.

A-6-4 Simulate Immediate Stop Input Signal Instruction

This instruction can be used only when a Servo axis is set.

FB/
Instruction Name Graphic expression ST expression
FUN
SIM_SigEmerg- Simulate Im- FB SIM_SigEmergStop_instance SIM_SigEmergStop_instance (
Stop mediate SIM_SigEmergStop Axis :=Parameter,
Stop Input Axis Axis Enable :=Parameter,
Signal Enable Status Status =>Parameter,
Busy
Busy =>Parameter,
Error
ErrorID
Error =>Parameter,
ErrorID =>Parameter
);

Variables

 Input Variables
Name Meaning Data type Valid range Default Description
Enable Enable BOOL TRUE or FALSE The immediate stop input signal turns ON
FALSE when Enable changes to TRUE.

 Output Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Status Input signal ON BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the input signal is ON.
FALSE
Busy Executing BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the instruction is acknowledged.
FALSE
Error Error BOOL TRUE or TRUE while there is an error.
FALSE
ErrorID Error code WORD --- Contains the error code when an error occurs.
A value of 16#0000 indicates normal execution.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-37

Appendices

 In-Out Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Axis Axis _sAXIS_REF --- Specifies the axis.*1
*1. Specify an Axis Variable that was created in the Axis Basic Settings of the Sysmac Studio (The default axis variable
names are MC_Axis***.) or a user-defined variable that specifies the address of an Axis Variable.

Function
• When Enable changes to TRUE, a virtual immediate stop input signal is created for the axis speci-
fied by Axis.
• When Enable changes to FALSE, the immediate stop input signal turns OFF for the axis specified
by Axis.

Precautions for Correct Use

This instruction must be used only for simulation. Use it only in debug programs. If you use it in
a normal program, it is not executed on the physical CPU Unit, but it creates a virtual input sig-
nal. Debug programs cannot be executed on the physical CPU Unit.

Errors
An error occurs if there is no slave for the axis specified by Axis. The error code (0406 hex) is output
to ErrorID.
Refer to A-6-12 Detailed Information on Error Codes on page A-50 later in this manual for information
on error codes.

A-6-5 Simulate External Latch Input Signal Instruction

This instruction creates a virtual external latch input signal.

FB/
Instruction Name Graphic expression ST expression
FUN
SIM_SigExtLatch Simulate Ex- FB SIM_SigExtLatch_instance SIM_SigExtLatch_instance (
ternal Latch SIM_SigExtLatch Axis :=Parameter,
Input Signal Axis Axis Enable :=Parameter,
Enable Status LatchID :=Parameter,
LatchID Busy
Status =>Parameter,
Error
ErrorID
Busy =>Parameter,
Error =>Parameter,
ErrorID =>Parameter
);

A-38 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

Variables

 Input Variables
Name Meaning Data type Valid range Default Description

A-6 Simulation Instructions

Enable Enable BOOL TRUE or FALSE The external latch input signal turns ON
FALSE when Enable changes to TRUE.
LatchID*1 Latch ID UINT 1, 2 1 Specify which of the two latch functions to
selection use.
1: Latch 1
2: Latch 2
*1. For information on the latch IDs, refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU Unit Motion Control User’s Manual (Cat. No. W507) or
NY-series Industrial Panel PC / Industrial Box PC Motion Control User’s Manual (Cat. No. W559).

 Output Variables A
Valid

A-6-5 Simulate External Latch Input Signal Instruction

Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Status Input signal ON BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the input signal is ON.
FALSE
Busy Executing BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the instruction is acknowledged.
FALSE
Error Error BOOL TRUE or TRUE while there is an error.
FALSE
ErrorID Error code WORD --- Contains the error code when an error occurs.
A value of 16#0000 indicates normal execution.

 In-Out Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Axis Axis _sAXIS_REF --- Specifies the axis.*1
*1. Specify an Axis Variable that was created in the Axis Basic Settings of the Sysmac Studio (The default axis variable
names are MC_Axis***.) or a user-defined variable that specifies the address of an Axis Variable.

Function
• When Enable changes to TRUE, a virtual external latch input signal is created for the axis specified
by Axis.
• When Enable changes to FALSE, the virtual external latch input signal turns OFF for the axis speci-
fied by Axis.

Precautions for Correct Use

This instruction must be used only for simulation. Use it only in debug programs. If you use it in
a normal program, it is not executed on the physical CPU Unit, but it creates a virtual input sig-
nal. Debug programs cannot be executed on the physical CPU Unit.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-39

Appendices

Errors
An error occurs in the following case.
• An error occurs if latch ID selection LatchID is not 1 or 2. The error code (0400 hex) is output to
ErrorID.
• An error occurs if there is no slave for the axis specified by Axis. The error code (0406 hex) is out-
put to ErrorID.
Refer to A-6-12 Detailed Information on Error Codes on page A-50 later in this manual for information
on error codes.

A-6-6 Simulate Drive Alarm Instruction

This instruction creates a virtual Drive alarm.
This instruction can be used only when a Servo axis is set.

FB/
Instruction Name Graphic expression ST expression
FUN
SIM_SetDrvAlm Simulate FB SIM_SetDrvAlm_instance SIM_SetDrvAlm_instance (
Drive Alarm SIM_SetDrvAlm Axis :=Parameter,
Axis Axis Execute :=Parameter,
Execute Done Done =>Parameter,
Busy
Busy =>Parameter,
Failure
Error
Failure =>Parameter,
ErrorID Error =>Parameter,
ErrorID =>Parameter
);

Variables

 Input Variables
Name Meaning Data type Valid range Default Description
Execute Execute BOOL TRUE or FALSE The instruction is executed when Execute
FALSE changes to TRUE.

 Output Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Done Done BOOL TRUE or TRUE when instruction execution is completed normally.
FALSE
Busy Busy BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the instruction is acknowledged.
FALSE
Failure Error end BOOL TRUE or TRUE when instruction execution is not completed normal-
FALSE ly.
Error Error BOOL TRUE or TRUE while there is an error.
FALSE
ErrorID Error code WORD --- Contains the error code when an error occurs.
A value of 16#0000 indicates normal execution.

A-40 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

 In-Out Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Axis Axis _sAXIS_REF --- Specifies the axis.*1

A-6 Simulation Instructions

*1. Specify an Axis Variable that was created in the Axis Basic Settings of the Sysmac Studio (The default axis variable
names are MC_Axis***.) or a user-defined variable that specifies the address of an Axis Variable.

Function
• When Execute changes to TRUE, a virtual Drive alarm is created for the axis specified by Axis.
• Execute the MC_Reset (Reset Axis Error) instruction to reset the Drive alarm.

Precautions for Correct Use A

This instruction must be used only for simulation. Use it only in debug programs. If you use it in
a normal program, it is not executed on the physical CPU Unit, but it creates a virtual input sig-

A-6-7 Simulate Drive Warning Instruction

nal. Debug programs cannot be executed on the physical CPU Unit.

Errors
An error occurs if there is no slave for the axis specified by Axis. The error code (0406 hex) is output
to ErrorID.
Refer to A-6-12 Detailed Information on Error Codes on page A-50 later in this manual for information
on error codes.

A-6-7 Simulate Drive Warning Instruction

This instruction creates a virtual Drive warning.
This instruction can be used only when a Servo axis is set.

FB/
Instruction Name Graphic expression ST expression
FUN
SIM_SetDrvWarn Simulate FB SIM_SetDrvWarn_instance SIM_SetDrvWarn_instance (
Drive Warn- SIM_SetDrvWarn Axis :=Parameter,
ing Axis Axis Execute :=Parameter,
Execute Done Done =>Parameter,
Busy
Busy =>Parameter,
Failure
Error
Failure =>Parameter,
ErrorID Error =>Parameter,
ErrorID =>Parameter
);

Variables

 Input Variables
Name Meaning Data type Valid range Default Description
Execute Execute BOOL TRUE or FALSE The instruction is executed when Execute
FALSE changes to TRUE.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-41

Appendices

 Output Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Done Done BOOL TRUE or TRUE when instruction execution is completed normally.
FALSE
Busy Busy BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the instruction is acknowledged.
FALSE
Failure Error end BOOL TRUE or TRUE when instruction execution is not completed normal-
FALSE ly.
Error Error BOOL TRUE or TRUE while there is an error.
FALSE
ErrorID Error code WORD --- Contains the error code when an error occurs.
A value of 16#0000 indicates normal execution.

 In-Out Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Axis Axis _sAXIS_REF --- Specifies the axis.*1
*1. Specify an Axis Variable that was created in the Axis Basic Settings of the Sysmac Studio (The default axis variable
names are MC_Axis***.) or a user-defined variable that specifies the address of an Axis Variable.

Function
• When Execute changes to TRUE, a virtual Drive warning is created for the axis specified by Axis.
• A drive warning is automatically reset in the next cycle after the virtual warning.

Precautions for Correct Use

This instruction must be used only for simulation. Use it only in debug programs. If you use it in
a normal program, it is not executed on the physical CPU Unit, but it creates a virtual input sig-
nal. Debug programs cannot be executed on the physical CPU Unit.

Errors
An error occurs if there is no slave for the axis specified by Axis. The error code (0406 hex) is output
to ErrorID.
Refer to A-6-12 Detailed Information on Error Codes on page A-50 later in this manual for information
on error codes.

A-6-8 Encoder Velocity Input Instruction

This instruction writes a virtual velocity for the current velocity of an encoder axis.
This instruction can be used only when an encoder axis is set.
A CPU Unit with unit version 1.02 or later is required to use this instruction.

A-42 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

FB/
Instruction Name Graphic expression ST expression
FUN
SIM_SetVelocity Encoder Ve- FB SIM_SetVelocity_instance SIM_SetVelocity_instance(
locity Input SIM_SetVelocity Axis :=parameter,
Axis Axis Execute :=parameter,

A-6 Simulation Instructions

Execute Done Velocity :=parameter,
Velocity Busy
Done =>parameter,
Failure
Error
Busy =>parameter,
ErrorID Failure =>parameter,
Error =>parameter,
ErrorID =>parameter,
);

Variables A
 Input Variables

A-6-8 Encoder Velocity Input Instruction

Name Meaning Data type Valid range Default Description
Execute Execute BOOL TRUE or FALSE The instruction is executed when Execute
FALSE changes to TRUE.
Velocity Current Ve- LREAL Negative 0 Specifies the current velocity. (The unit is
locity number, pulses/s.)
positive num-
ber, or 0

 Output Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Done Done BOOL TRUE or TRUE when instruction execution is completed normally.
FALSE
Busy Executing BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the instruction is acknowledged. FALSE when
FALSE instruction processing is completed.
Failure Failure BOOL TRUE or TRUE when instruction execution is not completed normal-
FALSE ly.
* Always FALSE on Sysmac Studio version 1.03.
Error Error BOOL TRUE or TRUE while there is an error.
FALSE
ErrorID Error code WORD --- Contains the error code when an error occurs. A value of
16#0000 indicates normal execution.

 In-Out Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Axis Axis _sAXIS_REF --- Specifies the axis.*1
*1. Specify an Axis Variable that was created in the Axis Basic Settings of the Sysmac Studio (The default axis variable
names are MC_Axis***.) or a user-defined variable that specifies the address of an Axis Variable.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-43

Appendices

Function
When Execute changes to TRUE, the current velocity of the axis that is specified by Axis is changed
to a virtual velocity.

Precautions for Correct Use

This instruction must be used only for simulation. Use it only in debug programs. If you use it in
a normal program, it is not executed on the physical CPU Unit, but it virtually changes the cur-
rent velocity. Debug programs cannot be executed on the physical CPU Unit.

Errors
An error occurs if there is no slave for the axis specified by Axis. The error code (0406 hex) is output
to ErrorID.
Refer to A-6-12 Detailed Information on Error Codes on page A-50 later in this manual for information
on error codes.

A-6-9 Write Actual Position Instruction

This instruction writes the actual position from the drive emulator to the process data object in the axis
variable.
A CPU Unit with unit version 1.09 or later is required to use this instruction.

FB/
Instruction Name Graphic expression ST expression
FUN
SIM_SetActPos Write Actual FB SIM_SetActPos_instance SIM_SetActPos_instance(
Position SIM_SetActPos Axis :=Parameter,
Axis Axis Enable :=Parameter,
Enable Status SetPos :=Parameter,
SetPos Busy
Status =>Parameter,
Error
ErrorID
Busy =>Parameter,
Error =>Parameter,
ErrorID =>Parameter
);

Variables

 Input Variables
Name Meaning Data type Valid range Default Description
Enable Enable BOOL TRUE or FALSE The instruction is executed while Enable is
FALSE TRUE.
SetPos Actual posi- LREAL Negative 0 Specifies the absolute value of the actual
tion number, position. (The unit is command units.)
positive num- In Rotary Mode, operation is performed with
ber, or 0 the shortest way specification.

A-44 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

 Output Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Status Input signal ON BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the input signal is ON.
FALSE

A-6 Simulation Instructions

Busy Executing BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the instruction is acknowledged.
FALSE
Error Error BOOL TRUE or TRUE while there is an error.
FALSE
ErrorID Error code WORD --- Contains the error code when an error occurs.
A value of 16#0000 indicates normal execution.

 In-Out Variables
Valid A
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Axis Axis _sAXIS_REF --- Specifies the axis.*1

A-6-9 Write Actual Position Instruction

*1. Specify an Axis Variable that was created in the Axis Basic Settings of the Sysmac Studio (The default axis variable
names are MC_Axis***.) or a user-defined variable that specifies the address of an Axis Variable.

Function
While Enable is TRUE, the specified actual position is written to the process data object in Axis.
The drive emulator does not wrap the actual position while execution of this instruction is in progress.
When Enable changes to FALSE, the operating mode from before instruction execution is restored
and the actual position is updated.

Precautions for Correct Use

• This instruction must be used only for simulation. Use it only in debug programs. If you use it
in a normal program, it is not executed on the physical CPU Unit, but it virtually changes the
actual position process data. Debug programs cannot be executed on the physical CPU Unit.
• If you use this instruction, place only one instruction in the user program for each axis. The
intended operation may not be achieved if you place more than one instruction in the user
program for the same axis.
• Make sure that the value that you write to the process data object does not exceed 32 bits
when converted to pulses by the electronic gear. If 32 bits is exceeded, the intended opera-
tion may not occur.
• If you use this instruction, assign a different instance for each axis. You cannot use the same
instance for more than one axis.
• Do not use this instruction for an encoder axis. The intended operation may not occur.
• This instruction updates the process data object data instead of the Servo Drive. Use it in the
task with the shortest control period.
• The following restrictions apply to the use of this instruction.
a) You cannot use it for a virtual axis.
b) You cannot use it while the Servo is OFF.
c) You cannot execute the MC_Home instruction or MC_SetPosition instruction during exe-
cution of this instruction.
d) Any changes to the axis parameters, such as the gear ratio, that are made with the
MC_WriteAxisParameter instruction are ignored by this instruction.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-45

Appendices

Errors
An error occurs and an error code is output in the following cases.

Error cause Error code

There is no slave that corresponds to Axis. 0406 hex
The actual position is outside of the allowable input range. 0400 hex
An object that is required for this instruction is not set. 3461 hex

Refer to A-6-12 Detailed Information on Error Codes on page A-50 later in this manual for information
on error codes.

A-6-10 Write Actual Velocity Instruction

This instruction writes the actual velocity from the drive emulator to the process data object in the axis
variable.
A CPU Unit with unit version 1.09 or later is required to use this instruction.

FB/
Instruction Name Graphic expression ST expression
FUN
SIM_SetActVel Write Actual FB SIM_SetActVel_instance SIM_SetActVel_instance(
Velocity SIM_SetActVel Axis :=Parameter,
Axis Axis Enable :=Parameter,
Enable Status SetVel :=Parameter,
SetVel Busy
Status =>Parameter,
Error
ErrorID
Busy =>Parameter,
Error =>Parameter,
ErrorID =>Parameter
);

Variables

 Input Variables
Name Meaning Data type Valid range Default Description
Enable Enable BOOL TRUE or FALSE The instruction is executed while Enable is
FALSE TRUE.
SetVel Actual veloci- LREAL Negative 0 Specifies the actual velocity. (The unit is
ty number, command units/s.)
positive num-
ber, or 0

 Output Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Status Input signal ON BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the input signal is ON.
FALSE
Busy Executing BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the instruction is acknowledged.
FALSE
Error Error BOOL TRUE or TRUE while there is an error.
FALSE

A-46 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
ErrorID Error code WORD --- Contains the error code when an error occurs.
A value of 16#0000 indicates normal execution.

A-6 Simulation Instructions

 In-Out Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Axis Axis _sAXIS_REF --- Specifies the axis.*1
*1. Specify an Axis Variable that was created in the Axis Basic Settings of the Sysmac Studio (The default axis variable
names are MC_Axis***.) or a user-defined variable that specifies the address of an Axis Variable.

Function A
While Enable is TRUE, the specified actual velocity is written to the process data object in Axis.

A-6-10 Write Actual Velocity Instruction

When Enable changes to FALSE, the actual velocity is not written.

Precautions for Correct Use

• This instruction must be used only for simulation. Use it only in debug programs. If you use it
in a normal program, it is not executed on the physical CPU Unit, but it virtually changes the
actual velocity process data. Debug programs cannot be executed on the physical CPU Unit.
• To use this instruction, you must map the process data object. An error will occur if you exe-
cute this instruction without mapping the object.
• If you use this instruction, place only one instruction in the user program for each axis. The
intended operation may not be achieved if you place more than one instruction in the user
program for the same axis.
• Make sure that the value that you write to the process data object does not exceed 32 bits
when converted to pulses by the electronic gear. If 32 bits is exceeded, the intended opera-
tion may not occur.
• If you use this instruction, assign a different instance for each axis. You cannot use the same
instance for more than one axis.
• Do not use this instruction for an encoder axis. The intended operation may not occur.
• This instruction updates the process data object data instead of the Servo Drive. Use it in the
task with the shortest control period.
• The following restrictions apply to the use of this instruction.
a) You cannot use it for a virtual axis.
b) You cannot use it while the Servo is OFF.
c) You cannot execute the MC_Home instruction or MC_SetPosition instruction during exe-
cution of this instruction.
d) Any changes to the axis parameters, such as the gear ratio, that are made with the
MC_WriteAxisParameter instruction are ignored by this instruction.

Errors
An error occurs and an error code is output in the following cases.

Error cause Error code

There is no slave that corresponds to Axis. 0406 hex
The actual velocity is outside of the allowable input range. 0400 hex
An object that is required for this instruction is not set. 3461 hex

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-47

Appendices

Refer to A-6-12 Detailed Information on Error Codes on page A-50 later in this manual for information
on error codes.

A-6-11 Write Actual Torque Instruction

This instruction writes the actual torque from the drive emulator to the process data object in the axis
variable.
A CPU Unit with unit version 1.09 or later is required to use this instruction.

FB/
Instruction Name Graphic expression ST expression
FUN
SIM_SetActTrq Write Actual FB SIM_SetActTrq_instance SIM_SetActTrq_instance(
Torque SIM_SetActTrq Axis :=Parameter,
Axis Axis Enable :=Parameter,
Enable Status SetTrq :=Parameter,
SetTrq Busy
Status =>Parameter,
Error
ErrorID
Busy =>Parameter,
Error =>Parameter,
ErrorID =>Parameter
);

Variables

 Input Variables
Name Meaning Data type Valid range Default Description
Enable Enable BOOL TRUE or FALSE The instruction is executed while Enable is
FALSE TRUE.
SetTrq Actual torque LREAL Negative 0 Specifies the actual torque. (The unit is %.)
number, Specifies the target torque to output to the
positive num- Servo Drive in increments of 0.1%. Specify a
ber, or 0 percentage of the rated torque, i.e., the rat-
ed torque is 100.0%.

 Output Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Status Input signal ON BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the input signal is ON.
FALSE
Busy Executing BOOL TRUE or TRUE when the instruction is acknowledged.
FALSE
Error Error BOOL TRUE or TRUE while there is an error.
FALSE
ErrorID Error code WORD --- Contains the error code when an error occurs.
A value of 16#0000 indicates normal execution.

A-48 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

 In-Out Variables
Valid
Name Meaning Data type Description
range
Axis Axis _sAXIS_REF --- Specifies the axis.*1

A-6 Simulation Instructions

*1. Specify an Axis Variable that was created in the Axis Basic Settings of the Sysmac Studio (The default axis variable
names are MC_Axis***.) or a user-defined variable that specifies the address of an Axis Variable.

Function
While Enable is TRUE, the specified actual torque is written to the process data object in Axis.
Specify the target torque to output to the Servo Drive in increments of 0.1%.
When Enable changes to FALSE, the actual torque is not written.
A
Precautions for Correct Use

A-6-11 Write Actual Torque Instruction

• This instruction must be used only for simulation. Use it only in debug programs. If you use it
in a normal program, it is not executed on the physical CPU Unit, but it virtually changes the
actual torque process data. Debug programs cannot be executed on the physical CPU Unit.
• If you use this instruction, place only one instruction in the user program for each axis. The
intended operation may not be achieved if you place more than one instruction in the user
program for the same axis.
• Make sure that the value that you write to the process data object does not exceed 32 bits
when converted to pulses by the electronic gear. If 32 bits is exceeded, the intended opera-
tion may not occur.
• If you use this instruction, assign a different instance for each axis. You cannot use the same
instance for more than one axis.
• Do not use this instruction for an encoder axis. The intended operation may not occur.
• This instruction updates the process data object data instead of the Servo Drive. Use it in the
task with the shortest control period.
• The following restrictions apply to the use of this instruction.
a) You cannot use it for a virtual axis.
b) You cannot use it while the Servo is OFF.
c) You cannot execute the MC_Home instruction or MC_SetPosition instruction during exe-
cution of this instruction.
d) Any changes to the axis parameters, such as the gear ratio, that are made with the
MC_WriteAxisParameter instruction are ignored by this instruction.

Errors
An error occurs and an error code is output in the following cases.

Error cause Error code

There is no slave that corresponds to Axis. 0406 hex
The actual torque is outside of the allowable input range. 0400 hex
An object that is required for this instruction is not set. 3461 hex

Refer to A-6-12 Detailed Information on Error Codes on page A-50 later in this manual for information
on error codes.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-49

Appendices

A-6-12 Detailed Information on Error Codes

Detailed information is available on errors that occur for instructions.
Errors are given as event codes that use the error code as the lower four digits. For descriptions of an
error code, refer to the description of the corresponding event code. For example, if the error code for
the instruction is 0400 hex, refer to the description for event code 54010400 hex.

Event name Input Value Out of Range Event code 54010400 hex
Meaning An input parameter for an instruction exceeded the valid range for an input variable.
Or, division by an integer of 0 occurred in division or remainder calculations.
Source PLC Function Module Source de- Instruction Detection tim- At instruction
tails ing execution
Error attrib- Level Observation Recovery --- Log category System
utes
Effects User program Continues. Operation The relevant instruction will end according to specifi-
cations.
System-de- Variable Data type Name
fined varia- None --- ---
bles
Cause and Assumed cause Correction Prevention
correction An input parameter for an instruc- Check the valid range for the in- Set the value of the input parame-
tion exceeded the valid range for put variables of the instruction. ter to the instruction so that the
an input variable. Or, division by Make sure the input parameters input range is not exceeded.
an integer of 0 occurred in divi- are within the valid range and that
sion or remainder calculations. no division by 0 or remainder cal-
culation for 0 is performed.
Attached in- Attached Information 1: Error Location
formation Attached Information 2: Error Location Detail, Rung Number. For a program section, the rung number from
the start of the section is given. For ST, the line number is given.
Attached Information 3: Instruction Name and Instruction Instance Name Where Error Occurred. If there is
more than one instruction, all of them are given. If the instruction cannot be identified, nothing is given.
Attached Information 4: Expansion Error Code (ErrorIDEx)
Precautions/ If a program is changed after an error occurs, the attached information that is displayed may not be cor-
Remarks rect.

Event name Illegal Data Position Specified Event code 54010406 hex
Meaning A memory address or data size that was specified for the instruction is not suitable.
Source PLC Function Module Source de- Instruction Detection tim- At instruction
tails ing execution
Error attrib- Level Observation Recovery --- Log category System
utes
Effects User program Continues. Operation The relevant instruction will end according to specifi-
cations.
System-de- Variable Data type Name
fined varia- None --- ---
bles

A-50 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

Cause and Assumed cause Correction Prevention

correction A memory address that was Correct the instruction so that the Use instructions so that the speci-
specified for an instruction was specified data memory addresses fied data memory addresses and
outside the valid range. The data and data sizes do not exceed the data sizes do not exceed the valid
size that was specified for an in- valid ranges. ranges.

A-6 Simulation Instructions

struction exceeded the valid
range. For example, the data type
of a variable and the data size
may not agree.
Attached in- Attached Information 1: Error Location
formation Attached Information 2: Error Location Detail, Rung Number. For a program section, the rung number from
the start of the section is given. For ST, the line number is given.
Attached Information 3: Instruction Name and Instruction Instance Name Where Error Occurred. If there is
more than one instruction, all of them are given. If the instruction cannot be identified, nothing is given.
Attached Information 4: Expansion Error Code (ErrorIDEx)
Precautions/ If a program is changed after an error occurs, the attached information that is displayed may not be cor-
A
Remarks rect.

A-6-12 Detailed Information on Error Codes

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-51

Appendices

Event name Process Data Object Setting Missing Event code 54013461 hex
Meaning The PDO mapping is not correct.
Source PLC Function Module Source de- Instruction Detection tim- At instruction
tails ing execution
Error attrib- Level Observation Recovery --- Log category System
utes
Effects User program Continues. Operation The relevant instruction will end according to specifi-
cations.
System-de- Variable Data type Name
fined varia- _MC_AX[*].MFaultLvl.Active BOOL Axis Minor Fault Occurrence
bles
Cause and Assumed cause Correction Prevention
correction The PDOs that are required for Map the PDOs that are required Map the PDOs that are required
the motion control instruction are for the instruction. for the instructions that are used.
not mapped. Refer to the Function section of Refer to the NJ/NX-series CPU
the relevant instruction for the re- Unit Motion Control User's
quired PDOs. Manual (Cat. No. W507) or NY-
series Industrial Panel PC /
Industrial Box PC Motion Control
User’s Manual (Cat. No. W559)
for the PDOs (Servo Drive set-
tings) that you must map for each
instruction.
The relevant instruction was exe- Some devices do not support the Refer to the manual for the target
cuted for a target device that relevant instruction. device and write the program so
does not have an object that sup- Refer to the manual for the target that unsupported instructions are
ports the instruction. device, check to see if the rele- not executed.
vant instruction is supported, and
correct the program so that un-
supported instructions are not
executed.
Attached in- Attached Information 1: Error Location
formation Attached Information 2: Error Location Detail, Rung Number. For a program section, the rung number from
the start of the section is given. For ST, the line number is given.
Attached Information 3: Instruction Name and Instruction Instance Name Where Error Occurred. If there is
more than one instruction, all of them are given. If the instruction cannot be identified, nothing is given.
Attached Information 4: Expansion Error Code (ErrorIDEx)
Precautions/ If a program is changed after an error occurs, the attached information that is displayed may not be cor-
Remarks rect.

A-52 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-7 Directly Connecting to an EtherCAT Slave Terminal

A-7 Directly Connecting to an EtherCAT
Slave Terminal
Instead of going online with the NJ/NX/NY-series Controller, you can connect directly to the EtherCAT
Coupler Unit with a USB cable. If an OMRON EtherCAT Coupler Unit is connected to an EtherCAT
network with a master that is not an OMRON product, you can connect to the Slave Terminal to go
online with it and perform operations, such as transferring Unit settings.
The operating procedures are given below. Refer to the NX-series EtherCAT Coupler Units User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W519) for function details.
When you connect the computer to the USB port on the Communications Coupler Unit the first time,
install the USB driver. Refer to A-1 Driver Installation for Direct USB Cable Connection on page A-3 for
installing the USB driver. A

A-7-1 Procedure for Directly Connecting to an EtherCAT Slave Termi-

A-7-1 Procedure for Directly Connecting to an EtherCAT Slave Terminal

nal
Use the following procedure to directly connect to an EtherCAT Slave Terminal with a USB cable.

1 Connect the computer to the EtherCAT Coupler Unit with a USB cable.

2 Create a project for an NJ/NX/NY-series Controller and create the configuration for an Ether-
CAT Slave Terminal. Refer to 5-3 EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration and Setup on page
5-25 for the procedures.

3 Right-click the Communications Coupler Unit on the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Tab Page and
select Coupler Connection (USB) − Online. Or right-click the Communications Coupler Unit
in the Multiview Explorer and select Coupler Connection (USB) − Online.
A dialog box to confirm the connection is displayed.

4 Check the EtherCAT Coupler Unit to connect to, and click the OK Button.
The Sysmac Studio goes online with the EtherCAT Slave Terminal.

Additional Information

You can also go online by selecting the Communications Coupler Unit in the Slave Terminal and
clicking the Online Button in the Coupler Connection (USB) item of the Unit setting item list.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-53

Appendices

A-7-2 Transferring Settings for an EtherCAT Slave Terminal

Use the following procedures to transfer the Slave Terminal settings when the Sysmac Studio is direct-
ly connected to an EtherCAT Slave Terminal.

 Transferring Settings from the Computer to the EtherCAT Coupler Unit

1 Go online with the EtherCAT Slave Terminal, right-click the Communications Coupler Unit on
the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Tab Page and select Coupler Connection (USB) − Transfer to
Coupler. Or right-click the Communications Coupler Unit in the Multiview Explorer and select
Coupler Connection (USB) − Transfer to Coupler.
The Transfer to Coupler Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Click the data to transfer.

A Transfer Confirmation Dialog Box is displayed. Click the Yes Button to transfer the data.

 Transferring Settings from the EtherCAT Coupler Unit to the Computer

1 Go online with the EtherCAT Slave Terminal, right-click the Communications Coupler Unit on
the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Tab Page, and select Coupler Connection (USB) − Transfer
from Coupler. Or right-click the Communications Coupler Unit in the Multiview Explorer and
select Coupler Connection (USB) − Transfer from Coupler.
A Transfer Confirmation Dialog Box is displayed. Click the Yes Button to transfer the data.

Precautions for Correct Use

If you execute Transfer to Coupler, the Unit is restarted after the data is transferred. At that
time, I/O communications with the communications master will stop.

A-54 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-7 Directly Connecting to an EtherCAT Slave Terminal

A-7-3 Comparing the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration Informa-
tion
Use the following procedures to compare the Slave Terminal configuration information when the Sys-
mac Studio is directly connected to the EtherCAT Slave Terminal.

1 Go online with the EtherCAT Slave Terminal, right-click the Communications Coupler Unit on
the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Tab Page and select Coupler Connection (USB) − Compare.
Or, right-click the EtherCAT Coupler Unit in the Multiview Explorer and select Coupler
Connection (USB) − Compare.
The data is compared. If it is the same, Slave Terminal settings matched is displayed.
If there are differences, a dialog box that shows the differences in the settings is displayed.

A-7-3 Comparing the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Configuration Information

A-7-4 USB Connection Prohibition Setting for EtherCAT Slave Termi-
nals
You can make a setting to prevent a direct USB connection to an operating Slave Terminal to prevent
incorrect machine operation that can occur for direct connections to a Slave Terminal during machine
operation.

 Prohibition Setting Procedure

1 Place the Sysmac Studio online with the NJ/NX/NY-series CPU Unit or the EtherCAT Coupler
Unit.

2 Double-click the Communications Coupler Unit on the Slave Terminal Tab Page or right-click it
and select Edit Unit Operation Settings.
The Edit Unit Operation Settings Tab Page is displayed.

3 Set the Preventing Incorrect Operation Setting/USB Connection Prohibition Setting to

Enable.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-55

Appendices

4 Click the Transfer to Unit Button for the Unit operation settings.
The prohibition setting is enabled after you go offline and then back online.

 Procedure to Clear the Prohibition Setting

1 Disconnect the EtherCAT Coupler Unit from the NJ/NX/NY-series CPU Unit or EtherCAT net-
work and place the Sysmac Studio online with the EtherCAT Coupler Unit.

2 A Edit Unit Operation Settings Tab Page is displayed for the EtherCAT Coupler Unit.

3 Set the Preventing Incorrect Operation Setting/USB Connection Prohibition Setting to

Disable.

4 Click the Transfer to Unit Button for the Unit operation settings.

Precautions for Correct Use

• You can connect directly to the EtherCAT Coupler Unit even when the prohibition setting is
active as long as the EtherCAT Coupler Unit is not connected to the EtherCAT network.
• Sysmac Studio version 1.07 can be directly connected to the Coupler Unit even if the prohibi-
tion setting is active.

A-7-5 I/O Wiring Checks for EtherCAT Slave Terminals

This section describes the I/O wiring checks for a direct connection to an EtherCAT Slave Terminal.

All of the following conditions must be met to use this function.

• The EtherCAT Coupler Unit must be disconnected from the EtherCAT network or there must not be
a cable connection to the EtherCAT network.
• The Slave Terminal configuration information must be the same between the Sysmac Studio and the
Slave Terminal.

 I/O Wiring Check Procedure

1 Go online with the EtherCAT Slave Terminal, right-click the Communications Coupler Unit on
the EtherCAT Slave Terminal Tab Page, and select Coupler Connection (USB) − Start I/O
Check. Or, right-click the EtherCAT Coupler Unit in the Multiview Explorer and select Coupler
Connection (USB) − Start I/O Check.
You can now check the I/O wiring.

A-56 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-7 Directly Connecting to an EtherCAT Slave Terminal

2 Perform the I/O wiring checks from the I/O Map in the Multiview Explorer.
To stop the I/O wiring checks, right-click the EtherCAT Coupler Unit and select Coupler
Connection (USB) − Stop I/O Check.

Precautions for Safe Use

Do not disconnect the cable when you change the values of I/O ports or variables from the I/O
Map with a direct connection to the EtherCAT Coupler Unit. To connect directly to a different
Coupler Unit, go offline, connect the cable to the other Unit, and go online again.

Precautions for Correct Use

• An EtherCAT Coupler Unit with unit version 1.2 or later is required to use this function.
• Not all NX Units support this function. Refer to the NX-series Data Reference Manual (Cat.
No. W525) for details.
A

A-7-6 Differences in Operation from an Online Connection to an

A-7-6 Differences in Operation from an Online Connection to an NJ/NX/NY-series Controller

NJ/NX/NY-series Controller
When you are directly connected to an EtherCAT Slave Terminal (i.e., online with the Communications
Coupler Unit), the following differences exist in the online operations in comparison to operations when
online with the NJ/NX/NY-series Controller.

Operation Online with Communications Coupler Unit

EtherCAT Network Configuration Compare and You cannot perform this operation.
Merge
Troubleshooting You cannot monitor user-defined errors or user-defined logs.
Operation authority verification Operation authority verification does not work.
Menus Menu commands that you cannot use are grayed out.

Refer to the NX-series EtherCAT Coupler Units User’s Manual (Cat. No. W519) for details on connect-
ing to the EtherCAT Coupler Unit and online operations.

Additional Information

The USB driver is installed when you connect the first time. Refer to A-1 Driver Installation for
Direct USB Cable Connection on page A-3 for details.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-57

Appendices

A-8 MDP Settings for EtherCAT Network

Slaves
MDPs (modular device profiles) define data structures for EtherCAT slave settings. They are part of
the EtherCAT specifications. You can use slaves that support MDPs from other companies on the
EtherCAT Tab Page.

Additional Information

Refer to the manuals provided by the vendors of the MDP slaves and modules for information
on the MDP slaves, the modules that you can connect to the MDP slaves, and the settings.

A-8-1 Installing ESI Files for MDP Slaves

1 Install the ESI files for the MDP slaves to use on the EtherCAT Tab Page.
Refer to 5-2-7 Installing and Uninstalling ESI Files on page 5-17 for the installation procedure
for ESI files.
The MDP slave groups and MDP slave models are displayed in the Toolbox.

A-8-2 Adding MDP Slaves

The procedures to add, delete, and perform other operations for MDP slaves on the EtherCAT Tab
Page are the same as those for OMRON slaves. Refer to 5-2 EtherCAT Configuration and Setup on
page 5-4 for the procedures.

A-8-3 Editing Module Configurations

Use the following procedure to register modules for MDP slaves and set those modules.

1 Right-click the slave in the EtherCAT Tab Page and select Edit Module Configuration.
The Module Configuration Dialog Box is displayed.

2 Select the location at which to register a module and double-click the module to register in the
Toolbox. Or, drag the module from the Toolbox to the Module Configuration Dialog Box.
The module is registered.
You can delete, copy, paste, and move modules on the Module Configuration Dialog Box.

A-58 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-8 MDP Settings for EtherCAT Network Slaves

To delete all of the modules at the same time, right-click the MDP slave and select Clear All
Settings.

A-8-4 Building Module Configurations Online

Use the following procedure to automatically create the module configuration on the Sysmac Studio
from the actual configuration of the modules.

1 Go online, right-click one of the modules in the Module Configuration Dialog Box, and select
Compare and Merge with Actual Module Configuration.
The actual module configuration is read and compared with the module configuration on the
Sysmac Studio. The results are displayed in the Compare and Merge with Actual Module
Configuration Dialog Box.
A

A-8-4 Building Module Configurations Online

2 Click the Apply Actual Module Configuration Button to synchronize the module configuration
on the Sysmac Studio with the actual module configuration.

3 Click the OK Button.

The Module Configuration Dialog Box is displayed again.

A-8-5 Setting MDP Slaves and Transferring/Comparing Module Config-

urations
Setting the MDP slaves and transferring module configuration information are performed in the same
ways as with other EtherCAT slaves, i.e., with the synchronization operation. Refer to Synchronizing
(Uploading/Downloading after Automatic Verification) on page 7-120 for details on the synchronization
operation.

A-8-6 Displaying Production Information

Use the following procedure to display production information online for MDP slaves and the modules
that are connected to the MDP slaves.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-59

Appendices

1 Go online, right-click one of the modules in the Module Configuration Dialog Box, and select
Display Production Information.
The Production Information Dialog Box is displayed.

A-60 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-9 Changing the Sysmac Studio Display Language

A-9 Changing the Sysmac Studio Display
Language
You can use the Language Switching Tool to change the language that is displayed on the Sysmac
Studio.
You can select the display language from the languages that are supported by the Sysmac Studio.

A-9-1 Changing the Display Language

1 Select OMRON - Sysmac Studio - Tools - Language Switching Tool from the Windows Start
Menu. A
The Language Switching Tool starts.

A-9-1 Changing the Display Language

2 Select the display language to use, and then click the Set Button.
The selected language is used from the next time that the Sysmac Studio starts.

Additional Information

• Changing the display language changes only the language that is displayed on the Sysmac
Studio. You cannot change the region that was selected at installation or the Windows region
or language setting (local setting).
• For program names, configuration names, and setting names, the language that was used
when the project was saved is displayed.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-61

Appendices

A-10 Changing models among NJ-, NX-,

and NY-series Controllers
The settings and the range of values supported by NJ/NX/NY-series Controllers vary depending on the
model. This appendix provides precautions for changing among NJ-series, NX-series, and NY-series
Controller models:
• Changing between NJ-series and NX701 Controllers
• Changing between NJ-series and NY-series Controllers
• Changing between NY-series and NX701 Controllers
• Changing between NX1P2 and NJ-series Controllers
• Changing between NX1P2 and NX701 Controllers
• Changing between NX1P2 and NY-series Controllers
• Changing between NX102 and NJ-series Controllers
• Changing between NX102 and NX701 Controllers
• Changing between NX102 and NY-series Controllers
• Changing between NX102 and NX1P2 Controllers

If you change between Controller models not listed here, the set values for functions that are not sup-
ported by the Controller that you change to are lost. In this case, the setting items unique to the model
that you change to are set to the default values.

Precautions for Safe Use

If the configuration of the EtherCAT network includes an EtherCAT slave that cannot be used by
the Controllers after model change, the configuration and settings of the EtherCAT network will
be all cleared. In that case, create and set an EtherCAT network configuration again.

A-10-1 Changing between NJ-series and NX701 Controllers

Precautions when changing the Controller model
Item
Changing from NJ Series to NX701 Changing from NX701 to NJ Series
EtherCAT Configuration and An EtherCAT configuration and setup • An error is displayed if the limit to
Setup, that include an EtherCAT Slave Termi- the number of slaves supported by
and EtherCAT Slave Termi- nal configuration and setup do not the Controller is exceeded after
nal Configuration and Setup change. changing the Controller model.
• The slave PDO communications cy-
cle settings (PDO Communications
Cycle 1 and PDO Communications
Cycle 2) are lost. The slaves operate
on the primary periodic task period.
• If a task period that is unique to the
NX701 Controller is set, the task pe-
riod changes when the Controller
model is changed, so the value of
the PDO communications cycle
changes. Refer to Task Settings for
information on changes in the task
periods.

A-62 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-10 Changing models among NJ-, NX-, and NY-series

Precautions when changing the Controller model
Item
Changing from NJ Series to NX701 Changing from NX701 to NJ Series
CPU/Expansion Rack Con- The Unit configuration and the setup The CPU/Expansion Rack configura-
figuration and Setup parameters for all Units are deleted. All tion and setup are added in the same
I/O ports are deleted and all variable condition as when a new project is cre-
assignments to I/O ports are deleted. ated.
Controller Operation • The FINS settings are deleted. • The FINS settings are added in the
Setup Settings • Among the general setting items, same condition as when a new
those unique to the NJ-series Con- project is created.
troller are deleted.

Controllers
Built-in • The IP Address settings in the • The IP Address - Port 1 and
EtherNet/IP TCP/IP settings are used as the IP Default Gateway settings in the
Port Settings Address - Port 1 and Default TCP/IP settings are used as the IP
Gateway settings. Address settings. The IP Address -
• The LINK Settings are used for the Port 2 settings are lost. A
LINK Settings - Port 1 settings. • Of the data registered for the IP
• The FINS settings are deleted. router table in the TCP/IP settings,

A-10-1 Changing between NJ-series and NX701 Controllers

any data that exceeds the upper lim-
it (8) for an NJ-series Controller is
lost.
• The LINK Settings - Port 1 settings
are used for the LINK Settings. The
LINK Settings - Port 2 settings are
lost.
• The 1000 Mbps Full Duplex selec-
tion is deleted from the selections for
the LINK settings. If 1000 Mbps Full
Duplex is selected for the NX701
Controller, it changes to Auto.
Axis Settings MC1 (primary periodic task) is as- • An error is displayed if the limit to
signed to all axis motion controls. the number of axes supported by the
Controller is exceeded after chang-
ing the Controller model.
• All tasks for devices that are as-
signed to axes change to the
priority-4 primary periodic task.
• The assigned axis variables for axes
that are assigned to MC2 (priority-5
periodic task) in the NX701 Control-
ler change from _MC2_AX[£] to
_MC_AX[£].
Axes Group Settings MC1 (primary periodic task) is as- • An error is displayed if the limit to
signed to all axes group motion con- the number of axes groups support-
trols. ed by the Controller is exceeded af-
ter changing the Controller model.
• The assigned variables for axes
groups that are assigned to MC2
(priority-5 periodic task) in the
NX701 Controller change from
_MC2_GRP[£] to _MC_GRP[£].

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-63

Appendices

Precautions when changing the Controller model

Item
Changing from NJ Series to NX701 Changing from NX701 to NJ Series
Task Settings The task settings do not change. • The priority-5 periodic task is delet-
ed. All program assignments to this
task are deleted.
• If a task period that is unique to the
NX701 Controllers is set, it changes
to the nearest settable NJ-series
Controller task period that is not
smaller than the original task period.
The results of the change are dis-
played in the Output Tab Page.
EtherNet/IP Connection Set- • The connection settings in the Built- The connection settings in the Built-in
tings in EtherNet/IP Port Settings are EtherNet/IP Port Settings - Port 1
used for the Built-in EtherNet/IP settings are used for the Built-in
Port Settings - Port 1 settings. EtherNet/IP Port Settings. The Built-
• If a CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit is in EtherNet/IP Port Settings - Port 2
registered, the connection setting to settings are lost.
it is lost.

A-10-2 Changing between NJ-series and NY-series Controllers

Precautions when changing the Controller model
Item Changing from NJ Series to NY Ser- Changing from NY Series to NJ Ser-
ies ies
EtherCAT Configuration and An EtherCAT configuration and setup If a task period that is unique to the
Setup, that include an EtherCAT Slave Termi- NY-series Controller is set, the task pe-
and EtherCAT Slave Termi- nal configuration and setup do not riod changes when the Controller mod-
nal Configuration and Setup change. el is changed, so the value of the PDO
communications cycle changes. Refer
to Task Settings for information on
changes in the task periods.
CPU/Expansion Rack Con- The Unit configuration and the setup The CPU/Expansion Rack configura-
figuration and Setup parameters for all Units are deleted. All tion and setup are added in the same
I/O ports are deleted and all variable condition as when a new project is cre-
assignments to I/O ports are deleted. ated.

A-64 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-10 Changing models among NJ-, NX-, and NY-series

Precautions when changing the Controller model
Item Changing from NJ Series to NY Ser- Changing from NY Series to NJ Ser-
ies ies
Controller Operation • The FINS settings are deleted. • The FINS settings are added in the
Setup Settings • Among the general setting items, same condition as when a new
those unique to the NJ-series Con- project is created.
troller are deleted. • Among the general setting items,
those unique to the NY-series Con-
troller are deleted.
Built-in • The IP Address settings in the • The IP Address - EtherNet/IP Port

Controllers
EtherNet/IP TCP/IP settings are used as the IP and Default Gateway settings in the
Port Settings Address - EtherNet/IP Port and TCP/IP settings are used as the IP
Default Gateway settings. Address settings. The IP Address -
• The LINK Settings are used for the Internal Port 1 settings are lost.
LINK Settings - EtherNet/IP Port • Of the data registered for the IP
settings. router table in the TCP/IP settings,
A
• The FINS settings are deleted. any data that exceeds the upper lim-
• The internal port 1 is added in the

A-10-2 Changing between NJ-series and NY-series Controllers

it (8) for an NJ-series Controller is
same condition as when a new lost.
project is created. • The LINK Settings - EtherNet/IP
Port settings are used for the LINK
Settings.
• The 1000 Mbps Full Duplex selec-
tion is deleted from the selections for
the LINK settings. If 1000 Mbps Full
Duplex is selected for the NY-series
Controller, it changes to Auto.
Task Settings The task settings do not change. If a task period that is unique to the
NY-series Controllers is set, it changes
to the nearest settable NJ-series Con-
troller task period that is not smaller
than the original task period. The re-
sults of the change are displayed in the
Output Tab Page.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-65

Appendices

A-10-3 Changing between NY-series and NX701 Controllers

Precautions when changing the Controller model
Item
Changing from NY Series to NX701 Changing from NX701 to NY Series
EtherCAT Configuration and An EtherCAT configuration and setup • An error is displayed if the limit to
Setup, that include an EtherCAT Slave Termi- the number of slaves supported by
and EtherCAT Slave Termi- nal configuration and setup do not the Controller is exceeded after
nal Configuration and Setup change. changing the Controller model.
• The PDO Communications Cycle 2
setting for slaves is lost. The PDO
Communications Cycle 1 for slaves
is set to the primary periodic task
period.
• If a task period that is unique to the
NX701 Controller is set, the task pe-
riod changes when the Controller
model is changed, so the value of
the PDO communications cycle
changes. Refer to Task Settings for
information on changes in the task
periods.
Controller Operation Among the general setting items, those Among the general setting items, those
Setup Settings unique to the NY-series Controller are unique to the NX701 Controller are de-
deleted. leted.
Built-in • The IP Address - EtherNet/IP Port • The IP Address - Port 1 settings in
EtherNet/IP settings in the TCP/IP settings are the TCP/IP settings are used as the
Port Settings used as the IP Address - Port 1 IP Address - EtherNet/IP Port set-
settings. tings. The IP Address - Port 2 set-
• The IP Address - Internal Port 1 tings are lost.
settings are lost. • The LINK Settings - Port 1 settings
• The LINK Settings are used for the are used for the LINK Settings. The
LINK Settings - Port 1 settings. LINK Settings - Port 2 settings are
• The FINS settings are deleted. lost.
Axis Settings MC1 (primary periodic task) is as- • An error is displayed if the limit to
signed to all axis motion controls. the number of axes supported by the
Controller is exceeded after chang-
ing the Controller model.
• All tasks for devices that are as-
signed to axes change to the priori-
ty-4 primary periodic task.
• The assigned axis variables for axes
that are assigned to MC2 (priority-5
periodic task) in the NX701 Control-
ler change from _MC2_AX[£] to
_MC_AX[£].
Axes Group Settings MC1 (primary periodic task) is as- • An error is displayed if the limit to
signed to all axes group motion con- the number of axes groups support-
trols. ed by the Controller is exceeded af-
ter changing the Controller model.
• The assigned variables for axes
groups that are assigned to MC2
(priority-5 primary periodic task) in
the NX701 Controller change from
_MC2_GRP[£] to _MC_GRP[£].

A-66 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-10 Changing models among NJ-, NX-, and NY-series

Precautions when changing the Controller model
Item
Changing from NY Series to NX701 Changing from NX701 to NY Series
Task Settings The task settings do not change. • The priority-5 periodic task is delet-
ed. All program assignments to this
task are deleted.
• If a task period that is unique to the
NX701 Controllers is set, it changes
to the nearest settable NY-series
Controller task period that is not
smaller than the original task period.

Controllers
The results of the change are dis-
played in the Output Tab Page.
EtherNet/IP Connection Set- • The connection settings in the Built- The connection settings in the Built-in
tings in EtherNet/IP Port Settings are EtherNet/IP Port Settings - Port 1
used for the Built-in EtherNet/IP settings are used for the Built-in
Port Settings - Port 1 settings. EtherNet/IP Port Settings. The Built-
A
in EtherNet/IP Port Settings - Port 2
settings are lost.

A-10-4 Changing between NX1P2 and NJ-series Controllers

A-10-4 Changing between NX1P2 and NJ-series Controllers
Precautions when changing the Controller model
Item
Changing from NX1P2 to NJ Series Changing from NJ Series to NX1P2
EtherCAT Configuration and If a task period that is unique to the • An error is displayed if the limit to
Setup, NX1P2 Controller is set, the task peri- the number of slaves supported by
and EtherCAT Slave Termi- od changes when the Controller model the Controller is exceeded after
nal Configuration and Setup is changed, so the value of the PDO changing the Controller model.
communications cycle changes. Refer • An EtherCAT configuration and set-
to Task Settings for information on up that include an EtherCAT Slave
changes in the task periods. Terminal configuration and setup do
not change. If a task period that is
unique to the NJ-series Controller is
set, the task period changes when
the Controller model is changed, so
the value of the PDO communica-
tions cycle changes. Refer to Task
Settings for information on changes
in the task periods.
CPU/Expansion Rack Con- The Unit configuration and the setup The Unit configuration and the setup
figuration and Setup parameters for all Units are deleted. All parameters for all Units are deleted. All
I/O ports are deleted and all variable I/O ports are deleted and all variable
assignments to I/O ports are deleted. assignments to I/O ports are deleted.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-67

Appendices

Precautions when changing the Controller model

Item
Changing from NX1P2 to NJ Series Changing from NJ Series to NX1P2
Controller Operation • Among the general setting items, • Among the general setting items,
Setup Settings those unique to the NX1P2 Control- those unique to the NJ-series Con-
ler are deleted. troller are deleted. In this case, the
setting items unique to the NX1P2
Controller are set to the default val-
ues.
Built-in • The IP Address and Default • The IP Address settings in the
EtherNet/IP Gateway settings in the TCP/IP set- TCP/IP settings are used as the IP
Port Settings tings are used as the IP Address Address and Default Gateway set-
settings. tings.
• Among the FINS settings, the
FINS/TCP settings are deleted.
Axis Settings • The Control Function parameter • An error is displayed if the limit to
setting for the NX1P2 Controller is the number of axes supported by the
deleted. Controller is exceeded after chang-
• An error is displayed if the limit to ing the Controller model.
the number of axes supported by • MC1 (primary periodic task) is as-
the Controller is exceeded after signed to all axis motion controls.
changing the Controller model. • The Control Function parameter is
set to All.
Axes Group Settings An error is displayed if the limit to the • MC1 (primary periodic task) is as-
number of axes groups supported by signed to all axes group motion con-
the Controller is exceeded after chang- trols.
ing the Controller model. • An error is displayed if the limit to
the number of axes groups support-
ed by the Controller is exceeded af-
ter changing the Controller model.
Task Settings If a task period that is unique to the • The priority-16 periodic task is delet-
NX1P2 Controller is set, it changes to ed. All program assignments to this
the nearest settable NJ-series Control- task are deleted.
ler task period that is not smaller than • If a task period that is unique to the
the original task period. The results of NJ-series Controllers is set, it
the change are displayed in the Output changes to the nearest settable
Tab Page. NX1P2 Controller task period that is
not smaller than the original task pe-
riod. The results of the change are
displayed in the Output Tab Page.

A-68 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-10 Changing models among NJ-, NX-, and NY-series

A-10-5 Changing between NX1P2 and NX701 Controllers
Precautions when changing the Controller model
Item
Changing from NX1P2 to NX701 Changing from NX701 to NX1P2
EtherCAT Configuration and An EtherCAT configuration and setup • An error is displayed if the limit to
Setup, that include an EtherCAT Slave Termi- the number of slaves supported by
and EtherCAT Slave Termi- nal configuration and setup do not the Controller is exceeded after
nal Configuration and Setup change. changing the Controller model.
• The PDO Communications Cycle 2
setting for slaves is lost. The PDO

Controllers
Communications Cycle 1 for slaves
is set to the primary periodic task
period.
• If a task period that is unique to the
NX701 Controller is set, the task pe-
riod changes when the Controller
A
model is changed, so the value of
the PDO communications cycle

A-10-5 Changing between NX1P2 and NX701 Controllers

changes. Refer to Task Settings for
information on changes in the task
periods.
CPU/Expansion Rack Con- The Unit configuration and the setup The CPU/Expansion Rack configura-
figuration and Setup parameters for all Units are deleted. All tion and setup are added in the same
I/O ports are deleted and all variable condition as when a new project is cre-
assignments to I/O ports are deleted. ated.
Controller Operation Among the general setting items, those Among the general setting items, those
Setup Settings unique to the NX1P2 Controller are de- unique to the NX701 Controller are de-
leted. leted.
Built-in • The IP Address settings in the • The IP Address - Port 1 settings in
EtherNet/IP TCP/IP settings are used as the IP the TCP/IP settings are used as the
Port Settings Address - Port 1 settings. IP Address settings. The IP
• The LINK Settings are used for the Address - Port 2 settings are lost.
LINK Settings - Port 1 settings. • Of the data registered for the IP
• The FINS settings are deleted. router table in the TCP/IP settings,
any data that exceeds the upper lim-
it (8) for an NX1P2 Controller is lost.
• The LINK Settings - Port 1 settings
are used for the LINK Settings. The
LINK Settings - Port 2 settings are
lost.
• The 1000 Mbps Full Duplex selec-
tion is deleted from the selections for
the LINK settings. If 1000 Mbps Full
Duplex is selected for the NX701
Controller, it changes to Auto.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-69

Appendices

Precautions when changing the Controller model

Item
Changing from NX1P2 to NX701 Changing from NX701 to NX1P2
Axis Settings The Control Function parameter set- • An error is displayed if the limit to
ting for the NX1P2 Controller is delet- the number of axes supported by the
ed. Controller is exceeded after chang-
ing the Controller model.
• All tasks for devices that are as-
signed to axes change to the priori-
ty-4 primary periodic task.
• The assigned axis variables for axes
that are assigned to MC2 (priority-5
periodic task) in the NX701 Control-
ler change from _MC2_AX[£] to
_MC_AX[£].
• The Control Function parameter is
set to All.
Axes Group Settings The axes group settings do not • An error is displayed if the limit to
change. the number of axes groups support-
ed by the Controller is exceeded af-
ter changing the Controller model.
• The assigned variables for axes
groups that are assigned to MC2
(priority-5 primary periodic task) in
the NX701 Controller change from
_MC2_GRP[£] to _MC_GRP[£].
Task Settings The task settings do not change. • The priority-5 and priority-16 period-
ic tasks are deleted. All program as-
signments to this task are deleted.
• If a task period that is unique to the
NX701 Controller is set, it changes
to the nearest settable NX1P2 Con-
troller task period that is not smaller
than the original task period. The re-
sults of the change are displayed in
the Output Tab Page.
EtherNet/IP Connection Set- • The connection settings in the Built- The connection settings in the Built-in
tings in EtherNet/IP Port Settings are EtherNet/IP Port Settings - Port 1
used for the Built-in EtherNet/IP settings are used for the Built-in
Port Settings - Port 1 settings. EtherNet/IP Port Settings. The Built-
in EtherNet/IP Port Settings - Port 2
settings are lost.

A-70 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-10 Changing models among NJ-, NX-, and NY-series

A-10-6 Changing between NX1P2 and NY-series Controllers
Precautions when changing the Controller model
Item
Changing from NX1P2 to NY Series Changing from NY Series to NX1P2
EtherCAT Configuration and • An EtherCAT configuration and set- • An error is displayed if the limit to
Setup, up that include an EtherCAT Slave the number of slaves supported by
and EtherCAT Slave Termi- Terminal configuration and setup do the Controller is exceeded after
nal Configuration and Setup not change. changing the Controller model.
• If a task period that is unique to the
NY-series Controller is set, the task

Controllers
period changes when the Controller
model is changed, so the value of
the PDO communications cycle
changes. Refer to Task Settings for
information on changes in the task
periods.
A
CPU/Expansion Rack Con- The Unit configuration and the setup The CPU/Expansion Rack configura-
figuration and Setup parameters for all Units are deleted. All tion and setup are added in the same

A-10-6 Changing between NX1P2 and NY-series Controllers

I/O ports are deleted and all variable condition as when a new project is cre-
assignments to I/O ports are deleted. ated.
Controller Operation Among the general setting items, those Among the general setting items, those
Setup Settings unique to the NX1P2 Controller are de- unique to the NY-series Controller are
leted. deleted.
Built-in • The IP Address settings in the • The IP Address - EtherNet/IP Port
EtherNet/IP TCP/IP settings are used as the IP settings in the TCP/IP settings are
Port Settings Address - EtherNet/IP Port set- used as the IP Address settings.
tings. • The IP Address - Internal Port 1
• The LINK Settings are used for the settings are lost.
LINK Settings - EtherNet/IP Port • Of the data registered for the IP
settings. router table in the TCP/IP settings,
any data that exceeds the upper lim-
it (8) for an NX1P2 Controller is lost.
• The LINK Settings - EtherNet/IP
Port settings are used for the LINK
Settings.
• The 1000 Mbps Full Duplex selec-
tion is deleted from the selections for
the LINK settings. If 1000 Mbps Full
Duplex is selected for the NY-series
Controller, it changes to Auto.
Axis Settings The Control Function parameter set- • An error is displayed if the limit to
ting for the NX1P2 Controller is delet- the number of axes supported by the
ed. Controller is exceeded after chang-
ing the Controller model.
• The Control Function parameter is
set to All.
Axes Group Settings The axes group settings do not An error is displayed if the limit to the
change. number of axes groups supported by
the Controller is exceeded after chang-
ing the Controller model.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-71

Appendices

Precautions when changing the Controller model

Item
Changing from NX1P2 to NY Series Changing from NY Series to NX1P2
Task Settings The task settings do not change. • The priority-16 periodic task is delet-
ed. All program assignments to this
task are deleted.
• If a task period that is unique to the
NY-series Controllers is set, it
changes to the nearest settable
NX1P2 Controller task period that is
not smaller than the original task pe-
riod. The results of the change are
displayed in the Output Tab Page.

A-10-7 Changing between NX102 and NJ-series Controllers

Precautions when changing the Controller model
Item
Changing from NX102 to NJ Series Changing from NJ Series to NX102
EtherCAT Configuration and If a task period that is unique to the • An error is displayed if the limit to
Setup, NX102 Controller is set, the task peri- the number of slaves supported by
and EtherCAT Slave Termi- od changes when the Controller model the Controller is exceeded after
nal Configuration and Setup is changed, so the value of the PDO changing the Controller model.
communications cycle changes. Refer • An EtherCAT configuration and set-
to Task Settings for information on up that include an EtherCAT Slave
changes in the task periods. Terminal configuration and setup do
not change. If a task period that is
unique to the NJ-series Controller is
set, the task period changes when
the Controller model is changed, so
the value of the PDO communica-
tions cycle changes. Refer to Task
Settings for information on changes
in the task periods.
CPU/Expansion Rack Con- The Unit configuration and the setup The Unit configuration and the setup
figuration and Setup parameters for all Units are deleted. All parameters for all Units are deleted. All
I/O ports are deleted and all variable I/O ports are deleted and all variable
assignments to I/O ports are deleted. assignments to I/O ports are deleted.

A-72 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-10 Changing models among NJ-, NX-, and NY-series

Precautions when changing the Controller model
Item
Changing from NX102 to NJ Series Changing from NJ Series to NX102
Controller Operation • Among the general setting items, • Among the general setting items,
Setup Settings those unique to the NX102 Control- those unique to the NJ-series Con-
ler are deleted. troller are deleted. In this case, the
setting items unique to the NX102
Controller are set to the default val-
ues.
Built-in • The IP Address - Port 1 and • The IP Address settings in the
EtherNet/IP Default Gateway settings in the TCP/IP settings are used as the IP

Controllers
Port Settings TCP/IP settings are used as the IP Address - Port 1 and Default
Address settings. The IP Address - Gateway settings.
Port 2 settings are lost.
• Among the data registered for the IP
router table in the TCP/IP settings,
any data that exceeds the upper lim-
A
it (8) for an NJ-series Controller is
lost.

A-10-7 Changing between NX102 and NJ-series Controllers

• The LINK Settings - Port 1 settings
are used for the LINK Settings. The
LINK Settings - Port 2 settings are
lost.
• For the FINS Node Address setting
in FINS Settings, the value for the
built-in EtherNet/IP port 1 is set as
the value for the Built-in
EtherNet/IP Port.
Axis Settings • The Control Function parameter • An error is displayed if the limit to
setting for the NX102 Controller is the number of axes supported by the
deleted. Controller is exceeded after chang-
• An error is displayed if the limit to ing the Controller model.
the number of axes supported by • MC1 (primary periodic task) is as-
the Controller is exceeded after signed to all axis motion controls.
changing the Controller model. • The Control Function parameter is
set to All.
Axes Group Settings An error is displayed if the limit to the • MC1 (primary periodic task) is as-
number of axes groups supported by signed to all axes group motion con-
the Controller is exceeded after chang- trols.
ing the Controller model. • An error is displayed if the limit to
the number of axes groups support-
ed by the Controller is exceeded af-
ter changing the Controller model.
Task Settings If a task period that is unique to the • The priority-16 periodic task is delet-
NX102 Controllers is set, it changes to ed. All program assignments to this
the nearest settable NJ-series Control- task are deleted.
ler task period that is not smaller than • If a task period that is unique to the
the original task period. The results of NJ-series Controllers is set, it
the change are displayed in the Output changes to the nearest settable
Tab Page. NX102 Controller task period that is
not smaller than the original task pe-
riod. The results of the change are
displayed in the Output Tab Page.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-73

Appendices

Precautions when changing the Controller model

Item
Changing from NX102 to NJ Series Changing from NJ Series to NX102
EtherNet/IP Connection Set- The connection settings in the Built-in • The connection settings in the Built-
tings EtherNet/IP Port Settings - Port 1 in EtherNet/IP Port Settings are
settings are used for the Built-in used for the Built-in EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP Port Settings. The Built- Port Settings - Port 1 settings.
in EtherNet/IP Port Settings - Port 2 • If a CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit is
settings are lost. registered, the connection setting to
it is lost.

A-10-8 Changing between NX102 and NX701 Controllers

Precautions when changing the Controller model
Item
Changing from NX102 to NX701 Changing from NX701 to NX102
EtherCAT Configuration and An EtherCAT configuration and setup • An error is displayed if the limit to
Setup, that include an EtherCAT Slave Termi- the number of slaves supported by
and EtherCAT Slave Termi- nal configuration and setup do not the Controller is exceeded after
nal Configuration and Setup change. changing the Controller model.
• The PDO Communications Cycle 2
setting for slaves is lost. The PDO
Communications Cycle 1 for slaves
is set to the primary periodic task
period.
• If a task period that is unique to the
NX701 Controller is set, the task pe-
riod changes when the Controller
model is changed, so the value of
the PDO communications cycle
changes. Refer to Task Settings for
information on changes in the task
periods.
CPU/Expansion Rack Con- The Unit configuration and the setup The CPU/Expansion Rack configura-
figuration and Setup parameters for all Units are deleted. All tion and setup are added in the same
I/O ports are deleted and all variable condition as when a new project is cre-
assignments to I/O ports are deleted. ated.
Controller Operation Among the general setting items, those Among the general setting items, those
Setup Settings unique to the NX102 Controller are de- unique to the NX701 Controller are de-
leted. leted.
Built-in When the model is changed to a model • Of the data registered for the IP
EtherNet/IP without FINS Settings, the FINS Set- router table in the TCP/IP settings,
Port Settings tings will be deleted. any data that exceeds the upper lim-
it (64) for an NX102 Controller is
lost.
• The 1000 Mbps Full Duplex selec-
tion is deleted from the selections for
the LINK settings. If 1000 Mbps Full
Duplex is selected for the NX701
Controller, it changes to Auto.
Memory Set- Even when the model is changed to a Even when the model is changed from
tings model with Memory Settings, the data a model with Memory Settings, the
in the Memory Settings is initialized data in the Memory Settings is initial-
and it is not inherited. ized and it is not inherited.

A-74 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-10 Changing models among NJ-, NX-, and NY-series

Precautions when changing the Controller model
Item
Changing from NX102 to NX701 Changing from NX701 to NX102
Axis Settings The Control Function parameter set- • An error is displayed if the limit to
ting for the NX102 Controller is delet- the number of axes supported by the
ed. Controller is exceeded after chang-
ing the Controller model.
• All tasks for devices that are as-
signed to axes change to the priori-
ty-4 primary periodic task.
• The assigned axis variables for axes

Controllers
that are assigned to MC2 (priority-5
periodic task) in the NX701 Control-
ler change from _MC2_AX[£] to
_MC_AX[£].
• The Control Function parameter is
set to All.
A
Axes Group Settings The axes group settings do not • An error is displayed if the limit to

A-10-9 Changing between NX102 and NY-series Controllers

change. the number of axes groups support-
ed by the Controller is exceeded af-
ter changing the Controller model.
• The assigned variables for axes
groups that are assigned to MC2
(priority-5 primary periodic task) in
the NX701 Controller change from
_MC2_GRP[£] to _MC_GRP[£].
Task Settings If a task period that is unique to the • The priority-5 and priority-16 period-
NX102 Controller is set, it changes to ic tasks are deleted. All program as-
the nearest settable NX701 Controller signments to this task are deleted.
task period that is not smaller than the • If a task period that is unique to the
original task period. NX701 Controller is set, it changes
to the nearest settable NX102 Con-
troller task period that is not smaller
than the original task period. The re-
sults of the change are displayed in
the Output Tab Page.

A-10-9 Changing between NX102 and NY-series Controllers

Precautions when changing the Controller model
Item
Changing from NX102 to NY Series Changing from NY Series to NX102
EtherCAT Configuration and • An EtherCAT configuration and set- • An error is displayed if the limit to
Setup, up that include an EtherCAT Slave the number of slaves supported by
and EtherCAT Slave Termi- Terminal configuration and setup do the Controller is exceeded after
nal Configuration and Setup not change. changing the Controller model.
• If a task period that is unique to the
NY-series Controller is set, the task
period changes when the Controller
model is changed, so the value of
the PDO communications cycle
changes. Refer to Task Settings for
information on changes in the task
periods.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-75

Appendices

Precautions when changing the Controller model

Item
Changing from NX102 to NY Series Changing from NY Series to NX102
CPU/Expansion Rack Con- The Unit configuration and the setup The CPU/Expansion Rack configura-
figuration and Setup parameters for all Units are deleted. All tion and setup are added in the same
I/O ports are deleted and all variable condition as when a new project is cre-
assignments to I/O ports are deleted. ated.
Controller Operation Among the general setting items, those Among the general setting items, those
Setup Settings unique to the NX102 Controller are de- unique to the NY-series Controller are
leted. deleted.
Built-in • The IP Address - Port 1 settings in • The IP Address - EtherNet/IP Port
EtherNet/IP the TCP/IP settings are used as the settings in the TCP/IP settings are
Port Settings IP Address - EtherNet/IP Port set- used as the IP Address - Port 1
tings. The IP Address - Port 2 set- settings.
tings are lost. • The IP Address - Internal Port 1
• The LINK Settings - Port 1 settings settings are lost.
are used for the LINK Settings. The • The LINK Settings are used for the
LINK Settings - Port 2 settings are LINK Settings - Port 1 settings.
lost. • Of the data registered for the IP
router table in the TCP/IP settings,
any data that exceeds the upper lim-
it (64) for an NX102 Controller is
lost.
• The 1000 Mbps Full Duplex selec-
tion is deleted from the selections for
the LINK settings. If 1000 Mbps Full
Duplex is selected for the NY-series
Controller, it changes to Auto.
Axis Settings The Control Function parameter set- • An error is displayed if the limit to
ting for the NX102 Controller is delet- the number of axes supported by the
ed. Controller is exceeded after chang-
ing the Controller model.
• The Control Function parameter is
set to All.
Axes Group Settings The axes group settings do not An error is displayed if the limit to the
change. number of axes groups supported by
the Controller is exceeded after chang-
ing the Controller model.
Task Settings If a task period that is unique to the • The priority-16 periodic task is delet-
NX102 Controllers is set, it changes to ed. All program assignments to this
the nearest settable NY-series Control- task are deleted.
ler task period that is not smaller than • If a task period that is unique to the
the original task period. NY-series Controllers is set, it
changes to the nearest settable
NX102 Controller task period that is
not smaller than the original task pe-
riod. The results of the change are
displayed in the Output Tab Page.
EtherNet/IP Connection Set- The connection settings in the Built-in The connection settings in the Built-in
tings EtherNet/IP Port Settings - Port 1 EtherNet/IP Port Settings are used
settings are used for the Built-in for the Built-in EtherNet/IP Port
EtherNet/IP Port Settings. The Built- Settings - Port 1 settings.
in EtherNet/IP Port Settings - Port 2
settings are lost.

A-76 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-10 Changing models among NJ-, NX-, and NY-series

A-10-10 Changing between NX102 and NX1P2 Controllers
Precautions when changing the Controller model
Item
Changing from NX102 to NX1P2 Changing from NX1P2 to NX102
EtherCAT Configuration and • An error is displayed if the limit to An EtherCAT configuration and setup
Setup, the number of slaves supported by that include an EtherCAT Slave Termi-
and EtherCAT Slave Termi- the Controller is exceeded after nal configuration and setup do not
nal Configuration and Setup changing the Controller model. change.
• If a task period that is unique to the
NX102 Controller is set, the task pe-

Controllers
riod changes when the Controller
model is changed, so the value of
the PDO communications cycle
changes. Refer to Task Settings for
information on changes in the task
periods.
A
CPU/Expansion Rack Con- The Unit configuration and the setup The Unit configuration and the setup
figuration and Setup parameters are used. An error is dis- parameters are used.

A-10-10 Changing between NX102 and NX1P2 Controllers

played if the limit to the number of
Units supported by the Controller is ex-
ceeded after changing the Controller
series.
Controller Operation Among the general setting items, those Among the general setting items, those
Setup Settings unique to the NX102 Controller are de- unique to the NX1P2 Controller are de-
leted. leted.
Built-in • The IP Address - Port 1 settings in • The IP Address settings in the
EtherNet/IP the TCP/IP settings are used as the TCP/IP settings are used as the IP
Port Settings IP Address settings. The IP Address - Port 1 settings.
Address - Port 2 settings are lost. • The LINK Settings are used for the
• Of the data registered for the IP LINK Settings - Port 1 settings.
router table in the TCP/IP settings,
any data that exceeds the upper lim-
it (8) for an NX1P2 Controller is lost.
• The LINK Settings - Port 1 settings
are used for the LINK Settings. The
LINK Settings - Port 2 settings are
lost.
• Among the FINS settings, the
FINS/TCP settings are deleted.
Memory Set- The data in the Memory Settings is The data in the Memory Settings is in-
tings initialized and it is not inherited. itialized and it is not inherited.
Axis Settings An error is displayed if the limit to the An error is displayed if the limit to the
number of axes supported by the Con- number of axes supported by the Con-
troller is exceeded after changing the troller is exceeded after changing the
Controller model. Controller model.
Axes Group Settings An error is displayed if the limit to the An error is displayed if the limit to the
number of axes groups supported by number of axes groups supported by
the Controller is exceeded after chang- the Controller is exceeded after chang-
ing the Controller model. ing the Controller model.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-77

Appendices

Precautions when changing the Controller model

Item
Changing from NX102 to NX1P2 Changing from NX1P2 to NX102
Task Settings If a task period that is unique to the The task settings do not change.
NX102 Controller is set, it changes to
the nearest settable NX1P2 Controller
task period that is not smaller than the
original task period. The results of the
change are displayed in the Output
Tab Page.
EtherNet/IP Connection Set- The connection settings in the Built-in The connection settings in the Built-in
tings EtherNet/IP Port Settings - Port 1 EtherNet/IP Port Settings are used
settings are used for the Built-in for the Built-in EtherNet/IP Port
EtherNet/IP Port Settings. The Built- Settings - Port 1 settings.
in EtherNet/IP Port Settings - Port 2
settings are lost.

A-78 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

A-11 Report Tools

If a problem occurs in an NJ/NX/NY-series Controller or the Sysmac Studio, you can use the Report
Tools to save information in a file to help solve the problem.
Please provide the files that are saved to the OMRON support center when you request support.

A-11 Report Tools

A-11-1 Sysmac Controller Log Upload Tool
This tool saves the operation log from an NJ/NX/NY-series Controller or Slave Terminal to two or more
ZIP files.

1 Select OMRON - Sysmac Studio - Tools - Sysmac Controller Log Upload Tool from the
A
Windows Start Menu.
The Sysmac Controller Log Upload Tool is displayed.

A-11-1 Sysmac Controller Log Upload Tool

2 Enter the IP address of the target Controller in the IP address field in the Target Controller
area. If the target Controller is connected directly with a USB cable, enter USB for the IP
address.

Click the Communications Test button to see if you can connect to the Controller.

3 Click the Upload button.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-79

Appendices

The Controller log is uploaded from the Controller and the directory where the log files were
saved is displayed in the Status area.

4 Click the button labeled with the directory name in the Status area.

The log files are displayed in Windows Explorer.

Send the log files to the support center.

Additional Information

• To specify the target Controller, you can click the Browse button to display the Network
Browser Dialog Box and then select the target Controller in it.
• The log files that are uploaded by this tool do not contain any information that can be used to
identify you and they do not contain your project files (e.g., settings, configurations, and pro-
grams).
• The log files uploaded by this tool will not be sent from your computer to any external party
without your specific approval.

Version Information

A CPU Unit with unit version 1.10 or later is required to use this tool.

A-11-2 Sysmac Studio Error Report Generating Tool

This tool saves information on the computer and project when problems occur with the Sysmac Stu-
dio. The information is saved in a ZIP file.

A-80 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

1 Select OMRON - Sysmac Studio - Tools - Sysmac Studio Error Report Generating Tool
from the Windows Start Menu.
The Sysmac Studio Error Report Generating Tool is displayed.

A-11 Report Tools

A
A list of the information that is saved is displayed in the Logs for reporting area.
Select the check boxes for the files to save according to instructions from your OMRON sup-

A-11-2 Sysmac Studio Error Report Generating Tool

port center.
You can click any of the View buttons to check the information files that will be saved.

2 Click the Save button.

The error reports are saved and the name of the file that was created is displayed in the Status
area.

3 Click the button labeled with the created file name in the Status area.

The created file is displayed in Windows Explorer.

Send the created file to the support center.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-81

Appendices

Precautions for Correct Use

If you select the check box for the project name in the Logs for reporting area, this tool will
create a file that contains your project file (e.g., settings, configurations, and programs). Confirm
that there are no problems in including your project information before you select this check
box.
If you do not check this check box, the files created by this tool do not contain any information
that can be used to identify you and they do not contain your project files.

Additional Information

The files created by this tool will not be sent from your computer to any external party without
your specific approval.

A-11-3 Sysmac Coupler Log Upload Tool

This tool saves the operation log from a Slave Terminal to a ZIP file.

1 Select OMRON - Sysmac Studio - Tools - Sysmac Coupler Log Upload Tool from the Win-
dows Start Menu.
The Sysmac Coupler Log Upload Tool is displayed.

2 Connect to the Communications Coupler Unit with a USB cable.

Click the Communications Test button to see if you can communicate with the Unit.

3 Click the Upload button.

The Slave Terminal log is uploaded from the Slave Terminal and the directory where the log
files were saved is displayed in the Status area.

A-82 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Appendices

4 Click the button labeled with the directory name in the Status area.

A-11 Report Tools

The log files are displayed in Windows Explorer.
Send the log files to the support center.
A
Additional Information

A-11-3 Sysmac Coupler Log Upload Tool

• The log files that are uploaded by this tool do not contain any information that can be used to
identify you and they do not contain your project files (e.g., settings, configurations, and pro-
grams).
• The log files uploaded by this tool will not be sent from your computer to any external party
without your specific approval.

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) A-83

Appendices

A-12 Downloading Manuals

You can browse the OMRON manual download website from the Sysmac Studio and download the
latest manuals for the Sysmac Studio.

Precautions for Correct Use

• An Internet connection is required to use this function.

• To use this function, Internet Explorer 11 is required. Make sure that it is installed on the com-
puter in advance. Using other browsers may cause improper browsing or inability to down-
load manuals.
• You must start this function from the Sysmac Studio, or the Windows Start Menu.

A-12-1 Displaying the Manual Download Site

1 Select Manual Download from the Help Menu of the Sysmac Studio. Or select All Programs
- OMRON - Sysmac Manual Download from the Windows Start Menu.
Internet Explorer 11 starts and displays the Sysmac Family Manual Download page.

Select the target product from Product Category and download manuals.

A-84 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 I
Index

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) I-1

Index

Index
Numerics communications...............................................................3-74
Communications Middleware..................................... 1-5, 2-3
2D Path Display...............................................................7-68 Communications Setup..................................................... 6-4
3D equipment models.......................................... 7-73, 7-100 connection methods.......................................................... 6-3
3D Motion Monitor Display Mode.................................... 7-67 Constant attribute............................................................ 4-44
3G3AX-MX2-ECT............................................................ 5-37 constants....................................................................... 4-149
continuous step............................................................... 7-95
A Controller..................................................................3-54, 6-2
Controller backup............................................................ 8-41
addresses.......................................................................... 1-2 Controller Configurations and Setup.......................... 3-4, 3-6
administrator......................................................................2-2 Controller errors.............................................. 1-3, 8-90, 8-91
administrator rights............................................................ 2-2 Controller event log................................................ 8-90, 8-95
AT Specification attribute................................................. 4-42 Controller models.............................................................. 1-6
attributes..........................................................................4-36 Controller Setup...............................................................5-63
authentication of user program execution IDs................. 8-15 Controller status....................................................... 1-3, 7-45
Auto Connection Project....................................................6-9 Controller Status Pane.................................................... 3-40
Automation Software......................................................... 1-5 CPU Rack and Expansion Rack Configuration of NJ-series
Axes Group Basic Settings..............................................5-87 Controllers..................................................................7-140
Axes Group Operation Settings.......................................5-87 creating a project........................................................3-3, 3-6
Axes Group Variables...............................................4-3, 4-30 creating Axes Group Variables........................................ 4-30
Axis Basic Settings.......................................................... 5-79 creating Axis Variables.................................................... 4-27
Axis Setting Table............................................................ 5-82 creating cam data variables.............................................4-32
Axis Status Monitor..........................................................7-50 creating data types.......................................................... 4-69
Axis Variables........................................................... 4-3, 4-27 creating function block instance variables....................... 4-35
creating global variables....................................................4-4
B creating local variables.................................................... 4-22
Cross Reference Tab Page............................................. 3-41
backing up variables and memory...................................8-46 cross references.............................................................. 7-36
backup............................................................................. 8-47 CX-ConfiguratorFDT..........................................................2-3
backup parameter settings.............................................. 5-12 CX-Designer............................................ 1-5, 2-3, 10-2, 10-3
Base Type attribute..........................................................4-77 CX-Integrator.....................................................1-5, 2-3, 10-2
Basic Settings View......................................................... 5-63 CX-One...................................................................... 2-2, 2-3
bookmarks..........................................................4-135, 4-151 CX-Protocol.......................................................1-5, 2-3, 10-2
breakpoints...................................................................... 7-92 CX-Server...................................................................1-5, 2-3
Build Tab Page................................................................ 3-42
building.......................................................................... 4-165 D
Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Settings.................................... 5-69
data protection.................................................................8-19
C data tracing...........................................................7-52, 7-100
Data Type attribute.......................................................... 4-38
calibrate for execution time estimates............................. 7-87 data type attributes.......................................................... 4-77
cam data..........................................................................5-89 data types........................................................................ 3-41
cam data variables................................................... 4-3, 4-32 debug programs.............................................................. 7-83
changing present values................................. 1-3, 7-24, 7-27 debugging........................................................................3-71
changing programming......................................................1-3 designing tasks...........................................................3-4, 3-7
checking I/O assignments............................................. 7-147 designing the user program........................................3-3, 3-7
checking I/O wiring........................................................ 7-146 device variables...............................................4-3, 4-11, 7-27
CJ1W-DRM21..................................................................10-2 diagnostic and statistical information...............................8-64
CJ1W-EIP21.................................................................... 10-2 Differential Monitor...........................................................7-21
CJ1W-SCU22.................................................................. 10-2 direct connection via Ethernet........................................... 6-3
CJ1W-SCU32.................................................................. 10-2 direct connection via USB................................................. 6-3
CJ1W-SCU42.................................................................. 10-2 direct Ethernet connection...............................................2-10
clearing memory.............................................................. 8-31 Direct Ethernet Utility........................................................ A-7
clock information................................................................8-7 DirectX...............................................................................2-3
comment........................................................................4-150
Comment attribute..................................................4-45, 4-78

I-2 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Index

disconnecting a slave from and reconnecting a slave to the inserting a program input in an OR structure...................4-93
network........................................................................ 8-61 inserting program outputs in an OR structure..................4-98
download....................................................................... 7-120 inserting program outputs in series in an AND structure. 4-96
DVD media...................................................................... 1-10 installation..................................................1-8, 2-2, 5-17, A-3
Instruction Reference...................................................... A-17
E
J
Edge attribute.................................................................. 4-44
Edit Menu........................................................................ 3-51 jump labels.................................................................... 4-132
Edit Pane......................................................................... 3-35 jumps............................................................................. 4-133
Edit Properties................................................................. 3-15
Element Comment..............................................4-135, 8-126 K
entering variables.......................................................... 4-103
Enum Value attribute....................................................... 4-78 Keyboard Mapping Reference........................................ A-18
enumerations...................................................................4-73
ESI files........................................................................... 5-17 L
estimating task execution times.......................................7-86
EtherCAT................................................................ 5-4, 7-132 ladder diagram and structured text....................................1-3
Ethernet connection via a hub........................................... 6-3 Ladder Editor..................................................................... 7-4
Ethernet interface card...............................................6-7, A-7 last modified.................................................................... 3-19
libraries.............................................................................. 9-8
Event Setting Table........................................................8-101
creating a Library........................................................... 9-8
I
exporting.............................................. 3-20, 5-15, 5-58, 7-64
using a Library..............................................................9-11
F license activation............................................................... 1-8
license certificate............................................................. 1-10
File Menu.........................................................................3-51 license number......................................................... 1-10, 2-5
Filter Pane....................................................................... 3-34 licenses............................................................. 1-4, 1-10, 2-5
FINS Settings.................................................................. 5-66 Limit Settings................................................................... 5-80
forced refreshing............................................. 6-7, 7-24, 7-30 Link Settings.................................................................... 5-69
FTP Settings....................................................................5-69 local variables...........................................................4-3, 4-22
function block instance variables..............................4-3, 4-35
function blocks........................................................................ M
.................1-2, 1-3, 3-41, 4-60, 4-106, 4-141, 4-144, 4-145
functions................. 1-2, 1-3, 3-41, 4-62, 4-141, 4-144, 4-145 maintenance.................................................................... 3-75
Map Settings....................................................................5-10
G members..........................................................................4-74
memory addresses............................................................ 1-2
G5 Series.........................................................................5-37 monitoring information..................................................... 3-74
global variables.......................................................... 4-3, 4-4 Motion Control Setup.......................................................5-78
Multiview Explorer........................................................... 3-32
H MX2 Series...................................................................... 5-37

Help Menu....................................................................... 3-56 N

Homing Settings.............................................................. 5-80
NA-series.........................................................................3-87
I Name attribute........................................................4-37, 4-77
namespaces.................................................................... 4-79
I/O Map..........................................................7-4, 7-19, 7-116 .NET Framework........................................................ 1-9, 2-3
I/O ports...........................................................................3-41 network card.................................................................... 2-10
I/O wiring check...............................................................A-56 Network Configurator........................................ 1-5, 2-3, 10-2
IEC 61131-3.......................................................................1-3 Network Publish attribute.................................................4-44
IEC 61131-3 programming.................................................3-3 New Project Button.......................................................... 3-11
illegal usage of software.................................................... 1-8 NS Series........................................................................ 10-3
importing.............................................. 3-21, 5-16, 5-58, 7-64 NTP Settings................................................................... 5-69
In/Out attribute.................................................................4-44
indenting........................................................................ 4-150 O
Initial Value attribute........................................................ 4-40
inline ST.........................................................................4-120 offline comparison..........................................................4-167
Insert Menu......................................................................3-52 offline program debugging..........................................3-4, 3-7
inserting a program input in an AND structure................ 4-91 online connection...............................................................6-2

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) I-3

Index

online help..............................................................3-77, A-17 security measures........................................................... 3-76

online program debugging..........................................3-5, 3-8 Security Settings................................................................8-8
Open Project Button............................................... 3-11, 3-18 serial IDs............................................................................6-6
operating modes..............................................................7-45 Servo Drive Settings........................................................5-80
operation authority verification...........................................8-8 Set................................................................................... 7-24
Operation Settings..................................................5-63, 5-80 setting axes groups......................................................... 5-86
Other Operation Settings.................................................5-80 setting EtherCAT Drives.................................................. 5-37
Output Tab Page..............................................................3-41 setting master parameters.................................................5-8
setting parameter settings................................................5-11
P setting parameters..................................................3-60, 5-39
setting slave parameters................................................... 5-9
packet monitoring............................................................ 8-63 shortcut keys................................................................... A-19
parameters..........................................................4-110, 4-115 SIM_SetActPos............................................................... A-44
PDO.................................................................................5-10 SIM_SetActTrq................................................................ A-48
PDO Map Settings...........................................................5-10 SIM_SetActVel................................................................ A-46
Position Count Settings................................................... 5-80 SIM_SetDrvAlm...............................................................A-40
POUs............................................................................. 4-141 SIM_SetDrvWarn............................................................ A-41
POUs (program organization units)..........................1-2, 4-57 SIM_SetVelocity.............................................................. A-43
POUs(function blocks).....................................................4-85 SIM_SigEmergStop.........................................................A-37
POUs(functions).............................................................. 4-85 SIM_SigExtLatch.............................................................A-38
POUs(programs)............................................................. 4-85 SIM_SigNegLmt.............................................................. A-34
preparations for online debugging..............................3-5, 3-8 SIM_SigPosLmt.............................................................. A-32
printing....................................................................7-66, 8-25 Simulate Drive Alarm instruction..................................... A-40
program assignments.....................................................5-111 Simulate Drive Warning instruction................................. A-41
program checks............................................................. 4-162 Simulate External Latch Input Signal instruction.............A-38
programming.......................................................... 3-66, 4-85 Simulate Home Proximity Signal instruction................... A-36
programming ladder diagram.......................................... 4-85 Simulate Immediate Stop Input Signal instruction...........A-37
programming structured text..........................................4-140 Simulate Negative Limit Input Signal instruction............. A-33
programs.................................................................... 1-2, 1-3 Simulate Positive Limit Input Signal instruction..... A-23, A-32
project management........................................................3-70 simulation............................................................... 3-73, 7-80
Project Menu................................................................... 3-53 simulation instructions.....................................................A-32
project name....................................................................3-19 Simulation Menu..............................................................3-55
Simulation Pane.............................................................. 3-41
R simulation programs........................................................ 7-82
simulation speed..............................................................7-92
R88D-KN□-ECT...............................................................5-37 simulations.........................................................................1-3
re-installation..................................................................... 1-8 Simulator....................................................................6-2, A-9
rebuilding....................................................................... 4-165 Simulator connection......................................................... 6-2
registering function blocks............................................... 4-60 slaves.............................................................................. 8-61
registering functions........................................................ 4-62 SNMP Settings................................................................ 5-70
registering POUs............................................................. 4-57 SNMP Trap Settings........................................................ 5-70
registering programs........................................................4-57 special instructions.......................................................... 7-85
registering slaves....................................................... 5-4, 5-6 ST Editor......................................................... 4-141, 7-4, 7-6
releasing access rights.................................................... 8-35 step execution................................................................. 7-94
remote connection via USB............................................... 6-3 structure data types......................................................... 4-69
Reset............................................................................... 7-24 synchronizing.................................................................7-120
restoring data...................................................................8-49 system requirements......................................................... 1-8
Retain attribute................................................................ 4-43 system-defined variables........................................4-36, 7-27
reusing device and program assets...................................9-4
rung errors..................................................................... 4-138 T
S Task Execution Status Monitor........................................ 7-49
Task Execution Time Monitor...........................................7-49
Save As........................................................................... 3-17 Task I/O Settings............................................................5-110
SD Memory Card...............................................................8-3 Task Settings................................................................. 5-109
SD Memory Card backup................................................ 8-45 TCP/IP Settings............................................................... 5-69
Search and Replace Pane...............................................3-40 testing operation..............................................3-5, 3-8, 7-142
Search and Replace Results Tab Page...........................3-42 Toolbox............................................................................ 3-40
searching and replacing................................................ 4-155 Tools Menu...................................................................... 3-55
sections........................................................................... 4-86

I-4 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

 Index

troubleshooting.........................................................1-3, 8-90

U
unions.............................................................................. 4-71
Unit Conversion Settings................................................. 5-79
unit production information.............................................. 8-37
upload............................................................................7-120
USB device driver.....................................................2-7, 2-10
USB driver.........................................................................A-3
USB port............................................................................A-3
User Memory Usage Monitor...........................................8-23
user program execution ID................................................ 8-8
user-defined errors..........................................1-3, 8-90, 8-99
user-defined event log..........................................8-90, 8-100

V
Variable Manager.............................................................4-48
variable registration........................................................... 4-3
variables..... 3-41, 4-3, 4-36, 4-110, 4-115, 7-27, 7-115, 7-117 I
version of the CX-One....................................................... 2-2
View Menu....................................................................... 3-51

W
Watch Tab Page................................................ 3-42, 7-4, 7-8
Windows 10 (32-bit or 64-bit edition)..........................1-8, 2-2
Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit edition)............................1-8, 2-2
Windows 8 (32-bit or 64-bit edition)............................1-8, 2-2
Windows 8.1 (32-bit or 64-bit edition).........................1-8, 2-2
write protection of the CPU Unit............................... 8-8, 8-17

Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504) I-5

Index

I-6 Sysmac Studio Version 1 Operation Manual (W504)

OMRON Corporation Industrial Automation Company Authorized Distributor:
Kyoto, JAPAN
Contact: www.ia.omron.com
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V. OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
Wegalaan 67-69, 2132 JD Hoofddorp 2895 Greenspoint Parkway, Suite 200
The Netherlands Hoffman Estates, IL 60169 U.S.A.
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388 Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787

OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD. © OMRON Corporation 2011-2021 All Rights Reserved.
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower, In the interest of product improvement,
No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2),
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Alexandra Technopark,
Singapore 119967 PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711 Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200 Cat. No. W504-E1-39 1021